Compaq Fortran User Manual
Anuncio
Anuncio
Compaq Fortran
User Manual for
Tru64 UNIX and
Linux Alpha Systems
Order Number: AA–Q66TE–TE
January 2002
This manual provides information about the Compaq Fortran program development and run-time environment on Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux
Alpha systems.
Revision/Update Information: This manual supersedes the previous version of this manual, order number
AA–Q66TD–TE.
Software Version: Compaq Fortran for Tru64 UNIX Systems:
Version 5.5 or higher
Compaq Fortran for Linux Alpha Systems:
Version 1.2 or higher
Compaq Computer Corporation
Houston, Texas
First Printing, June 1994
Revision, January 2002
© 2002 Compaq Information Technologies Group, L.P.
Compaq and the Compaq logo, OpenVMS, Tru64, and VAX are trademarks of Compaq
Information Technologies Group, L.P. in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, and Windows NT are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.
and/or other countries.
UNIX is a trademark of The Open Group in the U.S. and/or other countries.
All other product names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective companies.
Cover graphic, photographs: Copyright © 1997 PhotoDisc, Inc.
Cover graphic, image: CERN, European Laboratory for Particle Physics: ALICE detector on
CERN’s future accelerator, the LHC, Large Hadron Collider.
Confidential computer software. Valid license from Compaq required for possession, use or copying. Consistent with FAR 12.211 and 12.212, Commercial Computer Software, Computer
Software Documentation, and Technical Data for Commercial Items are licensed to the U.S.
Government under vendor’s standard commercial license.
Compaq shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. The information is provided ‘‘as is’’ without warranty of any kind and is subject to change without notice. The warranties for Compaq products are set forth in the express limited warranty statements accompanying such products. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty.
ZK6325
This document is available on CD–ROM.
This document was prepared using DECdocument, Version 3.3-1n.
Contents
Preface
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 Getting Started
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.4.4
1.4.5
1.5
1.6
Compaq Fortran Programming Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands to Create and Run an Executable Program . . . . . . . .
Creating and Running a Program Using a Module and Separate
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Commands to Create the Executable Program . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugging the Sample Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
f90 or fort Command and Related Software Components . . . . . . .
f90 or fort Driver Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cpp, fpp, and Other Preprocessors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Compilers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linker (ld) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Development Stages and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran and Standards It Conforms To . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.3.1
2.1.3.2
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.5.1
2.1.5.2
2.1.6
f90 Command: Files and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Suffixes and Source Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Format of the f90 and fort Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Using Module Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Module Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Module Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INCLUDE Statement and Using Include Files . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Files: Executable, Object, and Temporary . . . . . . . . .
Naming Output Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Temporary Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Multiple Input Files: Effect on Output Files . . . . . . . .
xxv
1–1
1–5
1–6
1–7
1–8
1–9
1–9
1–10
1–10
1–11
1–12
1–12
1–12
1–15
2–2
2–2
2–4
2–5
2–5
2–5
2–6
2–8
2–8
2–9
2–9 iii
2.5.3
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
2.6.3
2.6.4
2.6.5
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.4
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.1.7.4
2.1.7.5
2.1.7.6
2.1.8
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.1.7
2.1.7.1
2.1.7.2
2.1.7.3
Examples of the f90 and fort Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiling and Linking Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Retaining an Object File and Preventing Linking . . . . . .
Compiling Fortran 95/90 and C Source Files and Linking an Object File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Renaming the Output File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying an Additional Linker Library . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requesting Additional Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Listing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver Programs and Passing Options to cc and ld . . . . . . . . . . .
make Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options Passed to the cc Driver or ld Linker . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiler Limits, Diagnostic Messages, and Error Conditions . . .
Compiler Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiler Diagnostic Messages and Error Conditions . . . . . . .
Linker Diagnostic Messages and Error Conditions . . . . . . . .
Compilation Control: Statements and Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Linking Object Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Additional Object Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Types of Object Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Shared Object Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating Shared Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating a Shared Library with a Single f90 Command . . . .
Creating a Shared Library with f90 and ld Commands . . . . .
Choosing How to Create a Shared Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shared Library Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Installing Shared Libraries
(TU*X only)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
Overview of Command-Line Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
f90 and fort Command Categories and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-align keyword — Data Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-annotations keyword — Place Optimization Information in
Source Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-arch keyword — Specify Type of Code Instructions Generated
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-assume buffered_io — Buffered Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-assume byterecl — Units for Unformatted File Record
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-assume cc_omp — Enable Conditional Compilation for OpenMP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-assume dummy_aliases — Dummy Variable Aliasing . . . . . . . . .
iv
2–10
2–10
2–11
2–17
2–17
2–18
2–19
2–20
2–21
2–22
2–24
2–11
2–11
2–12
2–12
2–12
2–13
2–16
2–16
2–25
2–25
2–26
2–26
2–27
2–27
2–28
3–1
3–2
3–6
3–9
3–10
3–12
3–12
3–13
3–13
3.10
-assume gfullpath — Source File Path for Debugging . . . . . . . . .
3.11
-assume minus0 — Standard Semantics for Minus Zero . . . . . . .
3.12
-assume noaccuracy_sensitive, -fp_reorder — Reorder
Floating-Point Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.13
-assume noprotect_constants — Remove Protection from
Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.14
-assume nosource_include — INCLUDE file search . . . . . . . . . . .
3.15
-assume nounderscore — Underscore on External Names . . . . . .
3.16
-assume no2underscores — Two Underscores on External
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.17
-assume pthreads_lock — Thread Lock Selection for Parallel
Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.18
-automatic, -static — Local Variable Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.19
-c — Inhibit Linking and Retain Object File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.20
-call_shared, -non_shared, -shared — Shared Library Use . . . . . .
3.21
-ccdefault keyword — Carriage Control for Terminals . . . . . . . . .
3.22
-check arg_temp_created — Check for Copy of Temporary
Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.23
-check bounds, -C, -check_bounds — Boundary Run-Time
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.24
-check format — Format Mismatches at Run Time . . . . . . . . . . .
3.25
-check nopower — Allow Special Floating-Point Expressions . . .
3.26
-check omp_bindings — OpenMP Fortran API Binding Rules
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.27
-check output_conversion — Truncated Format Mismatches at
Run Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.28
-check overflow — Integer Overflow Run-Time Checking . . . . . .
3.29
-check underflow — Floating-Point Underflow Run-Time
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.30
-convert keyword — Unformatted Numeric Data Conversion . . . .
3.31
-cpp and Related Options — Run C Preprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.31.1
-M — Request cpp Dependency Lists for make . . . . . . . . . . .
3.31.2
3.31.3
-P — Retain cpp Intermediate Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-Wp,-xxx — Pass Specified Option to cpp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.32
-Dname, -Dname=def, -Dname="string" — Define Symbol
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.33
-d_lines — Debugging Statement Indicator, Column 1 . . . . . . . . .
3.34
-double_size 128, -double_size 64 — Double Precision Data Size
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.35
-error_limit num, -noerror_limit — Limit Error Messages . . . . . .
3.36
-extend_source — Line Length for Fixed-Format Source . . . . . . .
3.37
-f66, -66, -nof77, -onetrip, -1 — Use FORTRAN 66 Semantics . . .
3.38
-f77, -nof66 — Use FORTRAN 77 Semantics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–20
3–21
3–21
3–22
3–22
3–24
3–25
3–25
3–26
3–26
3–27
3–27
3–27
3–28
3–28
3–29
3–14
3–14
3–14
3–15
3–15
3–15
3–16
3–16
3–17
3–17
3–17
3–18
3–19
3–19
3–19
3–20 v
vi
3.39
-f77rtl — Use Fortran 77 Run-Time Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.40
-fast — Set Options to Improve Run-Time Performance . . . . . . .
3.41
-feedback file, -gen_feedback, -cord — Create and Use Feedback
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.42
-fixed, -free — Fortran Source Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.43
-fpconstant — Handling of Floating-Point Constants . . . . . . . . .
3.44
-fpen — Control Arithmetic Exception Handling and
Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.44.1
Hints on Using These Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.45
-fpp — Run Fortran Preprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.46
-fprm keyword — Control Floating-Point Rounding Mode . . . . . .
3.47
-fuse_xref — Cross-Reference Information for Compaq FUSE . . .
3.48
-g0, -g1, -g2 or -g, -g3, -ladebug — Traceback and Symbol Table
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.49
-granularity keyword — Control Shared Memory Access to
Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.50
-hpf, -hpf num, and Related Options — Compile HPF Programs for Parallel Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.50.1
-assume bigarrays — Run-time Checking for Distributed
Small Array Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.50.2
3.50.3
-assume nozsize — Omit Zero-Sized Array Checking . . . . . . .
-nearest_neighbor, -nearest_neighbor num, or
-nonearest_neighbor — Nearest Neighbor Optimization . . . .
-show hpf — Show HPF Parallelization Information . . . . . . .
3.50.4
3.50.5
-hpf_target — Message Passing Protocol for Parallel
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.51
-I — Remove Directory from Include Search Path . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.52
-Idir — Add Directory for Module and Include File Search . . . . .
3.53
-i2, -i4, -i8, -integer_size num — Integer and Logical Data
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.54
-inline keyword, -noinline — Control Procedure Inlining . . . . . . .
3.55
-intconstant — Handling of Integer Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.56
-K — Keep Temporary Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.57
-L — Remove ld Directory Search Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.58
-Ldir — Add Directory to ld Search Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.59
-lstring — Add Library Name to ld Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.60
-machine_code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.61
-math_library keyword — Fast or Accurate Math Library
Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.62
-mixed_str_len_arg — Specify Length of Character Arguments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.63
-module directory — Specify Directory for Creating Modules
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–47
3–48
3–49
3–50
3–50
3–50
3–51
3–51
3–52
3–53
3–53
3–42
3–43
3–44
3–44
3–45
3–46
3–47
3–47
3–29
3–29
3–30
3–31
3–32
3–33
3–35
3–38
3–38
3–39
3–40
3–41
3.64
-mp — Enable Parallel Processing Using Directed
Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.65
-names keyword — Case Control of Source and External
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.66
-noaltparam — Alternative PARAMETER Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.67
-nofor_main — Allow Non-Fortran Main Program . . . . . . . . . . .
3.68
-nohpf_main, -nowsf_main — Compile HPF Global Routine for
Nonparallel Main Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.69
-noinclude — Omit Standard Directory Search for INCLUDE
Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.70
-norun — Do Not Run the Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.71
-o output — Name Output File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.72
-O0, -O1, -O2, -O3, -O4 or -O, -O5 — Specify Optimization
Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.73
-om — Request Nonshared Object Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.74
-omp — Enable OpenMP Parallel Processing Using Directed
Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.75
-pad_source — Pad Short Source Records with Spaces . . . . . . . .
3.76
-pipeline — Activate Software Pipelining Optimization . . . . . . . .
3.77
-p0, -p1 or -p, and -pg — Profiling Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.78
-real_size number, -r8, -r16 — Floating-Point Data Size . . . . . . .
3.79
-recursive — Request Recursive Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.80
-reentrancy keyword — Control Use of Threaded Run-Time
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.81
-S — Create Assembler File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.82
-show keyword, -machine_code — Control Listing File
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.83
-source_listing — Create a Source Listing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.84
-speculate keyword — Speculative Execution Optimization . . . . .
3.85
-std, -std90, -std95 — Perform Fortran Standards Checking . . . .
3.86
-synchronous_exceptions — Report Exceptions More Precisely
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.87
-syntax_only — Do Not Create Object File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.88
-threads, -pthread — Link Using Threaded Run-Time
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.89
-transform_loops — Activate Loop Transformation
Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.90
-tune keyword — Specify Alpha Processor Implementation . . . . .
3.91
-U — Activates Case Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.92
-Uname — Undefine Preprocessor Symbol Name . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.93
-u . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.94
-unroll num — Specify Number for Loop Unroll Optimization . . .
3.95
-V — Create Listing File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3–69
3–69
3–70
3–70
3–70
3–72
3–72
3–72
3–72
3–73
3–59
3–59
3–60
3–60
3–61
3–62
3–63
3–64
3–64
3–65
3–65
3–66
3–54
3–54
3–55
3–55
3–55
3–56
3–56
3–56
3–56
3–58 vii
3.96
-v — Verbose Command Processing Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.97
-version, -what — Show Compaq Fortran Version Information . .
3.98
-vms — OpenVMS Fortran Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.99
-Wl,-xxx — Pass Specified Option to ld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.100
-warn keyword, -u, -nowarn, -w, -w1 — Warning Messages and
Compiler Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.101
-warning_severity keyword — Elevate Severity of Warning
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.102
-what . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.103
-wsf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4 Using the Ladebug Debugger
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
Overview of Ladebug and dbx Debuggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Options for Debugging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Running the Debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating the Executable Program and Running the
4.3.1.1
4.3.1.2
4.3.2
4.3.3
Debugger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking Ladebug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Invoking dbx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugger Commands and Breakpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ladebug Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4
4.5
Sample Program and Debugging Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Debugger Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
Displaying Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Module Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.5.1
4.6.5.2
4.6.6
4.6.6.1
4.6.6.2
4.6.7
4.6.8
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.8
4.9
Compaq Fortran Common Block Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Derived-Type Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Record Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Pointer Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fortran 95/90 Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRAY-Style Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Array Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Array Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assignment to Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Complex Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Expressions in Debugger Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fortran Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugging Mixed-Language Programs with Ladebug . . . . . . . . .
Debugging a Program that Generates an Exception . . . . . . . . . .
4.10
Locating Unaligned Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii
4–1
4–2
4–3
4–17
4–18
4–18
4–18
4–19
4–20
4–21
4–21
4–3
4–4
4–4
4–5
4–6
4–6
4–12
4–16
4–16
4–16
4–21
4–22
4–23
4–23
4–24
4–24
4–25
4–26
3–74
3–74
3–74
3–76
3–77
3–79
3–80
3–80
4.10.1
4.10.2
Locating Unaligned Data With Ladebug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Locating Unaligned Data With dbx . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.11
Using Alternate Entry Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.12
Debugging Optimized Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
5.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.3
5.3.4
5.3.5
5.3.6
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.4
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
5.6.6
5.6.7
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.3.1
5.4.3.2
5.4.3.3
Efficient Compilation and the Software Environment . . . . . . . . .
Install the Latest Version of Compaq Fortran and
Performance Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compile Using Multiple Source Files and Appropriate f90
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Process Shell Environment and Related Influences on
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the time Command to Measure Performance . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Profiling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Program Counter Sampling (prof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Graph Sampling (gprof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic Block Counting (pixie and prof) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Source Line CPU Cycle Use (prof and pixie) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Creating and Using Feedback Files and Optionally cord . . . .
Atom Toolkit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Alignment Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Causes of Unaligned Data and Ensuring Natural
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking for Inefficient Unaligned Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ordering Data Declarations to Avoid Unaligned Data . . . . . .
Arranging Data Items in Common Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arranging Data Items in Derived-Type Data . . . . . . . . . .
Arranging Data Items in Compaq Fortran Record
Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options Controlling Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Arrays Efficiently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessing Arrays Efficiently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing Array Arguments Efficiently . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improving Overall I/O Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Unformatted Files Instead of Formatted Files . . . . . . . .
Write Whole Arrays or Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Write Array Data in the Natural Storage Order . . . . . . . . . .
Use Memory for Intermediate Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enable Implied-DO Loop Collapsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use of Variable Format Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Efficient Use of Record Buffers and Disk I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4–26
4–27
4–28
4–28
5–11
5–12
5–14
5–15
5–16
5–17
5–18
5–19
5–20
5–21
5–21
5–24
5–25
5–25
5–27
5–28
5–29
5–31
5–31
5–34
5–36
5–37
5–37
5–38
5–38
5–38
5–39
5–39
5–2
5–2
5–4 ix
x
5.8.2.3
5.8.2.4
5.8.2.5
5.8.2.6
5.8.2.7
5.8.3
5.8.4
5.8.4.1
5.8.4.2
5.8.5
5.8.5.1
5.8.5.2
5.8.6
5.8.7
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
5.9.4
5.6.8
5.6.9
5.6.10
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.2
5.8.2.1
5.8.2.2
5.9.5
5.9.6
5.9.7
5.9.8
Specify RECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use the Optimal Record Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reading from a Redirected Standard Input File . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Source Code Guidelines for Run-Time Efficiency . . . .
Avoid Small Integer and Small Logical Data Items . . . . . . . .
Avoid Mixed Data Type Arithmetic Expressions . . . . . . . . . .
Use Efficient Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoid Using Slow Arithmetic Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Avoid Using EQUIVALENCE Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Use Statement Functions and Internal Subprograms . . . . . .
Code DO Loops for Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimization Levels: the -On Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Optimizations Performed at All Optimization Levels . . . . . . .
Local (Minimal) Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Subexpression Elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integer Multiplication and Division Expansion . . . . . . . .
Compile-Time Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Value Propagation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dead Store Elimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mixed Real/Complex Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Global Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Additional Global Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Unrolling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Replication to Eliminate Branches . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Inlining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interprocedure Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inlining Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Software Pipelining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Options Related to Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Multiple Options with the -fast Option . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling the Number of Times a Loop Is Unrolled . . . . . .
Controlling the Inlining of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requesting Optimized Code for a Specific Processor
Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requesting the Speculative Execution Optimization . . . . . . .
Request Nonshared Object Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Arithmetic Reordering Optimizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dummy Aliasing Assumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5–58
5–58
5–60
5–61
5–61
5–61
5–62
5–49
5–50
5–51
5–51
5–53
5–53
5–55
5–55
5–56
5–57
5–57
5–45
5–45
5–45
5–45
5–47
5–48
5–49
5–49
5–41
5–41
5–42
5–42
5–43
5–43
5–44
5–44
5–62
5–63
5–63
5–64
5–65
6 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming
Environment
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.1.1
6.1.1.2
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.1.7
6.1.7.1
6.1.7.2
6.1.7.3
6.1.8
6.1.8.1
6.1.8.2
6.1.9
6.1.9.1
6.1.9.2
6.1.9.3
6.1.9.4
6.1.9.5
6.1.9.6
6.1.10
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.1.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command-Line Option and Directives Format . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directive Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directive Prefixes for Conditional Compilation . . . . . . . .
Summary Descriptions of OpenMP Fortran API Compiler
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Processing Thread Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privatizing Named Common Blocks: THREADPRIVATE
Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Data Scope Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Region: PARALLEL and END PARALLEL
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Worksharing Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DO and END DO directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SECTIONS, SECTION, and END SECTIONS
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINGLE and END SINGLE Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Parallel/Worksharing Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARALLEL DO and END PARALLEL DO Directives . . .
PARALLEL SECTIONS and END PARALLEL
SECTIONS Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATOMIC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BARRIER Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRITICAL and END CRITICAL Directives . . . . . . . . . . .
FLUSH Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASTER and END MASTER Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ORDERED and END ORDERED Directives . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying Schedule Type and Chunk Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command-Line Option and Directives Format . . . . . . . . . . . .
Directive Prefixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary Descriptions of Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Processing Thread Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Privatizing Named Common Blocks: TASKCOMMON or
INSTANCE Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Data Scope Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parallel Region: PARALLEL and END PARALLEL
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–17
6–19
6–19
6–20
6–21
6–22
6–22
6–22
6–23
6–23
6–24
6–25
6–26
6–26
6–27
6–27
6–29
6–29
6–30
6–31
6–34
6–35
6–36
6–38
6–2
6–2
6–3
6–4
6–5
6–9
6–10
6–11 xi
xii
6.2.7
6.2.7.1
6.2.7.2
6.2.7.3
6.2.8
6.2.8.1
6.2.8.2
6.2.9
6.2.9.1
6.2.9.2
6.2.10
6.2.11
6.2.12
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.2.1
6.3.2.2
6.3.2.3
6.3.2.4
6.3.2.5
6.3.2.6
6.3.2.7
6.3.3
6.3.4
6.3.4.1
6.3.4.2
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
Worksharing Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PDO and END PDO Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PSECTIONS, SECTION, and END PSECTIONS
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SINGLE PROCESS and END SINGLE PROCESS
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Combined Parallel/Worksharing Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARALLEL DO and END PARALLEL DO Directives . . .
PARALLEL SECTIONS and END PARALLEL
SECTIONS Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization Constructs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BARRIER Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CRITICAL SECTION and END CRITICAL SECTION
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a Default Chunk Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying a Default Schedule Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Terminating Loop Execution Early: PDONE Directive . . . . .
Decomposing Loops for Parallel Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steps in Using Directed Decomposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving Dependences Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving Dependences Involving Temporary
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Resolving Loop-Carried Dependences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Loop Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restructuring a Loop into an Inner and Outer Nest . . . .
Dependences Requiring Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interchanging Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Balancing the Workload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment Variables for Adjusting the Run-Time
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calls to Programs Written in Other Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiling, Linking, and Running Parallelized Programs on SMP
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugging Parallelized Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugger Limitations for Parallelized Programs . . . . . . . . . .
Debugging Parallel Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Debugging Shared Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6–47
6–48
6–48
6–49
6–50
6–51
6–52
6–53
6–54
6–54
6–55
6–42
6–42
6–43
6–44
6–45
6–45
6–47
6–56
6–58
6–59
6–59
6–60
6–60
6–63
6–38
6–39
6–40
6–40
6–40
6–41
6–41
6–41
6–42
7 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
7.4.3.1
7.4.3.2
7.4.3.3
7.4.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4
7.5.5
7.5.6
7.5.7
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.7
7.8
7.8.1
7.8.2
7.8.2.1
7.8.2.2
7.8.2.3
7.8.2.4
7.8.3
7.8.4
7.8.5
7.8.5.1
7.8.5.2
7.9
Logical I/O Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of I/O Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forms of I/O Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Types of Files and File Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Internal Files and Scratch Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record Types, Record Overhead, and Maximum Record
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Portability Considerations of Record Types . . . . . . . . . . .
Record Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maximum Record Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other File Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening Files: OPEN Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Preconnected Standard I/O Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OPEN Statement Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Methods to Specify the Unit, File Name, and Directory . . . . .
Accessing Files: Implied and Explicit File and
Pathnames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Compaq Fortran Applies a Default Pathname and File
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coding File Locations in an OPEN Statement . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Obtaining File Information: INQUIRE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inquiry by Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inquiry by File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inquiry by Output Item List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Closing a File: CLOSE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record I/O Statement Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record Access Modes and File Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sequential Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Direct Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limitations of Record Access by File Organization and
Record Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Sharing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Specifying the Initial Record Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Advancing and Nonadvancing Record I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Record Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Input Record Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Record Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
User-Supplied OPEN Procedures: USEROPEN Specifier . . . . . .
7–9
7–11
7–12
7–12
7–13
7–13
7–14
7–15
7–18
7–18
7–2
7–3
7–5
7–6
7–7
7–8
7–19
7–22
7–23
7–25
7–25
7–26
7–27
7–27
7–28
7–29
7–30
7–30
7–30
7–31
7–31
7–32
7–33
7–34
7–34
7–35
7–36 xiii
7.9.1
7.9.2
Restrictions of Called USEROPEN Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example USEROPEN Program and Function . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10
Format of Compaq Fortran Record Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.1
Fixed-Length Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.2
7.10.3
7.10.4
7.10.5
Variable-Length Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Segmented Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stream File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stream_CR and Stream_LF Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8 Run-Time Errors and Signals
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.3
8.4
Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library Default Error Processing . . .
Run-Time Message Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Catalog Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Values Returned to the Shell at Program Termination . . . . .
Forcing a Core Dump for Severe Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Run-Time Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the END, EOR, and ERR Branch Specifiers . . . . . . . .
Using the IOSTAT Specifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the 3f Library Routines to Return Operating System
Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signal Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run-Time Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9 Data Types and Representation
9.1
9.2
9.2.1
9.2.2
9.2.3
9.2.4
9.2.5
9.3
9.4
9.4.1
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.4.5
9.4.6
Summary of Data Types and Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integer Data Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Integer Declarations and f90/fort Compiler Options . . . . . . . .
INTEGER (KIND=1) or INTEGER*1 Representation . . . . . .
INTEGER (KIND=2) or INTEGER*2 Representation . . . . . .
INTEGER (KIND=4) or INTEGER*4 Representation . . . . . .
INTEGER (KIND=8) or INTEGER*8 Representation . . . . . .
Logical Data Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Native IEEE Floating-Point Representations and Exceptional
Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAL and COMPLEX Declarations and f90/fort Compiler
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAL (KIND=16) or REAL*16 Representation . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 Representation . . . . .
COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 Representation . . . .
xiv
7–38
7–38
7–42
7–42
7–43
7–45
7–47
7–47
8–1
8–3
8–5
8–6
8–6
8–7
8–7
8–9
8–10
8–11
8–12
9–8
9–9
9–10
9–10
9–11
9–12
9–12
9–2
9–4
9–4
9–5
9–5
9–6
9–6
9–7
9.4.7
9.4.8
9.5
9.6
COMPLEX (KIND=16) or COMPLEX*32 Representation . . .
Exceptional Floating-Point Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Character Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hollerith Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10 Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
10.1
Endian Order of Numeric Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2
Little Endian Floating-Point Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3
Native and Supported Nonnative Numeric Formats . . . . . . . . . .
10.4
Limitations of Numeric Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.5
Methods of Specifying the Unformatted Numeric Format . . . . . .
10.5.1
10.5.2
Environment Variable FORT_CONVERTn Method . . . . . . . .
Environment Variable FORT_CONVERT.ext Method . . . . . . .
10.5.3
10.5.4
OPEN Statement CONVERT=’keyword’ Method . . . . . . . . . .
OPTIONS Statement /CONVERT=keyword Method . . . . . . . .
10.5.5
Command-Line -convert keyword Option Method . . . . . . . . . .
10.6
Additional Information on Nonnative Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language
Programming
11.1
Compaq Fortran Procedures and Argument Passing . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.1
Explicit and Implicit Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.2
Types of Compaq Fortran Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.3
11.1.4
Using Procedure Interface Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing Arguments and Function Return Values . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.5
11.1.6
Passing Arrays as Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing Pointers as Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.1.7
11.1.8
11.1.8.1
11.1.8.2
Compaq Fortran Array Descriptor Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Argument-Passing Mechanisms and Built-In Functions . . . .
Passing Addresses — %LOC Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing Arguments by Immediate Value — %VAL
11.1.8.3
11.1.8.4
11.2.1
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passing Arguments by Reference — %REF Function . . . .
Examples of Argument Passing Built-in Functions . . . . .
11.2
Using the cDEC$ ALIAS and cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES
Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
cDEC$ ALIAS directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9–13
9–14
9–18
9–19
10–1
10–2
10–3
10–7
10–8
10–9
10–10
10–11
10–12
10–13
10–13
11–1
11–3
11–3
11–4
11–5
11–8
11–9
11–10
11–12
11–13
11–13
11–14
11–14
11–14
11–15 xv
11.2.2
11.2.2.1
11.2.2.2
11.2.2.3
cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIAS Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REFERENCE and VALUE Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2.2.4
EXTERN and VARYING Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3
Calling Between Compaq Fortran and C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.1
Compiling and Linking Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.2
Procedures and External Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.3
Invoking a C Function from Compaq Fortran . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.4
Invoking a Compaq Fortran Function or Subroutine from
C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.5
11.3.6
11.3.6.1
11.3.6.2
Equivalent Data Types for Function Return Values . . . . . . . .
Argument Association and Equivalent Data Types . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Intrinsic Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equivalent Compaq Fortran and C Data Types . . . . . . . .
11.3.7
11.3.8
Example of Passing Integer Data to C Functions . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Passing Character Data Between Compaq
11.3.9
11.3.10
Fortran and C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Passing Complex Data to C Functions . . . . . . . .
Handling User-Defined Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.11
11.3.12
Handling Scalar Pointer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3.13
Handling Common Blocks of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4
Calling Between Parallel HPF and Non-Parallel HPF Code . . . .
12 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
12.1
Overview of Compaq Fortran Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2
3f Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3
3hpf Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4
Reference Pages for the 3f and 3hpf Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5
EXTERNAL or INTRINSIC Declarations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6
Example Using the 3f Library Routine shcom_connect . . . . . . . .
12.7
Example of the 3f Library Routines irand and qsort . . . . . . . . . .
13 Using the Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML)
13.1
What Is CXML? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2
CXML Routine Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3
Using CXML from Fortran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4
CXML Program Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5
CXML Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12–1
12–1
12–15
12–18
12–19
12–19
12–22
13–1
13–2
13–3
13–3
13–3
11–16
11–18
11–21
11–21
11–22
11–23
11–23
11–24
11–26
11–26
11–27
11–28
11–28
11–29
11–31
11–33
11–36
11–38
11–39
11–41
11–43
11–44 xvi
14 Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
14.1
Overview of Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2
Using the for_fpe_flags.f File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.2.1
Bit Definitions in File for_fpe_flags.f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3
Calling the for_get_fpe and for_set_fpe Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.3.1
14.3.2
Calling for_get_fpe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling for_set_fpe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14.4
File fordef.f and Its Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on
Multiple Platforms
A.1
A.2
A.2.1
A.2.2
A.2.3
A.2.4
A.3
A.4
A.4.1
A.4.2
A.4.2.1
A.4.2.2
A.4.3
A.4.3.1
A.4.3.2
A.4.3.3
A.4.3.4
A.4.3.5
A.4.3.6
A.5
A.5.1
A.5.2
A.5.3
Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 Compatibility on
Various Platforms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Major Language Features for Compatibility with Compaq
Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX Systems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language Features Provided Only by Compaq Fortran 77 for
Compaq Tru64 UNIX Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Improved Compaq Fortran Compiler Diagnostic Detection . .
Compiler Command-Line Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language Compatibility with Compaq Visual Fortran . . . . . . . . .
Compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran for
OpenVMS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Language Features Specific to Compaq Fortran 77 and
Compaq Fortran for OpenVMS Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OpenVMS Data Porting Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Matching Record Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Nonnative VAX Floating-Point Representations . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX F_float REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX G_float REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX D_float REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX F_float COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 . . . . .
VAX G_float and D_float COMPLEX (KIND=8) or
COMPLEX*16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX H_float Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling Between Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran . . . . .
Argument Passing and Function Return Values . . . . . . . . . .
Using Data Items in Common Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O to the Same Unit Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A–1
A–5
A–5
A–7
A–11
A–17
A–18
A–19
A–20
A–24
A–25
A–26
A–28
A–28
A–29
A–30
A–30
A–31
A–32
A–33
A–34
A–37
A–38
14–1
14–2
14–3
14–5
14–5
14–6
14–8 xvii
B Compaq Fortran Environment Variables
B.1
B.1.1
B.1.2
B.2
B.3
Commands for Setting and Unsetting Environment Variables . . .
Bourne Shell (sh) and Bourne Again Shell (bash) and Korn
Shell (ksh) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Shell (csh) Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compile-Time Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run-Time Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Compiler Output Listings
C.1
C.2
C.2.1
C.2.2
C.3
Source-Code Section of the Output Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine-Code Section of the Output Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How Generated Code and Data are Represented in
Machine-Code Listings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assembler Code Represented in Machine-Code Listings . . . .
Compilation Summary of the Output Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D Parallel Library Routines
D.1
D.1.1
D.1.1.1
D.1.1.2
D.1.1.3
D.1.1.4
D.1.1.5
D.1.1.6
D.1.1.7
D.1.1.8
D.1.1.9
D.1.1.10
D.1.2
D.1.2.1
D.1.2.2
D.1.2.3
D.1.2.4
OpenMP Fortran API Run-Time Library Routines . . . . . . . . . . .
Library Routines That Control and Query the Parallel
Execution Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_get_dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_get_max_threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_get_nested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_get_num_procs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_get_num_threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_get_thread_num . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_in_parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_set_dynamic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_set_nested . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_set_num_threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General-Purpose Lock Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_destroy_lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_init_lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_set_lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.1.2.5
D.2
D.2.1
D.2.2
D.2.3
omp_test_lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
omp_unset_lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Other Parallel Threads Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
_OtsGetMaxThreads or mpc_maxnumthreads . . . . . . . . . . . .
_OtsGetNumThreads or mpc_numthreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
_OtsGetThreadNum or mpc_my_threadnum . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–1
D–6
D–7
D–8
D–9
D–10
D–10
D–10
D–11
D–3
D–3
D–3
D–4
D–4
D–5
D–5
D–6
D–11
D–12
D–14
D–15
D–16
B–1
B–1
B–2
B–2
B–5
C–1
C–2
C–4
C–5
C–5 xviii
D.2.4
D.2.5
D.2.6
D.2.7
Index
Examples
1–1
1–2
6–1
6–2
6–3
6–4
6–5
6–6
6–7
6–8
1–3
1–4
4–1
4–2
5–1
6–9
6–10
7–1
7–2
8–1
8–2
11–1
11–2
11–3
11–4
11–5
11–6
_OtsInitParallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
_OtsInParallel or mpc_in_parallel_region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
_OtsSetNumThreads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
_OtsStopWorkers or mpc_destroy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D–16
D–17
D–17
D–17
Sample Main Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Main Program that Uses a Module and Separate
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Separate Function Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Program SQUARES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Debugging Session Using Program Squares . . . . . . .
Using the -assume dummy_aliases Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aligned Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transformed Loop Using Code Replication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distributed Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decomposed Loop Using Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Decomposed Loop Using a REDUCTION Clause . . . . . . . . . .
Code Using Parallel Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Using Multiple Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Using Multiple Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Using Shared Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Code Looking at a Shared Variable Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Function Called by USEROPEN Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran USEROPEN Main Calling Program . . . . . .
Example of Stack Trace Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Handling OPEN Statement File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling C Functions and Passing Integer Arguments . . . . . .
Calling C Functions and Passing Integer Arguments . . . . . .
C Functions Called by a Compaq Fortran Program . . . . . . . .
Calling C Functions and Passing Integer Arguments . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Program Calling a C Function . . . . . . . . . .
C Interface Function Called by Compaq Fortran . . . . . . . . . .
1–5
6–53
6–61
6–63
6–64
6–65
6–68
7–39
7–41
8–4
1–6
1–7
1–7
4–7
4–8
5–65
6–49
6–50
6–51
6–53
8–9
11–20
11–20
11–32
11–32
11–33
11–34 xix
Figures
2–1
5–1
5–2
5–3
5–4
5–5
7–1
7–2
7–3
7–4
7–5
7–6
9–1
9–2
9–3
9–4
9–5 xx
11–7
11–8
11–9
11–10
11–11
12–1
12–2
13–1
A–1
A–2
C–1
C–2
C–3
C–4
Calling C Functions and Passing Complex Arguments . . . . .
Calling C Functions and Passing Pointer Arguments . . . . . .
C Functions Receiving Pointer Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Function That Receives an Explicit-Shape Array . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Program That Passes an Explicit-Shape
Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the 3f Routine shcom_connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the 3f Routines irand and qsort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fortran Example Program Using CXML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Program Calling a Compaq Fortran 77
Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran 77 Subroutine Called by a Compaq Fortran
Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Source Code Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Machine-Code Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Compilation Summary on Tru64 UNIX Systems . . . .
Sample Compilation Summary on Linux Systems . . . . . . . . .
11–37
11–39
11–40
11–42
11–42
12–20
12–22
13–4
A–36
A–36
C–2
C–3
C–5
C–8
Driver Programs and Software Components . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Block with Unaligned Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Block with Naturally Aligned Data . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Block with Naturally Aligned Reordered Data . . . .
Derived-Type Naturally Aligned Data (in
CATALOG_SPRING( )) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Diagram of REC for Naturally Aligned Records . . .
Fixed-Length Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Variable-Length Records Less Than 2 Gigabytes . . . . . . . . . .
Variable-Length Records Greater Than 2 Gigabytes . . . . . . .
Segmented Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stream File Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Stream_CR and Stream_LF Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INTEGER (KIND=1) or INTEGER*1 Representation . . . . . .
INTEGER (KIND=2) or INTEGER*2 Representation . . . . . .
INTEGER (KIND=4) or INTEGER*4 Representation . . . . . .
INTEGER (KIND=8) or INTEGER*8 Representation . . . . . .
LOGICAL Representations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2–14
5–26
5–26
5–27
5–28
5–29
7–43
7–44
7–45
7–46
7–47
7–48
9–5
9–5
9–6
9–6
9–8
Tables
1
1–1
2–1
2–2
2–3
2–4
3–1
3–2
3–3
4–1
4–2
A–5
A–6
A–7
9–6
9–7
9–8
9–9
9–10
9–11
9–12
10–1
10–2
A–1
A–2
A–3
A–4
REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REAL (KIND=16) or REAL*16 Representation . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 Representation . . . . .
COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 Representation . . . .
COMPLEX (KIND=16) or COMPLEX*32 Representation . . .
CHARACTER Data Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Little Endian and Big Endian Storage of an INTEGER
Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sample Unformatted File Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX F_float REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 Representation . . .
VAX G_float REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 Representation . . .
VAX D_float REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 Representation . . .
VAX F_float COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX G_float COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX D_float COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16
Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VAX H_float REAL*16 Representation (VAX Systems) . . . . . .
9–10
9–10
9–11
9–12
9–13
9–13
9–19
10–2
10–10
A–28
A–29
A–30
A–30
A–31
A–32
A–33
Conventions Used in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Tools for Program Development and Testing . . . . . . . . .
File Suffixes Recognized as Fortran 95/90 Source Files . . . . .
Other File Name Suffixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiler Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Libraries Automatically Searched When Using the f90
Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
f90 and fort Command Categories and Options . . . . . . . . . . .
Interaction of File Suffix and the -free and -fixed Options on
Source Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Floating-Point Exception Command-Line
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command-Line Options Affecting Traceback and Symbol
Table Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Debugger Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
xxx
1–13
2–2
2–3
2–17
2–22
3–2
3–32
3–36
4–2
4–12 xxi
xxii
7–8
7–9
8–1
8–2
8–3
9–1
9–2
10–1
11–1
11–2
11–3
11–4
11–5
6–3
6–4
6–5
7–1
7–2
7–3
7–4
7–5
7–6
7–7
4–3
5–1
5–2
5–3
5–4
6–1
6–2
Fortran Data Types and Debugger Equivalents . . . . . . . . . . .
Options That Affect Run-Time Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Options that Slow Run-Time Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Output Argument Array Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Levels of Optimization with Different -On Options . . . . . . . .
OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operators/Intrinsics and Initialization Values for Reduction
Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler Directives . . . . . . . . . . . .
OpenMP Fortran API Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Parallel Environment Variables . . . . . . . . .
Summary of I/O Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Available I/O Statements and Record I/O Forms . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Record Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bytes Required for Record Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environment Variables and Preconnected Files . . . . . . . . . .
OPEN Statement Functions and Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Examples of Applying Default Pathnames and File
Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Implicit Compaq Fortran Logical Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Allowed Record Access for File Organizations and Record
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Severity Levels of Run-Time Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Signals Caught by the Compaq Fortran Run-Time
Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran Intrinsic Data Types, Storage, and Numeric
Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Exceptional Floating-Point Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unformatted Numeric Formats, Keywords, and Supported
Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calling Conventions for ATTRIBUTES Options . . . . . . . . . . .
C Property and External Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C Property and Argument Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equivalent Function Declarations in C and Compaq
Fortran . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran and C Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7–31
8–3
8–12
8–14
9–2
9–16
10–5
11–17
11–19
11–19
11–27
11–30
6–15
6–31
6–57
6–58
7–3
7–6
7–10
7–12
7–14
7–16
4–23
5–6
5–10
5–36
5–46
6–5
7–21
7–24
12–1
12–2
12–3
12–4
13–1
14–1
14–2
A–1
A–2
B–1
B–2
D–1
D–2
Summary of Language Interface (‘‘Jacket’’) 3f Library
Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of 3f Library Routines Providing Special
Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3f Functions and Subroutines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compaq Fortran 3hpf HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY Library
Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CXML Routine Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bit Definitions in File for_fpe_flags.f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Symbols in File fordef.f . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Summary of Language Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equivalent Record Types for OpenVMS Fortran and Compaq
Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha Systems . .
Compile-Time Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Run-Time Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
OpenMP Fortran API Run-Time Library Routines . . . . . . . .
Other Parallel Threads Routines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12–2
12–4
12–5
12–16
13–2
14–3
14–9
A–2
A–25
B–2
B–5
D–2
D–13 xxiii
Preface
This manual describes the Compaq Fortran compiler command, compiler, and run-time environment. This includes how to compile, link, execute, and debug
Compaq Fortran programs using the Compaq Tru64™ UNIX operating system and the Linux operating system on Alpha hardware.
This manual does not cover running, debugging, and profiling programs that execute in parallel using High Performance Fortran (HPF) features.
Intended Audience
This manual makes the assumptions that:
• You already have a basic understanding of the Fortran 95/90 language.
Tutorial Fortran 95/90 language information is widely available in commercially published books (see the online release notes or the Preface of the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual).
• You are familiar with the operating system shell commands used during program development and a text editor, such as emacs or vi . Such information is available in your operating system documentation set or commercially published books.
• You have access to the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual, which describes the Compaq Fortran language.
Structure of This Document
This manual consists of the following chapters and appendixes:
• Chapter 1 introduces the programmer to the Compaq Fortran compiler, its components, and related commands.
• Chapter 2 explains how to compile and link Compaq Fortran source programs, previously compiled module files, object files, and routines written in other supported programming languages, such as C.
xxv
xxvi
• Chapter 3 describes the Compaq Fortran compiler command-line options in detail.
• Chapter 4 describes using the Compaq Ladebug debugger to debug Compaq
Fortran nonparallel programs.
• Chapter 5 describes ways to improve Compaq Fortran run-time performance for nonparallel programs, including general software environment recommendations, appropriate compiler command-line options, data alignment, efficiently performing I/O and array operations, other efficient coding techniques, profiling, and optimization.
• Chapter 6 describes how to use parallel compiler directives in Compaq
Fortran programs to generate code that executes in parallel.
• Chapter 7 provides information on Compaq Fortran I/O, including statement forms, file organizations, I/O record formats, access modes, logical unit numbers, and efficient use of I/O.
• Chapter 8 lists run-time messages and describes how to control certain types of I/O errors and signal-handling considerations.
• Chapter 9 describes native Compaq Fortran Alpha data types, including their numeric ranges, representation, and floating-point exceptional values.
It also discusses the intrinsic data types used with numeric data.
• Chapter 10 describes how to access unformatted files containing numeric little endian and big endian data different than the format used in memory.
• Chapter 11 describes the Compaq Fortran language interface, passing arguments, calling between Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77, and calling between Compaq Fortran and C.
• Chapter 12 lists and briefly describes the Section 3f interface routines, which include some routines specifically designed for the Compaq Fortran environment on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems.
• Chapter 13 describes the Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML), including how to call and link CXML routines.
• Chapter 14 explains additional ways to control run-time floating-point exceptions.
• Appendix A provides compatibility information for those porting Compaq
Fortran 77 (formerly DEC Fortran) applications and Compaq Fortran
OpenVMS™ applications, including an overview of Compaq Fortran 77 and
Compaq Fortran extensions supported on the various platforms.
• Appendix B lists the Compaq Fortran environment variables recognized at compile time and run time.
• Appendix C describes the source listing formats supported by Compaq
Fortran.
• Appendix D summarizes the library routines available for use with directed parallel decomposition.
The appendix formerly titled ‘‘Parallel Compiler Directives Reference Material’’ is no longer in this manual. The contents of this appendix are in the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
Associated Documents
The following documents may also be useful to Compaq Fortran programmers:
• Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual
Describes the Compaq Fortran 95/90 source language for reference purposes, including the format and use of statements, intrinsic procedures, and other language elements. Compaq extensions to the Fortran 95 standard are identified by blue-green color in the printed document and
HTML versions. It also provides an overview of new Fortran 90 features
(not available in FORTRAN-77). Language differences between Compaq
Fortran platforms are identified.
• Compaq Fortran Installation Guide for Tru64 UNIX Systems
Explains how to install Compaq Fortran on the Compaq Tru64 UNIX operating system, including prerequisites and requirements.
To install Compaq Fortran on Linux Alpha systems, refer to the online
README file supplied with your kit.
• Compaq Fortran online release notes
Provide more information on this version of Compaq Fortran, including known problems and a summary of the Compaq Fortran run-time error messages.
The online release notes are located at:
TU*X only
/usr/lib/cmplrs/fort90/relnotes
L*X only
/usr/doc/cfal-1.2.n/README where the value of n in this location comes from the list 0, 1, 2, . . .
• Compaq Fortran online reference pages xxvii
Describe the Compaq Fortran software components, including
UNIX systems) or fort (1) (Linux systems), fpr (1), fsplit (1), f90 (1) (Tru64 intro (3f), numerous Fortran library routines listed in parallel Fortran library routines listed in intro intro
(3f), and numerous
(3hpf).
• Official specification for OpenMP Fortran 1.1 Application Program
Interface at: http://www.openmp.org/specs/
• Compaq Tru64 UNIX operating system documentation
The operating system documentation set includes reference pages for operating system components and a programmer’s subkit, in which certain documents describe the commands, tools, libraries, and other aspects of the programming environment:
For programming information, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX
Programmer’s Guide and the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Using Programming
Support Tools.
For performance information, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX System
Tuning and Performance.
For an overview of Compaq Tru64 UNIX documentation, see the
Compaq Tru64 UNIX Reader’s Guide.
• Other layered product documentation
If you are using a programming-related layered product package from
Compaq, consult the appropriate documentation for the layered product package for use of that product.
Platform Labels
A platform is a combination of operating system and central processing unit
(CPU) that provides a distinct environment in which to use a product (in this case, a language). All the information in this manual applies to both Compaq
Tru64 UNIX on Alpha systems and Linux on Alpha systems unless otherwise labeled as shown below:
TU*X
L*X
Applies to Tru64 UNIX on Alpha systems
Applies to Linux on Alpha systems
For example, the shcom_connect library routine in Table 12–2 is labeled
(TU*X only)
, so this routine is only valid for Tru64 UNIX operating systems on
Alpha processors.
xxviii
Sending Compaq Your Comments on This Manual
Compaq welcomes your comments on this or any other Compaq Fortran manual. You can send comments by e-mail to: [email protected]
If you have suggestions for improving particular sections or find any errors, please indicate the title, order number, and section numbers. Compaq also welcomes general comments.
Communicating with Compaq
If you have a customer support contract and have comments or questions about Compaq Fortran software, you can contact our Customer Support Center
(CSC), preferably using electronic means (such as DSNlink). In the United
States, customers can call the CSC at 1-800-354-9000.
You can also send comments, questions and suggestions about the Compaq
Fortran product to the following e-mail address: [email protected]
. Note that this address is for informational inquiries only and is not a formal support channel.
Compaq Fortran Web Site
The Compaq Fortran home page is located at: http://www.compaq.com/fortran
This site contains information about software patch kits, example programs, and additional product information.
Conventions Used in This Document
This manual uses the conventions listed in Table 1.
xxix
xxx
Table 1 Conventions Used in This Document
Convention Meaning
%
RETURN
Ctrl/x
% pwd
/usr/usrc/jones monospaced cat (1) new term variable
UPPERCASE lowercase
8 9
The default user prompt is your system name followed by a right angle bracket. This manual uses a percent sign ( % ) to represent this prompt. The actual user prompt varies with the shell in use.
This symbol indicates that you must press the named key on the keyboard.
This symbol indicates that you must press the Ctrl key while you simultaneously press the key labeled x.
This manual displays system prompts and responses using a monospaced font. User input is displayed in a bold monospaced font.
This typeface indicates the name of a command, option, pathname, file name, directory path, or environment variable.
This typeface is also used in examples of program code, interactive examples, and other screen displays.
A shell command name followed by the number 1 in parentheses refers to a command reference page. Similarly, a routine name followed by the number 2 or 3 in parentheses refers to a system call or library routine reference page.
(The number in parentheses indicates the section containing the reference page.) To read online reference pages, use the man command. Your operating system documentation also contains reference page descriptions.
Bold type indicates the introduction of a new term in text.
Italic type indicates important information, a complete title of a manual, or variable information, such as user-supplied information in command or option syntax.
The operating system shell differentiates between lowercase and uppercase characters. Literal strings that appear in text, examples, syntax descriptions, and function definitions must be typed exactly as shown.
Large braces enclose lists from which you must choose one
STATUS
DISPOSE
DISP
(continued on next page)
.
.
.
Table 1 (Cont.) Conventions Used in This Document
Convention Meaning
[ ] Square brackets enclose items that are optional. For example:
BLOCK DATA [name]
. . .
A horizontal ellipsis means that the item preceding the ellipsis can be repeated. For example: s[,s] . . .
A vertical ellipsis in a figure or example means that not all of the statements are shown.
real complex logical integer
Compaq Fortran
Fortran
Fortran 95/90 f90 fort
This term refers to all floating-point intrinsic data types as a group.
This term refers to all complex floating-point intrinsic data types as a group.
This term refers to logical data types as a group.
This term refers to integer data types as a group.
The term Compaq Fortran (formerly DIGITAL Fortran 90) refers to language information that is common to the Fortran
95/90 standards and any Compaq Fortran extensions.
This term refers to language information that is common to
ANSI FORTRAN 77, ANSI/ISO Fortran 95/90, and Compaq
Fortran.
This term refers to language information that is common to
ANSI/ISO Fortran 95 and ANSI/ISO Fortran 90.
This command invokes the Compaq Fortran compiler on
Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems while the fort command invokes the Compaq Fortran compiler on Linux Alpha systems.
This manual frequently uses the f90 command to indicate invoking the Compaq Fortran on both systems, so replace this command with fort if you are working on a Linux Alpha system.
This command invokes the Compaq Fortran compiler on
Linux Alpha systems. See the previous convention for the f90 command.
(continued on next page) xxxi
xxxii
Table 1 (Cont.) Conventions Used in This Document
Convention Meaning
OpenMP
HPF
This term refers to OpenMP Fortran as specified in the
OpenMP Fortran 1.1 Application Program Interface.
This term refers to the High Performance Fortran extensions to the Fortran language.
1
Getting Started
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 1.1, Compaq Fortran Programming Environment
• Section 1.2, Commands to Create and Run an Executable Program
• Section 1.3, Creating and Running a Program Using a Module and
Separate Function
• Section 1.4, f90 or fort Command and Related Software Components
• Section 1.5, Program Development Stages and Tools
• Section 1.6, Compaq Fortran and Standards It Conforms To
1.1 Compaq Fortran Programming Environment
The following aspects of Compaq Fortran are relevant to the compilation environment and should be considered before extensive coding begins:
• To install Compaq Fortran on your Compaq Tru64 UNIX Alpha system, first obtain the UNIX Software Program Library Compact Disc (CD) media.
Then perform the installation as described in Compaq Fortran Installation
Guide for Tru64 UNIX Systems.
• To install Compaq Fortran on your Compaq Linux Alpha system, use the
Compaq Fortran CD–ROM supplied with your kit. Perform the installation using the installation letter in your kit.
•
(TU*X only)
Once Compaq Fortran is installed on a Compaq Tru64 UNIX
Alpha system, you can:
Use the f90 command to compile and link programs.
Use the online f90 (1) reference page and this manual to provide information about the f90 command.
Getting Started 1–1
•
(L*X only)
Once Compaq Fortran is installed on a Compaq Linux Alpha system, you can:
Use the fort command to compile and link programs.
Use the online fort (1) reference page and this manual to provide information about the fort command.
• Make sure you have adequate stack size, especially if your programs use large arrays as data. Users may be able to overcome this problem by increasing the per-process data limit, using the or limit command (C shell) ulimit command (Korn and Bourne and bash
(L*X only) shells) (see csh (1), ksh (1), sh (1), or bash (1)).
Determine whether the maximum per-process data size is already allocated by checking the value of the maxdsiz parameter in the system configuration file. If necessary, increase its value. Changes to the configuration file do not take effect until the operating system kernel has been rebuilt and the system has been rebooted.
For example, the following C shell commands check the current stacksize limit and then increase the size to a larger value (if this limit can be increased from your process):
% limit stacksize stacksize 4096 kbytes
% limit stacksize 32676
% limit stacksize stacksize 32676 kbytes
You can also remove the limitation on stacksize:
% limit stacksize unlimited
Similarly, with the Korn and Bourne and bash
(L*X only) shells, use the ulimit command with the -s option (see ksh (1) and sh (1) and bash (1)). For example:
$ ulimit -s
4096
$ ulimit -s 32676
$ ulimit -s
32676
If you are unable to increase your limits to a value needed by your program, contact your system administrator.
• Make sure you have an adequate process file descriptor limit, especially if your programs use a large number of module files.
1–2 Getting Started
During compilation, your application may attempt to use more module files than your descriptor limit allows. In this case, the Compaq Fortran compiler will close a previously opened module file before it opens another to stay within your descriptor limit. This results in slower compilation time. Increasing the descriptor limit may improve compilation time in such cases.
Users can view and usually increase the per-process limit on the number of open files by using the limit command (C shell) or ulimit command (Korn and Bourne and bash
(L*X only) shell). (See csh (1), ksh (1), sh (1), or bash (1).)
Determine whether the maximum per-process limit is already allocated by checking the value of the appropriate descriptor parameter in the system configuration file. If necessary, increase its value. Changes to the configuration file do not take effect until the operating system kernel has been rebuilt and the system has been rebooted.
For example, the following C shell commands check the current limits and then increase the size to a larger value for cases where this limit can be increased from your process:
% limit descriptor descriptors 100 files
% limit descriptor 4096
% limit descriptor descriptors 4096 files
With the Korn, Bourne, and bash
(L*X only) shells, you can use the command with the ulimit
-n option (see ksh (1), sh (1), and bash (1). For example:
$ ulimit -n
2048
$ ulimit -n 4096
$ ulimit -n
4096
• Compaq Fortran supports the use of the environment variable TMPDIR to specify a working directory (instead of /tmp ) to contain temporary files created during compilation. Several other environment variables can similarly be used during program execution (see Appendix B).
If you need to set environment variables frequently, consider setting these in your
.profile
).
.login
file or appropriate shell initialization file ( .cshrc
or
• Your source files can be in free or fixed form. The f90 and fort commands recognize certain file suffixes as files containing fixed form or files containing free form. You can also specify an option on the command
Getting Started 1–3
line to specify the source form. Recognized file suffixes are described in
Section 2.1.1.
A special type of fixed source form is tab form (a Compaq extension).
For details about the source forms, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• Each source file to be compiled must contain at least one program unit
(main program, external subroutine, external function, module, block data).
Consider the following aspects of program development:
– Modularity and efficiency
For a large application, using a set of relatively small source files promotes incremental application development.
When compiling multiple source files into a single object file with a single f90 (or fort ) command, certain interprocedure optimizations will occur to minimize run-time execution time (unless you specify a lower level of optimization).
– Code re-use
Modules, external subprograms, and included files allow re-use of common code. Code used in multiple places in a program should be placed in a module, external subprogram (function or subroutine), or included file.
When using modules and external subprograms, there is one copy of the code for a program. When using INCLUDE statements, the code in the specified source file is repeated once for each INCLUDE statement.
In most cases, using modules or external subprograms makes programs easier to maintain and minimizes program size.
For More Information:
• On modules, see Section 2.1.3.
• On the types of subprograms and using an explicit interface to a subprogram, see Chapter 11.
• On performance considerations, including compiling source programs for optimal run-time performance, see Chapter 5.
1–4 Getting Started
1.2 Commands to Create and Run an Executable Program
Example 1–1 shows a short Fortran 95/90 main program using free form source.
Example 1–1 Sample Main Program
! File hello.f90
PROGRAM HELLO_TEST print *, ’hello world’ print *, ’ ’
END PROGRAM HELLO_TEST
To create and revise your source files, use a text editor, such as
On Linux systems, the vi or emacs .
peco editor is available. For instance, to use vi to edit the file hello.f90
, type:
% vi hello.f90
The following command compiles the program named automatically uses ld hello.f90
and to link the main program into an executable program file named a.out
:
% f90 hello.f90
The f90 command (or on Linux systems, the fort command) automatically passes a standard default list of Compaq Fortran Run-Time Libraries to the ld linker. In this example, because all external routines used by this program reside in these standard libraries, additional libraries or object files are not specified on the f90 (or fort ) command line.
If your path definition includes the directory containing program by simply typing its name: a.out
, you can run the
% a.out
If the executable image is in your current directory, specify:
% ./a.out
If the executable image is not in a directory in your path definition and it is not in your current directory, then specify its full path. For example:
% /usr/disk5/mcdonald/a.out
Getting Started 1–5
1.3 Creating and Running a Program Using a Module and
Separate Function
Example 1–2 shows a sample Fortran 95/90 main program using free source form that uses a module and an external subprogram.
The function CALC_AVERAGE is contained in a separately created file and depends on the module ARRAY_CALCULATOR for its interface block.
Example 1–2 Sample Main Program that Uses a Module and Separate
Function
! File: main.f90
! This program calculates the average of five numbers
PROGRAM MAIN
USE ARRAY_CALCULATOR
REAL, DIMENSION(5) :: A = 0
REAL :: AVERAGE
!
PRINT *, ’Type five numbers: ’
READ (*,’(F10.3)’) A
AVERAGE = CALC_AVERAGE(A) "
PRINT *, ’Average of the five numbers is: ’, AVERAGE
END PROGRAM MAIN
!
The USE statement accesses the module ARRAY_CALCULATOR. This module contains the function declaration for CALC_AVERAGE (use association).
" The 5-element array is passed to the function CALC_AVERAGE, which returns the value to the variable AVERAGE for printing.
Example 1–3 shows the module referenced by the main program. This example program shows more Fortran 95/90 features, including an interface block and an assumed-shape array.
1–6 Getting Started
Example 1–3 Sample Module
! File: array_calc.f90.
! Module containing various calculations on arrays.
MODULE ARRAY_CALCULATOR
INTERFACE
FUNCTION CALC_AVERAGE(D)
REAL :: CALC_AVERAGE
REAL, INTENT(IN) :: D(:)
END FUNCTION CALC_AVERAGE
END INTERFACE
! Other subprogram interfaces...
END MODULE ARRAY_CALCULATOR
Example 1–4 shows the function declaration CALC_AVERAGE referenced by the main program.
Example 1–4 Sample Separate Function Declaration
! File: calc_aver.f90.
! External function returning average of array.
FUNCTION CALC_AVERAGE(D)
REAL :: CALC_AVERAGE
REAL, INTENT(IN) :: D(:)
CALC_AVERAGE = SUM(D) / UBOUND(D, DIM = 1)
END FUNCTION CALC_AVERAGE
1.3.1 Commands to Create the Executable Program
During the early stages of program development, the sample program files in
Example 1–2, Example 1–3, and Example 1–4 might be compiled separately and then linked together, using the following commands:
% f90 -c array_calc.f90
% f90 -c calc_aver.f90
% f90 -c main.f90
% f90 -o calc main.o array_calc.o calc_aver.o
In this sequence of f90 (or fort ) commands:
• The -c option (used in the first three commands) prevents linking and retains the .o
files.
• The first command creates the files array_calculator.mod
and array_calc.o
(the name in the MODULE statement in Example 1–3 determines the name of module file array_calculator.mod
). Module files are written into the current working directory.
Getting Started 1–7
• The second command creates the file calc_aver.o
.
• The third command creates the file array_calculator.mod
.
main.o
and uses the module file
• The last command links all object files into the executable program named calc . To link files, use the f90 command instead of the ld command.
To allow more optimizations to occur (such as the inline expansion of called subprograms), the entire set of three source files can be compiled and linked together with a single f90 command:
% f90 -o calc array_calc.f90 calc_aver.f90 main.f90
The order in which the file names are specified is significant. This command: f90
• Compiles the file array_calc.f90
, which contains the module definition, and creates its object file and the file array_calculator.mod
.
• Compiles the file
CALC_AVERAGE.
calc_aver.f90
, which contains the external function
• Compiles the file the module file main.f90
(main program). The USE statement references array_calculator.mod
.
• Uses ld to link the main program and all object files into an executable program file named calc .
1.3.2 Running the Sample Program
If your path definition includes the directory containing program by simply typing its name: calc , you can run the
% calc
When running the sample program, the PRINT and READ statements in the main program result in the following dialogue between user and program:
Type five numbers:
55.5
4.5
3.9
9.0
5.6
Average of the five numbers is: 15.70000
1–8 Getting Started
1.3.3 Debugging the Sample Program
To debug a program with the Compaq Ladebug Debugger, compile the source files with the -g and -ladebug options to request additional symbol table information for source line debugging in the object and executable program files. The following executable program file f90 command also uses the calc_debug :
-o option to name the
% f90 -g -ladebug -o calc_debug array_calc.f90 calc_aver.f90 main.f90
The Ladebug debugger has a character-cell interface ( ladebug command) and a windowing interface.
For instance, to use the character-cell interface to debug an executable program named calc_debug the following command: on a system running Compaq Tru64 UNIX, type
% ladebug calc_debug
The Compaq Tru64 UNIX operating system provides the Ladebug debugger and the dbx debugger, both of which can be used to debug Compaq Fortran programs. On Linux Alpha systems, the Compaq Fortran CD–ROM includes the Ladebug debugger.
For more information about Ladebug, see the following Web site: http://www.compaq.com/products/software/ladebug/
For more information on running the program within the debugger, see
Chapter 4, Using the Ladebug Debugger.
1.4 f90 or fort Command and Related Software Components
Compaq Fortran provides the standard features of a compiler and linker.
Compaq Fortran also supports the use of preprocessors and other compilers.
Compiling and linking are usually done by a single f90 or fort command allows you to use: f90 or fort command. The
• A preprocessor, if needed, such as cpp or fpp .
• The Compaq Fortran compiler.
• The C compiler by means of the command is a symbolic link to cc command. (On Linux systems, the cc ccc or gcc .)
• The ld linker.
Getting Started 1–9
1.4.1 f90 or fort Driver Program
The f90 or fort command invokes a driver program that is the actual user interface to the Compaq Fortran compiler. It accepts a list of command-line options and file names, and causes one or more programs (preprocessor, compiler, assembler, or linker, executed in a sequential manner) to process each file.
After the Compaq Fortran compiler processes the appropriate files to create one or more object files, the driver program passes a list of files, certain options, and other information to the cc (or, on Linux systems, the ccc ) compiler.
The cc compiler processes relevant non-Fortran files and information (including running the cpp preprocessor) and passes certain information (such as .o
object files) to the ld linker. The such as any file with a .c
cc compiler applies suffic. If cpp cpp to files that it recognizes, is used, it is executed once for each file.
If any program does not return a normal status, further processing is discontinued and the f90 command displays a message identifying the program
(and its returned status, in hexadecimal) before terminating its own execution.
See Figure 2–1, Driver Programs and Software Components.
1.4.2 cpp, fpp, and Other Preprocessors
When you use a preprocessor for Compaq Fortran source files, the output files the preprocessor creates are used as input source files by the Compaq Fortran compiler. Preprocessors include:
• The C preprocessor cpp , which is provided with the C compiler on Tru64
UNIX and Linux operating systems. To run cpp before Fortran 90 source files are compiled, specify the -cpp option on the f90 or fort command line. With fixed form source files, you can alternatively name a file using a file suffix of suffix of .F90
.F
to run to run cpp .
cpp . With free form source files, you can use a file
• The Fortran preprocessor fpp , which is provided with Compaq Fortran on Tru64 UNIX and Linux operating systems. To run
90 source files are compiled, specify the -fpp fpp option on the before Fortran f90 or fort command line. With fixed form source files, you can alternatively name a file using a file suffix of use a file suffix of
.F
to run fpp . With free form source files, you can
.F90
to run fpp .
1–10 Getting Started
• Preprocessors provided with optional products, such as the Compaq KAP
Fortran/OpenMP performance preprocessor (see Section 5.1.1). Such preprocessors usually need to be run to create the appropriate source file
(or files) before you enter the f90 command line.
1.4.3 Compaq Fortran Compiler
The Compaq Fortran compiler provides the following primary functions:
• Verifying the correctness of Compaq Fortran source statements and displaying any warnings or error messages.
• Generating machine-level object language instructions from the source statements.
If the -omp option was specified on Tru64 UNIX systems, the compiler generates code enabled for parallel execution, based on OpenMP language constructs in the input source files.
If the -hpf option was specified on Tru64 UNIX systems, the compiler generates code enabled for parallel execution, based on HPF language constructs in the input source files.
• Grouping the instructions to generate an object file that can be processed by the linker.
The object file created by the compiler contains information used by the linker, including the following:
• The object file name.
This is taken from the name specified in the first PROGRAM,
SUBROUTINE, FUNCTION, MODULE, or BLOCK DATA statement in the source program. If a program unit does not have any of these statements, the source file name is used, appended with $MAIN (or $DATA for block data subprograms).
• A list of global symbols declared in the object file.
The linker uses this information when it binds two or more program units together and must resolve references to the same names in the program units. Such global symbols include entry points and common block names.
• A symbol table (if specifically requested by the the f90 command line).
-g , -g2 , or -g3 options on
A symbol table lists the names of all external and internal variables within an object file, with definitions of their locations. The table is of primary use in program debugging.
Getting Started 1–11
The file name of the Compaq Fortran compiler is in certain messages.
decfort90 , which may appear
1.4.4 Other Compilers
You can compile and link multilanguage programs using a single f90 command.
The f90 command recognizes C or Assembler program files by their file suffix characters and passes them to the cc driver and compiler for compilation.
Before compilation, cc applies the cpp preprocessor to files that it recognizes, such as any file with a .c
suffix, and passes appropriate files to other compilers or the assembler.
Certain options passed to cc are passed by cc to the ld linker.
1.4.5 Linker (ld)
When you enter an f90 command, the ld linker is invoked automatically unless a compilation error occurs or you specify the -c option on the command line. The linker produces an executable program image with a default name of a.out
.
The ld linker provides such primary functions as:
• Adding information for virtual memory allocation in the executable program
• Resolving symbol references among object files
• Assigning values to relocatable global symbols
• Performing relocation
For more information, see guide.
ld (1) and your operating system’s programmer’s
1.5 Program Development Stages and Tools
This manual primarily addresses the program development activities associated with implementation and testing phases. For information about topics usually considered during application design, specification, and maintenance, see your operating system documentation, appropriate reference pages, or appropriate commercially published documentation.
Table 1–1 lists and describes some of the software tools you can use when implementing and testing a program.
1–12 Getting Started
Table 1–1 Main Tools for Program Development and Testing
Task or Activity Tool and Description
Manage source files
Create and modify source files
Analyze source code
Use rcs or sccs to manage source files. For more information, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Using
Programming Support Tools or the appropriate reference page.
Use a text editor, such as vi or emacs . For more information, see your operating system documentation.
Use searching commands such as grep and diff . For more information, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Using
Programming Support Tools and the appropriate reference page.
Build program (compile and link)
You can use the f90 command to create small programs, perhaps using shell scripts, or use the make command to build your application in an automated fashion using a
makefile. For more information on f90 , see Chapter 2. For more information on make , see the make (1) reference page and the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Using Programming Support
Tools.
Debug and Test program Use Ladebug (or dbx) to debug your program or run it for general testing. For more information on debugging, see
Chapter 4.
Analyze performance
Install program
(TU*X only)
To perform profiling of code, use the
(TU*X only) programs. The prof and pixie f90 command option needed to use prof is -p (same as -p1 ).
To perform call graph profiling, use the command option needed to use gprof tool. The f90 gprof is -pg .
Related profiling tools
(TU*X only) include the use of feedback files and -cord .
For more information on profiling Fortran 90 code, see
Chapter 5.
Use setld and related commands such as tar . For more information, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Using
Programming Support Tools.
To view information about an object file or an object library, use the following shell commands:
• The file command shows the type of a file (such as which programming language, whether it is an object library, ASCII file, and so forth).
• The strings command
(TU*X only) shows whether the object ( .o
) file was compiled by Compaq Fortran 77 or Compaq Fortran and, if it was, the version number used.
Getting Started 1–13
• The nm command shows symbol table information, including the identification field of each object file.
• The size command shows the size of the code and data sections.
For more information on these commands, see the appropriate reference page or the operating system’s programmer’s guide.
To perform other program development functions at various stages of program development:
• Use the ar command to:
Create an archive object library.
Maintain the object modules in the library.
List the object modules in the library.
Perform other functions.
Use ranlib to add a table of contents to the object library for linking purposes. For more information, see ar (1) or the Compaq Tru64 UNIX
Programmer’s Guide.
• Use f90 or ld , not the ar command, to create shared libraries on Tru64
UNIX systems. For more information, see Section 2.6 and the Compaq
Tru64 UNIX Programmer’s Guide.
• Use fort or ld , not the ar command, to create shared libraries on Linux systems. For more information, see Section 2.6.
• Use the strip command to remove symbolic and other debugging information to minimize image size. For more information, see strip (1).
• Use the fsplit command to split a multiple routine Fortran file into multiple, individual files. For more information, see fsplit (1).
For More Information:
• On the Compaq Tru64 UNIX programming environment, see the Compaq
Tru64 UNIX Programmer’s Guide and the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Using
Programming Support Tools.
1–14 Getting Started
1.6 Compaq Fortran and Standards It Conforms To
Compaq Fortran conforms to American National Standard Fortran 95 (ANSI
X3J3/96-007)
1 and American National Standard Fortran 90 (ANSI X3.198-
1992)
2
, and includes support for the OpenMP Fortran 1.1 Application Program
Interface
3 and the High Performance Fortran Language Specification
4
.
The ANSI committee X3J3 is currently answering questions of interpretation of
Fortran 95 and Fortran 90 language features. Any answers given by the ANSI committee that are related to features implemented in Compaq Fortran may result in changes in future releases of the Compaq Fortran compiler, even if the changes produce incompatibilities with earlier releases of Compaq Fortran.
Compaq Fortran also includes support for programs that conform to the previous Fortran standards (ANSI X3.9-1978 and ANSI X3.0-1966), the
International Standards Organization standard ISO 1539-1980 ( E ), the
Federal Information Processing Institute standard FIPS 69-1, and the Military
Standard 1753 Language Specification.
Compaq Fortran provides a number of extensions to the Fortran 95/90 standards. Compaq Fortran extensions to the Fortran 95/90 standards are generally provided for compatibility with Compaq Fortran extensions to the
ANSI FORTRAN-77 standard and to support the High Performance Fortran
(HPF) Language Specification.
When creating new programs that need to be standard-conforming for portability reasons, you should avoid or minimize the use of extensions to the Fortran 95/90 standards. Extensions to the Fortran 95/90 standards are identified visually in the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual, which defines the Compaq Fortran language.
3
4
1
2
This is the same as International Standards Organization standard ISO/IEC
1539-1:1997 ( E ).
This is the same as International Standards Organization standard ISO/IEC 1539:1991
( E ).
See the specification at http://www.openmp.org/specs/ .
See High Performance Fortran Language Specification, Version 1.1, Technical Report
CRPC-TR-92225, Center for Research on Parallel Computation, Rice University, Houston,
Texas, USA.
Getting Started 1–15
2
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran
Programs
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 2.1, f90 Command: Files and Options
• Section 2.2, Driver Programs and Passing Options to cc and ld
• Section 2.3, Compiler Limits, Diagnostic Messages, and Error Conditions
• Section 2.4, Compilation Control: Statements and Directives
• Section 2.5, Linking Object Libraries
• Section 2.6, Creating Shared Libraries
•
•
Note
To invoke the Compaq Fortran compiler, use: f90 fort on Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems command on Linux Alpha systems
This chapter uses f90 to indicate invoking Compaq Fortran on both systems, so replace this command with fort if you are working on a
Linux Alpha system.
To invoke the Compaq C compiler, use:
•
• cc on Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems ccc on Linux Alpha systems
This chapter uses cc to indicate invoking Compaq C on both systems, so replace this command with ccc if you are working on a Linux Alpha system.
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–1
For detailed information on
Chapter 3.
f90 and fort command-line options, see
2.1 f90 Command: Files and Options
You should almost always use the f90 command (or fort command on Linux systems) to invoke both the Compaq Fortran compiler and the ld linker.
To link one or more object files created by the Compaq Fortran compiler, you should use the f90 command (instead of the ld command), because the f90 command automatically references the appropriate Compaq Fortran Run-Time
Libraries when it invokes ld .
When you create your source files using a text editor, use file name suffix conventions expected by the f90 command, as described in Section 2.1.1.
2.1.1 File Suffixes and Source Forms
When creating a source file, choose the file name suffix appropriate for the source form (fixed or free). The f90 command recognizes certain source file suffixes as Fortran 95/90 source files.
Table 2–1 shows the recognized Fortran 95/90 source file suffixes.
Table 2–1 File Suffixes Recognized as Fortran 95/90 Source Files
Suffix Description
.f90
.F90
.f
.F
,
, .for
.FOR
Identifies Fortran 95/90 files in free source form passed to the Compaq
Fortran compiler.
Identifies Fortran 95/90 files in free source form passed to the cpp preprocessor and then compiled by the Compaq Fortran compiler.
Identifies Fortran files in fixed (or tab) source form passed to the
Compaq Fortran compiler but not preprocessed by cpp .
Identifies Fortran files in fixed (or tab) source form passed to the preprocessor and then compiled by the Compaq Fortran compiler.
cpp
Except for .F
, .FOR
, and .F90
files, preprocessors are not automatically run before Compaq Fortran compilation. To request that the cpp preprocessor be run before compilation, specify the -cpp option.
You can specify the source file form for all Fortran files on an line by using the -free option or -fixed option.
f90 command
2–2 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
Table 2–2 shows other file name suffixes.
Table 2–2 Other File Name Suffixes
Suffix Description
Library and Object Files
.a
Identifies archive object libraries passed to to linking to resolve external references.
cc , which are in turn passed ld . All routines in the specified object library are searched during
.o
.so
Identifies object files passed to ld .
Identifies shared object libraries passed to to cc , which are in turn passed ld . All routines in the specified object library are searched during linking to resolve external references.
Compaq Fortran Module Files
.mod
Identifies Fortran 95/90 module files created by the Compaq Fortran compiler. You do not create a .mod
file directly and cannot specify a
.mod
file on the f90 command line (see Section 2.1.3).
Other Source Files
.c
.i
.s
, .i90
Identifies C language source files passed to the C compiler driver the C preprocessor (via the command cpp ) and the C language compiler.
Identifies intermediate files passed from compiler. The cpp to the Compaq Fortran
.i
or .i90
files are usually created by using the f90 options -P or -K (keep intermediate file) and -cpp (invoke cpp ). The
.i
files are assumed to be in fixed source form. The .i90
file are assumed to be in free source form.
Identifies assembler files passed to cc or to ccc .
cc or ccc , which performs additional command-line parsing before invoking
To specify libraries (in addition to those automatically searched by the command), you can also use an f90 command-line option, such as f90
-lstring .
Source file suffixes used by other Compaq languages include:
• On Tru64 UNIX and Linux: C++ ( .cxx
, .cc
, .C
)
• On Tru64 UNIX only: Ada ( .ada
), COBOL ( .cob
), Pascal ( .p
) and PL/I
( .pli
)
For More Information:
On source forms and source coding guidelines that allow the same source file to be used with multiple source forms, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–3
2.1.2 Format of the f90 and fort Commands
The f90 command (on Tru64 UNIX systems) has the following general form: f90
[--options [args]]...
filename
[filename]...
[--options [args]]...
The fort command (on Linux systems) has the following general form: fort
[--options [args]]...
filename
[filename]...
[--options [args]]...
–options [args]
Indicates either special actions to be performed by the compiler or linker, or special properties of input or output files. For details about command-line options, see Chapter 3.
If you specify the -lstring option (which indicates libraries to be searched by the linker) or an object library file name, place it after the file names and after other options.
filename
Specifies the source files containing the program units to be compiled and other files to be used by the Compaq Fortran compiler. The file name has a suffix that indicates the type of file used, such as .f90
or .f
(see Section 2.1.1).
If you omit the suffix or it is not one of the preceding types recognized by the f90 command, the file is assumed to be an object file and is passed directly to the linker.
An example f90 command line follows:
% f90 -v test.f calc.o -lmnd
This command specifies the following:
• The -v option displays the compilation and link passes with their arguments and files, including the libraries passed to ld .
• The file test.f
is passed to the Compaq Fortran compiler for compilation.
The resulting object file is passed to the linker.
• The object file calc.o
is passed directly to the linker. The linker links both object files into an executable program.
2–4 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
• The -lmnd option specifies that the object library for unresolved global references. Note that -lmnd libmnd should be searched is placed after the file names and other options.
2.1.3 Creating and Using Module Files
Compaq Fortran creates a module file for each module declaration and automatically searches for a module file referenced by a USE statement. A module file contains the equivalent of the module source declaration in a post-compiled, binary form.
2.1.3.1 Creating Module Files
When you compile a Compaq Fortran source file that contains module declarations, Compaq Fortran creates a separate file for each module declaration. The name declared in a MODULE statement becomes the base prefix of the file name and is followed by the .mod
suffix.
For example, consider compiling a file that contains the following statement:
MODULE MOD1
The compiler creates a post-compiled module file mod1.mod
directory. An object file is also created for the module.
in the current
Compiling a source file that contains multiple module declarations will create multiple module files, but only a single object file. If you need a separate object file for each module, place only one module declaration in each file.
If a source file does not contain the main program and you only need to create module files, specify the -c option to prevent linking.
An object file is not needed if there are only INTERFACE or constant
(PARAMETER) declarations. It is needed for all other types of declarations including variables.
2.1.3.2 Using Module Files
Once they are created, you can copy module files into an appropriate shared or private directory. You reference a module file specifying the name in a USE statement (use association). For example:
USE MOD1
When selecting a directory location for a set of module files, consider how your application will be built, including:
• Whether the module files need to be available privately, perhaps for testing purposes (not shared).
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–5
• Whether you want the module files to be available to other users on your project or available system-wide (shared).
• Whether test builds and final production builds will use the same directory or different ones.
To locate module files specified in USE statements, the Compaq Fortran compiler searches the following directories:
• The current working directory
• Each directory specified by one or more -Idir options on the command line.
Suppose you need to compile a main program proj_main that contains one or more USE statements. To request that the compiler look for module files in the additional directories /usr/proj_module/f90 and then /usr/common/f90 (after looking in the current directory), enter the following command line:
% f90 proj_main.f90 -I/usr/proj_module/f90 -I/usr/common/f90
If you specify multiple directories, the order of -Idir command line determines the directory search order.
options on the f90
You cannot specify a .mod
file directly on the f90 command line.
Module nesting depth is unlimited. If you will use many modules in a program, check the process and system descriptor limit (see Section 1.1).
For More Information:
• On specific f90 command-line options, including -Idir , see Chapter 3.
• On an example program that uses a module, see Section 1.3.
2.1.4 INCLUDE Statement and Using Include Files
You can create include files with a text editor. If needed, you can copy include files to a shared or private directory.
When selecting a directory location for a set of include files or text libraries, consider how your application is to be built, including:
• Whether the include files need to be available privately, perhaps for testing purposes (not shared).
• Whether you want the files to be available to other users on your project or available system-wide (shared).
• Whether test builds and final production builds will use the same directory or a different one.
2–6 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
Include file names can have any suffix. Use an INCLUDE statement to request that the specified file containing source lines be included by the compiler in place of the INCLUDE statement.
The INCLUDE statement has the following form:
INCLUDE ’name’
INCLUDE ’name.typ’
You can also include a file with a pathname specified with the following form:
INCLUDE ’/pathname/name’
INCLUDE ’/pathname/name.typ’
If you specify the -vms option, you can specify /LIST or /NOLIST after the file name. For example:
INCLUDE ’/pathname/name/LIST’
INCLUDE ’name.f90/NOLIST’
You can also specify the -show include option to request that source lines from included files appear in the listing file (see Section 3.82).
When the INCLUDE Statement Specifies a Pathname
Specifying pathname limits the directory searching done for the named file.
For example, pathname might specify a directory named common_proj.f90
:
/usr/users/proj for the file
INCLUDE ’usr/users/proj/common_proj.f90’
If a directory pathname is specified, only the specified directory is searched.
When the INCLUDE Statement Omits a Pathname
When the INCLUDE statement omits a pathname, one or more directories are searched for the specified file name.
To locate include files specified in INCLUDE statements without a pathname, the Compaq Fortran compiler searches directories in the following order:
1.
The directory that the source file resides in ( -vms option was omitted) or the current process default directory ( -vms option was specified)
2.
Each directory specified by one or more -Idir options.
3.
The /usr/include directory (unless the -noinclude option was specified)
Compaq Fortran allows you to use multiple methods to specify which directories are searched for include files:
• You can specify one or more additional directories for the compiler to search by using one or more -Idir options.
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–7
• You can request that the standard directory by specifying the -noinclude option.
/usr/include not be searched
• Depending on whether the -vms option was specified, the Compaq Fortran compiler searches either in the current process default directory or in the directory containing the source file that references the include file.
2.1.5 Output Files: Executable, Object, and Temporary
The output produced by the f90 command includes:
• An object file (such as line test.o
), if you specify the -c option on the command
• An executable file (such as a.out
), if you omit the -c option
• A listing file (such as test.l
), if you specify the -V option
• One or more module files (such as one or more MODULE statements datadef.mod
), if the source file contains
You control the production of these files by specifying the appropriate options on the f90 command line. Unless you specify the -c option, the compiler generates a single temporary object file (see Section 2.1.5.2), whether you specify one source file or multiple source files separated by blanks. The ld linker is then invoked to link the object file into one executable program file.
If fatal errors are encountered during compilation, or if you specify certain options such as -c , linking does not occur.
2.1.5.1 Naming Output Files
To specify a file name for the executable program file (other than the a.out
), use
-o output option, where output specifies the file name. The following command requests a file name of prog1.out
for the source file test1.f
:
% f90 -o prog1.out test1.f
If you specify the -c option with the -o output option, you rename the object file (not the executable program file). If you specify -c and omit the -o output option, the compiler names the object file using the first specified file name
(with a .o
suffix substituted for the source file suffix).
You can also use the mv command to rename a file.
2–8 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
2.1.5.2 Temporary Files
Temporary files created by the compiler or a preprocessor reside in the directory. For example, when an f90
/tmp command requests that the compiler create an object file and pass it to the linker, the file is created in, and later deleted from, the /tmp directory (unless you specified the -K option).
You can set the environment variable TMPDIR to specify a directory to contain temporary files if /tmp is not acceptable. For performance reasons, use a local disk (rather than a NFS mounted disk) to contain the temporary files.
For information about the commands used to set and unset environment variables, see Appendix B.
To view the file name and directory where each temporary file is created, use the -v option. To create (and retain) object files in your current working directory, use the -c option. Any object files ( .o
files) that you specify on the f90 command line are retained.
The TMPDIR environment variable is also used during program execution (runtime) to specify which directory to contain any scratch files your program creates.
2.1.6 Using Multiple Input Files: Effect on Output Files
When you specify multiple source files, the following options control the production of output files and also influence whether Compaq Fortran can apply certain levels of optimizations:
• The -c option prevents linking. This option also creates and retains the object file in the current working directory.
• The -K option keeps temporary files.
• The -o output option names the output file.
A description of the interaction of these options follows:
• If you omit both the -c and the -K options, the specified Fortran 95/90 source files are compiled together into a single object file and then linked.
Since all the Fortran 95/90 source files are compiled together into a single object file, full interprocedure optimizations can occur. Any temporary object files created by the compiler are deleted by the linker after it creates the executable program. The default optimization level is -O4 (unless you specify -g2 or -g ).
• If you specify the -c option and you want to allow full interprocedure optimizations to occur, you should also specify the -o output option.
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–9
The combination of the -c and -o output options creates a single object file ( output ) from multiple Fortran 95/90 source files, allowing full interprocedure optimizations. The object file can be linked later.
For example, the following command uses both the -c and -o output options to allow interprocedure optimization (explicitly requested by -O4 ):
% f90 -c -o out.o -O4 ax.f bx.f cx.f
• If you specify the if you specify the
-c option without specifying the -o output option, or
-K option, each source file is compiled into an object file, creating one object file for each input source file specified. This is acceptable if you specified no optimization ( -O0 ) or local optimization ( -O1 ).
An information message appears when you specify multiple input files and specify an option that creates multiple object files (such as -c without -o output ) and specify or imply global optimization ( -O2 , -O3 , -O4 , or -O5 ).
• If you specify the using a separate
-c option, you must link the object file(s) later by f90 command. This allows incremental compilation of a large application, perhaps by means of a makefile processed by the command.
make
However, keep in mind that either omitting the -c option or using the -c option in combination with the -o output option provides the benefit of full interprocedure optimizations for compiling multiple Fortran source files.
When you request a listing file ( -V option), a single listing file is created unless you specify the -c option. If you specify the -c option and the -V option, separate listing files are created.
2.1.7 Examples of the f90 and fort Commands
The following examples show the use of the use the fort command instead of the f90 f90 command. On Linux systems, command.
2.1.7.1 Compiling and Linking Multiple Files
The following f90 command compiles the Compaq Fortran free format source files ( aaa.f90
, bbb.f90
, ccc.f90
) into a single temporary object file:
% f90 -V aaa.f90 bbb.f90 ccc.f90
This to ld f90 command invokes the ld linker and passes the temporary object file
, which it uses to produce the executable file a.out
. The Compaq Fortran compiler ( -V option) creates the listing file aaa.l
.
2–10 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
The following f90 command compiles all Compaq Fortran fixed-format (or tabformat) source files with file names that end with .f
into a temporary object file:
% f90 -V *.f
The ld linker produces the a.out
file. The listing file (produced when the option is specified) assumes the name of the first file, aaa.l
.
-V
2.1.7.2 Retaining an Object File and Preventing Linking
The following file f90 command compiles, but does not link, the free-format source typedefs_1.f90
, which contains a MODULE TYPEDEFS_1 statement:
% f90 -c typedefs_1.f90
This command creates files typedefs_1.mod
and typedefs_1.o
. Specifying the
-c option retains the object file typedefs_1.o
and prevents linking.
2.1.7.3 Compiling Fortran 95/90 and C Source Files and Linking an Object File
The following f90 command compiles the free-format Compaq Fortran main program ( myprog.f90
). The main program calls a function written in C and references the module TYPEDEFS_1 with a USE TYPEDEFS_1 statement
(uses the object file created in the previous example). The C routine named utilityx_ is declared in a file named utilityx.c
and the object files are passed to the linker:
. All sources files are compiled
% f90 myprog.f90 typedefs_1.o utilityx.c
This command does the following:
1.
Compiles myprog.f90
with the Compaq Fortran compiler. The module file typedefs_1.mod
is read from the current directory.
2.
The C compiler compiles utilityx.c
.
3.
The ld linker links all three object files together into the executable program named a.out
.
2.1.7.4 Renaming the Output File
The following files f90 command compiles the free-format Compaq Fortran source circle-calc.f90
and sub.f90
together, producing one object file named circle.o
:
% f90 -c -o circle.o circle-calc.f90 sub.f90
The default optimization level ( -O4 ) applies to both source files during compilation and uses the default loop unrolling. Because the specified, the object file is not passed to the
-c option is ld linker and is not deleted. In this case, the named output file is the object file.
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–11
Like the previous command, the following source files: f90 command compiles multiple
% f90 -o circle.out circle-calc.f90 sub.f90
Because the is created.
-c option was omitted, an executable program named circle.out
2.1.7.5 Specifying an Additional Linker Library
The following f90 command compiles a free-format source file myprog.f90
using default optimization, and passes an additional library for the linker to search:
% f90 typedefs_1.o myprog.f90 -lcxml
The file is processed at optimization level file
-O4 and then linked with the object typedefs_1.o
. The -lcxml option instructs the linker to search in the libcxml library for unresolved references (in addition to the standard list of libraries the f90 command passes to the linker).
2.1.7.6 Requesting Additional Optimizations
The following source files f90 command compiles the free-format Compaq Fortran circle-calc.f90
and sub.f90
together using software pipelining optimizations ( -O5 ):
% f90 -O5 -unroll 3 circle-calc.f90 sub.f90
The loops within the program are unrolled 3 times ( -unroll 3 ). Loop unrolling occurs at optimization level -O3 or above.
2.1.8 Using Listing Files
If you expect your program to have compilation errors, you should request a separate listing file ( -V option).
For example, the following command compiles Compaq Fortran source files with file names that end with .f
, and ld creates an executable file named a.out
:
% f90 -V *.f
The listing file assumes the name of the first file. If the first file was named aaa.f
, the listing file is named aaa.l
.
Using a listing file provides such information as the column pointer ( 1 ) that indicates the exact part of the line that caused the error (see Section 2.3.2).
Especially for large files, consider obtaining a printed copy of the listing file you can reference while editing the source file.
2–12 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
For More Information:
• On calling programs written in other languages, see Chapter 11.
• On options for the f90 command, see Chapter 3.
• On f90 command-line options and their categories, see Table 3–1.
2.2 Driver Programs and Passing Options to cc and ld
The f90 and fort driver programs control which software components operate on the files and options specified on the command line and their order of use.
See Figure 2–1.
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–13
Figure 2–1 Driver Programs and Software Components
% f90 −cpp file.f90 file2.c file3.o
− or −
% fort −cpp file.f90 file2.c file3.o
cpp preprocessor
(only if −cpp on command line) f90 or fort Driver
Program
Compaq Fortran
Compiler
(compiles file.f90)
Object files and relevant options, including libraries cc or ccc Compiler
(compiles file2.c) cpp preprocessor
(preprocesses file2.c)
All object files and relevant options, including libraries ld Linker
(links all object files) a.out
(executable program)
ZK−6657A−GE
On Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems, the f90 driver program passes options and files not intended for the Compaq Fortran compiler to the cc driver program.
On Linux Alpha systems, the fort driver program passes options and files not intended for the Compaq Fortran compiler to the cc driver program. On Linux systems, this is a symbolic link to, generally, gcc or ccc .
2–14 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
The f90 (or fort ) driver program does the following:
1.
Examines file name suffix information and groups files and options specified on the command line.
2.
Runs the requested preprocessors (if any) on any Fortran files.
3.
Runs the Compaq Fortran compiler to process Fortran files.
4.
Passes grouped input files, processed source files, and grouped options to the cc driver program in the following order: a.
All options, except for any -lstring options, are passed.
b.
All object files are grouped and passed.
c.
All non-Fortran source files (such as a C program with a grouped and passed.
.c
suffix) are d.
All archive libraries ( .a
suffix) are grouped in the same order specified on the f90 command line and passed.
e.
All shared libraries ( .so
suffix) are grouped in the same order specified on the f90 command line and passed.
f.
All user-specified specified on the
-lstring f90 options are grouped in the same order command line and passed.
g.
All -lstring options automatically added by the f90 command are grouped with other information and passed.
The cc driver program then does the following:
1.
Runs cpp if necessary.
2.
Runs the C compiler cc if necessary.
3.
Passes library-related information to and runs the ld linker.
Upon return to the command line, the of the following status values: f90 or fort driver program returns one
• 0 (zero)—success
• 1—failure
• 2—subprocess failure (preprocessor, the decfort90 compiler, cc , or ld )
• 3—signal
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–15
Because the f90 or fort driver program runs other software components such as the C compiler, error messages may be returned by these other components.
For instance,
Using the -v ld may return a message if it cannot resolve a global reference.
option on the f90 command line can help clarify which component is generating the error.
2.2.1 make Facility
The make facility is often used to automate building large programs. See make (1).
2.2.2 Options Passed to the cc Driver or ld Linker
Certain options are passed directly from the f90 or fort driver program to the cc driver program. These options do not generally apply to compiling Compaq
Fortran source files, but might be used to:
• Process C language source files or intermediate files using the command instead of the cc or ccc command f90 or fort
• Pass information to ld .
With the -W c[c...],arg1[,arg2]... option, you can pass provided by the f90 command directly to ld .
ld options not otherwise
When compiling a program that contains both Compaq Fortran and C language source files, you can usually compile with a single that f90 command. Any options f90 does not recognize are passed to cc , such as the following:
• Compilation environment options, such as
-Yenvironment
-systype name and
• Preprocessor ( cpp ) options, such as -M
• C language compatibility option, such as -migrate
• Memory location (performance) options, such as -D num , -T num , and -taso
• Other options listed in cc (1)
Certain options recognized and used by f90 also apply to option. If needed, you can compile the C files using the cc cc , such as the -On command (instead of the f90 command) with the -c option, and then compile the Compaq Fortran files and the (C language) object files using the f90 command.
For more information on the options processed by ccc (1) (for most options) or ld (1).
cc and ccc , see cc (1) and
2–16 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
2.3 Compiler Limits, Diagnostic Messages, and Error
Conditions
The following sections discuss the compiler limits and error messages from the compiler and linker. Other components can report messages, as described in
Section 2.2.
2.3.1 Compiler Limits
Table 2–3 lists the limits to the size and complexity of a single Compaq Fortran program unit and to individual statements contained within it.
Table 2–3 Compiler Limits
Language Element
Actual number of arguments per CALL or function reference
Arguments in a function reference in a specification expression
Array dimensions
Array construction nesting
Array elements per dimension
Constants; character and Hollerith
Constants; characters read in list-directed I/O
Continuation lines
Data and I/O implied DO nesting
DO and block IF statement nesting (combined)
DO loop index variable
Format group nesting
Format statement length
Fortran source line length
Limit
Limited only by memory constraints.
255
7
20
9,223,372,036,854,775,807
1
2**63-1
=
7198 characters
2048 characters
511
7
128
9,223,372,036,854,775,807 1
2**63-1
=
8
2048 characters fixed form: 72 (or 132 if
-extend_source is in effect) characters free form: 7200 characters
1
Also check available process and system virtual memory; see Section 1.1.
(continued on next page)
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–17
Table 2–3 (Cont.) Compiler Limits
Language Element
INCLUDE file nesting
Labels in computed or assigned GOTO list
Lexical tokens per statement
Named common blocks
Parentheses nesting in expressions
Structure nesting
Symbolic-name length
Limit
20 levels
Limited only by memory constraints.
20000
Limited only by memory constraints.
Limited only by memory constraints.
30
63 characters
The following are usually limited by the amount of process virtual address space available, as determined by system parameters:
• Amount of data storage
• Size of arrays
• Total size of executable programs
For information on increasing your limits, see Section 1.1.
2.3.2 Compiler Diagnostic Messages and Error Conditions
The Compaq Fortran compiler identifies syntax errors and violations of language rules in the source program. If the compiler finds any such errors, it writes messages to the stderr output file and any listing file. If you enter the f90 command interactively, the messages are displayed on your terminal.
Compiler messages have the following format: f90: severity: filename, line n, message-text
[text-in-error]
--------^
The pointer ( ---^ ) indicates the exact place on the source program line where the error was found. For example, the following error message shows the format and message text in a listing file when an END DO statement was omitted: f90: Severe: echar.f, line 7: Unclosed DO loop or IF block
DO I=1,5
--------^
2–18 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
Diagnostic messages usually provide enough information for you to determine the cause of an error and correct it.
2.3.3 Linker Diagnostic Messages and Error Conditions
If the linker detects any errors while linking object files, it displays messages about their cause and severity. If any errors occur, the linker does not produce an executable program file.
Linker messages are descriptive, and you do not normally need additional information to determine the specific error.
On Tru64 UNIX systems, the general format for ld messages is: ld: message-text
On Linux systems, the general format for ld messages is: message-text
The message-text can be on multiple lines and is sometimes accompanied by an f90 or fort error.
Some common errors that occur during linking resemble the following:
• ‘‘An object file has compilation errors.’’
This error occurs when you attempt to link a file that had warnings or errors during compilation. Although you can usually link compiled files for which the compiler generated messages, you should verify that the files will actually produce the output you expect.
• ‘‘The files being linked define more than one transfer address.’’
The linker generates a warning if more than one main program has been defined. For example, this can occur when an extra END statement exists in the program. The executable program file created by the linker in this case can be run; the entry point to which control is transferred is the first one that the linker found.
• ‘‘A reference to a symbol name remains unresolved’’ or ‘‘undefined reference.’’
This error occurs when you omit required file or library names from the or ld f90 command and the linker cannot locate the definition for a specified global symbol reference. Use the -y option to the ld command to determine which files refer to each missing symbol. See ld (1) for more information.
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–19
If an error occurs when you link files, you may be able to correct it by retyping the command string and specifying the correct routines or libraries ( -lstring option, -Ldir command line.
option), or by specifying the object library or object files on the
For More Information:
• On specifying object library or object files on the command line and related information on linking, see Section 2.5.
• On linker messages, see your operating system documentation.
• On run-time messages, see Chapter 8.
2.4 Compilation Control: Statements and Directives
In addition to options on the command line, several statements used in the body of a Fortran program and cpp directives also influence the compilation process.
• The INCLUDE statement incorporates external source code into your programs during the compilation process.
If you omit the directory path from the file specification in the INCLUDE statement, the directory searched depends on whether the -vms specified or omitted. For more information, see Section 2.1.4.
option was
• The USE statement incorporates a post-compiled module file into your programs during the compilation process. For more information, see
Section 2.1.3.
• The OPTIONS statement sets compiler options that would otherwise be specified on the f90 command. The options specified on an OPTIONS statement take precedence over options specified on the f90 command line if a conflict occurs. Each OPTIONS statement applies only to the program unit in which it appears.
• You can use the general cDEC$ directives to perform tasks during compilation. You can specify the following, for example:
The identification field in the object file
An alternate name (alias) for external objects, such as subprograms
Alternate ways of passing arguments and naming for external objects
Common block attributes
The -align attributes for record structures and common blocks
The title and subtitle for listings
2–20 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
Properties for data objects and procedures cDEC$ directives take precedence over the f90 command-line options.
• A # character in column 1 indicates a the -cpp cpp directive when processing if option is specified. You can specify that only preprocessing (no compilation) occurs by specifying the purposes.
-P option, perhaps for debugging
For More Information:
• On Compaq Fortran statements, including INCLUDE, OPTIONS, and
USE, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On cDEC$ directives related to passing arguments and external names, see
Section 11.2.
• On cpp and its directives, see cpp (1).
2.5 Linking Object Libraries
Within a Fortran 95/90 program, references to procedures defined outside your program unit need to be declared as external symbols by using the EXTERNAL statement. (In order for BLOCK DATA statement symbols to be resolved by the linker, the BLOCK DATA symbol must be declared EXTERNAL and not have its data type declared in the source program unit.)
During compilation of multiple source files that will be placed into a single object or executable file, the Compaq Fortran compiler resolves those symbols referenced in one compilation unit and defined in another before linking occurs.
Upon successful compilation of a Compaq Fortran program, the specifies certain libraries for f90 command ld to search for unresolved external symbols in the object file (or files), such as calls to routines in libraries.
Table 2–4 shows the standard f90 library file names that are searched by ld .
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–21
Table 2–4 Libraries Automatically Searched When Using the f90 Command
File Name -lstring Option Form libUfor libfor
-lUfor
-lfor libFutil -lFutil
(TU*X only) libshpf or libphpf (see text) -lshpf , -lphpf , or -lphpfp (see text) libm -lm libots libc
-lots
-lc
(TU*X only)
If you specify -omp or -mp (requests directed parallel processing), the libots3 library is searched.
Which High Performance Fortran (HPF) library is searched
(TU*X only) depends on which command-line option is specified:
If you specify -hpf , libphpf is searched.
If you omit -hpf , libshpf is searched.
The Compaq Fortran kit provides both shared and archive libraries. For a complete list of Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library files, see f90 (1).
2.5.1 Specifying Additional Object Libraries
You can also specify additional object libraries on the command line by using certain options or by providing the file name of the library. These object libraries are also searched by ld for unresolved external references.
When f90 specifies certain libraries to ld , it provides a standard list of f90 library file names to ld . The ld linker tries to locate each of these library file names in a standard list of library directories; ld attempts to locate each object library file name first in one directory, then in the second, and then in the third directory on its search list of directories.
To display a list of the compilers invoked, files processed, and libraries accessed during linking, specify the -v option on the f90 command line.
In addition to an object file created by the compiler, any linker options and object files specified on the f90 command are also passed to the ld linker. The linker loads object files according to the order in which they are specified on the command line. Because of this, you must specify object libraries after all source and object files on the f90 command line.
2–22 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
For more details on the interaction of the see Section 2.2.
f90 command with other components,
To help you identify undefined references to routines or other symbols in an object file, consider using the nm command. For instance, the following nm command filtered by the grep command lists all undefined (U) symbols:
% nm -o ex.o | grep U
If the symbol is undefined, a ‘‘U’’ appears in the column before the symbol name. Any symbols with a U in their names are also displayed by this use of grep .
You can control the libraries to be searched with these methods:
• To specify additional object library file names for ld to search, use the
-lstring option at the end of the f90 command line. Each occurrence of the -lstring option specifies an additional file name that is added to the list of object libraries for ld to locate.
• In addition to the standard directories in which file names, you can use the -Ldir ld tries to locate the library option to specify another directory.
Unlike the -lstring option that adds an object library file name for ld to search, the -Ldir option adds an additional directory in which for library file names.
ld will look
The standard the ld directories are searched after the directories specified by
-Ldir option.
The following example specifies the additional object library path
/usr/lib/mytest :
% f90 simtest.f -L/usr/lib/mytest
For a list of the standard ld directories searched, see Section 3.58.
• You can specify the pathname and file name of an object library as you would specify any file. Specifying each object library that resides in special directories in this manner is an alternative to specifying the library by using the -lstring or -Ldir option. Specifying the pathname and file name of an object library can reduce the amount of searching the linker must do to locate all the needed object files.
For instance, instead of specifying the options -L/usr/jones and -lfft , this example specifies the directory path and file name of the library file:
% f90 main.o more.o rest.o /usr/jones/libfft.a
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–23
In certain cases, you may need to specify the pathname and file name instead of using the -lstring or -Ldir options for the linker to resolve global symbols with shared libraries.
• You can indicate that ld at all by specifying the should not search its list of standard directories
-L option. When you do so, you must specify all libraries on the f90 command line in some form, including the directory for f90 standard libraries.
To specify all libraries, you might use the the
-L option in combination with
-Ldir option on the same f90 command line.
2.5.2 Specifying Types of Object Libraries
External references found in an archive library result in the referenced routine being included in the resulting executable program file at link time.
External references found in a shared object library result in a special link to that library being included in the resulting executable program file, instead of the actual routine itself. When you run the program, this link gets resolved by either using the shared library in memory (if it already exists) or loading it into memory from disk.
Certain f90 options influence whether ld searches for an archive ( .a
) or shared object ( .so
) library on the standard list of f90 libraries, as well as any additional libraries specified by using the -lstring or -Ldir options:
• The -call_shared option is the default. It indicates that .so
files are searched before .a
files. As ld attempts to resolve external symbols, it looks at the shared library before the corresponding archive library. For instance, /usr/shlib/libc.so
is searched before /usr/lib/libc.a
.
References to symbols found in memory at run time.
.so
libraries are dynamically loaded into
References to symbols found in program file at link time.
.a
libraries are loaded into the executable
• The -non_shared option indicates that only .a
files are searched, so the object file created contains static references to external routines. These static references are loaded into the executable program at link time, not at run time. Corresponding .so
files are not searched.
The following example requests that the standard instead of the corresponding .so
files: f90 .a
files be searched
% f90 -non_shared main.f rest.o
• The -shared option requests the creation of an executable program to be included in a shared library.
2–24 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
If you specify the -c option to inhibit linking, an object file ( created that can subsequently be processed by ld
.o
file) is to create a shared library.
If you omit the file).
-c option, the f90 command creates a shared library ( .so
In either case, use the -o option to name the resulting object file or shared library with the correct file name and suffix.
For more information about creating a shared library using either the command or the f90 ld command, see Section 2.6, Creating Shared Libraries.
2.5.3 Specifying Shared Object Libraries
When you link your program with a shared library, all symbols must be referenced before ld searches the shared library. You should always specify libraries at the end of the f90 command line, after all file names. Unless you specify the -non_shared option, shared libraries will be searched before the corresponding archive libraries.
For instance, the following command generates an error if the file references routines in the library libX : rest.o
% f90 -call_shared test.f -lX rest.o
The correct command specifies the library at the end of the line, as follows:
% f90 -call_shared test.f rest.o -lX
Link errors can occur with symbols that are defined twice, as when both an archive and a shared object library are specified on the same command line. In general, specify any archive libraries after the last file name, followed by any shared libraries at the end of the command line.
Before you reference a shared library at run time, it must be installed. See
Section 2.6, Creating Shared Libraries.
2.6 Creating Shared Libraries
To create a shared library from a Fortran source file, process the files using the f90 command:
• You must specify the -shared option to create the .so
file.
• You can specify the -o output option to name the output file.
• If you omit the from the f90
-c option, you will create a shared library ( command line in a single step.
.so
file) directly
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–25
If you also omit the -o output option, the file name of the first Fortran file on the command line is used to create the file name of the .so
file. You can specify additional options associated with shared library creation.
• If you specify the can name with the
-c option, you will create an object file ( .o
file) that you
-o option. To create a shared library, process the .o
file with ld , specifying certain options associated with shared library creation.
You can specify multiple source and object files when creating a shared library by using the f90 command.
2.6.1 Creating a Shared Library with a Single f90 Command
You can create a shared library ( .so
) file with a single f90 command:
% f90 -shared octagon.f90
The -shared source file is option is required to create a shared library. The name of the octagon.f90
. You can specify multiple source files and object files.
The -o option was omitted, so the name of the shared library file is octagon.so
.
2.6.2 Creating a Shared Library with f90 and ld Commands
You first must create the .o
file, such as octagon.o
in the following example:
% f90 -O3 -c octagon.f90
The file octagon.o
is then used as input to the ld command to create the shared library named octagon.so
:
% ld -shared -no_archive octagon.o \
-lUfor -lfor -lFutil -lm -lots -lc
Note that the -no_archive option is available only on Tru64 UNIX systems.
• The -shared option is required to create a shared library.
• The -no_archive option
(TU*X only) indicates that ld should not search archive libraries to resolve external names (only shared libraries).
• The name of the object file is
( .o
) files.
octagon.o
. You can specify multiple object
• The the
-lUfor and subsequent options are the standard list of libraries that f90 command would have otherwise passed to ld . When you create a shared library, all symbols must be resolved. For more information about the standard list of libraries used by Compaq Fortran, see Section 2.5.
2–26 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
2.6.3 Choosing How to Create a Shared Library
Consider the following when deciding whether to use a single f90 command
( -c omitted) or both the f90 ( -c present) and ld commands to create a shared library:
• Certain ld options may not be available from the f90 command line. If you need to use those options, use the two-command method (specify f90
-c and subsequently use ld ). Such options include -check_registry and
-update_registry (see ld (1)) that are available only on Tru64 UNIX systems.
• If you use a single f90 command with need to specify the standard list of option.
f90
-shared and omit -c , you do not libraries by using the -lstring
In addition to the options shown in Section 2.6.1 and Section 2.6.2, certain other ld options may be needed. For instance, to optimize shared library startup, use the -update_registry and -check_registry options
(TU*X only)
, which preassign a starting address in virtual memory to a shared library using the file /usr/shlib/so_locations .
For More Information:
• On the relevant ld options, see the ld (1) reference page.
• On the standard list of libraries used by Compaq Fortran, see Section 2.5.
2.6.4 Shared Library Restrictions
When creating a shared library with ld , be aware of the following restrictions:
• Shared libraries must not be linked with archive libraries.
When creating a shared library, you can only depend on other shared libraries for resolving external references. If you need to reference a routine that currently resides in an archive library, either put that routine in a separate shared library or include it in the shared library being created. You can specify multiple object ( .o
) files when creating a shared library.
To put a routine in a separate shared library, obtain the source or object file for that routine, recompile if necessary, and create a separate shared library. You can specify an object file when recompiling with the command or when creating the shared library with the ld f90 command.
To include a routine in the shared library being created, put the routine
(source or object file) with other source files that make up the shared library and recompile if necessary.
Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs 2–27
Then create the shared library, making sure that you specify the file containing that routine either during recompilation or when creating the shared library. You can specify an object file when recompiling with the f90 command or when creating the shared library with the ld command.
• When creating shared libraries, all symbols must be defined (resolved).
Because all symbols must be defined to ld when you create a shared library, you must specify the shared libraries on the ld command line, including all standard Compaq Fortran libraries. The list of standard
Compaq Fortran libraries might be specified by using the as in the previous example in this section.
-lstring option,
For other restrictions imposed by the operating system, see the Compaq Tru64
UNIX Programmer’s Guide.
2.6.5 Installing Shared Libraries
(TU*X only)
Once the shared library is created, it must be installed for private or systemwide use before you run a program that refers to it:
• To install a private shared library (when you are testing, for example), set the environment variable LD_LIBRARY_PATH, as described in loader (5).
• To install a system-wide shared library, place the shared library file in one of the standard directory paths used by ld (see loader (5) or Section 3.58).
For complete information on installing shared libraries, see the Compaq Tru64
UNIX Programmer’s Guide.
2–28 Compiling and Linking Compaq Fortran Programs
3
f90 and fort Command-Line Options
This chapter describes f90 and fort command-line options in detail.
•
•
Note
To invoke the Compaq Fortran compiler, use: f90 fort on Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems command on Linux Alpha systems
This chapter uses f90 to indicate invoking Compaq Fortran on both systems, so replace this command with fort if you are working on a
Linux Alpha system.
To invoke the Compaq C compiler, use:
•
• cc on Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems ccc on Linux Alpha systems
This chapter uses cc to indicate invoking Compaq C on both systems, so replace this command with ccc if you are working on a Linux Alpha system.
3.1 Overview of Command-Line Options
Options to the f90 command affect how the compiler processes a file in conjunction with the file name suffix information described in Section 2.1.1.
The simplest form of the f90 command is often sufficient.
You can override some options specified on the command line by using the
OPTIONS statement in your Fortran source program. The options specified by the OPTIONS statement affect only the program unit where the statement occurs.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–1
If you compile parts of your program by using multiple f90 commands, options that affect the execution of the program should be used consistently for all compilations, especially if data is shared or passed between procedures. For example:
• The same data alignment needs to be used for data passed or shared by module definition (such as user-defined structures) or common block. Use the same version of the -align option for all compilations (see Section 3.3).
• The program might contain INTEGER, LOGICAL, REAL, COMPLEX, or DOUBLE PRECISION declarations without a kind parameter or size specifier that is passed or shared by module definition or common block.
You must consistently use the options that control the size of such numeric data declarations. For information about these options, see:
Section 3.53 for INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations
Section 3.78 for REAL and COMPLEX declarations
Section 3.34 for DOUBLE PRECISION declarations
• On Tru64 UNIX systems, you can specify the -hpf num option (to request code generation for parallel HPF execution) for multiple compilation units.
Some options consist of two words separated by a space, while others may have words joined by an underscore ( _ ). Most options can be abbreviated. For example, you can abbreviate -check output_conversion to -check out (usually four characters or more).
3.2 f90 and fort Command Categories and Options
Table 3–1 lists categories of command-line options, the f90 and fort line options, and the sections in which they are described in detail.
command-
Table 3–1 f90 and fort Command Categories and Options
Category Option Name and Section in this Manual
Assembler File
Data Size
-S (see Section 3.81)
-i2 , -i4 , -i8 , -integer_size num (see Section 3.53)
-r8 , -r16 , -real_size num , (see Section 3.78)
-double_size num , (see Section 3.34)
For a summary of available data types, see Chapter 9.
(continued on next page)
3–2 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
Table 3–1 (Cont.) f90 and fort Command Categories and Options
Category Option Name and Section in this Manual
-fuse_xref , (see Section 3.47) (TU*X only) Compaq FUSE Cross-
Reference File
Debugging and Symbol
Table
Data Accuracy and
Floating-Point Exceptions
Language and Run-Time
Compatibility
Linking, Loading, and
Output File Naming
-d_lines (see Section 3.33)
-g0 , -g1 , -g2 , -g , -g3 , and -ladebug (see Section 3.48)
Also see Chapter 4.
-assume noaccuracy_sensitive (see Section 3.12)
-check nopower (see Section 3.25)
-double_size num (see Section 3.34)
-fast (see Section 3.40)
-fpen (see Section 3.44)
-fpconstant (see Section 3.43)
-fp_reorder (see Section 3.12)
-fprm keyword (see Section 3.46)
-intconstant (see Section 3.55)
-math_library keyword (see Section 3.61)
-r8 , -r16 , -real_size num (see Section 3.78)
-speculate keyword
(TU*X only) (see Section 3.84)
-synchronous_exceptions (see Section 3.86)
-1 , -66 , -f66 , -onetrip (see Section 3.37)
-altparam (see Section 3.66)
-assume dummy_aliases (see Section 3.9)
-assume noprotect_constants (see Section 3.13)
-f77rtl (see Section 3.39)
-mixed_str_len_arg (see Section 3.62)
-std, std95 (see Section 3.85)
-vms (see Section 3.98)
-assume nounderscore (see Section 3.15)
-assume no2underscores (see Section 3.16)
-c (see Section 3.19)
-call_shared , -non_shared , -shared (see
Section 3.20)
-L (see Section 3.57)
-Ldir (see Section 3.58)
-lstring (see Section 3.59)
-names keyword (see Section 3.65)
-o output (see Section 3.71)
-U (see Section 3.91)
-v (see Section 3.96)
-Wl,-xxx (see Section 3.99)
Also see Section 2.5.
(continued on next page) f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–3
Table 3–1 (Cont.) f90 and fort Command Categories and Options
Category Option Name and Section in this Manual
Listing File
Module and Include File
Directory Searching
Miscellaneous
Nonnative Unformatted
Data File Conversion and
Use
Parallel HPF Execution
Performance (TU*X only)
Parallel Directives
Execution (TU*X only)
-show code , -show include , -machine_code (see
Section 3.82)
-source_listing (see Section 3.83)
-V (see Section 3.95)
-vms (applies to INCLUDE statements with /LIST or
/NOLIST) (see Section 3.98)
Also see Appendix C.
-Idir , -noinclude (see Section 3.52)
-module directory (see Section 3.63),
Also see Section 2.1.3 (module files) and Section 2.1.4
(include files).
-nohpf_main (TU*X only) (see Section 3.68)
-norun (see Section 3.70)
-version (see Section 3.97)
-what (see Section 3.97)
-assume byterecl (see Section 3.7)
-convert keyword (see Section 3.30)
Also see Chapter 10.
-hpf , -hpf n , -assume nozsize , -nearest_neighbor num , -nonearest_neighbor , -show hpf (see
Section 3.50)
-mp (see Section 3.64)
-omp (see Section 3.74)
-assume cc_omp (see Section 3.8)
(continued on next page)
3–4 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
Table 3–1 (Cont.) f90 and fort Command Categories and Options
Category Option Name and Section in this Manual
Performance Optimization
(Nonparallel and Parallel)
Preprocessor
Profiling, Feedback Files, and cord
Record Output
Recursion and Data Storage
-align keyword (see Section 3.3)
-annotations keyword (see Section 3.4)
-arch keyword (see Section 3.5)
-assume noaccuracy_sensitive (see Section 3.12)
-assume dummy_aliases (see Section 3.9)
-fast (see Section 3.40)
-fpen (see Section 3.44)
-fp_reorder ( -assume noaccuracy_sensitive ) (see
Section 3.12)
-fprm keyword (see Section 3.46)
-inline type , -noinline (see Section 3.54)
-math_library keyword (see Section 3.61)
-om (see Section 3.73)
-O0 , -O1 , -O2 , -O3 , -O4 , -O , -O5 (see Section 3.72)
-pipeline (see Section 3.76)
-speculate keyword
(TU*X only) (see Section 3.84)
-synchronous_exceptions (see Section 3.86)
-transform_loops (see Section 3.89)
-tune keyword (see Section 3.90)
-unroll num (see Section 3.94)
Also see Section 5.1.2.
-cpp , -Dname , -fpp (see Section 3.45), -I , -Idir ,
-K , -M , -P , -Uname (see Section 3.31), -Wp,-xxx (see
Section 3.31.3)
-p0 , -p1 or -p , -pg (see Section 3.77)
-gen_feedback , -feedback file , -cord
(TU*X only)
(see Section 3.41)
-assume buffered_io (see Section 3.6)
-ccdefault keyword (see Section 3.21)
-automatic , -static (see Section 3.18)
-recursive (see Section 3.79)
(continued on next page) f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–5
Table 3–1 (Cont.) f90 and fort Command Categories and Options
Category Option Name and Section in this Manual
Run-Time Messages and
Checking
Shared Access to Data
Source Form and Column
Use
Threaded Applications
VMS Run Time
Warning Messages at
Compile Time
-check arg_temp_created , (see Section 3.22)
-C , -check bounds (see Section 3.23)
-check noformat (see Section 3.24)
-check nooutput_conversion (see Section 3.27)
-check overflow (see Section 3.28)
-check nopower (see Section 3.25)
-check underflow
(TU*X only) (see Section 3.29)
-fpen (see Section 3.44)
-synchronous_exceptions (see Section 3.86)
Also see the options related to ‘‘Floating-point exceptions, rounding, and accuracy’’ in this table.
-granularity keyword , (see Section 3.49)
-d_lines (see Section 3.33)
-extend_source (see Section 3.36)
-fixed , -free (see Section 3.42)
-pad_source (see Section 3.75)
-granularity keyword , (see Section 3.49)
-pthread
(TU*X only)
(see Section 3.88)
-reentrancy keyword (see Section 3.80)
-threads (TU*X only) (see Section 3.88)
-vms (see Section 3.98)
-error_limit num , -noerror_limit (see Section 3.35)
-v (see Section 3.96)
-warn keyword
-w1 (see Section 3.100)
-warning_severity (see Section 3.101)
3.3 -align keyword — Data Alignment
Use the -align keyword options to control the alignment of fields associated with common blocks, derived-type structures, and record structures.
If you omit the -align keyword , -fast , and -vms options:
• Individual data items (not part of a common block or other structure) are naturally aligned.
• Fields in derived-type (user-defined) structures (where the SEQUENCE statement is omitted) are naturally aligned.
• Fields in Compaq Fortran record structures are naturally aligned.
3–6 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
• Data items in common blocks are not naturally aligned, unless data declaration order has been planned and checked to ensure that all data items are naturally aligned.
Although Compaq Fortran always aligns local data items on natural boundaries, certain data declaration statements and unaligned arguments can force unaligned data.
Note
For optimal performance on Alpha systems, make sure your data is aligned naturally (see Section 5.4).
The compiler issues messages when it detects unaligned data (unless you specify -warn noalignments ). For information about the causes of unaligned data and detection at run time, see Section 5.4, Data Alignment
Considerations.
If necessary, you can specify either -align records the same command line as one of the following: or -align norecords
-align nocommons , on
-align commons , or -align dcommons . For example:
% f90 -align dcommons -align norecords main.f90
If you specify -fast and omit the -align keyword options, the compiler uses:
-align dcommons -align records -align sequence
If you specify compiler uses:
-vms and omit the -fast and -align keyword options, the
-align commons -align norecords -align nosequence
If no -align option is specified, the default is same as specifying -align rec8byte .
-align records , which is the
The following options apply:
-align all
Tells the compiler to add padding bytes wherever possible to obtain the natural alignment of data items in common blocks and structures.
-align all essentially turns on these options: -align nocommons , -align dcommons , -align records , -align sequence , -align norec1byte , -align norec2byte , -align norec4byte , and -align norec8byte .
-align commons
Aligns the data items of all common blocks on natural boundaries up to 4 bytes.
The default is -align nocommons .
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–7
-align dcommons
Aligns the data items of all common blocks on natural boundaries up to 8 bytes instead of the default byte boundary.
The default is -align nodcommons .
If your command line includes the compiler ignores
-std , -std90 , or -std95 options, then the
-align dcommons . See Section 3.85.
-align none
Tells the compiler not to add padding bytes anywhere in common blocks or structures.
-align none essentially turns on these options: -align nocommons , -align nodcommons , -align norecords , -align nosequence , -align norec1byte ,
-align norec2byte , -align norec4byte , and -align norec8byte .
-align recNbyte
Aligns fields of records and components of derived types on the smaller of the size boundary specified (N can be 1, 2, 4, or 8) or the boundary that will naturally align them.
Specifying -align recNbyte does not affect whether common blocks are naturally aligned or packed.
-align norecords
Aligns fields witin record structures and components of derived types on the next available byte boundary instead of the default natural boundaries.
The default is -align records , which requests alignment of the fields of all derived-type data and RECORD data blocks on natural boundaries up to 8 bytes.
-align sequence
Tells the compiler that components of derived types with the SEQUENCE attribute will obey whatever alignment rules are currently in use. The default alignment rules align unsequenced components on natural boundaries.
The default value of -align nosequence means that components of derived types with the SEQUENCE attribute will be packed, regardless of whatever alignment rules are currently in use.
Specifying -fast sets -align sequence so that components of derived types with the SEQUENCE attribute will be naturally aligned for improved performance. Specifying -align all command line includes the -std , also sets
-std90 , or
-align sequence
-std95
. If your options, then the compiler ignores -align sequence . See Section 3.85.
3–8 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
For More Information:
• On general performance guidelines, see Section 5.7, Additional Source Code
Guidelines for Run-Time Efficiency.
• On alignment, see Section 5.4, Data Alignment Considerations.
• On intrinsic data types, see Chapter 9, Data Types and Representation.
3.4 -annotations keyword — Place Optimization Information in Source Listing
The -annotations keyword option specifies that annotations will be added to the source listing file. These annotations indicate which of a set of optimizations the compiler applied to particular parts of the source file. Note that some of the values of keyword below may exist for optimizations that are not supported on your platform. If so, the source listing file contains no corresponding annotations.
You can view the resulting annotations in the source listing file to see what optimizations the compiler performed or why the compiler was not able to optimize a particular code sequence.
The default is listing file.
-noannotations , which places no annotations in the source
The -annotations option requires a keyword.
The following options apply:
-annotations none
Same as -noannotations , which is the default value.
-annotations all
Selects all of the annotations.
-annotations code
Annotates the machine code listing with descriptions of special instructions used for prefetching, alignment, and so on.
-annotations detail
Provides, where available, an additional level of annotation detail.
-annotations feedback
Annotates the source listing if profile-directed feedback optimizations were used.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–9
-annotations inlining
Indicates where code for a called procedure was expanded inline.
-annotations loop_transforms
Indicates where advanced loop nest optimizations have been applied to improve cache performance (unroll and jam, loop fusion, loop interchange, and so on).
-annotations loop_unrolling
Indicates where a loop was unrolled (contents expanded multiple times).
-annotations prefetching
Indicates where special instructions were used to reduce memory latency.
-annotations shrinkwrapping
Annotates the source listing if code establishing routine context was removed.
-annotations software_pipelining
Indicates where instructions have been rearranged to make optimal use of the processor’s functional units. See Section 5.8.6, Software Pipelining.
-annotations tail_calls
Indicates an optimization where a call from one routine to another can be replaced with a jump.
-annotations tail_recursion
Indicates an optimization that eliminates unnecessary routine context for a recursive call.
3.5 -arch keyword — Specify Type of Code Instructions
Generated
Use the -arch keyword option to specify the type of Alpha architecture code instructions to be generated for the program unit being compiled.
Compaq Tru64 UNIX provides an operating system kernel that includes an instruction emulator. This emulator allows new instructions, not implemented on the host processor chip, to execute and produce correct results. Applications using emulated instructions will run correctly, but may incur significant software emulation overhead at run time.
All Alpha processors implement a core set of instructions. Certain Alpha processor versions include additional instruction set extensions, such as:
BWX - Byte/Word manipulation instructions
MAX - Multimedia instructions
3–10 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
FIX - Square root and floating-point conversion
CIX - Count
If you omit the -arch keyword , -arch generic is used.
The following options apply:
-arch generic
Generates instructions that are appropriate for most Alpha processors. This is the default.
Programs compiled with the generic keyword run on all implementations of the Alpha architecture without any instruction emulation overhead.
-arch host
Generates instructions for the machine the compiler is running on (for example, ev56 instructions on an ev56 processor and ev4 instructions on an ev4 processor).
Programs compiled with the host keyword run on other implementations of the Alpha architecture might encounter instruction emulation overhead.
-arch ev4
Generates instructions for ev4 processors (for 21064, 20164A, 21066, and 21068 chips).
Applications compiled with this option will not incur any emulation overhead on any Alpha processor.
-arch ev5
Generates instructions for ev5 processors (some 21164 chips that use only the base set of Alpha instructions, with no extensions).
Applications compiled with this option will not incur any emulation overhead on any Alpha processor.
-arch ev56
Generates instructions for ev56 processors (the 21164 chips that use the BWX extension).
This option permits the compiler to generate any ev4 instruction plus any instruction contained in the BWX extension.
Applications compiled with this option might incur emulation overhead on ev4 and ev5 processors, but will still run correctly.
-arch pca56
Generates instructions for pca56 processors (21164PC chips).
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–11
This option permits the compiler to generate any ev4 instruction plus any instruction contained in the BWX or MAX extension.
Applications compiled with this option may incur emulation overhead on ev4, ev5, and ev56 processors, but will still run correctly.
-arch ev6
Generates instructions for ev6 processors (21264 chips).
This option permits the compiler to generate any ev6 instruction, including instructions contained in the BWX, MAX, and FIX extensions.
Applications compiled with this option may incur emulation overhead on ev4, ev5, ev56, and pca56 processors, but will still run correctly.
-arch ev67
Generates instructions for ev67 processors (21264A chips).
This option permits the compiler to generate any ev67 instruction, including instructions contained in the BWX, MAX, FIX, and CIX extensions.
Applications compiled with this option may incur emulation overhead on ev4, ev5, ev56, ev6, and pca56 processors, but will still run correctly.
3.6 -assume buffered_io — Buffered Output
Use the -assume buffered_io option so that, at run time, the default value
BUFFERED=’YES’ applies to opening sequential output files. As a result, write statements to these disk files will first fill buffers with data before the run-time library routines move it to the files and empty the buffers.
The default value is -assume nobuffered_io . Its effect is to have the run-time library routines move data to sequential disk files immediately.
For More Information:
• See Section 5.6.7, Efficient Use of Record Buffers and Disk I/O.
3.7 -assume byterecl — Units for Unformatted File Record
Length
Specifying the -assume byterecl option:
• Indicates that the OPEN statement RECL value for unformatted files is in byte units. If you omit -assume byterecl , Compaq Fortran expects the OPEN statement RECL value for unformatted files to be in longword
(4-byte) units.
3–12 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
• Returns the record length value for an INQUIRE by output item list
(unformatted files) in byte units. If you omit -assume byterecl , Compaq
Fortran returns the record length for an INQUIRE by output item list in longword (4-byte) units.
• Returns the record length value for an INQUIRE by unit or file name
(unformatted files) in byte units if all of the following occur:
You had specified -assume byterecl for the code being executed
The file was opened with an OPEN statement and a RECL specifier
The file is still open (connected) when the INQUIRE occurs.
If any one of the preceding conditions are not met, Compaq Fortran returns the RECL value for an INQUIRE in longword (4-byte) units.
The default is -assume nobyterecl .
For More Information:
• On converting and using nonnative unformatted data files, see Chapter 10.
• On the INQUIRE statement, see Section 7.6.
3.8 -assume cc_omp — Enable Conditional Compilation for
OpenMP
(TU*X only)
This option enables conditional compilation as defined by the OpenMP
Fortran API. (When !$space appears in free-form source or !$spaces appears in column 1 of fixed-form source, the rest of the line is accepted as a Fortran line.)
If -omp is specified, the default is -assume cc_omp ; otherwise, the default is
-assume nocc_omp .
3.9 -assume dummy_aliases — Dummy Variable Aliasing
If you specify the -assume dummy_aliases option, the compiler must assume that dummy (formal) arguments to procedures share memory locations with other dummy arguments or with variables shared through use association, host association, or common block use.
These program semantics do not strictly obey the Fortran 95/90 standards and they slow performance.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–13
If you omit -assume dummy_aliases , the compiler does not need to make these assumptions, which results in better run-time performance. However, omitting
-assume dummy_aliases can cause some programs that depend on such aliases to fail or produce wrong answers.
You only need to compile the called subprogram with -assume dummy_aliases .
If you compile a program that uses dummy aliasing with -assume nodummy_aliases in effect, the run-time behavior of the program becomes unpredictable. In such programs, the results depend on the exact optimizations that are performed. In some cases, normal results occur; however, in other cases, results differ because the values used in computations involving the offending aliases differ.
The default is -assume nodummy_aliases .
For More Information:
• See Section 5.9.8, Dummy Aliasing Assumption.
3.10 -assume gfullpath — Source File Path for Debugging
The -assume gfullpath information.
option includes the full source file path in debugger
The default is -assume nogfullpath .
3.11 -assume minus0 — Standard Semantics for Minus Zero
The -assume minus0 option tells the compiler to use Fortran 95 standard semantics for the treatment of IEEE floating value
00:0 in the SIGN intrinsic.
This applies if the processor is capable of differentiating
00:0 from
+0:0
.
The default is -assume nominus0 , which tells the compiler to use Fortran 90/77 standard semantics in the SIGN intrinsic to treat 00:0 and +0:0 as 0:0 .
3.12 -assume noaccuracy_sensitive, -fp_reorder — Reorder
Floating-Point Calculations
Specifying -assume noaccuracy_sensitive allows the compiler to reorder code based on algebraic identities (inverses, associativity, and distribution) to improve performance. The numeric results can be slightly different from the default ( -assume accuracy_sensitive ) because of the way intermediate results are rounded.
The -assume noaccuracy_sensitive and -fp_reorder options are synonymous.
3–14 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
If you omit -assume noaccuracy_sensitive and omit -fast , the compiler uses a limited number of rules for calculations, which might prevent some optimizations.
The default is was specified).
-assume accuracy_sensitive or -no_fp_reorder (unless -fast
For More Information:
• See Section 5.9.7, Arithmetic Reordering Optimizations.
3.13 -assume noprotect_constants — Remove Protection from Constants
The -assume noprotect_constants option tells the compiler to pass a copy of a constant actual argument. As a result, the called routine can modify this copy, even though the Fortran standard prohibits such modification. The calling routine does not modify the constant.
The default is -assume protect_constants , which results in passing of a constant actual argument. Any attempt to modify it results in an error.
3.14 -assume nosource_include — INCLUDE file search
This option determines where the compiler searches for INCLUDE files.
If you specify -assume nosource_include , the compiler searches the default directory for INCLUDE files (the same as if -vms is used).
The default is -assume source_include , which instructs the compiler to search the directory where the source files are located.
3.15 -assume nounderscore — Underscore on External
Names
Specifying -assume nounderscore prevents the compiler from appending an underscore ( _ ) to the following external user-defined names:
• The main program name
• Named common blocks
• BLOCK DATA blocks
• Names implicitly or explicitly declared external
The name of a blank (unnamed) common block remains
Fortran intrinsic names remain the same.
_BLNK_ _ and Compaq f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–15
You can also use the cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES ALIAS directive to change how individual external names are spelled.
The default is -assume underscore , in which case Compaq Fortran appends an underscore to calls to most external names.
3.16 -assume no2underscores — Two Underscores on
External Names
(L*X only)
Specifying -assume no2underscores prevents the compiler from appending two underscores ( _ _ ) to the following external user-defined names:
• The main program name
• Named common blocks
• BLOCK DATA blocks
• Names implicitly or explicitly declared external
The name of a blank (unnamed) common block remains
Fortran intrinsic names remain the same.
_BLNK_ _ and Compaq
You can also use the cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES ALIAS directive to change how individual external names are spelled.
The default is -assume 2underscores , in which case Compaq Fortran appends two underscores to calls to most external names.
If -assume nounderscore is specified, -assume 2underscores and -assume no2underscores are ignored.
3.17 -assume pthreads_lock — Thread Lock Selection for
Parallel Execution
(TU*X only)
The -assume pthreads_lock option lets you select the kind of locking used for an unnamed critical section (under -mp and -omp ). In the rare event that your program should need more restrictive locking, use this option to set
_OtsPthreadLock , which locks out other pthreads in addition to all critical sections.
The default is -assume nopthreads_lock , which results in much faster compile times. Using the default creates a bifcall (enter_critical) to set
_OtsGlobalLock , which does not lock out other pthreads, but does provide a single lock for all unnamed critical sections.
3–16 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.18 -automatic, -static — Local Variable Allocation
The -automatic and -static options control how local variables are allocated.
Specifying -automatic puts local variables on the run-time stack. Specifying
-automatic sets -recursive .
Specifying -static causes all local variables to be statically allocated.
A subprogram declared with the RECURSIVE keyword is always recursive
(whether you specify or omit the -static option).
The default is -static or -noautomatic .
3.19 -c — Inhibit Linking and Retain Object File
Use the -c option to suppress the loading phase of the compilation and force an object file to be produced even if only one program is compiled. If you omit
-c , the linker creates an executable program and any temporary object files are deleted.
If you specify the files, a single
-o output option with the -c option and multiple Fortran
.o
file is created, allowing full interprocedure optimizations.
However, if you specify multiple source files and the the
-c option without
-o output option, multiple object files are created and interprocedure optimizations do not occur.
3.20 -call_shared, -non_shared, -shared — Shared Library
Use
These options relate to shared libraries.
The default is -call_shared .
The following options apply:
-call_shared
Causes the linker to search for unresolved references in shared libraries ( .so
files) before archive libraries ( .a
files).
If the unresolved reference is found in the shared library, the unresolved reference is resolved when the program is run (during program loading), reducing executable program size. For more information on related options, see Section 2.5.2.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–17
-non_shared
Requests that the linker search only in archive libraries ( .a
files) for unresolved references; shared library ( .so
) files are not searched. Object files ( .o
suffix) from archives are included in the executable produced.
-shared
Produces a dynamic shareable object that can be included into a shared library.
This includes creating all of the tables for run-time linking and resolving references to other specified shared objects. The object created can be used by the linker to produce a shareable object that other dynamic executables can use at run time. To explicitly name the resulting object file or shared library, use the -o option.
If you also specify the otherwise, a .so
-c option when you use file is created.
-shared , a .o
file is created;
For More Information:
• See Section 2.5.2, Specifying Types of Object Libraries.
• See Section 2.6, Creating Shared Libraries.
3.21 -ccdefault keyword — Carriage Control for Terminals
The -ccdefault keyword options specify default carriage control when a terminal displays a file.
The following options apply:
-ccdefault fortran
Results in normal Fortran interpretation of the first character, such as the character ‘‘0’’ resulting in a blank line before output.
-ccdefault list
Results in one line feed between records.
-ccdefault none
Results in no carriage-control processing.
-ccdefault default
Specifies that the compiler is to use the default carriage-control setting. This is the default value of -ccdefault .
3–18 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
This default setting can be affected by the -vms option as follows:
• If -vms -ccdefault default is specified and the file is formatted and the unit is connected to a terminal, then normal Fortran interpretation of the first character occurs (same as -ccdefault fortran ).
• If -novms -ccdefault default occurs (same as is specified, then LIST carriage control
-ccdefault list ).
3.22 -check arg_temp_created — Check for Copy of
Temporary Arguments
Specifying -check arg_temp_created generates code to check if actual arguments are copied into temporary storage before routine calls. If a copy is made at run time, an informative message is displayed.
The default is -check noarg_temp_created .
3.23 -check bounds, -C, -check_bounds — Boundary
Run-Time Checking
Specifying -check bounds or -C or -check_bounds (all are synonymous) generates code to perform run-time checks on array subscript and character substring expressions. A run-time message is reported if the expression is outside the addresses of the dimension of the array or outside the length of the string.
The default ( -check nobounds ) suppresses range checking.
For array bounds, each individual dimension is checked. Array bounds checking is not performed for arrays that are dummy arguments in which the last dimension bound is specified as * or when both upper and lower dimensions are 1.
Once the program is debugged, omit this option to reduce executable program size and slightly improve run-time performance.
3.24 -check format — Format Mismatches at Run Time
Specifying -check format issues the run-time FORVARMIS fatal error when the data type of an item being formatted for output does not match the format descriptor being used (for example, a REAL*4 item formatted with an I edit descriptor).
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–19
Specifying -check noformat disables the run-time message associated with format mismatches (number 61). It also requests that the data item be formatted using the specified descriptor, unless the length of the item cannot accommodate the descriptor. (For example, it is still an error to pass an
INTEGER*2 item to an E edit descriptor.) Specifying -check noformat allows such format mismatches as a REAL*4 item formatted with an I edit descriptor.
If you specify the default is
-vms option, the default is -check format . Otherwise, the
-check noformat .
3.25 -check nopower — Allow Special Floating-Point
Expressions
Specifying -check nopower allows certain arithmetic expressions containing floating-point numbers and exponentiation to be evaluated and return a result rather than causing the compiler to display a run-time message and stop the program. The specific arithmetic expressions include:
• 0.0 ** 0.0
• negative-value ** integer-value-of-type-real
For example, if you specify -check nopower , the calculation of the expression
0.0 ** 0.0 results in 1. The expression (–3.0) ** 3.0 results in –27.0.
The default is -check power , which means that for such expressions, an exception occurs, error message number 65 is displayed, and the program stops.
3.26 -check omp_bindings — OpenMP Fortran API Binding
Rules Checking
(TU*X only)
Specifying -check omp_bindings provides run-time checking to enforce the binding rules for OpenMP Fortran API compiler directives. When this option is in effect, the Compaq Fortran compiler issues an error message if your program attempts any of the following actions:
• Enter a DO, SINGLE, or SECTIONS directive if already in a work-sharing construct, a CRITICAL SECTION, or a MASTER.
• Execute a BARRIER directive if already in a work-sharing construct, a
CRITICAL SECTION, or a MASTER.
• Execute a MASTER directive if already in a work-sharing construct.
• Execute an ORDERED directive if already in a CRITICAL SECTION.
• Execute an ORDERED directive unless already in an ORDERED DO.
3–20 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
Additionally, the following conditions apply:
• -omp implies -check omp_bindings
• -fast -omp implies -check noomp_bindings , regardless of the placement of
-fast
• If you want the checking done on explicitly
-mp , specify -check omp_bindings
The default is -check noomp_bindings .
For More Information:
• On using OpenMP Fortran API compiler directives, see Section 6.1.
• On rules that apply to dynamic binding of these directives, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
3.27 -check output_conversion — Truncated Format
Mismatches at Run Time
Specifying -check output_conversion issues the run-time OUTCONERR continuable error message when a data item is too large to fit in a designated format descriptor field. The field is filled with asterisks (*) and execution continues.
Specifying -check nooutput_conversion disables the run-time message
(number 63) associated with format truncation. Error number 63 occurs when a number could not be output in the specified format field length without loss of significant digits (format truncation).
If you specify the -vms option, the default is
Otherwise, the default is
-check output_conversion
-check nooutput_conversion .
.
3.28 -check overflow — Integer Overflow Run-Time Checking
Specifying -check overflow requests that all integer calculations (INTEGER,
INTEGER with a kind parameter, or INTEGER with a length specifier) be checked for arithmetic overflow at run time. Real and complex calculations are always checked for overflow and are not affected by -check overflow .
If the check reveals that the code caused arithmetic overflow, an error message is displayed at run time, program execution stops, and a core dump occurs.
Once the program is debugged, omit this option to reduce executable program size and slightly improve run-time performance.
The default is -check nooverflow .
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–21
3.29 -check underflow — Floating-Point Underflow Run-Time
Checking
(TU*X only)
Specifying -check underflow displays a run-time warning message
(maximum of twice) when a floating-point underflow occurs.
Floating-point underflow is allowed to continue if the -fpe3 or -fpe4 option was specified; otherwise, the underflow value is replaced by zero. A count of how many occurrences of each type of exception is displayed on program completion.
The default is -check nounderflow .
For More Information:
• On underflow ranges for floating-point data types, see Section 9.4, Native
IEEE Floating-Point Representations and Exceptional Values.
• On controlling floating-point exception handling, see Section 3.44.
3.30 -convert keyword — Unformatted Numeric Data
Conversion
The -convert keyword write unformatted files.
options determine which format is used to read and
Numeric data in an unformatted file is expected to be in native little endian integer and little endian IEEE S_float, T_float, and X_float floating-point formats, unless handled otherwise by the application.
You can specify the unformatted data format for specific unit numbers by using the OPEN statement CONVERT specifier or by setting the appropriate
FORT_CONVERTn environment variable.
The default is -convert native .
The following options apply:
-convert big_endian
Specifies that unformatted data will be in big endian format of the appropriate size:
INTEGER*1, INTEGER*2, INTEGER*4, or INTEGER*8
IEEE floating point format for REAL*4, REAL*8, REAL*16, COMPLEX*8,
COMPLEX*16, or COMPLEX*32
Note that INTEGER*1 data is the same for little endian and big endian.
3–22 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
-convert cray
Specifies that unformatted data will be in big endian format of the appropriate size:
INTEGER*1, INTEGER*2, INTEGER*4, or INTEGER*8
CRAY floating-point format for REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16
-convert fdx
Specifies that unformatted data will be in little endian format of the appropriate size:
INTEGER*1, INTEGER*2, INTEGER*4, or INTEGER*8
Compaq VAX™ floating-point format F_floating for REAL*4 or
COMPLEX*8, D_floating for REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16, and X_floating for
REAL*16 or COMPLEX*32
-convert fgx
Specifies that unformatted data will be in little endian format of the appropriate size:
INTEGER*1, INTEGER*2, INTEGER*4, or INTEGER*8
Compaq VAX floating-point format F_floating for REAL*4 or COMPLEX*8,
G_floating for REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16, and X_floating for REAL*16 or
COMPLEX*32
-convert ibm
Specifies that unformatted data will be in big endian format of the appropriate size:
INTEGER*1, INTEGER*2, or INTEGER*4
IBM System\ 370 floating-point format for REAL*4 or COMPLEX*8 (IBM short 4) and for REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16 (IBM long 8)
-convert little_endian
Specifies that unformatted data will be in native RISC little endian format of the appropriate size:
INTEGER*1, INTEGER*2, INTEGER*4, or INTEGER*8
IEEE floating-point format for REAL*4, REAL*8, REAL*16, COMPLEX*8,
COMPLEX*16, or COMPLEX*32
Note that INTEGER*1 data is the same for little endian and big endian.
Using -convert little_endian produces the same results as -convert native .
-convert native
Specifies that unformatted data should not be converted.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–23
This is the default.
-convert vaxd
Specifies that unformatted data will be in little endian format of the appropriate size:
INTEGER*1, INTEGER*2, INTEGER*4, or INTEGER*8
Compaq VAX floating-point format F_floating for REAL*4 or COMPLEX*8,
D_floating for REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16, and H_floating for REAL*16 or
COMPLEX*32
-convert vaxg
Specifies that unformatted data will be in little endian format of the appropriate size:
INTEGER*1, INTEGER*2, INTEGER*4, or INTEGER*8
Compaq VAX floating-point format F_floating for REAL*4 or COMPLEX*8, floating-point format G_floating for REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16, and H_ floating for REAL*16 or COMPLEX*32
For More Information:
• On converting unformatted files, including using the OPEN statement
CONVERT specifier and using FORT_CONVERTn environment variables, see Chapter 10.
• On native data types, see Chapter 9.
• On OpenVMS floating-point data types, see Section A.4.3.
3.31 -cpp and Related Options — Run C Preprocessor
Specifying compiling.
-cpp runs the C preprocessor cpp on all Fortran source files before
The default is -nocpp .
The following cpp macros are defined by the f90 command when any .f90
,
.F90
, .f
, .F
, .for
, or .FOR
file is being compiled:
LANGUAGE_FORTRAN_90
(UN*X only)
_ _LANGUAGE_FORTRAN_90_ _
(UN*X only)
LANGUAGE_FORTRAN
(UN*X only)
_ _LANGUAGE_FORTRAN_ _
(UN*X only) linux
(L*X only)
_ _linux_ _
(L*X only)
_ _alpha
_ _osf_ _ (UN*X only)
3–24 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
unix
(UN*X only)
_ _unix_ _
(UN*X only)
_ _OPENMP if -omp is specified
(UN*X only)
If you omit suffix is .F
-cpp or and
.FOR
-P , the cpp preprocessor is not run unless the file name
(for fixed-form source files) or .F90
(for free-form source files).
If you specify -cpp or -P , you can also specify these options:
• Section 3.32, -Dname, -Dname=def, -Dname="string" — Define Symbol
Names
• Section 3.51, -I — Remove Directory from Include Search Path
• Section 3.52, -Idir — Add Directory for Module and Include File Search
• Section 3.56, -K — Keep Temporary Files
• Section 3.92, -Uname — Undefine Preprocessor Symbol Name
For More Information:
• On cpp and its options, see cpp (1).
• On the options the f90 command passes to the cc driver program (which do not usually apply to Compaq Fortran files), see Section 2.2.2.
• On recognized file name suffix characters and their meanings, see
Section 2.1.1, File Suffixes and Source Forms.
3.31.1 -M — Request cpp Dependency Lists for make
Specifying -M requests that cpp generate dependency lists suitable for make , instead of the normal output.
3.31.2 -P — Retain cpp Intermediate Files
Specifying -P runs only the cpp preprocessor and puts the result for each source file in an intermediate file, after processing by any appropriate preprocessors. The intermediate file does not have line numbers ( # ) in it.
The following naming convention is used:
.f90
file results are put into .i90
files.
.f
file results are put into .i
files.
This option sets the -cpp option.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–25
3.31.3 -Wp,-xxx — Pass Specified Option to cpp
The -Wp,-xxx option allows you to pass an option (specified by xxx) directly to the cpp preprocessor. This is useful for options that the driver does not normally pass to the preprocessor.
For example, to pass -C -M to cpp , use:
-Wp,-C,-M
The -Wp option does not invoke cpp . Use -cpp to invoke cpp .
3.32 -Dname, -Dname=def, -Dname="string" — Define
Symbol Names
Specifying either the
-Dname or -Dname=def or -Dname="string" defines name for use by cpp preprocessor or by Fortran conditional compilation.
When name=def is used for Fortran conditional compilation, def can be an integer string or a character string delimited by double quotation marks as in -Dvehicle_type="red convertible" . When name=def is used for the preprocessor, the definition is interpreted as if by #define cpp
. Regardless of the usage, if no definition is given, then name is defined as ‘‘1’’.
For example:
% f90 -Dnum=4 -Dber -Dclock="the time" foo.f90
In this example, num is the integer 4, ber is ‘‘1’’, and clock is the string
‘‘the time’’.
Preprocessor symbols can be used for conditional compilation by using the cDEC$ IF directive construct (see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual) or by using
Section 3.31.
cpp . Predefined preprocessor symbols are defined in
Specifying -noD prevents the compiler from receiving any -Dname or -Uname options. (The default is to allow the compiler to receive these options.)
However, the cpp preprocessor always receives these options.
For More Information:
On the C preprocessor, see cpp (1).
3–26 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.33 -d_lines — Debugging Statement Indicator, Column 1
Use the -d_lines option to request that lines in fixed-format source files that have a D or a d character in column 1 be compiled instead of treated as comment lines. Such lines might print the values of variables or otherwise provide useful debugging information.
The -d_lines option does not apply to free-format files.
The default ( -nod_lines ) treats all lines with a D or a d in column 1 as comment lines.
3.34 -double_size 128, -double_size 64 — Double Precision
Data Size
Use the -double_size 128 option to specify the size of DOUBLE PRECISION declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as REAL*16 and DOUBLE
COMPLEX declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as COMPLEX*32.
The default is -double_size 64 , where DOUBLE PRECISION declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics are specified as REAL*8 and DOUBLE
PRECISION COMPLEX declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as
COMPLEX*16.
3.35 -error_limit num, -noerror_limit — Limit Error Messages
Use the -error_limit num and -noerror_limit options to specify the maximum number of error-level or fatal-level compiler errors allowed for a given file specified on the command line.
If -c is specified on the command line and the maximum number of errors is reached, a warning message is issued and the next file (if any) on the command line is compiled.
If -c is not specified, a warning message is issued and compilation terminates.
If you specify are allowed.
-noerror_limit , there is no limit on the number of errors that
The default is messages.
-error_limit 30 , or a maximum of 30 error-level and fatal-level f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–27
3.36 -extend_source — Line Length for Fixed-Format Source
Specifying -extend_source treats the statement field of each source line as ending in column 132 instead of column 72.
The default ( -noextend_source or -col72 ) specifies 72-column lines.
Specifying -extend_source sets the -fixed option.
Specifying -extend_source or -col132 sets the source to fixed format even if implicit naming rules set it to free format.
For More Information:
• On recognized file name suffix characters and their relationship to fixed and free source formats, see Section 2.1.1.
• On column positions and more complete information on the fixed and free source formats, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
3.37 -f66, -66, -nof77, -onetrip, -1 — Use FORTRAN 66
Semantics
Specifying -f66 , -66 , -nof77 , -onetrip , or -1 (all are synonymous) tells the compiler to select FORTRAN 66 (FORTRAN IV) interpretations in cases of incompatibility.
This option applies the following FORTRAN 66 semantics:
• DO loops are always executed at least once.
• FORTRAN 66 EXTERNAL statement syntax and semantics are allowed.
See the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• In the OPEN statement:
If the BLANK specifier is omitted, the default is BLANK=’ZERO’.
If the STATUS specifier is omitted, the default is STATUS=’NEW’.
The default is -nof66 , which specifies that FORTRAN 77 interpretation rules are used for those statements that have a meaning incompatible with
FORTRAN 66. Thus, DO loops whose lower range exceeds the upper range will not be executed.
3–28 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.38 -f77, -nof66 — Use FORTRAN 77 Semantics
Specifying -f77 or -nof66 (they are synonymous) enforces FORTRAN 77 semantics instead of FORTRAN 66 semantics.
In Fortran F90, the default is to apply Fortran 95/90 semantics.
3.39 -f77rtl — Use Fortran 77 Run-Time Behavior
Specifying -f77rtl tells the compiler to create an executable file whose run-time behavior is that of Compaq Fortran 77 instead of Compaq Fortran.
Specifying this option controls control the following run-time behavior:
• When the unit is not connected to a file, some INQUIRE specifiers will return different values:
NUMBER returns 0
ACCESS returns ’UNKNOWN’
BLANK returns ’UNKNOWN’
FORM returns ’UNKNOWN’
• List-directed input for character strings must be delimited by apostrophes or quotation marks, or an error will result.
• When processing NAMELIST input:
Column 1 of each record is skipped.
The ’$’ or ’&’ that appears prior to the group-name must appear in column 2 of the input record.
The default is -nof77rtl .
3.40 -fast — Set Options to Improve Run-Time Performance
Specifying -fast sets the following options:
•
•
•
-align dcommons (see Section 3.3). However, if any of the -std options are set (see Section 3.85), then the compiler ignores -align dcommons .
-align sequence (see Section 3.3). However, if any of the -std options are set (see Section 3.85), then the compiler ignores -align sequence .
-arch host (see Section 3.5)
•
•
-assume bigarrays
(TU*X only)
(see Section 3.50.1)
-assume noaccuracy_sensitive (same as -fp_reorder ; see Section 3.12) f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–29
•
•
•
•
-assume nozsize
-O4
(TU*X only)
-math_library fast
(see Section 3.50)
(see Section 3.61)
(reinforced as the default; see Section 3.72)
-tune host (see Section 3.90)
Avoid using the -fast sets. For example, the option unless you understand the options that
-fast option sets the
-fast
-assume noaccuracy_sensitive and -math_library fast options, which can change the calculated results of a program.
Also, before you use -fast with the -hpf option, first make sure your program does not use any zero-sized arrays or array sections (see Section 3.50). And, while the setting of -arch host and -tune host generates optimal code for the computer architecture on which the compiler is running, this code may run slowly on another version of the computer architecture.
The default is -nofast .
3.41 -feedback file, -gen_feedback, -cord — Create and Use
Feedback Files
Note
These options apply only to Tru64 UNIX systems.
These options allow the creation and use of a feedback file, which can improve run-time performance. You can optionally use cord to rearrange procedures.
You create a feedback file by using a series of commands, including the -gen_feedback option, pixie
(TU*X only)
, and prof f90
. (See Section 5.3.5.) with
The options are:
-cord
Runs the cord procedure-rearranger cord after the linker creates the executable program. This rearrangement reduces the cache conflicts of the program’s text. The output of cord is left in the file specified by the -o output option (or a.out
by default). At least one -feedback file must be specified.
-feedback file
Specifies the file to be used by -cord or the compiler for further optimizations.
3–30 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
This file is produced by the prof command with its execution of the program produced by the pixie
-feedback command option from an
(TU*X only)
.
-gen_feedback
Directs the compiler to generate code that will produce accurate feedback information when profiled.
For example: f90 -gen_feedback -o x x.f
pixie x x.pixie
prof x -pixie -feedback x.fb x.Addrs x.Counts
f90 -feedback x.fb -O5 -fast -o x x.f
Using -gen_feedback changes the default optimization level from -O4 to -O0 .
Avoid using -gen_feedback with optimizations higher than -O3 .
For More Information:
• On using cord , see Section 5.3.5.
• On profiling options, see Section 3.77.
• On timing program execution, see Section 5.2.
3.42 -fixed, -free — Fortran Source Format
Use the -fixed and -free options to specify the source format:
-fixed
Specifies that the source file is fixed format, regardless of the file name suffix.
Note that source files with a suffix of be fixed format.
.f
, .for
, .F
, .FOR
, or .i
are assumed to
-free
Specifies that the source file is free format, regardless of the file name suffix.
Note that source files with a suffix of free format.
.f90
, .F90
, or .i90
are assumed to be
You cannot specify both -free and -fixed on the same command line.
Table 3–2 summarizes how the suffix of a source file.
-free and -fixed options interact with the file f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–31
Table 3–2 Interaction of File Suffix and the -free and -fixed Options on Source
Form
Suffix -free Option -fixed Option Expected Source Form
.f90, .F90, .i90
.f90, .F90, .i90
.f90, .F90, .i90
.f, .F, .for, .FOR, .i
.f, .F, .for, .FOR, .i
.f, .F, .for, .FOR, .i
Not specified
Specified
Not specified
Not specified
Specified
Not specified
Not specified
Not specified
Specified
Not specified
Not specified
Specified
Free form
Free form
Fixed form
Fixed form
Free form
Fixed form
For More Information:
• On recognized file name suffix characters and their relationship to fixed and free source formats, see Section 2.1.1, File Suffixes and Source Forms.
• On column positions and more complete information on the fixed and free source formats, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
3.43 -fpconstant — Handling of Floating-Point Constants
Specifying -fpconstant requests that a single-precision constant assigned to a double-precision variable be evaluated in double precision.
If you omit -fpconstant , a single-precision constant assigned to a doubleprecision variable is evaluated in single precision. The Fortran standard requires that the constant be evaluated in single precision.
Certain programs created for FORTRAN-77 compilers (including Compaq
Fortran 77) may show different results, because they rely on single-precision constants assigned to a double-precision variable to be evaluated in double precision.
In the following example, if you specify assigned to D1 and D2. If you omit the
-fpconstant
-fpconstant
, identical values are option, Compaq Fortran will obey the standard and assign a less precise value to D1.
REAL (KIND=8) D1, D2
DATA D1 /2.71828182846182/ ! REAL (KIND=4) value expanded to double
DATA D2 /2.71828182846182D0/ ! Double value assigned to double
3–32 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.44 -fpen — Control Arithmetic Exception Handling and
Reporting
Use the -fpe0 , -fpe1
(TU*X only)
, -fpe2
(TU*X only)
, -fpe3 , or -fpe4
(TU*X only) options to control floating-point exception handling at run time for the main program. This includes whether exceptional floating-point values are allowed and how precisely run-time exceptions are reported.
Using these options, you can do the following:
• For floating-point calculations that result in overflow, division by zero, or invalid data, you can request that the compiler:
Either stop program execution and perform a core dump (faster run-time performance) or let the program continue with the generated Infinity (+ or –) or NaN exceptional value (slower run-time performance).
(TU*X only)
Display or not display a message when the arithmetic exception occurs.
Report exceptions closer to the instruction that caused the exception.
• For floating-point calculations that result in underflow (a denormalized number; see Section 9.4), you can request that the compiler:
Either set the calculated underflowed (denormalized) value to zero ( 0 ) or leave the denormalized value as is (slowest run-time performance).
(TU*X only)
Display or not display a message when the arithmetic exception occurs (you can also specify -check underflow ).
For information on the underflow ranges for floating-point data types, see
Section 9.4.
• When a denormalized number or other exceptional number (positive infinity, negative infinity, or a NaN) is present in an arithmetic expression, you can request that the compiler:
Either stop program execution and perform a core dump (faster runtime performance) or let the program continue with slower run-time performance.
(TU*X only)
Display or not display a message when the arithmetic exception occurs.
To associate an exception with the instruction that causes the exception, specify any value other than -fpe0 (or specify -synchronous_exceptions ).
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–33
(TU*X only)
Specifying -fpe2 cause of the exceptions.
or -fpe4 displays error messages indicating the
To allow source line correlation when using a debugger to locate the exception, specify the -g option when compiling the program (see Chapter 4).
The default is -fpe0 or -fpe , which are synonymous.
The following options apply:
-fpe0, -fpe
Terminates a program if a floating-point operation results in overflow or division by zero, or if the operands are exceptional values. Before termination, a message is issued and a core dump file is created. If an operand is a denormalized number, it is set to zero.
In the case of floating-point underflow, the program does not terminate, but continues with the underflow value set to zero. On Tru64 UNIX systems, a warning message is issued if -check underflow is set.
Examining the core file shows the exception one or more instructions
after the instruction that caused the exception (unless you also specified
-synchronous_exceptions ).
To obtain the fastest run-time performance, use
Using other -fpen
-fpe0 . This is the default.
values will slow run-time performance.
-fpe1
(TU*X only)
Continues program execution and generates an Infinity or Nan if a floating-point operation results in overflow, division by zero, or invalid data.
If an operand is a denormalized number, it is set to zero. In the case of floating-point underflow, the underflow value is set to zero. A warning message is issued if -check underflow is set.
-fpe2
(TU*X only)
Continues program execution if a floating-point operation results in overflow, division by zero, or invalid data. A warning message is generated for the first two occurrences. If an operand is a denormalized number, it is set to zero.
In the case of floating-point underflow, the underflow value is set to zero. On program completion, a count of how many times each exception occurred is displayed.
3–34 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
-fpe3
Continues program execution if a floating-point operation results in overflow, division by zero, invalid data, or underflow. Calculated denormalized numbers are left as is.
For underflow, the underflow value is not set to zero, and gradual underflow occurs. On Tru64 UNIX systems, a warning message is issued if -check underflow is set.
-fpe4
(TU*X only)
Continues program execution if a floating-point operation results in overflow, division by zero, invalid data, or underflow. A warning message is generated for the first two occurrences. Calculated denormalized numbers are left as is.
In the case of floating-point underflow, the underflow value is not set to zero and gradual underflow occurs. On program completion, a count of how many times each exception occurred is displayed.
3.44.1 Hints on Using These Options
Table 3–3 summarizes the floating-point exception handling options.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–35
Table 3–3 Summary of Floating-Point Exception Command-Line Options
Option Handling of Underflow
Handling of Overflow, Division by
Zero, and Invalid Data
-fpe0
-fpe
, Sets any calculated denormalized value (result) to zero and lets the program continue. Use of a denormalized number in an arithmetic expression uses a value of zero and execution continues.
(TU*X only) A message is displayed only if underflow is also specified.
-check
-fpe1
(TU*X only)
Sets any calculated denormalized value to zero and lets the program continue. Use of a denormalized number in an arithmetic expression uses a value of zero and execution continues. A message is displayed only if is also specified.
-check underflow
-fpe2
(TU*X only)
Sets any calculated denormalized value to zero and lets the program continue. Use of a denormalized number in an arithmetic expression uses a value of zero and execution continues. A message is displayed ( -check underflow is not needed).
-fpe3 Leaves any calculated denormalized value as is. The program continues, allowing gradual underflow. Use of a denormalized number in an arithmetic expression results in program continuation, but with slower performance.
(TU*X only)
A message is displayed only if underflow is also specified.
-check
-fpe4
(TU*X only)
Leaves any calculated denormalized value as is. The program continues, allowing gradual underflow. Use of a denormalized number in an arithmetic expression results in program continuation, but with slower performance. A message is displayed ( needed).
-check underflow is not
Exceptional values are not allowed. The program terminates after displaying a message and creating a core dump file.
The program continues (no core dump). No message is displayed.
A NaN or Infinity (+ or –) exceptional value is generated.
The program continues (no core dump). A message is displayed a maximum of twice for each type of exception. A NaN or Infinity (+ or
–) is generated.
The program continues (no core dump). No message is displayed.
A NaN or Infinity (+ or –) is generated.
The program continues (no core dump). A message is displayed a maximum of twice for each type of exception. A NaN or Infinity (+ or
–) is generated.
On Tru64 UNIX systems, the exception message reporting specified by the
-fpen options applies only to the main program and cannot be changed during program execution.
To help you debug a routine, you can associate an exception with the instruction that causes it by specifying any value other than -fpe0 (such as -fpe3 ) or specify -synchronous_exceptions .
3–36 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
When compiling different routines in a program separately, you should use the same -fpen value. For example, assume:
• Routine A is compiled with exceptional value.
-fpe3 . Routine A can create and use an
• Routine B is compiled with -fpe0 exceptional value (program stops).
. Routine B cannot create or use an
If routine A passes an exceptional value to routine B and routine B uses that exceptional value in an arithmetic expression, program execution stops and a core file is created.
You can call the for_set_fpe routine to set the floating-point exception handling for subprograms (including C functions) or perhaps to change the setting for the main program.
To use for_set_fpe in most cases, you should recompile the program with
-fpe1 or higher. You should not change the exception settings to request program continuation with
-fpe0 .
for_set_fpe if you compiled the program using
Both the for_set_fpe and for_get_fpe routines can be used by Fortran programs using the INTEGER parameter values located in
/usr/include/for_fpe_flags.f
. Programs written in C can call the for_rtl_init_ routine prior to calling the for_get_fpe or for_get_fpe routines, and must include an equivalent header file, /usr/include/for_fpe_flags.h
.
For programs that use a number of denormalized values (such as those that allow gradual underflow with -fpe3 , the impact on run-time performance can be significant.
If you use the option, the
-math_library fast
-fpen
(or -fast ) option along with an -fpen option is ignored when arithmetic values are evaluated by math library routines.
If you specify the with one of the
-speculate all
-fpen or -speculate by_routine options along options that request exception reporting, exceptions are not reported as expected (see Section 3.84).
For More Information:
• On IEEE floating-point exception handling, see IEEE Standard for Binary
Floating-Point Arithmetic (ANSI/IEEE Standard 754-1985) and ieee (3).
• On Compaq Fortran floating-point exception handling, see Chapter 14.
• On native IEEE floating-point data representation and IEEE exceptional values, see Section 9.4.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–37
• On the for_set_fpe and for_get_fpe
Chapter 12 and Section 14.3.
routines, see for_set_fpe (3f) and
3.45 -fpp — Run Fortran Preprocessor
Use the -fpp option to run the Fortran preprocessor on all Fortran source files in the command line before the Fortran compiler executes. This option has no effect on any C source files in the command line. The Fortran preprocessor has a subset of the functionality of the C preprocessor (which the invokes).
-cpp option
The default is -nofpp , which means that neither the Fortran preprocessor nor the C preprocessor runs on the Fortran source files in the command line.
3.46 -fprm keyword — Control Floating-Point Rounding
Mode
The -fprm nearest , -fprm dynamic
(TU*X only)
, -fprm chopped , and -fprm minus_infinity options allow you to control how rounding occurs during floating-point operations.
The rounding mode applies to each program unit being compiled.
The following options apply:
-fprm nearest
Causes the compiler to round results of floating-point operations toward the nearest representable value.
If the unrounded value is halfway between two representable values, the even value is chosen.
This is the default.
-fprm chopped
Causes the compiler to round results of floating-point operations toward zero.
-fprm minus_infinity
Causes the compiler to round results of floating-point operations toward the next smallest representative value.
-fprm dynamic
(TU*X only)
Allows run-time selection of a rounding mode. You can modify your program to:
3–38 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
• Call the read_rnd Compaq Tru64 UNIX routine to obtain the current rounding mode. The current mode is stored in the floating-point control register ( fpcr ).
• Call the write_rnd Compaq Tru64 UNIX routine to set the rounding mode and obtain the previous rounding mode.
When you call write_rnd following settings (see
, you can set the rounding mode to one of the write_rnd (3)):
• Round toward zero or truncate (same as -fprm chopped )
• Round toward nearest (same as -fprm nearest )
• Round toward plus infinity
• Round toward minus infinity (same as -fprm minus_infinity )
If you compile with -fprm dynamic and do not call write_rnd , the default setting ( -fprm nearest ) is used.
For the fastest run-time performance, avoid using -fprm dynamic .
For More Information:
• On IEEE floating-point rounding modes, see IEEE Standard for Binary
Floating-Point Arithmetic (ANSI/IEEE Std 754-1985), write_rnd (3), ieee_functions (3), and ieee (3).
• On the floating-point control register and Alpha architecture, see Alpha
Architecture Reference Manual.
3.47 -fuse_xref — Cross-Reference Information for Compaq
FUSE
Use the -fuse_xref option
(TU*X only) to request that Compaq Fortran generate a data file that the Compaq FUSE Database Manager uses to create a crossreference database file. This improves the performance of the Compaq FUSE
Call Graph Browser and Cross-Referencer, which use the database file for their operations.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–39
3.48 -g0, -g1, -g2 or -g, -g3, -ladebug — Traceback and
Symbol Table Information
Use the -g0 , -g1 , -g2 , or -g , -g3 , and -ladebug of symbol table information in the object file.
options to control the amount
If you intend to use the Compaq Ladebug debugger, specify the option and one of the following: -g , -g2 , or -g3 .
-ladebug
The default is -g1 .
The following options apply:
-g0
Provides no traceback or symbol table information needed for debugging or profiling. Only symbol information needed for linking (global symbols) is produced. The size of the resulting object file is the minimum size.
-g1
Produces traceback information, which allows program counter to source file line correlation, but not symbol table information needed for debugging.
Specifying -g1 produces the global symbol information needed for linking or profiling.
The object file size is somewhat larger than if than if either -g2 or -g3 was specified.
-g0 was specified, but is smaller
This is the default.
-g2, -g
Produces the following:
• Traceback information
• Symbol table information needed for full symbolic debugging of unoptimized code
• Global symbol information needed for linking or profiling
If you use this option and do not specify an level changes to -O0
-On option, the default optimization
, which disables nearly all optimizations to make debugging more accurate (the default optimization level is usually option and specify an -On option other than -O0
-O4 ). If you use this
, a warning message is displayed.
-g2 and -g are synonymous.
3–40 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
-g3
Produces traceback information, symbol table information needed for symbolic debugging of optimized code, and global symbol information needed for linking or profiling. This option can provide additional debugging information to describe the effects of optimization, but debugging inaccuracies may occur as a result of optimizations.
-ladebug
Produces additional symbolic debugger information for the Compaq Ladebug debugger, if you specify -g , -g2 , or -g3 . This allows use of standard Fortran syntax when printing dynamic arrays using Compaq Ladebug, including array sections.
If you specify ignored.
-g0 or -g1 (the default) with -ladebug , the -ladebug option is
For More Information:
• See Section 4.2, Compaq Fortran Options for Debugging.
• See Section 4.12, Debugging Optimized Programs.
• See Section 5.8, Optimization Levels: the -On Option.
3.49 -granularity keyword — Control Shared Memory Access to Data
The -granularity keyword options allow you to control the size of shared data in memory that can be safely accessed from different threads. You do not need to specify this option for local data access by a single process, unless asynchronous write access from outside the user process might occur.
The default is -granularity quadword .
To be written from multiple threads, data must be naturally aligned and declared as VOLATILE (so it is not held in registers). To ensure alignment in common blocks, derived-type structures, and record structures, use the
-align keyword option.
The following options apply:
-granularity byte
Ensures that all data 1 byte or greater can be accessed from different threads sharing data in memory. This option will slow run-time performance.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–41
-granularity longword
Ensures that naturally aligned data of 4 bytes or greater can be accessed safely from different threads sharing access to that data in memory.
When this option is in effect, attempts to access smaller size data or misaligned data can result in data items that are inconsistently updated for multiple threads.
-granularity quadword
Ensures that naturally aligned data of 8 bytes can be accessed safely from different threads sharing data in memory.
When this option is in effect, attempts to access smaller size data or misaligned data can result in data items that are inconsistently updated for multiple threads.
For More Information:
• On the Alpha architecture, see the Alpha Architecture Reference Manual.
• On allowing multiple processes to access common block data in a shared library (using memory mapping), see shcom_connect (3f).
• On intrinsic data types, see Chapter 9.
3.50 -hpf, -hpf num, and Related Options — Compile HPF
Programs for Parallel Execution
Note
These options apply only to Tru64 UNIX systems.
-wsf is the nonpreferred synonym for -hpf .
-wsf num is the nonpreferred synonym for -hpf num .
Use the -hpf option to specify that the HPF program will be compiled to run in parallel on multiple processors using the Message Passing Interface (MPI).
If you omit the -hpf option, the executable program will run in a nonparallel
(serial) run-time environment and HPF directives will only be checked for correct syntax.
The optional num parameter specifies the number of processors on which the program is intended to run, for example, -hpf 3 . If a number is not specified, the compiler generates code that can run on any number of processors. More efficient code is generated when num is specified.
3–42 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
When the HPF parallel programs are compiled with the separately, specify -hpf
-c option and linked both when compiling and linking the program.
The following options are not compatible with the -hpf option: -cord ,
-double_size 128 , -feedback , -fpe1 , -fpe2 , -fpe3 , -fpe4 , -gen_feedback ,
-om , -omp , -p1 , and -pg .
The -check bounds optional parameter option is compatible with the num is set to 1.
-hpf option only when the
When -hpf is used, the HPF target must be specified either by using the
-hpf_target option or by setting the DECF90_HPF_TARGET environment variable. If neither is used, the driver will issue an error message and abort the compilation. See Section 3.50.5.
For More Information:
• On compiling an HPF global routine that will be linked with a main program that was not compiled with the -hpf option, see Section 3.68.
• On enabling conditional compilation for OpenMP, see Section 3.8.
• On using the -warn hpf option for syntax checking, see Section 3.100.
The following options are relevant to the -hpf option:
3.50.1 -assume bigarrays — Run-time Checking for Distributed Small
Array Dimensions
(UN*X only)
Specifying -assume bigarrays suppresses run-time checking for distributed small array dimensions. This allows for increased run-time performance and reduced compile time when using the -hpf option.
In programs compiled with both the -hpf and -assume bigarrays options, nearest-neighbor computations that reference small arrays will fail. An array is big enough if, for every dimension with BLOCK distribution, the shadow edge width is no bigger than the block size.
Specifying the -fast option sets the -assume bigarrays option.
The default is -assume nobigarrays .
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–43
3.50.2 -assume nozsize — Omit Zero-Sized Array Checking
(UN*X only)
Specifying -assume nozsize suppresses run-time checking for zerosized array sections. This allows for increased performance when using the
-hpf option.
An array (or array section) is zero-sized when the extent of any of its dimensions takes the value zero or less than zero. When the -hpf option is specified, the compiler ordinarily inserts a series of checks to guard against irregularities (such as division by zero) in its internal computations that zerosized arrays can cause. Depending on the particular application, these checks can cause noticeable (or even major) degradation of performance.
Specifying the -fast option sets the -assume nozsize option.
Avoid using the -assume nozsize option with -hpf when a program references any zero-sized arrays or array sections, because the resulting executable might fail to execute or might produce incorrect program results.
You can insert a run-time check into your program to ensure that a given line is not executed if an array or array section referenced there is zero-sized.
The default is -assume zsize .
3.50.3 -nearest_neighbor, -nearest_neighbor num, or
-nonearest_neighbor — Nearest Neighbor Optimization
Use the -nearest_neighbor option
(TU*X only) to enable the nearest neighbor parallel optimization. The compiler automatically determines the correct shadow-edge widths on an array-by-array, dimension-by-dimension basis.
This option is valid only if the -hpf option is specified.
Use the optional num field to specify the maximum width of the shadow edge, which limits how much extra storage the compiler can allocate for nearest-neighbor arrays.
When num is specified, the compiler will only recognize nearest-neighbor constructs that need shadow-edge widths less than or equal to the value of num .
If num is not specified, the compiler uses a num value of 10.
You can also set shadow-edge widths manually, using the !HPF$ SHADOW directive.
The -nonearest_neighbor option turns off the nearest-neighbor optimization.
It is equivalent to specifying -nearest_neighbor with nn set to 0.
3–44 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.50.4 -show hpf — Show HPF Parallelization Information
The -show hpf options
(TU*X only) show information about HPF parallelization by displaying the information to standard error and to the listing (if one is generated using the is specified.
-V option). These options are valid only if the -hpf option
The -show option can take only one argument. However, the be combined by specifying -show
-show multiple times. For example: options can
% f90 -hpf -hpf_target cmpi -show hpf_near -show hpf_punt foo.f90
Specifying following
-show hpf selects a subset of the messages generated by all of the
-show hpf_* options. Try using -show hpf first, with the following variations only when a more detailed listing is needed.
The following options apply:
-show hpf_all, -show hpfinfo, -show wsfinfo
The -show hpf_all option is the same as specifying all the other -show hpf_* options.
The -show wsfinfo option is the nonpreferred synonym of -show hpfinfo .
-show hpf_comm
This instructs the compiler to display information about statements that cause interprocessor communication to be generated.
-show hpf_indep
This instructs the compiler to display information about the optimization of loops marked with the INDEPENDENT directive.
-show hpf_nearest
This instructs the compiler to display information about arrays and statements involved in optimized nearest-neighbor computations.
-show hpf_punt
This instructs the compiler to display information about distribution directives that were ignored and statements that were not handled in parallel.
-show hpf_temps
This instructs the compiler to display information about temporaries that were created at procedure interfaces.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–45
3.50.5 -hpf_target — Message Passing Protocol for Parallel Programs
This option specifies the message passing protocol to use between processors for programs running in parallel. The format is:
% -hpf_target cmpi | gmpi | smpi
If this option is used, -hpf must also be set.
The following options apply:
-hpf_target cmpi
Causes the compiler to target Compaq MPI, a version of Message Passing
Interface (MPI) specifically tuned for Alpha systems. Compaq MPI is distributed as a Compaq layered product. Compaq MPI supports only Memory
Channel clusters and shared-memory (SMP) machines.
For more information about Compaq MPI, see: http://www.compaq.com/hpc/software/dmpi.html
-hpf_target gmpi
Causes the compiler to target generic Message Passing Interface (MPI), specifically MPICH 1.2.0 or other libraries compatible with that version of
MPICH. MPICH is a public-domain implementation of the MPI specification that is available for many platforms. It can be obtained from: http://www-unix.mcs.anl.gov/mpi/mpich/
MPICH supports many interconnection networks, including Ethernet, FDDI, and other hardware. Note: The use of the gmpi target is officially unsupported.
When you use this option, you should set the DECF90_GMPILIB environment variable to specify a path to the MPI library to link against. If you don’t set the DECF90_GMPILIB environment variable, then you must specify the MPI library to link against on the command line.
-hpf_target smpi
Causes the compiler to target the Message Passing Interface (MPI) that comes installed on SC-series systems. It is used in conjunction with the SC’s ‘‘RMS’’ software, which provides a set of commands for launching MPI jobs, scheduling those jobs on SC clusters, and other miscellaneous tasks.
3–46 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.51 -I — Remove Directory from Include Search Path
Use the -I option to prevent the search for cpp and fpp #include files or to prevent Compaq Fortran from searching for files specified in an INCLUDE statement in the standard directory /usr/include .
This option is not related to the Fortran USE statement.
3.52 -Idir — Add Directory for Module and Include File
Search
Use the -Idir option to direct the search for cpp and fpp #include files, files specified in an INCLUDE statement, and module files (USE statement). The file names must not begin with a slash (/).
If you use this option, directories are searched in the following order:
1.
The directory preceding the input file name on the command line
2.
The directory ( dir ) specified by the -Idir option (see Section 3.52)
3.
The standard directory /usr/include
You can repeat the -Idir option as many times as needed to specify multiple additional search directories.
To prevent the Compaq Fortran compiler from searching for include files in the
/usr/include directory, use the -noinclude option.
For More Information:
• On creating and using module files, see Section 2.1.3.
• On creating and using include files, see Section 2.1.4.
• On recognized file name suffix characters and their meanings, see
Section 2.1.1.
3.53 -i2, -i4, -i8, -integer_size num — Integer and Logical
Data Size
Use the following options to control the size of INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations (where no kind parameter or size specifier is indicated).
For optimal performance on Alpha systems, use 4- or 8-byte integer or logical values instead of 2-byte values.
The default is -i4 or -integer_size 32 .
The following options apply: f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–47
-i2, -noi4, -integer_size 16
Specifying -i2 , -noi4 , or -integer_size 16 (all are synonymous) makes the default integer and logical variables 2 bytes long. That is, INTEGER and
LOGICAL declarations are treated as INTEGER*2 (KIND=2) and LOGICAL*2
(KIND=2).
-i4, -integer_size 32
Specifying -i4 or -integer_size 32 makes default integer and logical variables
4 bytes long. That is, INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations are treated as
INTEGER*4 (KIND=4) and LOGICAL*4 (KIND=4).
-i8, -integer_size 64
Specifying -i8 or -integer_size 64 makes default integer and logical variables
8 bytes long. That is, INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations are treated as
INTEGER*8 (KIND=8) and LOGICAL*8 (KIND=8).
3.54 -inline keyword, -noinline — Control Procedure Inlining
Specifying -inline keyword or -noinline controls the type of procedure calls that are inlined by the optimizer.
The following options apply:
-inline all
Inlines every call that can be inlined while still generating correct code, including:
Statement functions
Any procedures that Compaq Fortran expects will improve run-time performance with a likely significant increase in program size.
Any other procedures that can possibly be inlined and generate correct code. Certain recursive routines are not inlined to prevent infinite expansion.
-inline speed
Inlines calls that will likely improve run-time performance, even where it might significantly increase the size of the program.
This option is meaningful only at optimization levels -O1 and higher.
This is the default for optimization levels -O4 and -O5 .
3–48 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
-inline size
Inlines calls where inlining will not significantly increase program size, plus any additional calls that the compiler determines will improve run-time performance.
This option was previously called -inline automatic or -inline space .
This option is meaningful only at optimization levels -O1 and higher.
-inline none, -inline manual, -noinline
Suppresses all inlining of routines. However, statement functions are always inlined.
All three options are synonymous.
This is the default for optimization levels -O0 , -O1 , -O2 , and -O3 .
For More Information:
• See Section 5.9.3, Controlling the Inlining of Procedures.
• See Chapter 5, Performance: Making Programs Run Faster.
• See Section 5.8, Optimization Levels: the -On Option.
3.55 -intconstant — Handling of Integer Constants
Specify this option to use Compaq Fortran 77 instead of Fortran 95/90 semantics to determine the kind of integer constants. If you don’t specify
-intconstant , Fortran 95/90 semantics are used.
With Fortran 77 semantics, all constants are kept internally by the compiler in the highest precision possible. For example, if you specify -intconstant , the compiler stores an integer constant of 14 internally as INTEGER(KIND=8) and converts the constant upon reference to the corresponding proper size. Fortran
95/90 specifies that integer constants with no explicit KIND are kept internally in the default INTEGER kind (KIND=4 by default).
Note that the internal precision for floating-point constants is controlled by the
-fpconstant option, described in Section 3.43.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–49
3.56 -K — Keep Temporary Files
Specifying -K requests that temporary files created by
Fortran compiler not be automatically deleted.
cpp or the Compaq
This option does not affect the naming of temporary files. To see the names and locations of the temporary files, use the -v option.
Specifying -K also creates, in the current working directory, one temporary file for each input source file specified. This file creation may not be desirable when compiling multiple source files (see Section 2.1.6).
All other temporary files reside in /tmp , unless the environment variable
TMPDIR is set to indicate an alternate directory.
3.57 -L — Remove ld Directory Search Path
Use the -L option to prevent the linker from searching for libraries in the standard directories (see Section 3.58).
3.58 -Ldir — Add Directory to ld Search Path
Use the -Ldir option to specify the directory path dir as a search directory for ld , which is searched before the standard directories.
When you specify the searched:
-non_shared option, the following directories are
•
•
•
•
•
• /lib
• /usr/lib
• /usr/local/lib
When searching for shared libraries ( -call_shared or -shared ), the following directories are searched:
/usr/shlib
/usr/ccs/lib
/usr/lib/cmplrs/cc
/usr/lib
/usr/local/lib
3–50 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.59 -lstring — Add Library Name to ld Search
Use the -lstring option to specify additional search libraries for ld , using string as an abbreviation of the library name.
Using this option causes ld to search for unresolved references to run-time object files in the specified libraries, in addition to the appropriate Compaq
Fortran libraries and related libraries (see Section 2.5.1).
This option should be placed after the file name(s) at the end of the command line.
You can use -lstring multiple times to specify multiple search libraries. The order in which the multiple libraries are specified determines the search order used by ld .
For example, specifying -lgraph causes directories (and any specified using the ld to search the standard library
-Ldir option) for the library libgraph .
To view libraries accessed during compile and link operation, use the described in Section 3.96.
-v option,
For More Information:
• On the standard directories searched by ld , see Section 3.58.
• On the standard list of library names searched when using the command, see Section 2.5.1.
f90
• On recognized file name suffix characters and their meanings, see
Section 2.1.1.
• On specifying and using archive or shared libraries, see Section 2.5.
• On requirements and other information related to creating a shared library, see Section 2.6.
3.60 -machine_code
See Section 3.82, -show keyword, -machine_code — Control Listing File
Content.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–51
3.61 -math_library keyword — Fast or Accurate Math Library
Routines
The -math_library keyword to use.
option lets you choose which math library routines
The default is -math_library accurate .
The following options apply:
-math_library accurate
Specifies that the compiler is to select the version of the math library routine that provides the most accurate result for mathematical intrinsic functions.
For certain ranges of input values, the selected routine may execute more slowly than if you used -math_library fast .
The standard math library routines are designed to obtain very accurate ‘‘near correctly rounded’’ results and provide the robustness needed to check for
IEEE exceptional argument values, rather than achieve the fastest possible run-time execution speed. Using -math_library accurate allows user control of arithmetic exception handling with the routine.
-fpen option and the for_set_fpe
-math_library fast
Specifies that the compiler is to select the version of the math library routine that provides the highest execution performance for certain mathematical intrinsic functions, such as EXP and SQRT.
For certain ranges of input values, the selected routine may not provide a result that is as accurate as -math_library accurate provides.
This option is set by default if you use the -fast option.
Using -math_library fast allows certain math library functions to get significant performance improvements when the applicable intrinsic function is used.
If you specify -math_library fast , the math library routines do not necessarily check for IEEE exceptional values and the -fpen option and calls to the for_set_fpe routine are ignored.
When you use -math_library fast , you should carefully check the calculated output from your program. Check the program’s calculated output to verify that it is not relying on the full fractional accuracy of the floating-point data
3–52 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
type
1 to produce correct results or producing unexpected exceptional values
(exception handling is indeterminate).
Programs that do not produce acceptable results with -math_library fast single-precision data might produce acceptable results with -math_library and fast if they are modified (or compiled) to use double-precision data.
The specific intrinsic routines that have special fast math routines depend on the version of the Compaq Tru64 UNIX operating system in use. Allowed error bounds vary with each routine.
For More Information:
• On controlling arithmetic exception handling, including using the option, see Section 3.44 and Chapter 14.
-fpen
• On requesting double-precision data during compilation for REAL data declarations ( -real_size option), see Section 3.78.
• On native IEEE floating-point formats, see Section 9.4.
3.62 -mixed_str_len_arg — Specify Length of Character
Arguments
Use the -mixed_str_len_arg option to tell the compiler that the hidden length passed for a character argument is to be placed immediately after its corresponding character argument in the argument list.
The default is -nomixed_str_len_arg , which places the hidden lengths in sequential order at the end of the argument list.
3.63 -module directory — Specify Directory for Creating
Modules Files
The -module directory option tells the compiler to create module files in the specified directory instead of the current directory.
1 Single-precision S_float, double-precision T_float, and extended precision X_float data types provide 24, 53, and 113 bits respectively for the normalized fractional part (see
Section 9.4.) f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–53
3.64 -mp — Enable Parallel Processing Using Directed
Decomposition
Use the -mp option
(TU*X only) to enable parallel processing using directed decomposition. Parallel processing is directed by inserting parallel directives using the !$PAR prefix in your source code. The compiler recognizes these directives only if you specify the -mp option. This kind of parallel processing is intended for shared-memory multiprocessor systems.
To enable parallel processing with with !$OMP directives, use the compiler option.
-omp
To enable parallel processing across clusters of servers or workstations with
!HPF$ directives, use the -hpf compiler option.
The -mp option sets the -automatic option.
The default is -nomp .
For More Information:
• See Chapter 6, Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming
Environment.
• See the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• See Section 3.74.
• See Section 3.50.
3.65 -names keyword — Case Control of Source and
External Names
The -names keyword option controls how the case sensitivity of letters in source code identifiers and external names is handled.
The naming convention applies whether names are being defined or referenced.
The default is -names lowercase .
The following options apply:
-names as_is, -U
Causes the compiler to distinguish case differences in identifiers and to preserve the case of external names.
The -names as_is and -U options are synonymous.
3–54 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
-names lowercase
Causes the compiler to ignore case differences in identifiers and to convert external names to lowercase.
-names uppercase
Causes the compiler to ignore case differences in identifiers and to convert external names to uppercase.
3.66 -noaltparam — Alternative PARAMETER Syntax
Use the -noaltparam option to disallow the alternate nonstandard syntax for
PARAMETER statements.
The nonstandard PARAMETER statement syntax is:
PARAMETER par1=exp1 [, par2=exp2] ...
This form has no parentheses surrounding the list, and the form of the constant, rather than implicit or explicit typing, determines the data type of the variable.
The default is -altparam , which allows use of the nonstandard syntax.
3.67 -nofor_main — Allow Non-Fortran Main Program
Use the -nofor_main option when the main program is not written in Fortran.
For example, if the main program is written in C and calls a Compaq Fortran subprogram, specify -nofor_main when compiling the program with the f90 command. Specifying -nofor_main prevents linking for_main.o
into applications.
If you omit -nofor_main , the main program must be a Fortran program.
The default is -for_main .
3.68 -nohpf_main, -nowsf_main — Compile HPF Global
Routine for Nonparallel Main Program
(TU*X only)
Use the -nohpf_main option (the -nowsf_main option is synonymous) to specify that the HPF global routine being compiled will be linked with a main program that was not compiled with the can be a Fortran program compiled without
-hpf option. The main program
-hpf , or it can be written in an entirely different language.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–55
3.69 -noinclude — Omit Standard Directory Search for
INCLUDE Files
Specifying -noinclude prevents the compiler from searching in the
/usr/include directory for files specified in an INCLUDE statement.
This option does not apply to the directories searched for module files or preprocessor #include files.
To request that the cpp preprocessor not search for #include files in the
/usr/include directory, use the -I option (see Section 3.51).
3.70 -norun — Do Not Run the Compiler
Specifing the -norun option directs the driver not to execute the compiler and other phases of the process. If you use this option with the -v option, described in Section 3.96, you can see what would have been executed.
The default is for the driver to execute the compiler and other phases of the process.
3.71 -o output — Name Output File
When you specify of
-c with -o output, this names the object file output instead
source-file-name.o
in the current working directory.
If you omit -c and specify -o output, this names the executable program file
output instead of a.out
in the current working directory.
An already existing a.out
file is unaffected by this command.
For More Information:
• On output files and their names, see Section 2.1.5.
• On using multiple input files, see Section 2.1.6.
3.72 -O0, -O1, -O2, -O3, -O4 or -O, -O5 — Specify
Optimization Level
Use the -O0 , -O1 , -O2 , -O3 , -O4 (same as -O ), and -O5 options to specify the level of optimization performed during compilation.
The default level of optimization is -O4 unless you specify the -g2 , -g , or
-gen_feedback option (in which case the default is -O0 ).
At optimization levels lower than variable’’ warnings.
-O4 , the compiler issues ‘‘uninitialized
3–56 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
In most cases, the higher the level of optimization you specify, the faster the program will execute. However, the faster execution speeds that result from using times.
-O3 or higher usually produce larger object files and longer compile
The following options apply:
-O0
Disables all optimizations. Does not check for unassigned variables.
If you specify -g2 or -g , this is the default.
-O1
Enables local optimizations and recognition of common subexpressions.
Optimizations include integer multiplication and division expansion using shifts. The call graph determines the order of compilation of procedures.
-O2
Enables global optimization and all -O1 optimizations. This global optimization includes code motion, strength reduction and test replacement, split-lifetime analysis, code scheduling, and inlining of arithmetic statement functions.
-O3
Enables global optimizations that improve speed (at the cost of increased code size) and all -O2 optimizations. Optimizations include:
• Loop unrolling (also set by -unroll , described in Section 3.94)
• Prefetching
• Code replication to eliminate branches
-O4, -O
Enables interprocedure analysis and automatic inlining of small procedures
(with heuristics limiting the amount of extra code), software pipelining (also set by -pipeline , described in Section 3.76), and all -O3 optimizations.
This is the default. However, if you specify default becomes -O0 .
-g2 or -g or -gen_feedback , the
-O5
Enables loop transformation optimizations (also set by described in Section 3.89), all
-transform_loops ,
-O4 optimizations, and other optimizations, including byte vectorization and insertion of additional NOPs (No Operations) for alignment of multi-issue sequences. (See also Section 3.84.) f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–57
To determine whether using -O5 benefits your particular program, you should time program execution for the same program (or subprogram) compiled at levels -O4 and -O5 .
For More Information:
• On the effects of the -O5 option, see Section 3.89 and Section 3.76.
• On limiting loop unrolling with optimization level num ), see Section 3.94.
-O3 or higher ( -unroll
• On speculative execution optimization, see Section 3.84.
• On timing program execution, see Section 5.2.
• On the related -fp_reorder option, see Section 3.12.
• On the related -fast option, see Section 3.40.
• On improving and measuring run-time performance, see Chapter 5.
• On the optimizations performed at each level, see Section 5.8.
3.73 -om — Request Nonshared Object Optimizations
(TU*X only)
Use the -om option with the -non_shared option to request certain code optimizations after linking, including NOP (No Operation) removal, .lita
removal, and reallocation of common symbols. This option also positions the global pointer register so the maximum addresses fall in the global-pointer window.
Pass -om options to the linker using the -WL,arg form:
• -WL,-om_compress_lita
Removes unused
.lita
section.
.lita
entries after optimization, and then compresses the
•
•
-WL,-om_dead_code
Removes dead code (unreachable instructions) generated after applying optimizations. The .lita
section is not compressed.
-WL,-om_no_inst_sched
Turns off instruction scheduling.
• -WL,-om_no_align_labels
Turns off alignment of labels. Normally, the -om option aligns the targets of all branches on quadword boundaries to improve loop performance.
• -WL,-om_Gcommon,num
3–58 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
Sets the size threshold of common symbols. Every common symbol whose size is less than or equal to num will be allocated close to each other.
This option can be used to improve the probability that the symbol can be accessed directly from the global pointer register. Normally, -om tries to collect all common symbols together.
For more information, see your operating system documentation.
3.74 -omp — Enable OpenMP Parallel Processing Using
Directed Decomposition
(UN*X only)
Use the -omp option to enable parallel processing using directed decomposition following the OpenMP application program interface (API).
Parallel processing is directed by inserting !$OMP directives in your source code. This kind of parallel processing is intended for shared-memory multiprocessor systems.
The !$OMP directives are described in Section 6.1.2, Summary Descriptions of
OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives.
The -omp option sets the -automatic option.
The default is -noomp .
For More Information:
• Chapter 6, Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming
Environment.
• See the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
3.75 -pad_source — Pad Short Source Records with Spaces
For fixed-form source files, specify the -pad_source option to request that source records shorter than the statement field width are to be padded with spaces on the right, out to the end of the statement field. This affects the interpretation of character and Hollerith literals that are continued across source records.
The default is -nopad_source . This causes a warning message to be displayed if a character or Hollerith literal that ends before the statement field ends is continued onto the next source record. To suppress this warning message, specify the -warn nousage option.
Specifying usage .
-pad_source can prevent warning messages associated with -warn f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–59
3.76 -pipeline — Activate Software Pipelining Optimization
Specifying -pipeline (or -O4 or -O5 ) activates the software pipelining optimization. The software pipelining optimization applies instruction scheduling to certain innermost loops, allowing instructions within a loop to
‘‘wrap around’’ and execute in a different iteration of the loop. This can reduce the impact of long-latency operations, resulting in faster loop execution.
Software pipelining is a subset of the optimizations activated by
Instead of specifying both
-O4 or -O5 .
-pipeline and -transform_loops , you can specify
-O5 .
This optimization is not performed at optimization levels below -O2 .
You must specify -nopipeline and you are also specifying -O4 if you want this type of optimization disabled or -O5 .
For More Information:
• On details about using this option, see Section 5.8.6, Software Pipelining.
• On the -O4 and -O5 options, see Section 3.72.
3.77 -p0, -p1 or -p, and -pg — Profiling Support
Nonparallel programs (with the -hpf option omitted) and
(TU*X only) parallel
HPF programs ( -hpf option specified) use different profiling tools, which need different profiling options. Profiling information identifies those parts of your program where improving source code efficiency would most likely improve run-time performance.
If you omit the -hpf if you specify the -p0 option, you can use the and -p1 or -p prof and pixie
(TU*X only) tools options to control the level of profiling support provided during compilation. When you specify
-p1 , and -p options.
-hpf , omit the -p0 ,
The default is -p0 .
The following options apply:
-p0
Does not permit profiling. If loading occurs, the standard run-time startup routine (crt0.o) is used, and profiling libraries are not searched.
-p1, -p
Sets up profiling by periodically sampling the value of the program counter for use with the postprocessor prof (1).
3–60 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
This option only affects loading. When loading occurs, this option replaces the standard run-time startup routine option with the profiling run-time startup routine (mcrt0.o) and searches the level 1 profiling library ( libprof1 ).
When profiling occurs, the startup routine calls the file mon.out
monstartup (3) and produces
, which contains execution-profiling data for use with the postprocessor prof (1) command. (See also monitor (3).)
If you specify this option, you should also specify -g1 or higher.
-pg
Sets up profiling for gprof (1), which produces a call graph showing the execution of the program. With this option, the standard run-time startup routine is replaced by the at each entry label.
gcrt0.o
routine, and ld (1) inserts calls to _mcount
When programs are linked with the produced:
-pg option and then run, these files gmon.out
contains a dynamic call graph and profile.
gmon.sum
contains a summarized dynamic call graph and profile.
To display the output, run gprof on the gmon.out
file.
For More Information:
• On using profiling tools prof and pixie
(TU*X only)
, see Section 5.3.
• On the -gen_feedback , -feedback file , and -cord options,
(TU*X only) see
Section 3.41.
3.78 -real_size number, -r8, -r16 — Floating-Point Data Size
Use these options to control the size of REAL and COMPLEX declarations that do not have an explicit KIND parameter or size specifier.
The default is -real_size 32 .
The following options apply:
-real_size 32
Defines:
• REAL declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as REAL*4
• COMPLEX declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as
COMPLEX*8 f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–61
-real_size 64, -r8
Defines:
• REAL declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as DOUBLE
PRECISION (REAL*8)
• COMPLEX declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as DOUBLE
COMPLEX (COMPLEX*16)
-real_size 128, -r16 defines:
• REAL and DOUBLE PRECISION declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as REAL*16
• COMPLEX and DOUBLE COMPLEX declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics as COMPLEX*32
If you omit -real_size_64 and -real_size 128 , then:
• REAL declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics are defined as
REAL*4 (KIND=4).
• DOUBLE PRECISION declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics are defined as REAL*8 (KIND=8).
• COMPLEX declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics are defined as
COMPLEX*8 (KIND=4).
• DOUBLE COMPLEX declarations, constants, functions, and intrinsics are defined as COMPLEX*16 (KIND=8).
For More Information:
• On data types, see Chapter 9.
• On intrinsic functions, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
3.79 -recursive — Request Recursive Execution
This option compiles all FUNCTION and SUBROUTINE procedures for possible recursive execution.
This option:
• Changes the default allocation class for all local variables from STATIC to
AUTOMATIC, except for variables that are data-initialized or named in a
SAVE statement, or for variables declared as STATIC.
3–62 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
• Permits references to a routine name from inside the routine.
A subprogram declared with the RECURSIVE keyword is always recursive
(whether you specify or omit the -static option).
Variables declared with the AUTOMATIC statement or attribute always use stack-based storage for all local variables (whether you specify or omit the
-recursive or -automatic options).
Specifying stack).
-recursive sets -automatic (puts local variables on the run-time
The default is -norecursive .
3.80 -reentrancy keyword — Control Use of Threaded
Run-Time Library
(UN*X only)
The -reentrancy keyword option specifies whether code generated for the main program and any Fortran procedures it calls will be relying on threaded or asynchronous reentrancy.
To use the threaded libraries, also specify the
Section 3.88).
-threads option (see
The default is -reentrancy none . (The option -noreentrancy is the same as
-reentrancy none .)
The following options apply:
-reentrancy asynch
Tells the Compaq Fortran run-time library (RTL) that the program may contain asynchronous handlers that could call the RTL. This causes the RTL to guard against asynchronous interrupts inside its own critical regions.
-reentrancy none
Tells the Compaq Fortran RTL that the program will not be relying on threaded or asynchronous reentrancy. Therefore, the RTL will not guard against such interrupts inside its own critical regions.
-reentrancy threaded
Tells the Compaq Fortran RTL that the program is multithreaded, such as programs using the POSIX threads library. This causes the RTL to use thread locking to guard its own critical regions.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–63
3.81 -S — Create Assembler File
Specifying -S creates an assembler file from the compiled source. The name of the assembler file is the base name of the source file with a .s
file suffix.
Linking does not occur.
3.82 -show keyword, -machine_code — Control Listing File
Content
Use the -show keyword options in conjunction with the amount of information in a listing file.
-V option to control the
The following options apply:
-show code, -machine_code
Specifying -show code or -machine_code includes a machine-language representation of the compiled code if a listing file is being generated. This machine language cannot be assembled.
The default is -show nocode or -nomachine_code .
-show hpf
(TU*X only)
When used with the -hpf num option, specifying -show hpf shows information about HPF parallelization. For more information, see
Section 3.50.4, -show hpf — Show HPF Parallelization Information.
-show include
Specifying -show include lists the contents of any text file specified with
INCLUDE in the source file if a listing is generated.
The default is -show noinclude .
-show nomap
Specifying -show nomap excludes information about the symbols used in the source program if a listing is generated.
The default is -show map .
If you omit these options, the listing file contains the minimum amount of information.
For More Information:
• On requesting a listing file, see Section 3.95.
• On examples and explanations of the various listing options, see
Appendix C.
3–64 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
3.83 -source_listing — Create a Source Listing File
Specifying -source_listing tells the compiler to create a listing file of the source program. The file also contains compiler-generated information such as that specified by the the source file with a
-V option. The name of the listing file is the base name of
.lis
suffix.
The default is -nosource_listing .
3.84 -speculate keyword — Speculative Execution
Optimization
Specifying the -speculate all option
(TU*X only) or the -speculate by_routine option
(TU*X only) requests the compiler to perform speculative execution optimization on all routines in the application.
Speculation occurs when a conditionally executed instruction is moved to a position before a test instruction so that the moved instruction is then executed unconditionally. This reduces instruction latency stalls to improve run-time performance for certain applications or routines.
Speculative execution affects code most noticeably at optimization level and higher.
-O3
Performance improvements may be reduced because the run-time system must dismiss exceptions caused by speculative instructions. For certain applications, longer execution times may result. To determine whether using -speculate all or -speculate by_routine benefits your particular program, you should time program execution for the same program compiled with -speculate by_routine or -speculate all with -speculate none (default).
Any exception (for example, SIGSEGV, SIGBUS, or SIGFPE), anywhere in the entire program, is assumed to be speculative. All of these exceptions are quietly dismissed without calling any user-mode signal handler. If a module is compiled using -speculate all , it cannot be linked with any other module or library that does its own exception processing.
Since speculation turns off some run-time error checking, this option should not be used while debugging or while testing for errors.
The following options apply: f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–65
-speculate all
Perform speculative execution optimization on all routines in the program.
All exceptions within the entire program are dismissed without calling any user-mode signal handler or reporting exceptions.
If a compilation unit is compiled with -speculate all , then it may not be linked with any other object or library that does its own exception processing.
Do not use -speculate all if your program does any of the following:
• Generates any exceptional values other than underflow values
• Uses a user-supplied signal handler
• Was compiled with any of the -check keyword options
-speculate by_routine
Specifies that speculative execution optimization should be performed on all routines in the current compilation unit (set of routines being compiled).
However, other compilation units in the application will not be affected.
All exceptions within the routines being compiled with -speculate by_routine are quietly dismissed without calling any user-mode signal handler, but the object files created can be linked with other objects or libraries that perform exception processing. For example, using -speculate by_routine allows the
Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library to report exceptions.
-speculate none, -nospeculate
Suppresses all speculative execution optimization.
The -speculate none and -nospeculate options are synonymous.
This is the default.
3.85 -std, -std90, -std95 — Perform Fortran Standards
Checking
Use these options to request that the compiler produce warnings for syntax that is not standard in the language.
If your command line includes any of these options, then the compiler ignores
-align dcommons and -align sequence .
The default is -nostd .
The options are:
3–66 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
-std
Produces warnings for things that are not standard.
When -std is specified, the compiler being used determines the standard checked.
For example, on Tru64 UNIX systems, the Compaq Fortran compiler recognizes the following equivalencies: f95 -std is the same as f90 -std95 f90 -std is the same as f90 -std90
On Linux systems, the Compaq Fortran compiler recognizes the following equivalency: fort -std is the same as fort -std95
Source statements that do not conform to Fortran 90 or Fortran 95 language standards are detected by the Compaq Fortran compiler under the following circumstances:
• The statements contain ordinary syntax and semantic errors.
• A source program containing nonconforming statements is compiled with the -std option.
Given these circumstances, the compiler is able to detect most instances of nonconforming usage. It does not detect all instances because the -std options do not produce checks for all nonconforming usage at compile time. In general, the unchecked cases of nonconforming usage arise from the following situations:
• The standard violation results from conditions that cannot be checked at compile time.
• The compile-time checking is prone to false alarms.
Most of the unchecked cases occur in the interface between calling and called subprograms. However, other cases are not checked, even within a single subprogram.
The following items are known to be unchecked:
• Use of a data item prior to defining it
• Use of the SAVE statement to ensure that data items or common blocks retain their values when reinvoked
• Association of character data items on the right and left sides of character assignment statements f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–67
• Mismatch in order, number, or type in passing actual arguments to subprograms with implicit interfaces
• Association of one or more actual arguments with a data item in a common block when calling a subprogram that assigns a new value to one or more of the arguments
On Tru64 UNIX systems only, the -std options interact with the
(requests generation of parallel HPF code) as follows:
-hpf option
• If you omit both processed.
-std and -hpf , HPF directives are checked, but not
• If you omit processed.
-std and specify -hpf , HPF directives are checked and
• If you specify -std and omit comments and not checked).
-hpf , HPF directives are ignored (treated as
You should not specify both -std and -hpf .
-std90
Produces warnings for things that are not standard in the Fortran 90 language.
This includes:
• Fortran 90 standard-conforming statements that become nonstandard due to the way in which they are used. Data type information and statement locations are considered when determining semantic extensions.
• For fixed-format source files, lines that use tab formatting.
-std95
Produces warnings for things that are not standard in the Fortran 95 language.
This includes all the checks performed by the exceptions:
-std90 option with the following
• The FORALL statement is part of Fortran 95; thus it is not flagged as an extension by the -std95 option
• User-defined PURE functions are part of Fortran 95; thus they are also not flagged as extensions.
• The following features that were obsolescent in F90 are deleted in Fortran
95 ( -std95 flags them as deleted) but the Compaq Fortran compiler fully supports them:
REAL and DOUBLE PRECISION DO variables
Branching to an ENDIF statement from outside the paired IF statement
3–68 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
PAUSE statement
ASSIGN statement, assigned GOTO, and assigned FORMAT statements
H edit descriptor
For More Information:
On the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
3.86 -synchronous_exceptions — Report Exceptions More
Precisely
This option causes the compiler to generate TRAPB instructions after every floating-point instruction, resulting in precise exception reporting.
To use this option, you must also enable -fpe0 .
This is a very expensive but effective way to synchronize the instruction stream containing floating-point exceptions so the failing instruction can be accurately located by the debugger or a handler. You should use this option only when debugging a specific problem, such as locating the source of an exception.
If you omit the -synchronous_exceptions option and -fpe0 is in effect, exceptions can be reported one or more instructions after the instruction that caused the exception. If you specify -fpe1 , -fpe2 , -fpe3 , or fpe4 , exceptions are reported precisely (this is the same as specifying
-synchronous_exceptions ).
The default is -nosynchronous_exceptions .
3.87 -syntax_only — Do Not Create Object File
The -syntax_only option specifies that the source file will be checked only for correct syntax. No code is generated, no object file is produced, and some error checking done by the optimizer is bypassed (for example, checking for uninitialized variables).
This option lets you do a quick syntax check of your source file.
The default is -nosyntax_only .
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–69
3.88 -threads, -pthread — Link Using Threaded Run-Time
Library
(UN*X only)
Specifying the -threads or -pthread option (they are synonymous) requests that the linker use threaded libraries. This is usually used with the
-reentrancy threaded option (see Section 3.80).
3.89 -transform_loops — Activate Loop Transformation
Optimizations
Specifying -transform_loops (or -O5 ) activates a group of loop transformation optimizations that apply to array references within loops. These optimizations can improve the performance of the memory system and usually apply to multiply nested loops.
The loop transformation optimizations are a subset of optimizations activated by -O5 . Instead of specifying both -pipeline and -transform_loops , you can specify -O5 .
To determine whether using -transform_loops benefits your particular program, you should time program execution for the same program (or subprogram) compiled with and without loop transformation optimizations
(such as with -transform_loops and -notransform_loops ).
For More Information:
• On the -O5 option, see Section 3.72.
• On loop transformations, see Section 5.8.7, Loop Transformation.
3.90 -tune keyword — Specify Alpha Processor
Implementation
Use the -tune keyword option to specify the types of processor-specific instruction tuning for implementations of the Alpha architecture.
Regardless of the setting of -tune keyword option you use, the generated code runs correctly on all implementations of the Alpha architecture. Tuning for a specific implementation can improve run-time performance; it is also possible that code tuned for a specific Alpha processor may run more slowly on another
Alpha processor.
If you omit -tune keyword , -tune generic is used.
When if
-arch name
-fast is specified and no is specified, then -tune
-tune is host and is specified, the following occurs:
-arch is name; if -fast is not specified, then both -tune and -arch are name.
3–70 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
If you set -tune to an architecture that has fewer features than what specifies, the compiler will reset -tune to the same architecture as
-arch
-arch .
The following options apply:
-tune generic
Generates and schedules code that will execute well for all implementations of the Alpha architecture. This provides generally efficient code for those cases where different processor generations are likely to be used.
This is the default.
-tune host
Generates and schedules code optimized for the implementation of the Alpha architecture in use on the system being used for compilation.
-tune ev4
Generates and schedules code optimized for the 21064, 21064A, 21066, and
21068 implementations of the Alpha architecture.
-tune ev5
Generates and schedules code optimized for the 21164 implementation of the
Alpha chip. This implementation of the Alpha architecture is faster and more recent than the implementations of the Alpha architecture associated with
-tune ev4 (21064, 21064A, 21066, and 21068).
-tune ev56
Generates and schedules code optimized for some 21164 Alpha architecture implementations that use the byte and word manipulation instruction extensions of the Alpha architecture.
-tune pca56
Generates and schedules code optimized for the 21164PC Alpha architecture implementation that uses the byte and word manipulation instruction extensions and multimedia instruction extensions.
-tune ev6
Generates and schedules code optimized for the 21264 Alpha architecture implementations that use the byte and word manipulation instruction extensions, multimedia instruction extensions, and square root and floatingpoint convert extensions.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–71
-tune ev67
Generates and schedules code optimized for the 21264A Alpha architecture implementations that use the byte and word manipulation instruction extensions, multimedia instruction extensions, square root and floating-point convert extensions, and count extensions.
For More Information:
• On improving and measuring run-time performance, see Chapter 5.
3.91 -U — Activates Case Sensitivity
This option causes the compiler to distinguish between uppercase and lowercase letters in identifiers and external names.
The -U option and -names as_is option are synonymous.
3.92 -Uname — Undefine Preprocessor Symbol Name
Specifying -Uname tells -cpp to remove the definition of name, such as a predefined symbol. Predefined preprocessor symbols are defined in
Section 3.31.
3.93 -u
This option causes the compiler to produce messages about undeclared symbols.
The -u option is the same as -warn declarations .
3.94 -unroll num — Specify Number for Loop Unroll
Optimization
The to
-unroll num option sets the depth of loop unrolling done by the optimizer num .
num must be an integer in the range 0 through 16.
Specify this option only with unrolling occurs.
-O3 or higher optimization levels, at which loop
If you omit -unroll num or specify -unroll 0 , the optimizer determines how many times loops are unrolled. Unless you specify a value, the optimizer will choose an unroll amount that minimizes the overhead of prefetching while also limiting code size expansion.
The option -nounroll is not allowed.
3–72 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
For More Information:
• On loop unrolling optimization, see Section 5.8.4.1.
• On software pipelining, which is related to loop unrolling, see Section 3.76.
• On options related to optimization levels, see Section 3.72.
3.95 -V — Create Listing File
Specifying -V creates a listing of the source file with various compile-time information appended. The name of the listing file is the base name of the file with the .l
suffix.
A file name whose suffix is file to have the suffix .lis
.l
may conflict with
, then use the option lex . If you want the listing
-source_listing .
If you expect your program to get compilation errors, use separate listing file or use the error
-V to request a command to insert the error messages into the appropriate place in your source program.
Using a listing file provides slightly more information and includes the column pointer ( 1 ) that indicates the exact part of the line that caused the error.
Especially for large files, consider obtaining a printed copy of the listing file you can reference while editing the source file.
If you use -V without other options (such as -show code ), the listing file will not show the code of included source files or machine code and will not include a cross-reference table.
If a source line of length 1 contains a form-feed character, the source code listing begins a new page with the following line; the line containing the form-feed does not appear.
If a source line of length greater than 1 contains a form-feed character, that line is printed but the form-feed character is ignored (does not generate a new page).
Any other nonprinting ASCII characters encountered in source files are replaced by a space character, and a warning message appears.
If you compile several source files together and specify
(using the name of the first input file) is created.
-V , a single listing file
If you compile several source files one at a time and specify files are created.
-V , multiple listing
The default is -noV .
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–73
For More Information:
• On the options that control the contents of the listing file, see Section 3.82.
• On sample listing file content, see Appendix C.
3.96 -v — Verbose Command Processing Display
Specifying -v displays the preprocessor (if requested), compiler, and linker passes as they execute, with their arguments and their input and output files, as well as final resource usage in the C shell
Compaq Fortran compiler is decfort90 time command format. The
, the C compiler is cc on Tru64 UNIX systems but ccc on Linux systems, the linker is ld , and so forth.
The default is information.
-nov , which does not display any command processing
3.97 -version, -what — Show Compaq Fortran Version
Information
Specifying the -version (or
Fortran driver and compiler.
-what ) option prints the version information of the
If -version appears alone on the command line, the compiler is not executed.
The default is -noversion .
3.98 -vms — OpenVMS Fortran Compatibility
Specifying -vms causes the run-time system to behave like Compaq Fortran on
OpenVMS Alpha systems and VAX systems (VAX FORTRAN) in the following ways:
• Certain defaults
In the absence of other options, -vms sets the f90 defaults as -check format and -check output_conversion .
• Alignment
The -vms option does not affect the alignment of fields in records or items in common blocks. Use -align norecords to pack fields of records on the next byte boundary for compatibility with Compaq Fortran on OpenVMS systems.
• Carriage control default
3–74 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
If -vms -ccdefault default is specified, carriage control defaults to
FORTRAN if the file is formatted and the unit is connected to a terminal.
See Section 3.21.
• INCLUDE qualifiers
/LIST and /NOLIST are recognized at the end of the file name in an
INCLUDE statement at compile time (see Section 2.1.4).
If the file name in the INCLUDE statement does not specify the complete path, the path used is the current directory.
Note that if -vms is not specified, the path used is the directory where the file that contains the INCLUDE statement resides.
• Quotation mark character
A quotation mark ( " ) character is recognized as starting an octal constant
("0..7) instead of a character literal ("...").
• Deleted records in relative files
When a record in a relative file is deleted, the first byte of that record is set to a known character (currently ’ @ ’ ). Attempts to read that record later result in ATTACCNON errors. The rest of the record (the whole record, if -vms is not specified) is set to nulls for unformatted files and spaces for formatted files.
• ENDFILE records
When an ENDFILE is performed on a sequential unit, an actual 1-byte record containing a Ctrl/Z is written to the file. If -vms is not specified, an internal ENDFILE flag is set and the file is truncated.
The -vms option does not affect ENDFILE on relative files: these files are truncated.
• Implied logical unit numbers
The -vms option enables Compaq Fortran to recognize certain environment variables at run time for ACCEPT, PRINT, and TYPE statements and for
READ and WRITE statements that do not specify a unit number (such as
READ (*,1000)). See Section 7.5.7, Using Environment Variables.
• Treatment of blanks in input
The -vms option causes the defaults for the keyword BLANK in OPEN statements to become ’ NULL ’ for an explicit OPEN and ’ ZERO ’ for an implicit OPEN of an external or internal file. For more information, see the description of the OPEN statement in the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–75
• OPEN statement effects
Carriage control defaults to FORTRAN if the file is formatted, and the unit is connected to a terminal (checked by means of isatty(3) ). Otherwise, carriage control defaults to LIST.
The -vms option affects the record length for direct access and relative organization files. The buffer size is increased by 1 to accommodate the deleted record character.
• Reading deleted records and ENDFILE records
The run-time direct access READ routine checks the first byte of the retrieved record. If this byte is ’ @ ’ or NULL ("\ 0"), then an ATTACCNON error is returned.
The run-time sequential access READ routine checks to see if the record it just read is one byte long and contains a Ctrl/Z. If this is true, it returns
EOF.
The default is -novms .
For More Information:
• On alignment, see Section 3.3 and Section 5.4.
3.99 -Wl,-xxx — Pass Specified Option to ld
The the
-Wl,-xxx option allows you to pass an option (specified by -xxx) directly to ld linker.
For example, to set the linker -taso option
(TU*X only) to help port 32-bit programs that assume addresses can be stored into 32-bit variables, specify:
-Wl,-taso
If the -xxx option takes an argument yyy, include yyy after the option separated by a comma.
For example:
-Wl,-xxx,yyy results in the passing of
-xxx yyy to ld .
3–76 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
For another example, if you want to specify the linker option -VS 3, then a possible command is:
% f90 -Wl,-VS,3 test123.f90
For More Information:
On linker options, see ld (1).
3.100 -warn keyword, -u, -nowarn, -w, -w1 — Warning
Messages and Compiler Checking
You can prevent the display of some or all warning messages and request that additional compile-time checking be performed (can issue additional warning messages):
• The following options prevent the display of warning messages:
-warn noalignments
-warn nogeneral
-warn nouncalled
-warn nouninitialized
-warn nounused
-warn nousage
-nowarn
-w
• The -warn declarations (or -u ) and -warn argument_checking options request that additional checking be performed and can display additional warning messages.
If you specify
Section 3.87).
-syntax_only , some warning options are ignored (see
The following options apply:
-warn noalignments
Disables warning messages about data that is not naturally aligned.
The default is -warn alignments .
To control alignment of common blocks, derived-type structures, and record structures, specify the -align keyword options.
-warn argument_checking
Enables warnings about mismatched procedure arguments. Specifying -warn argument_checking applies to calls with an implicit interface (such as routines declared as EXTERNAL).
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–77
The default is -warn noargument_checking .
When an explicit interface is present between calling and called procedures, warning messages about argument mismatches are reported whether or not you specify -warn argument_checking .
-warn declarations, -u
Sets the default type of a variable as undefined (IMPLICIT NONE), which enables warnings about any undeclared symbols. This behavior differs from default Fortran 95/90 rules.
The default is -warn nodeclarations .
-warn nogranularity
Disables warnings when the compiler cannot generate code for a requested granularity.
The default is -warn granularity .
-warn hpf
(TU*X only)
Tells the compiler to do both syntax and semantics checking on HPF directives.
The default vis is assumed.
-warn nohpf , unless -hpf is specified, in which case -warn hpf
-warn ignore_loc
Enables warnings when %loc is stripped from an argument.
The default is -warn noignore_loc .
-warn truncated_source
Enables warnings at compile time about source characters to the right of column 72 (or column 132 if line.
-extend_source is specified) in a non-comment
This option has no effect on truncation; lines that exceed the maximum column width are always truncated.
This option does not apply to free-format source files.
The default is -warn notruncated_source .
-warn nouninitialized
Disables warning messages for a variable used before a value could be assigned to it.
The default is -warn uninitialized .
3–78 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
-warn nogeneral, -nowarn, -w
Disables all warning messages.
The default is -warn general , which enables all warning messages.
The options -warn nogeneral , -nowarn , and -w are synonymous.
-warn nouncalled
Disables warning messages about a statement function that is never called.
The default is -warn uncalled .
-warn unused
Requests warning messages for variables that are declared but not used.
The default is -warn nounused or -w1 , which are synonymous.
-warn nousage
Disables warning messages about questionable programming practices which, although allowed, are often the result of programming errors. Examples are a continued character or Hollerith literal whose first part ends before the statement field and appears to end with trailing spaces.
The default is -warn usage .
3.101 -warning_severity keyword — Elevate Severity of
Warning Messages
Use this option to elevate warning-level messages to error-level status.
The default is -warning_severity warning messages at warning-level status.
, which leaves all compiler warning
The following options apply:
-warning_severity error
Turns all compiler warning-level messages into error-level messages.
-warning_severity stderror
Turns all standards-checking compiler warning-level messages into error-level messages.
Standards checking is enabled when the -std option is specified.
f90 and fort Command-Line Options 3–79
3.102 -what
-what is the same as -version . See Section 3.97.
3.103 -wsf
-wsf is the nonpreferred spelling of -hpf . See Section 3.50.
3–80 f90 and fort Command-Line Options
4
Using the Ladebug Debugger
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 4.1, Overview of Ladebug and dbx Debuggers
• Section 4.2, Compaq Fortran Options for Debugging
• Section 4.3, Running the Debugger
• Section 4.4, Sample Program and Debugging Session
• Section 4.5, Summary of Debugger Commands
• Section 4.6, Displaying Variables
• Section 4.7, Expressions in Debugger Commands
• Section 4.8, Debugging Mixed-Language Programs with Ladebug
• Section 4.9, Debugging a Program that Generates an Exception
• Section 4.10, Locating Unaligned Data
• Section 4.11, Using Alternate Entry Points
• Section 4.12, Debugging Optimized Programs
4.1 Overview of Ladebug and dbx Debuggers
You can use these debuggers to debug Compaq Fortran programs:
• On Tru64 UNIX: Ladebug and dbx
• On Linux: Ladebug
Ladebug supports Compaq Fortran data types, syntax, and use. Ladebug is a source-level, symbolic debugger that lets you:
• Control the execution of individual source lines in a program.
• Set stops (breakpoints) at specific source lines or under various conditions.
• Change the value of variables in your program.
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–1
• Refer to program locations by their symbolic names, using the debugger’s knowledge of the Compaq Fortran language to determine the proper scoping rules and how the values should be evaluated and displayed.
• Print the values of variables and set a tracepoint (trace) to notify you when the value of a variable changes. Another term for a tracepoint is a
watchpoint.
• Perform other functions, such as examining stack, or displaying registers.
core files, examining the call
The command names and command syntax used by Ladebug and dbx are almost identical. However, Ladebug provides significantly more Compaq
Fortran language support than dbx, especially Fortran 95/90 features not found in the FORTRAN-77 standard.
This chapter primarily describes the Ladebug debugger.
4.2 Compaq Fortran Options for Debugging
The -gn options control the amount of information placed in the object file for debugging. To use Ladebug, you should specify the -ladebug option along with the -g , -g2 , or -g3 options.
Table 4–1 summarizes the information provided by the relationship to the -On options.
-g n options and their
Table 4–1 Command-Line Options Affecting Traceback and Symbol Table
Information
Option
Traceback
Information
Debugging Symbol
Table Information
Effect on -On
Options
-g0 No
-g1 (default) Yes
-g or -g2 1
Yes
-g3
-ladebug
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes, but for unoptimized code.
Yes, but for unoptimized code.
Allows access to Fortran 95/90 dynamic arrays using standard
Fortran 95/90 syntax, including array sections.
Default is -O4 .
Default is -O4 .
Changes default to
-O0 .
Default is -O4 .
No effect.
1
The -g and -g2 options are equivalent.
4–2 Using the Ladebug Debugger
Traceback information and symbol table information are both necessary for debugging. As shown in Table 4–1, if you specify -g , -g2 , or -g3 , the compiler provides the symbol table and traceback information needed for symbolic debugging. Unless you specify -g0 , the compiler supplies traceback information in the object file.
To use the Ladebug debugger, you should specify the systems) or the fort f90 (on Tru64 UNIX
(on Linux systems) command and the command option
-ladebug along with -g , -g2 , or -g3 .
Likely uses of these options at the various stages of program development are as follows:
• During early stages of program development, use the create unoptimized code (optimization level
-g ( -g2 ) option to
-O0 ). This option also might be chosen later to debug reported problems from later stages.
• During the later stages of program development, use -g0 or -g1 minimize the object file size and, as a result, the memory needed to for program execution, usually with optimized code. (See Chapter 5,
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster.)
Traceback and symbol table information result in a larger object file. When you have finished debugging your program, you can recompile and relink to create an optimized executable program or remove traceback and symbol table information with the strip command. (See strip (1).)
If your program generates an exception, see Section 4.9, Debugging a Program that Generates an Exception.
4.3 Running the Debugger
The Ladebug debugger provides the following user interfaces in the Compaq
Tru64 UNIX operating system Programmer’s Development Toolkit:
• A graphical Ladebug windowing interface
(TU*X only)
• A character-cell interface
The examples in this chapter show the character-cell interface to the Ladebug debugger.
4.3.1 Creating the Executable Program and Running the Debugger
Use the f90 command with certain options to create an executable program for debugging. To invoke the debugger, enter the debugger shell command and the name of the executable program.
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–3
4.3.1.1 Invoking Ladebug
The following commands create (compile and link) the executable program and invoke the character-cell interface to the Ladebug debugger:
% f90 -g -ladebug -o squares squares.f90
% ladebug squares
Welcome to the Ladebug Debugger Version x.x-xx
--------------object file name: squares reading symbolic information ... done
(ladebug)
In this example, the f90 command:
• Compiles and links the program squares.f90
.
• Requests symbol table information needed for symbolic debugging and no optimization ( -g and -ladebug ).
• Names the executable file squares instead of a.out
( -o squares ).
The ladebug shell command runs the debugger, specifying the executable program squares . The ladebug command accepts various options. (See ladebug (1).)
At the debugger prompt (ladebug) , you can enter a debugger command.
4.3.1.2 Invoking dbx
The following commands create the executable program and invoke the dbx debugger
(TU*X only)
. Note that the -ladebug option is omitted, which causes dbx to be used:
% f90 -g -o squares squares.f90
% dbx squares dbx version x.x.x
Type ’help’ for help.
squares: 1 PROGRAM SQUARES
(dbx)
In this example, the f90 command:
• Compiles and links the program squares.f90
.
• Requests symbol table information needed for symbolic debugging and no optimization ( -g ).
• Names the executable file squares instead of a.out
( -o squares ).
The dbx shell command runs the debugger, specifying the executable program squares . The dbx command accepts various options. (See dbx (1).)
At the debugger prompt (dbx) , you can enter a debugger command.
4–4 Using the Ladebug Debugger
4.3.2 Debugger Commands and Breakpoints
To find out what happens at critical points in your program, you need to stop execution at these points and look at the contents of program variables to see if they contain the correct values. Points at which the debugger stops program execution are called breakpoints.
To set a breakpoint, use one of the forms of the stop or stopi commands.
Using the program created in Section 4.3.1, the following debugger commands set a breakpoint at line 4, run the program, continue the program, delete the breakpoint, rerun the program, and return to the shell:
(ladebug) stop at 4
[#1: stop at "squares.f90":4 ]
(ladebug) run
[1] stopped at [squares:4 0x120001880]
> 4 OPEN(UNIT=8, FILE=’datafile.dat’, STATUS=’OLD’)
(ladebug) cont
Process has exited with status 0
(ladebug) delete 1
(ladebug) rerun
Process has exited with status 0
(ladebug) quit
%
1.
The stop at 4 command sets a breakpoint at line 4.
To set a breakpoint at the start of a subprogram (such as calc), use the stop in (such as stop in calc ).
2.
The run command begins program execution and stops at the first breakpoint. The program is now active, allowing you to view the values of variables with print commands and perform related functions.
3.
The cont (continue) command resumes program execution.
In addition to the cont command, you can also use the step , next , run , or rerun commands to resume execution.
4.
The delete 1 command shows how to delete a previously set breakpoint
(with event number 1). For instance, you might need to delete a previously set breakpoint before you use the rerun command.
5.
The rerun command runs the program again. Since there are no breakpoints, the program runs to completion.
6.
The quit command exits the debugger and returns to the shell.
Other debugger commands include the following:
• To get help on debugger commands, enter the help command.
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–5
• To display previously typed debugger commands, type the command.
history
• To look at, or examine, the contents of a location, use the commands.
print or dump
• You can use the debugger sh command (followed by the desired shell command) to execute a shell command. For instance, if you cannot recall the name of a FUNCTION statement, the following grep shell command displays the lines containing the letters FUNCTION, allowing use of the function name (SUBSORT) in the stop in command:
(ladebug) sh grep FUNCTION data.for
INTEGER*4 FUNCTION SUBSORT (A,B)
(ladebug) stop in subsort
(ladebug)
4.3.3 Ladebug Limitations
For a list of known Ladebug limitations, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Ladebug
Debugger Manual.
4.4 Sample Program and Debugging Session
Example 4–1 shows a program called SQUARES that requires debugging. The program was compiled and linked without diagnostic messages from either the compiler or the linker. However, this program contains a logic error in an arithmetic expression.
Compiler-assigned line numbers have been added in the example so that you can identify the source lines to which the explanatory text refers.
4–6 Using the Ladebug Debugger
Example 4–1 Sample Program SQUARES
1
2
PROGRAM SQUARES
INTEGER INARR(20), OUTARR(20)
3 C ! Read the input array from the data file.
4
5
OPEN(UNIT=8, FILE=’datafile.dat’, STATUS=’OLD’)
READ(8,*,END=5) N, (INARR(I), I=1,N)
10
11
12
13
8
9
6 5 CLOSE (UNIT=8)
7 C ! Square all nonzero elements and store in OUTARR.
K = 0
DO I = 1, N
IF (INARR(I) .NE. 0) THEN
OUTARR(K) = INARR(I)**2
ENDIF
END DO
14
15 C ! Print the squared output values.
Then stop.
16 PRINT 20, K
17 20 FORMAT (’ Number of nonzero elements is’,I4)
18
19
DO I = 1, K
PRINT 30, I, OUTARR(I)
20 30 FORMAT(’ Element’,I4,’ has value’,I6)
21 END DO
22 END PROGRAM SQUARES
The program SQUARES performs the following functions:
1.
Reads a sequence of integer numbers from a data file and saves these numbers in the array INARR (lines 4 and 5). The file datafile.dat
contains one record with the integer values 4, 3, 2, 5, and 2. The first number (4) indicates the number of data items that follow.
2.
Enters a loop in which it copies the square of each nonzero integer into another array OUTARR (lines 8 through 13).
3.
Prints the number of nonzero elements in the original sequence and the square of each such element (lines 16 through 21).
Note: This example assumes that the program was executed without array bounds checking (set by the Section 3.23 command-line option). When executed with array bounds checking, a run-time error message appears.
When you run SQUARES, it produces the following output, regardless of the number of nonzero elements in the data file:
% squares
Number of nonzero elements is 0
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–7
The logic error occurs because variable K, which keeps track of the current index into OUTARR, is not incremented in the loop on lines 9 through 13. The statement K = K + 1 should be inserted just before line 11.
Example 4–2 shows how to start the debugging session and how to use the character-cell interface to the Ladebug debugger to find the error in the sample program in Example 4–1. Comments keyed to the callouts follow the example.
Example 4–2 Sample Debugging Session Using Program Squares
% f90 -g -ladebug -o squares squares.f90
!
% ladebug squares
"
Welcome to the Ladebug Debugger Version x.x-xx
--------------object file name: squares reading symbolic information ... done
(ladebug) list 1,9
1 PROGRAM SQUARES
2 INTEGER INARR(20), OUTARR(20)
#
>
3 C ! Read the input array from the data file.
4 OPEN(UNIT=8, FILE=’datafile.dat’, STATUS=’OLD’)
5 READ(8,*,END=5) N, (INARR(I), I=1,N)
6 5 CLOSE (UNIT=8)
7 C ! Square all nonzero elements and store in OUTARR.
8 K = 0
9 DO 10 I = 1, N
(ladebug) stop at 8 $
[#1: stop at "squares.f90":8]
(ladebug) run
%
[1] stopped at ["squares.f90":4 0x120001a88]
> 8 K = 0
(ladebug) step & stopped at [squares:9 0x120001a90]
9 DO 10 I = 1, N
(ladebug) print n, k
4 0
(ladebug) step stopped at [squares:10 0x120001ab0]]
10 IF(INARR(I) .NE. 0) THEN
’
(
(continued on next page)
4–8 Using the Ladebug Debugger
Example 4–2 (Cont.) Sample Debugging Session Using Program Squares
(ladebug) s stopped at [squares:11 0x1200011acc]
11 OUTARR(K) = INARR(I)**2
(ladebug) print i, k
(ladebug) watch variable k
)
1 0
(ladebug) assign k = 1
[#2: watch variable (write) k 0x1400002c0 to 0x1400002c3 ]
(ladebug) cont +@
Number of nonzero elements is 1
+>
+?
Element 1 has value 4
Process has exited with status 0
(ladebug) quit +A
+B % vi squares.f90
.
.
.
10:
11:
12:
13:
IF(INARR(I) .NE. 0) THEN
K = K + 1
OUTARR(K) = INARR(I)**2
ENDIF
.
.
.
% f90 -g -ladebug -o squares squares.f90 +C
% ladebug squares
Welcome to the Ladebug Debugger Version x.x-xx
Reading symbolic information ...done
(ladebug) when at 12 {print k}
[#1: when at "squares.f90":12 { print K} ]
+D
(continued on next page)
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–9
Example 4–2 (Cont.) Sample Debugging Session Using Program Squares
(ladebug) run
[1] when [squares:12 0x120001ae0]
1
[1] when [squares:12 0x120001ae0]
2
[1] when [squares:12 0x120001ae0]
3
[1] when [squares:12 0x120001ae0]
4
Number of nonzero elements is 4
Element 1 has value 9
Element 2 has value 4
Element 3 has value 25
Element 4 has value 4
Process has exited with status 0
(ladebug) quit
%
+E
+F
!
On the f90 command line, the -g and -ladebug options direct the compiler to write the symbol information associated with SQUARES into the object file for the debugger. It also disables most optimizations done by the compiler to ensure that the executable code matches the source code of the program. On a Linux system, the fort command and the same options would give the compiler the same directions.
" The shell command ladebug squares banner and the debugger prompt, runs the debugger, which displays its
(ladebug) . This command specifies the executable program as a file named commands.
squares . You can now enter debugger
After the ladebug squares command, execution is initially paused before the start of the main program unit (before program SQUARES, in this example).
To use the dbx debugger, enter the following shell command instead of ladebug squares :
#
$
% dbx squares dbx version x.x
Type ’help’ for help.
squares: 4 OPEN(UNIT=8, FILE=’datafile.dat’, STATUS=’OLD’)
(dbx)
The list 1,9 command prints lines 1 through 9.
The command stop at 8 sets a breakpoint (1) at line 8.
4–10 Using the Ladebug Debugger
% The run command begins program execution. The program stops at the first breakpoint, line 8, allowing you to examine variables N and K before program completion.
& The step advances the program to line 9.
The step command ignores source lines that do not result in executable code; also, by default, the debugger identifies the source line at which execution is paused.
To avoid stepping into a subprogram, use the step next command instead of
’
(
)
The command print n, k displays the current values of variables N and K.
Their values are correct at this point in the execution of the program.
The two step commands continue executing the program into the loop
(lines 9 to 11) that copies and squares all nonzero elements of INARR into
OUTARR.
Certain commands can be abbreviated. In this example, the an abbreviation of the step command.
s command is
The command print i, k displays the current values of variables I and K.
Variable I has the expected value, 1. But variable K has the value 0 instead of the expected value, 1. To fix this error, K should be incremented in the loop just before it is used in line 11.
+>
+?
The assign command assigns K the value 1.
The watch variable k command sets a watchpoint that is triggered every time the value of variable K changes. In the original version of the program, this watchpoint is never triggered, indicating that the value of variable K never changes (a programming error).
+@ To test the patch, the cont command (an abbreviation of continue) resumes execution from the current location.
The program output shows that the patched program works properly, but only for the first array element. Because the watchpoint ( watch variable k command) does not occur, the value of K did not change and there is a problem. The Ladebug message ‘‘Process has exited with status 0’’ shows that the program executed to completion.
When using the dbx debugger, the message ‘‘Program terminated normally’’ shows that the program executed to completion.
+A The quit command returns control to the shell so that you can correct the source file and recompile and relink the program.
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–11
+B The shell command vi runs a text editor and the source file is edited to add K = K + 1 after line 10, as shown. (Compiler-assigned line numbers have been added to clarify the example.)
+C
+D The when at 12 {print k} through the loop.
command reports the value of K at each iteration
+E
The revised program is compiled and linked.
The shell command ladebug squares (or dbx squares ) starts the debugger, using the revised program so that its correct execution can be verified.
+F
The run command starts execution.
The displayed values of K confirm that the program is running correctly.
The shell.
quit command ends the debugging session, returning control to the
4.5 Summary of Debugger Commands
Table 4–2 lists some of the more frequently used debugging commands available in Ladebug and dbx. Many of these commands can be abbreviated
(for example, you can enter c instead of cont ). When using the debugger with a windowing interface, you can access these commands by using the windowing interface (command buttons and command menu). For a complete list of available debugger commands, see the ladebug (1) and dbx (1) reference pages.
Table 4–2 Summary of Debugger Commands
Command Example Description catch catch fpe catch unaligned
Displays all signals that the debugger is currently set to catch (see also ignore ).
Tells the debugger to catch the fpe signal (or the signal specified). This prevents the specified signal from reaching the Compaq Fortran RTL. The signals that the Compaq
Fortran RTL arranges to catch are listed in Section 8.3.
Tells the debugger to catch the unaligned signal, as further described in Section 4.10. The signals that the Compaq
Fortran RTL arranges to catch are listed in Section 8.3.
(continued on next page)
4–12 Using the Ladebug Debugger
Table 4–2 (Cont.) Summary of Debugger Commands
Command Example Description cont delete 2 delete all help history 5 ignore ignore fpe ignore unaligned kill list print k printregs next quit run rerun
Resumes execution of the program that is being debugged. Note that there is no Ladebug command named continue .
Removes the breakpoint or tracepoint identified by event number 2 (see also status ).
Removes all breakpoints and tracepoints.
Displays debugger help text.
Displays the last 5 debugger commands.
Displays the signals the debugger is currently set to ignore. The ignored signals are allowed to pass directly to the Compaq Fortran RTL. (see also catch ).
Tells the debugger to ignore the fpe signal (or the signal specified). This allows the specified signal to pass directly to the Compaq Fortran RTL, allowing message display.
The signals that the Compaq Fortran RTL arranges to catch are listed in Section 8.3.
Tells the debugger to ignore the unaligned signal (the default).
Terminates the program process, leaving the debugger running and its breakpoints and tracepoints intact for when the program is rerun.
Displays source program lines. To list a range of lines, add the starting line number, a comma ( , ), and the ending line number, such as list 1,9 .
Displays the value of the specified variable, such as K.
Displays all registers and their contents.
Steps one source statement but does not step into calls to subprograms (compare with step ).
Ends the debugging session.
Runs the program being debugged. You can specify program arguments and redirection.
Runs the program being debugged again. You can specify program arguments and redirection.
(continued on next page)
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–13
Table 4–2 (Cont.) Summary of Debugger Commands
Command Example Description return [routine-name] When using the step command, if you step into a subprogram that does not require further investigation, use the return command to continue execution of the current function until it returns to its caller. If you include the name of a routine with the return command, execution continues until control is returned to that routine.
sh more progout.f90
The routine-name is the name of the routine, usually named by a PROGRAM, SUBROUTINE, or FUNCTION statement. If there is no PROGRAM statement, the debugger refers to the main program with a prefix of main$ followed by the file name.
Executes the shell command more to display file progout.f90
, then returns to the debugger environment.
show thread Lists all threads known to the Ladebug debugger.
status step
Displays breakpoints and tracepoints with their event numbers (see also delete ).
Steps one source statement, including stepping into calls of a subprogram. For Compaq Fortran I/O statements, intrinsic procedures, 3f library routines, or other subprograms, use the next command instead of step to step over the subprogram call. Compare with also see return .
next ; stop in foo stop at 100
Stops execution (breakpoint) at the beginning of routine foo.
Stops execution at line 100 (breakpoint) of the current source file.
stopi at xxxxxxx thread [n] watch location
Stops execution at address xxxxxxx of the current executable program.
Identifies or sets the current thread context (ladebug).
Displays a message when the debugger accesses the specified memory location. For example, watch
0x140000170 .
watch variable m whatis sym
Displays a message when the debugger accesses the variable specified by m.
Displays data type of specified symbol.
(continued on next page)
4–14 Using the Ladebug Debugger
Table 4–2 (Cont.) Summary of Debugger Commands
Command Example Description when at 9 {command} When a specified line (such as 9) is reached, the command or commands are executed. For example, when at 9
{print k} prints the value of variable K when the program executes source code line 9.
when in name {command} When a procedure specified by name is reached, the
command or commands are executed. For example, when in calc_ave {print k} prints the value of variable K when the program begins executing the procedure named calc_ave.
where where thread all
Displays the call stack.
Displays the stack traces of all threads.
The debuggers support other special-purpose commands. For example:
• You might use the attach and detach commands for programs with very long execution times.
• The listobj command may be helpful when debugging programs that depend on shared libraries. The listobj debugger command displays the names of executables and shared libraries currently known to the debugger.
For More Information:
• On debugger command syntax, use the help command.
• On the debugger windowing interface, use online windowing help or see
Section 4.3.
• On examples of debugger commands, see Section 4.4 and Section 4.5.
• On Ladebug commands, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Ladebug Debugger
Manual or ladebug (1) reference page.
• On dbx commands, see Compaq Tru64 UNIX Programmer’s Guide and dbx (1).
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–15
4.6 Displaying Variables
To refer to a variable, use either the uppercase or lowercase letters. For example:
(ladebug) print J
(ladebug) print j
You can enter command names in uppercase:
(ladebug) PRINT J
If you compile the program with the f90 command option -names as_is and you need to examine case-sensitive names, you can control whether Ladebug is case sensitive by setting the $lang environment variable to the name of a case-sensitive language (see Section 4.8).
4.6.1 Compaq Fortran Module Variables
To refer to a variable defined in a module, insert a dollar sign ( $ ), the module name, and another dollar sign ( $ ) before the variable name. For example, with a variable named J defined in a module named modfile (statement MODULE
MODFILE), enter the following command to display its value:
(ladebug) list 5,9
5 USE MODFILE
6
7
INTEGER*4 J
CHARACTER*1 CHR
8 J = 2**8
(ladebug) PRINT $MODFILE$J
256
4.6.2 Compaq Fortran Common Block Variables
You can display the values of variables in a Fortran common block by using debugger commands such as print or whatis .
To display the entire common block, use the common block name.
To display a specific variable in a common block, use the variable name. For example:
(ladebug) list 1,11
4–16 Using the Ladebug Debugger
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
PROGRAM EXAMPLE
INTEGER*4 INT4
CHARACTER*1 CHR
COMMON /COM_STRA/ INT4, CHR
CHR = ’L’
9 END
(ladebug) PRINT COM_STRA
COMMON
(ladebug)
(ladebug) PRINT CHR
"L"
INT4 = 0
CHR = "L"
If the name of a data item in a common block has the same name as the common block itself, the data item is accessed.
4.6.3 Compaq Fortran Derived-Type Variables
Variables in a Fortran 95/90 derived-type (TYPE statement) are represented in
Ladebug commands such as print or whatis using Fortran 95/90 syntax form.
For derived-type structures, use the derived-type variable name, a percent sign
( % ), and the member name. For example:
(ladebug) list 3,11
3 TYPE X
4 INTEGER A(5)
5 END TYPE X
6
7 TYPE (X) Z
8
9 Z%A = 1
10
11 PRINT *,Z%A
(ladebug) PRINT Z%A
(1) 1
(2) 1
(3) 1
(4) 1
(5) 1
(ladebug)
To display the entire object, use the example:
PRINT command with the object name. For
(ladebug) PRINT Z
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–17
4.6.4 Compaq Fortran Record Variables
To display the value of a field in a record structure, enter the variable name as: the record name, a delimiter (either a period ( . ) or a percent sign ( % )), and the field name.
To view all fields in a record structure, enter the name of the record structure, such as REC (instead of REC.CHR or REC%CHR) in the previous example.
4.6.5 Compaq Fortran Pointer Variables
Compaq Fortran supports two types of pointers:
• Fortran 95/90 pointers (standard-conforming)
• Compaq Fortran CRAY-style pointers (extension to the Fortran 95/90 standards)
4.6.5.1 Fortran 95/90 Pointers
Fortran 95/90 pointers display their corresponding target data with a command. You must specify the print
-ladebug option to provide Ladebug with information about pointers to arrays.
% f90 -g -ladebug point.f90
% ladebug ./a.out
Welcome to the Ladebug Debugger Version x.x-xx
-----------------object file name: ./a.out
Reading symbolic information ...done
(ladebug) stop in ptr
[#1: stop in ptr ]
(ladebug) list 1:13
1 program ptr
2
3
4
5 integer, target :: x(3) integer, pointer :: xp(:)
6
7
8
9 x = (/ 1, 2, 3/) xp => x print *, "x = ", x print *, "xp = ", xp 10
11
12
(ladebug) run end
[1] stopped at [ptr:6 0x120001838]
6 x = (/ 1, 2, 3/)
(ladebug) whatis x int x(1:3)
(ladebug) whatis xp !
int xp(:)
4–18 Using the Ladebug Debugger
(ladebug) s stopped at [ptr:7 0x120001880]
7
(ladebug) s xp => x stopped at [ptr:9 0x120001954]
9 print *, "x = ", x
(ladebug) s x = 1 2 stopped at [ptr:10 0x1200019c8]
(ladebug) s xp = 1 2 stopped at [point:12 0x120001ad8]
12
(ladebug) S end
2 xp = 1
(ladebug) whatis xp
" int xp(1:3)
(ladebug) print xp
(1) 1
(2) 2
(3) 3
(ladebug) quit
%
!
For the first whatis xp
3
3
3 command, xp has not yet been assigned to point to variable x and is a generic pointer.
" Since xp has been assigned to point to variable x, for the second command, xp takes the same size, shape, and values as x.
whatis xp
4.6.5.2 CRAY-Style Pointers
Like Fortran 95/90 pointers, Compaq Fortran (CRAY-style) pointers (POINTER statement) display the target data in their corresponding source form with a print command.
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–19
(ladebug) stop at 14
[#1: stop at "dfpoint.f90":14 ]
(ladebug) run
[1] stopped at [dfpoint:14 0x1200017e4]
(ladebug) list 1,14
1 program dfpoint
2
3
4
5 real i(5) pointer (p,i) n = 5 6
7
8
9 p = malloc(sizeof(i(1))*n)
10
11
12
13 do j = 1,5 i(j) = 10*j end do
> 14 end
(ladebug) whatis p float (1:5) pointer p
(ladebug) print p
0x140003060 = (1) 10
(2) 20
(3) 30
(4) 40
(5) 50
(ladebug) quit
%
4.6.6 Compaq Fortran Array Variables
For array variables, put subscripts within parentheses, as with Fortran 95/90 source statements. For example:
(ladebug) assign arrayc(1)=1
You can print out all elements of an array using its name. For example:
(ladebug) print arrayc
(1) 1
(2) 0
(3) 0
(ladebug)
Avoid displaying all elements of a large array. Instead, display specific array elements or array sections. For example, to print array element arrayc(2):
(ladebug) print arrayc(2)
(2) 0
4–20 Using the Ladebug Debugger
4.6.6.1 Array Sections
An array section is a portion of an array that is an array itself. An array section can use subscript triplet notation consisting of a three parts: a starting element, an ending element, and a stride.
Consider the following array declarations:
INTEGER, DIMENSION(0:99) :: arr
INTEGER, DIMENSION(0:4,0:4) :: FiveByFive
Assume that each array has been initialized to have the value of the index in each position, for example, FiveByFive(4,4) = 44, arr(43) = 43. The following examples are array expressions that will be accepted by the debugger:
(ladebug) print arr(2)
2
(ladebug) print arr(0:9:2)
(0) = 0
(2) = 2
(4) = 4
(6) = 6
(8) = 8
(ladebug) print FiveByFive(:,3)
(0,3) = 3
(1,3) = 13
(2,3) = 23
(3,3) = 33
(4,3) = 43
(ladebug)
The only operations permissible on array sections are whatis and print .
4.6.6.2 Assignment to Arrays
Assignment to array elements are supported by Ladebug.
For information about assigning values to whole arrays and array sections, see the Fortran chapter in the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Ladebug Debugger Manual.
4.6.7 Complex Variables
Ladebug supports COMPLEX or COMPLEX*8, COMPLEX*16, and
COMPLEX*32 variables and constants in expressions.
Consider the following Fortran program:
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–21
PROGRAM complextest
COMPLEX*8 C8 /(2.0,8.0)/
COMPLEX*16 C16 /(1.23,-4.56)/
REAL*4 R4 /2.0/
REAL*8 R8 /2.0/
REAL*16 R16 /2.0/
TYPE *, "C8=", C8
TYPE *, "C16=", C16
END PROGRAM
Ladebug supports the display and assignment of COMPLEX variables and constants as well as basic arithmetic operators. For example:
Welcome to the Ladebug Debugger Version x.x-xx
-----------------object file name: complex
Reading symbolic information ...done
(ladebug) stop in complextest
[#1: stop in complextest ]
(ladebug) run
[1] stopped at [complextest:15 0x1200017b4]
15 TYPE *, "C8=", C8
(ladebug) whatis c8 complex c8
(ladebug) whatis c16 double complex c16
(ladebug) print c8
(2, 8)
(ladebug) print c16
(1.23, -4.56)
(ladebug) assign c16=(-2.3E+10,4.5e-2)
(ladebug) print c16
(-23000000512, 0.04500000178813934)
(ladebug)
4.6.8 Compaq Fortran Data Types
Table 4–3 shows the Compaq Fortran data types and their equivalent built-in debugger names:
4–22 Using the Ladebug Debugger
Table 4–3 Fortran Data Types and Debugger Equivalents
Fortran 95/90 Data Type Declaration Debugger Equivalent
CHARACTER
INTEGER, INTEGER(KIND=n)
LOGICAL, LOGICAL (KIND=n)
REAL, REAL(KIND=4)
DOUBLE PRECISION, REAL(KIND=8)
REAL(KIND=16)
COMPLEX, COMPLEX(KIND=4)
DOUBLE COMPLEX, COMPLEX(KIND=8)
COMPLEX(KIND=16), COMPLEX*32 character integer, integer*n logical, logical*n real real*8 real*16 complex double complex long double complex
4.7 Expressions in Debugger Commands
Expressions in debugger commands use Fortran 95/90 source language syntax for operators and expressions.
Enclose debugger command expressions between curly braces ( { } ). For example, the expression print k in the following statement is enclosed between curly braces ( { } ):
(ladebug) when at 12 {print k}
4.7.1 Fortran Operators
The Compaq Fortran operators include the following:
• Relational operators, such as less than (.LT. or <) and equal to (.EQ. or = =)
• Logical operators, such as logical conjunction (.AND.) and logical disjunction (.OR.)
• Arithmetic operators, including addition ( + ), subtraction ( – ), multiplication ( * ), and division ( / ).
For More Information:
• For a complete list of operators, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–23
4.7.2 Procedures
The Ladebug debugger supports invocation of user-defined specific procedures using Fortran 95/90 source language syntax. Ladebug also supports the invocation of some of the Fortran 95/90 generic and specific procedures, currently limited to scalar arguments.
For More Information:
• For a complete list of intrinsic procedures, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
• For a list of supported intrinsic procedures and known limitations of that support, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Ladebug Debugger Manual.
4.8 Debugging Mixed-Language Programs with Ladebug
The Ladebug debugger lets you debug mixed-language programs. Program flow of control across subprograms written in different languages is transparent.
The debugger automatically identifies the language of the current subprogram or code segment on the basis of information embedded in the executable file.
For example, if program execution is suspended in a subprogram in Fortran, the current language is Fortran. If the debugger stops the program in a C function, the current language becomes C. The debugger uses the current language to determine the valid expression syntax and the semantics used to evaluate an expression.
The debugger sets the $lang variable to the language of the current subprogram or code segment. By manually setting the $lang debugger variable, you can force the debugger to interpret expressions used in commands by the rules and semantics of a particular language. For example, you can check the current setting of $lang and change it as follows:
(ladebug) print $lang
"C++"
(ladebug) set $lang = "Fortran"
When the $lang environment variable is set to ‘‘Fortran’’, names are case insensitive. To make names case-sensitive when the program was compiled with the -names as_is option, specify another language for the $lang environment variable, such as C, view the variable, then set the $lang environment variable to ‘‘Fortran’’.
4–24 Using the Ladebug Debugger
4.9 Debugging a Program that Generates an Exception
If your program encounters an exception at run time, to make it easier to debug the program, you should recompile and relink with the following f90 options before debugging the cause of the exception:
• Use the -fpen option to control the handling of exceptions. (See
Section 3.44, -fpen — Control Arithmetic Exception Handling and
Reporting.)
• If you use -fpe0 (default), specify the -synchronous_exceptions option to ensure that the exception error is reported as close to the cause of the exception as possible. (See Section 3.86, -synchronous_exceptions — Report
Exceptions More Precisely .)
• Like other debugging tasks, use the -g and -ladebug options to generate sufficient symbol table information and debug unoptimized code. (See
Section 4.2, Compaq Fortran Options for Debugging.)
If requested, Ladebug will catch and handle exceptions before the Compaq
Fortran run-time library does. You can use the Ladebug commands catch and ignore to control whether Ladebug catches exceptions or ignores them:
• When Ladebug catches an exception, a Ladebug message is displayed and execution stops at that statement line. The error-handling routines provided by the Compaq Fortran run-time library are not called. At this point, you can examine variables and determine where in the program the exception has occurred.
• When Ladebug ignores an exception, the exception is passed to the Compaq
Fortran run-time library. This allows the handling and display of Compaq
Fortran run-time exception messages in the manner requested during compilation.
To obtain the appropriate Compaq Fortran run-time error message when debugging a program that generates an exception (especially one that allows program continuation), you might need to use the ignore command before running the program. For instance, use the following command to tell the debugger to ignore floating-point exceptions and pass them through to the
Compaq Fortran run-time library:
(ladebug) ignore fpe
In cases where you need to locate the part of the program causing an exception, consider using the where command.
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–25
For More Information:
• On run-time errors, see Chapter 8, Run-Time Errors and Signals.
4.10 Locating Unaligned Data
As discussed in Chapter 5, unaligned data can slow program execution. You should determine the cause of the unaligned data, fix the source code (if necessary), and recompile and relink the program.
If your program encounters unaligned data at run-time, to make it easier to debug the program, you should recompile and relink with the following command-line options before debugging the cause of the exception:
• Use the -fpen
Section 3.44).
option to control the handling of exceptions (see
• If you use -fpe0 (the default), specify the -synchronous_exceptions option to ensure that the exception error is reported as close to the cause of the exception as possible (see Section 3.86).
4.10.1 Locating Unaligned Data With Ladebug
To determine the cause of the unaligned data when using Ladebug, follow these steps:
1.
Run the Ladebug debugger, specifying the program with the unaligned data (shown as testprog in the following example):
% ladebug testprog
2.
Before you run the program, enter the catch unaligned command:
(ladebug) catch unaligned
3.
Run the program:
(ladebug) run
Unaligned access pid=28413 <a.out> va=140000154 pc=3ff80805d60 ra=1200017e8 type=stl
Thread received signal BUS stopped at [oops:13 0x120001834]
13 end
4.
Enter a list command to display the source code at line 12:
(ladebug) list 12
12 i4 = 1
> 13 end
4–26 Using the Ladebug Debugger
5.
Enter the where command to find the location of the unaligned access:
(ladebug) where
6.
Use any other appropriate debugger commands needed to isolate the cause of the unaligned data, such as up , list , and down .
7.
Repeat these steps for other areas where unaligned data is reported.
Use the rerun command to run the program again instead of exiting the debugger and running it from the shell prompt.
After fixing the causes of the unaligned data (see Section 5.4), compile and link the program again.
4.10.2 Locating Unaligned Data With dbx
To determine the cause of the unaligned data when using these steps: dbx
(TU*X only)
, follow
1.
Write down the addresses reported in the run-time message (see
Section 5.4.2). For this example, assume the pc address in the ‘‘Unaligned access’’ message is 0x1200017f0.
2.
Run the debugger, specifying the program with the unaligned data (shown as testprog in the following example):
% dbx testprog
3.
Set a breakpoint at the address reported in the warning message by using the stopi at command (shown as 0x1200017f0 below):
(dbx) stopi at 0x1200017f0 stopi at 0x1200017f0]
4.
Run the program. It will stop at the breakpoint:
(dbx) run
[2] stopi at 0x1200017f0]
[2] stopped at >*[oops:12, 0x1200017f0] stl r3, 0(r1)
5.
Enter the where command to find the location of the unaligned access:
(dbx) where
6.
Use any other appropriate debugger commands needed to isolate the cause of the unaligned data, such as list , up , and down .
7.
Repeat these steps for other addresses that warning messages report.
8.
After fixing the causes of the unaligned data (see Section 5.4), compile and link the program again.
Using the Ladebug Debugger 4–27
4.11 Using Alternate Entry Points
If a subprogram uses alternate entry points (ENTRY statement within the subprogram), Ladebug handles alternate entry points as separate subprograms, including:
• Use of the ENTRY statement name as a breakpoint ( stop in command)
• Use of the where command at an alternate entry point breakpoint location
4.12 Debugging Optimized Programs
The Compaq Fortran compiler performs code optimizations ( -O4 ) by default, unless you specify -g (or -g2 ).
Debugging optimized code is recommended only under special circumstances, for example, if a problem disappears when you specify the -O0 option.
One aid to debugging optimized code is to use one of the following commandline options:
• Use the -show code and -V options to generate a listing file that shows the compiled code produced for your program.
• Use the -S option to generate an Assembler file ( .s
).
By referring to a listing of the generated code, you can see how the compiler optimizations affected your code. This lets you determine the debugging commands you need in order to isolate the problem.
When you try to perform a debugger operation on a variable or language construct that has been optimized, the variable or line may not exist in the debugging environment. For example:
• If the Compaq Fortran compiler can determine that a memory location for a variable is not needed for the correct operation of a program, no memory is allocated to it.
• If the Compaq Fortran compiler can determine that an entire Fortran
95/90 statement is not needed for correct operation of the program (for example, an unnecessary CONTINUE statement), that statement is not represented in the object code. As a result, the debugger will use the next available line.
For More Information:
• See Section 5.8, Optimization Levels: the -On Option.
• See Section 5.9, Other Options Related to Optimization.
4–28 Using the Ladebug Debugger
5
Performance: Making Programs Run
Faster
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 5.1, Efficient Compilation and the Software Environment
• Section 5.2, Using the time Command to Measure Performance
• Section 5.3, Using Profiling Tools
• Section 5.4, Data Alignment Considerations
• Section 5.5, Using Arrays Efficiently
• Section 5.6, Improving Overall I/O Performance
• Section 5.7, Additional Source Code Guidelines for Run-Time Efficiency
• Section 5.8, Optimization Levels: the -On Option
• Section 5.9, Other Options Related to Optimization
•
•
Note
To invoke the Compaq Fortran compiler, use: f90 fort on Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems command on Linux Alpha systems
This chapter uses f90 to indicate invoking Compaq Fortran on both systems, so replace this command with fort if you are working on a
Linux Alpha system.
To invoke the Compaq C compiler, use:
• cc on Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–1
• ccc on Linux Alpha systems
This chapter uses cc to indicate invoking Compaq C on both systems, so replace this command with ccc if you are working on a Linux Alpha system.
5.1 Efficient Compilation and the Software Environment
Before you attempt to analyze and improve program performance, you should:
• Obtain and install the latest version of Compaq Fortran, along with performance products that can improve application performance, such as the Compaq Extended Mathematical Library (CXML).
• Use the f90 command (or, on Linux systems, the fort command) and its options in a manner that lets the Compaq Fortran compiler perform as many optimizations as possible to improve run-time performance.
• Use certain performance capabilities provided by the Compaq Tru64 UNIX operating system.
• Make sure that you correct any errors you might have encountered during the early stages of program development.
5.1.1 Install the Latest Version of Compaq Fortran and Performance
Products
To ensure that your software development environment can significantly improve the run-time performance of your applications, obtain and install the following optional software products:
• The latest version of Compaq Fortran
New releases of the Compaq Fortran compiler and its associated run-time libraries may provide new features that improve run-time performance.
The Compaq Fortran run-time libraries shipped with Compaq Fortran are also shipped with the Compaq Tru64 UNIX operating system. Always install the Compaq Fortran subset with the highest subset number. This number is always available, for both Tru64 and Linux operating systems, at the following Web page: http://www.compaq.com/fortran
If your application will be run on a Compaq Tru64 UNIX system other than your program development system, be sure to install the same (or later) version of the Compaq Fortran run-time environment on those systems.
5–2 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
You can obtain the appropriate Compaq Services software product maintenance contract to automatically receive new versions of Compaq
Fortran. For information on more recent Compaq Fortran releases, contact the Compaq Customer Support Center (CSC) if you have the appropriate support contract, or contact your local Compaq sales representative.
When using a shared memory, multiprocessor system, you can choose either directed parallel processing or Compaq KAP Fortran/OpenMP for
Tru64 UNIX.
• Compaq KAP Fortran/OpenMP for Tru64 UNIX
(TU*X only)
Allows preprocessing of Compaq Fortran source files to improve their run-time performance. You can purchase this product from Compaq. See the KAP Optimizers Web site at: http://www.compaq.com/hpc/software/kap.html
The KAP performance preprocessor also supports parallel processing using automatic and directed decomposition for a shared memory multiprocessor
Alpha system.
You can do one of the following:
Use the preprocessor-only kapf90 command to produce improved
Fortran 95/90 source files before compiling them with the f90 command.
Use the kf90 command to invoke the preprocessor, compiler, and linker to create an executable program.
For example, the following kf90 command:
Specifies the KAP preprocessor be run for the free-form file for_cal.f90
Recognizes the BLAS level 2 and 3 routines
Searches the CXML library for unresolved references
Compiles and links the resulting preprocessed source file:
% kf90 -fkapargs=’-lc=blas’ for_cal.f90 -lcxml
For More Information:
• See Compaq KAP Fortran/OpenMP for Tru64 UNIX User Guide.
• Compaq Extended Mathematical Library (CXML) for Compaq Tru64 UNIX
Systems
See Chapter 13, Using the Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML).
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–3
• Performance profiling and feedback tools provided with Compaq Tru64
UNIX
The standard set of U*X profiling and performance tools include gprof , pixie
(TU*X only)
, cord , and the use of feedback files.
prof ,
Compaq Tru64 UNIX Version 4.0 or later also includes:
The Atom tool, which consists of a set of routines for creating customdesigned program-analysis tools.
Prepackaged Atom-based program-analysis tools, which include the profiling tools pixie
(TU*X only) and hiprof .
For More Information:
• See atom (1).
• See the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Programmer’s Guide.
• System-wide performance products
Other products are not specific to a particular programming language or application, but can improve system-wide performance, such as minimizing disk device I/O and handling capacity planning. Such Tru64
UNIX products include DECRaid (shadowing and striping) and such
POLYCENTER products as the Capacity Planner, Performance Solution, and Performance Advisor.
Adequate process limits and virtual memory space as well as proper system tuning are especially important when running large programs, such as those accessing large arrays.
For More Information:
• About system-wide tuning and suggestions for other performance enhancements on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, see Compaq Tru64 UNIX
System Tuning and Performance.
5.1.2 Compile Using Multiple Source Files and Appropriate f90 Options
During the earlier stages of program development, you can use incremental compilation with minimal optimization. For example:
% f90 -c -O1 sub2.f90
% f90 -c -O1 sub3.f90
% f90 -o main.out -g -O0 main.f90 sub2.o
sub3.o
5–4 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
During the later stages of program development, you should specify multiple source files together and use an optimization level of at least -O4 on the f90 command line to allow more interprocedure optimizations to occur. For instance, the following command compiles all three source files together using the default level of optimization ( -O4 ):
% f90 -o main.out main.f90 sub2.f90
sub3.f90
Compiling multiple source files lets the compiler examine more code for possible optimizations, which results in:
• Inlining more procedures
• More complete data flow analysis
• Reducing the number of external references to be resolved during linking
For very large programs, compiling all source files together may not be practical. In such instances, consider compiling source files containing related routines together using multiple files individually.
f90 commands, rather than compiling source
Table 5–1 shows f90 options that can improve performance. Most of these options do not affect the accuracy of the results, while others improve run-time performance but can change some numeric results.
Compaq Fortran performs certain optimizations unless you specify the appropriate f90 command options. Additional optimizations can be enabled or disabled using f90 command options.
Table 5–1 lists the f90 options that can directly improve run-time performance.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–5
Table 5–1 Options That Affect Run-Time Performance
Option Names
-align keyword
-architecture keyword
-cord and
-feedback file
-fast
Description
Controls whether padding bytes are added between data items within common blocks, derived-type data, and Compaq Fortran record structures to make the data items naturally aligned.
Determines the type of Alpha architecture code instructions to be generated for the program unit being compiled. All Alpha processors implement a core set of instructions; certain processor versions include additional instruction extensions.
Uses a feedback file created during a previous compilation by specifying the -gen_feedback option. These options use the feedback file to improve run-time performance, optionally using cord to rearrange procedures.
Sets the following performance-related options:
-align dcommons
-align sequence
-arch host
-assume bigarrays
(TU*X only)
-assume nozsize
(TU*X only)
-assume noaccuracy_sensitive (same as -fp_reorder )
-math_library fast
-tune host
For More
Information
Section 5.4
Section 3.5
Section 5.3.5
See description of each option
-fp_reorder Allows the compiler to reorder code based on algebraic identities to improve performance, enabling certain optimizations. The numeric results can be slightly different from the default ( -no_fp_reorder ) because of the way intermediate results are rounded. This slight difference in numeric results is acceptable to most programs.
Section 5.9.7
(continued on next page)
5–6 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
Table 5–1 (Cont.) Options That Affect Run-Time Performance
Option Names
-gen_feedback
-hpf num and related options (TU*X only)
-inline all
-inline speed
-inline size
-math_library fast
-mp
-On (
(TU*X only)
-O0 to -O5 )
Description
For More
Information
Requests generated code that allows accurate feedback information for subsequent use of the
-feedback file option (optionally with cord ).
Using -gen_feedback changes the default optimization level from -O4 to -O0 .
Specifies that the code generated for this program will allow parallel execution on multiple processors
Inlines every call that can possibly be inlined while generating correct code. Certain recursive routines are not inlined to prevent infinite loops.
Inlines procedures that will improve run-time performance with a likely significant increase in program size.
Section 5.3.5
Section 3.50
Section 5.9.3
Section 5.9.3
Inlines procedures that will improve run-time performance without a significant increase in program size. This type of inlining occurs at optimization level -O4 and -O5 .
Requests the use of certain math library routines (used by intrinsic functions) that provide faster speed. Using this option causes a slight loss of accuracy and provides less reliable arithmetic exception checking to get significant performance improvements in those functions.
Enables parallel processing using directed decomposition (directives inserted in source code). This can improve the performance of certain programs running on shared memory multiprocessor systems
Section 5.9.3
Section 3.61
Section 3.64
Controls the optimization level and thus the types of optimization performed. The default optimization level is -O4 , unless you specify
-g2 , -g , or -gen_feedback , which changes the default to -O0 (no optimizations). Use -O5 to activate loop transformation optimizations.
Section 5.8
(continued on next page)
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–7
Table 5–1 (Cont.) Options That Affect Run-Time Performance
Option Names
-om
(TU*X only)
-omp
-p ,
-pg
(TU*X only)
-p1
-pipeline
-speculate keyword
(TU*X only)
-transform_loops
Description
For More
Information
Used with the -non_shared option to request certain code optimizations after linking, including nop (No Operation) removal, .lita
removal, and reallocation of common symbols.
This option also positions the global pointer register so the maximum addresses fall in the global-pointer window.
Enables parallel processing using directed decomposition (directives inserted in source code). This can improve the performance of certain programs running on shared memory multiprocessor systems
Requests profiling information, which you can use to identify those parts of your program where improving source code efficiency would most likely improve run-time performance.
After you modify the appropriate source code, recompile the program and test the run-time performance.
Requests profiling information for the gprof tool, which you can use to identify those parts of your program where improving source code efficiency would most likely improve run-time performance. After you modify the appropriate source code, recompile the program and test the run-time performance.
Section 3.73
Section 3.74
Section 5.3
Section 5.3
Activates the software pipelining optimization
(a subset of -O4 ).
Enables the speculative execution optimization, a form of instruction scheduling for conditional expressions.
Activates a group of loop transformation optimizations (a subset of -O5 ).
Section 3.76
Section 3.84
Section 3.89
(continued on next page)
5–8 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
Table 5–1 (Cont.) Options That Affect Run-Time Performance
Option Names
-tune keyword
-unroll num
Description
For More
Information
Specifies the target processor generation (chip) architecture on which the program will be run, allowing the optimizer to make decisions about instruction tuning optimizations needed to create the most efficient code. Keywords allow specifying one particular Alpha processor generation type, multiple processor generation types, or the processor generation type currently in use during compilation. Regardless of the setting of -tune keyword , the generated code will run correctly on all implementations of the Alpha architecture.
Specifies the number of times a loop is unrolled
(num) when specified with optimization level
-O3 or higher. If you omit -unroll num , the optimizer determines how many times loops are unrolled.
Section 5.9.4
Section 5.8.4.1
Table 5–2 lists options that can slow program performance. Some applications that require floating-point exception handling or rounding might need to use the the
-fpen and -fprm dynamic
-assume dummy_aliases or options. Other applications might need to use
-vms options for compatibility reasons. Other options listed in Table 5–2 are primarily for troubleshooting or debugging purposes.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–9
Table 5–2 Options that Slow Run-Time Performance
Option Names
-assume dummy_aliases
-c
-check bounds
-check omp_bindings
(TU*X only)
-check overflow
-fpen
-fpe0 values greater than
-fprm dynamic (TU*X only)
Description
For More
Information
Forces the compiler to assume that dummy
(formal) arguments to procedures share memory locations with other dummy arguments or with variables shared through use association, host association, or common block use. These program semantics slow performance, so you should specify -assume dummy_aliases only for the called subprograms that depend on such aliases.
The use of dummy aliases violates the
FORTRAN-77 and Fortran 95/90 standards but occurs in some older programs.
If you use -c when compiling multiple source files, also specify -o output to compile many source files together into one object file. Separate compilations prevent certain interprocedure optimizations, such as when using multiple commands or using f90
-c without the -o output option.
Generates extra code for array bounds checking at run time.
Section 5.9.8
Section 2.1.6
Section 3.23
Provides run-time checking to enforce the binding rules for OpenMP Fortran API (parallel processing) compiler directives inserted in source code.
Section 3.26
Generates extra code to check integer calculations for arithmetic overflow at run time. Once the program is debugged, omit this option to reduce executable program size and slightly improve run-time performance.
Using or
-fpe1
(TU*X only) , -fpe2
(TU*X only) , -fpe3 ,
-fpe4
(TU*X only) (or using the for_set_fpe routine to set equivalent exception handling) slows program execution. For programs that specify -fpe3 or -fpe4
(TU*X only) , the impact on run-time performance can be significant.
Section 3.28
Section 3.44
Certain rounding modes and changing the rounding mode can slow program execution slightly.
Section 3.46
(continued on next page)
5–10 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
Table 5–2 (Cont.) Options that Slow Run-Time Performance
Option Names Description
-g , -g2 , -g3
-inline none
-inline manual
-O0 , -O1 , -O2 , or -O3
Generates extra symbol table information in the object file. Specifying -g or -g2 also reduces the default level of optimization to -O0 .
Prevents the inlining of all procedures (except statement functions).
Minimizes the optimization level (and types of optimizations). Use during the early stages of program development or when you will use the debugger.
-synchronous_exceptions Generates extra code to associate an arithmetic exception with the instruction that causes it, slowing efficient instruction execution. Use this option only when troubleshooting, such as when identifying the source of an exception.
-vms Controls certain VMS-related run-time defaults, including alignment. If you specify the -vms option, you may need to also specify the -align records option to obtain optimal run-time performance.
For More
Information
Section 3.48
Section 5.9.3
Section 3.72
and
Section 5.8
Section 3.86
Section 3.98
For More Information:
• On compiling multiple files, see Section 2.1.6.
• On minimizing external references, see Section 11.1.1.
5.1.3 Process Shell Environment and Related Influences on
Performance
Certain shell commands and system tuning can improve run-time performance:
• Specify adequate process limits and do system tuning.
Especially when compiling or running large programs, check to make sure that process limits are adequate.
With the C shell ( csh ), use the limits command to display the limits of your process and increase specified limits. For more information, see csh (1).
With the Bourne, Korn, and bash
(L*X only) shells, use the ulimit command to display the limits of your process and increase specified limits. For more information, see shell)
(L*X only)
.
sh (1) (Bourne shell), ksh (1) (Korn shell), or bash (1) (bash
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–11
Your system manager can tune the system for efficient use. For example, to monitor system use during program execution or compilation, a system manager can use vmstat .
For more information on system tuning, see your operating system documentation.
• Redirect scrolled text.
For programs that display a lot of text, consider redirecting text that is usually displayed on stdout to a file. Displaying a lot of text will slow down execution; scrolling text in a terminal window on a workstation can cause an I/O bottleneck (increased elapsed time) and use some CPU time.
The following commands show how to run the program more efficiently by redirecting output to a file and then displaying the program output:
# myprog > results.lis
# more results.lis
• When compiling a program that contains a substantial amount of C language code, be aware that you can specify most cc options on the f90 command line, including several that can improve performance. You can also compile C code using the cc -c option, and then use the f90 command to compile and link the Compaq Fortran source files with the C language object files.
Recall from Chapter 2 and Chapter 3 that the f90 and cc commands invoke the Compaq Fortran compiler and Compaq C compiler, respectively, on Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems. The corresponding commands on Linux
Alpha systems are fort and ccc .
For More Information:
• On system tuning and cc options related to performance, see your operating system documentation and the appropriate reference pages.
5.2 Using the time Command to Measure Performance
Use the time command to provide information about program performance.
Run program timings when other users are not active. Your timing results can be affected by one or more CPU-intensive processes also running while doing your timings.
Try to run the program under the same conditions each time to provide the most accurate results, especially when comparing execution times of a previous version of the same program. Use the same CPU system (model, amount of memory, version of the operating system, and so on) if possible.
5–12 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
If you do need to change systems, you should measure the time using the same version of the program on both systems, so you know each system’s effect on your timings.
For programs that run for less than a few seconds, run several timings to ensure that the results are not misleading. Overhead functions like loading shared libraries might influence short timings considerably.
Using the form of the time command that specifies the name of the executable program provides the following:
• The elapsed, real, or ‘‘wall clock’’ time, which will be greater than the total charged actual CPU time.
• Charged actual CPU time, shown for both system and user execution. The total actual CPU time is the sum of the actual user CPU time and actual system CPU time.
In the following example timings, the sample program being timed displays the following line:
Average of all the numbers is: 4368488960.000000
Using the Bourne shell, the following program timing reports that the program uses 1.19 seconds of total actual CPU time (0.61 seconds in actual CPU time for user program use and 0.58 seconds of actual CPU time for system use) and
2.46 seconds of elapsed time:
$ time a.out
Average of all the numbers is: 4368488960.000000
real 0m2.46s
user 0m0.61s
sys 0m0.58s
Using the C shell, the following program timing reports 1.19 seconds of total actual CPU time (0.61 seconds in actual CPU time for user program use and
0.58 seconds of actual CPU time for system use), about 4 seconds (0:04) of elapsed time, the use of 28% of available CPU time, and other information:
% time a.out
Average of all the numbers is: 4368488960.000000
0.61u 0.58s 0:04 28% 78+424k 9+5io 0pf+0w
Using the bash shell
(L*X only)
, the following program timing reports that the program uses 1.19 seconds of total actual CPU time (0.61 seconds in actual
CPU time for user program use and 0.58 seconds of actual CPU time for system use) and 2.46 seconds of elapsed time:
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–13
[user@system user]$ time ./a.out
Average of all the numbers is: 4368488960.000000
elapsed 0m2.46s
user 0m0.61s
sys 0m0.58s
Timings that show a large amount of system time may indicate a lot of time spent doing I/O, which might be worth investigating.
If your program displays a lot of text, you can redirect the output from the program on the time command line. (See Section 5.1.3.) Redirecting output from the program will change the times reported because of reduced screen
I/O.
For more information, see time (1).
In addition to the time command, you might consider modifying the program to call routines within the program to measure execution time. For example:
• Compaq Fortran intrinsic procedures, such as SYSTEM_CLOCK, DATE_
AND_TIME, and TIME (see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual)
• Library routines, such as intro (3f)).
etime or time (see Section 12.2, 3f Routines or
5.3 Using Profiling Tools
To generate profiling information, use the and pixie
(TU*X only) tools.
f90 compiler and the prof , gprof ,
Profiling identifies areas of code where significant program execution time is spent. Along with the f90 command, use the prof and pixie
(TU*X only) tools to generate the following profile information:
• The CPU time spent in the different routines of the program, or program
counter sampling. This type of profiling uses prof .
• The manner in which routines are called by other routines, or call graph information. This type of profiling uses gprof .
• The execution of basic blocks, called basic block counting. A basic
block is a sequence of instructions entered only at the beginning and exited only at the end (no branches). This provides statistics on individual lines of code and is influenced by such optimizations as loop unrolling. This type of profiling uses prof and pixie
(TU*X only)
.
5–14 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
• The estimated number of CPU cycles spent for each source line in one or more procedures, or source line CPU cycle use. This type of profiling uses prof and pixie
(TU*X only)
.
Once you have determined those sections of code where most of the program execution time is spent, examine these sections for coding efficiency. Suggested guidelines for improving source code efficiency are provided in Section 5.7.
Along with profiling, you can consider generating a listing file with annotations of optimizations, by specifying the -V and -annotations options.
5.3.1 Program Counter Sampling (prof)
To obtain program counter sampling data, perform the following steps:
1.
Use the f90 command option -p to compile and link the program:
% f90 -p -O3 -o profsample profsample.f90
If you specify the -c option to prevent linking, you must specify the option when you link the program:
-p
% f90 -c -O3 profsample.f90
% f90 -p -O3 -o profsample profsample.o
Consider specifying optimization level -O3 or -inline manual to minimize the inlining of procedures. Once inlined, procedures are not listed as separate routines but as part of the routine into which they have been inlined. Allowing full inlining would result in program counter sampling for a small number of (usually) large routines. This might not help you locate areas of the program where significant program execution time is spent.
2.
Execute the profiled program:
% profsample
During program execution, profiling data is written to a profile data file, whose default name is mon.out
. You can execute the program multiple times to generate multiple profile data files, which can be averaged. Use the PROFDIR environment variable to request a different profile data file name.
3.
Run the prof command, which formats the profiling data and displays it in a readable format:
% prof profsample mon.out
You can limit the report created by as -only , -exclude , or -quit .
prof by using prof command options, such
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–15
For example, if you only want reports on procedures calc_max and calc_min you could use the following command line to read the profile data file named
, mon.out
:
% prof -only calc_max -only calc_min profsample
The time spent in particular areas of code is reported by prof in the form of a percentage of the total CPU time spent by the program. To reduce the size of the report, you can either:
• Request that only certain procedures be included (by using the option).
-only
• Exclude certain procedures (by using the -exclude option).
When you use the -only or -exclude options, the percentages are still based on all procedures of the application. To obtain percentages calculated by prof that are based on only those procedures included in the report, use the and -Exclude
-Only options (use an uppercase initial letter in the option name).
You can use the -quit option to reduce the amount of information reported.
For example, the following command prints information on only the five most time-consuming procedures:
% prof -quit 5 profsample
The following command limits information only to those procedures using 10% or more of the total execution time:
% prof -quit 10% profsample
For More Information:
• On prof , see prof (1) and the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Programmer’s Guide.
5.3.2 Call Graph Sampling (gprof)
To obtain call graph information, use the steps: gprof tool. Perform the following
1.
Use the command-line option -pg when you compile and link the program:
% f90 -pg -O3 -o profsample profsample.for
If you specify the -c option to prevent linking, you must then specify the
-pg option both when you compile and link the program:
% f90 -pg -c -O3 profsample.f90
% f90 -pg -O3 -o profsample profsample.f90
5–16 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
2.
Execute the profiled program:
% profsample
During execution, profiling data is saved to the file environment variable PROFDIR is set.
gmon.out
, unless the
3.
Run the formatting program gprof :
% gprof profsample gmon.out
The output produced by gprof includes:
• Call graph profile
• Timing profile (similar to that produced by prof )
• Index
For More Information:
• On using
Guide.
gprof and its output, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Programmer’s
5.3.3 Basic Block Counting (pixie and prof)
To obtain basic block counting information, perform the following steps:
1.
Compile and link the program without the -p option:
% f90 -O3 -o profsample profsample.f90
Consider specifying optimization level -O3 or -inline manual to minimize the inlining of procedures (once inlined, procedures are not listed as separate routines but as part of the routine into which they are inlined).
2.
Run the profiling command pixie :
(TU*X only)
% atom -tools pixie profsample
The pixie command creates:
(TU*X only)
• A program named profsample.pixie
that is equivalent to profsample but contains additional code for counting the execution of each basic block.
• A file named basic block.
profsample.Addrs
, which contains the address of each
3.
Execute the profiled program profsample.pixie
generated by pixie :
% profsample.pixie
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–17
This program creates the file block counts.
profsample.Counts
, which contains the basic
4.
Run the prof with the -pixie option, to extract and display information from profsample.Addrs
and profsample.Counts
files:
% prof -pixie profsample
When you specify the -pixie option
(TU*X only)
, the prof command searches for files with a suffix of .Addrs
and .Counts
(in this case profsample.Addrs
and profsample.Counts
).
You can reduce the amount of information in the report created by using the -only , -exclude , -quit , and related options.
prof by
To create multiple profile data files, run the program multiple times.
For More Information:
• On prof , gprof , and pixie
(TU*X only)
, see prof the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Programmer’s Guide.
(1), gprof (1), pixie (1), and
5.3.4 Source Line CPU Cycle Use (prof and pixie)
You use the same files created by the pixie command (see Section 5.3.3) for basic block counting to estimate the number of CPU cycles used to execute each source file line.
To view a report of the number of CPU cycles estimated for each source file line, use the following options with the prof command:
• The -pixie
(TU*X only) option is required to obtain source line information.
• The -heavy option prints an entry for each source code line, including the number of CPU cycles used by that line. Entries are sorted in descending order of CPU cycles and should be limited by using the options that limit the report size, such as -quit , -only prof
, or command
-exclude .
• The -lines option requests source line information, but in the order in which the lines occur in the program (not sorted in descending order of
CPU cycles).
Depending on the level of optimization chosen, certain source lines might be optimized away.
The CPU cycle use estimates are based primarily on the instruction type and its operands and do not include memory effects such as cache misses or translation buffer fills.
5–18 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
For example, the following command sequence uses:
• The f90 and pixie
(TU*X only) commands to create the necessary files.
• The prof command to request source line CPU cycle use information for the procedure named calc_max ( -only option), sorted in descending order of CPU cycles ( -heavy option):
% f90 -o profsample profsample.f90
% atom -tools pixie profsample
% profsample.pixie
% prof -pixie -heavy -only calc_max profsample
5.3.5 Creating and Using Feedback Files and Optionally cord
You can create a feedback file by using a series of commands. Once created, you can specify a feedback file in a subsequent compilation with the f90 command option -feedback . You can also request that feedback file to rearrange procedures, by specifying the -cord cord use the option on the f90 command line.
To create the feedback file, complete these steps:
1.
Compile and link the program. Omit the
-gen_feedback option:
-p option, but specify the
% f90 -o profsample -gen_feedback profsample.f90
The -gen_feedback option changes the default optimization level to -O0 .
To include libraries in the profiling output, specify -non_shared .
2.
Execute the profiling command pixie (TU*X only)
:
% pixie profsample
The pixie command creates:
• A program named profsample.pixie
that is equivalent to profsample but contains additional code for counting the execution of each basic block.
• A file named basic block.
profsample.Addrs
, which contains the address of each
3.
Execute the profiled program profsample.pixie
generated by pixie :
% profsample.pixie
This program creates the file block counts.
profsample.Counts
, which contains the basic
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–19
4.
Run prof with the -pixie and -feedback options:
% prof -pixie -feedback profsample.feedback profsample
This prof command creates the feedback file profsample.feedback
.
You can use the feedback file as input to the f90 compiler:
% f90 -feedback profsample.feedback -o profsample profsample.f90
The feedback file provides the compiler with actual execution information, which the compiler can use to improve such optimizations as inlining function calls.
Specify the desired optimization level ( -On option) for the f90 command with the -feedback name option (in this example the default is -O4 ).
You can use the feedback file as input to the f90 compiler and cord , as follows:
% f90 -cord -feedback profsample.feedback -o profsample profsample.f90
The -cord option invokes cord , which reorders the procedures in an executable program to improve program execution, using the information in the specified feedback file. Specify the desired optimization level ( -On option) for the f90 command with the -feedback name option (in this example -O4 ).
5.3.6 Atom Toolkit
(TU*X only)
The Atom toolkit includes a programmable instrumentation tool and several prepackaged tools. The prepackaged tools include:
• hiprof
Produces a flat profile of an application that shows the execution time spent in a given procedure, and a hierarchical profile that shows the execution time spent in a given procedure and all of its descendents.
• pixie
Produces a profile of an application, by procedure, source line, or instruction. It partitions the application into basic blocks and counts the number of times each basic block is executed.
• third
Performs memory access checks and detects memory leaks in an application.
To invoke atom tools, use the following general command syntax:
% atom -tool tool-name ...)
Atom does not work on programs built with the -om option.
5–20 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
For More Information:
• See the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Programmers Guide.
• See atom (1), hiprof (5), pixie (5), and third (5).
5.4 Data Alignment Considerations
For optimal performance on Alpha systems, make sure your data is aligned naturally.
A natural boundary is a memory address that is a multiple of the data item’s size (data type sizes are described in Table 9–1). For example, a REAL
(KIND=8) data item aligned on natural boundaries has an address that is a multiple of 8. An array is aligned on natural boundaries if all of its elements are.
All data items whose starting address is on a natural boundary are naturally
aligned. Data not aligned on a natural boundary is called unaligned data.
Although the Compaq Fortran compiler naturally aligns individual data items when it can, certain Compaq Fortran statements (such as EQUIVALENCE) can cause data items to become unaligned (see Section 5.4.1).
Although you can use the f90 command -align keyword options to ensure naturally aligned data, you should check and consider reordering data declarations of data items within common blocks and structures. Within each common block, derived type, or record structure, carefully specify the order and sizes of data declarations to ensure naturally aligned data. Start with the largest size numeric items first, followed by smaller size numeric items, and then nonnumeric (character) data.
5.4.1 Causes of Unaligned Data and Ensuring Natural Alignment
Common blocks (COMMON statement), derived-type data, and Compaq
Fortran 77 record structures (RECORD statement) usually contain multiple items within the context of the larger structure.
The following declaration statements can force data to be unaligned:
• Common blocks (COMMON statement)
The order of variables in the COMMON statement determines their storage order.
Unless you are sure that the data items in the common block will be naturally aligned, specify either the -align commons or -align dcommons option, depending on the largest data size used.
See Section 5.4.3.1, Arranging Data Items in Common Blocks.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–21
• Derived-type (user-defined) data
Derived-type data members are declared after a TYPE statement.
If your data includes derived-type data structures, you should use the
-align records option, unless you are sure that the data items in derivedtype data structures will be naturally aligned.
If you omit the SEQUENCE statement, the ensures all data items are naturally aligned.
-align records option (default)
If you specify the SEQUENCE statement, the -align record option is prevented from adding necessary padding to avoid unaligned data (data items are packed) unless you specify the -align sequence option. When you use SEQUENCE, you should specify data declaration order such that all data items are naturally aligned.
See Section 5.4.3.2, Arranging Data Items in Derived-Type Data.
• Compaq Fortran record structures (RECORD and STRUCTURE statements)
Compaq Fortran record structures usually contain multiple data items.
The order of variables in the STRUCTURE statement determines their storage order. The RECORD statement names the record structure.
If your data includes Compaq Fortran record structures, you should use the -align records option, unless you are sure that the data items in derived-type data and Compaq Fortran record structures will be naturally aligned.
See Section 5.4.3.3, Arranging Data Items in Compaq Fortran Record
Structures.
• EQUIVALENCE statements
EQUIVALENCE statements can force unaligned data or cause data to span natural boundaries. For more information, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
To avoid unaligned data in a common block, derived-type data, or record structure (extension), use one or both of the following:
• For new programs or for programs where the source code declarations can be modified easily, plan the order of data declarations with care.
For example, you should order variables in a COMMON statement such that numeric data is arranged from largest to smallest, followed by any character data (see the data declaration rules in Section 5.4.3).
5–22 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
• For existing programs where source code changes are not easily done or for array elements containing derived-type or record structures, you can use command line options to request that the compiler align numeric data by adding padding spaces where needed.
Other possible causes of unaligned data include unaligned actual arguments and arrays that contain a derived-type structure or Compaq Fortran record structure.
When actual arguments from outside the program unit are not naturally aligned, unaligned data access will occur. Compaq Fortran assumes all passed arguments are naturally aligned and has no information at compile time about data that will be introduced by actual arguments during program execution.
For arrays where each array element contains a derived-type structure or
Compaq Fortran record structure, the size of the array elements may cause some elements (but not the first) to start on an unaligned boundary.
Even if the data items are naturally aligned within a derived-type structure without the SEQUENCE statement or a record structure, the size of an array element might require use of f90 -align options to supply needed padding to avoid some array elements being unaligned.
If you specify -align norecords or specify -vms without -align records , no padding bytes are added between array elements. If array elements each contain a derived-type structure with the SEQUENCE statement, array elements are packed without padding bytes regardless of the f90 command options specified. In this case, some elements will be unaligned.
When -align records option is in effect, the number of padding bytes added by the compiler for each array element is dependent on the size of the largest data item within the structure. The compiler determines the size of the array elements as an exact multiple of the largest data item in the derived-type structure without the SEQUENCE statement or a record structure. The compiler then adds the appropriate number of padding bytes.
For instance, if a structure contains an 8-byte floating-point number followed by a 3-byte character variable, each element contains five bytes of padding
(16 is an exact multiple of 8). However, if the structure contains one 4-byte floating-point number, one 4-byte integer, followed by a 3-byte character variable, each element would contain one byte of padding (12 is an exact multiple of 4).
For More Information:
• On the -align keyword options, see Section 5.4.4.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–23
5.4.2 Checking for Inefficient Unaligned Data
During compilation, the Compaq Fortran compiler naturally aligns as much data as possible. Exceptions that can result in unaligned data are described in
Section 5.4.1.
Because unaligned data can slow run-time performance, it is worthwhile to:
• Double-check data declarations within common block, derived-type data, or record structures to ensure all data items are naturally aligned (see the data declaration rules in Section 5.4.3). Using modules to contain data declarations can ensure consistent alignment and use of such data.
• Avoid the EQUIVALENCE statement or use it in a manner that cannot cause unaligned data or data spanning natural boundaries.
• Ensure that passed arguments from outside the program unit are naturally aligned.
• Check that the size of array elements containing at least one derived-type data or record structure (extension) cause array elements to start on aligned boundaries (see Section 5.4.1).
There are two ways unaligned data might be reported:
• During compilation, warning messages are issued for any data items that are known to be unaligned (unless you specify the -warn noalignments option).
• During program execution, warning messages are issued for any data that is detected as unaligned. The message includes the address of the unaligned access. You can use the ladebug debugger to locate unaligned data.
The following run-time message shows that:
The statement accessing the unaligned data (program counter) is located at 3ff80805d60
The unaligned data is located at address 140000154
Unaligned access pid=24821 <a.out> va=140000154, pc=3ff80805d60, ra=1200017bc
To check where the address is located, use the debugger as described in
Section 4.10.
To suppress unaligned access run-time messages, use the
(see uac (1)).
uac command
5–24 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
5.4.3 Ordering Data Declarations to Avoid Unaligned Data
For new programs or when the source declarations of an existing program can be easily modified, plan the order of your data declarations carefully to ensure the data items in a common block, derived-type data, record structure, or data items made equivalent by an EQUIVALENCE statement will be naturally aligned.
Use the following rules to prevent unaligned data:
• Always define the largest size numeric data items first.
• If your data includes a mixture of character and numeric data, place the numeric data first.
• Add small data items of the correct size (or padding) before otherwise unaligned data to ensure natural alignment for the data that follows.
When declaring data, consider using explicit length declarations, such as specifying a KIND parameter. For example, specify INTEGER(KIND=4) (or
INTEGER(4)) rather than INTEGER. If you do use a default length (such as
INTEGER, LOGICAL, COMPLEX, and REAL), be aware that the compiler options -integer_size and -real_size can change the size of an individual field’s data declaration size and thus can alter the data alignment of a carefully planned order of data declarations.
Using the suggested data declaration guidelines minimizes the need to use the -align keyword options to add padding bytes to ensure naturally aligned data. In cases where the -align keyword options are still needed, using the suggested data declaration guidelines can minimize the number of padding bytes added by the compiler.
5.4.3.1 Arranging Data Items in Common Blocks
The order of data items in a COMMON statement determine the order in which the data items are stored. Consider the following declaration of a common block named X:
LOGICAL (KIND=2) FLAG
INTEGER IARRY_I(3)
CHARACTER(LEN=5) NAME_CH
COMMON /X/ FLAG, IARRY_I(3), NAME_CH
As shown in Figure 5–1, if you omit the appropriate f90 command options, the common block will contain unaligned data items beginning at the first array element of IARRY_I.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–25
0 2
Figure 5–1 Common Block with Unaligned Data
6 10 14
NAME_CH
FLAG IARRY_I(1) IARRY_I(2) IARRY_I(3)
19 (byte offset)
1 byte per character
ZK−6659A−GE
As shown in Figure 5–2, if you compile the program units that use the common block with the -align commons options, data items will be naturally aligned.
Figure 5–2 Common Block with Naturally Aligned Data
0 2 4
IARRY_I(1)
8
IARRY_I(2)
12
IARRY_I(3)
16
NAME_CH
21 (byte offset)
FLAG
Padding 1 byte per character
ZK−6660A−GE
Because the common block X contains data items whose size is 32 bits or smaller, specify -align commons . If the common block contains data items whose size might be larger than 32 bits (such as REAL (KIND=8) data), use
-align dcommons .
If you can easily modify the source files that use the common block data, define the numeric variables in the COMMON statement in descending order of size and place the character variable last. This provides more portability, ensures natural alignment without padding, and does not require the f90 command options -align commons or -align dcommons :
LOGICAL (KIND=2) FLAG
INTEGER IARRY_I(3)
CHARACTER(LEN=5) NAME_CH
COMMON /X/ IARRY_I(3), FLAG, NAME_CH
As shown in Figure 5–3, if you arrange the order of variables from largest to smallest size and place character data last, the data items will be naturally aligned.
5–26 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
0
Figure 5–3 Common Block with Naturally Aligned Reordered Data
4 8 12 14
NAME_CH
19 (byte offset)
IARRY_I(1) IARRY_I(2) IARRY_I(3) FLAG
1 byte per character
ZK−7915A−GE
When modifying or creating all source files that use common block data, consider placing the common block data declarations in a module so the declarations are consistent. If the common block is not needed for compatibility
(such as file storage or Compaq Fortran 77 use), you can place the data declarations in a module without using a common block.
5.4.3.2 Arranging Data Items in Derived-Type Data
Like common blocks, derived-type data may contain multiple data items
(members).
Data item components within derived-type data will be naturally aligned on up to 64-bit boundaries, with certain exceptions related to the use of the
SEQUENCE statement and about these exceptions.
f90 options. See Section 5.4.4 for information
Compaq Fortran stores a derived data type as a linear sequence of values, as follows:
• If you specify the SEQUENCE statement, the first data item is in the first storage location and the last data item is in the last storage location. The data items appear in the order in which they are declared. The f90 options have no effect on unaligned data, so data declarations must be carefully specified to naturally align data.
The -align sequence option specifically aligns data items in a SEQUENCE derived-type on natural boundaries.
• If you omit the SEQUENCE statement, Compaq Fortran adds the padding bytes needed to naturally align data item components, unless you specify the -align norecords option.
Consider the following declaration of array CATALOG_SPRING of derived-type
PART_DT:
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–27
MODULE DATA_DEFS
TYPE PART_DT
INTEGER
REAL
IDENTIFIER
WEIGHT
CHARACTER(LEN=15) DESCRIPTION
END TYPE PART_DT
.
.
TYPE (PART_DT) CATALOG_SPRING(30)
.
END MODULE DATA_DEFS
As shown in Figure 5–4, the largest numeric data items are defined first and the character data type is defined last. There are no padding characters between data items and all items are naturally aligned. The trailing padding byte is needed because CATALOG_SPRING is an array; it is inserted by the compiler when the -align records option is in effect.
Figure 5–4 Derived-Type Naturally Aligned Data (in CATALOG_SPRING( ))
0 4 8 DESCRIPTION 23 (byte offset)
IDENTIFIER WEIGHT
1 byte per character
Padding
ZK−6658A−GE
5.4.3.3 Arranging Data Items in Compaq Fortran Record Structures
Compaq Fortran supports record structures provided by Compaq Fortran.
Compaq Fortran record structures use the RECORD statement and optionally the STRUCTURE statement, which are extensions to the FORTRAN-77 and
Fortran 95/90 standards. The order of data items in a STRUCTURE statement determine the order in which the data items are stored.
Compaq Fortran stores a record in memory as a linear sequence of values, with the record’s first element in the first storage location and its last element in the last storage location. Unless you specify -align norecords , padding bytes are added if needed to ensure data fields are naturally aligned.
The following example contains a structure declaration, a RECORD statement, and diagrams of the resulting records as they are stored in memory:
5–28 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
STRUCTURE /STRA/
CHARACTER*1 CHR
INTEGER*4 INT
END STRUCTURE
.
.
.
RECORD /STRA/ REC
Figure 5–5 shows the memory diagram of record REC for naturally aligned records.
Figure 5–5 Memory Diagram of REC for Naturally Aligned Records
0 1 2 3 4
REC.CHR
REC.INT
8 (byte offset)
Padding
Record REC
ZK−2244A−GE
5.4.4 Options Controlling Alignment
The following options control whether the Compaq Fortran compiler adds padding (when needed) to naturally align multiple data items in common blocks, derived-type data, and Compaq Fortran record structures:
• The -align commons option requests that data in common blocks be aligned on up to 4-byte boundaries, by adding padding bytes as needed.
Unless you specify -fast , the default is -align nocommons or arbitrary byte alignment of common block data. In this case, unaligned data can occur unless the order of data items specified in the COMMON statement places the largest numeric data item first, followed by the next largest numeric data (and so on), followed by any character data.
• The -align dcommons option requests that data in common blocks be aligned on up to 8-byte boundaries, by adding padding bytes as needed.
Unless you specify -fast , the default is -align nodcommons or arbitrary byte alignment of data items in a common data.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–29
Specify the -align dcommons option for applications that use common blocks, unless your application has no unaligned data or, if the application might have unaligned data, all data items are four bytes or smaller. For applications that use common blocks where all data items are four bytes or smaller, you can specify -align commons instead of -align dcommons .
• The -align norecords option requests that multiple data items in derivedtype data and record structures (a Compaq Fortran extension) be aligned arbitrarily on byte boundaries instead of being naturally aligned. The default is -align records .
• The -align records option requests that multiple data items in record structures (extension) and derived-type data without the SEQUENCE statement be naturally aligned, by adding padding bytes as needed.
• The -align recNbyte option requests that fields of records and components of derived types be aligned on either the size byte boundary specified or the boundary that will naturally align them, whichever is smaller. This option does not affect whether common blocks are naturally aligned or packed.
• The -align sequence
SEQUENCE attribute.
option controls alignment of derived types with the
The default -align nosequence option means that derived types with the
SEQUENCE attribute are packed regardless of any other alignment rules.
Note that -align none implies -align nosequence .
The -align sequence option means that derived types with the
SEQUENCE attribute obey whatever alignment rules are currently in use. Consequently, since -align records is a default value, then -align sequence alone on the command line will cause the fields in these derived types to be naturally aligned. Note that -fast and -align all imply
-align sequence .
The default behavior is that multiple data items in derived-type data and record structures will be naturally aligned; data items in common blocks will
not ( -align records with -align nocommons ). In derived-type data, using the
SEQUENCE statement prevents -align records bytes to naturally align data items.
from adding needed padding
If your command line includes the compiler ignores -align dcommons
-std and
, -std90 , or -std95
-align sequence options, then the
. See Section 3.85.
5–30 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
5.5 Using Arrays Efficiently
The following sections discuss:
• Section 5.5.1, Accessing Arrays Efficiently
• Section 5.5.2, Passing Array Arguments Efficiently
5.5.1 Accessing Arrays Efficiently
On Alpha systems, many of the array access efficiency techniques described in this section are applied automatically by the Compaq Fortran loop transformation optimizations (see Section 5.8.7) or by the Compaq KAP
Fortran/OpenMP for Tru64 UNIX Systems performance preprocessor (described in Section 5.1.1).
Several aspects of array use can improve run-time performance:
• The fastest array access occurs when contiguous access to the whole array or most of an array occurs. Perform one or a few array operations that access all of the array or major parts of an array instead of numerous operations on scattered array elements.
Rather than use explicit loops for array access, use elemental array operations, such as the following line that increments all elements of array variable A:
A = A + 1.
When reading or writing an array, use the array name and not a DO loop or an implied DO-loop that specifies each element number. Fortran 95/90 array syntax allows you to reference a whole array by using its name in an expression. For example:
.
.
REAL :: A(100,100)
A = 0.0
A = A + 1.
.
WRITE (8) A
! Increment all elements of A by 1
! Fast whole array use
Similarly, you can use derived-type array structure components, such as:
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–31
TYPE X
INTEGER A(5)
END TYPE X
.
.
.
TYPE (X) Z
WRITE (8) Z%A ! Fast array structure component use
• Make sure multidimensional arrays are referenced using proper array syntax and are traversed in the natural ascending storage order, which is column-major order for Fortran. With column-major order, the leftmost subscript varies most rapidly with a stride of one. Whole array access uses column-major order.
Avoid row-major order, as is done by C, where the rightmost subscript varies most rapidly.
For example, consider the nested DO loops that access a two-dimension array with the J loop as the innermost loop:
INTEGER X(3,5), Y(3,5), I, J
Y = 0
DO I=1,3
DO J=1,5
! I outer loop varies slowest
! J inner loop varies fastest
.
.
X (I,J) = Y(I,J) + 1 ! Inefficient row-major storage order
END DO
END DO
! (rightmost subscript varies fastest)
.
END PROGRAM
Since J varies the fastest and is the second array subscript in the expression X (I,J), the array is accessed in row-major order.
To make the array accessed in natural column-major order, examine the array algorithm and data being modified.
Using arrays X and Y, the array can be accessed in natural column-major order by changing the nesting order of the DO loops so the innermost loop variable corresponds to the leftmost array dimension:
INTEGER X(3,5), Y(3,5), I, J
Y = 0
5–32 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
DO J=1,5
DO I=1,3
! J outer loop varies slowest
! I inner loop varies fastest
X (I,J) = Y(I,J) + 1 ! Efficient column-major storage order
END DO ! (leftmost subscript varies fastest)
.
.
END DO
.
END PROGRAM
The Compaq Fortran whole array access ( X = Y + 1 ) uses efficient column major order. However, if the application requires that J vary the fastest or if you cannot modify the loop order without changing the results, consider modifying the application program to use a rearranged order of array dimensions. Program modifications include rearranging the order of:
Dimensions in the declaration of the arrays X(5,3) and Y(5,3)
The assignment of X(J,I) and Y(J,I) within the DO loops
All other references to arrays X and Y
In this case, the original DO loop nesting is used where J is the innermost loop:
INTEGER X(5,3), Y(5,3), I, J
Y = 0
DO I=1,3
DO J=1,5
! I outer loop varies slowest
! J inner loop varies fastest
X (J,I) = Y(J,I) + 1 ! Efficient column-major storage order
END DO ! (leftmost subscript varies fastest)
END DO
.
.
.
END PROGRAM
Code written to access multidimensional arrays in row-major order (like C) or random order can often make inefficient use of the CPU memory cache.
For more information on using natural storage order during record I/O operations, see Section 5.6.3.
• Use the available Fortran 95/90 array intrinsic procedures rather than create your own.
Whenever possible, use Fortran 95/90 array intrinsic procedures instead of creating your own routines to accomplish the same task. Fortran 95/90 array intrinsic procedures are designed for efficient use with the various
Compaq Fortran run-time components.
Using the standard-conforming array intrinsics can also make your program more portable.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–33
• With multidimensional arrays where access to array elements will be noncontiguous, avoid leftmost array dimensions that are a power of two
(such as 256, 512).
Since the cache sizes are a power of 2, array dimensions that are also a power of 2 may make inefficient use of cache when array access is noncontiguous. If the cache size is an exact multiple of the leftmost dimension, your program will probably make little use of the cache. This does not apply to contiguous sequential access or whole array access.
One work-around is to increase the dimension to allow some unused elements, making the leftmost dimension larger than actually needed. For example, increasing the leftmost dimension of A from 512 to 520 would make better use of cache:
REAL A (512,100)
DO I = 2,511
DO J = 2,99
A(I,J)=(A(I+1,J-1) + A(I-1, J+1)) * 0.5
END DO
END DO
In this code, array A has a leftmost dimension of 512, a power of two.
The innermost loop accesses the rightmost dimension (row major), causing inefficient access. Increasing the leftmost dimension of A to 520 (REAL A
(520,100)) allows the loop to provide better performance, but at the expense of some unused elements.
Because loop index variables I and J are used in the calculation, changing the nesting order of the DO loops changes the results.
For More Information:
• On arrays and their data declaration statements, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
5.5.2 Passing Array Arguments Efficiently
In Fortran 95/90, there are two general types of array arguments:
• Explicit-shape arrays used with FORTRAN 77.
These arrays have a fixed rank and extent that is known at compile time.
Other dummy argument (receiving) arrays that are not deferred-shape
(such as assumed-size arrays) can be grouped with explicit-shape array arguments.
• Deferred-shape arrays introduced with Fortran 95/90.
5–34 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
Types of deferred-shape arrays include array pointers and allocatable arrays. Assumed-shape array arguments generally follow the rules about passing deferred-shape array arguments.
When passing arrays as arguments, either the starting (base) address of the array or the address of an array descriptor is passed:
• When using explicit-shape (or assumed-size) arrays to receive an array, the starting address of the array is passed.
• When using deferred-shape or assumed-shape arrays to receive an array, the address of the array descriptor is passed (the compiler creates the array descriptor).
Passing an assumed-shape array or array pointer to an explicit-shape array can slow run-time performance. This is because the compiler needs to create an array temporary for the entire array. The array temporary is created because the passed array may not be contiguous and the receiving (explicit-shape) array requires a contiguous array. When an array temporary is created, the size of the passed array determines whether the impact on slowing run-time performance is slight or severe.
Table 5–3 summarizes what happens with the various combinations of array types. The amount of run-time performance inefficiency depends on the size of the array.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–35
Table 5–3 Output Argument Array Types
Input Arguments
Array Types
Explicit-shape arrays
Deferred-shape and assumed-shape arrays
Explicit-Shape Arrays
Very efficient. Does not use an array temporary.
Does not pass an array descriptor. Interface block optional.
When passing an allocatable array, very efficient. Does not use an array temporary. Does not pass an array descriptor.
Interface block optional.
When not passing an allocatable array, not efficient. Instead use allocatable arrays whenever possible.
Uses an array temporary.
Does not pass an array descriptor. Interface block optional.
Deferred-Shape and
Assumed-Shape Arrays
Efficient. Only allowed for assumed-shape arrays (not deferred-shape arrays). Does not use an array temporary.
Passes an array descriptor.
Requires an interface block.
Efficient. Requires an assumed-shape or array pointer as dummy argument.
Does not use an array temporary. Passes an array descriptor. Requires an interface block.
5.6 Improving Overall I/O Performance
Improving overall I/O performance can minimize both device I/O and actual CPU time. The techniques listed in this section can greatly improve performance in many applications.
A bottleneck limits the maximum speed of execution by being the slowest process in an executing program. In some programs, I/O is the bottleneck that prevents an improvement in run-time performance. The key to relieving I/O bottlenecks is to reduce the actual amount of CPU and I/O device time involved in I/O.
Bottlenecks can be caused by one or more of the following:
• A dramatic reduction in CPU time without a corresponding improvement in I/O time
• Such coding practices as:
Unnecessary formatting of data and other CPU-intensive processing
5–36 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
Unnecessary transfers of intermediate results
Inefficient transfers of small amounts of data
Application requirements
Improved coding practices can minimize actual device I/O, as well as the actual
CPU time.
Compaq offers software solutions to system-wide problems like minimizing device I/O delays (see Section 5.1.1).
5.6.1 Use Unformatted Files Instead of Formatted Files
Use unformatted files whenever possible. Unformatted I/O of numeric data is more efficient and more precise than formatted I/O. Native unformatted data does not need to be modified when transferred and will take up less space on an external file.
Conversely, when writing data to formatted files, formatted data must be converted to character strings for output, less data can transfer in a single operation, and formatted data may lose precision if read back into binary form.
To write the array than S
2
:
A(25,25) in the following statements, S
1 is more efficient
S1
S2
WRITE (7) A
WRITE (7,100) A
100 FORMAT (25(’ ’,25F5.21))
Although formatted data files are more easily ported to other systems, Compaq
Fortran can convert unformatted data in several formats (see Chapter 10).
5.6.2 Write Whole Arrays or Strings
The general guidelines about array use discussed in Section 5.5 also apply to reading or writing an array with an I/O statement.
To eliminate unnecessary overhead, write whole arrays or strings at one time rather than individual elements at multiple times. Each item in an I/O list generates its own calling sequence. This processing overhead becomes most significant in implied-DO loops. When accessing whole arrays, use the array name (Fortran 95/90 array syntax) instead of using implied-DO loops.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–37
5.6.3 Write Array Data in the Natural Storage Order
Use the natural ascending storage order whenever possible. This is columnmajor order, with the leftmost subscript varying fastest and striding by 1. (See
Section 5.5.1, Accessing Arrays Efficiently.) If a program must read or write data in any other order, efficient block moves are inhibited.
If the whole array is not being written, natural storage order is the best order possible.
If you must use an unnatural storage order, in certain cases it might be more efficient to transfer the data to memory and reorder the data before performing the I/O operation.
5.6.4 Use Memory for Intermediate Results
Performance can improve by storing intermediate results in memory rather than storing them in a file on a peripheral device. One situation that may not benefit from using intermediate storage is when there is a disproportionately large amount of data in relation to physical memory on your system. Excessive page faults can dramatically impede virtual memory performance.
If you are primarily concerned with the CPU performance of the system, consider using a memory file system (mfs) virtual disk to hold any files your code reads or writes (see mfs (1)).
5.6.5 Enable Implied-DO Loop Collapsing
DO loop collapsing reduces a major overhead in I/O processing. Normally, each element in an I/O list generates a separate call to the Compaq Fortran RTL.
The processing overhead of these calls can be most significant in implied-DO loops.
Compaq Fortran reduces the number of calls in implied-DO loops by replacing up to seven nested implied-DO loops with a single call to an optimized run-time library I/O routine. The routine can transmit many I/O elements at once.
Loop collapsing can occur in formatted and unformatted I/O, but only if certain conditions are met:
• The control variable must be an integer. The control variable cannot be a dummy argument or contained in an EQUIVALENCE or VOLATILE statement. Compaq Fortran must be able to determine that the control variable does not change unexpectedly at run time.
• The format must not contain a variable format expression.
5–38 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
For More Information:
• On VOLATILE attribute and statement, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• On loop optimizations, see Section 5.8.
5.6.6 Use of Variable Format Expressions
Variable format expressions (a Compaq Fortran extension) are almost as flexible as run-time formatting, but they are more efficient because the compiler can eliminate run-time parsing of the I/O format. Only a small amount of processing and the actual data transfer are required during run time.
On the other hand, run-time formatting can impair performance significantly.
For example, in the following statements, S
1 is more efficient than S the formatting is done once at compile time, not at run time:
2 because
S1
S2
WRITE (6,400) (A(I), I=1,N)
400 FORMAT (1X, <N> F5.2)
.
.
.
WRITE (CHFMT,500) ’(1X,’,N,’F5.2)’
500 FORMAT (A,I3,A)
WRITE (6,FMT=CHFMT) (A(I), I=1,N)
5.6.7 Efficient Use of Record Buffers and Disk I/O
Records being read or written are transferred between the user’s program buffers and one or more disk block I/O buffers, which are established when the file is opened by the Compaq Fortran RTL. Unless very large records are being read or written, multiple logical records can reside in the disk block I/O buffer when it is written to disk or read from disk, minimizing physical disk I/O.
You can specify the size of the disk block physical I/O buffer by using the
OPEN statement BLOCKSIZE specifier; the default size can be obtained from fstat (2). If you omit the BLOCKSIZE specifier in the OPEN statement, it is set for optimal I/O use with the type of device the file resides on (with the exception of network access).
The OPEN statement BUFFERCOUNT specifier specifies the number of I/O buffers. The default for BUFFERCOUNT is 1. Any experiments to improve
I/O performance should increase the BUFFERCOUNT value and not the
BLOCKSIZE value, to increase the amount of data read by each disk I/O.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–39
If the OPEN statement has BLOCKSIZE and BUFFERCOUNT specifiers, then the internal buffer size in bytes is the product of these specifiers. If the OPEN statement does not have these specifiers, then the default internal buffer size is 8192 bytes. This internal buffer will grow to hold the largest single record, but will never shrink.
The default for the Fortran run-time system is to use unbuffered disk writes.
That is, by default, records are written to disk immediately as each record is written instead of accumulating in the buffer to be written to disk later.
To enable buffered writes (that is, to allow the disk device to fill the internal buffer before the buffer is written to disk), use one of the following:
1.
The OPEN statement BUFFERED specifier
2.
The -assume buffered_io command-line option
3.
The FORT_BUFFERED run-time environment variable
The OPEN statement BUFFERED specifier takes precedence over the
-assume buffered_io option. If neither one is set (which is the default), the FORT_BUFFERED environment variable is tested at run time.
The OPEN statement BUFFERED specifier applies to a specific logical unit.
In contrast, the -assume [no]buffered_io option and the environment variable apply to all Fortran units.
FORT_BUFFERED
Using buffered writes usually makes disk I/O more efficient by writing larger blocks of data to the disk less often. However, a system failure when using buffered writes can cause records to be lost, since they might not yet have been written to disk. (Such records would have been written to disk with the default unbuffered writes.)
When performing I/O across a network, be aware that the size of the block of network data sent across the network can impact application efficiency.
When reading network data, follow the same advice for efficient disk reads, by increasing the BUFFERCOUNT. When writing data through the network, several items should be considered:
• Unless the application requires that records be written using unbuffered writes, enable buffered writes by a method described above.
• Especially with large files, increasing the BLOCKSIZE value increases the size of the block sent on the network and how often network data blocks get sent.
• Time the application when using different BLOCKSIZE values under similar conditions to find the optimal network block size.
5–40 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
When writing records, be aware that I/O records are written to unified buffer cache (UBC) system buffers. To request that I/O records be written from program buffers to the UBC system buffers, use the
(see flush flush
(3f) and Chapter 12). Be aware that calling library routine flush also discards read-ahead data in user buffer.
To request that UBC system buffers be written to disk, use the routine (see fsync (3f) and Chapter 12).
fsync library
When UBC buffers are written to disk depends on UBC characteristics on the system, such as the vm-ubcbuffers attribute (see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX
System Tuning and Performance guide).
For More Information:
• See Section 7.5, Opening Files: OPEN Statement.
• See Section 3.6, -assume buffered_io — Buffered Output.
5.6.8 Specify RECL
The sum of the record length (RECL specifier in an OPEN statement) and its overhead is a multiple or divisor of the blocksize, which is device specific. For example, if the BLOCKSIZE is 8192 then RECL might be 24576 (a multiple of
3) or 1024 (a divisor of 8).
The RECL value should fill blocks as close to capacity as possible (but not over capacity). Such values allow efficient moves, with each operation moving as much data as possible; the least amount of space in the block is wasted. Avoid using values larger than the block capacity, because they create very inefficient moves for the excess data only slightly filling a block (allocating extra memory for the buffer and writing partial blocks are inefficient).
The RECL value unit for formatted files is always 1-byte units. For unformatted files, the RECL unit is 4-byte units, unless you specify the
-assume byterecl option to request 1-byte units (see Section 3.7).
When porting unformatted data files from non-Compaq systems, see
Section 10.6.
5.6.9 Use the Optimal Record Type
Unless a certain record type is needed for portability reasons (see
Section 7.4.3), choose the most efficient type, as follows:
• For sequential files of a consistent record size, the fixed-length record type gives the best performance.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–41
• For sequential unformatted files when records are not fixed in size, the variable-length record type gives the best performance—particularly for
BACKSPACE operations.
• For sequential formatted files when records are not fixed in size, the
Stream_LF record type gives the best performance.
5.6.10 Reading from a Redirected Standard Input File
Due to certain precautions that the Fortran run-time system takes to ensure the integrity of standard input, reads can be very slow when standard input is redirected from a file. For example, when you use a command such as myprogram.exe < myinput.data
, the data is read using the READ(*) or
READ(5) statement, and performance is degraded. To avoid this problem, do one of the following:
• Explicitly open the file using the OPEN statement. For example:
OPEN(5, STATUS=’OLD’, FILE=’myinput.dat’)
• Use an environment variable to specify the input file.
For example, if read from unit 5: setenv FORT5=myinput.dat
or if read from unit *: setenv FOR_READ=myinput.dat
To take advantage of these methods, be sure your program does not rely on sharing the standard input file.
For More Information:
• On Compaq Fortran data files and I/O, see Chapter 7.
• On OPEN statement specifiers and defaults, see Section 7.5 and the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
5.7 Additional Source Code Guidelines for Run-Time
Efficiency
Other source coding guidelines can be implemented to improve run-time performance.
5–42 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
The amount of improvement in run-time performance is related to the number of times a statement is executed. For example, improving an arithmetic expression executed within a loop many times has the potential to improve performance, more than improving a similar expression executed once outside a loop.
5.7.1 Avoid Small Integer and Small Logical Data Items
Avoid using integer or logical data less than 32 bits, because the smallest unit of efficient access on Alpha systems is 32 bits.
Accessing a 16-bit (or 8-bit) data type can result in a sequence of machine instructions to access the data, rather than a single, efficient machine instruction for a 32-bit data item.
To minimize data storage and memory cache misses with arrays, use 32-bit data rather than 64-bit data, unless you require the greater numeric range of 8-byte integers or the greater range and precision of double precision floating-point numbers.
5.7.2 Avoid Mixed Data Type Arithmetic Expressions
Avoid mixing integer and floating-point (REAL) data in the same computation.
Expressing all numbers in a floating-point arithmetic expression (assignment statement) as floating-point values eliminates the need to convert data between fixed and floating-point formats. Expressing all numbers in an integer arithmetic expression as integer values also achieves this. This improves run-time performance.
For example, assuming that I and J are both INTEGER variables, expressing a constant number (2.) as an integer value (2) eliminates the need to convert the data:
Original Code:
Efficient Code:
INTEGER I, J
I = J / 2.
INTEGER I, J
I = J / 2
For applications with numerous floating-point operations, consider using the
-fp_reorder option (see Section 5.9.7) if a small difference in the result is acceptable.
You can use different sizes of the same general data type in an expression with minimal or no effect on run-time performance. For example, using REAL,
DOUBLE PRECISION, and COMPLEX floating-point numbers in the same floating-point arithmetic expression has minimal or no effect on run-time performance.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–43
5.7.3 Use Efficient Data Types
In cases where more than one data type can be used for a variable, consider selecting the data types based on the following hierarchy, listed from most to least efficient:
• Integer (also see Section 5.7.1)
• Single-precision real, expressed explicitly as REAL, REAL (KIND=4), or
REAL*4
• Double-precision real, expressed explicitly as DOUBLE PRECISION, REAL
(KIND=8), or REAL*8
• Extended-precision real, expressed explicitly as REAL (KIND=16) or
REAL*16
However, keep in mind that in an arithmetic expression, you should avoid mixing integer and floating-point (REAL) data (see Section 5.7.2).
5.7.4 Avoid Using Slow Arithmetic Operators
Before you modify source code to avoid slow arithmetic operators, be aware that optimizations convert many slow arithmetic operators to faster arithmetic operators. For example, the compiler optimizes the expression H=J**2 to be
H=J*J.
Consider also whether replacing a slow arithmetic operator with a faster arithmetic operator will change the accuracy of the results or impact the maintainability (readability) of the source code.
Replacing slow arithmetic operators with faster ones should be reserved for critical code areas. The following hierarchy lists the Compaq Fortran arithmetic operators, from fastest to slowest:
• Addition ( + ), subtraction ( - ), and floating-point multiplication ( * )
• Integer multiplication ( * )
• Division ( / )
• Exponentiation ( ** )
5–44 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
5.7.5 Avoid Using EQUIVALENCE Statements
Avoid using EQUIVALENCE statements. EQUIVALENCE statements can:
• Force unaligned data or cause data to span natural boundaries.
• Prevent certain optimizations, including:
Global data analysis under certain conditions (see Section 5.8.3)
Implied-DO loop collapsing when the control variable is contained in an
EQUIVALENCE statement
5.7.6 Use Statement Functions and Internal Subprograms
Whenever the Compaq Fortran compiler has access to the use and definition of a subprogram during compilation, it may choose to inline the subprogram.
Using statement functions and internal subprograms maximizes the number of subprogram references that will be inlined, especially when multiple source files are compiled together at optimization level -O4 or higher.
For More Information:
• See Section 5.1.2.
5.7.7 Code DO Loops for Efficiency
Minimize the arithmetic operations and other operations in a DO loop whenever possible. Moving unnecessary operations outside the loop will improve performance (for example, when the intermediate nonvarying values within the loop are not needed).
For More Information:
• On loop optimizations, see Section 5.8.6 and Section 5.9.2.
• On coding Compaq Fortran statements, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
5.8 Optimization Levels: the -On Option
Compaq Fortran performs many optimizations by default. You do not have to recode your program to use them. However, understanding how optimizations work helps you remove any inhibitors to their successful function.
Generally, Compaq Fortran increases compile time in favor of decreasing run time. If an operation can be performed, eliminated, or simplified at compile time, Compaq Fortran does so, rather than have it done at run time. The time required to compile the program usually increases as more optimizations occur.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–45
The program will likely execute faster when compiled at -O4 , but will require more compilation time than if you compile the program at a lower level of optimization.
The size of object file varies with the optimizations requested. Factors that can increase object file size include an increase of loop unrolling or procedure inlining.
Table 5–4 lists the levels of Compaq Fortran optimization with different
-O options. For example: -O0 specifies no selectable optimizations (some optimizations always occur); -O5 specifies all levels of optimizations, including loop transformation.
Table 5–4 Levels of Optimization with Different -On Options
Optimization Type –O0 –O1 –O2 –O3
Loop transformation
Software pipelining
Automatic inlining
Additional global optimizations
Global optimizations
Local (minimal) optimizations X
X
X
X
X
X
–O4
X
X
X
X
X
–O5
X
X
X
X
X
X
The default is -O4 (same as specified, the default is -O0
-O ). However, if -g2
(no optimizations).
, -g , or -gen_feedback is also
In Table 5–4, the following terms are used to describe the levels of optimization:
• Local (minimal) optimizations ( -O1 or higher) occur within the source program unit and include recognition of common subexpressions and the expansion of multiplication and division. See Section 5.8.2, Local (Minimal)
Optimizations.
• Global optimizations ( -O2 or higher) include such optimizations as data flow analysis, code motion, strength reduction, split-lifetime analysis, and instruction scheduling. See Section 5.8.3, Global Optimizations.
• Additional global optimizations ( -O3 or higher) improve speed at the cost of extra code size. These optimizations include loop unrolling, prefetching of data, and code replication to eliminate branches. See Section 5.8.4,
Additional Global Optimizations.
5–46 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
• Automatic inlining ( -O4 or higher) applies interprocedure analysis and inline expansion of small procedures, usually by using heuristics that limit extra code. See Section 5.8.5, Automatic Inlining.
• Software pipelining ( -O4 or higher) applies instruction scheduling to certain innermost loops, allowing instructions within a loop to ‘‘wrap around’’ and execute in a different iteration of the loop. This can reduce the impact of long-latency operations, resulting in faster loop execution.
Software pipelining also enables the prefetching of data to reduce the impact of cache misses.
• Loop transformation ( -O5 ) optimizations apply to array references within loops and can apply to multiple nested loops. These optimizations can improve the performance of the memory system. See Section 5.8.7,
Loop Transformation.
5.8.1 Optimizations Performed at All Optimization Levels
The following optimizations occur at any optimization level ( -O0 through -O5 ):
• Space optimizations
Space optimizations decrease the size of the object or executing program by eliminating unnecessary use of memory, thereby improving speed of execution and system throughput. Compaq Fortran space optimizations are:
Constant pooling
Only one copy of a given constant value is ever allocated memory space.
If that constant value is used in several places in the program, all references point to that value.
Dead code elimination
If operations will never execute or if data items will never be used,
Compaq Fortran eliminates them. Dead code includes unreachable code and code that becomes unused as a result of other optimizations, such as value propagation.
• Inlining arithmetic statement functions and intrinsic procedures
Regardless of the optimization level, Compaq Fortran inserts arithmetic statement functions directly into a program instead of calling them as functions. This permits other optimizations of the inlined code and eliminates several operations, such as calls and returns or stores and fetches of the actual arguments. For example:
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–47
SUM(A,B) = A+B
.
.
.
Y = 3.14
X = SUM(Y,3.0) ! With value propagation, becomes: X = 6.14
Most intrinsic procedures are automatically inlined.
Inlining of other subprograms, such as contained subprograms, occurs at optimization level -O4 .
• Implied-DO loop collapsing
DO loop collapsing reduces a major overhead in I/O processing. Normally, each element in an I/O list generates a separate call to the Compaq Fortran
RTL. The processing overhead of these calls can be most significant in implied-DO loops.
If Compaq Fortran can determine that the format will not change during program execution, it replaces the series of calls in up to seven nested implied-DO loops with a single call to an optimized RTL routine (see
Section 5.6.5). The optimized RTL routine can transfer many elements in one operation.
Compaq Fortran collapses implied-DO loops in formatted and unformatted
I/O operations, but it is more important with unformatted I/O, where the cost of transmitting the elements is a higher fraction of the total cost.
• Array temporary elimination and FORALL statements
Certain array store operations are optimized. For example, to minimize the creation of array temporaries, Compaq Fortran can detect when no overlap occurs between the two sides of an array expression. This type of optimization occurs for some assignment statements in FORALL constructs.
Certain array operations are also candidates for loop unrolling optimizations (see Section 5.8.4.1).
5.8.2 Local (Minimal) Optimizations
To enable local optimizations, use
-O4 , or -O5 ).
-O1 or a higher optimization level ( -O2 , -O3 ,
To prevent local optimizations, specify the -O0 option.
5–48 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
5.8.2.1 Common Subexpression Elimination
If the same subexpressions appear in more than one computation and the values do not change between computations, Compaq Fortran computes the result once and replaces the subexpressions with the result itself:
DIMENSION A(25,25), B(25,25)
A(I,J) = B(I,J)
Without optimization, these statements can be compiled as follows: t1 = ((J-1)*25+(I-1))*4 t2 = ((J-1)*25+(I-1))*4
A(t1) = B(t2)
Variables t1 and t2 represent equivalent expressions. Compaq Fortran eliminates this redundancy by producing the following: t = ((J-1)*25+(I-1))*4
A(t) = B(t)
5.8.2.2 Integer Multiplication and Division Expansion
Expansion of multiplication and division refers to bit shifts that allow faster multiplication and division while producing the same result. For example, the integer expression (I*17) can be calculated as I with a 4-bit shift plus the original value of I. This can be expressed using the Compaq Fortran ISHFT intrinsic function:
J1 = I*17
J2 = ISHFT(I,4) + I ! equivalent expression for I*17
The optimizer uses machine code that, like the ISHFT intrinsic function, shifts bits to expand multiplication and division by literals.
5.8.2.3 Compile-Time Operations
Compaq Fortran does as many operations as possible at compile time rather than at run time.
Constant Operations
Compaq Fortran can perform many operations on constants (including
PARAMETER constants):
• Constants preceded by a unary minus sign are negated.
• Expressions involving +, –, *, or / operators are evaluated; for example:
PARAMETER (NN=27)
I = 2*NN+J ! Becomes: I = 54 + J
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–49
Evaluation of some constant functions and operators is performed at compile time. This includes certain functions of constants, concatenation of string constants, and logical and relational operations involving constants.
• Lower-ranked constants are converted to the data type of the higher-ranked operand:
REAL X, Y
X = 10 * Y ! Becomes: X = 10.0 * Y
• Array address calculations involving constant subscripts are simplified at compile time whenever possible:
INTEGER I(10,10)
I(1,2) = I(4,5) ! Compiled as a direct load and store
Algebraic Reassociation Optimizations
Compaq Fortran delays operations to see whether they have no effect or can be transformed to have no effect. If they have no effect, these operations are removed. A typical example involves unary minus and .NOT. operations:
X = -Y * -Z ! Becomes: Y * Z
5.8.2.4 Value Propagation
Compaq Fortran tracks the values assigned to variables and constants, including those from DATA statements, and traces them to every place they are used. Compaq Fortran uses the value itself when it is more efficient to do so.
When compiling subprograms, Compaq Fortran analyzes the program to ensure that propagation is safe if the subroutine is called more than once.
Value propagation frequently leads to more value propagation. Compaq
Fortran can eliminate run-time operations, comparisons and branches, and whole statements.
In the following example, constants are propagated, eliminating multiple operations from run time:
5–50 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
Original Code
PI = 3.14
.
.
.
PIOVER2 = PI/2
.
.
.
I = 100
.
.
.
IF (I.GT.1) GOTO 10
10 A(I) = 3.0*Q
Optimized Code
.
.
.
PIOVER2 = 1.57
.
.
.
I = 100
.
.
.
10 A(100) = 3.0*Q
5.8.2.5 Dead Store Elimination
If a variable is assigned but never used, Compaq Fortran eliminates the entire assignment statement:
X = Y*Z
.
.
.
X = A(I,J)* PI
! If X is not used in between, X=Y*Z is eliminated.
Some programs used for performance analysis often contain such unnecessary operations. When you try to measure the performance of such programs compiled with Compaq Fortran, these programs may show unrealistically good performance results. Realistic results are possible only with program units using their results in output statements.
5.8.2.6 Register Usage
A large program usually has more data that would benefit from being held in registers than there are registers to hold the data. In such cases,
Compaq Fortran typically tries to use the registers according to the following descending priority list:
1.
For temporary operation results, including array indexes
2.
For variables
3.
For addresses of arrays (base address)
4.
All other usages
Compaq Fortran uses heuristic algorithms and a modest amount of computation to attempt to determine an effective usage for the registers.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–51
Holding Variables in Registers
Because operations using registers are much faster than using memory,
Compaq Fortran generates code that uses the Alpha 64-bit integer and floatingpoint registers instead of memory locations. Knowing when Compaq Fortran uses registers may be helpful when doing certain forms of debugging.
Compaq Fortran uses registers to hold the values of variables whenever the
Fortran language does not require them to be held in memory, such as holding the values of temporary results of subexpressions, even if was specified.
-O0 (no optimization)
Compaq Fortran may hold the same variable in different registers at different points in the program:
V = 3.0*Q
.
.
.
X = SIN(Y)*V
.
.
.
V = PI*X
.
.
.
Y = COS(Y)*V
Compaq Fortran may choose one register to hold the first use of V and another register to hold the second. Both registers can be used for other purposes at points in between. There may be times when the value of the variable does not exist anywhere in the registers. If the value of V is never needed in memory, it is never assigned.
Compaq Fortran uses registers to hold the values of I, J, and K (so long as there are no other optimization effects, such as loops involving the variables):
A(I) = B(J) + C(K)
More typically, an expression uses the same index variable:
A(K) = B(K) + C(K)
In this case, K is loaded into only one register and is used to index all three arrays at the same time.
5–52 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
5.8.2.7 Mixed Real/Complex Operations
In mixed REAL/COMPLEX operations, Compaq Fortran avoids the conversion and performs a simplified operation on:
• Add ( + ), subtract (–), and multiply ( * ) operations if either operand is
REAL
• Divide ( / ) operations if the right operand is REAL
For example, if variable R is REAL and A and B are COMPLEX, no conversion occurs with the following:
COMPLEX A, B
.
.
.
B = A + R
5.8.3 Global Optimizations
To enable global optimizations, use or -O5 ). Using -O2
-O2 or a higher optimization level ( or higher also enables local optimizations ( -O1 ).
-O3 , -O4 ,
Global optimizations include:
• Data flow analysis
• Split lifetime analysis
• Strength reduction (replaces a CPU-intensive calculation with one that uses fewer CPU cycles)
• Code motion (also called code hoisting)
• Instruction scheduling
Data flow analysis and split lifetime analysis (global data analysis) traces the values of variables and whole arrays as they are created and used in different parts of a program unit. During this analysis, Compaq Fortran assumes that any pair of array references to a given array might access the same memory location, unless a constant subscript is used in both cases.
To eliminate unnecessary recomputations of invariant expressions in loops,
Compaq Fortran hoists them out of the loops so they execute only once.
Global data analysis includes which data items are selected for analysis.
Some data items are analyzed as a group and some are analyzed individually.
Compaq Fortran limits or may disqualify data items that participate in the following constructs, generally because it cannot fully trace their values:
• VOLATILE declarations
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–53
VOLATILE declarations are needed to use certain run-time features of the operating system. Declare a variable as VOLATILE if the variable can be accessed using rules in addition to those provided by the Fortran 95/90 language. Examples include:
COMMON data items or entire common blocks that can change value by means other than direct assignment or during a routine call. For such applications, you must declare the variable or the COMMON block to which it belongs as volatile.
An address not saved by the %LOC built-in function.
Variables read or written by a signal handler, including those in a common block or module.
As requested by the VOLATILE statement, Compaq Fortran disqualifies any volatile variables from global data analysis.
• Subroutine calls or external function references
Compaq Fortran cannot trace data flow in a called routine that is not part of the program unit being compiled, unless the same f90 command compiled multiple program units (see Section 5.1.2). Arguments passed to a called routine that are used again in a calling program are assumed to be modified, unless the proper INTENT is specified in an interface block (the compiler must assume they are referenced by the called routine).
• Common blocks
Compaq Fortran limits optimizations on data items in common blocks. If common block data items are referenced inside called routines, their values might be altered. In the following example, variable I might be altered by
FOO, so Compaq Fortran cannot predict its value in subsequent references.
COMMON /X/ I
DO J=1,N
I = J
CALL FOO
A(I) = I
ENDDO
• Variables in Fortran 95/90 modules
Compaq Fortran limits optimizations on variables in Fortran 95/90 modules. Like common blocks, if the variables in Fortran 95/90 modules are referenced inside called routines, their values might be altered.
• Variables referenced by a %LOC built-in function or variables with the
TARGET attribute
5–54 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
Compaq Fortran limits optimizations on variables indirectly referenced by a %LOC function or on variables with the TARGET attribute, because the called routine may dereference a pointer to such a variable.
• Equivalence groups
An equivalence group is formed explicitly with the EQUIVALENCE statement or implicitly by the COMMON statement. A program section is a particular common block or local data area for a particular routine.
Compaq Fortran combines equivalence groups within the same program section and in the same program unit.
The equivalence groups in separate program sections are analyzed separately, but the data items within each group are not, so some optimizations are limited to the data within each group.
5.8.4 Additional Global Optimizations
To enable additional global optimizations, use -O3 or a higher optimization level ( -O4 or -O5 ). Using -O3 or higher also enables local optimizations ( -O1 ) and global optimizations ( -O2 ).
Additional global optimizations improve speed at the cost of longer compile times and possibly extra code size.
5.8.4.1 Loop Unrolling
At optimization level -O3 or above, Compaq Fortran attempts to unroll certain innermost loops, minimizing the number of branches and grouping more instructions together to allow efficient overlapped instruction execution
(instruction pipelining). The best candidates for loop unrolling are innermost loops with limited control flow.
As more loops are unrolled, the average size of basic blocks increases. Loop unrolling generates multiple copies of the code for the loop body (loop code iterations) in a manner that allows efficient instruction pipelining.
The loop body is replicated a certain number of times, substituting index expressions. An initialization loop might be created to align the first reference with the main series of loops. A remainder loop might be created for leftover work.
The loop unroller also inserts data prefetches for arrays with affine subscripts.
Prefetches (that is, prefetch instructions) can be inserted even if the unroller chooses not to unroll. On some architectures (21264 and later), write-hint instructions are also generated.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–55
The number of times a loop is unrolled can be determined either by the optimizer or by using the -unroll num option, which can specify the limit for loop unrolling. Unless the user specifies a value, the optimizer will choose an unroll amount that minimizes the overhead of prefetching while also limiting code size expansion.
Array operations are often represented as a nested series of loops when expanded into instructions. The innermost loop for the array operation is the best candidate for loop unrolling (like DO loops). For example, the following array operation (once optimized) is represented by nested loops, where the innermost loop is a candidate for loop unrolling:
A(1:100,2:30) = B(1:100,1:29) * 2.0
For More Information:
• See Section 3.94, -unroll num — Specify Number for Loop Unroll
Optimization.
5.8.4.2 Code Replication to Eliminate Branches
In addition to loop unrolling and other optimizations, the number of branches are reduced by replicating code that will eliminate branches. Code replication decreases the number of basic blocks and increases instruction-scheduling opportunities.
Code replication normally occurs when a branch is at the end of a flow of control, such as a routine with multiple, short exit sequences. The code at the exit sequence gets replicated at the various places where a branch to it might occur.
For example, consider the following unoptimized routine and its optimized equivalent that uses code replication (R0 is register 0):
5–56 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
Unoptimized Instructions Optimized (Replicated) Instructions
.
.
.
.
.
branch to exit1
.
.
.
branch to exit1
.
exit1: move 1 into R0 return
.
.
.
move 1 into R0 return
.
.
.
move 1 into R0 return
.
.
.
move 1 into R0 return
Similarly, code replication can also occur within a loop that contains a small amount of shared code at the bottom of a loop and a case-type dispatch within the loop. The loop-end test-and-branch code might be replicated at the end of each case to create efficient instruction pipelining within the code for each case.
5.8.5 Automatic Inlining
To enable optimizations that perform automatic inlining, use -O4 or a higher optimization level ( -O5 ). Using -O4 also enables local optimizations ( -O1 ), global optimizations ( -O2 ), and additional global optimizations ( -O3 ).
The default is -O4 (unless -g2 , -g , or -gen_feedback is specified).
5.8.5.1 Interprocedure Analysis
Compiling multiple source files at optimization level -O4 or higher lets the compiler examine more code for possible optimizations, including multiple program units. This results in:
• Inlining more procedures
• More complete global data analysis
• Reducing the number of external references to be resolved during linking
As more procedures are inlined, the size of the executable program and compile times may increase, but execution time should decrease.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–57
5.8.5.2 Inlining Procedures
Inlining refers to replacing a subprogram reference (such as a CALL statement or function invocation) with the replicated code of the subprogram.
As more procedures are inlined, global optimizations often become more effective.
The optimizer inlines small procedures, limiting inlining candidates based on such criteria as:
• Estimated size of code
• Number of call sites
• Use of constant arguments
You can specify:
• One of the specifying
-On options to control the optimization level. For example,
-O4 or higher enables interprocedure optimizations.
Different -On options set -inline xxxx options. For example, -O4 sets
-inline speed .
• One of the -inline xxxx options to directly control the inlining of procedures (see Section 5.9.3). For example, -inline speed inlines more procedures than -inline size .
5.8.6 Software Pipelining
Software pipelining and additional software dependence analysis are enabled by using the -pipeline option, the -O4 option, or the -O5 option. Software pipelining in certain cases improves run-time performance.
Software pipelining applies instruction scheduling to certain innermost loops, allowing instructions within a loop to ‘‘wrap around’’ and execute in a different iteration of the loop. This can reduce the impact of long-latency operations, resulting in faster loop execution.
Software pipelining also includes associated additional software dependence analysis and enables the prefetching of data to reduce the impact of cache misses.
Loop unrolling (enabled at -O3 or above) cannot schedule across iterations of a loop. Because software pipelining can schedule across loop iterations, it can perform more efficient scheduling to eliminate instruction stalls within loops.
5–58 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
For instance, if software dependence analysis of data flow reveals that certain calculations can be done before or after that iteration of the loop, software pipelining reschedules those instructions ahead of or behind that loop iteration, at places where their execution can prevent instruction stalls or otherwise improve performance.
Software pipelining can be more effective when you combine -pipeline (or
-O4 or -O5 ) with the appropriate -tune keyword for the target Alpha processor generation (see Section 5.9.4).
To specify software pipelining without loop transformation optimizations, do one of the following:
• Specify -O5 with -notransform_loops (preferred method)
• Specify -O4
• Specify -pipeline with -O3 or -O2
This optimization is not performed at optimization levels below -O2 .
Loops chosen for software pipelining:
• Are always innermost loops (those executed the most).
• Do not contain branches or procedure calls.
• Do not use COMPLEX floating-point data.
By modifying the unrolled loop and inserting instructions as needed before and/or after the unrolled loop, software pipelining generally improves run-time performance, except where the loops contain a large number of instructions with many existing overlapped operations. In this case, software pipelining may not have enough registers available to effectively improve execution performance. Run-time performance using -O4 or -O5 (or -pipeline ) may not improve performance, as compared to using -O3 .
This option might increase compilation time and/or program size. For programs that contain loops that exhaust available registers, longer execution times may occur. In this case, specify options -unroll 1 or -unroll 2 with the
-pipeline option.
To determine whether using -pipeline benefits your particular program, you should time program execution for the same program (or subprogram) compiled with and without software pipelining (such as with
-nopipeline ).
-pipeline and
For programs that contain loops that exhaust available registers, longer execution times may result with -O4 or -O5 , requiring use of -unroll n to limit loop unrolling (see Section 3.94).
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–59
For More Information:
• On the interaction of command-line options and timing programs compiled with software pipelining, see Section 3.76.
5.8.7 Loop Transformation
The loop transformation optimizations are enabled by using the
-transform_loops option or the -O5 option. Loop transformation attempts to improve performance by rewriting loops to make better use of the memory system. By rewriting loops, the loop transformation optimizations can increase the number of instructions executed, which can degrade the run-time performance of some programs.
To request loop transformation optimizations without software pipelining, do one of the following:
• Specify -O5 with -nopipeline (preferred method)
• Specify -transform_loops with -O4 , -O3 , or -O2
This optimization is not performed at optimization levels below -O2 .
You must specify -notransform_loops if you want this type of optimization disabled and you are also specifying -O5 .
The loop transformation optimizations apply to array references within loops.
These optimizations can improve the performance of the memory system and usually apply to multiple nested loops.
The loops chosen for loop transformation optimizations are always counted
loops. Counted loops use a variable to count iterations, thereby determining the number of iterations before entering the loop. For example, DO and IF loops are normally counted loops, but uncounted DO WHILE loops are not.
Conditions that typically prevent the loop transformation optimizations from occurring include subprogram references that are not inlined (such as an external function call), complicated exit conditions, and uncounted loops.
The types of optimizations associated with following:
-transform_loops include the
• Loop blocking—Can minimize memory system use with multidimensional array elements by completing as many operations as possible on array elements currently in the cache. Also known as loop tiling.
• Loop distribution—Moves instructions from one loop into separate, new loops. This can reduce the amount of memory used during one loop so that the remaining memory may fit in the cache. It can also create improved opportunities for loop blocking.
5–60 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
• Loop fusion—Combines instructions from two or more adjacent loops that use some of the same memory locations into a single loop. This can avoid the need to load those memory locations into the cache multiple times and improves opportunities for instruction scheduling.
• Loop interchange—Changes the nesting order of some or all loops. This can minimize the stride of array element access during loop execution and reduce the number of memory accesses needed. Also known as loop permutation.
• Scalar replacement—Replaces the use of an array element with a scalar variable under certain conditions.
• Outer loop unrolling—Unrolls the outer loop inside the inner loop under certain conditions to minimize the number of instructions and memory accesses needed. This also improves opportunities for instruction scheduling and scalar replacement.
To determine whether using -transform_loops benefits your particular program, you should time program execution for the same program (or subprogram) compiled with and without loop transformation optimizations
(such as with -transform_loops and -notransform_loops ).
For More Information:
• See Section 3.89, -transform_loops — Activate Loop Transformation
Optimizations.
5.9 Other Options Related to Optimization
In addition to the -On options (discussed in Section 5.8), several other f90 command options can prevent or facilitate improved optimizations.
5.9.1 Setting Multiple Options with the -fast Option
Specifying the -fast option sets many performance options. For details, see
Section 3.40, -fast — Set Options to Improve Run-Time Performance.
5.9.2 Controlling the Number of Times a Loop Is Unrolled
You can specify the number of times a loop is unrolled by using the num option (see Section 3.94).
-unroll
•
•
The -unroll num option can also influence the run-time results of software pipelining optimizations performed when you specify one of the following:
-O5
-O4
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–61
• -pipeline with -O3 or -O2
Although unrolling loops usually improves run-time performance, the size of the executable program may increase.
For More Information:
• See Section 5.8.4.1, Loop Unrolling.
5.9.3 Controlling the Inlining of Procedures
To specify the types of procedures to be inlined, use the -inline keyword option. Also, compile multiple source files together and specify an adequate optimization level, such as -O4 .
If you omit -noinline and the -inline keyword options, the optimization level
-On option used determines the types of procedures that are inlined.
Maximizing the types of procedures that are inlined usually improves run-time performance, but compile-time memory usage and the size of the executable program may increase.
To determine whether using -inline all benefits your particular program, time program execution for the same program compiled with and without
-inline all .
For More Information:
• See Section 3.54, -inline keyword, -noinline — Control Procedure Inlining.
• See Section 5.8.5.2, Inlining Procedures.
5.9.4 Requesting Optimized Code for a Specific Processor Generation
You can specify the types of optimized code to be generated by using the -tune keyword and -arch keyword options. Regardless of the specified keyword, the generated code will run correctly on all implementations of the Alpha architecture. Tuning for a specific implementation can improve run-time performance; it is also possible that code tuned for a specific target may run slower on another target.
Specifying the correct keyword for -tune keyword for the target processor generation type usually slightly improves run-time performance. Unless you request software pipelining, the run-time performance difference for using the wrong keyword for -tune keyword (such as using -tune ev4 for an ev5 processor) is usually less than 5%. When using software pipelining (using -O4 or -O5 ) with -tune keyword , the difference can be more than 5%.
5–62 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
The combination of the specified keyword for -tune keyword and the type of processor generation used has no effect on producing the expected correct program results.
For More Information:
• See Section 3.90, -tune keyword — Specify Alpha Processor Implementation.
5.9.5 Requesting the Speculative Execution Optimization
(TU*X only)
Speculative execution reduces instruction latency stalls to improve run-time performance for certain programs or routines. Speculative execution evaluates conditional code (including exceptions) and moves instructions that would otherwise be executed conditionally to a position before the test, so they are executed unconditionally.
The default, -speculate none , means that the speculative execution code scheduling optimization is not used and exceptions are reported as expected.
You can specify -speculate all or speculative execution optimization.
-speculate by_routine to request the
Performance improvements may be reduced because the run-time system must dismiss exceptions caused by speculative instructions. For certain programs, longer execution times may result when using the speculative execution optimization. To determine whether using -speculate all or -speculate by_routine benefits your particular program, you should time the program execution with one of these options for the same program compiled with
-speculate none (default).
Speculative execution does not support some run-time error checking, since exception and signal processing (including SIGSEGV, SIGBUS, and SIGFPE) is conditional. When the program needs to be debugged or while you are testing for errors, only use -speculate none .
For More Information:
• On -speculate all or -speculate by_routine other command-line options, see Section 3.84.
and the interaction with
5.9.6 Request Nonshared Object Optimizations
When you specify specify the -om
-non_shared to request a nonshared object file, you can option to request code optimizations after linking, including nop
(No Operation) removal, .lita
removal, and reallocation of common symbols.
This option also positions the global pointer register so the maximum addresses fall in the global-pointer window.
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–63
For More Information:
• On the -WL , arg command-line options that enable nonshared object file code optimizations, see Section 3.73.
5.9.7 Arithmetic Reordering Optimizations
If you use the -fp_reorder option (or -assume noaccuracy_sensitive , which are equivalent), Compaq Fortran may reorder code (based on algebraic identities) to improve performance.
For example, the following expressions are mathematically equivalent but may not compute the same value using finite precision arithmetic:
X = (A + B) + C
X = A + (B + C)
The results can be slightly different from the default -no_fp_reorder of the way intermediate results are rounded. However, the because
-no_fp_reorder results are not categorically less accurate than those gained by the default. In fact, dot product summations using -fp_reorder can produce more accurate results than those using -no_fp_reorder .
The effect of -fp_reorder is important when Compaq Fortran hoists divide operations out of a loop. If -fp_reorder is in effect, the unoptimized loop becomes the optimized loop:
Unoptimized Code
.
.
DO I=1,N
.
B(I) = A(I)/V
END DO
.
.
.
Optimized Code
T = 1/V
DO I=1,N
B(I) = A(I)*T
END DO
The transformation in the optimized loop increases performance significantly, and loses little or no accuracy. However, it does have the potential for raising overflow or underflow arithmetic exceptions.
The compiler can also reorder code based on algebraic identities to improve performance if you specify -fast .
5–64 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
5.9.8 Dummy Aliasing Assumption
Some programs compiled with Compaq Fortran (or Compaq Fortran 77) may have results that differ from the results of other Fortran compilers. Such programs may be aliasing dummy arguments to each other or to a variable in a common block or shared through use association, and at least one variable access is a store.
This program behavior is prohibited in programs conforming to the Fortran
95/90 standards, but not by Compaq Fortran. Other versions of Fortran allow dummy aliases and check for them to ensure correct results. However, Compaq
Fortran assumes that no dummy aliasing will occur, and it can ignore potential data dependencies from this source in favor of faster execution.
The Compaq Fortran default is safe for programs conforming to the Fortran
95/90 standards. It will improve performance of these programs, because the standard prohibits such programs from passing overlapped variables or arrays as actual arguments if either is assigned in the execution of the program unit.
The -assume dummy_aliases option allows dummy aliasing. It ensures correct results by assuming the exact order of the references to dummy and common variables is required. Program units taking advantage of this behavior can produce inaccurate results if compiled with -assume nodummy_aliases .
Example 5–1 is taken from the DAXPY routine in the Fortran-77 version of the
Basic Linear Algebra Subroutines (BLAS).
C
C
C
C
Example 5–1 Using the -assume dummy_aliases Option
SUBROUTINE DAXPY(N,DA,DX,INCX,DY,INCY)
Constant times a vector plus a vector.
uses unrolled loops for increments equal to 1.
DOUBLE PRECISION DX(1), DY(1), DA
INTEGER I,INCX,INCY,IX,IY,M,MP1,N
C
IF (N.LE.0) RETURN
IF (DA.EQ.0.0) RETURN
IF (INCX.EQ.1.AND.INCY.EQ.1) GOTO 20
Code for unequal increments or equal increments not equal to 1.
.
.
.
RETURN
(continued on next page)
Performance: Making Programs Run Faster 5–65
Example 5–1 (Cont.) Using the -assume dummy_aliases Option
C
C
Code for both increments equal to 1.
Clean-up loop
20 M = MOD(N,4)
IF (M.EQ.0) GOTO 40
DO I=1,M
DY(I) = DY(I) + DA*DX(I)
END DO
IF (N.LT.4) RETURN
40 MP1 = M + 1
DO I = MP1, N, 4
DY(I) = DY(I) + DA*DX(I)
DY(I + 1) = DY(I + 1) + DA*DX(I + 1)
DY(I + 2) = DY(I + 2) + DA*DX(I + 2)
DY(I + 3) = DY(I + 3) + DA*DX(I + 3)
END DO
RETURN
END SUBROUTINE
The second DO loop contains assignments to DY. If DY is overlapped with
DA, any of the assignments to DY might give DA a new value, and this overlap would affect the results. If this overlap is desired, then DA must be fetched from memory each time it is referenced. The repetitious fetching of DA degrades performance.
Linking Routines with Opposite Settings
You can link routines compiled with the routines compiled with
-assume dummy_aliases
-assume nodummy_aliases option to
. For example, if only one routine is called with dummy aliases, you can use -assume dummy_aliases when compiling that routine, and compile all the other routines with -assume nodummy_aliases to gain the performance value of that option.
Programs calling DAXPY with DA overlapping DY do not conform to the
FORTRAN-77 and Fortran 95/90 standards. However, they are supported if
-assume dummy_aliases was used to compile the DAXPY routine.
5–66 Performance: Making Programs Run Faster
6
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their
Programming Environment
Note
The information in this chapter pertains only to Compaq Fortran on
Tru64 UNIX systems.
This chapter describes two sets of parallel compiler directives:
• Section 6.1, OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives
• Section 6.2, Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler Directives
The following topics apply to both the OpenMP Fortran API and the Compaq
Fortran parallel compiler directives:
• Section 6.3, Decomposing Loops for Parallel Processing
• Section 6.4, Environment Variables for Adjusting the Run-Time
Environment
• Section 6.5, Calls to Programs Written in Other Languages
• Section 6.6, Compiling, Linking, and Running Parallelized Programs on
SMP Systems
• Section 6.7, Debugging Parallelized Programs
Note
The compiler can recognize either OpenMP directives or Compaq
Fortran directives in a program, but not members of both sets of directives in a program.
For reference material on both sets of parallel compiler directives, see the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–1
6.1 OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives
Note
These directives comply with OpenMP Fortran 1.1 Application Program
Interface, as described in the specification at: http://www.openmp.org/specs/
These topics are described:
• Command-line option and directives format (see Section 6.1.1)
• Directive summary descriptions (see Section 6.1.2)
• Parallel processing thread model (see Section 6.1.3)
• Privatizing named common blocks (see Section 6.1.4)
• Controlling data scope attributes (see Section 6.1.5)
• Parallel region (see Section 6.1.6)
• Worksharing constructs (see Section 6.1.7)
• Combined parallel/worksharing constructs (see Section 6.1.8)
• Synchronization constructs (see Section 6.1.9)
• Specifying schedule type and chunk size (see Section 6.1.10)
6.1.1 Command-Line Option and Directives Format
To use OpenMP Fortran API compiler directives in your program, you must include the -omp compiler option on your f90 command:
% f90 -omp prog.f -o prog
Directives are structured so that they appear to be Compaq Fortran comments.
The format of an OpenMP Fortran API compiler directive is: prefix directive_name [clause[[,] clause]...]
All OpenMP Fortran API compiler directives must begin with a directive prefix. Directives are not case-sensitive. Clauses can appear in any order after the directive name and can be repeated as needed, subject to the restrictions of individual clauses.
Directives cannot be embedded within continued statements, and statements cannot be embedded within directives. Comments can appear on the same line as a directive.
6–2 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.1.1.1 Directive Prefixes
The directive prefix you use depends on the source form you use in your program:
• Use the !$OMP prefix when compiling either fixed source form or free source form programs.
• Use the C$OMP and the *$OMP prefixes only when compiling fixed source form programs.
Fixed Source Form
For fixed source form programs, the prefix is one of the following:
!$OMP
C$OMP
*$OMP
Prefixes must start in column 1 and appear as a single string with no intervening white space. Fixed-form source rules apply to the directive line.
Initial directive lines must have a space or zero in column 6, and continuation directive lines must have a character other than a space or a zero in column 6.
For example, the following formats for specifying directives are equivalent: c23456789
!$OMP PARALLEL DO SHARED(A,B,C)
!Is the same as...
c$OMP PARALLEL DO c$OMP+SHARED(A,B,C)
!Which is the same as...
c$OMP PARALLEL DO SHARED(A,B,C)
Free Source Form
For free source form programs, the prefix is !$OMP.
The prefix can appear in any column as long as it is preceded only by white space. It must appear as a single string with no intervening white space.
Free-form source rules apply to the directive line.
Initial directive lines must have a space after the prefix. Continued directive lines must have an ampersand as the last nonblank character on the line.
Continuation directive lines can have an ampersand after the directive prefix with optional white space before and after the ampersand. For example, the following formats for specifying directives are equivalent:
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–3
!$OMP PARALLEL DO &
!$OMP SHARED(A,B,C)
!The same as...
!$OMP PARALLEL &
!$OMP&DO SHARED(A,B,C)
!Which is the same as...
!$OMP PARALLEL DO SHARED(A,B,C)
6.1.1.2 Directive Prefixes for Conditional Compilation
OpenMP Fortran API allows you to conditionally compile Compaq Fortran statements. The directive prefix you use for conditional compilation statements depends on the source form you use in your program:
• Use the !$ prefix when compiling either fixed source form or free source form programs.
• Use the C$ (or c$) and the *$ prefixes only when compiling fixed source form programs.
The prefix must be followed by a legal Compaq Fortran statement on the same line. When you use the -omp compiler option, the prefix is replaced by two spaces and the rest of the line is treated as a normal Compaq Fortran statement during compilations. You can also use the C preprocessor macro
_OPENMP for conditional compilation.
Fixed Source Form
For fixed source form programs, the conditional compilation prefix is one of the following: !$ , C$ (or c$), or *$.
The prefix must start in column 1 and appear as a single string with no intervening white space. Fixed-form source rules apply to the directive line.
Initial lines must have a space or zero in column 6, and continuation lines must have a character other than a space or zero in column 6. For example, the following forms for specifying conditional compilation are equivalent: c23456789
!$ IAM = OMP_GET_THREAD_NUM() +
!$ * INDEX
#IFDEF _OPENMP
IAM = OMP_GET_THREAD_NUM() +
* INDEX
#ENDIF
6–4 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Free Source Form
The free source form conditional compilation prefix is !$. This prefix can appear in any column as long as it is preceded only by white space. It must appear as a single word with no intervening white space. Free-form source rules apply to the directive line.
Initial lines must have a space after the prefix. Continued lines must have an ampersand as the last nonblank character on the line. Continuation lines can have an ampersand after the prefix with optional white space before and after the ampersand.
6.1.2 Summary Descriptions of OpenMP Fortran API Compiler
Directives
Table 6–1 provides summary descriptions of the OpenMP Fortran API compiler directives. For complete information about the OpenMP Fortran API compiler directives, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
Table 6–1 OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives
Directive
Format Description prefix ATOMIC
This directive defines a synchronization construct that ensures that a specific memory location is updated atomically.
See Section 6.1.9.1, ATOMIC Directive.
prefix BARRIER
This directive defines a synchronization construct that synchronizes all the threads in a team.
See Section 6.1.9.2, BARRIER Directive.
prefix CRITICAL [(name)] block prefix END CRITICAL [(name)]
(continued on next page)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–5
Table 6–1 (Cont.) OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives
Directive
Format Description
These directives define a synchronization construct that restricts access to the contained code to only one thread at a time.
See Section 6.1.9.3, CRITICAL and END CRITICAL Directives.
prefix DO [clause[[,] clause] . . . ] do_loop
[prefix END DO [NOWAIT]]
These directives define a worksharing construct that specifies that the iterations of the DO loop are executed in parallel.
See Section 6.1.7.1, DO and END DO directives.
prefix FLUSH [(var[,var] . . . )]
This directive defines a synchronization construct that identifies the precise point at which a consistent view of memory is provided.
See Section 6.1.9.4, FLUSH Directive.
prefix MASTER block prefix END MASTER
These directives define a synchronization construct that specifies that the contained block of code is to be executed only by the master thread of the team.
See Section 6.1.9.5, MASTER and END MASTER Directives.
prefix ORDERED block prefix END ORDERED
(continued on next page)
6–6 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Table 6–1 (Cont.) OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives
Directive
Format Description
These directives define a synchronization construct that specifies that the contained block of code is executed in the order in which iterations would be executed during a sequential execution of the loop.
See Section 6.1.9.6, ORDERED and END ORDERED Directives.
prefix PARALLEL [clause[[,] clause] . . . ] block prefix END PARALLEL
These directives define a parallel construct that is a region of a program that must be executed by a team of threads until the END PARALLEL directive is encountered.
See Section 6.1.6, Parallel Region: PARALLEL and END PARALLEL
Directives.
prefix PARALLEL DO [clause[[,] clause] . . . ] do_loop prefix END PARALLEL DO
These directives define a combined parallel/worksharing construct that is an abbreviated form of specifying a parallel region that contains a single
DO directive.
See Section 6.1.8.1, PARALLEL DO and END PARALLEL DO Directives.
prefix PARALLEL SECTIONS [clause[[,] clause] . . . ] block prefix END PARALLEL SECTIONS
These directives define a combined parallel/worksharing construct that is an abbreviated form of specifying a parallel region that contains a single
SECTIONS directive.
See Section 6.1.8.2, PARALLEL SECTIONS and END PARALLEL
SECTIONS Directives.
(continued on next page)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–7
Table 6–1 (Cont.) OpenMP Fortran API Compiler Directives
Directive
Format Description prefix SECTIONS [clause[[,] clause] . . . ]
[prefix SECTION] block
[prefix SECTION
block]
.
.
.
prefix END SECTIONS [NOWAIT]
These directives define a worksharing construct that specifies that the enclosed sections of code are to be divided among threads in the team.
Each section is executed once by some thread in the team.
See Section 6.1.7.2, SECTIONS, SECTION, and END SECTIONS
Directives.
prefix SINGLE [clause[[,] clause] . . . ] block prefix END SINGLE [NOWAIT]
These directives define a worksharing construct that specifies that the enclosed code is to be executed by only one thread in the team.
See Section 6.1.7.3, SINGLE and END SINGLE Directives.
prefix THREADPRIVATE(/cb/[,/cb/] . . . )
This data environment directive makes named common blocks private to a thread, but global within the thread.
See Section 6.1.4, Privatizing Named Common Blocks: THREADPRIVATE
Directive.
6–8 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.1.3 Parallel Processing Thread Model
A program containing OpenMP Fortran API compiler directives begins execution as a single process, called the master thread of execution. The master thread executes sequentially until the first parallel construct is encountered.
In OpenMP Fortran API, the PARALLEL and END PARALLEL directives define the parallel construct. When the master thread encounters a parallel construct, it creates a team of threads, with the master thread becoming the master of the team. The program statements enclosed by the parallel construct are executed in parallel by each thread in the team. These statements include routines called from within the enclosed statements.
The statements enclosed lexically within a construct define the static extent of the construct. The dynamic extent includes the static extent as well as the routines called from within the construct. When the END PARALLEL directive is encountered, the threads in the team synchronize at that point, the team is dissolved, and only the master thread continues execution. The other threads in the team enter a wait state.
You can specify any number of parallel constructs in a single program. As a result, thread teams can be created and dissolved many times during program execution.
In routines called from within parallel constructs, you can also use directives.
Directives that are not in the lexical extent of the parallel construct, but are in the dynamic extent, are called orphaned directives. Orphaned directives allow you to execute major portions of your program in parallel with only minimal changes to the sequential version of the program. Using this functionality, you can code parallel constructs at the top levels of your program call tree and use directives to control execution in any of the called routines.
For example: subroutine F
...
!$OMP parallel...
...
call G
...
subroutine G
...
!$OMP DO...
...
The !$OMP DO is an orphaned directive because the parallel region it will execute in is not lexically present in G.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–9
A parallel region is a block of code that must be executed by a team of threads in parallel.
A worksharing construct is the heart of parallel processing. A worksharing construct divides the execution of the enclosed code region among the members of the team created on entering the enclosing parallel region.
A combined parallel/worksharing construct denotes a parallel region that contains only one worksharing construct.
Synchronization is the interthread communication that ensures the consistency of shared data and coordinates parallel execution among threads.
Shared data is consistent within a team of threads when all threads obtain the identical value when the data is accessed. A synchronization construct is used to assure this consistency of shared data.
A data environment directive controls the data environment during the execution of parallel constructs.
You can control the data environment within parallel and worksharing constructs. Using directives and data environment clauses on directives, you can:
• Privatize named common blocks (see Section 6.1.4)
• Control data scope attributes (see Section 6.1.5)
6.1.4 Privatizing Named Common Blocks: THREADPRIVATE Directive
You can make named common blocks private to a thread, but global within the thread, by using the THREADPRIVATE directive.
Each thread gets its own copy of the common block with the result that data written to the common block by one thread is not directly visible to other threads. During serial portions and MASTER sections of the program, accesses are to the master thread copy of the common block.
You cannot use a thread private common block or its constituent variables in any clause other than the COPYIN clause.
In the following example, common blocks BLK1 and FIELDS are specified as thread private:
COMMON /BLK1/ SCRATCH
COMMON /FIELDS/ XFIELD, YFIELD, ZFIELD
!$OMP THREADPRIVATE(/BLK1/,/FIELDS/)
6–10 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.1.5 Controlling Data Scope Attributes
You can use several directive clauses to control the data scope attributes of variables for the duration of the construct in which you specify them. If you do not specify a data scope attribute clause on a directive, the default is SHARED for those variables affected by the directive.
Each of the data scope attribute clauses accepts a list, which is a commaseparated list of named variables or named common blocks that are accessible in the scoping unit. When you specify named common blocks, they must appear between slashes ( /name/ ).
Not all of the clauses are allowed on all directives, but the directives to which each clause applies are listed in the clause descriptions.
The data scope attribute clauses are:
• COPYIN
• DEFAULT
• PRIVATE
• FIRSTPRIVATE
• LASTPRIVATE
• REDUCTION
• SHARED
COPYIN Clause
Use the COPYIN clause on the PARALLEL, PARALLEL DO, and PARALLEL
SECTIONS directives to copy the data in the master thread common block to the thread private copies of the common block. The copy occurs at the beginning of the parallel region. The COPYIN clause applies only to common blocks that have been declared THREADPRIVATE (see Section 6.1.4).
You do not have to specify a whole common block to be copied in; you can specify named variables that appear in the THREADPRIVATE common block.
In the following example, the common blocks BLK1 and FIELDS are specified as thread private, but only one of the variables in common block FIELDS is specified to be copied in:
COMMON /BLK1/ SCRATCH
COMMON /FIELDS/ XFIELD, YFIELD, ZFIELD
!$OMP THREADPRIVATE(/BLK1/, /FIELDS/)
!$OMP PARALLEL DEFAULT(PRIVATE),COPYIN(/BLK1/,ZFIELD)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–11
DEFAULT Clause
Use the DEFAULT clause on the PARALLEL, PARALLEL DO, and PARALLEL
SECTIONS directives to specify a default data scope attribute for all variables within the lexical extent of a parallel region. Variables in THREADPRIVATE common blocks are not affected by this clause. You can specify only one
DEFAULT clause on a directive. The default data scope attribute can be one of the following:
• PRIVATE
Makes all named objects in the lexical extent of the parallel region private to a thread. The objects include common block variables, but exclude
THREADPRIVATE variables.
• SHARED
Makes all named objects in the lexical extent of the parallel region shared among all the threads in the team.
• NONE
Declares that there is no implicit default as to whether variables are
PRIVATE or SHARED. You must explicitly specify the scope attribute for each variable in the lexical extent of the parallel region.
If you do not specify the DEFAULT clause, the default is DEFAULT(SHARED).
However, loop control variables are always PRIVATE by default.
You can exempt variables from the default data scope attribute by using other scope attribute clauses on the parallel region as shown in the following example:
!$OMP PARALLEL DO DEFAULT(PRIVATE), FIRSTPRIVATE(I),SHARED(X),
!$OMP& SHARED(R) LASTPRIVATE(I)
PRIVATE Clause
Use the PRIVATE clause on the PARALLEL, DO, SECTIONS, SINGLE,
PARALLEL DO, and PARALLEL SECTIONS directives to declare variables to be private to each thread in the team.
The behavior of variables declared PRIVATE is as follows:
• A new object of the same type and size is declared once for each thread in the team, and the new object is no longer storage associated with the original object.
• All references to the original object in the lexical extent of the directive construct are replaced with references to the private object.
6–12 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
• Variables defined as PRIVATE are undefined for each thread on entering the construct, and the corresponding shared variable is undefined on exit from a parallel construct.
• Contents, allocation state, and association status of variables defined as PRIVATE are undefined when they are referenced outside the lexical extent, but inside the dynamic extent, of the construct unless they are passed as actual arguments to called routines.
In the following example, the values of I and J are undefined on exit from the parallel region:
INTEGER I,J
I =1
J =2
!$OMP PARALLEL PRIVATE(I) FIRSTPRIVATE(J)
I =3
J =J+ 2
!$OMP END PARALLEL
PRINT *, I, J
FIRSTPRIVATE Clause
Use the FIRSTPRIVATE clause on the PARALLEL, DO, SECTIONS, SINGLE,
PARALLEL DO, and PARALLEL SECTIONS directives to provide a superset of the PRIVATE clause functionality.
In addition to the PRIVATE clause functionality, private copies of the variables are initialized from the original object existing before the parallel construct.
LASTPRIVATE Clause
Use the LASTPRIVATE clause on the DO, SECTIONS, PARALLEL DO, and
PARALLEL SECTIONS directives to provide a superset of the PRIVATE clause functionality.
When the LASTPRIVATE clause appears on a DO or PARALLEL DO directive, the thread that executes the sequentially last iteration updates the version of the object it had before the construct.
When the LASTPRIVATE clause appears on a SECTIONS or PARALLEL
SECTIONS directive, the thread that executes the lexically last section updates the version of the object it had before the construct.
Subobjects that are not assigned a value by the last iteration of the DO loop or the lexically last SECTION directive are undefined after the construct.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–13
Correct execution sometimes depends on the value that the last iteration of a loop assigns to a variable. You must list all such variables as arguments to a LASTPRIVATE clause so that the values of the variables are the same as when the loop is executed sequentially. As shown in the following example, the value of I at the end of the parallel region is equal to N+1, as it would be with sequential execution.
!$OMP PARALLEL
!$OMP DO LASTPRIVATE(I)
DO I=1,N
A(I) = B(I) + C(I)
END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
CALL REVERSE(I)
REDUCTION Clause
Use the REDUCTION clause on the PARALLEL, DO, SECTIONS, PARALLEL
DO, and PARALLEL SECTIONS directives to perform a reduction on the specified variables by using an operator or intrinsic as shown:
REDUCTION ( n operator intrinsic o
:list )
Operator can be one of the following: +, *, -, .AND., .OR., .EQV., or .NEQV..
Intrinsic can be one of the following: MAX, MIN, IAND, IOR, or IEOR.
The specified variables must be named scalar variables of intrinsic type and must be SHARED in the enclosing context. A private copy of each specified variable is created for each thread as if you had used the PRIVATE clause. The private copy is initialized to a value that depends on the operator or intrinsic as shown in Table 6–2. The actual initialization value will be consistent with the data type of the reduction variable.
6–14 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Table 6–2 Operators/Intrinsics and Initialization Values for Reduction
Variables
Operator/Intrinsic Initialization Value
+
-
*
.AND.
.OR.
.EQV.
.NEQV.
MAX
MIN
IAND
IOR
IEOR
0
1
0
.TRUE.
.FALSE.
.TRUE.
0
0
.FALSE.
Smallest representable number
Largest representable number
All bits on
At the end of the construct to which the reduction applies, the shared variable is updated to reflect the result of combining the original value of the SHARED reduction variable with the final value of each of the private copies using the specified operator.
Except for subtraction, all of the reduction operators are associative and the compiler can freely reassociate the computation of the final value. The partial results of a subtraction reduction are added to form the final value.
The value of the shared variable becomes undefined when the first thread reaches the clause containing the reduction, and it remains undefined until the reduction computation is complete. Normally, the computation is complete at the end of the REDUCTION construct. However, if you use the REDUCTION clause on a construct to which NOWAIT is also applied, the shared variable remains undefined until a barrier synchronization has been performed. This ensures that all of the threads have completed the REDUCTION clause.
The REDUCTION clause is intended to be used on a region or worksharing construct in which the reduction variable is used only in reduction statements having one of the following forms:
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–15
x = x operator expr x = expr operator x (except for subtraction) x = intrinsic (x,expr) x = intrinsic (expr, x)
Some reductions can be expressed in other forms. For instance, a MAX reduction might be expressed as follows:
IF (x .LT. expr) x = expr
Alternatively, the reduction might be hidden inside a subroutine call. Be careful that the operator specified in the REDUCTION clause matches the reduction operation.
Any number of reduction clauses can be specified on the directive, but a variable can appear only once in a REDUCTION clause for that directive as shown in the following example:
!$OMP DO REDUCTION(+: A, Y),REDUCTION(.OR.: AM)
The following example shows how to use the REDUCTION clause:
!$OMP PARALLEL DO DEFAULT(PRIVATE),SHARED(A,B),REDUCTION(+: A,B)
DO I=1,N
CALL WORK(ALOCAL,BLOCAL)
A = A + ALOCAL
B = B + BLOCAL
END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL DO
SHARED Clause
Use the SHARED clause on the PARALLEL, PARALLEL DO, and PARALLEL
SECTIONS directives to make variables shared among all the threads in a team.
In the following example, the variables X and NPOINTS are shared among all the threads in the team:
!$OMP PARALLEL DEFAULT(PRIVATE),SHARED(X,NPOINTS)
IAM = OMP_GET_THREAD_NUM()
NP = OMP_GET_NUM_THREADS()
IPOINTS = NPOINTS/NP
CALL SUBDOMAIN(X,IAM,IPOINTS)
!$OMP END PARALLEL
6–16 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.1.6 Parallel Region: PARALLEL and END PARALLEL Directives
Note
For overview information, see Section 6.1.3, Parallel Processing Thread
Model.
The PARALLEL and END PARALLEL directives define a parallel region as follows:
!$OMP PARALLEL
!parallel region
!$OMP END PARALLEL
When a thread encounters a parallel region, it creates a team of threads and becomes the master of the team. You can control the number of threads in a team by the use of an environment variable or a run-time library call, or both.
For More Information:
• See Section 6.4, Environment Variables for Adjusting the Run-Time
Environment.
• See Appendix D, Parallel Library Routines.
The PARALLEL directive takes an optional comma-separated list of clauses that specifies:
• Whether the statements in the parallel region are executed in parallel by a team of threads or serially by a single thread (IF clause)
• Whether variables are PRIVATE, FIRSTPRIVATE, SHARED, or
REDUCTION
• Whether variables have a DEFAULT data scope attribute
• Whether master thread common block values are copied to THREADPRIVATE copies of the common block (COPYIN clause)
Once created, the number of threads in the team remains constant for the duration of that parallel region. However, you can explicitly change the number of threads used in the next parallel region by calling the
OMP_SET_NUM_THREADS run-time library routine from a serial portion of the program. This routine overrides any value you may have set using the
OMP_NUM_THREADS environment variable.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–17
Assuming you have used the OMP_NUM_THREADS environment variable to set the number of threads to 6, you can change the number of threads between parallel regions as follows:
CALL OMP_SET_NUM_THREADS(3)
!$OMP PARALLEL
.
.
.
!$OMP END PARALLEL
CALL OMP_SET_NUM_THREADS(4)
!$OMP PARALLEL DO
.
.
.
!$OMP END PARALLEL DO
Use the worksharing directives such as DO, SECTIONS, and SINGLE to divide the statements in the parallel region into units of work and to distribute those units so that each unit is executed by one thread.
In the following example, the !$OMP DO and !$OMP END DO directives and all the statements enclosed by them comprise the static extent of the parallel region:
!$OMP PARALLEL
!$OMP DO
DO I=1,N
B(I) = (A(I) + A(I-1)) / 2.0
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
In the following example, the !$OMP DO and !$OMP END DO directives and all the statements enclosed by them, including all statements contained in the
WORK subroutine, comprise the dynamic extent of the parallel region:
!$OMP PARALLEL DEFAULT(SHARED)
!$OMP DO
DO I = 1, N
CALL WORK(I,N)
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
When an IF clause is present on the PARALLEL directive, the enclosed code region is executed in parallel only if the scalar logical expression evaluates to
TRUE. Otherwise, the parallel region is serialized. When there is no IF clause, the region is executed in parallel by default.
6–18 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
In the following example, the statements enclosed within the !$OMP DO and
!$OMP END DO directives are executed in parallel only if there are more than three processors available. Otherwise the statements are executed serially:
!$OMP PARALLEL IF (OMP_GET_NUM_PROCS() .GT. 3)
!$OMP DO
DO I=1,N
Y(I) = SQRT(Z(I))
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
If a thread executing a parallel region encounters another parallel region, it creates a new team and becomes the master of that new team. By default,
nested parallel regions are always executed by a team of one thread.
To achieve better performance than sequential execution, a parallel region must contain one or more worksharing constructs so that the team of threads can execute work in parallel. It is the contained worksharing constructs that lead to the performance enhancements offered by parallel processing.
6.1.7 Worksharing Constructs
A worksharing construct must be enclosed dynamically within a parallel region if the worksharing directive is to execute in parallel. No new threads are launched and there is no implied barrier on entry to a worksharing construct.
The worksharing constructs are:
• DO and END DO directives (see Section 6.1.7.1)
• SECTIONS, SECTION, and END SECTIONS directives (see Section 6.1.7.2)
• SINGLE and END SINGLE directives (see Section 6.1.7.3)
6.1.7.1 DO and END DO directives
The DO directive specifies that the iterations of the immediately following DO loop must be dispatched across the team of threads so that each iteration is executed by a single thread. The loop that follows a DO directive cannot be a
DO WHILE or a DO loop that does not have loop control. The iterations of the
DO loop are dispatched among the existing team of threads.
You cannot use a GOTO statement, or any other statement, to transfer control into or out of the DO construct.
If you specify the optional END DO directive, it must appear immediately after the end of the DO loop. If you do not specify the END DO directive, an END
DO directive is assumed at the end of the DO loop, and threads synchronize at that point.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–19
The loop iteration variable is private by default, so it is not necessary to declare it explicitly.
The clauses for the DO directive specify:
• Whether variables are PRIVATE, FIRSTPRIVATE, LASTPRIVATE, or
REDUCTION
• How loop iterations are SCHEDULEd onto threads
In addition, the ORDERED clause must be specified if the ORDERED directive appears in the dynamic extent of the DO directive.
If you do not specify the optional NOWAIT clause on the END DO directive, threads synchronize at the END DO directive. If you specify NOWAIT, threads do not synchronize, and threads that finish early proceed directly to the instructions following the END DO directive.
The DO directive optionally lets you:
• Control data scope attributes (see Section 6.1.5, Controlling Data Scope
Attributes).
• Use the SCHEDULE clause to specify schedule type and chunk size (see
Section 6.1.10, Specifying Schedule Type and Chunk Size).
6.1.7.2 SECTIONS, SECTION, and END SECTIONS Directives
Use the noniterative worksharing SECTIONS directive to divide the enclosed sections of code among the team. Each section is executed just one time by one thread.
Each section should be preceded with a SECTION directive, except for the first section, in which the SECTION directive is optional. The SECTION directive must appear within the lexical extent of the SECTIONS and END SECTIONS directives.
The last section ends at the END SECTIONS directive. When a thread completes its section and there are no undispatched sections, it waits at the END SECTION directive unless you specify NOWAIT.
The SECTIONS directive takes an optional comma-separated list of clauses that specifies which variables are PRIVATE, FIRSTPRIVATE, LASTPRIVATE, or REDUCTION.
The following example shows how to use the SECTIONS and SECTION directives to execute subroutines XAXIS, YAXIS, and ZAXIS in parallel. The first SECTION directive is optional:
6–20 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
!$OMP PARALLEL
!$OMP SECTIONS
!$OMP SECTION
CALL XAXIS
!$OMP SECTION
CALL YAXIS
!$OMP SECTION
CALL ZAXIS
!$OMP END SECTIONS
!$OMP END PARALLEL
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.5, Controlling Data Scope Attributes.
6.1.7.3 SINGLE and END SINGLE Directives
Use the SINGLE directive when you want just one thread of the team to execute the enclosed block of code.
Threads that are not executing the SINGLE directive wait at the END SINGLE directive unless you specify NOWAIT.
The SINGLE directive takes an optional comma-separated list of clauses that specifies which variables are PRIVATE or FIRSTPRIVATE. that specifies which variables are PRIVATE or FIRSTPRIVATE.
When the END SINGLE directive is encountered, an implicit barrier is erected and threads wait until all threads have finished. This can be overridden by using the NOWAIT option.
In the following example, the first thread that encounters the SINGLE directive executes subroutines OUTPUT and INPUT:
!$OMP PARALLEL DEFAULT(SHARED)
CALL WORK(X)
!$OMP BARRIER
!$OMP SINGLE
CALL OUTPUT(X)
CALL INPUT(Y)
!$OMP END SINGLE
CALL WORK(Y)
!$OMP END PARALLEL
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.5, Controlling Data Scope Attributes.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–21
6.1.8 Combined Parallel/Worksharing Constructs
The combined parallel/worksharing constructs provide an abbreviated way to specify a parallel region that contains a single worksharing construct. The combined parallel/worksharing constructs are:
• PARALLEL DO (see Section 6.1.8.1)
• PARALLEL SECTIONS (see Section 6.1.8.2)
6.1.8.1 PARALLEL DO and END PARALLEL DO Directives
Use the PARALLEL DO directive to specify a parallel region that implicitly contains a single DO directive.
You can specify one or more of the clauses for the PARALLEL and the DO directives.
The following example shows how to parallelize a simple loop. The loop iteration variable is private by default, so it is not necessary to declare it explicitly. The END PARALLEL DO directive is optional:
!$OMP PARALLEL DO
DO I=1,N
B(I) = (A(I) + A(I-1)) / 2.0
END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL DO
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.6, Parallel Region: PARALLEL and END PARALLEL
Directives.
• See Section 6.1.7.1, DO and END DO directives.
6.1.8.2 PARALLEL SECTIONS and END PARALLEL SECTIONS Directives
Use the PARALLEL SECTIONS directive to specify a parallel region that implicitly contains a single SECTIONS directive.
You can specify one or more of the clauses for the PARALLEL and the
SECTIONS directives.
The last section ends at the END PARALLEL SECTIONS directive.
In the following example, subroutines XAXIS, YAXIS, and ZAXIS can be executed concurrently. The first SECTION directive is optional. Note that all SECTION directives must appear in the lexical extent of the PARALLEL
SECTIONS/END PARALLEL SECTIONS construct:
6–22 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
!$OMP PARALLEL SECTIONS
!$OMP SECTION
CALL XAXIS
!$OMP SECTION
CALL YAXIS
!$OMP SECTION
CALL ZAXIS
!$OMP END PARALLEL SECTIONS
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.6, Parallel Region: PARALLEL and END PARALLEL
Directives.
• See Section 6.1.7.2, SECTIONS, SECTION, and END SECTIONS
Directives.
6.1.9 Synchronization Constructs
Synchronization constructs are used to assure the consistency of shared data and to coordinate parallel execution among threads.
The synchronization constructs are:
• ATOMIC directive (see Section 6.1.9.1)
• BARRIER directive (see Section 6.1.9.2)
• CRITICAL directive (see Section 6.1.9.3)
• FLUSH directive (see Section 6.1.9.4)
• MASTER directive (see Section 6.1.9.5)
• ORDERED directive (see Section 6.1.9.6)
6.1.9.1 ATOMIC Directive
Use the ATOMIC directive to ensure that a specific memory location is updated atomically instead of exposing the location to the possibility of multiple, simultaneously writing threads.
This directive applies only to the immediately following statement, which must have one of the following forms: x = x operator expr x = expr operator x x = intrinsic (x, expr) x = intrinsic (expr, x)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–23
In the preceding statements:
• x is a scalar variable of intrinsic type
• expr is a scalar expression that does not reference x
• intrinsic is either MAX, MIN, IAND, IOR, or IEOR
• operator is either +, *, -, /, .AND., .OR., .EQV., or .NEQV.
This directive permits optimization beyond that of a critical section around the assignment. An implementation can replace all ATOMIC directives by enclosing the statement in a critical section. All of these critical sections must use the same unique name.
Only the load and store of x are atomic; the evaluation of expr is not atomic. To avoid race conditions, all updates of the location in parallel must be protected by using the ATOMIC directive, except those that are known to be free of race conditions. The function intrinsic, the operator operator, and the assignment must be the intrinsic function, operator, and assignment.
This restriction applies to the ATOMIC directive: All references to storage location x must have the same type and type parameters.
In the following example, the collection of Y locations is updated atomically:
!$OMP ATOMIC
Y = Y + B(I)
6.1.9.2 BARRIER Directive
To synchronize all threads within a parallel region, use the BARRIER directive.
You can use this directive only within a parallel region defined by using the
PARALLEL directive. You cannot use the BARRIER directive within the DO,
PARALLEL DO, SECTIONS, PARALLEL SECTIONS, and SINGLE directives.
When encountered, each thread waits at the BARRIER directive until all threads have reached the directive.
In the following example, the BARRIER directive ensures that all threads have executed the first loop and that it is safe to execute the second loop:
6–24 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
c$OMP PARALLEL c$OMP DO PRIVATE(i)
DO i = 1, 100 b(i) = i
END DO c$OMP BARRIER c$OMP DO PRIVATE(i)
DO i = 1, 100 a(i) = b(101-i)
END DO c$OMP END PARALLEL
6.1.9.3 CRITICAL and END CRITICAL Directives
Use the CRITICAL and END CRITICAL directives to restrict access to a block of code, referred to as a critical section, to one thread at a time.
A thread waits at the beginning of a critical section until no other thread in the team is executing a critical section having the same name.
When a thread enters the critical section, a latch variable is set to closed and all other threads are locked out. When the thread exits the critical section at the END CRITICAL directive, the latch variable is set to open, allowing another thread access to the critical section.
If you specify a critical section name in the CRITICAL directive, you must specify the same name in the END CRITICAL directive. If you do not specify a name for the CRITICAL directive, you cannot specify a name for the END
CRITICAL directive.
All unnamed CRITICAL directives map to the same name. Critical section names are global to the program.
The following example includes several CRITICAL directives, and illustrates a queuing model in which a task is dequeued and worked on. To guard against multiple threads dequeuing the same task, the dequeuing operation must be in a critical section. Because there are two independent queues in this example, each queue is protected by CRITICAL directives having different names, XAXIS and YAXIS, respectively:
!$OMP PARALLEL DEFAULT(PRIVATE),SHARED(X,Y)
!$OMP CRITICAL(XAXIS)
CALL DEQUEUE(IX_NEXT, X)
!$OMP END CRITICAL(XAXIS)
CALL WORK(IX_NEXT, X)
!$OMP CRITICAL(YAXIS)
CALL DEQUEUE(IY_NEXT,Y)
!$OMP END CRITICAL(YAXIS)
CALL WORK(IY_NEXT, Y)
!$OMP END PARALLEL
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–25
Unnamed critical sections use the global lock from the Pthread package. This allows you to synchronize with other code by using the same lock. Named locks are created and maintained by the compiler and can be significantly more efficient.
6.1.9.4 FLUSH Directive
Use the FLUSH directive to identify a synchronization point at which a consistent view of memory is provided. Thread-visible variables are written back to memory at this point.
To avoid flushing all thread-visible variables at this point, include a list of comma-separated named variables to be flushed.
The following example uses the FLUSH directive for point-to-point synchronization between thread 0 and thread 1 for the variable ISYNC:
!$OMP PARALLEL DEFAULT(PRIVATE),SHARED(ISYNC)
IAM = OMP_GET_THREAD_NUM()
ISYNC(IAM) = 0
!$OMP BARRIER
CALL WORK()
! I Am Done With My Work, Synchronize With My Neighbor
ISYNC(IAM) = 1
!$OMP FLUSH(ISYNC)
! Wait Till Neighbor Is Done
DO WHILE (ISYNC(NEIGH) .EQ. 0)
!$OMP FLUSH(ISYNC)
END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
6.1.9.5 MASTER and END MASTER Directives
Use the MASTER and END MASTER directives to identify a block of code that is executed only by the master thread.
The other threads of the team skip the code and continue execution. There is no implied barrier at the END MASTER directive.
In the following example, only the master thread executes the routines
OUTPUT and INPUT:
!$OMP PARALLEL DEFAULT(SHARED)
CALL WORK(X)
!$OMP MASTER
CALL OUTPUT(X)
CALL INPUT(Y)
!$OMP END MASTER
CALL WORK(Y)
!$OMP END PARALLEL
6–26 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.1.9.6 ORDERED and END ORDERED Directives
Use the ORDERED and END ORDERED directives within a DO construct to allow work within an ordered section to execute sequentially while allowing work outside the section to execute in parallel.
When you use the ORDERED directive, you must also specify the ORDERED clause on the DO directive.
Only one thread at a time is allowed to enter the ordered section, and then only in the order of loop iterations.
In the following example, the code prints out the indexes in sequential order:
!$OMP DO ORDERED,SCHEDULE(DYNAMIC)
DO I=LB,UB,ST
CALL WORK(I)
END DO
SUBROUTINE WORK(K)
!$OMP ORDERED
WRITE(*,*) K
!$OMP END ORDERED
6.1.10 Specifying Schedule Type and Chunk Size
The SCHEDULE clause of the DO or PARALLEL DO directive specifies a scheduling algorithm that determines how iterations of the DO loop are divided among and dispatched to the threads of the team. The SCHEDULE clause applies only to the current DO or PARALLEL DO directive.
Within the SCHEDULE clause, you must specify a schedule type and, optionally, a chunk size. A chunk is a contiguous group of iterations dispatched to a thread. Chunk size must be a scalar integer expression.
The following list describes the schedule types and how the chunk size affects scheduling:
• STATIC
The iterations are divided into pieces having a size specified by chunk. The pieces are statically dispatched to threads in the team in a round-robin manner in the order of thread number.
When chunk is not specified, the iterations are first divided into contiguous pieces by dividing the number of iterations by the number of threads in the team. Each piece is then dispatched to a thread before loop execution begins.
• DYNAMIC
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–27
The iterations are divided into pieces having a size specified by chunk. As each thread finishes its currently dispatched piece of the iteration space, the next piece is dynamically dispatched to the thread.
When no chunk is specified, the default is 1.
• GUIDED
The chunk size is decreased exponentially with each succeeding dispatch.
Chunk specifies the minimum number of iterations to dispatch each time.
If there are less than chunk number of iterations remaining, the rest are dispatched.
When no chunk is specified, the default is 1.
• RUNTIME
The decision regarding scheduling is deferred until run time. The schedule type and chunk size can be chosen at run time by using the OMP_SCHEDULE environment variable (see Table 6–4).
When you specify RUNTIME, you cannot specify a chunk size.
The following list shows which schedule type is used, in priority order:
1.
The schedule type specified in the SCHEDULE clause of the current DO or
PARALLEL DO directive
2.
If the schedule type for the current DO or PARALLEL DO directive is
RUNTIME, the default value specified in the OMP_SCHEDULE environment variable
3.
The compiler default schedule type of STATIC
The following list shows which chunk size is used, in priority order:
1.
The chunk size specified in the SCHEDULE clause of the current DO or
PARALLEL DO directive
2.
For RUNTIME schedule type, the value specified in the environment variable
OMP_SCHEDULE
3.
For DYNAMIC and GUIDED schedule types, the default value 1
4.
If the schedule type for the current DO or PARALLEL DO directive is
STATIC, the loop iteration space divided by the number of threads in the team
6–28 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.2 Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler Directives
These directives are provided for compatibility with older programs that were written for parallel execution.
These topics are described:
• Command-line option and directives format (see Section 6.2.1)
• Directive summary descriptions (see Section 6.2.2)
• Parallel processing thread model (see Section 6.2.3)
• Privatizing named common blocks (see Section 6.2.4)
• Controlling data scope attributes (see Section 6.2.5)
• Parallel region (see Section 6.2.6)
• Worksharing constructs (see Section 6.2.7)
• Combined parallel/worksharing constructs (see Section 6.2.8)
• Synchronization constructs (see Section 6.2.9)
• Specifying a default chunk size (see Section 6.2.10)
• Specifying a default schedule type (see Section 6.2.11)
• Terminating loop execution early (see Section 6.2.12)
6.2.1 Command-Line Option and Directives Format
To use Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives in your program, you must include the -mp compiler option on your f90 command:
% f90 -mp prog.f -o prog
The format of a Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directive is: prefix directive_name [option[[,] option]...]
All Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives must begin with a directive prefix. Directives are not case-sensitive. Options can appear in any order after the directive name and can be repeated as needed, subject to the restrictions of individual options.
Directives cannot be embedded within continued statements, and statements cannot be embedded within directives. Trailing comments are allowed.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–29
6.2.1.1 Directive Prefixes
The directive prefix you use depends on the source form you use in your program:
• Use the !$PAR prefix when compiling either fixed source form or free source form programs.
• Use the C$PAR (or c$PAR) and the *$PAR prefixes only when compiling fixed source form programs.
Fixed Source Form
For fixed source form programs, the prefix is one of the following:
!$PAR
C$PAR (or c$PAR)
*$PAR
For four directives, there is another form for fixed source form programs. This nonpreferred form is accepted by the compiler for compatibility reasons. The four directives are: CHUNK, COPYIN, DOACROSS, and MP_SCHEDULE.
The prefix is c$. Thus, these four directives are acceptable:
Preferred Directive
Name Acceptable Directive Name
!$PAR CHUNK c$CHUNK
!$PAR COPYIN
!$PAR DOACROSS c$COPYIN c$DOACROSS
!$PAR MP_SCHEDULE c$MP_SCHEDULE
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.1.1, Directive Prefixes.
Free Source Form
For free source form programs, the prefix is !$PAR.
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.1.1, Directive Prefixes.
6–30 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.2.2 Summary Descriptions of Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler
Directives
Table 6–3 provides summary descriptions of the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives. For complete information about the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
Table 6–3 Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler Directives
Directive
Format Description prefix BARRIER
This directive defines a synchronization construct that synchronizes all the threads in a team.
See Section 6.2.9.1, BARRIER Directive.
prefix CHUNK = chunksize
This directive sets a default chunk size used to divide iterations among the threads of the team.
See Section 6.2.10, Specifying a Default Chunk Size.
prefix COPYIN object[, object] . . .
This data environment directive specifies that the listed variables, single array elements, and common blocks be copied from the master thread to the PRIVATE data objects having the same name.
Single array elements can be copied, but array sections cannot be copied.
Shared variables cannot be copied.
When an allocatable array is to be copied, it must be allocated when the
COPYIN directive is encountered.
This directive is allowed only within PARALLEL and PARALLEL DO directives.
prefix CRITICAL SECTION [(latch-var)] code prefix END CRITICAL SECTION
(continued on next page)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–31
Table 6–3 (Cont.) Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler Directives
Directive
Format Description
These directives define a synchronization construct that specifies a block of code that is executed by one thread at a time.
See Section 6.2.9.2, CRITICAL SECTION and END CRITICAL SECTION
Directives.
prefix INSTANCE n
SINGLE
PARALLEL o
/com-blk-name/[[,]/com-blk-name/] . . .
This data environment directive makes named common blocks available to threads.
See Section 6.2.4, Privatizing Named Common Blocks: TASKCOMMON or INSTANCE Directives.
prefix MP_SCHEDTYPE = mode
This directive sets a default run-time schedule type.
See Section 6.2.11, Specifying a Default Schedule Type.
prefix PARALLEL [region-option[[,]region-option] . . . ] code prefix END PARALLEL
These directives define a parallel construct that is a region of a program that must be executed by a team of threads in parallel until the END
PARALLEL directive is encountered.
See Section 6.2.6, Parallel Region: PARALLEL and END PARALLEL
Directives .
prefix n
PARALLEL DO
DOACROSS o
[par-do-option[[,]par-do-option] . . . ] do_loop
[prefix END PARALLEL DO]
(continued on next page)
6–32 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Table 6–3 (Cont.) Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler Directives
Directive
Format Description
These directives define a combined parallel/worksharing construct that specifies an abbreviated form of specifying a parallel region that contains a single PDO directive.
See Section 6.2.8.1, PARALLEL DO and END PARALLEL DO Directives.
prefix PARALLEL SECTIONS [par-sect-option[[,]par-sect-option] . . . ] code prefix END PARALLEL SECTIONS
These directives define a combined parallel/worksharing construct that specifies an abbreviated form of specifying a parallel region that contains a single SECTION directive. The semantics are identical to explicitly specifying the PARALLEL directive immediately followed by a
PSECTIONS directive.
See Section 6.2.8.2, PARALLEL SECTIONS and END PARALLEL
SECTIONS Directives.
prefix PDO [pdo-option[[,]pdo-option] . . . ] do_loop
[prefix END PDO [NOWAIT]]
These directives define a worksharing construct that specifies that each set of iterations of the contained DO LOOP is a unit of work that can be scheduled on a single thread.
See Section 6.2.7.1, PDO and END PDO Directives.
prefix PDONE
This directive specifies that the DO loop in which the PDONE directive is contained should be terminated early.
See Section 6.2.12, Terminating Loop Execution Early: PDONE Directive.
(continued on next page)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–33
Table 6–3 (Cont.) Compaq Fortran Parallel Compiler Directives
Directive
Format Description prefix PSECTION[S] [sect-option[[,]sect-option] . . . ]
[prefix SECTION] code
[prefix SECTION
code] prefix END PSECTION[S] [NOWAIT]
These directives define a worksharing construct that specifies that the enclosed sections of code are to be divided among threads in the team.
See Section 6.2.7.2, PSECTIONS, SECTION, and END PSECTIONS
Directives.
prefix SINGLE PROCESS [proc-option[[,]proc-option] . . . ] code prefix END SINGLE PROCESS [NOWAIT]
These directives define a worksharing construct that specifies a block of code that is executed by only one thread.
See Section 6.2.7.3, SINGLE PROCESS and END SINGLE PROCESS
Directives.
prefix TASKCOMMON com-blk-name[,com-blk-name] . . .
This data environment directive makes named common blocks private to a thread, but global within the thread.
See Section 6.2.4, Privatizing Named Common Blocks: TASKCOMMON or INSTANCE Directives.
6.2.3 Parallel Processing Thread Model
The concepts of the parallel processing thread model are the same as those for
OpenMP Fortran API with one exception: orphaned directives are not possible with Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives.
6–34 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.3, Parallel Processing Thread Model.
You can control the data environment within parallel and worksharing constructs. Using directives and data environment options on directives, you can:
• Privatize named common blocks (see Section 6.2.4)
• Control data scope attributes (see Section 6.2.5)
6.2.4 Privatizing Named Common Blocks: TASKCOMMON or
INSTANCE Directives
You can make named common blocks private to a thread, but global within the thread by using the TASKCOMMON or the INSTANCE PARALLEL directive:
• For TASKCOMMON, specify a comma-separated list of common block names
• For INSTANCE PARALLEL, specify a comma-separated list of common block names, each enclosed by slashes ( /name/ )
The TASKCOMMON and INSTANCE PARALLEL directives are semantically equivalent and differ only in form.
Only named common blocks can be made thread private.
Each thread gets its own copy of the common block, with the result that data written to the common block by one thread is not directly visible to other threads. During serial portions of the program, accesses are to the master thread copy of the common block.
You should assume that the data in thread private common blocks is undefined on entry into the first parallel region unless you specified the COPYIN option in the PARALLEL directive (see COPYIN Option in Section 6.2.5).
When you make thread private a common block that is initialized using DATA statements, the copy of the common block for each thread has that initial value. If no initial value is provided, the variables in the common block are assigned the value of zero.
You can also specify INSTANCE SINGLE, which is the default in the absence of any attribute for the directive. In this case, all threads share the same copy of the common block in the master thread. Assignments made by one thread affect the copy in all other threads.
When you specify INSTANCE PARALLEL, the named common blocks are made private to a thread, but global within the thread.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–35
The TASKCOMMON directive is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API
THREADPRIVATE directive except that slashes ( // ) do not have to be used to delimit named common blocks.
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.4, Privatizing Named Common Blocks: THREADPRIVATE
Directive.
6.2.5 Controlling Data Scope Attributes
You can use several options to control the data scope attributes of variables for the duration of the construct in which you specify them. If you do not specify a data scope attribute option on a directive, the default is SHARED for those variables affected by the directive.
Each of the data scope attribute options accepts a list, which is a commaseparated list of named variables or named common blocks that are accessible in the scoping unit. When you specify named common blocks, they must appear between slashes ( /name/ ).
Not all of the options are allowed on all directives, but the directives to which each option applies are listed in the clause descriptions.
The data scope attribute options are:
• COPYIN
• DEFAULT
• FIRSTPRIVATE
• LASTLOCAL or LAST LOCAL
• PRIVATE or LOCAL
• REDUCTION
• SHARED or SHARE
COPYIN Option
Use the COPYIN option on the PARALLEL, PARALLEL DO, and PARALLEL
SECTIONS directives to copy named common block values from the master thread copy to threads at the beginning of a parallel region, use the COPYIN option on the PARALLEL directive. The COPYIN option applies only to named common blocks that have been previously declared thread private using the
TASKCOMMON or the INSTANCE PARALLEL directive (see Section 6.2.4).
Use a comma-separated list to name the common blocks and variables in common blocks you want to copy.
6–36 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
DEFAULT Option
This option is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API DEFAULT clause (see
Section 6.1.5).
FIRSTPRIVATE Option
This option is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API FIRSTPRIVATE clause
(see Section 6.1.5).
LASTLOCAL or LAST LOCAL Option
Except for differences in directive name spelling, the LASTLOCAL or LAST
LOCAL option is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API LASTPRIVATE clause
(see Section 6.1.5).
PRIVATE or LOCAL Option
Except for the alternate directive spelling of LOCAL, the PRIVATE or
LOCAL option is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API PRIVATE clause
(see Section 6.1.5).
REDUCTION Option
Use the REDUCTION option on the PDO directive to declare variables that are to be the object of a reduction operation. Use a comma-separated list to name the variables you want to declare as objects of a reduction.
The REDUCTION option in the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directive set is different from the REDUCTION clause in the OpenMP Fortran API directive set. In the OpenMP Fortran API directive set, both a variable and an operator type are given. In the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directive set, the operator is not given. The compiler must be able to determine the reduction operation from the source code. The REDUCTION option can be applied to a variable in a DO loop only if the variable meets the following criteria:
• It must be scalar.
• It must be assigned to exactly once in the DO loop.
• It must be read from exactly once in the DO loop and only in the right side of the assignment.
• The assignment must be one of the following forms: x = x operator expr x = expr operator x (except for subtraction) x = operator(x, expr) x = operator(expr, x)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–37
where operator is one of the following supported reduction operations: +, -,
*, .AND., .OR., .EQV., .NEQV., MAX, MIN, IAND, or IOR.
The compiler rewrites the reduction operation by computing partial results into local variables and then combining the results into the reduction variable. The reduction variable must be SHARED in the enclosing context.
SHARED or SHARE Option
Except for the alternate directive spelling of SHARE, the SHARED or
SHARE option is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API SHARED clause
(see Section 6.1.5).
6.2.6 Parallel Region: PARALLEL and END PARALLEL Directives
The concepts of using a parallel region are the same as those for OpenMP
Fortran API (see Section 6.1.6), with these differences:
• Use the worksharing directives such as DO, SECTIONS, and SINGLE to divide the statements in the parallel region into units of work and to distribute those units so that each unit is executed by one thread.
• The environment variable you use to set the default number of threads is
MP_THREAD_COUNT and the run-time library routine is OtsSetNumThreads .
For More Information:
• See Section 6.4, Environment Variables for Adjusting the Run-Time
Environment.
• See Appendix D, Parallel Library Routines.
6.2.7 Worksharing Constructs
A worksharing construct must be enclosed lexically (not dynamically, as with
OpenMP Fortran API directives) within a parallel region if the worksharing directive is to execute in parallel. No new threads are launched and there is no implied barrier on entry to a worksharing construct.
The worksharing constructs are:
• PDO and END PDO directives (see Section 6.2.7.1)
• PSECTIONS, SECTION, and END PSECTIONS directives (see
Section 6.2.7.2)
• SINGLE PROCESS and END SINGLE PROCESS directives (see
Section 6.2.7.3)
6–38 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.2.7.1 PDO and END PDO Directives
The PDO directive specifies that the iterations of the immediately following
DO loop must be dispatched across the team of threads so that each iteration is executed in parallel by a single thread.
The loop that follows a PDO directive cannot be a DO WHILE or a DO loop that does not have loop control. The iterations of the DO loop are divided among and dispatched to the existing threads in the team.
You cannot use a GOTO statement, or any other statement, to transfer control into or out of the PDO construct.
This directive must be nested within the lexical extent of a PARALLEL directive. The PARALLEL directive takes an optional comma-separated list of options that specifies:
• Whether variables are PRIVATE, FIRSTPRIVATE, LASTLOCAL, or
REDUCTION
• How iterations are scheduled onto threads and whether this is deferred until run time (MP_SCHEDTYPE option)
• How many iterations each thread is assigned (CHUNK or BLOCKED option)
• Whether iterations are in an ordered sequence (ORDERED option)
If you specify the optional END PDO directive, it must appear immediately after the end of the DO loop. If you do not specify the END PDO directive, an
END PDO directive is assumed at the end of the DO loop.
If you do not specify the optional NOWAIT clause on the END PDO directive, threads synchronize at the END PDO directive. If you specify NOWAIT, threads do not synchronize at the END PDO directive. Threads that finish early proceed directly to the instructions following the END PDO directive.
You can use the ORDERED option to affect the way threads are dispatched.
When you specify this option, iterations are dispatched to threads in the same order they would be for sequential execution.
The PDO directive optionally lets you:
• Control data scope attributes (see Section 6.1.5)
• Specify chunk size (see Section 6.2.10)
• Specify schedule type (see Section 6.2.11)
• Terminate loop execution early (see Section 6.2.12)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–39
• Override implicit synchronization
Overriding Implicit Synchronization
Whether or not you include the END PDO directive at the end of the DO loop, by default an implicit synchronization point exists immediately after the last statement in the loop. Threads reaching this point wait until all threads complete their work and reach this synchronization point.
If there are no data dependences between the variables inside the loop and those outside the loop, there may be no reason to make threads wait. In this case, use the NOWAIT clause on the END PDO directive to override synchronization and allow threads to continue.
6.2.7.2 PSECTIONS, SECTION, and END PSECTIONS Directives
This directive is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API SECTIONS directive with the following exceptions:
• The names are PSECTIONS and END PSECTIONS.
• No REDUCTION clause or LASTPRIVATE clause is permitted.
• LOCAL is permitted as an alternative spelling for the PRIVATE clause.
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.7.2, SECTIONS, SECTION, and END SECTIONS
Directives.
6.2.7.3 SINGLE PROCESS and END SINGLE PROCESS Directives
This directive is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API SINGLE directive with the following exceptions:
• The names are SINGLE PROCESS and END SINGLE PROCESS.
• LOCAL is permitted as an alternative spelling for the PRIVATE clause.
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.7.3, SINGLE and END SINGLE Directives.
6.2.8 Combined Parallel/Worksharing Constructs
The combined parallel/worksharing constructs provide an abbreviated way to specify a parallel region that contains a single worksharing construct. The combined parallel/worksharing constructs are:
• PARALLEL DO (see Section 6.2.8.1)
• PARALLEL SECTIONS (see Section 6.2.8.2)
6–40 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.2.8.1 PARALLEL DO and END PARALLEL DO Directives
This directive is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API PARALLEL DO directive with the following exceptions:
• You can use the alternate DOACROSS directive name instead of
PARALLEL DO. For compatibility, the following form is also allowed
(for fixed source form only): c$DOACROSS.
• The options can be one or more of the options for the PARALLEL and PDO directives.
The PARALLEL DO directive optionally lets you:
• Control data scope attributes (see Section 6.1.5)
• Specify chunk size (see Section 6.2.10)
• Specify schedule type (see Section 6.2.11)
• Terminate loop execution early (see Section 6.2.12)
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.8.1, PARALLEL DO and END PARALLEL DO Directives.
6.2.8.2 PARALLEL SECTIONS and END PARALLEL SECTIONS Directives
This directive is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API PARALLEL SECTIONS directive with the following exception: The options can be one or more of the options for the PARALLEL and PSECTIONS directives, instead of the
PARALLEL and SECTIONS directives.
The semantics are identical to explicitly specifying the PARALLEL directive immediately followed by a SECTIONS directive.
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.8.2, PARALLEL SECTIONS and END PARALLEL
SECTIONS Directives.
6.2.9 Synchronization Constructs
Synchronization constructs are used to assure the consistency of shared data and to coordinate parallel execution among threads.
The synchronization constructs are:
• BARRIER directive (see Section 6.2.9.1)
• CRITICAL SECTION directive (see Section 6.2.9.2)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–41
6.2.9.1 BARRIER Directive
The BARRIER directive is the same as the OpenMP Fortran API BARRIER directive (see Section 6.1.9.2).
6.2.9.2 CRITICAL SECTION and END CRITICAL SECTION Directives
The CRITICAL SECTION and END CRITICAL SECTION directives are the same as the OpenMP Fortran API CRITICAL and END CRITICAL directives with the following exceptions:
• The directive names are CRITICAL SECTION and END CRITICAL
SECTION.
• You can specify an optional latch variable name.
• If you do not specify a latch variable name, the compiler assigns a unique name.
• The END CRITICAL SECTION directive does not take a latch variable name.
• You must explicitly initialize a latch variable to zero before any critical section using that latch variable is executed.
• You must not reuse that latch variable in anything other than a critical section until all uses as a latch variable are complete.
For More Information:
• See Section 6.1.9.3, CRITICAL and END CRITICAL Directives.
6.2.10 Specifying a Default Chunk Size
A chunk is a contiguous group of iterations dispatched to a thread. You can explicitly define a chunk size for a PDO or PARALLEL DO directive by using the CHUNK or BLOCKED option. Chunk size must be a scalar integer expression. The specified chunk size applies only to the current PDO or
PARALLEL DO directive.
The following list shows which chunk size is used, in priority order:
1.
The chunk size specified in the CHUNK or BLOCKED option of the current
PDO or PARALLEL DO directive.
2.
The value specified in the most recent CHUNK directive. (The CHUNK directive is provided for compatibility reasons.)
3.
If the schedule type for the current PDO or PARALLEL DO directive is either INTERLEAVED, DYNAMIC, GUIDED, or RUNTIME, the chunk size default value specified in the MP_CHUNK_SIZE environment variable.
6–42 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
4.
The compiler default chunk size value of 1.
The interaction between the chunk size and the schedule type are:
• For the DYNAMIC and INTERLEAVED schedule types, iterations are always dispatched to threads in chunk size groups. If the total number of iterations is not evenly divisible by chunk size, the last group dispatched has fewer iterations.
• For the GUIDED schedule type, chunk size is the minimum number of iterations that can be dispatched to a thread. If less than chunk size iterations remain, the remaining iterations are dispatched to the next available thread.
• For the STATIC schedule type, chunk size is ignored.
6.2.11 Specifying a Default Schedule Type
The schedule type specifies a scheduling algorithm that determines how chunks of loop iterations are dispatched to the threads of a team. The schedule type does not affect the semantics of the program, but might affect performance.
You can explicitly define a run-time schedule type for the current PDO or
PARALLEL DO directive by using the MP_SCHEDTYPE option. The specified schedule type applies to the current PDO or PARALLEL DO directive only.
The following list shows which schedule type is used, in priority order:
1.
The schedule type specified in the MP_SCHEDTYPE option of the current
PDO or PARALLEL DO directive.
2.
The schedule type specified in the most recent MP_SCHEDTYPE directive.
(The MP_SCHEDTYPE directive is provided for compatibility reasons.)
3.
If the schedule type for the current PDO or PARALLEL DO directive is
RUNTIME, the default value specified in the MP_SCHEDTYPE environment variable.
4.
The compiler default schedule type of STATIC.
The following list describes the schedule types and how the chunk size affects scheduling:
• For the STATIC or SIMPLE schedule types, one contiguous group of iterations is dispatched to each thread, with each group having approximately the same number of iterations.
• For the INTERLEAVED or INTERLEAVE schedule types, a chunk-sized group of iterations is dispatched to each thread in a round-robin manner.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–43
• For the DYNAMIC schedule type, a chunk-sized group of the remaining iterations is dispatched to the next available thread. If less than one chunk size of iterations remain, all the remaining iterations are dispatched.
• For the GUIDED or GSS schedule types (similar to the DYNAMIC schedule type), the number of iterations dispatched is relatively large at the beginning of the loop and decreases exponentially. The number of iterations dispatched is not necessarily evenly divisible by chunk size.
The specified chunk size is the minimum number of iterations that can be dispatched when a thread becomes available. When the number of remaining iterations is less than or equal to chunk size, all of the remaining iterations are dispatched to the next available thread.
In some cases, setting a chunk size greater than 1 improves execution efficiency as the loop nears termination. This is because contention between threads for the small number of remaining iterations is reduced.
• For the RUNTIME schedule type, the schedule type and the chunk size are those specified in the MP_SCHEDTYPE environment variable.
The DYNAMIC and GUIDED schedule types introduce some amount of overhead required to manage the continuing dispatching of iterations to threads. However, this overhead is sometimes offset by better load balancing when the average execution time of iterations is not uniform throughout the loop.
The STATIC and INTERLEAVED schedule types dispatch all of the iterations to the threads in advance, with each thread receiving approximately equal numbers of iterations. One of these types is usually the most efficient schedule type when the average execution time of iterations is uniform throughout the loop.
6.2.12 Terminating Loop Execution Early: PDONE Directive
If you want to terminate loop execution early because a specified condition has been satisfied, use the PDONE directive. This is an executable directive and any undispatched iterations are not executed. However, all previously dispatched iterations are completed.
This directive must be nested within the lexical extent of a PDO or PARALLEL
DO directive.
When the schedule type is STATIC or INTERLEAVED, this directive has no effect because all loop iterations are dispatched before the DO loop executes.
6–44 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.3 Decomposing Loops for Parallel Processing
Note
This section contains information that applies to both the OpenMP
Fortran API and the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives. The code examples use the OpenMP API directive format.
To run in parallel, the source code in iterated DO loops must be decomposed by the user, and adequate system resources must be made available.
Decomposition is the process of analyzing code for data dependences, dividing up the workload, and ensuring correct results when iterations run concurrently.
The term loop decomposition is used to specify the process of dividing the iterations of an iterated DO loop and running them on two or more threads of a shared-memory multi-processor computer system.
The only type of decomposition available with Compaq Fortran is directed
decomposition using a set of parallel compiler directives.
The following sections describe how to decompose loops and how to use the
OpenMP Fortran API and the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives to achieve parallel processing.
6.3.1 Steps in Using Directed Decomposition
When a program is compiled using the -omp or the -mp option, the compiler parses the parallel compiler directives. However, you must transform the source code to resolve any loop-carried dependences and improve run-time performance. (Another method of supporting parallel processing does not involve iterated DO loops. Instead, it allows large amounts of independent code to be run in parallel using the SECTIONS and SECTION directives.)
To use directed decomposition effectively, take the following steps:
1.
Identify the loops that benefit most from parallel processing:
• Consider whether another algorithm might achieve more parallelism in general.
• Evaluate any caller or called loops and decompose the most CPUintensive loops in the application (as long as there are no interfering dependences).
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–45
If a parallel DO loop invokes a subprogram containing another parallel
DO loop, only the parallel DO loop of the calling program will be run in parallel. Each of the threads executing the outermost parallel DO loop will execute all of the iterations in the innermost parallel DO loop in a serial, nonparallel fashion.
• Make sure the loop contains enough CPU work to outweigh the parallel-processing startup overhead.
2.
Analyze the loop and resolve dependences as needed. (See Section 6.3.2,
Resolving Dependences Manually.) If you cannot resolve loop-carried dependences, you cannot safely decompose the loop.
3.
Make sure the shared or private attributes inside the loop are consistent with corresponding use outside the loop. By default, common blocks and individual variables are shared, except for the loop control variable and variables referenced in a subprogram called from within a parallel loop (in which case they are private by default).
4.
Precede the loop with the PARALLEL directive followed by the DO directive. You can combine the two directives by using the PARALLEL DO directive.
5.
As needed, manually optimize the loop.
6.
Make sure the loop complies with restrictions of the parallel-processing environment.
7.
Without using the the program.
-omp option or the -mp option, compile, test, and debug
8.
Using -omp (or -mp ), repeat the previous step.
9.
Evaluate the parallel run:
• If you reach an acceptable level of performance and if the results are correct, stop.
• If the results are inaccurate, analyze the manually decomposed loops for dependences, apply a method to resolve them, and retest the parallel run.
• If performance is inadequate, consider adjusting the run-time environment (see Section 6.4) or performing other manual optimizations, or consider other alternatives discussed in this manual.
Then reenter the cycle by retesting the parallel program.
6–46 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
6.3.2 Resolving Dependences Manually
In directed decomposition, you must resolve loop-carried dependences and dependences involving temporary variables to ensure safe parallel execution.
Only cycles of dependences are nearly impossible to resolve.
Do one of the following:
• Let the loop execute serially (possibly decompose an outer loop level)
• Use a lock (CRITICAL) to force the critical section to execute serially
• Recode or restructure the loop
• Find another algorithm that does not have cycles of dependences
There are several methods for resolving dependences manually:
• For dependences on variables used as temporaries, declare them PRIVATE; this effectively makes separate copies of temporary values for each thread.
• Recode the loop so that the loop-carried dependence becomes loop independent, with each thread having the involved store and fetch operation contained in a single iteration.
• Insert locks (CRITICAL) around the critical section containing the dependence.
Use this technique only for very CPU-intensive loops, when no other method is possible, and for the smallest amount of code possible. The locks extend processing time by making individual threads wait while only one executes the critical region at a time.
• Recode loops with cycles of dependences (these are typically linear recurrences).
6.3.2.1 Resolving Dependences Involving Temporary Variables
Declare temporary variables PRIVATE to resolve dependences involving them.
Temporary variables are used in intermediate calculations. If they are used in more than one iteration of a parallel loop, the program can produce incorrect results.
One thread might define a value and another thread use that value instead of the one it defined for a particular iteration. Loop control variables are prime examples of temporary variables that are declared PRIVATE by default within a parallel region. For example:
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–47
DO I = 1,100
TVAR = A(I) + 2
D(I) = TVAR + Y(I-1)
END DO
As long as certain criteria are met, you can resolve this kind of dependence by declaring the temporary variable (TVAR, in the example) PRIVATE. That way, each thread keeps its own copy of the variable.
For the criteria to be met, the values of the temporary variable must be all of the following:
• Defined in each iteration, inside the loop
• Meant to be used inside the same iteration that established it
• Used nowhere outside the loop unless it is redefined outside the loop before subsequent use
The default for variables in a parallel loop is SHARED, so you must explicitly declare these variables PRIVATE to resolve this kind of dependence.
6.3.2.2 Resolving Loop-Carried Dependences
You can often resolve loop-carried dependences using one or more of the following loop transformations:
• Loop alignment
• Code replication
• Loop distribution
• Restructure the loop into an inner and outer loop
These techniques also resolve dependences that inhibit autodecomposition.
6.3.2.3 Loop Alignment
Loop alignment offsets memory references in the loop so that the dependence is no longer loop carried. The following example shows a loop that is aligned to resolve the dependence in array A:
Loop with Dependence
DO I = 2,N
A(I) = B(I)
C(I) = A(I+1)
END DO
Aligned Statements
C(I-1) = A(I)
A(I) = B(I)
To compensate for the alignment and achieve the same calculations as the original loop, you probably have to perform one or more of the following:
6–48 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
• Change the loop control variable.
• Add IF constructs.
• Switch the order of the statements (this preserves the relative store-fetch order of the original loop).
Example 6–1 shows two possible forms of the final loop.
Example 6–1 Aligned Loop
!
First possible form:
!$OMP PARALLEL PRIVATE (I)
!$OMP DO
DO I = 2,N+1
IF (I .GT. 2) C(I-1) = A(I)
IF (I .LE. N) A(I) = B(I)
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
!
!
!
Second possible form; more efficient because the tests are performed outside the loop:
!
!$OMP PARALLEL
!$OMP DO
DO I = 3,N
C(I-1) = A(I)
A(I) = B(I)
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
IF (N .GE. 2)
A(2) = B(2)
C(N) = A(N+1)
END IF
6.3.2.4 Code Replication
When a loop contains a loop-independent dependence as well as a loop-carried dependence, loop alignment alone is usually not adequate. By resolving the loop-carried dependence, you often misalign another dependence. Code
replication creates temporary variables that duplicate operations and keep the loop-independent dependences inside each iteration.
In S
2 of the following loop, aligning the A(I-1) reference without code replication would misalign the A(I) reference:
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–49
Loop with Multiple Dependences
S
S
1
2
DO I = 2,100
A(I) = B(I) + C(I)
D(I) = A(I) + A(I-1)
END DO
Misaligned Dependence
D(I-1) = A(I-1) + A(I)
A(I) = B(I) + C(I)
Example 6–2 uses code replication to keep the loop-independent dependence inside each iteration. The temporary variable, TA, must be declared
PRIVATE.
Example 6–2 Transformed Loop Using Code Replication
!$OMP PARALLEL PRIVATE (I,TA)
A(2) = B(2) + C(2)
D(2) = A(2) + A(1)
!$OMP DO
DO I = 3,100
A(I) = B(I) + C(I)
TA = B(I-1) + C(I-1)
D(I) = A(I) + TA
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
6.3.2.5 Loop Distribution
Loop distribution allows more parallelism when neither loop alignment nor code replication can resolve the dependences. Loop distribution divides the contents of loops into multiple loops so that dependences cross between two separate loops. The loops run serially in relation to each other, even if they both run in parallel.
The following loop contains multiple dependences that cannot be resolved by either loop alignment or code replication:
DO I = 1,100
S1 A(I) = A(I-1) + B(I)
S2 C(I) = B(I) - A(I)
END DO
Example 6–3 resolves the dependences by distributing the loop. S
2 parallel despite the data recurrence in S
1
.
can run in
6–50 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Example 6–3 Distributed Loop
S1
S2
DO I 1,100
A(I) = A(I-1) + B(I)
END DO
DO I 1,100
C(I) = B(I) - A(I)
END DO
6.3.2.6 Restructuring a Loop into an Inner and Outer Nest
Restructuring a loop into an inner and outer loop nest can resolve some recurrences that are used as rapid approximations of a function of the loop control variable. For example, the following loop uses sines and cosines:
THETA = 2.*PI/N
DO I=0,N-1
S = SIN(I*THETA)
C = COS(I*THETA)
.
.
.
END DO
! use S and C
Using a recurrence to approximate the sines and cosines can make the serial loop run faster (with some loss of accuracy), but it prevents the loop from running in parallel:
THETA = 2.*PI/N
STH = SIN(THETA)
CTH = COS(THETA)
S = 0.0
C = 1.0
DO I=0,N-1
.
.
! use S and C
.
S = S*CTH + C*STH
C = C*CTH - S*STH
END DO
To resolve the dependences, substitute the SIN and COS calls. (However, this loses the performance improvement gained from using the recurrence.) You can also restructure the loop into an outer parallel loop and an inner serial loop.
Each iteration of the outer loop reinitializes the recurrence, and the inner loop uses the value:
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–51
!$OMP PARALLEL SHARED (THETA,STH,CTH,LCHUNK) PRIVATE (ISTART,I,S,C)
THETA = 2.*PI/N
STH = SIN(THETA)
CTH = COS(THETA)
LCHUNK = (N + NWORKERS()-1) / NWORKERS
!$OMP DO
DO ISTART = 0,N-1,LCHUNK
S = SIN(ISTART*THETA)
C = COS(ISTART*THETA)
DO I = ISTART, MIN(N,ISTART+LCHUNK-1)
.
.
! use S and C
.
S = S*CTH + C*STH
C = C*CTH - S*STH
END DO
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
6.3.2.7 Dependences Requiring Locks
When no other method can resolve a dependence, you can put locks around the critical section that contains them. Locks force threads to execute the critical section serially, while allowing the rest of the loop to run in parallel.
However, locks degrade performance because they force the critical section to run serially and increase the overhead. They are best used only when no other technique resolves the dependence, and only in CPU-intensive loops.
To create locks in a loop, enclose the critical section between the CRITICAL and END CRITICAL directives. When a thread executes the CRITICAL directive and the latch variable is open, it takes possession of the latch variable, and other threads must wait to execute the section. The latch variable becomes open when the thread executing the section executes the
END CRITICAL directive.
The latch variable is closed when a thread has possession of it and open when the latch variable is free.
In Example 6–4, the statement updating the sum is locked for safe parallel execution of the loop.
6–52 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Example 6–4 Decomposed Loop Using Locks
INTEGER(4) LCK
!$OMP PARALLEL PRIVATE (I,Y) SHARED (LCK,SUM)
LCK = 0
.
.
.
!$OMP DO
DO I = 1,1000
Y = some_calculation
!$OMP CRITICAL (LCK)
SUM = SUM + Y
!$OMP END CRITICAL (LCK)
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
This particular example is better solved using a REDUCTION clause as shown in Example 6–5.
Example 6–5 Decomposed Loop Using a REDUCTION Clause
INTEGER(4) LCK
!$OMP PARALLEL PRIVATE (I,Y) SHARED (LCK,SUM)
.
.
LCK = 0
.
!$OMP DO REDUCTION (SUM)
DO I = 1,1000
Y = some_calculation
SUM = SUM + Y
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
6.3.3 Coding Restrictions
Because iterations in a parallel DO loop execute in an indeterminate order and in different threads, certain constructs in these loops can cause unpredictable run-time behavior.
The following restrictions are flagged:
• The loop control variable for a parallel loop must be declared an integer.
• Only comment lines and blank lines can exist between a DO directive and the DO loop statement.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–53
• The loop body must not contain any RETURN statements.
• A loop with a branch (GOTO) into or out of its body, or having an EXIT statement cannot be run in parallel.
The following restrictions are not flagged:
• Loop-carried dependences involving shared variables must not exist between iterations of a parallel loop.
• Dependences involving private variables must not exist between code within a parallel loop and code executed before entry into or after the completion of the loop.
• System services or run-time library routines that change the context of a thread (such as a change in privileges, priority, access mode, or environment variables) must not be called from within a parallel loop.
• I/O statements and the control statements PAUSE and STOP must not be used in a routine called at any call level from within a parallel loop.
• Private symbols must not be referenced in a SAVE statement in a routine called at any call level from within a parallel loop.
• If a dummy argument is referenced within a parallel DO loop, the corresponding actual argument must reside in shared memory.
• Random number generators must be used carefully inside parallel loops, because parallel processing affects how numbers are generated.
6.3.4 Manual Optimization
To manually optimize structures containing parallel loops:
• Interchange loops so that the parallel loop has the most CPU work and the caches can perform efficiently.
• Balance the parallel work among threads when it is unusually unbalanced.
6.3.4.1 Interchanging Loops
The following example shows a case in which an inner loop can run in parallel and an outer loop cannot, because of a loop-carried dependence. The inner loop also has a more effective memory-referencing pattern for parallel processing than the outer loop. By interchanging the loops, more work executes in parallel and the cache can perform more efficiently.
6–54 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Original Structure
DO I = 1,100
DO J = 1,300
A(I,J) = A(I+1,J) + 1
END DO
END DO
Interchanged Structure
!$OMP PARALLEL PRIVATE (J,I) SHARED (A)
!$OMP DO
DO J = 1,300
DO I = 1,100
A(I,J) = A(I+1,J) + 1
END DO
END DO
!$OMP END DO
!$OMP END PARALLEL
6.3.4.2 Balancing the Workload
On the DO directive, you can specify the SCHEDULE(GUIDED) clause to use guided self-scheduling in manually decomposed loops, which is effective for most loops. However, when the iterations contain a predictably unbalanced workload, you can obtain better performance by manually balancing the workload. To do this, specify the chunk size in the SCHEDULE clause of the
DO directive.
In the following loop, it might be very inefficient to divide the iterations into chunks of 50. A chunk size of 25 would probably be much more efficient on a system with two processors, depending on the amount of work being done by the routine SUB.
DO I = 1,100
.
.
.
IF (I .LT. 50) THEN
CALL SUB(I)
END IF
.
.
.
END DO
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–55
6.4 Environment Variables for Adjusting the Run-Time
Environment
Note
This section contains information that applies to both the OpenMP
Fortran API and the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives.
The OpenMP Fortran API and the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directive sets also provide environment variables that adjust the run-time environment in unusual situations.
Regardless of whether you used the -omp or the -mp compiler option, when the compiler needs information supplied by an environment variable, the compiler first looks for an OpenMP Fortran API environment variable and then for a Compaq Fortran parallel compiler environment variable. If neither one is found, the compiler uses a default.
The compiler looks for environment variable information in the following situations:
• When entering a parallel region, it looks for the number of threads
( OMP_NUM_THREADS or MP_THREAD_COUNT ), the spin count ( MP_SPIN_COUNT ), the yield count ( MP_YIELD_COUNT ), and the stack size ( MP_STACK_SIZE ).
• When entering a DO or PARALLEL DO directive that has RUNTIME specified, it looks at schedule type ( OMP_SCHEDULE ).
• When entering a worksharing directive, it looks at chunk size
( MP_CHUNK_SIZE ).
The OpenMP Fortran API environment variables are listed in Table 6–4.
6–56 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Table 6–4 OpenMP Fortran API Environment Variables
Environment Variable
1
Interpretation
OMP_SCHEDULE
OMP_NUM_THREADS
OMP_DYNAMIC
OMP_NESTED
This variable applies only to DO and PARALLEL DO directives that have the schedule type of RUNTIME. You can set the schedule type and an optional chunk size for these loops at run time. The schedule types are STATIC,
DYNAMIC, and GUIDED.
For directives that have a schedule type other than
RUNTIME, this variable is ignored. The compiler default schedule type is STATIC. If the optional chunk size is not set, a chunk size of one is assumed, except for the STATIC schedule type. For this schedule type, the default chunk size is set to the loop iteration space divided by the number of threads applied to the loop.
Use this environment variable to set the number of threads to use during execution. This number applies unless you explicitly change it by calling the OMP_SET_NUM_THREADS run-time library routine.
When you have enabled dynamic thread adjustment, the value assigned to this environment variable represents the maximum number of threads that can be used. The default value is the number of processors in the current system.
Use this environment variable to enable or disable dynamic thread adjustment for the execution of parallel regions.
When set to TRUE, the number of threads used can be adjusted by the run-time environment to best utilize system resources. When set to FALSE, dynamic adjustment is disabled. The default is FALSE.
Use this environment variable to enable or disable nested parallelism. When set to TRUE, nested parallelism is enabled. When set to FALSE, it is disabled. The default is
FALSE.
1
Environment variable names must be in uppercase; the assigned values are not case-sensitive.
The Compaq Fortran parallel compiler environment variables are listed in
Table 6–5.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–57
Table 6–5 Compaq Fortran Parallel Environment Variables
Environment Variable
1
Interpretation
MP_THREAD_COUNT
MP_CHUNK_SIZE
MP_STACK_SIZE
MP_SPIN_COUNT
MP_YIELD_COUNT
Specifies the number of threads the run-time system is to create. The default is the number of processors available to your process.
Specifies the chunk size the run-time system uses when dispatching loop iterations to threads if the program specified the RUNTIME schedule type or specified another schedule type requiring a chunk size, but omitted the chunk size. The default chunk size is 1.
Specifies how many bytes of stack space the run-time system allocates for each thread when creating it. If you specify zero, the run-time system uses the default, which is very small. Therefore, if a program declares any large arrays to be PRIVATE, specify a value large enough to allocate them. If you do not use this environment variable at all, the run-time system allocates 5 MB.
Specifies how many times the run-time system spins while waiting for a condition to become true. The default is
16,000,000, which is approximately one second of CPU time.
Specifies how many times the run-time system alternates between calling sched_yield and testing the condition before going to sleep by waiting for a thread condition variable.
The default is 10.
1
Environment variable names must be in uppercase; the assigned values are not case-sensitive.
6.5 Calls to Programs Written in Other Languages
Note
This section contains information that applies to both the OpenMP
Fortran API and the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives.
Only programs written in Compaq Fortran support parallel directives. Any procedures or routines called from within a parallel region in a Compaq
Fortran program must consider the following:
• Compile any Compaq Fortran programs containing parallel directives using the -mp or the -omp option.
• Called procedures or routines must be thread safe.
6–58 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
• It is the programmer’s responsibility to ensure that all data objects in the called procedures or routines are shared or allocated on each thread’s private stack.
6.6 Compiling, Linking, and Running Parallelized Programs on SMP Systems
Note
This section contains information that applies to both the OpenMP
Fortran API and the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives.
Whether you compile and link your program in one step or in separate steps, you must include the name of the f90 Compaq Fortran driver (and the -omp or
-mp option if you want to use parallel compiler directives) on each command line. For example, to compile and link the program prog.f
Fortran API directives in one step, use the command: with its OpenMP
% f90 -omp prog.f -o prog
To separately compile and link the program prog.f
, use these commands:
% f90 -c -omp prog.f
% f90 -omp prog.o -o prog
To run your program, use the command:
% prog
When you use the -omp (or -mp ) option, the driver sets the -reentrancy threaded and the -automatic options for the compiler if you did not specify them on the command line. The options are not set if you used the negated forms of the options on the command line. The driver also sets the -pthread and library options for the linker.
6.7 Debugging Parallelized Programs
Note
This section contains information that applies to both the OpenMP
Fortran API and the Compaq Fortran parallel compiler directives.
When a Compaq Fortran program uses parallel decomposition directives, there are some special considerations concerning how that program can be debugged.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–59
When a bug occurs in a Compaq Fortran program that uses parallel decomposition directives, the bug might be caused by incorrect Compaq
Fortran statements, or it might be caused by incorrect parallel decomposition directives. In either case, the program to be debugged can be executed by multiple threads simultaneously.
6.7.1 Debugger Limitations for Parallelized Programs
Debuggers such as the Compaq Ladebug debugger provide features that support the debugging of programs that are executed by multiple threads.
However, the currently available versions of Ladebug do not directly support the debugging of parallel decomposition directives, and therefore, there are limitations on the debugging features.
Other debuggers are available for use on UNIX. Before attempting to debug programs containing parallel decomposition directives, determine what level of support the debugger provides for these directives by reading the documentation or by contacting the supplier of the debugger.
Some of the new features used in OpenMP are not yet fully supported by the debuggers, so it is important to understand how these features work to understand how to debug them. The two problem areas are:
• Outlining of parallel regions (see Section 6.7.2)
• Shared variables (see Section 6.7.3)
6.7.2 Debugging Parallel Regions
The compiler implements a parallel region by taking the code in the region and putting it into a separate, compiler-created subroutine. This process is called outlining because it is the inverse of inlining a subroutine into its call site.
In place of the parallel region, the compiler inserts a call to a run-time library routine, which starts up threads and causes them to call the outlined routine.
As threads return from the outlined routine, they return to the run-time library, which waits for all threads to finish before returning to the master thread in the original program.
Example 6–6 contains a section of the source listing with machine code
(produced using unit was named f90 -omp -V -machine_code ). Note that the original program outline_example and the parallel region was at line 2. The compiler created an outlined routine called the outlined routine is named
_2_outline_example_ . In general,
_line-number_original-routine-name .
6–60 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Example 6–6 Code Using Parallel Region
OUTLINE_EXAMPLE Source Listing
1 program outline_example
2 !$omp parallel
3 print *, ’hello world’
4 !$omp end parallel
5 print *, ’done’
6 end
OUTLINE_EXAMPLE Machine Code Listing
.text
.ent _2_outline_example_
.eflag 16
0000 _2_outline_example_:
27BB0001
23BD8180
0000 ldah gp, _2_outline_example_
0004 lda gp, _2_outline_example_
23DEFFA0 0008 lda sp, -96(sp)
B75E0000 000C stq r26, (sp)
.mask 0x04000000,-96
.fmask 0x00000000,0
.frame
$sp, 96, $26
.prologue 1
A45D8040 0010 ldq r2, 48(gp)
A77D8020
63FF0000
47E17400
265F0385
0014
0018
001C
0020 ldq r27, for_write_seq_lis trapb mov 11, r0 ldah r18, 901(r31)
A67D8018
B3FE0008
221E0008
B41E0048
47E0D411
B45E0050
2252FF00
229E0048
6B5B4000
27BA0001
0024
0028
002C
0030
0034
0038
003C
0040
0044
0048 ldq r19, 8(gp) stl r31, var$0001 lda r16, var$0001 stq r0, 72(sp) mov 6, r17 stq r2, 80(sp) lda r18, -256(r18) lda r20, 72(sp) jsr r26, for_write_seq_lis ldah gp, _2_outline_example_
23BD8180
A75E0000
63FF0000
23DE0060
004C
0050
0054
0058 lda gp, _2_outline_example_ ldq trapb lda sp, 96(sp)
6BFA8001 005C ret (r26)
.end _2_outline_example_
Routine Size: 96 bytes, Routine Base: $CODE$ + 0000
(continued on next page)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–61
Example 6–6 (Cont.) Code Using Parallel Region
23BD8180
47FE0411
A77D8028
A61D8030
47FF0412
6B5B4000
27BA0001
47E09401
23BD8180
265F0385
A47D8018
A77D8020
A67D8018
221E0008
20630008
B3FE0008
B43E0048
47E0D411
B47E0050
.globl
outline_example_
.ent outline_example_
.eflag 16
0060 outline_example_:
27BB0001
23BD8180
A77D8038
23DEFFA0
0060
0064
0068
006C ldah gp, outline_example_ lda gp, outline_example_ ldq r27, for_set_reentrancy lda sp, -96(sp)
A61D8010
B75E0000
0070 ldq r16, (gp)
0074 stq r26, (sp)
.mask 0x04000000,-96
.fmask 0x00000000,0
.frame
$sp, 96, $26
.prologue 1
6B5B4000
27BA0001
0078
007C jsr r26, for_set_reentrancy ldah gp, outline_example_
0080
0084
0088
008C
0090
0094
0098
009C
00A0 lda gp, outline_example_ mov sp, r17 ldq r27, _OtsEnterParallelOpenMP ldq r16, _2_outline_example_ clr r18 jsr r26, _OtsEnterParallelOpenMP ldah gp, outline_example_ mov 4, r1 lda gp, outline_example_
00A4 ldah r18, 901(r31)
00A8 ldq r3, 8(gp)
00AC ldq r27, for_write_seq_lis
00B0 ldq r19, 8(gp)
00B4 lda r16, var$0001
00B8 lda r3, 8(r3)
00BC stl r31, var$0001
00C0 stq r1, 72(sp)
00C4 mov 6, r17
00C8 stq r3, 80(sp)
2252FF00
229E0048
6B5B4000
27BA0001
00CC lda r18, -256(r18)
00D0 lda r20, 72(sp)
00D4 jsr r26, for_write_seq_lis
00D8 ldah gp, outline_example_
A75E0000
23BD8180
00DC ldq r26, (sp)
00E0 lda gp, outline_example_
47E03400
23DE0060
6BFA8001
00E4
00E8
00EC mov 1, r0 lda sp, 96(sp) ret (r26)
.end
outline_example_
(continued on next page)
6–62 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Example 6–6 (Cont.) Code Using Parallel Region
In the preceding example, the run-time library routine _OtsEnterParallelOpenMP is responsible for creating threads (if they have not already been created) and causing them to call the outlined routine. The outlined routine is called once by each thread.
Debugging the program at this level is just like debugging a program that uses
POSIX threads directly. Breakpoints can be set in the outlined routine just like any other routine (leave off the trailing underscore. However, all Compaq
Fortran routines are appended with a trailing underscore, so the debugger automatically inserts it.
6.7.3 Debugging Shared Variables
When a variable appears in a PRIVATE, FIRSTPRIVATE, LASTPRIVATE, or
REDUCTION clause on some block, the variable is made private to the parallel region by redeclaring it in the block. SHARED data, however, is not declared in the outlined routine. Instead, it gets its declaration from the parent routine.
When in a debugger, you can switch from one thread to another. Each thread has its own program counter so each thread can be in a different place in the code. Example 6–7 shows a Ladebug session.
Example 6–7 Code Using Multiple Threads
% ladebug a.out
Welcome to the Ladebug Debugger Version 4.0-xx
-----------------object file name: a.out
Reading symbolic information ...done
(ladebug) stop in _2_outline_example
[#1: stop in subroutine _2_outline_example() ]
(ladebug) run
[1] stopped at [_2_outline_example:2 0x120002d14]
2 !$omp parallel
(continued on next page)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–63
Example 6–7 (Cont.) Code Using Multiple Threads
(ladebug) show thread
Thread State Substate Policy Priority Name
------ ---------- --------------- ---------- -------- -------------
>* 1 running
-1 blocked kernel throughput 11 fifo 32 default thread manager thread
-2 ready
2 ready
3 ready
4 ready
5 ready
6 ready
(ladebug) not started not started not started not started not started idle 0 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 null thread for VP 0x0
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
Thread 1 is the master thread. Do not confuse debugger thread numbers with
OpenMP thread numbers. The compiler numbers threads beginning at zero, but the debugger numbers threads beginning at 1. There are also two extra threads in the debugging process, numbered -1 and -2 , for use by the kernel.
Thread 1 has started running and is currently stopped just inside the outlined routine. The other threads have not started running because the example session was run on a uniprocessor workstation. On a multiprocessor, the other threads can run on different processors, so switch processors and examine the stack as shown in Example 6–8.
Example 6–8 Code Using Multiple Processors
(ladebug) thread 2
Thread State Substate Policy Priority Name
------ ---------- --------------- ---------- -------- -------------
> 2 ready not started throughput 11 <anonymous>
(ladebug) where
>0 0x3ff805739e0 in thdBase(0x14005d7d0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x120003c20, 0x4, 0x0)
(ladebug) thread 1
Thread State Substate Policy Priority Name
------ ---------- --------------- ---------- -------- -------------
>* 1 running throughput 11 default thread
(continued on next page)
6–64 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Example 6–8 (Cont.) Code Using Multiple Processors
(ladebug) where
>0 0x120002d14 in _2_outline_example() omp_hello.f:2
#1 0x12000495c in _OtsEnterParallelOpenMP()
#2 0x120002d98 in outline_example() omp_hello.f:1
#3 0x120002ccc in main() for_main.c:203
(ladebug)
Thread 2 has not yet started and is reported as being in thdBase, a POSIX run-time support routine that threads run when they are created. Thread 1 is the master thread and is currently executing the outlined routine, called from the run-time library, which was called from the original program.
Note that only the master thread (thread 1) has a full call tree. The other threads have thdBase( ), from which they call the outlined routine. If you want to look at variables higher on the call stack than the parallel region, you must first tell the debugger to switch to thread 1, and then use the up command to climb the call stack.
If SHARED data is in common blocks, the outlined routine accesses it the same way any other routine would. If the SHARED data is automatic storage associated with the routine where the parallel region appears, however, each thread has a pointer to the master thread stack when the parallel region is reached.
Variables on the master stack can be accessed through the pointer. The compiler handles this automatically and does describe the access in the symbol table, but Ladebug and TotalView currently do not support this uplevel access mechanism.
Example 6–9 makes this clearer.
Example 6–9 Code Using Shared Variables
UPLEVEL
1
2
3 program uplevel implicit none integer i
Source Listing
(continued on next page)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–65
Example 6–9 (Cont.) Code Using Shared Variables
4
5 !$omp parallel
6 !$omp atomic
7 i = i + 1
10
11
8 !$omp end parallel
9 print *, i end
UPLEVEL Machine Code Listing
.text
.ent _5_uplevel_
.eflag 16
0000 _5_uplevel_:
23DEFFC0 0000 lda sp, -64(sp)
.frame
$sp, 64, $26
.prologue 0
47E10402 0004 mov r1, __StaticLink.1 # r1, r2
63FF0000
20620010
0008 trapb
000C lda r3, 16(r2)
0010 L$3:
A8230000 0010 ldl_l r1, (r3)
40203000
B8030000
E4000003
63FF0000
23DE0040
0014
0018
001C addl r1, 1, r0 stl_c r0, (r3) beq r0, L$4
0020 trapb
0024 lda sp, 64(sp)
6BFA8001 0028 ret (r26)
002C L$4:
C3FFFFF8 002C br L$3
.end _5_uplevel_
Routine Size: 48 bytes, Routine Base: $CODE$ + 0000
.globl
uplevel_
.ent uplevel_
.eflag 16
0030 uplevel_:
27BB0001
23BD8130
23DEFFA0
B75E0000
0030
0034
0038
003C ldah gp, uplevel_ # gp, (r27) lda gp, uplevel_ # gp, (gp) lda sp, -96(sp) stq r26, (sp)
.mask 0x04000000,-96
.fmask 0x00000000,0
.frame
$sp, 96, $26
.prologue 1
(continued on next page)
6–66 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Example 6–9 (Cont.) Code Using Shared Variables
A61D8010
A77D8038
6B5B4000
27BA0001
23BD8130
A61D8030
47FE0411
47FF0412
A77D8028
0040 ldq r16, (gp)
0044 ldq r27, for_set_reentrancy # r27, 40(gp)
0048 jsr r26, for_set_reentrancy # r26, (r27)
004C ldah gp, uplevel_ # gp, (r26)
0050 lda gp, uplevel_ # gp, (gp)
0054 ldq r16, _5_uplevel_ # r16, 32(gp)
0058 mov sp, r17
005C clr r18
0060 ldq r27, _OtsEnterParallelOpenMP # r27, 24(gp)
6B5B4000
27BA0001
23BD8130
B3FE0018
A67D8018
203E0010
B43E0058
221E0018
47E0D411
265F0385
2252FF00
229E0058
A77D8020
6B5B4000
27BA0001
23BD8130
47E03400
A75E0000
0064
0068
006C
0070
0074
0078
007C
0080
0084
0088
008C
0090
0094
0098
009C
00A0
00A4
00A8 jsr r26, _OtsEnterParallelOpenMP # r26, (r27) ldah gp, uplevel_ # gp, (r26) lda gp, uplevel_ # gp, (gp) stl r31, var$0001 # r31, 24(sp) ldq r19, 8(gp) lda r1, I # r1, 16(sp) stq r1, 88(sp) lda r16, var$0001 # r16, 24(sp) mov 6, r17 ldah r18, 901(r31) lda r18, -256(r18) lda r20, 88(sp) ldq r27, for_write_seq_lis # r27, 16(gp) jsr r26, for_write_seq_lis # r26, (r27) ldah gp, uplevel_ # gp, (r26) lda gp, uplevel_ # gp, (gp) mov 1, r0 ldq r26, (sp)
23DE0060
6BFA8001
00AC
00B0
.end uplevel_ lda sp, 96(sp) ret (r26)
Routine Size: 132 bytes, Routine Base: $CODE$ + 0030
Note that in this example in the main routine, the variable i is kept at offset 16 from the stack pointer. The stack pointer is passed into
_OtsEnterParallelOpenMP , which puts it into register r1 before calling
_5_uplevel_ . Each thread uses indirect address through this address to get to the shared i.
Because the debuggers have not yet been adjusted to understand uplevel addressing, the variable i does not appear to be declared in the outlined region, only in the original routine. To look at the value of the shared variable, we have to switch threads to the master thread and then get into the appropriate context. This is shown in Example 6–10.
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–67
Example 6–10 Code Looking at a Shared Variable Value
% ladebug a.out
Welcome to the Ladebug Debugger Version 4.0-xx
-----------------object file name: a.out
Reading symbolic information ...done
(ladebug) stop in _5_uplevel
[#1: stop in subroutine _5_uplevel() ]
(ladebug) run
[1] stopped at [_5_uplevel:5 0x120002cd8]
5 !$omp parallel
(ladebug) where
>0 0x120002cd8 in _5_uplevel() omp_uplevel.f:5
#1 0x1200048ec in _OtsEnterParallelOpenMP
#2 0x120002d34 in uplevel() omp_uplevel.f:1
#3 0x120002c9c in main() for_main.c:203
(ladebug) p i
0
(ladebug) c
[1] stopped at [_5_uplevel:5 0x120002cd8]
5 !$omp parallel
(ladebug) show thread
Thread State Substate Policy Priority Name
------ ---------- --------------- ---------- -------- -------------
1 ready
-1 blocked kernel throughput 11 fifo 32 default thread manager thread
-2 ready
>* 2 running
3 ready
4 ready
5 ready
6 ready not started not started not started not started idle 0 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 null thread for VP 0x0
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
(ladebug) p i
Error: no value for symbol I
Error: no value for i
(continued on next page)
6–68 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
Example 6–10 (Cont.) Code Looking at a Shared Variable Value
(ladebug) thread 1
Thread State Substate Policy Priority Name
------ ---------- --------------- ---------- -------- -------------
> 1 ready throughput 11 default thread
(ladebug) where
>0 0x12000493c in _OtsEnterParallelOpenMP
#1 0x120002d34 in uplevel() omp_uplevel.f:1
#2 0x120002c9c in main() for_main.c:203
(ladebug) p i
1
(ladebug) c
[1] stopped at [_5_uplevel:5 0x120002cd8]
5 !$omp parallel
(ladebug) show thread
Thread State Substate Policy Priority Name
------ ---------- --------------- ---------- -------- -------------
1 ready
-1 blocked kernel throughput 11 fifo 32 default thread manager thread
-2 ready
2 ready
>* 3 running
4 ready
5 ready
6 ready not started not started not started idle 0 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 throughput 11 null thread for VP 0x0
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
<anonymous>
(ladebug) where
>0 0x120002cd8 in _5_uplevel() omp_uplevel.f:5
#1 0x120003d90 in slave_main(arg=2) ots_parallel.bli:859
#2 0x3ff80573ea4 in thdBase(0x0, 0x0, 0x0, 0x1, 0x45586732, 0x3)
DebugInformationStrippedFromFile101
(ladebug) p i
Error: no value for symbol I
Error: no value for i
(ladebug) thread 1
Thread State Substate Policy Priority Name
------ ---------- --------------- ---------- -------- -------------
> 1 ready throughput 11 default thread
(continued on next page)
Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment 6–69
Example 6–10 (Cont.) Code Looking at a Shared Variable Value
(ladebug) up
>1 0x120002d34 in uplevel() omp_uplevel.f:1
1
(ladebug) p i program uplevel
2
(ladebug) q
%
6–70 Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment
7
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
This chapter describes input/output (I/O) as implemented for Compaq Fortran and discusses the following topics:
• Section 7.1, Logical I/O Units
• Section 7.2, Types of I/O Statements
• Section 7.3, Forms of I/O Statements
• Section 7.4, Types of Files and File Characteristics
• Section 7.5, Opening Files: OPEN Statement
• Section 7.6, Obtaining File Information: INQUIRE Statement
• Section 7.7, Closing a File: CLOSE Statement
• Section 7.8, Record Operations
• Section 7.9, User-Supplied OPEN Procedures: USEROPEN Specifier
• Section 7.10, Format of Compaq Fortran Record Types
For More Information:
• On native data types, see Chapter 9.
• On reading and writing nonnative unformatted numeric data (originally written to the file using unformatted I/O statements), see Chapter 10.
• On porting Compaq OpenVMS Fortran data, see Section A.4.
• On performing I/O to the same unit with Compaq Fortran and Compaq
Fortran 77 object files, see Section A.5.3.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–1
7.1 Logical I/O Units
In Compaq Fortran, a logical unit is a channel through which data transfer occurs between the program and a device or file. You identify each logical unit with a logical unit number, which can be any nonnegative integer from 0 to a maximum value of 2,147,483,647 (2**31–1). For example:
READ (2,100) I,X,Y
This READ statement specifies that data is to be entered from the device or file corresponding to logical unit 2, in the format specified by the FORMAT statement labeled 100. When opening a file, use the UNIT specifier to indicate the unit number.
Fortran 95/90 (Fortran) programs are inherently device-independent. The association between the logical unit number and the physical file can occur at run-time. Instead of changing the logical unit numbers specified in the source program, you can change this association at run time to match the needs of the program and the available resources. For example, before running the program, a script file can set the appropriate environment variable or allow the terminal user to type a directory path, file name, or both.
Use the same logical unit number specified in the OPEN statement for other
I/O statements to be applied to the opened file, such as READ and WRITE.
The OPEN statement connects a unit number with an external file and allows you to explicitly specify file attributes and run-time options using OPEN statement specifiers (all files except internal files are called external files).
Certain unit numbers are preconnected to standard devices. Unit number 5 is associated with stdin , unit 6 with stdout , and unit 0 with stderr . At run time, if units 5 and 6 are specified by a record I/O statement (such as READ or WRITE) without having been explicitly opened by an OPEN statement,
Compaq Fortran implicitly opens units 5, 6, and 0 and associates them with their respective operating system standard I/O files (if the corresponding
FORTn environment variable is not set).
For More Information:
On the OPEN statement and preconnected files, see Section 7.5.
7–2 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.2 Types of I/O Statements
Table 7–1 lists the Compaq Fortran I/O statements.
Table 7–1 Summary of I/O Statements
Category and
Statement Name Description
File Connection
OPEN Connects a unit number with an external file and specifies file connection characteristics.
Disconnects a unit number from an external file.
CLOSE
File Inquiry
INQUIRE Returns information about a named file, a connection to a unit, or the length of an output item list.
Record Position
BACKSPACE
ENDFILE
REWIND
Moves the record position to the beginning of the previous record (sequential access only).
Writes an end-of-file marker after the current record (sequential access only).
Sets the record position to the beginning of the file (sequential access only).
Record Input
READ Transfers data from an external file record or an internal file to internal storage.
Record Output
WRITE
Transfers data from internal storage to an external file record or to an internal file.
Transfers data from internal storage to stdout (standard output device). Unlike WRITE, PRINT only provides formatted sequential output and does not specify a unit number.
Compaq Fortran
Extensions
ACCEPT Reads input from stdin . Unlike READ, ACCEPT only provides formatted sequential output and does not specify a unit number.
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–3
Table 7–1 (Cont.) Summary of I/O Statements
Category and
Statement Name Description
DELETE
REWRITE
UNLOCK
TYPE
DEFINE FILE
FIND
Marks a record at the current record position in a relative file as deleted (direct access only).
Transfers data from internal storage to an external file record at the current record position (direct access relative files only).
Releases a lock held on the current record when file sharing was requested when the file was opened. Ignored in the current version of Compaq Fortran for Tru64 UNIX and Linux Systems
(see Section 7.8.2).
Writes record output to stdout (same as PRINT).
Specifies file characteristics for a direct access relative file and connects the unit number to the file, similar to an OPEN statement. Provided for compatibility with compilers before
FORTRAN-77.
Changes the record position in a direct access file. Provided for compatibility with compilers older than FORTRAN-77.
In addition to the READ, WRITE, REWRITE, TYPE, and PRINT statements, other I/O record-related statements are limited to a specific file organization.
For instance:
• The DELETE statement only applies to relative files.
1
• The BACKSPACE statement only applies to sequential files open for sequential access.
• The REWIND statement only applies to sequential files open for sequential access and to direct access files.
• The ENDFILE statement only applies to certain types of sequential files open for sequential access and to direct access files.
The file-related statements (OPEN, INQUIRE, and CLOSE) apply to any relative or sequential file.
1
Detecting deleted records is only available if the -vms program was compiled. For more information on the option was specified when the
-vms option, see Section 3.98.
7–4 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.3 Forms of I/O Statements
Each type of record I/O statement can be coded in a variety of forms. The form you select depends on the nature of your data and how you want it treated.
When opening a file, specify the form using the FORM specifier. The following are the forms of I/O statements:
• Formatted I/O statements contain explicit format specifiers that are used to control the translation of data from internal (binary) form within a program to external (readable character) form in the records, or vice versa.
• List-directed and namelist I/O statements are similar to formatted statements in function. However, they use different mechanisms to control the translation of data: formatted I/O statements use explicit format specifiers, and list-directed and namelist I/O statements use data types.
• Unformatted I/O statements do not contain format specifiers and therefore do not translate the data being transferred (important when writing data that will be read later).
Formatted, list-directed, and namelist I/O forms require translation of data from internal (binary) form within a program to external (readable character) form in the records. Consider using unformatted I/O for the following reasons:
• Unformatted data avoids the translation process, so I/O tends to be faster.
• Unformatted data avoids the loss of precision in floating-point numbers when the output data will subsequently be used as input data.
• Unformatted data conserves file storage space (stored in binary form).
To write data to a file using formatted, list-directed, or namelist I/O statements, specify FORM= ’ FORMATTED ’ when opening the file. To write data to a file using unformatted I/O statements, specify FORM= ’ UNFORMATTED ’ when opening the file.
Data written using formatted, list-directed, or namelist I/O statements is referred to as formatted data; data written using unformatted I/O statements is referred to as unformatted data.
When reading data from a file, you should use the same I/O statement form that was used to write the data to the file. For instance, if data was written to a file with a formatted I/O statement, you should read data from that file with a formatted I/O statement.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–5
Although I/O statement form is usually the same for reading and writing data in a file, a program can read a file containing unformatted data (using unformatted input) and write it to a separate file containing formatted data
(using formatted output). Similarly, a program can read a file containing formatted data and write it to a different file containing unformatted data.
As described in Section 7.8.2, you can access records in any sequential or relative file using sequential access. For relative files and certain (fixed-length) sequential files, you can also access records using direct access.
Table 7–2 shows the main record I/O statements, by category, that can be used in Compaq Fortran programs.
Table 7–2 Available I/O Statements and Record I/O Forms
File Type, Access, and I/O Form Available Statements
External file, sequential access
Formatted
List-Directed
Namelist
Unformatted
READ, WRITE, PRINT, ACCEPT
1
READ, WRITE, PRINT, ACCEPT
1
READ, WRITE, PRINT, ACCEPT
1
READ, WRITE, REWRITE 1 ; 2
, TYPE
, TYPE
, TYPE
1
, REWRITE
1
, REWRITE
1
, REWRITE
1 ; 2
1 ; 2
1 ; 2
External file, direct access
Formatted
Unformatted
READ, WRITE, and REWRITE 1 ; 2
READ, WRITE, and REWRITE 1 ; 2
Internal file
3
Formatted
List-Directed
Unformatted
READ, WRITE
READ, WRITE
None
1
This statement is a Compaq extension to the Fortran 95/90 standard.
2
You can use the REWRITE statement only for relative files, using direct access.
3
An internal file is a way to reference character data in a buffer using sequential access (see
Section 7.4.2).
7.4 Types of Files and File Characteristics
This section discusses file organization, internal and scratch files, record type, record length, and other file characteristics.
7–6 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.4.1 File Organizations
File organization refers to the way records are physically arranged on a storage device.
Compaq Fortran supports two kinds of file organizations:
• Sequential organization
• Relative organization
The default file organization is always ORGANIZATION= ’ SEQUENTIAL ’ for an OPEN statement. The organization of a file is specified by means of the
ORGANIZATION specifier in the OPEN statement, as described in the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
You must store relative files on a disk device. You can store sequential files on magnetic tape or disk devices, and can use other peripheral devices, such as terminals, pipes, and line printers as sequential files.
Sequential Organization
A sequentially organized file consists of records arranged in the sequence in which they are written to the file (the first record written is the first record in the file, the second record written is the second record in the file, and so on).
As a result, records can be added only at the end of the file.
Sequential files are usually read sequentially, starting with the first record in the file. Sequential files with a fixed-length record type that are stored on disk can also be accessed by relative record number (direct access).
Relative Organization
Within a relative file are numbered positions, called cells. These cells are of fixed equal length and are consecutively numbered from 1 to n, where 1 is the first cell, and n is the last available cell in the file. Each cell either contains a single record or is empty.
Records in a relative file are accessed according to cell number. A cell number is a record’s relative record number (its location relative to the beginning of the file). By specifying relative record numbers, you can directly retrieve, add, or delete records regardless of their locations (direct access). (Detecting deleted records is only available if you specified the compiled. For information on the -vms
-vms option when the program was option, see Section 3.98.)
When creating a relative file, specify the RECL value to determine the size of the fixed-length cells. Within the cells, you can store records of varying length, as long as their size does not exceed the cell size.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–7
7.4.2 Internal Files and Scratch Files
Compaq Fortran also supports two other types of files that are not file organizations:
• Internal files
• Scratch files
Internal Files
When you use sequential access, you can use an internal file to reference character data in a buffer. The transfer occurs between internal storage and internal storage (unlike external files), such as between character variables and a character array.
An internal file consists of any of the following:
• Character variable
• Character-array element
• Character array
• Character substring
• Character array section without a vector subscript
Instead of specifying a unit number for the READ or WRITE statement, use an internal file specifier in the form of a character scalar memory reference or a character-array name reference.
An internal file is a designated internal storage space (variable buffer) of characters that is treated as a sequential file of fixed-length records. To perform internal I/O, use formatted and list-directed sequential READ and
WRITE statements. You cannot use file-related statements such as OPEN and
INQUIRE on an internal file (no unit number is used).
If an internal file is made up of a single character variable, array element, or substring, that file comprises a single record whose length is the same as the length of the character variable, array element, or substring it contains. If an internal file is made up of a character array, that file comprises a sequence of records, with each record consisting of a single array element. The sequence of records in an internal file is determined by the order of subscript progression.
A record in an internal file can be read only if the character variable, array element, or substring comprising the record has been defined (a value has been assigned to the record).
Prior to each READ and WRITE statement, an internal file is always positioned at the beginning of the first record.
7–8 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
Scratch Files
Scratch files are created by specifying STATUS= ’ SCRATCH ’ in an OPEN statement. By default, these temporary files are created in (and later deleted from) the directory specified in the OPEN statement DEFAULTFILE (if specified). To request a different directory to contain the scratch (temporary) files, set the TMPDIR environment variable.
7.4.3 Record Types, Record Overhead, and Maximum Record Length
Record type refers to whether records in a file are all the same length, are of varying length, or use other conventions to define where one record ends and another begins.
You can use fixed-length and variable-length record types with sequential or relative files. You can use any of the record types with sequential files.
Relative files require the fixed-length record type.
Records are stored in one of the types described in Table 7–3. When creating a new file or opening an existing file, specify one of the record types listed in this table.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–9
Table 7–3 Compaq Fortran Record Types
Record Type Description
Fixed-length
Variable-length
Segmented
Stream
Stream_LF and
Stream_CR
Records in a file must contain the same length.
You must specify the record length (RECL) when the file is opened and can obtain it before opening the file with unformatted data using a form of the INQUIRE statement (see Section 7.6.3).
See Section 7.10.1, Fixed-Length Records.
Records in a file can vary in length.
This is the most portable record type across multivendor U*X platforms (such as Compaq Tru64 UNIX). Record length information is stored as control bytes at the beginning and end of each record.
See Section 7.10.2, Variable-Length Records.
This pertains to a single logical record containing one or more unformatted records of varying length, which can only be used for unformatted sequential access.
The segmented record type is unique to Compaq Fortran products.
Avoid the segmented record type when the application requires that the same file be used for programs written in languages other than Fortran and for non-Compaq platforms. However, because the segmented record type is unique to Compaq Fortran products, segmented files can be ported across Compaq Fortran platforms.
See Section 7.10.3, Segmented Records.
A stream file is not grouped into records and uses no record delimiters.
Stream files contain character or binary data that is read or written to the extent of the variables specified. Specify
CARRIAGECONTROL= ’ NONE ’ for stream files.
See Section 7.10.4, Stream File Data.
Records are of varying length where the line feed (LF) or the carriage return (CR) character serve as record delimiters (LF for
Stream_LF files and CR for Stream_CR files).
Stream_LF files must not contain embedded LF characters or use
CARRIAGECONTROL= ’ LIST ’ . Instead, specify
CARRIAGECONTROL= ’ NONE ’ . Stream_CR files must not contain embedded CR characters. The Stream_LF record type is the usual record type for text files.
See Section 7.10.5, Stream_CR and Stream_LF Records.
Before you choose a record type, consider whether your application will use formatted or unformatted data. If you are using formatted data, you can choose any record type except segmented. If you are using unformatted data, avoid the stream, stream_CR, and stream_LF record types.
7–10 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
The segmented record type can only be used for unformatted sequential access with sequential files. You should not use segmented records for files that are read by programs written in languages other than Compaq Fortran products.
The stream, stream_CR, stream_LF, and segmented record types can be used only with sequential files.
7.4.3.1 Portability Considerations of Record Types
Consider the following portability needs when choosing a record type:
• Data files from Compaq Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux Alpha systems, and Compaq Fortran 77 on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, are interchangeable.
• Data files from Compaq Fortran on Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems and
Compaq Fortran on Linux Alpha systems are interchangeable.
• When using files with Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 on Tru64
UNIX, Linux, and OpenVMS systems, use:
The segmented record type for unformatted data. However, be aware that the segmented record type is used only by Compaq Fortran and
Compaq Fortran 77 but not by other Compaq languages.
The stream_LF format for formatted data.
• The stream_LF record type is usually the most portable on U*X systems.
• Any record type except segmented with other non-Fortran Compaq languages.
For more information on porting Compaq OpenVMS Fortran data, see
Section A.4.
The default record type (RECORDTYPE) depends on the values for the
ACCESS and FORM specifiers for the OPEN statement, as described in the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
The record type of the file is not maintained as an attribute of the file. The results of using a record type other than the one used to create the file are indeterminate.
For information on choosing the most efficient record type, see Section 5.6.9.
An I/O record is a collection of fields (data items) that are logically related and are usually processed as a unit.
Unless you specify nonadvancing I/O (ADVANCE specifier), each Compaq
Fortran I/O statement transfers one record. The exceptions are described in
Section 7.8.5.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–11
7.4.3.2 Record Overhead
Record overhead refers to bytes associated with each record that are used internally by the file system and are not available when a record is read or written. Knowing the record overhead helps when estimating the storage requirements for an application. Although the overhead bytes exist on the storage media, do not include them when specifying the record length with the
RECL specifier in an OPEN statement.
The various record types each require a different number of bytes for record overhead, as described in Table 7–4.
Table 7–4 Bytes Required for Record Overhead
Record Type Organization Record Overhead
Fixed-length
Fixed-length
Variable-length
Segmented
Stream
Stream_CR
Stream_LF
Sequential files
Relative files
Sequential files
Sequential files
Sequential files
Sequential files
Sequential files
None.
None if the -vms option was omitted (the default). One byte if the -vms option was specified.
Eight bytes per record for overhead.
Four bytes per record for overhead. One additional padding byte (space) is added if the specified record size is an odd number.
None required.
One byte per record for overhead.
One byte per record for overhead.
7.4.3.3 Maximum Record Length
For all but variable-length sequential records on 64-bit addressable systems, the maximum record length is 2.147 billion bytes (2,147,483,647 minus the bytes for record overhead). For variable-length sequential records on 64-bit addressable systems, the theoretical maximum record length is about 17,000 gigabytes. When considering very large record sizes, also consider limiting factors such as system virtual memory.
For More Information:
• On the detailed format of each record type, see Section 7.10.
• On converting nonnative numeric unformatted data, see Chapter 10.
• On I/O performance considerations, see Section 5.6.
7–12 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
• On porting data files from other vendors that can use different units for the record length, see Section 7.4.4.
7.4.4 Other File Characteristics
Other file characteristics include:
• Carriage control attributes of each record (CARRIAGECONTROL specifier)
• Whether formatted or unformatted data is contained in the records (FORM specifier)
• The record length (RECL specifier)
When you need to display or print formatted data that uses Fortran carriage control, consider using the fpr command as a filter through a pipe to reformat the records into operating system line printer format.
The units used for specifying record length depend on the form of the data:
• For formatted files (FORM= ’ FORMATTED ’ ), specify the record length in
bytes.
• For unformatted files (FORM= ’ UNFORMATTED ’ ), specify the record length in 4-byte units, unless you specify the request 1-byte units (see Section 3.7).
-assume byterecl option to
For More Information:
• On statement syntax and specifier values (including defaults), see the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On file characteristics, see Section 7.5.2 and the OPEN statement in the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On the fpr command and carriage control characters, see fpr (1).
• On I/O performance considerations, see Section 5.6.
7.5 Opening Files: OPEN Statement
To open a file, you should use a preconnected file (such as for terminal output) or explicitly OPEN files. Although you can also implicitly open a file, this prevents you from using the OPEN statement to specify the file connection characteristics and other information.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–13
7.5.1 Using Preconnected Standard I/O Files
If you do not use an OPEN statement to open logical unit 5, 6, or 0 and do not set the appropriate environment variable (FORTn), unit number 5 is associated with stdin , unit 6 with stdout , and unit 0 with stderr . At run time, Compaq
Fortran implicitly opens (preconnects) units 5, 6, and 0 and associates them with their respective operating system standard I/O files if the corresponding
FORTn environment variable is not set.
You can change these preconnected files by using one of the following:
• An OPEN statement to open unit 5, 6, or 0.
When you explicitly OPEN a file for unit 5, 6, or 0, the OPEN statement keywords specify the file-related information to be used instead of the preconnected standard I/O file.
• Set the appropriate environment variable (FORTn) to redirect I/O to an external disk file.
If you set the corresponding Compaq Fortran FORTn environment variable, the file specified by that Compaq Fortran environment variable is used.
Table 7–5 lists the Compaq Fortran environment variables and the standard
I/O file associations for the preconnected files.
5
6
0
Table 7–5 Environment Variables and Preconnected Files
Unit
Compaq Fortran
Environment Variable Equivalent Tru64 UNIX Standard I/O File
FORT5
FORT6
FORT0
Standard input, stdin
Standard output, stdout
Standard error, stderr
To change the characteristics of the connection to a preconnected unit, explicitly open the preconnected unit number.
To redirect input or output from the standard preconnected files at run-time, you can set the appropriate Compaq Fortran I/O environment variable (see
Section 7.5.7) or use the appropriate shell redirection character in a pipe (such as > or <).
7–14 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
For More Information:
• On the shell commands you can use to set or unset environment variables, see Appendix B.
• Other I/O environment variables recognized by Compaq Fortran, see
Section 7.5.7.
7.5.2 OPEN Statement Specifiers
The OPEN statement connects a unit number with an external file and allows you to explicitly specify file attributes and run-time options using OPEN statement specifiers. Once you open a file, you should close it before opening it again unless it is a preconnected file.
If you open a unit number that was opened previously (without being closed), one of the following occurs:
• If you specify a file specification that does not match the one specified for the original open, the Compaq Fortran run-time system closes the file and then reopens it.
This resets the current record position for the second file.
• If you specify a file specification that does match the one specified for the original open, the file is reconnected without the internal equivalent of the
CLOSE and OPEN.
This lets you change one or more OPEN statement run-time specifiers while maintaining the record position context.
You can use the INQUIRE statement (see Section 7.6) to obtain information about a whether or not a file is opened by your program.
Especially when creating a new file using the OPEN statement, examine the defaults (see the description of the OPEN statement in the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual) or explicitly specify file attributes with the appropriate OPEN statement specifiers.
Table 7–6 lists the OPEN statement functions and their specifiers.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–15
Table 7–6 OPEN Statement Functions and Specifiers
Category, Functions, and OPEN Statement Specifiers
Identify File and Unit
UNIT specifies the logical unit number.
FILE (or NAME 1 ) and DEFAULTFILE 1 an external file.
specify the directory and/or file name of
STATUS or TYPE
1 indicates whether to create a new file, overwrite an existing file, open an existing file, or use a scratch file.
STATUS or DISPOSE 1 specifies the file existence status after CLOSE.
File and Record Characteristics
ORGANIZATION
1 indicates the file organization (sequential or relative).
RECORDTYPE 1 indicates which record type to use.
FORM indicates whether records are formatted or unformatted.
CARRIAGECONTROL 1 indicates the terminal control type.
RECL or RECORDSIZE 1 specifies the record size (see Section 7.4.4).
Special File Open Routine
USEROPEN 1 names the routine that will open the file to establish special context that changes the effect of subsequent Compaq Fortran I/O statements
(see Section 7.9).
File Access, Processing, and Position
ACCESS indicates the access mode (direct or sequential).
SHARED 1 indicates that other users can access the same file and activates record locking. Ignored in the current version of Compaq Fortran for Tru64 UNIX and
Linux Systems (see Section 7.8.2).
POSITION indicates whether to position the file at the beginning of file, before the end-of-file record, or leave it as is (unchanged).
ACTION or READONLY 1 indicates whether statements will be used to only read records, only write records, or both read and write records.
MAXREC 1 specifies the maximum record number for direct access.
ASSOCIATEVARIABLE
1 direct access.
specifies the variable containing next record number for
Record Transfer Characteristics
BLANK indicates whether to ignore blanks in numeric fields.
1
This specifier is a Compaq Fortran extension.
(continued on next page)
7–16 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
Table 7–6 (Cont.) OPEN Statement Functions and Specifiers
Category, Functions, and OPEN Statement Specifiers
DELIM specifies the delimiter character for character constants in list-directed or namelist output.
PAD, when reading formatted records, indicates whether padding characters should be added if the item list and format specification require more data than the record contains.
BLOCKSIZE 1 specifies the block physical I/O buffer size.
BUFFERCOUNT
1 specifies the number of physical I/O buffers.
CONVERT 1 specifies the format of unformatted numeric data (see Chapter 10).
Error Handling Capabilities
ERR specifies a label to branch to if an error occurs.
IOSTAT specifies the integer variable to receive the error (IOSTAT) number if an error occurs.
File Close Action
DISPOSE identifies the action to take when the file is closed.
1
This specifier is a Compaq Fortran extension.
For More Information:
• On specifier syntax and complete information, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
• On the UNIT, FILE, and DEFAULTFILE specifiers, see Section 7.5.3 to
Section 7.5.7.
• On the FORM specifier, see Section 7.3.
• On file organizations, see Section 7.4.1.
• On available record types, see Section 7.4.3 and Section 7.10.
• On the CARRIAGECONTROL specifier, see Section 7.4.4 and fpr (1).
• On the RECL (record length) specifier, see Section 7.4.4.
• On the ERR and IOSTAT specifiers, see Chapter 8.
• On obtaining file information using the INQUIRE statement, see
Section 7.6.
• On closing files, see Section 7.7.
• Record I/O transfer, see Section 7.8.5.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–17
• Record advancement, see Section 7.8.4.
• Record positioning, see Section 7.8.3.
• On I/O performance considerations, see Section 5.6.
7.5.3 Methods to Specify the Unit, File Name, and Directory
You can choose to assign files to logical units by using one of the following methods:
• By using default values, such as a preconnected unit. In the following example, the PRINT statement is associated with a preconnected unit
( stdout ) by default.
PRINT *,100
The READ statement associates the logical unit 7 with the file
(because the FILE specifier was omitted) by default: fort.7
OPEN (UNIT=7,STATUS=’NEW’)
READ (7,100)
• By supplying a file name (and possibly a directory) in an OPEN statement.
For example:
OPEN (UNIT=7, FILE=’FILNAM.DAT’, STATUS=’OLD’)
• By using environment variables. You can also use shell commands to set the appropriate environment variable to a value that indicates a directory
(if needed) and a file name to associate a unit with an external file.
The following sections discuss these methods.
7.5.4 Accessing Files: Implied and Explicit File and Pathnames
Most I/O operations involve a disk file, keyboard, or screen display. Other devices can also be used:
• Sockets can be read from or written to if a USEROPEN routine (usually written in C) is used to open the socket.
• Pipes opened for read and write access block (wait until data is available) if you issue a READ to an empty pipe.
• Pipes opened for read-only access return EOF if you issue a READ to an empty pipe.
For information on USEROPEN routines, see Section 7.9.
You can access the terminal screen or keyboard by using preconnected files, as described in Section 7.5. Otherwise, this chapter discusses disk files.
7–18 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
A complete file specification consists of a file name usually preceded by a pathname that specifies a directory. The pathname can be in one of two forms:
• An absolute pathname, where the directory is specified relative to the root directory. The first character is a slash ( / ). For example, the following directory and file name refers to the file named testdata in the
/usr/users/gdata directory:
/usr/users/gdata/testdata
• A relative pathname, where the specified directory is relative to the current directory. Relative pathnames do not begin with a slash ( / ). The following example uses a relative pathname from the current directory
/usr/users to refer to the same file testdata in the gdata/ subdirectory: gdata/testdata
Directory names and file names should not contain any operating system wildcard characters (such as *, ?, and the [ ] construct). You can use the tilde ( ~ ) character as the first character in a pathname to refer to a top-level directory as in the C shell.
When specifying files, keep in mind that trailing and leading blanks are removed from character expression names, but not from Hollerith (numeric array) names.
File names are case sensitive and can consist of uppercase and lowercase letters. For example, the following file names represent three different files: myfile.for
MYfile.for
MYFILE.for
You can associate a logical unit with a directory (if needed) and file name by using an environment variable assignment (see Section 7.5.7) or by using the
OPEN statement (see Section 7.5.6). When an OPEN statement provides a pathname that contains only a directory (no file name) and an environment variable provides the file name, the OPEN statement and environment variable can work together to provide the complete directory and file name.
7.5.5 How Compaq Fortran Applies a Default Pathname and File Name
Compaq Fortran provides the following possible ways of specifying all or part of a file specification (directory and file name), such as /usr/proj/testdata :
• The FILE specifier in an OPEN statement typically specifies only a file name (such as as testdata ) or contains both a directory and file name (such
/usr/proj/testdata ).
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–19
• The DEFAULTFILE specifier (a Compaq extension) in an OPEN statement typically specifies a pathname that contains only a directory
(such as /usr/proj/ ) or both a directory and file name (such as
/usr/proj/testdata ).
• If you used an implied OPEN or if the FILE specifier in an OPEN statement did not specify a file name, you can use an environment variable to specify a file name or a pathname that contains both a directory and file name (see Section 7.5.7).
Compaq Fortran recognizes environment variables for each logical I/O unit number in the form of FORTn, where n is the logical I/O unit number. If a file name is not specified in the OPEN statement and the corresponding
FORTn environment variable is not set for that unit number, Compaq Fortran generates a file name in the form fort.n , where n is the logical unit number.
Certain Compaq Fortran environment variables are recognized and preconnected files exist for certain unit numbers, as described in Section 7.5.7.
When using scratch files, you can use the TMPDIR environment variable to specify where the scratch file gets created (see Section 7.4.2).
Performing an implied OPEN means that the FILE and DEFAULTFILE specifier values are not specified and an environment variable is used, if present.
Examples of Applying Default Pathnames and File Names
For example, for an implied OPEN of unit number 3, Compaq Fortran would check the environment variable FORT3. If the environment variable FORT3 was set, its value is used. If it is not set, the system supplies the file name fort.3
.
In Table 7–7, assume the current directory is
1, as in the statement READ (1,100) .
/usr/smith and the I/O uses unit
7–20 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
Table 7–7 Examples of Applying Default Pathnames and File Names
OPEN FILE
Value
OPEN DEFAULTFILE
Value
FORT1 Environment
Variable Value not specified not specified not specified not specified not specified not checked not specified not specified not specified
/tmp
/tmp
/usr
/usr/group file.dat
/tmp/file.dat
not checked file.dat
not specified not specified test.dat
/usr/tmp/t.dat
not specified testdata lib/testdata not checked not checked not specified
Resulting Pathname
/usr/smith/fort.1
!
/usr/smith/test.dat
"
/usr/tmp/t.dat
#
/tmp/fort.1
$
/tmp/testdata %
/usr/lib/testdata &
/usr/group/file.dat
’
/tmp/file.dat
(
/usr/smith/file.dat
)
!
The current directory is used and the unit number determines the file name.
" The current directory is used and the environment variable provides the file name.
#
$
The environment variable provides both the directory and file name.
The directory is provided by the OPEN DEFAULTFILE specifier value, and the unit number determines the file name.
% The directory is provided by the OPEN DEFAULTFILE specifier value, and the environment variable provides the file name.
&
’
The directory is provided by the OPEN DEFAULTFILE specifier value, and the environment variable provides a subdirectory and file name.
The directory is provided by the OPEN DEFAULTFILE specifier value, and the file name is provided by the OPEN FILE specifier value.
( The directory and file name are provided by the OPEN FILE specifier value.
) The current directory is used and the OPEN FILE specifier value provides the file name.
When the resulting file pathname begins with a tilde character ( ~ ), C shell style pathname substitution is used (regardless of what shell is being used), such as a top-level directory (below the root). For additional information on tilde pathname substitution, see csh (1).
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–21
Rules for Applying Default Pathnames and File Names
Compaq Fortran determines file name and the directory path based on certain rules. It determines a file name string as follows:
• If the FILE specifier is present, its value is used.
• If the FILE specifier is not present, Compaq Fortran examines the corresponding environment variable.
If the corresponding environment variable is set, that value is used.
If the corresponding environment variable is not set, a file name in the form fort.n is used.
Once Compaq Fortran determines the resulting file name string, it determines the directory (which optionally precedes the file name) as follows:
• If the resulting file name string contains an absolute pathname, it is used and the DEFAULTFILE specifier, environment variable, and current directory values are ignored.
• If the resulting file name string does not contain an absolute pathname,
Compaq Fortran examines the DEFAULTFILE specifier and current directory value:
If the corresponding environment variable is set and specifies an absolute pathname, Compaq Fortran uses that value.
The DEFAULTFILE specifier value is examined and, if present,
Compaq Fortran uses its value.
If the DEFAULTFILE specifier is not present, Compaq Fortran uses the current directory as an absolute pathname.
7.5.6 Coding File Locations in an OPEN Statement
You can use the FILE and DEFAULTFILE specifiers of the OPEN statement to specify the complete definition of a particular file to be opened on a logical unit. (The Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual describes the OPEN statement in greater detail.) For example:
OPEN (UNIT=4, FILE=’/usr/users/smith/test.dat’, STATUS=’OLD’)
The file test.dat
in directory /usr/users/smith is opened on logical unit 4.
No defaults are applied since both the directory and file name were specified.
The value of the FILE specifier can be a character constant, variable, or expression.
7–22 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
In the following interactive example, the user supplies the file name and the
DEFAULTFILE specifier supplies the default values for the full pathname string. The file to be opened is in /usr/users/smith and is concatenated with the file name typed by the user into the variable DOC:
CHARACTER(LEN=9) DOC
WRITE (6,*) ’Type file name ’
READ (5,*) DOC
OPEN (UNIT=2, FILE=DOC, DEFAULTFILE=’/usr/users/smith’,STATUS=’OLD’)
A slash is appended to the end of the default file string if it does not have one.
For an example program that reads a typed file name, uses the typed name to open a file, and handles such errors as the ‘‘file not found’’ error, see
Example 8–2.
7.5.7 Using Environment Variables
You can use the environment variable mechanism of the operating system and shells to associate logical units with external files. For example, setting the environment variable FORT6 to a file lets you redirect file (see Table 7–5).
stdout to the specified
Compaq Fortran attempts to use certain environment variables in the absence of a file name.
When using scratch files, you can use the TMPDIR environment variable to specify where the scratch file gets created (see Section 7.4.2).
Setting and Unsetting Environment Variables
Before program execution, you can use shell commands to specify a value for an environment variable. This specified value might be a directory and/or file name of an external file you want to associate with a preconnected unit or a specific unit number.
With the C Shell, use the setenv command to set an environment variable:
% setenv FORT8 /usr/users/smith/test.dat
To remove the association of an environment variable and an external file with the C shell, use the unsetenv command.
% unsetenv FORT8
With the Bourne shell ( sh ) and Korn shell ( ksh ) and bash shell
(L*X only)
, use the export command and assignment command to set the environment variable:
$ export FORT8
$ FORT8=/usr/users/smith/test.dat
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–23
To remove the association of an environment variable and an external file with the Bourne shell or Korn shell or bash shell
(L*X only)
, use the unset command:
$ unset FORT8
Implied Compaq Fortran Logical Unit Numbers
The ACCEPT, PRINT, and TYPE statements, and the use of an asterisk ( * ) in place of a unit number in READ and WRITE statements, do not include an explicit logical unit number. Each of these Fortran 95/90 statements uses an implicit internal logical unit number and environment variable. Each environment variable is in turn associated by default with one of the Fortran
95/90 file names that are associated with standard I/O files. Table 7–8 shows these relationships.
Table 7–8 Implicit Compaq Fortran Logical Units
Compaq Fortran
Statement
Environment Variable
When -vms Specified
Environment Variable
When -vms Omitted
READ (*,f) iolist
READ f,iolist
ACCEPT f,iolist
WRITE (*,f) iolist
PRINT f,iolist
TYPE f,iolist
FOR_READ
FOR_READ
FOR_ACCEPT
FOR_PRINT
FOR_PRINT
FOR_TYPE
FORT5
FORT5
FORT5
FORT6
FORT6
FORT6
Standard I/O
File Name stdin stdin stdin stdout stdout stdout
You can change the file associated with these Compaq Fortran environment variables, as you would any other environment variable, by means of the environment variable assignment command. For example, with the C shell:
% setenv FOR_READ /usr/users/smith/test.dat
After executing the preceding command, the environment variable for the
READ statement using an asterisk refers to file test.dat
in directory
/usr/users/smith .
For More Information:
• On a list of Compaq Fortran I/O statements, see Table 7–1.
• On the shell commands you can use to set or unset environment variables, see Appendix B.
• On record I/O, see Section 7.8.
7–24 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
• On Compaq Fortran I/O statements and specifier values, including defaults, see Table 7–1.
• On statement syntax, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On the ERR and IOSTAT specifiers, see Chapter 8.
• On closing files, see Section 7.7.
7.6 Obtaining File Information: INQUIRE Statement
The INQUIRE statement returns information about a file and has three forms:
• Inquiry by unit
• Inquiry by file name
• Inquiry by output item list
7.6.1 Inquiry by Unit
An inquiry by unit is usually done for an opened (connected) file. An inquiry by unit causes the Compaq Fortran RTL to check whether the specified unit is connected or not. One of the following occurs:
• If the unit is connected:
The EXIST and OPENED specifier variables indicate a true value
The pathname and file name are returned in the NAME specifier variable (if the file is named)
Other information requested on the previously connected file is returned
Default values are usually returned for the INQUIRE specifiers also associated with the OPEN statement (see Table 7–6)
The RECL value unit for connected formatted files is always 1-byte units. For unformatted files, the RECL unit is 4-byte units, unless you specify the
Section 3.7).
-assume byterecl option to request 1-byte units (see
• If the unit is not connected:
The OPENED specifier indicates a false value
The unit NUMBER specifier variable is returned as a value of –1
Any other information returned will be undefined or default values for the various specifiers
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–25
For example, the following INQUIRE statement shows whether unit 3 has a file connected (OPENED specifier) in logical variable I_OPENED, the name
(case sensitive) in character variable I_NAME, and whether the file is opened for READ, WRITE, or READWRITE access in character variable I_ACTION:
INQUIRE (3, OPENED=I_OPENED, NAME=I_NAME, ACTION=I_ACTION)
7.6.2 Inquiry by File Name
An inquiry by name causes the Compaq Fortran RTL to scan its list of open files for a matching file name. One of the following occurs:
• If a match occurs:
The EXIST and OPENED specifier variables indicate a true value.
The pathname and file name are returned in the NAME specifier variable.
The UNIT number is returned in the NUMBER specifier variable.
Other information requested on the previously connected file is returned.
Default values are usually returned for the INQUIRE specifiers also associated with the OPEN statement (see Table 7–6).
The RECL value unit for connected formatted files is always 1-byte units. For unformatted files, the RECL unit is 4-byte units, unless you specify the
Section 3.7).
-assume byterecl option to request 1-byte units (see
• If no match occurs:
The OPENED specifier variable indicates a false value.
The unit NUMBER specifier variable is returned as a value of –1.
The EXIST specifier variable indicates (true or false) whether the named file exists on the device or not.
If the file does exist, the NAME specifier variable contains the pathname and file name.
Any other information returned will be default values for the various specifiers, based on any information specified when calling INQUIRE.
7–26 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
The following INQUIRE statement returns whether the file named log_file is a file connected in logical variable I_OPEN, whether the file exists in logical variable I_EXIST, and the unit number in integer variable I_NUMBER:
INQUIRE (FILE=’log_file’, OPENED=I_OPEN, EXIST=I_EXIST, NUMBER=I_NUMBER)
7.6.3 Inquiry by Output Item List
Unlike inquiry by unit or inquiry by name, inquiry by output item list does not attempt to access any external file. It returns the length of a record for a list of variables that would be used for unformatted WRITE, READ, and REWRITE statements (REWRITE is a Compaq Fortran extension).
The following INQUIRE statement returns the maximum record length of the variable list in variable I_RECLENGTH. This variable is then used to specify the RECL value in the OPEN statement:
INQUIRE (IOLENGTH=I_RECLENGTH) A, B, H
OPEN (FILE=’test.dat’, FORM=’UNFORMATTED’, RECL=I_RECLENGTH, UNIT=9)
For an unformatted file, the RECL value is returned using 4-byte units, unless you specify the -assume byterecl option to request 1-byte units.
For More Information:
• On the INQUIRE statement and its specifiers, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
• On record I/O, see Section 7.8.
• On OPEN statement specifiers, see Table 7–6.
• On the -assume byterecl option, see Section 3.7.
7.7 Closing a File: CLOSE Statement
Usually, any external file opened should be closed by the same program before it completes. The CLOSE statement disconnects the unit and its external file.
You must specify the unit number (UNIT specifier) to be closed.
You can also specify:
• Whether the file should be deleted or kept (STATUS specifier)
• Error handling information (ERR and IOSTAT specifiers)
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–27
To delete a file when closing it:
• In the OPEN statement, specify the ACTION keyword (such as
ACTION=’READ’). Avoid using the READONLY keyword, because a file opened using the READONLY keyword cannot be deleted when it is closed.
• In the CLOSE statement, specify the keyword STATUS=’DELETE’.
If you opened an external file and did an inquire by unit, but do not like the default value for the ACCESS specifier, you can close the file and then reopen it, explicitly specifying the ACCESS desired.
There usually is no need to close preconnected units. Internal files are neither opened nor closed.
For More Information:
• On a list of Compaq Fortran I/O statements, see Table 7–1.
• On opening files using a C routine (USEROPEN) and then using Compaq
Fortran I/O statements, see Section 7.9.
• On OPEN statement specifiers, see Section 7.5.2.
• On statement syntax and specifier values, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
7.8 Record Operations
After you open a file or use a preconnected file, you can use the following statements:
• READ, WRITE and PRINT to perform record I/O.
• BACKSPACE, ENDFILE, REWIND to set record position within the file.
• ACCEPT, DELETE, REWRITE, TYPE, DEFINE FILE, and FIND to perform various operations. These statements are Compaq extensions.
These statements are described in Section 7.2 and in the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
The record I/O statement must use the appropriate record I/O form (formatted, list-directed, namelist, or unformatted), as described in Section 7.3.
7–28 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.8.1 Record I/O Statement Specifiers
You can use the following specifiers with the READ and WRITE record I/O statements:
• UNIT specifies the unit number to or from which input or output will occur.
• END specifies a label to branch to if an error occurs; only applies to input statements like READ.
• ERR specifies a label to branch to if an error occurs.
• IOSTAT specifies an integer variable to contain the IOSTAT number if an error occurs.
• FMT specifies a label of a FORMAT statement.
• NML specifies a label of a NAMELIST statement.
• REC specifies a record number for direct access.
When using nonadvancing I/O, use the ADVANCE, EOR, and SIZE specifiers, as described in Section 7.8.4.
When using the REWRITE statement (a Compaq Fortran extension), you can use the UNIT, FMT, ERR, and IOSTAT specifiers.
For More Information:
• On specifier syntax and complete information, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
• On available record types, see Section 7.4.3 and Section 7.10.
• On the error-related record I/O specifiers ERR, END, and IOSTAT, see
Chapter 8.
• On the ADVANCE, EOR, and SIZE specifiers, see Section 7.8.4.
• Record positioning, see Section 7.8.3.
• Record I/O transfer, see Section 7.8.5.
• Record advancement, see Section 7.8.4.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–29
7.8.2 Record Access Modes and File Sharing
Record access refers to how records will be read from or written to a file, regardless of its organization. Record access is specified each time you open a file; it can be different each time. The type of record access permitted is determined by the combination of file organization and record type.
For instance, you can:
• Add records to a sequential file with ORGANIZATION= ’ SEQUENTIAL ’ and POSITION= ’ APPEND ’ (or use the Compaq extension
ACCESS= ’ APPEND ’ ).
• Add records sequentially by using multiple WRITE statements, close the file, and then open it again with ORGANIZATION= ’ SEQUENTIAL ’ and
ACCESS= ’ SEQUENTIAL ’ (or ACCESS= ’ DIRECT ’ if the sequential file has fixed-length records).
7.8.2.1 Sequential Access
Sequential access transfers records sequentially to or from files or I/O devices such as terminals. You can use sequential I/O with any type of supported file organization and record type.
If you select sequential access mode for files with sequential or relative organization, records are written to or read from the file starting at the beginning of the file and continuing through it, one record after another. A particular record can be retrieved only after all of the records preceding it have been read; new records can be written only at the end of the file.
7.8.2.2 Direct Access
Direct access transfers records selected by record number to and from either sequential files stored on disk with a fixed-length record type or relative organization files.
If you select direct access mode, you can determine the order in which records are read or written. Each READ or WRITE statement must include the relative record number, indicating the record to be read or written.
You can directly access a sequential disk file only if it contains fixed-length records. Because direct access uses cell numbers to find records, you can enter successive READ or WRITE statements requesting records that either precede or follow previously requested records. For example, the first of the following statements reads record 24; the second reads record 10:
READ (12,REC=24) I
READ (12,REC=10) J
7–30 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.8.2.3 Limitations of Record Access by File Organization and Record Type
You can use both access modes on sequential and relative files. However, direct access to a sequential organization file can only be done if the file resides on disk and contains fixed-length records.
Table 7–9 summarizes the types of access permitted for the various combinations of file organizations and record types.
Table 7–9 Allowed Record Access for File Organizations and Record Types
Organization
Sequential file
Relative file
1
Record Type
Fixed
Variable
Segmented
Stream
Stream_CR
Stream_LF
Fixed
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Sequential Access Direct Access
Yes
1
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
1
Direct access and relative files require that the file resides on a disk device.
7.8.2.4 File Sharing
Depending on the value specified by the ACTION (or READONLY) specifier in the OPEN statement, the file will be opened by your program for reading, writing, or both reading and writing records. This simply checks that the program itself executes the type of statements intended.
For performance reasons, record-locking and shared-file checking are not supported by the current version of Compaq Fortran on Compaq Tru64
UNIX and Linux systems. When you open the file, access is always granted, regardless of whether:
• The OPEN statement SHARED specifier was specified
• Other processes have already opened the file
Similarly, the UNLOCK statement is ignored using the current version of
Compaq Fortran.
You might open a file for writing records (or reading and writing records) and know another process might simultaneously have the file open and be writing records. In this case, you need to coordinate access times among those processes to handle the possibility of simultaneous WRITE and REWRITE statements on the same record positions.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–31
7.8.3 Specifying the Initial Record Position
When you open a disk file, you can use the OPEN statement’s POSITION specifier to request one of the following initial record positions within the file:
• The initial position before the first record (POSITION= ’ REWIND ’ ). A sequential access READ or WRITE statement will read or write the first record in the file.
• A point beyond the last record in the file (POSITION= ’ APPEND ’ ), just before the end-of-file record, if one exists. For a new file, this is the initial position before the first record (same as ’ REWIND ’ ). You might specify
’ APPEND ’ before you write records to an existing sequential file using sequential access.
• The current position (ASIS). This is usually used only to maintain the current record position when reconnecting a file. The second OPEN specifies the same unit number and specifies the same file name (or omits it), which leaves the file open, retaining the current record position.
However, if the second OPEN specifies a different file name for the same unit number, the file will be closed and then opened, causing a loss of current record position.
The following I/O statements allow you to change the current record position:
• REWIND sets the record position to the initial position before the first record. A sequential access READ or WRITE statement would read or write the first record in the file.
• BACKSPACE sets the record position to the previous record in a file. Using sequential access, if you wrote record 5, issued a BACKSPACE to that unit, and then read from that unit, you would read record 5.
• ENDFILE writes an end-of-file marker. This is typically done after writing records using sequential access just before you close the file.
Unless you use nonadvancing I/O (see Section 7.8.4), reading and writing records usually advances the current record position by one record. As discussed in Section 7.8.5, more than one record might be transferred using a single record I/O statement.
7–32 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.8.4 Advancing and Nonadvancing Record I/O
After you open a file, if you omit the ADVANCE specifier (or specify
ADVANCE= ’ YES ’ ) in READ and WRITE statements, advancing I/O (normal
FORTRAN-77 I/O) will be used for record access. When using advancing I/O:
• Record I/O statements transfer one entire record (or multiple records).
• Record I/O statements advance the current record position to a position before the next record.
You can request nonadvancing I/O for the file by specifying the ADVANCE= ’ NO ’ specifier in a READ and WRITE statement. You can use nonadvancing I/O only for sequential access to external files using formatted I/O (not list-directed or namelist).
When you use nonadvancing I/O, the current record position does not change, and part of the record might be transferred, unlike advancing I/O where one entire record or records are always transferred.
You can alternate between advancing and nonadvancing I/O by specifying different values for the ADVANCE specifier ( ’ YES ’ and ’ NO ’ ) in the READ and WRITE record I/O statements.
When reading records with either advancing or nonadvancing I/O, you can use the END branch specifier to branch to a specified label when the end of the file is read.
Because nonadvancing I/O might not read an entire record, it also supports an EOR branch specifier to branch to a specified label when the end of the record is read. If you omit the EOR and the IOSTAT specifiers when using nonadvancing I/O, an error results when the end-of-record is read.
When using nonadvancing input, you can use the SIZE specifier to return the number of characters read. For example, in the following READ statement,
SIZE=X (where variable X is an integer) returns the number of characters read in X and an end-of-record condition causes a branch to label 700:
150 FORMAT (F10.2, F10.2, I6)
READ (UNIT=20, FMT=150, SIZE=X, ADVANCE=’NO’, EOR=700) A, F, I
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–33
7.8.5 Record Transfer
I/O statements transfer all data as records. The amount of data that a record can contain depends on the following circumstances:
• With formatted I/O (except for fixed-length records), the number of items in the I/O statement and its associated format specifier jointly determine the amount of data to be transferred.
• With namelist and list-directed output, the items listed in the NAMELIST statement or I/O statement list (in conjunction with the NAMELIST or list-directed formatting rules) determine the amount of data to be transferred.
• With unformatted I/O (except for fixed-length records), the I/O statement alone specifies the amount of data to be transferred.
• When you specify fixed-length records (RECORDTYPE= ’ FIXED ’ ), all records are the same size. If the size of an I/O record being written is less than the record length (RECL), extra bytes are added (padding).
Typically, the data transferred by an I/O statement is read from or written to a single record. It is possible, however, for a single I/O statement to transfer data from or to more than one record, depending on the form of I/O used.
7.8.5.1 Input Record Transfer
When using advancing I/O, if an input statement specifies fewer data fields
(less data) than the record contains, the remaining fields are ignored.
If an input statement specifies more data fields than the record contains, one of the following occurs:
• For formatted input using advancing I/O, if the file was opened with
PAD= ’ YES ’ , additional fields are read as spaces. If the file is opened with
PAD= ’ NO ’ , an error occurs (the input statement should not specify more data fields than the record contains).
For formatted input using nonadvancing I/O (ADVANCE= ’ NO ’ ), an end-of-record (EOR) condition is returned. If the file was opened with
PAD= ’ YES ’ , additional fields are read as spaces.
• For list-directed input, another record is read.
• For namelist input, another record is read.
• For unformatted input, an error occurs.
7–34 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.8.5.2 Output Record Transfer
If an output statement specifies fewer data fields than the record contains (less data than required to fill a record), the following occurs:
• With fixed-length records (RECORDTYPE= ’ FIXED ’ ), all records are the same size. If the size of an I/O record being written is less than the record length (RECL), extra bytes are added (padding) in the form of spaces (for a formatted record) or zeros (for an unformatted record).
• With other record types, the fields present are written and those omitted are not written (might result in a short record).
If the output statement specifies more data than the record can contain, an error occurs, as follows:
• With formatted or unformatted output using fixed-length records.
If the items in the output statement and its associated format specifier result in a number of bytes that exceed the maximum record length
(RECL), an error occurs.
• With formatted or unformatted output not using fixed-length records.
If the items in the output statement and its associated format specifier result in a number of bytes that exceed the maximum record length
(RECL), the Compaq Fortran RTL attempts to increase the RECL value and write the longer record. To obtain the RECL value, use an INQUIRE statement.
• For list-directed output and namelist output, if the data specified exceeds the maximum record length (RECL), another record is written.
For More Information:
• On Compaq Fortran I/O statements, see Table 7–1.
• On record I/O specifiers, see Section 7.8.1.
• On statement syntax and specifier values, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
• On improving Compaq Fortran I/O performance, see Section 5.6.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–35
7.9 User-Supplied OPEN Procedures: USEROPEN Specifier
You can use the USEROPEN specifier in a Compaq Fortran OPEN statement to pass control to a routine that directly opens a file. The called routine can use system calls or library routines to open the file and establish special context that changes the effect of subsequent Compaq Fortran I/O statements.
The Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library (RTL) I/O support routines call the
USEROPEN function in place of the system calls usually used when the file is first opened for I/O. The USEROPEN specifier in an OPEN statement specifies the name of a function to receive control. The called function must open the file (or pipe) and return the file descriptor of the file when it returns control to the calling Compaq Fortran program.
When opening the file, the called function usually specifies options different from those provided by a normal OPEN statement.
You can obtain the file descriptor from the Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library
(RTL) for a specific unit number with the getfd routine, described in getfd (3f).
Although the called function can be written in other languages (such as
Fortran), C is usually the best choice for making system calls, such as open or create .
The USEROPEN specifier for the OPEN statement has the form:
USEROPEN = function-name
The function-name value represents the name of an external open function.
In the calling Compaq Fortran program, the function must be declared in an EXTERNAL statement. For example, the following Compaq Fortran code might be used to call the USEROPEN procedure UOPEN (known to the linker as uopen_ ):
.
.
EXTERNAL UOPEN
INTEGER UOPEN
.
OPEN (UNIT=10, FILE=’/usr/test/data’, STATUS=’NEW’, USEROPEN=UOPEN)
After the OPEN statement, the uopen_ function receives control. The function opens the file, may perform other operations, and subsequently returns control
(with the file descriptor) to the calling Compaq Fortran program.
7–36 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
If the USEROPEN function is written in C, declare it as a C function that returns a 4-byte integer (int) result to contain the file descriptor. For example:
!
"
# int uopen_ ( char *file_name, int *open_flags, int *create_mode, int *lun, int file_length);
!
"
#
$
%
&
The function definition and the arguments passed from the Compaq Fortran
RTL are as follows:
The function must be declared as a 4-byte integer (int).
The first argument is the pathname (includes the file name) to be opened.
The open flags are described in the header file or open (2).
/usr/include/sys/file.h
$ The create mode (protection needed when creating a file), is described in open (2).
%
&
The logical unit number.
The fifth (last) argument is the pathname length (hidden length argument of the pathname).
Of the arguments, the open system call (see open (2)) requires the passed pathname, the open flags (that define the type access needed, whether the file exists, and so on), and the create mode. The logical unit number specified in the Compaq Fortran OPEN statement is passed in case the called function needs it. The hidden length of the pathname is also passed.
When creating a new file, the
(see create create system call might be used in place of open
(2)). You can usually use other appropriate system calls or library routines within the called function; restrictions are listed in Section 7.9.1.
In most cases, the called function modifies the open flags argument passed by the Compaq Fortran RTL or uses a new value before the open (or create system call. After the called function opens the file, it must return control
) to the main Compaq Fortran program, which can do I/O with Fortran 95/90 statements to the file.
The open system call returns the file descriptor, which must be returned as a
4-byte integer to the Compaq Fortran program (and Compaq Fortran RTL).
After control (and the file descriptor) is returned from the called function, the main Compaq Fortran program can perform I/O to that logical unit with
Fortran 95/90 statements and eventually close it.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–37
If the USEROPEN function is written in Fortran, declare it as a FUNCTION with an INTEGER (KIND=4) result, perhaps with an interface block. In any case, the called function must return the file descriptor as a 4-byte integer to the calling Compaq Fortran program.
If your application requires that you use C to perform the file open and close, as well as all record operations, call the appropriate C procedure from the
Compaq Fortran program without using the Fortran OPEN statement. For more information on calling between Fortran and C, see Section 11.3.
7.9.1 Restrictions of Called USEROPEN Functions
The Compaq Fortran RTL uses exactly one file descriptor per logical unit, which must be returned by the called function. Because of this, only certain
Compaq Tru64 UNIX system calls or library routines can be used to open the file.
System calls and library routines that do not return a file descriptor include mknod (see mknod (2)) and fopen (see fopen (3)). For example, the fopen routine returns a file pointer instead of a file descriptor.
7.9.2 Example USEROPEN Program and Function
The following Compaq Fortran code calls the USEROPEN function named
UOPEN:
EXTERNAL UOPEN
INTEGER UOPEN
.
.
.
OPEN (UNIT=1,FILE=’ex1.dat’,STATUS=’NEW’,USEROPEN=UOPEN, ERR=9,IOSTAT=errnum)
If the default f90 options are used, the external name is passed using lowercase letters with an appended trailing underscore ( _ ). In the preceding example, the external function UOPEN would be known as uopen_ to the linker and must be declared in C as uopen_. The function might be given the file name uopen_.c
.
Compiling and Linking the C and Compaq Fortran Programs
Use a single f90 command to compile the called uopen_ C function and the Compaq Fortran calling program ex1.f
uopen_.c
. The same command also links both object files by using the appropriate libraries to create the file a.out
file, as follows:
% f90 ex1.f uopen_.c
7–38 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
If appropriate for large applications, you can specify object modules ( .o
files) on the f90 command line. For more information on retaining object files, see
Section 2.1.5.
Source Code for the C Function and Header File
Example 7–1 shows the C language function called header file.
uopen_ and its associated
Example 7–1 C Function Called by USEROPEN Procedure
/*
** File: uopen.h -- header file for uopen_.c
*/
#ifndef UOPEN
#define UOPEN 1
/*
**
** Function Prototypes
**
*/ int uopen_ ( char *file_name, /* access read: name of the file to open. */ int *open_flags, /* access read: READ/WRITE, see file.h or open(2)*/ int *create_mode, /* access read: set if new file (to be created).*/ int *lun, /* access read: logical unit file opened on.*/ int file_length); /* access read: number of characters in file_name*/
#endif
/* End of file uopen.h */
/*
** File: uopen_.c
*/
/*
** This routine opens a file using data passed by Compaq Fortran RTL.
**
** INCLUDE FILES
*/
#include <sys/types.h>
#include <sys/stat.h>
#include <sys/file.h>
#include "uopen.h"/* Include file for this module */ int uopen_ (file_name, open_flags, create_mode, lun, file_length)
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–39
Example 7–1 (Cont.) C Function Called by USEROPEN Procedure
/*
** Open a file using the parameters passed by the calling Compaq
** Fortran 95/90 program.
**
** Formal Parameters:
*/ char *file_name; /* access read: name of the file to open. */ int *open_flags; /* access read: READ/WRITE, see file.h */ int *create_mode; /* access read: set if new file (to be created). */ int *lun; /* access read: logical unit number file opened on. */ int file_length; /* access read: number of characters in file_name. */
/*
** Function Value/Completion Code
**
** Whatever is returned by open, is immediately returned to the
** Fortran OPEN.
the returned value is the following :
** value >= 0 is a valid fd.
** value < 0 is an error.
**
** Modify open flags (logical OR) to specify the file be opened for
** write access only, with records appended at the end (such as
** writing to a shared log file).
*/
{ int result ;
*open_flags =
O_CREAT |
O_WRONLY |
O_APPEND;
/* Function result value */ result = open (file_name, *open_flags, *create_mode) ; return (result) ; /* return file descriptor or error */
}/* End of routine uopen_ */
/* End of file uopen_.c */
Source Code for the Calling Compaq Fortran Program
Example 7–2 shows the Fortran 95/90 program that calls the uopen_ C function and then performs I/O.
7–40 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
Example 7–2 Compaq Fortran USEROPEN Main Calling Program
C
C Program EX1 opens a file using USEROPEN and writes records to it.
C It closes and re-opens the file (without USEROPEN) and reads 10 records.
PROGRAM EX1
EXTERNAL UOPEN
INTEGER ERRNUM, CTR, I
! The USEROPEN function.
1 FORMAT (I)
ERRNUM = 0
WRITE (6,*) ’EX1. Access data using formatted I/O.’
WRITE (6,*) ’EX1. Open file with USEROPEN and put some data in it.’
OPEN (UNIT=1, FILE=’ex1.dat’, STATUS=’NEW’, USEROPEN=UOPEN, ERR=9, &
IOSTAT=errnum)
DO CTR=1,10
WRITE (1,1) CTR
END DO
WRITE (6,*) ’EX1. Close and re-open without USEROPEN.’
CLOSE (UNIT=1)
OPEN (UNIT=1, FILE=’ex1.dat’, STATUS=’OLD’, FORM=’FORMATTED’, ERR=99, &
IOSTAT=errnum)
WRITE (6,*) ’EX1. Read and display what is in file.’
DO CTR=1,10
READ (1,1) i
WRITE (6,*) i
END DO
WRITE (6,*) ’EX1.
Successful if 10 records shown.’
CLOSE (UNIT=1,STATUS=’DELETE’)
STOP
9 WRITE (6,*) ’EX1.
Error on USEROPEN is ’, errnum
STOP
99 WRITE (6,*) ’EX1.
Error on 2nd open is ’, errnum
END PROGRAM EX1
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–41
7.10 Format of Compaq Fortran Record Types
For general information, see Section 7.4.3, Record Types, Record Overhead, and Maximum Record Length and Table 7–3, Compaq Fortran Record Types.
7.10.1 Fixed-Length Records
When you specify fixed-length records, all records in the file contain the same number of bytes. When you open a file that is to contain fixed-length records, you must specify the record size by using the RECL specifier. A sequentially organized file opened for direct access must contain fixed-length records, to allow the record position in the file to be computed correctly.
For relative files, the layout and overhead of fixed-length records depends on whether the program accessing the file was compiled with the -vms option or whether the -vms option was omitted:
• For relative files where the -vms record has no control information.
option was omitted (the default), each
• For relative files where the -vms option was specified, each record has one byte of control information at the beginning of the record.
Figure 7–1 shows the record layout of fixed-length records.
7–42 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
Figure 7–1 Fixed-Length Records
For all sequential files and for relative files where the −vms option was omitted:
User Data
Record length (RECL=value)
For relative files where the −vms option was specified:
User Data
1 Record length (RECL=value)
ZK−9819−GE
For More Information:
• On the default value and size limit for fixed-length records, see the RECL specifier for the OPEN statement in the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
7.10.2 Variable-Length Records
Variable-length records can contain any number of bytes up to a specified maximum record length, and apply only to sequential files.
Variable-length records are prefixed and suffixed by four bytes of control information containing length fields. The trailing length field allows a
BACKSPACE request to skip back over records efficiently. The 4-byte integer value stored in each length field indicates the number of data bytes (excluding overhead bytes) in that particular variable-length record.
The character count field of a variable-length record is available when you read the record by issuing a READ statement with a Q format descriptor. You can then use the count field information to determine how many bytes should be in an I/O list.
The record layout of variable-length records that are less than two gigabytes appears in Figure 7–2.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–43
Figure 7–2 Variable-Length Records Less Than 2 Gigabytes
Leading
Length
Field
User Data
Trailing
Length
Field
4 Record length (RECL=value) 4
ZK-9820-GE
For a record length greater than 2,147,483,639 bytes, the record is divided into subrecords. The subrecord can be of any length from 1 to 2,147,483,639, inclusive.
The sign bit of the leading length field indicates whether the record is continued or not. The sign bit of the trailing length field indicates the presence of a preceding subrecord. The position of the sign bit is determined by the endian format of the file.
A subrecord that is continued has a leading length field with a sign bit value of
1. The last subrecord that makes up a record has a leading length field with a sign bit value of 0. A subrecord that has a preceding subrecord has a trailing length field with a sign bit value of 1. The first subrecord that makes up a record has a trailing length field with a sign bit value of 0.
The record layout of variable-length records that are greater than two gigabytes appears in Figure 7–3.
7–44 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
Figure 7–3 Variable-Length Records Greater Than 2 Gigabytes
Leading
Length
Field
Sign bit=1
4
Subrecord 1 User Data
Subrecord length (from length field)
Trailing
Length
Field
Sign bit=0
4
Leading
Length
Field
Sign bit=1
4
Subrecords 2 to N-1 User Data
Subrecord length (from length field)
Trailing
Length
Field
Sign bit=1
4
Leading
Length
Field
Sign bit=0
Subrecord N User Data
Trailing
Length
Field
Sign bit=1
4 Subrecord length (from length field) 4
Files written with variable-length records by Compaq Fortran programs usually cannot be accessed as text files. Instead, use the Stream_LF record format for text files with records of varying length.
7.10.3 Segmented Records
A segmented record is a single logical record consisting of one or more variable-length, unformatted records in a sequentially organized disk file.
Unformatted data written to sequentially organized files using sequential access is stored as segmented records by default.
Segmented records are useful when you want to write exceptionally long records but cannot or do not wish to define one long variable-length record, perhaps because virtual memory limitations can prevent program execution.
By using smaller, segmented records, you reduce the chance of problems caused by virtual memory limitations on systems on which the program may execute.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–45
For disk files, the segmented record is a single logical record that consists of one or more segments. Each segment is a physical record. A segmented
(logical) record can exceed the absolute maximum record length (2.14 billion bytes), but each segment (physical record) individually cannot exceed the maximum record length.
To access an unformatted sequential file that contains segmented records, specify FORM= ’ UNFORMATTED ’ and RECORDTYPE= ’ SEGMENTED ’ when you open the file. Otherwise, the file may be processed erroneously.
As shown in Figure 7–4, the layout of segmented records consists of four bytes of control information followed by the user data.
Figure 7–4 Segmented Records
User Data
2 2 Record length (RECL=value)
Record size count (integer)
ZK−9821−GE
The control information consists of a 2-byte integer record size count (includes the two bytes used by the segment identifier), followed by a 2-byte integer segment identifier that identifies this segment as one of the following:
Identifier Value
0
1
2
3
Segment Identified
One of the segments between the first and last segments.
First segment.
Last segment.
Only segment.
If the specified record length is an odd number, the user data will be padded with a single blank (one byte), but this extra byte is not added to the 2-byte integer record size count.
7–46 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
7.10.4 Stream File Data
A Stream file is not grouped into records and contains no control information.
Stream files are used with CARRIAGECONTROL= ’ NONE ’ and contain character or binary data that is read or written only to the extent of the variables specified on the input or output statement.
The layout of a Stream file appears in Figure 7–5.
Figure 7–5 Stream File Records
User Data
ZK−9822−GE
E
O
F
7.10.5 Stream_CR and Stream_LF Records
A Stream_CR or Stream_LF record is a variable-length record whose length is indicated by explicit record terminators embedded in the data, not by a count. These terminators are automatically added when you write records to a stream-type file and are removed when you read records.
Each variety uses a different 1-byte record terminator:
• Stream_CR files use only a carriage-return as the terminator, so Stream_
CR files must not contain embedded carriage-return characters.
• Stream_LF files use only a line-feed (new line) as the terminator, so
Stream_LF files must not contain embedded line-feed (new line) characters.
This is the usual operating system text file record type.
The layout of Stream_CR and Stream_LF records appears in Figure 7–6.
Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O) 7–47
Figure 7–6 Stream_CR and Stream_LF Records
User Data
Record length (RECL=value) 1
ZK−9823−GE
7–48 Compaq Fortran Input/Output (I/O)
8
Run-Time Errors and Signals
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 8.1, Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library Default Error Processing
• Section 8.2, Handling Run-Time Errors
• Section 8.3, Signal Handling
• Section 8.4, Run-Time Error Messages
8.1 Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library Default Error
Processing
During execution, your program may encounter errors or exception conditions.
These conditions can result from any of the following:
• Errors that occur during I/O operations
• Invalid input data
• Argument errors in calls to the mathematical library
• Arithmetic errors
• Other system-detected errors
The Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library (RTL) generates appropriate messages and takes action to recover from errors whenever possible.
A default action is defined for each error recognized by the Compaq Fortran
RTL. The default actions described throughout this chapter occur unless overridden by explicit error-processing methods.
The way in which the Compaq Fortran RTL actually processes errors depends upon the following factors:
• The severity of the error. For instance, the program usually continues executing when an error message with a severity level of warning or info
(informational) is detected.
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–1
• For certain errors associated with I/O statements, whether or not an I/O error-handling specifier was specified.
• For certain errors, whether or not the default action of an associated signal was changed.
• For certain errors related to arithmetic operations (including floatingpoint exceptions), compilation options can determine whether the error is reported and the severity of the reported error.
How arithmetic exception conditions are reported and handled depends on the cause of the exception and how the program was compiled. Unless the program was compiled to handle exceptions, the exception might not be reported until
after the instruction that caused the exception condition. The following f90 command-line options are related to handling errors and exceptions:
• The -check bounds , -check overflow , and -check underflow options generate extra code to catch certain conditions. For example, the -check overflow option generates extra code to catch integer overflow conditions.
• The -check noformat , -check nooutput_conversion , and -check nopower options reduce the severity level of the associated run-time error to allow program continuation.
• The -fpen options and the -check underflow option control the handling and reporting of floating-point arithmetic exceptions at run time.
• The -synchronous_exceptions option (and certain -fpen option) influence the reporting of floating-point arithmetic exceptions at run time.
• The -warn xxxx , -u , -nowarn -w , and -w1 options control compile-time warning messages, which in some circumstances can help determine the cause of a run-time error.
For More Information:
• On the f90 command -fpen options and the for_set_fpe routine that control how floating-point exceptional conditions are handled at run time, see Section 3.44 and Chapter 14.
• On the -check bounds option, see Section 3.23.
• On the -check noformat option, see Section 3.24.
• On the -check nooutput_conversion option, see Section 3.27.
• On the -check overflow option, see Section 3.28.
• On the -check nopower option, see Section 3.25.
• On the -check underflow option, see Section 3.29.
8–2 Run-Time Errors and Signals
• On the f90 options that control warning messages, see Section 3.99.
• On IEEE floating-point data types and exceptional values, see Section 9.4.
• On f90 and fort command-line options and their categories, see Table 3–1.
• On Compaq Fortran intrinsic data types and their ranges, see Chapter 9.
8.1.1 Run-Time Message Format
When errors occur during program execution (run time) of a scalar
(nonparallel) program, the Compaq Fortran RTL issues diagnostic messages.
These run-time messages have the following format: forrtl: severity (nnn): message-text
Run-time messages provide the following information:
Contents Information Given forrtl severity
Identifies the source as the Compaq Fortran RTL.
The severity levels are: severe , error , warning , or info . (See
Table 8–1, Severity Levels of Run-Time Messages.) nnn This is the message number, also the IOSTAT value for I/O statements.
message_text Explains the event that caused the message.
Table 8–1 explains the severity levels of run-time messages, in the order of greatest to least severity.
Table 8–1 Severity Levels of Run-Time Messages
Severity Description severe error warning info
Must be corrected. The program’s execution is terminated when the error is encountered, unless the program’s I/O statements use the END, EOR, or ERR branch specifiers to transfer control, perhaps to a routine that uses the IOSTAT specifier (see Section 8.2.1 and Section 8.2.2).
Should be corrected. The program might continue execution, but the output from this execution may be incorrect.
Should be investigated. The program continues execution, but output from this execution may be incorrect.
For informational purposes only. The program continues.
On Tru64 UNIX systems, for severe errors stack trace information is produced by default, unless the environment variable FOR_DISABLE_STACK_TRACE is set.
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–3
If symbols are in the image (that is, if the command-line option -g1 or higher is set and the image is not stripped), the stack trace information contains program counters set to symbolic information. Otherwise, the information contains merely hexadecimal program counter information.
In some cases, stack trace information is also produced by the compiled code at run time to provide details about the creation of array temporaries.
If FOR_DISABLE_STACK_TRACE is set, no stack trace information is produced.
Stack trace information is not produced on Linux Alpha systems.
See Example 8–1.
Example 8–1 Example of Stack Trace Information program ovf real*4 x(5),y(5) integer*4 i x(1) = -1e32 x(2) = 1e38 x(3) = 1e38 x(4) = 1e38 x(5) = -36.0
!
do i=1,5 y(i) = 100.0*(x(i)) print *, ’x = ’, x(i), ’ x*100.0 = ’,y(i) end do end
> f90 -O0 ovf.for -o ovf.exe
> ovf.exe
x = -1.0000000E+32 x*100.0 = -1.0000000E+34 " forrtl: error (72): floating overflow
0: _call_remove_gp_range [0x3ff81a6c374]
1: _call_remove_gp_range [0x3ff81a74464]
2: _call_remove_gp_range [0x3ff800d8c60]
3: ovf_ [ovf.for: 12, 0x1200019c4]
4: main [for_main.c: 203, 0x1200018dc]
5: __start [0x120001858]
Abort process
(continued on next page)
8–4 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Example 8–1 (Cont.) Example of Stack Trace Information
> strip ovf.exe
> ovf.exe
x = -1.0000000E+32 x*100.0 = -1.0000000E+34 # forrtl: error (72): floating overflow
Symbol table not present, doing non-symbolic traceback
0: [0x3ff81a6c374]
1: [0x3ff81a74464]
2: [0x3ff800d8c60]
3: [0x1200019c4]
4: [0x1200018dc]
5: [0x120001858]
Abort process
> setenv FOR_DISABLE_STACK_TRACE "TRUE"
> ovf.exe
x = -1.0000000E+32 x*100.0 = -1.0000000E+34 $ forrtl: error (72): floating overflow
Abort process
!
"
#
$
Sample program that generates an error (at line 12).
Stack trace information when the symbol table is present.
Stack trace information when the image is stripped.
No stack trace information, because the environment variable is set.
FOR_DISABLE_STACK_TRACE
8.1.2 Message Catalog Location
The Compaq Fortran RTL uses a message catalog file to store the text associated with each run-time message. When a run-time error occurs, the
Compaq Fortran RTL uses the environment variable NLSPATH to locate the message catalog file, from which it obtains the text of the appropriate message.
If the file is not found at the position indicated by for the message catalog at the following location:
NLSPATH , the RTL searches
/usr/lib/nls/msg/en_US.ISO8859-1/for_msg.cat
(TU*X only)
/usr/lib/for_msg.cat
(L*X only)
Before executing a Compaq Fortran program on a system where Compaq
Fortran is not installed, you need to install the appropriate Compaq Fortran run-time subset. For instructions on installing Compaq Fortran run-time support, see the Compaq Fortran Installation Guide for Tru64 UNIX Systems.
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–5
When a run-time error occurs on a system where the message file is not found, the following messages may appear on a Tru64 UNIX system: forrtl: info: Fortran error message number is nnn.
forrtl: warning: Could not open message catalog: for_msg.cat.
forrtl: info: Check environment variable NLSPATH and protection of usr/lib/nls/msg/en_US.ISO8859-1/for_msg.cat
The Compaq Fortran RTL returns an error number (displayed after the severity level) that the calling program can use with an IOSTAT variable to handle various I/O conditions, as described in Section 8.2.2.
For More Information:
• On NLSPATH , see the reference page environ (5).
8.1.3 Values Returned to the Shell at Program Termination
A Compaq Fortran program can terminate in one of several ways:
• The program runs to normal completion. A value of zero is returned to the shell.
• The program stops with a STOP or a PAUSE statement. A value of zero is returned to the shell.
• The program stops because of a signal that is caught but does not allow the program to continue. A value of 1 is returned to the shell.
• The program stops because of a severe run-time error. The error number for that run-time error is returned to the shell. Error numbers are listed in
Table 8–3.
• The program stops with a CALL EXIT statement. The value passed to
EXIT is returned to the shell.
8.1.4 Forcing a Core Dump for Severe Errors
You can force a core dump for severe errors that do not usually cause a file to be created. Before running the program, set the core decfort_dump_flag environment variable to any of the common TRUE values (Y, y, Yes, yEs, True, and so forth) to cause severe errors to create a following C shell command sets the core file. For instance, the decfort_dump_flag environment variable:
% setenv decfort_dump_flag y
The core file is written to the current directory and can be examined using a debugger.
8–6 Run-Time Errors and Signals
For More Information:
• On the shell commands you can use to set or unset environment variables, see Appendix B.
• On core files
(TU*X only)
, see core (4).
• On language syntax, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On file operations, see Section 7.5, Section 7.6, and Section 7.7.
• On record operations, see Section 7.8.
8.2 Handling Run-Time Errors
Whenever possible, the Compaq Fortran RTL does certain error handling, such as generating appropriate messages and taking necessary action to recover from errors. You can explicitly supplement or override default actions by using the following methods:
• To transfer control to error-handling code within the program, use the
ERR, EOR, and END branch specifiers in I/O statements (Section 8.2.1)
• To identify Fortran-specific I/O errors based on the value of Compaq
Fortran RTL error codes, use the I/O status specifier (IOSTAT) in I/O statements (or call the ERRSNS subroutine) (Section 8.2.2)
• Obtain system-level error codes by using the appropriate 3f library routines
(Section 8.2.3)
• For certain error conditions, use the signal handling facility to change the default action to be taken (Section 8.3)
These error-processing methods are complementary; you can use any or all of them within the same program to obtain Compaq Fortran run-time and
Compaq Tru64 UNIX system error codes.
If your program generates an exception, use the -synchronous_exceptions option and recompile and relink your application (see Section 4.9).
8.2.1 Using the END, EOR, and ERR Branch Specifiers
When a severe error occurs during Compaq Fortran program execution, the default action is to display an error message and terminate the program. To override this default action, there are three branch specifiers you can use in
I/O statements to transfer control to a specified point in the program:
• The END branch specifier handles an end-of-file condition.
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–7
• The EOR branch specifier handles an end-of-record condition for nonadvancing reads.
• The ERR branch specifier handles all error conditions.
If you use the END, EOR, or ERR branch specifiers, no error message is displayed and execution continues at the designated statement, usually an error-handling routine.
You might encounter an unexpected error that the error-handling routine cannot handle. In this case, do one of the following:
• Modify the error-handling routine to display the error message number
• Remove the END, EOR, or ERR branch specifiers from the I/O statement that causes the error
After you modify the source code, compile, link, and run the program to display the error message. For example:
READ (8,50,ERR=400)
If any severe error occurs during execution of this statement, the Compaq
Fortran RTL transfers control to the statement at label 400. Similarly, you can use the END specifier to handle an end-of-file condition that might otherwise be treated as an error. For example:
READ (12,70,END=550)
When using nonadvancing I/O, use the EOR specifier to handle the end-ofrecord condition. For example:
150 FORMAT (F10.2, F10.2, I6)
READ (UNIT=20, FMT=150, SIZE=X, ADVANCE=’NO’, EOR=700) A, F, I
You can also use ERR as a specifier in an OPEN, CLOSE, or INQUIRE statement. For example:
OPEN (UNIT=10, FILE=’FILNAM’, STATUS=’OLD’, ERR=999)
If an error is detected during execution of this OPEN statement, control transfers to the statement at label 999.
For More Information:
• On advancing and nonadvancing record I/O, see Section 7.8.4.
• On language syntax, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On file operations, see Section 7.5, Section 7.6, and Section 7.7.
• On record operations, see Section 7.8.
8–8 Run-Time Errors and Signals
8.2.2 Using the IOSTAT Specifier
You can use the IOSTAT specifier to continue program execution after an I/O error and to return information about I/O operations, whether the program is executing as a scalar or parallel program (I/O is done in a scalar fashion). As described in Table 8–3, certain errors are not returned in IOSTAT.
Although the IOSTAT specifier transfers control, it can only return information returned by the Compaq Fortran RTL.
The IOSTAT specifier can supplement or replace the END, EOR, and ERR branch transfers. Execution of an I/O statement containing the IOSTAT specifier suppresses the display of an error message and defines the specified integer variable, array element, or scalar field reference as one of the following:
• A value of –2 if an end-of-record condition occurs with nonadvancing reads.
• A value of –1 if an end-of-file condition occurs.
• A value of 0 for normal completion (not an error condition, end-of-file, or end-of-record condition).
• A positive integer value if an error condition occurs. (This value is one of the Fortran-specific IOSTAT numbers listed in Table 8–3.)
Following the execution of the I/O statement and assignment of an IOSTAT value, control transfers to the END, EOR, or ERR statement label, if any. If there is no control transfer, normal execution continues.
You can include /usr/include/foriosdef.f
definitions for the values of IOSTAT.
in your program to obtain symbolic
Example 8–2 uses the IOSTAT specifier and the
OPEN statement error (in the FILE specifier).
foriosdef.f
file to handle an
Example 8–2 Error Handling OPEN Statement File Name
CHARACTER(LEN=40) :: FILNM
INCLUDE ’/usr/include/foriosdef.f’
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–9
Example 8–2 (Cont.) Error Handling OPEN Statement File Name
!
DO I=1,4
FILNM = ’’
WRITE (6,*) ’Type file name ’
READ (5,*) FILNM
OPEN (UNIT=1, FILE=FILNM, STATUS=’OLD’, IOSTAT=IERR, ERR=100)
WRITE (6,*) ’Opening file: ’, FILNM
(process the input file)
CLOSE (UNIT=1)
STOP
100 IF (IERR .EQ. FOR$IOS_FILNOTFOU) THEN
WRITE (6,*) ’File: ’, FILNM, ’ does not exist ’
ELSE IF (IERR .EQ. FOR$IOS_FILNAMSPE) THEN
WRITE (6,*) ’File: ’, FILNM, ’ was bad, enter new file name’
ELSE
PRINT *, ’Unrecoverable error, code =’, IERR
STOP
END IF
END DO
WRITE (6,*) ’File not found. Type ls to find file and run again’
END PROGRAM
Another way to obtain information about an error is the ERRSNS subroutine
(a Compaq extension), which allows you to obtain the last I/O system error code associated with a Compaq Fortran RTL error (see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual).
8.2.3 Using the 3f Library Routines to Return Operating System Errors
You can obtain the most recent operating system error codes or display associated error messages by using the following 3f library routines:
• The ierrno routine returns the most recent error code, as described in ierrno (3f). For a list of operating system error codes, see errno (2).
• The gerror described in and perror gerror routines display a system error message, as
(3f) and perror (3f).
For More Information:
• On using the 3f routines, see Chapter 12 and intro (3f).
• On language syntax, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On file operations, see Section 7.5, Section 7.6, and Section 7.7.
• On record operations, see Section 7.8.
8–10 Run-Time Errors and Signals
• On 3f library routines, see Chapter 12.
8.3 Signal Handling
A signal is an abnormal event generated by one of various sources, such as:
• A user of a terminal
• Program or hardware error
• Request of another program
• When a process is stopped to allow access to the control terminal
You can optionally set certain events to issue signals, for example:
• When a process resumes after being stopped
• When the status of a child process changes
• When input is ready at the terminal
Some signals terminate the receiving process if no action is taken (optionally creating a core file), while others are simply ignored unless the process has requested otherwise.
Except for certain signals, calling the signal or sigaction routine (see signal (3f)) allows specified signals to be ignored or causes an interrupt
(transfer of control) to the location of a user-written signal handler.
You can establish one of the following actions for a signal with a call to signal :
• Ignore the specified signal (identified by number).
• Use the default action for the specified signal, which can reset a previously established action.
• Transfer control from the specified signal to a procedure to receive the signal, specified by name.
Calling the signal routine lets you change the action for a signal, such as intercepting an operating system signal and preventing the process from being stopped.
Table 8–2 shows the signals that the Compaq Fortran RTL arranges to catch when a program is started.
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–11
Table 8–2 Signals Caught by the Compaq Fortran Run-Time Library
Signal Compaq Fortran RTL Message
SIGFPE
SIGILL
(L*X only)
SIGINT
SIGIOT
SIGQUIT
SIGSEGV
SIGTERM
SIGTRAP
(TU*X only)
Floating-point exception (number 75)
Illegal instruction (SIGILL) and related SIGILL messages indicate various breakpoint exceptions (numbers 130-139)
Process interrupted (number 69)
IOT trap signal (number 76)
Process quit (number 79)
Segmentation fault (number 174)
Process killed (number 78)
Array index out of bounds (SIGTRAP) and related SIGTRAP messages indicate various breakpoint exceptions (numbers 130-139)
Calling the signal routine (specifying the numbers for these signals) results in overwriting the signal-handling facility set up by the Compaq Fortran RTL.
The only way to restore the default action is to save the returned value from the first call to signal .
When using a debugger, it may be necessary to enter a command to allow the Compaq Fortran RTL to receive and handle the appropriate signals, as described in Section 4.5.
For More Information:
• On the calling syntax of the signal jacket routine, see signal (3f).
• On using the 3f routines, such as signal , see Chapter 12 and intro (3f).
• On all signal names, their respective numbers, and a brief description of each signal, see signal (3) reference page or /usr/include/signal.h
.
8.4 Run-Time Error Messages
Table 8–3 lists the errors processed by the Compaq Fortran RTL. For each error, the table provides the error number, the severity code, error message text, condition symbol name, and a detailed description of the errors.
To define the condition symbol values (PARAMETER statements) in your program, include the following file:
/usr/include/foriosdef.f
8–12 Run-Time Errors and Signals
As described in Table 8–1, the severity of the message determines whether program execution continues ( info and warning ), the results may be incorrect
( error ), or program execution stops unless a recovery method is specified
( severe ).
When a severe error occurs for which no recovery method is specified, an error message is displayed and execution stops. To prevent program termination, you must include either an appropriate I/O error-handling specifier (see
Section 8.2.1 and Section 8.2.2) and recompile or, for certain errors, change the default action of a signal (see Section 8.3) before you run the program again.
In Table 8–3, the first column lists error numbers returned to IOSTAT variables when an I/O error is detected. The Compaq Fortran error numbers are compatible with Compaq Fortran 77. Certain messages are specific to
Compaq Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, including most signalrelated errors (such as error number 79,
130-139) listed in Table 8–3.
Process quit (SIGQUIT) and errors
The first line of the second column provides the message as it is displayed
(following forrtl: ), including the severity level, message number, and the message text. The following lines of the second column contain the status condition symbol (such as FOR$IOS_INCRECTYP) and an explanation of the message.
This table is also provided in the online release notes file in text format. To view the explanation of a message, use the more command to display the file and enter a slash ( / ) followed by the number or part of the message text (to initiate a search). For example, the following more command searches for number 68 ( Variable format expression value error ):
% more /68
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–13
Table 8–3 Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
None 1
None
1
None
1
None 1
1 1
8
9 info: Fortran error message number is nnn
The Compaq Fortran message catalog file was not found on this system. For information about the message file location, see Section 8.1.2 or the Compaq Fortran
Installation Guide for Tru64 UNIX Systems. This error has no condition symbol.
warning: Could not open message catalog: for_msg.cat
The Compaq Fortran message catalog file was not found on this system. See
Section 8.1.2 or the Compaq Fortran Installation Guide for Tru64 UNIX Systems for more information. This error has no condition symbol.
info: Check environment variable NLSPATH and protection of path-
name/for_msg.dat
The Compaq Fortran message catalog file was not found. See Section 8.1.2 or the
Compaq Fortran Installation Guide for Tru64 UNIX Systems for more information.
This error has no condition symbol.
Insufficient memory to open Fortran RTL catalog: message 41
The Compaq Fortran message catalog file could not be opened because of insufficient virtual memory. To overcome this problem, increase the per-process data limit by using the limit (C shell) or ulimit (Bourne and Korn and bash (L*X only) shells) commands
(see Section 1.1) before running the program again.
For more information, see error 41. This error has no condition symbol.
severe (1): Not a Fortran-specific error
FOR$IOS_NOTFORSPE. An error in the user program or in the RTL was not a
Compaq Fortran-specific error and was not reportable through any other Compaq
Fortran run-time messages. If you call ERRSNS, an error of this kind returns a value of 1 (for more information on the ERRSNS subroutine, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual).
severe (8): Internal consistency check failure
FOR$IOS_BUG_CHECK. Internal error. Please check that the program is correct.
Recompile if an error existed in the program. If this error persists, submit a problem report.
severe (9): Permission to access file denied
FOR$IOS_PERACCFIL. Check the mode (protection) of the specified file. Make sure the correct file was being accessed. Change the protection, specified file, or process used before rerunning program.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
8–14 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
10 severe (10): Cannot overwrite existing file
FOR$IOS_CAOVEEXI. Specified file xxx already exists when OPEN statement specified STATUS= ’ NEW ’ (create new file) using I/O unit x. Make sure correct file name, directory path, unit, and so forth were specified in the source program.
Decide whether to:
• Rename or remove the existing file before rerunning the program.
• Modify the source file to specify different file specification, I/O unit, or OPEN statement STATUS.
11
17
18 info (11) 1 : Unit not connected
FOR$IOS_UNINOTCON. The specified unit was not open at the time of the attempted
I/O operation. Check if correct unit number was specified. If appropriate, use an
OPEN statement to explicitly open the file (connect the file to the unit number).
severe (17): Syntax error in NAMELIST input
FOR$IOS_SYNERRNAM. The syntax of input to a namelist-directed READ statement was incorrect.
severe (18): Too many values for NAMELIST variable
FOR$IOS_TOOMANVAL. An attempt was made to assign too many values to a variable during a namelist READ statement.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–15
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
19 severe (19): Invalid reference to variable in NAMELIST input
FOR$IOS_INVREFVAR. One of the following conditions occurred:
• The variable was not a member of the namelist group.
• An attempt was made to subscript a scalar variable.
• A subscript of the array variable was out-of-bounds.
• An array variable was specified with too many or too few subscripts for the variable.
• An attempt was made to specify a substring of a noncharacter variable or array name.
• A substring specifier of the character variable was out-of-bounds.
• A subscript or substring specifier of the variable was not an integer constant.
• An attempt was made to specify a substring by using an unsubscripted array variable.
20
21
22 severe (20): REWIND error
FOR$IOS_REWERR. One of the following conditions occurred:
• The file was not a sequential file.
• The file was not opened for sequential or append access.
• The Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system detected an error condition during execution of a REWIND statement.
severe (21): Duplicate file specifications
FOR$IOS_DUPFILSPE. Multiple attempts were made to specify file attributes without an intervening close operation. A DEFINE FILE statement was followed by another
DEFINE FILE statement or an OPEN statement severe (22): Input record too long
FOR$IOS_INPRECTOO. A record was read that exceeded the explicit or default record length specified when the file was opened. To read the file, use an OPEN statement with a RECL= value (record length) of the appropriate size.
(continued on next page)
8–16 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
23
24
1 severe (23): BACKSPACE error
FOR$IOS_BACERR. The Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system detected an error condition during execution of a BACKSPACE statement.
severe (24): End-of-file during read
FOR$IOS_ENDDURREA. One of the following conditions occurred:
• A Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system end-of-file condition was encountered during execution of a READ statement that did not contain an END, ERR, or IOSTAT specification.
• An end-of-file record written by the ENDFILE statement was encountered during execution of a READ statement that did not contain an END, ERR, or IOSTAT specification.
• An attempt was made to read past the end of an internal file character string or array during execution of a READ statement that did not contain an END, ERR, or IOSTAT specification.
25
26
27
This error is returned by END and ERRSNS.
severe (25): Record number outside range
FOR$IOS_RECNUMOUT. A direct access READ, WRITE, or FIND statement specified a record number outside the range specified when the file was opened.
severe (26): OPEN or DEFINE FILE required
FOR$IOS_OPEDEFREQ. A direct access READ, WRITE, or FIND statement was attempted for a file when no prior DEFINE FILE or OPEN statement with
ACCESS= ’ DIRECT ’ was performed for that file.
severe (27): Too many records in I/O statement
FOR$IOS_TOOMANREC. An attempt was made to do one of the following:
• Read or write more than one record with an ENCODE or DECODE statement.
• Write more records than existed.
28 severe (28): CLOSE error
FOR$IOS_CLOERR. An error condition was detected by the Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system during execution of a CLOSE statement.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–17
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
29
30 severe (29): File not found
FOR$IOS_FILNOTFOU. A file with the specified name could not be found during an open operation.
severe (30): Open failure
FOR$IOS_OPEFAI. An error was detected by the Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system while attempting to open a file in an OPEN, INQUIRE, or other I/O statement. This message is issued when the error condition is not one of the more common conditions for which specific error messages are provided. It can occur when an OPEN operation was attempted for one of the following:
• Segmented file that was not on a disk or a raw magnetic tape
• Standard I/O file that had been closed
31 severe (31): Mixed file access modes
FOR$IOS_MIXFILACC. An attempt was made to use any of the following combinations:
• Formatted and unformatted operations on the same unit
• An invalid combination of access modes on a unit, such as direct and sequential
• A Compaq Fortran RTL I/O statement on a logical unit that was opened by a program coded in another language
32
33 severe (32): Invalid logical unit number
FOR$IOS_INVLOGUNI. A logical unit number greater than 2,147,483,647 or less than zero was used in an I/O statement.
severe (33): ENDFILE error
FOR$IOS_ENDFILERR. One of the following conditions occurred:
• The file was not a sequential organization file with variable-length records.
• The file was not opened for sequential or append access.
• An unformatted file did not contain segmented records.
• The Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system detected an error during execution of an
ENDFILE statement.
(continued on next page)
8–18 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
34
35
36
37
38
39
40 severe (34): Unit already open
FOR$IOS_UNIALROPE. A DEFINE FILE statement specified a logical unit that was already opened.
severe (35): Segmented record format error
FOR$IOS_SEGRECFOR. An invalid segmented record control data word was detected in an unformatted sequential file. The file was probably either created with RECORDTYPE= ’ FIXED ’ or ’ VARIABLE ’ in effect, or was created by a program written in a language other than Fortran.
severe (36): Attempt to access non-existent record
FOR$IOS_ATTACCNON. A direct-access READ or FIND statement attempted to access beyond the end of a relative file (or a sequential file on disk with fixed-length records) or access a record that was previously deleted in a relative file.
severe (37): Inconsistent record length
FOR$IOS_INCRECLEN. An attempt was made to open a direct access file without specifying a record length.
severe (38): Error during write
FOR$IOS_ERRDURWRI. The Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system detected an error condition during execution of a WRITE statement.
severe (39): Error during read
FOR$IOS_ERRDURREA. The Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system detected an error condition during execution of a READ statement.
severe (40): Recursive I/O operation
FOR$IOS_RECIO_OPE. While processing an I/O statement for a logical unit, another
I/O operation on the same logical unit was attempted, such as a function subprogram that performs I/O to the same logical unit that was referenced in an expression in an
I/O list or variable format expression.
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–19
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
41
42
43
44
45 severe (41): Insufficient virtual memory
FOR$IOS_INSVIRMEM. The Compaq Fortran RTL attempted to exceed its available virtual memory while dynamically allocating space. To overcome this problem, increase the per-process data limit by using the limit (C shell) or ulimit (Bourne and
Korn and bash (L*X only) shell) commands before you run this program again (see
Section 1.1).
To determine whether the maximum per-process data size is already allocated, check the value of the maxdsiz parameter in the sysconfigtab or system configuration file. If necessary, increase its value. Changes to do not take effect until the system has been rebooted (you do not need to rebuild the kernel if you modify sysconfigtab).
For more information about system configuration parameters on Tru64 UNIX systems, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX System Tuning and Performance Management guide.
Before you try to run this program again, wait until the new system resources take effect.
severe (42): No such device
FOR$IOS_NO_SUCDEV. A pathname included an invalid or unknown device name when an OPEN operation was attempted.
severe (43): File name specification error
FOR$IOS_FILNAMSPE. A pathname or file name given to an OPEN or INQUIRE statement was not acceptable to the Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system.
severe (44): Inconsistent record type
FOR$IOS_INCRECTYP. The RECORDTYPE value in an OPEN statement did not match the record type attribute of the existing file that was opened.
severe (45): Keyword value error in OPEN statement
FOR$IOS_KEYVALERR. An improper value was specified for an OPEN or CLOSE statement specifier requiring a value.
(continued on next page)
8–20 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
46 severe (46): Inconsistent OPEN/CLOSE parameters
FOR$IOS_INCOPECLO. Specifications in an OPEN or CLOSE statement were inconsistent. Some invalid combinations follow:
• READONLY or ACTION= ’ READ ’ with STATUS= ’ NEW ’ or
STATUS= ’ SCRATCH ’
• READONLY with STATUS= ’ REPLACE ’ , ACTION= ’ WRITE ’ , or ACTION= ’ READWRITE ’
• ACCESS= ’ APPEND ’ with READONLY, ACTION= ’ READ ’ , STATUS= ’ NEW ’ , or
STATUS= ’ SCRATCH ’
• DISPOSE= ’ SAVE ’ , ’ PRINT ’ , or ’ SUBMIT ’ with STATUS= ’ SCRATCH ’
• DISPOSE= ’ DELETE ’ with READONLY
• CLOSE statement STATUS= ’ DELETE ’ with OPEN statement READONLY
• ACCESS= ’ APPEND ’ with STATUS= ’ REPLACE ’
• ACCESS= ’ DIRECT ’ or ’ KEYED ’ with POSITION= ’ APPEND ’ , ’ ASIS ’ , or
’ REWIND ’
47
48
51
53 severe (47): Write to READONLY file
FOR$IOS_WRIREAFIL. A write operation was attempted to a file that was declared
ACTION= ’ READ ’ or READONLY in the OPEN statement that is currently in effect.
severe (48): Invalid argument to Fortran Run-Time Library
FOR$IOS_INVARGFOR. The compiler passed an invalid or improperly coded argument to the Compaq Fortran RTL. This can occur if the compiler is newer than the RTL in use.
severe (51): Inconsistent file organization
FOR$IOS_INCFILORG. The file organization specified in an OPEN statement did not match the organization of the existing file.
severe (53): No current record
FOR$IOS_NO_CURREC. Attempted to execute a REWRITE statement to rewrite a record when the current record was undefined. To define the current record, execute a successful READ statement. You can optionally perform an INQUIRE statement on the logical unit after the READ statement and before the REWRITE statement.
No other operations on the logical unit may be performed between the READ and
REWRITE statements.
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–21
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
55
57
58 1
59
60
61
62 severe (55): DELETE error
FOR$IOS_DELERR. An error condition was detected by the Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system during execution of a DELETE statement.
severe (57): FIND error
FOR$IOS_FINERR. The Compaq Fortran RTL I/O system detected an error condition during execution of a FIND statement.
info (58): Format syntax error at or near xx
FOR$IOS_FMTSYN. Check the statement containing xx, a character substring from the format string, for a format syntax error. For information about FORMAT statements, refer to the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
severe (59): List-directed I/O syntax error
FOR$IOS_LISIO_SYN 2 . The data in a list-directed input record had an invalid format, or the type of the constant was incompatible with the corresponding variable. The value of the variable was unchanged.
severe (60): Infinite format loop
FOR$IOS_INFFORLOO. The format associated with an I/O statement that included an I/O list had no field descriptors to use in transferring those values.
severe or info 3 (61): Format/variable-type mismatch
FOR$IOS_FORVARMIS
2
. An attempt was made either to read or write a real variable with an integer field descriptor (I, L, O, Z, B), or to read or write an integer or logical variable with a real field descriptor (D, E, or F). To suppress this error message, see
Section 3.24.
severe (62): Syntax error in format
FOR$IOS_SYNERRFOR. A syntax error was encountered while the RTL was processing a format stored in an array or character variable.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
2
The ERR transfer is taken after completion of the I/O statement for error numbers 59, 61, 63, 64, and 68.
The resulting file status and record position are the same as if no error had occurred. However, other I/O errors take the ERR transfer as soon as the error is detected, so file status and record position are undefined.
3
For errors 61 and 63, the severity depends on the command).
-check keywords used during compilation ( f90
(continued on next page)
8–22 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
63 error or info 3 (63): Output conversion error
FOR$IOS_OUTCONERR 2 . During a formatted output operation, the value of a particular number could not be output in the specified field length without loss of significant digits. When this situation is encountered, the overflowed field is filled with asterisks to indicate the error in the output record. If no ERR address has been defined for this error, the program continues after the error message is displayed.
To suppress this error message, see Section 3.27.
64
65 severe (64): Input conversion error
FOR$IOS_INPCONERR 2 . During a formatted input operation, an invalid character was detected in an input field, or the input value overflowed the range representable in the input variable. The value of the variable was set to zero.
error (65): Floating invalid
FOR$IOS_FLTINV. During an arithmetic operation, the floating-point values used in a calculation were invalid for the type of operation requested or invalid exceptional values. For example, when requesting a log of the floating-point values 0.0 or a negative number. For certain arithmetic expressions, specifying the -check nopower option can suppress this message (see Section 3.25). For information on allowing exceptional IEEE values, see Section 3.44.
66
67
68 severe (66): Output statement overflows record
FOR$IOS_OUTSTAOVE. An output statement attempted to transfer more data than would fit in the maximum record size.
severe (67): Input statement requires too much data
FOR$IOS_INPSTAREQ. Attempted to read more data than exists in a record with an unformatted READ statement or with a formatted sequential READ statement from a file opened with a PAD specifier value of ’ NO ’ .
severe (68): Variable format expression value error
FOR$IOS_VFEVALERR 2 . The value of a variable format expression was not within the range acceptable for its intended use; for example, a field width was less than or equal to zero. A value of 1 was assumed, except for a P edit descriptor, for which a value of zero was assumed.
2
The ERR transfer is taken after completion of the I/O statement for error numbers 59, 61, 63, 64, and 68.
The resulting file status and record position are the same as if no error had occurred. However, other I/O errors take the ERR transfer as soon as the error is detected, so file status and record position are undefined.
3
For errors 61 and 63, the severity depends on the command).
-check keywords used during compilation ( f90
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–23
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
69 1
70
1
71
1
72 1 error (69): Process interrupted (SIGINT)
FOR$IOS_SIGINT. The process received the signal SIGINT. Determine source of this interrupt signal (described in signal (3)).
severe (70): Integer overflow
FOR$IOS_INTOVF. During an arithmetic operation, an integer value exceeded byte, word, or longword range. The result of the operation was the correct low-order part.
See Chapter 9 for ranges of the various integer data types. Consider specifying a larger integer data size (modify source program or, for an INTEGER declaration, possibly use the f90 option -integer_size nn ).
severe (71): Integer divide by zero
FOR$IOS_INTDIV. During an integer arithmetic operation, an attempt was made to divide by zero. The result of the operation was set to the dividend, which is equivalent to division by 1.
error (72): Floating overflow
FOR$IOS_FLTOVF. During an arithmetic operation, a floating-point value exceeded the largest representable value for that data type. See Chapter 9 for ranges of the various data types.
73 1 error (73): Floating divide by zero
FOR$IOS_FLTDIV. During a floating-point arithmetic operation, an attempt was made to divide by zero.
74
1 error (74): Floating underflow
FOR$IOS_FLTUND. During an arithmetic operation, a floating-point value became less than the smallest finite value for that data type. Depending on the values of the -fpe n option (see Section 3.44), the underflowed result was either set to zero or allowed to gradually underflow. See Chapter 9 for ranges of the various data types.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
8–24 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
75 1 error (75): Floating point exception
FOR$IOS_SIGFPE. A floating-point exception occurred. Core dump file created.
Possible causes include:
• Division by zero
• Overflow
• Invalid operation, such as subtraction of infinite values, multiplication of zero by infinity (without signs), division of zero by zero or infinity by infinity
• Conversion of floating-point to fixed-point format when an overflow prevents conversion
76 1
77 1
78
1
79 1 error (76): IOT trap signal
FOR$IOS_SIGIOT. Core dump file created. Examine core dump for possible cause of this IOT signal. For more information about signals, see Section 8.3.
severe (77): Subscript out of range
FOR$IOS_SUBRNG. An array reference was detected outside the declared array bounds.
error (78): Process killed (SIGTERM)
FOR$IOS_SIGTERM. The process received the signal SIGTERM. Determine source of this software termination signal (described in signal (3)).
error (79): Process quit (SIGQUIT)
FOR$IOS_SIGQUIT. The process received the signal SIGQUIT. Core dump file created.
Determine source of this quit signal (described in signal (3)).
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–25
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
95 1 info (95): Floating-point conversion failed
FOR$IOS_FLOCONFAI. The attempted unformatted read or write of nonnative floating-point data failed because the floating-point value:
• Exceeded the allowable maximum value for the equivalent native format and was set equal to infinity (plus or minus)
• Was infinity (plus or minus) and was set to infinity (plus or minus)
• Was invalid and was set to not a number (NaN)
Very small numbers are set to zero ( 0 ). This error could be caused by the specified nonnative floating-point format not matching the floating-point format found in the specified file.
Check the following:
• The correct file was specified.
• The record layout matches the format Compaq Fortran is expecting.
• The ranges for the data being used (Chapter 9)
• The correct nonnative floating-point data format was specified (Chapter 10).
108
120
130 1
(TU*X only)
131 1
(TU*X only) severe (108): Cannot stat file
FOR$IOS_CANSTAFIL. Attempted stat operation on the indicated file failed. Make sure correct file and unit were specified.
severe (120): Operation requires seek ability
FOR$IOS_OPEREQSEE. Attempted an operation on a file that requires the ability to perform seek operations on that file. Make sure the correct unit, directory path, and file were specified.
severe (130): User breakpoint (SIGTRAP)
FOR$IOS_BRK_USERBP. Break exception generated a SIGTRAP signal (described in signal (3)). Core dump file created.
Examine core dump for possible cause.
severe (131): Kernel breakpoint (SIGTRAP)
FOR$IOS_BRK_KERNELBP. Break exception generated a SIGTRAP signal (described in signal (3)). Core dump file created.
Examine core dump for possible cause.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
8–26 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
135 1
(TU*X only) severe (135): User single step (SIGTRAP)
FOR$IOS_BRK_SSTEPBP. Break exception generated a SIGTRAP signal (described in signal (3)). Core dump file created.
Examine core dump for possible cause.
136
1
(TU*X only) severe (136): Overflow check (SIGTRAP)
FOR$IOS_BRK_OVERFLOW. Break exception generated a SIGTRAP signal (described in signal (3)). Core dump file created.
The cause is an integer overflow. Try recompiling with the
(perhaps with the
-check overflow option decfort_dump_flag environment variable set) or examine the core dump file to determine the source code in error.
137
1
(TU*X only)
138 1 severe (137): Divide by zero check (SIGTRAP)
FOR$IOS_BRK_DIVZERO. Break exception generated a SIGTRAP signal (described in signal (3)). Core dump file created.
Examine core dump file for possible cause.
severe (138): Array index out of bounds (SIGTRAP on TU*X, SIGILL on L*UX)
FOR$IOS_BRK_RANGE. Break exception generated a SIGTRAP signal (described in signal (3)). Core dump file created.
The cause is an array subscript that is outside the dimensioned boundaries of that array.
Either recompile with the -check bounds option (perhaps with the decfort_dump_flag environment variable set) or examine the core dump file to determine the source code in error.
139 1 severe (139): Array index out of bounds for index nn (SIGTRAP on TU*X,
SIGILL on L*UX)
FOR$IOS_BRK_RANGE2. Break exception generated a SIGTRAP signal (described in signal (3)). Core dump file created.
The cause is an array subscript that is outside the dimensioned boundaries of the array index n.
Either recompile with the -check bounds option (perhaps with the decfort_dump_flag environment variable set) or examine the core dump file to determine the source code in error.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–27
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
140 1 severe (140): Floating inexact
FOR$IOS_FLTINE. A floating-point arithmetic or conversion operation gave a result that differs from the mathematically exact result. This trap is reported if the rounded result of an IEEE operation is not exact.
144
1
145 1 severe (144): reserved operand
FOR$IOS_ROPRAND. The Compaq Fortran RTL encountered a reserved operand.
Please report the problem to Compaq.
severe (145): Assertion error
FOR$IOS_ASSERTERR. The Compaq Fortran RTL encountered an assertion error.
Please report the problem to Compaq.
146 1 severe (146): Null pointer error
FOR$IOS_NULPTRERR. Attempted to use a pointer that does not contain an address.
Modify the source program, recompile, and relink.
147
1 severe (147): stack overflow
FOR$IOS_STKOVF. The Compaq Fortran RTL encountered a stack overflow while executing your program.
148
1 severe (148): String length error
FOR$IOS_STRLENERR. During a string operation, an integer value appears in a context where the value of the integer is outside the permissible string length range.
Either recompile with the -check bounds option (perhaps with the decfort_dump_flag environment variable set) or examine the causing the error.
core file to determine the source code
149
1
150 1 severe (149): Substring error
FOR$IOS_SUBSTRERR. An array subscript is outside the dimensioned boundaries of an array.
Either recompile with the -check bounds option (perhaps with the decfort_dump_flag environment variable set) or examine the core file to determine the source code causing the error.
severe (150): Range error
FOR$IOS_RANGEERR. An integer value appears in a context where the value of the integer is outside the permissible range.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
8–28 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
151 1 severe (151): Allocatable array is already allocated
FOR$IOS_INVREALLOC. An allocatable array must not already be allocated when you attempt to allocate it. You must deallocate the array before it can again be allocated.
152
1 severe (152): Unresolved contention for Compaq Fortran RTL global resource
FOR$IOS_RESACQFAI. Failed to acquire a Compaq Fortran RTL global resource for a reentrant routine.
For a multithreaded program, the requested global resource is held by a different thread in your program.
For a program using asynchronous handlers, the requested global resource is held by the calling part of the program (such as main program) and your asynchronous handler attempted to acquire the same global resource.
153
1 severe (153): Allocatable array or pointer is not allocated
FOR$IOS_INVDEALLOC. A Fortran-90 allocatable array or pointer must already be allocated when you attempt to deallocate it. You must allocate the array or pointer before it can again be deallocated.
173
1 severe (173): A pointer passed to DEALLOCATE points to an array that cannot be deallocated
FOR$IOS_INVDEALLOC2. A pointer that was passed to DEALLOCATE pointed to an explicit array, an array slice, or some other type of memory that could not be deallocated in a DEALLOCATE statement. Only whole arrays previous allocated with an ALLOCATE statement can be validly passed to DEALLOCATE.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–29
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
174 1 severe (174): SIGSEGV, message-text
FOR$IOS_SIGSEGV. One of two possible messages occurs for this error number:
•
• severe (174): SIGSEGV, segmentation fault occurred
For both Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux systems, this message indicates that the program attempted an invalid memory reference. Check the program for possible errors.
severe (174): SIGSEGV, possible program stack overflow occurred
On Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, the following explanatory text also appears:
Program requirements exceed the maximum available stacksize resource limit. Contact your system administrator for help.
On Linux systems, the following explanatory text also appears:
Program requirements exceed current stacksize resource limit.
Superusers may try increasing this resource by using the limit stacksize xxx command, where xxx is unlimited or something larger than your current limit.
Other users should contact your system administrator for help.
175
1
176
1 severe (175): DATE argument to DATE_AND_TIME is too short (LEN=n), required LEN=8
FOR$IOS_SHORTDATEARG. The number of characters associated with the DATE argument to the DATE_AND_TIME intrinsic was shorter than the required length.
You must increase the number of characters passed in for this argument to be at least
8 characters in length. Verify that the TIME and ZONE arguments also meet their minimum lengths.
severe (176): TIME argument to DATE_AND_TIME is too short (LEN=n), required LEN=10
FOR$IOS_SHORTTIMEARG. The number of characters associated with the TIME argument to the DATE_AND_TIME intrinsic was shorter than the required length.
You must increase the number of characters passed in for this argument to be at least
10 characters in length. Verify that the DATE and ZONE arguments also meet their minimum lengths.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
(continued on next page)
8–30 Run-Time Errors and Signals
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
177 1 severe(177): ZONE argument to DATE_AND_TIME is too short (LEN=n), required LEN=5
FOR$IOS_SHORTZONEARG. The number of characters associated with the ZONE argument to the DATE_AND_TIME intrinsic was shorter than the required length.
You must increase the number of characters passed in for this argument to be at least
5 characters in length. Verify that the DATE and TIME arguments also meet their minimum lengths.
178
1 severe(178): Divide by zero
FOR$IOS_DIV. A floating-point or integer divide-by-zero exception occurred.
179
1 ; 4
256 severe(179): Cannot allocate array---overflow on array size calculation
FOR$IOS_ARRSIZEOVF. An attempt to dynamically allocate storage for an array failed because the required storage size exceeds addressable memory.
severe (256): Unformatted I/O to unit open for formatted transfers
FOR$IOS_UNFIO_FMT. Attempted unformatted I/O to a unit where the OPEN statement (FORM specifier) indicated the file was formatted. Check that the correct unit (file) was specified.
If the FORM specifier was not present in the OPEN statement and the file contains unformatted data, specify FORM= ’ UNFORMATTED ’ in the OPEN statement.
Otherwise, if appropriate, use formatted I/O (such as list-directed or namelist I/O).
257 severe (257): Formatted I/O to unit open for unformatted transfers
FOR$IOS_FMTIO_UNF. Attempted formatted I/O (such as list-directed or namelist
I/O) to a unit where the OPEN statement indicated the file was unformatted (FORM specifier). Check that the correct unit (file) was specified.
If the FORM specifier was not present in the OPEN statement and the file contains formatted data, specify FORM= ’ FORMATTED ’ in the OPEN statement. Otherwise, if appropriate, use unformatted I/O.
264
265 severe (264): operation requires file to be on disk or tape
FOR$IOS_OPERREQDIS. Attempted to use a BACKSPACE statement on such devices as a terminal or pipe.
severe (265): operation requires sequential file organization and access
FOR$IOS_OPEREQSEQ. Attempted to use a BACKSPACE statement on a file whose organization was not sequential or whose access was not sequential. A BACKSPACE statement can only be used for sequential files opened for sequential access.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
4
Identifies errors that can be returned by STAT in an ALLOCATE statement.
(continued on next page)
Run-Time Errors and Signals 8–31
Table 8–3 (Cont.) Run-Time Error Messages and Explanations
Number Severity Level, Number, and Message Text; Condition Symbol and Explanation
266 1 error (266): Fortran abort routine called
FOR$IOS_PROABOUSE. The program called more information on signals, see Section 8.3.
abort to terminate the program. For
268
1
297 1 severe (268): End of record during read
FOR$IOS_ENDRECDUR. An end-of-record condition was encountered during execution of a nonadvancing I/O READ statement that did not specify the EOR branch specifier.
info (297): nn floating invalid traps
FOR$IOS_FLOINVEXC. The total number of floating-point invalid data traps encountered during program execution was nn. This message appears at program completion.
298 1 info (298): nn floating overflow traps
FOR$IOS_FLOOVFEXC. The total number of floating-point overflow traps encountered during program execution was nn. This message appears at program completion.
299 1 info (299): nn floating divide-by-zero traps
FOR$IOS_FLODIV0EXC. The total number of floating-point divide-by-zero traps encountered during program execution was nn. This message appears at program completion.
300
1 info (300): nn floating underflow traps
FOR$IOS_FLOUNDEXC. The total number of floating-point underflow traps encountered during program execution was nn. This message appears at program completion.
1
Identifies errors not returned by IOSTAT.
For More Information:
• On locating exceptions within the debugger, see Section 4.9.
• On file operations, see Section 7.5, Section 7.6, and Section 7.7.
• On record operations, see Section 7.8.
• On f90 and fort command-line options, see Chapter 3.
• On data types, see Chapter 9.
8–32 Run-Time Errors and Signals
9
Data Types and Representation
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 9.1, Summary of Data Types and Characteristics
• Section 9.2, Integer Data Representations
• Section 9.3, Logical Data Representations
• Section 9.4, Native IEEE Floating-Point Representations and Exceptional
Values
• Section 9.5, Character Representation
• Section 9.6, Hollerith Representation
Note
In figures in this chapter, the symbol :A specifies the address of the byte containing bit 0, which is the starting address of the represented data element.
Compaq Fortran expects numeric data to be in native little endian order, in which the least-significant, rightmost bit (bit 0) or byte has a lower address than the most-significant, leftmost bit (or byte).
For More Information:
• On using nonnative big endian and VAX floating-point formats, see
Chapter 10.
• On using Compaq Fortran I/O, see Chapter 7.
Data Types and Representation 9–1
9.1 Summary of Data Types and Characteristics
Table 9–1 lists the intrinsic data types provided by Compaq Fortran, the storage required, and valid numeric ranges.
Table 9–1 Compaq Fortran Intrinsic Data Types, Storage, and Numeric Ranges
Data Type Bytes Description
BYTE
(INTEGER*1)
INTEGER
INTEGER (KIND=1)
INTEGER*1
INTEGER (KIND=2)
INTEGER*2
INTEGER (KIND=4)
INTEGER*4
INTEGER (KIND=8)
INTEGER*8
LOGICAL
1 (8 bits)
1, 2, 4, or
8
1 (8 bits)
2 (16 bits)
4 (32 bits)
8 (64 bits)
1, 2, 4, or
8
1 (8 bits)
A BYTE declaration is a signed integer data type equivalent to INTEGER*1 or INTEGER (KIND=1).
Signed integer whose size is controlled by a kind type parameter or, if a kind type parameter (or size specifier) is omitted, certain f90 or fort command options (see
Section 9.2.1).
Signed integer value from –128 to 127 (–2**7 to 2**7–1).
Unsigned values from 0 to 255 (2**8-1) 1 .
Signed integer value from –32,768 to 32,767 (–2**15 to
2**15–1). Unsigned values from 0 to 65535 (2**16-1) 1 .
Signed integer value from –2,147,483,648 to
2,147,483,647 (–2**31 to 2**31–1). Unsigned values from
0 to 4,294,967,295 (2**32-1)
1
.
Signed integer value from –9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to
9,223,372,036,854,775,807 (–2**63 to 2**63–1).
Logical value whose size is controlled by a kind type parameter or, if a kind type parameter (or size specifier) is omitted, certain f90 command options (see Section 9.3).
Logical values .TRUE. or .FALSE.
2
LOGICAL (KIND=1)
LOGICAL*1
LOGICAL (KIND=2)
LOGICAL*2
LOGICAL (KIND=4)
LOGICAL*4
LOGICAL (KIND=8)
LOGICAL*8
2 (16 bits)
4 (32 bits)
8 (64 bits)
Logical values .TRUE. or .FALSE.
2
Logical values .TRUE. or .FALSE.
2
Logical values .TRUE. or .FALSE.
2
1
This range is allowed for assignment to variables of this type, but the data type is treated as signed in arithmetic operations.
2
Logical data type ranges correspond to their comparable integer data type ranges. For example, in
LOGICAL(KIND=2) L, the range for L is the same as the range for INTEGER(KIND=2) integers.
(continued on next page)
9–2 Data Types and Representation
Table 9–1 (Cont.) Compaq Fortran Intrinsic Data Types, Storage, and Numeric Ranges
Data Type
REAL
REAL (KIND=4)
REAL*4
DOUBLE PRECISION
REAL (KIND=8)
REAL*8
REAL (KIND=16)
REAL*16
COMPLEX
COMPLEX (KIND=4)
COMPLEX*8
DOUBLE COMPLEX
COMPLEX (KIND=8)
COMPLEX*16
Bytes
4, 8, or
16
4 (32 bits)
8 (64 bits)
16 (128 bits)
8, 16, or
32
8 (64 bits)
16 (128 bits)
Description
Real floating-point numbers whose size is controlled by a kind type parameter or, if a kind type parameter (or size specifier) is omitted, certain
Section 9.4.1).
f90 command options (see
Single-precision real floating-point values in IEEE S_float format ranging from 1.17549435E–38 to 3.40282347E38.
Values between 1.17549429E–38 and 1.40129846E–45 are denormalized
3
. You cannot write a constant for a denormalized number.
Double-precision real floating-point values in IEEE T_ float format ranging from 2.2250738585072013D-308 to
1.7976931348623158D308. Values between
2.2250738585072008D–308 and
4.94065645841246544D–324 are denormalized
3
. You cannot write a constant for a denormalized number.
Extended-precision real floating-point values in Compaq
IEEE style X_float format ranging from
6.4751751194380251109244389582276465524996Q-4966 to
1.189731495357231765085759326628007016196477Q4932.
Complex floating-point numbers whose size is controlled by a kind type parameter or, if a kind type parameter (or size specifier) is omitted, the in Section 9.4.1.
f90 command options described
Single-precision complex floating-point values in a pair of IEEE S_float format parts: real and imaginary. The real and imaginary parts range from 1.17549435E–38 to 3.40282347E38. Values between 1.17549429E–38 and
1.40129846E–45 are denormalized 3 . You cannot write a constant for a denormalized number.
Double-precision complex floating-point values in a pair of IEEE T_float format parts: real and imaginary. The real and imaginary parts each range from
2.2250738585072013D-308 to 1.7976931348623158D308.
Values between 2.2250738585072008D–308 and
4.94065645841246544D–324 are denormalized 3 . You cannot write a constant for a denormalized number.
3
For more information on floating-point underflow, see Section 3.44.
(continued on next page)
Data Types and Representation 9–3
Table 9–1 (Cont.) Compaq Fortran Intrinsic Data Types, Storage, and Numeric Ranges
Data Type
COMPLEX (KIND=16)
COMPLEX*32
CHARACTER
HOLLERITH
Bytes
32 (256 bits)
1 byte (8 bits) per character
Description
Extended-precision complex floating-point values in a pair of Compaq IEEE style X_float format parts: real and imaginary. The real and imaginary parts each range from
6.4751751194380251109244389582276465524996Q-4966 to
1.189731495357231765085759326628007016196477Q4932.
Character data represented by character code convention. Character declarations can be in the form
CHARACTER(LEN=n), CHARACTER(n), or CHARAC-
TER*n, where n is the number of bytes or n can be (*) to indicate passed-length format.
Hollerith constants.
1 byte (8 bits) per
Hollerith character
In addition to the intrinsic numeric data types, you can also define nondecimal
(binary, octal, or hexadecimal) constants as explained in the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
9.2 Integer Data Representations
Integer data lengths can be one, two, four, or eight bytes in length.
Integer data is signed with the sign bit being 0 (zero) for positive numbers and
1 for negative numbers.
To improve performance, avoid using 2-byte or 1-byte integer declarations (see
Chapter 5).
9.2.1 Integer Declarations and f90/fort Compiler Options
The default size used for an INTEGER data declaration without a kind parameter is INTEGER (KIND=4) (same as INTEGER*4), unless you do one of the following:
• Explicitly declare the length of an INTEGER by using a kind parameter, such as INTEGER (KIND=8). Compaq Fortran provides intrinsic
INTEGER kinds of 1, 2, 4, and 8. Each INTEGER kind number corresponds to number of bytes used by that intrinsic representation.
To obtain the kind of a variable, use the KIND intrinsic function. You can also use a size specifier, such as INTEGER*4, but be aware this is an extension to the Fortran 95/90 standards.
9–4 Data Types and Representation
• Use the f90 command -i2 , -integer_size nn , or -i8 options to control the size of all INTEGER declarations without a kind parameter (see
Section 3.53).
9.2.2 INTEGER (KIND=1) or INTEGER*1 Representation
Intrinsic INTEGER (KIND=1) or INTEGER*1 signed values range from –128 to 127 and are stored in a two’s complement representation. For example:
+22 = 16(hex)
-7 = F9(hex)
INTEGER (KIND=1) or INTEGER*1 values are stored in one byte, as shown in Figure 9–1.
Figure 9–1 INTEGER (KIND=1) or INTEGER*1 Representation
7
S
I
G
N
6
BINARY NUMBER
0
:A
ZK−9814−GE
9.2.3 INTEGER (KIND=2) or INTEGER*2 Representation
Intrinsic INTEGER (KIND=2) or INTEGER*2 signed values range from
–32,768 to 32,767 and are stored in a two’s complement representation. For example:
+22 = 0016(hex)
-7 = FFF9(hex)
INTEGER (KIND=2) or INTEGER*2 values are stored in two contiguous bytes, as shown in Figure 9–2.
Figure 9–2 INTEGER (KIND=2) or INTEGER*2 Representation
0 15
S
I
G
N
14
BINARY NUMBER :A
ZK−0798−GE
Data Types and Representation 9–5
9.2.4 INTEGER (KIND=4) or INTEGER*4 Representation
Intrinsic INTEGER (KIND=4) or INTEGER*4 signed values range from
–2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,647 and are stored in a two’s complement representation. INTEGER (KIND=4) or INTEGER*4 values are stored in four contiguous bytes, as shown in Figure 9–3.
Figure 9–3 INTEGER (KIND=4) or INTEGER*4 Representation
31 30
S
I
G
N
BINARY NUMBER
0
:A
ZK−0799−GE
9.2.5 INTEGER (KIND=8) or INTEGER*8 Representation
Intrinsic INTEGER (KIND=8) or INTEGER*8 signed values range from
–9,223,372,036,854,775,808 to 9,223,372,036,854,775,807 and are stored in a two’s complement representation. INTEGER*8 or INTEGER (KIND=8) values are stored in eight contiguous bytes, as shown in Figure 9–4.
Figure 9–4 INTEGER (KIND=8) or INTEGER*8 Representation
63 62
S
I
G
N
0
:A
ZK−5299A−GE
For More Information:
• On defining constants and assigning values to variables, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On intrinsic functions related to the various data types, such as
SELECTED_INT_KIND, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
• On the f90 command options that control the size of default INTEGER declarations, see Section 3.53.
9–6 Data Types and Representation
9.3 Logical Data Representations
Logical data can be one, two, four, or eight bytes in length.
The default size used for a LOGICAL data declaration without a kind parameter (or size specifier) is LOGICAL (KIND=4) (same as LOGICAL*4), unless you do one of the following:
• Explicitly declare the length of a LOGICAL declaration by using a kind parameter, such as LOGICAL (KIND=4). Compaq Fortran provides intrinsic LOGICAL kinds of 1, 2, 4, and 8. Each LOGICAL kind number corresponds to number of bytes used by that intrinsic representation.
To obtain the kind of a variable, use the KIND intrinsic function. You can also use a size specifier, such as LOGICAL*4, but be aware this is an extension to the Fortran 95/90 standards.
• Use the f90 command -i2 , -integer_size nn , or -i8 options to control the size of LOGICAL declarations without a kind parameter or size specifier
(see Section 3.53).
To improve default performance, avoid using 2-byte or 1-byte logical declarations (see Chapter 5).
Intrinsic LOGICAL*1 or LOGICAL (KIND=1) values are stored in a single byte.
Logical (intrinsic) values can also be stored in the following sizes of contiguous bytes starting on an arbitrary byte boundary:
• Two bytes (LOGICAL (KIND=2) or LOGICAL*2)
• Four bytes (LOGICAL (KIND=4) or LOGICAL*4)
• Eight bytes (LOGICAL (KIND=8) or LOGICAL*8)
The low-order bit determines whether the logical value is true or false. Logical variables can also be interpreted as integer data (an extension to the Fortran
95/90 standards). For example, in addition to having logical values .TRUE.
and .FALSE., LOGICAL*1 data can also have values in the range –128 to 127.
LOGICAL*1, LOGICAL*2, LOGICAL*4, and LOGICAL*8 data representations appear in Figure 9–5.
Data Types and Representation 9–7
Figure 9–5 LOGICAL Representations n
TRUE: UNDEFINED BITS
1 0
1 :A
FALSE: n
UNDEFINED BITS
1 0
0 :A
Key: n = 7, 15, 31, or 63 depending on LOGICAL declaration size
ZK−5300A−GE
For More Information:
• On defining constants and assigning values to variables, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On intrinsic functions related to the various data types, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On the f90 command options that control the size of default LOGICAL declarations, see Section 3.53.
9.4 Native IEEE Floating-Point Representations and
Exceptional Values
Floating-point numbers are stored on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems in standard IEEE little endian floating-point notation, as follows:
• REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 declarations are stored in standard IEEE
S_float little endian format.
• REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 declarations are stored in standard IEEE
T_float little endian format.
• REAL (KIND=16) declarations are stored in Compaq IEEE style X_float binary little endian format.
COMPLEX numbers use a pair of little endian REAL values to denote the real and imaginary parts of the data, as follows:
• COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 declarations are stored in IEEE
S_float format using two REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 values.
9–8 Data Types and Representation
• COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 declarations are stored in IEEE
T_float format using two REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 values.
• COMPLEX (KIND=16) or COMPLEX*32 declarations are stored in Compaq
IEEE X_float format using two REAL (KIND=16) or REAL*16 values.
All floating-point formats represent fractions in sign-magnitude notation, with the binary radix point to the right of the most-significant bit. Fractions are assumed to be normalized, and therefore the most-significant bit is not stored.
This is called hidden bit normalization. The hidden bit is assumed to be 1 unless the exponent is 0. If the exponent equals 0, then the value represented is denormalized (subnormal) or plus or minus 0 (zero).
For an explanation of the representation of NaN, Infinity, and related IEEE exceptional values on Alpha systems, see Section 9.4.8.
9.4.1 REAL and COMPLEX Declarations and f90/fort Compiler Options
The default sizes for REAL and COMPLEX data declarations are as follows:
• For REAL data declarations without a kind parameter (or size specifier), the default size is REAL (KIND=4) (same as REAL*4).
• For COMPLEX data declarations without a kind parameter (or size specifier), the default data size is COMPLEX (KIND=4) (same as
COMPLEX*8).
To control the size of all REAL or COMPLEX declarations without a kind parameter, use the f90 command -real_size nn , -r8 , or -r16 (see
Section 3.78).
You can explicitly declare the length of a REAL or a COMPLEX declaration using a kind parameter or specify DOUBLE PRECISION or DOUBLE
COMPLEX. To control the size of all DOUBLE PRECISION and DOUBLE
COMPLEX declarations, use the f90 command -double_size nn (see
Section 3.78).
Intrinsic REAL kinds are 4 (single precision), 8 (double precision), and 16
(extended precision). Intrinsic COMPLEX kinds are also 4 (single precision),
8 (double precision), and 16 (extended precision), such as REAL (KIND=4) for single-precision floating-point data. To obtain the kind of a variable, use the
KIND intrinsic function. You can also use a size specifier, such as REAL*4, but be aware this is an extension to the Fortran 95/90 standards.
Data Types and Representation 9–9
9.4.2 REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 Representation
Intrinsic REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 (single precision REAL) data occupies four contiguous bytes stored in IEEE S_float format. Bits are labeled from the right, 0 through 31, as shown in Figure 9–6.
Figure 9–6 REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 Representation
31 30
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
23 22
FRACTION
0
:A
ZK−9815−GE
The form of REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 data is sign magnitude, with:
• Bit 31 the sign bit (0 for positive numbers, 1 for negative numbers)
• Bits 30:23 a binary exponent in excess 127 notation
• Bits 22:0 a normalized 24-bit fraction including the redundant mostsignificant fraction bit not represented
The value of data is in the approximate range: 1.17549435E–38 (normalized) to 3.40282347E38. The IEEE denormalized limit is 1.40129846E–45.
The precision is approximately one part in 2**23, typically seven decimal digits.
9.4.3 REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 Representation
Intrinsic REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 (same as DOUBLE PRECISION) data occupies eight contiguous bytes stored in IEEE T_float format. Bits are labeled from the right, 0 through 63, as shown in Figure 9–7.
Figure 9–7 REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 Representation
63 62
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
52 51
FRACTION
0
:A
ZK−9816−GE
The form of REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 data is sign magnitude, with:
• Bit 63 the sign bit (0 for positive numbers, 1 for negative numbers)
9–10 Data Types and Representation
• Bits 62:52 a binary exponent in excess 1023 notation
• Bits 51:0 a normalized 53-bit fraction including the redundant mostsignificant fraction bit not represented
The value of data is in the approximate range: 2.2250738585072013D-308
(normalized) to 1.7976931348623158D308. The IEEE denormalized limit is
4.94065645841246544D-324.
The precision is approximately one part in 2**52, typically 15 decimal digits.
9.4.4 REAL (KIND=16) or REAL*16 Representation
Intrinsic REAL (KIND=16) or REAL*16 (extended precision) data occupies 16 contiguous bytes stored in Compaq IEEE style X_float format. Bits are labeled from the right, 0 through 127, as shown in Figure 9–8.
Figure 9–8 REAL (KIND=16) or REAL*16 Representation
127 126
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
112 111
FRACTION
0
:A
ZK−7420A−GE
The form of REAL*16 data is sign magnitude, with:
• Bit 127 the sign bit (0 for positive numbers, 1 for negative numbers)
• Bits 126:112 a binary exponent in excess 16383 notation
• Bits 111:0 a normalized 113-bit fraction including the redundant mostsignificant fraction bit not represented
The value of data is in the approximate range:
6.4751751194380251109244389582276465524996Q-4966 to
1.189731495357231765085759326628007016196477Q4932.
Unlike other floating-point formats, there is little if any performance penalty from using denormalized extended-precision numbers. This is because accessing denormalized REAL (KIND=16) numbers does not result in an arithmetic trap (the extended-precision format is emulated in software). The smallest normalized number is 3.362103143112093506262677817321753Q-4932.
The precision is approximately one part in 2**112 or typically 33 decimal digits.
Data Types and Representation 9–11
9.4.5 COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 Representation
Intrinsic COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 (single-precision COMPLEX) data is eight contiguous bytes containing a pair of REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 values stored in IEEE S_float format.
The low-order four bytes contain REAL (KIND=4) data that represents the real part of the complex number. The high-order four bytes contain REAL
(KIND=4) data that represents the imaginary part of the complex number, as shown in Figure 9–9.
Figure 9–9 COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 Representation
REAL
PART
IMAGINARY
PART
S
I
G
N
31 30
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
EXPONENT
23 22
FRACTION
FRACTION
0
:A
:A+4
ZK−9817−GE
The limits and underflow characteristics for REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 apply to the two separate real and imaginary parts of a COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 number. Like REAL (KIND=4) numbers, the sign bit representation is 0 (zero) for positive numbers and 1 for negative numbers.
9.4.6 COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 Representation
Intrinsic COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 (same as DOUBLE
COMPLEX) data is 16 contiguous bytes containing a pair of REAL*8 values stored in IEEE T_float format.
The low-order eight bytes contain REAL (KIND=8) data that represents the real part of the complex data. The high-order eight bytes contain REAL
(KIND=8) data that represents the imaginary part of the complex data, as shown in Figure 9–10.
9–12 Data Types and Representation
Figure 9–10 COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 Representation
REAL
PART
IMAGINARY
PART
63 62
S
I
G
N
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
EXPONENT
52 51
FRACTION
FRACTION
0
:A
:A+8
ZK−9818−GE
The limits and underflow characteristics for REAL (KIND=8) apply to the two separate real and imaginary parts of a COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 number. Like REAL (KIND=8) numbers, the sign bit representation is 0 (zero) for positive numbers and 1 for negative numbers.
9.4.7 COMPLEX (KIND=16) or COMPLEX*32 Representation
Intrinsic COMPLEX (KIND=16) or COMPLEX*32 (extended precision) data is 32 contiguous bytes containing a pair of REAL*16 values stored in Compaq
IEEE style X_float.
The low-order 16 bytes contain REAL (KIND=16) data that represents the real part of the complex data. The high-order 16 bytes contain REAL (KIND=16) data that represents the imaginary part of the complex data, as shown in
Figure 9–11.
Figure 9–11 COMPLEX (KIND=16) or COMPLEX*32 Representation
REAL
PART
IMAGINARY
PART
127 126
S
I
G
N
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
EXPONENT
112 111
FRACTION
FRACTION
0
:A
:A+16
LJ−06690
The limits and underflow characteristics for REAL (KIND=16) apply to the two separate real and imaginary parts of a COMPLEX (KIND=16) or COMPLEX*32 number. Like REAL (KIND=16) numbers, the sign bit representation is 0 (zero) for positive numbers and 1 for negative numbers.
Data Types and Representation 9–13
For More Information:
• On converting unformatted data, see Chapter 10.
• On defining constants and assigning values to variables, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On intrinsic functions related to the various data types, such as
SELECTED_REAL_KIND, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
• On VAX (OpenVMS) floating-point data types (provided for those converting
OpenVMS data), see Section A.4.3.
• On the f90 command options that control the size of REAL and COMPLEX declarations (without a kind parameter or size specifier), see Section 3.78.
• On the f90 command options that control the size of DOUBLE PRECISION declarations, see Section 3.34.
• On IEEE binary floating-point, see ANSI/IEEE Standard 754-1985.
9.4.8 Exceptional Floating-Point Representations
Exceptional values usually result from a computation and include plus infinity, minus infinity, NaN, and denormalized numbers.
Floating-point numbers can be one of the following:
• Finite number—A floating-point number that represents a valid number
(bit pattern) within the normalized ranges of a particular data type, including –max to –min, –zero, +zero, +min to +max.
For any native IEEE floating-point data type, the values of min or max are listed in Section 9.4.2 (single precision), Section 9.4.3 (double precision), and Section 9.4.4 (extended precision).
Special bit patterns that are not finite numbers represent exceptional values.
• Infinity—An IEEE floating-point bit pattern that represents plus or minus infinity. Compaq Fortran identifies infinity values with the letters
‘‘Infinity’’ or asterisks ( ****** ) in output statements (depends on field width) or certain hexadecimal values (fraction of 0 and exponent of all 1 values).
• Not-a-Number (NaN)—An IEEE floating-point bit pattern that represents something other than a number. Compaq Fortran identifies NaN values
9–14 Data Types and Representation
with the letters ‘‘NaN’’ in output statements. A NaN can be a signaling
NaN or a quiet NaN:
A quiet NaN might occur as a result of a calculation, such as 0./0. and has an exponent of all 1 values and initial fraction bit of 1.
A signaling NaN must be set intentionally (does not result from calculations) and has an exponent of all 1 values and initial fraction bit of 0 (with one or more other fraction bits of 1).
• Denormal—Identifies an IEEE floating-point bit pattern that represents a number whose value falls between zero and the smallest finite (normalized) number for that data type. The exponent field contains all zeros.
For negative numbers, denormalized numbers range from the next representable value larger than minus zero to the representable value that is one bit less than the smallest finite (normalized) negative number. For positive numbers, denormalized numbers range from the next representable value larger than positive zero to the representable value that is one bit less than the smallest finite (normalized) positive number.
• Zero—Can be the value +0 (all zero bits, also called true zero) or -0 (all zero bits except the sign bit, such as Z ’ 8000000000000000 ’ ).
A NaN or infinity value might result from a calculation that contains a divide by zero, overflow, or invalid data.
A denormalized number occurs when the result of a calculation falls within the denormalized range for that data type (subnormal value).
To control floating-point exception handling at run time for the main program, use the appropriate -fpen option. The callable for_set_fpe routine allows further control for subprogram use or conditional use during program execution.
If an exceptional value is used in a calculation, an unrecoverable exception can occur unless you specify the appropriate -fpen option or use the for_set_fpe routine. Denormalized numbers can be processed as is, set equal to zero with program continuation or a program stop, and generate warning messages (see
Section 3.44).
Table 9–2 lists the hexadecimal (hex) values of the IEEE exceptional floatingpoint numbers for S_float (single precision), T_float (double precision), and
X_float (extended precision) formats.
Data Types and Representation 9–15
Table 9–2 Exceptional Floating-Point Numbers
Exceptional Number Hex Value
S_float Representation
Infinity (+)
Infinity (–)
Zero (+0)
Zero (–0)
Quiet NaN (+)
Quiet NaN (–)
Signaling NaN (+)
Signaling NaN (–)
Z
Z
Z
’ 7F800000 ’
’ FF800000 ’
’ 00000000 ’
Z ’ 80000000 ’
From Z ’ 7FC00000 ’ to Z ’ 7FFFFFFF ’
From Z ’ FFC00000 ’ to Z ’ FFFFFFFF ’
From Z ’ 7F800001 ’ to Z ’ 7FBFFFFF ’
From Z ’ FF800001 ’ to Z ’ FFBFFFFF ’
T_float Representation
Infinity (+)
Infinity (–)
Zero (+0)
Zero (-0)
Quiet NaN (+)
Quiet NaN (–)
Signaling NaN (+)
Signaling NaN (–)
Z ’ 7FF0000000000000 ’
Z ’ FFF0000000000000 ’
Z ’ 0000000000000000 ’
Z ’ 8000000000000000 ’
From Z ’ 7FF8000000000000 ’ to Z ’ 7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFF ’
From Z ’ FFF8000000000000 ’ to Z ’ FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF ’
From Z ’ 7FF0000000000001 ’ to Z ’ 7FF7FFFFFFFFFFFF ’
From Z ’ FFF0000000000001 ’ to Z ’ FFF7FFFFFFFFFFFF ’
(continued on next page)
9–16 Data Types and Representation
Table 9–2 (Cont.) Exceptional Floating-Point Numbers
Exceptional Number Hex Value
X_float Representation
Infinity (+)
Infinity (–)
Zero (+0)
Zero (–0)
Quiet NaN (+)
Quiet NaN (–)
Signaling NaN (+)
Signaling NaN (–)
Z
Z
Z
Z
’ 7FFF0000000000000000000000000000 ’
’ FFFF0000000000000000000000000000 ’
’ 000000000000000000000000000000000 ’
’ 800000000000000000000000000000000 ’
From Z ’ 7FFF80000000000000000000000000000 ’ to Z ’ 7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF ’
From Z ’ FFFF80000000000000000000000000000 ’ to Z ’ FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF ’
From Z ’ 7FFF00000000000000000000000000001 ’ to Z ’ 7FFF7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF ’
From Z ’ FFFF00000000000000000000000000001 ’ to Z ’ FFFF7FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF ’
Compaq Fortran supports IEEE exception handling, allowing you to test for infinity by using a comparison of floating-point data (such as generating positive infinity by using a calculation like x=1.0/0 and comparing x to the calculated number).
The appropriate f90 command -fpen options or calling the for_set_fpe routine with appropriate arguments allows program continuation when a calculation results in a divide by zero, overflow, or invalid data arithmetic exception, generating an exceptional value (a NaN or Infinity (+ or –)).
To test for a NaN when Compaq Fortran allows continuation for arithmetic exceptions, you can use the ISNAN intrinsic function.
For example, you might use the following code to test a DOUBLE PRECISION
(REAL (KIND=8)) value:
!
!
DOUBLE PRECISION A, B, F
A = 0.
B = 0.
.
.
Perform calculations with variables A and B
.
f contains the value to check against a particular NaN
F = A / B
Data Types and Representation 9–17
!
!
IF (ISNAN(F)) THEN
WRITE (6,*) ’--> Variable F contains a NaN value <--’
ENDIF
Inform user that f has the hardware quiet NaN value
Perform calculations with variable F (or stop program early)
END PROGRAM
This program might be compiled with -fpe2 or -fpe4 to allow:
• Continuation when a NaN (or other exceptional value) is encountered in a calculation
• A summary message explaining the number and types of arithmetic exceptions encountered:
% f90 -fpe2 isnan.for
% a.out forrtl: error: floating invalid
--> Variable F contains a NaN value <-forrtl: info: 1 floating invalid traps
The FP_CLASS intrinsic function is also available to check for exceptional values (see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual and the file
/usr/include/fordef.f
).
For More Information:
• On using the f90 command -fpen options and the for_set_fpe routine to control arithmetic exception handling, see Section 3.44 and Section 14.3.2
respectively.
• On exceptional values, see the Alpha Architecture Reference Manual.
• On IEEE binary floating-point exception handling, see the IEEE Standard
for Binary Floating-Point Arithmetic (ANSI/IEEE Standard 754-1985) and ieee (3).
• On Compaq Fortran floating-point exception handling, see Chapter 14.
9.5 Character Representation
A character string is a contiguous sequence of bytes in memory, as shown in
Figure 9–12.
9–18 Data Types and Representation
Figure 9–12 CHARACTER Data Representation
CHAR 1 :A
CHAR L :A+L−1
ZK−0809−GE
A character string is specified by two attributes: the address A of the first byte of the string, and the length L of the string in bytes. The length L of a string is in the range 1 through 65,535.
For More Information:
• On defining constants, assigning values to variables, using substring expressions, and concatenation, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• On intrinsic functions related to the various data types, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
9.6 Hollerith Representation
Hollerith constants are stored internally, one character per byte. When
Hollerith constants contain the ASCII representation of characters, they resemble the storage of character data (see Figure 9–12).
When Hollerith constants store numeric data, they usually have a length of one, two, four, or eight bytes and resemble the corresponding numeric data type.
For More Information:
• On defining constants and assigning values to variables, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On intrinsic functions related to the various data types, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
Data Types and Representation 9–19
10
Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 10.1, Endian Order of Numeric Formats
• Section 10.2, Little Endian Floating-Point Format
• Section 10.3, Native and Supported Nonnative Numeric Formats
• Section 10.4, Limitations of Numeric Conversion
• Section 10.5, Methods of Specifying the Unformatted Numeric Format
• Section 10.6, Additional Information on Nonnative Data
10.1 Endian Order of Numeric Formats
Data storage uses a convention of either little endian or big endian storage, depending on the computer. The storage convention generally applies to numeric values that span multiple bytes.
Little endian storage occurs when:
• The least significant bit (LSB) value is in the byte with the lowest address.
• The most significant bit (MSB) value is in the byte with the highest address.
• The address of the numeric value is the byte containing the LSB.
Subsequent bytes with higher addresses contain more significant bits.
Big endian storage occurs when:
• The least significant bit (LSB) value is in the byte with the highest address.
• The most significant bit (MSB) value is in the byte with the lowest address.
• The address of the numeric value is the byte containing the MSB.
Subsequent bytes with higher addresses contain less significant bits.
Converting Unformatted Numeric Data 10–1
Figure 10–1 shows the difference between the two byte-ordering schemes.
Figure 10–1 Little Endian and Big Endian Storage of an INTEGER Value
M
S
B
Little Endian
Byte Order
M
S
B
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
1003 1002 1001 1000
L
S
B
Big Endian
Byte Order
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1
1000 1001 1002 1003
L
S
B
ZK−6654A−GE
Moving data files between little endian and big endian computers requires that the data be converted.
10.2 Little Endian Floating-Point Format
On Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux systems, Compaq Fortran supports the following little endian floating-point formats in memory:
Floating-Point Size
KIND=4
KIND=8
KIND=16
Format in Memory
IEEE S_float
IEEE T_float
Compaq IEEE style X_float
If your program needs to read or write unformatted data files containing a floating-point format that differs from the format in memory for that data size, you can request that the unformatted data be converted.
Converting unformatted data is generally faster than converting formatted data and is less likely to lose precision for floating-point numbers.
10–2 Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
10.3 Native and Supported Nonnative Numeric Formats
Compaq Fortran provides the capability for programs to read and write unformatted data (originally written using unformatted I/O statements) in several nonnative floating-point formats and in big endian INTEGER or floating-point format.
When reading a nonnative unformatted format, the nonnative format on disk must be converted to native format in memory. Similarly, native data in memory can be written to a nonnative unformatted format. If a converted nonnative value is outside the range of the native data type, a run-time message appears (listed in Table 8–3).
Supported native and nonnative floating-point formats include:
• Standard IEEE little endian floating-point formats
1 and little endian integers. These formats are found on Compaq Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems,
Compaq OpenVMS Alpha systems, Microsoft Windows NT systems,
IBM-compatible PC systems, and Linux Alpha systems.
On Tru64 UNIX and Linux systems, these are the native (in memory) floating-point and integer formats.
• Standard IEEE big endian floating-point formats
1 and big endian integers found on most Sun systems, most Hewlett-Packard systems (such as
HP-UX systems), and IBM’s RISC System/6000 systems.
• Compaq VAX little endian floating-point formats and little endian integers supported by Compaq Fortran for OpenVMS VAX systems and Compaq
Fortran for OpenVMS Alpha systems.
• Big endian proprietary floating-point formats and big endian integers associated with CRAY (CRAY systems).
• Big endian proprietary floating-point formats and big endian integers associated with IBM (the IBM’s System\ 370 and similar systems).
The native memory format uses little endian integers and little endian IEEE floating-point formats, as follows:
• INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations of one, two, four, or eight bytes
(intrinsic kinds 1, 2, 4, and 8). You can specify the integer data length by using an explicit data declaration (kind parameter or size specifier).
All INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations without a kind parameter or size specifier will be four bytes in length. To request an 8-byte size for all
1 IEEE floating-point formats are defined in the IEEE Standard for Binary
Floating-Point Arithmetic, ANSI/IEEE Standard 754-1985, Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers, August 1985.
Converting Unformatted Numeric Data 10–3
INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations without a kind parameter or size specifier, use an f90 command-line option on Tru64 UNIX systems or and fort command-line option on Linux systems (see Section 9.2.1).
• IEEE S_float format for single-precision 4-byte REAL and 8-byte
COMPLEX declarations (KIND=4). You can specify the real or complex data length by using an explicit data declaration (kind parameter or size specifier). For all REAL or COMPLEX declarations without a kind parameter or size specifier, this is the default size unless you use an f90 command-line option to request double-precision sizes (see Section 9.4.1).
• IEEE T_float format for double-precision 8-byte REAL and 16-byte
COMPLEX declarations (KIND=8). You can specify the real or complex data length by using an explicit data declaration (kind parameter or size specifier). To request double-precision sizes for all REAL or COMPLEX declarations without a kind parameter or size specifier, you can use an command-line option (see Section 9.4.1).
f90
• Compaq IEEE style X_float format for extended-precision 16-byte REAL and 32-byte COMPLEX declarations (KIND=16). You can specify the real data length by using an explicit data declaration (kind parameter or size specifier). To request extended-precision sizes for all DOUBLE PRECISION or DOUBLE COMPLEX declarations, you can use an option (see Section 9.4.1).
f90 command-line
Table 10–1 lists the keywords for the supported unformatted file data formats.
Use the appropriate keyword after the -convert option (such as -convert cray ) or as an environment variable value (see Section 10.5.1 and Section 10.5.2).
10–4 Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
Table 10–1 Unformatted Numeric Formats, Keywords, and Supported Data
Types
Recognized Keyword
1
Description
BIG_ENDIAN Big endian integer data of the appropriate INTEGER size
(one, two, four, or eight bytes) and big endian IEEE floatingpoint formats for REAL and COMPLEX single- and doubleand extended-precision numbers. INTEGER (KIND=1) or
INTEGER*1 data is the same for little endian and big endian.
CRAY
FDX
FGX
IBM
Big endian integer data of the appropriate INTEGER size (one, two, four, or eight bytes) and big endian CRAY proprietary floating-point format for REAL and COMPLEX single- and double-precision numbers.
Native little endian integers of the appropriate INTEGER size (one, two, four, or eight bytes) and the following little endian Compaq proprietary floating-point formats:
• VAX F_float for REAL (KIND=4) and COMPLEX
(KIND=4)
• VAX D_float for REAL (KIND=8) and COMPLEX
(KIND=8)
• IEEE style X_float for REAL (KIND=16) and COMPLEX
(KIND=16)
Native little endian integers of the appropriate INTEGER size (one, two, four, or eight bytes) and the following little endian Compaq proprietary floating-point formats:
• VAX F_float for REAL (KIND=4) and COMPLEX
(KIND=4)
• VAX G_float for REAL (KIND=8) and COMPLEX
(KIND=8)
• IEEE style X_float for REAL (KIND=16) and COMPLEX
(KIND=16)
Big endian integer data of the appropriate INTEGER size
(one, two, or four bytes) and big endian IBM proprietary
(System\ 370 and similar) floating-point format for REAL and
COMPLEX single- and double-precision numbers.
1
When using the data type as a -convert keyword option on the f90 command line, the data type keyword must be in lowercase, such as -convert big_endian .
(continued on next page)
Converting Unformatted Numeric Data 10–5
Table 10–1 (Cont.) Unformatted Numeric Formats, Keywords, and Supported
Data Types
Recognized Keyword
1
Description
LITTLE_ENDIAN Native little endian integers of the appropriate INTEGER size (one, two, four, or eight bytes) and the following native little endian IEEE floating-point formats:
• S_float for REAL (KIND=4) and COMPLEX (KIND=4)
• T_float for REAL (KIND=8) and COMPLEX (KIND=8)
• IEEE style X_float for REAL (KIND=16) and COMPLEX
(KIND=16)
NATIVE
VAXD
VAXG
No conversion occurs between memory and disk. This is the default for unformatted files.
Native little endian integers of the appropriate INTEGER size (one, two, four, or eight bytes) and the following little endian VAX Compaq proprietary floating-point formats:
• VAX F_float for REAL (KIND=4) and COMPLEX
(KIND=4)
• VAX D_float for REAL (KIND=8) and COMPLEX
(KIND=8)
• VAX H_float for REAL (KIND=16) and COMPLEX
(KIND=16)
Native little endian integers of the appropriate INTEGER size (one, two, four, or eight bytes) and the following little endian VAX Compaq proprietary floating-point formats:
• VAX F_float for REAL (KIND=4) and COMPLEX
(KIND=4)
• VAX G_float for REAL (KIND=8) and COMPLEX
(KIND=8)
• VAX H_float for REAL (KIND=16) and COMPLEX
(KIND=16)
1
When using the data type as a -convert keyword option on the f90 command line, the data type keyword must be in lowercase, such as -convert big_endian .
While this solution is not expected to fulfill all floating-point conversion needs, it provides the capability to read and write various types of unformatted nonnative floating-point data.
10–6 Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
For More Information:
• On porting OpenVMS Fortran data files to a Tru64 UNIX Alpha or a Linux
Alpha system for use by Compaq Fortran, see Section A.4.
• On ranges and the format of native IEEE floating-point data types, see
Table 9–1 and Section 9.4.
• On ranges and the format of VAX floating-point data types, see
Section A.4.3.
• On specifying the size of INTEGER declarations (without a kind) using an f90 command-line option, see Section 9.2.1.
• On specifying the size of LOGICAL declarations (without a kind) using an f90 command-line option, see Section 9.3.
• On specifying the size of REAL or COMPLEX declarations (without a kind) using an f90 command-line option, see Section 9.4.1.
• On data declarations and other Compaq Fortran language information, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
10.4 Limitations of Numeric Conversion
The Compaq Fortran floating-point conversion solution is not expected to fulfill all floating-point conversion needs.
Data (variables) contained in derived types and record structures (specified in a STRUCTURE statement) are not converted. When the variables are later examined as separate fields by the program, they will remain in the binary format they were stored in on disk, unless the program is modified.
If a program reads an I/O record containing multiple floating-point fields into an integer array (instead of their respective variables), the fields will not be converted. When the fields are later examined as separate fields by the program, they will remain in the binary format they were stored in on disk, unless the program is modified.
With EQUIVALENCE statements, the data type of the variable named in the
I/O statement is used.
Converting Unformatted Numeric Data 10–7
10.5 Methods of Specifying the Unformatted Numeric Format
The five methods you can use to specify the type of nonnative (or native) format are as follows:
• Set an environment variable for a specific unit number before the file is opened. The environment variable is named FORT_CONVERTn , where n is the unit number.
• Set an environment variable for a specific file name extension before the file is opened. The environment variable is named FORT_CONVERT.ext , where ext is the file name extension (suffix).
• Add the CONVERT specifier to the OPEN statement for a specific unit number.
• Compile the program with an OPTIONS statement that specifies the
/CONVERT=keyword qualifier. This method affects all unit numbers using unformatted data specified by the program.
• Compile the program with the appropriate command-line option -convert keyword . This method affects all unit numbers using unformatted data specified by the program.
If you specify more than one method, the order of precedence when you open a file with unformatted data is:
1.
Check for a FORT_CONVERTn environment variable
2.
Check for a FORT_CONVERT.ext environment variable
3.
Check the OPEN statement CONVERT specifier
4.
Check whether an OPTIONS statement with a /CONVERT=keyword qualifier was present when the program was compiled
5.
Check whether the f90 -convert keyword program was compiled option was used when the
If none of these methods are specified, no conversion occurs between disk and memory. Data should therefore be in the native memory format (little endian integer and little endian IEEE format) or otherwise translated by the application program.
Any keyword listed in Table 10–1 can be used with any of these methods.
If you are uncertain about the format, you can do the following:
• Open the file (OPEN statement)
10–8 Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
• Use an INQUIRE statement (by unit) that specifies the CONVERT specifier equated to a character variable
• Close the file (CLOSE statement)
• Open the file using the CONVERT variable value obtained from the
INQUIRE statement
10.5.1 Environment Variable FORT_CONVERTn Method
You can use the environment variable method to specify multiple formats in a single program, usually one format for each unit number. You specify the numeric format at run time by setting the appropriate environment variable before you open that unit number. For example, to specify the numeric format for unit 9, set environment variable FORT_CONVERT9 to the appropriate value
(such as BIG_ENDIAN) before you run the program.
When you open the file, the environment variable is always used, since this method takes precedence over the f90 command-line option methods. For instance, you might use this method to specify that different unformatted numeric formats for different unit numbers (perhaps in a script file that sets the environment variable before running the program).
For example, assume you have a previously compiled program that reads numeric data from unit 28 and writes it to unit 29 using unformatted I/O statements. You want the program to read nonnative big endian (IEEE floating-point) format from unit 28 and write that data in native little endian format to unit 29.
In this case, the data is converted from big endian IEEE format to native little endian IEEE memory format (S_float, T_float, X_float) when read from unit
28, and then written without conversion in native little endian IEEE format to unit 29.
Without requiring source code modification or recompilation of this program, the following C shell command sequence sets the appropriate environment variables before running the program ( /usr/userc/conv_ieee.out
):
% setenv FORT_CONVERT28 BIG_ENDIAN
% setenv FORT_CONVERT29 NATIVE
% /usr/userc/conv_ieee.out
Figure 10–2 shows the data formats used on disk and in memory when the example file /usr/userc/conv_ieee.out
is run after the environment variables are set with shell commands.
Converting Unformatted Numeric Data 10–9
Figure 10–2 Sample Unformatted File Conversion
Native Memory Formats
Little Endian Integers and
Little Endian IEEE S_float,
T_float, and X_float Formats
Unit 28: Read
Big Endian IEEE and Convert to
Native Formats
Unformatted Data Files on Disk
Unit 29: Do Not Convert;
Write Native Memory Formats
(Little Endian IEEE)
ZK−6655A−GE
For More Information:
• On the shell commands you can use to set or unset environment variables, see Appendix B, Compaq Fortran Environment Variables.
10.5.2 Environment Variable FORT_CONVERT.ext Method
You can use this method to specify formats in a single program, usually one format for each specified file name extension (suffix). You specify the numeric format at run time by setting the appropriate environment variable before an implicit or explicit OPEN statement to one or more unformatted files.
For example, assume you have a previously compiled program that reads floating-point numeric data from one file and writes to another file using unformatted I/O statements. You want the program to read nonnative big endian (IEEE floating-point) format from a file with a .dat
file extension suffix and write that data in native little endian format to a file with a suffix of
.data
. In this case, the data is converted from big endian IEEE format to native little endian IEEE memory format when read from file.dat
, and then written without conversion in native little endian IEEE format to the file with a suffix of and
.data
, assuming that environment variables
FORT_CONVERTn
FORT_CONVERT.DATA
(for that unit number) are not defined.
10–10 Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
Without requiring source code modification or recompilation of this program, the following command sequence sets the appropriate environment variables before running the program ( /usr/userc/proj2/cvbigend.exe
):
% setenv FORT_CONVERT.DAT BIG_ENDIAN
% /usr/userc/proj2/cvbigend.exe
The FORT_CONVERTn method takes precedence over this method. When the appropriate environment variable is set when you open the file, the FORT_CONVERT.ext environment variable is used if a FORT_CONVERTn environment variable is not set for the unit number.
The FORT_CONVERTn and FORT_CONVERT.ext environment variable methods take precedence over the other methods. For instance, you might use this method to specify that a unit number will use a particular format instead of the format specified in the program (perhaps for a one-time file conversion).
The file name extension (suffix) is case-sensitive. The extension must be part of the file name (not the directory path).
10.5.3 OPEN Statement CONVERT=’keyword’ Method
You can use the OPEN statement method to specify multiple formats in a single program, usually one format for each specified unit number. This method requires an explicit file OPEN statement to specify the numeric format of the file for that unit number.
This method takes precedence over the OPTIONS statement or the -convert keyword method, but has a lower precedence than the environment variable methods.
The following source code shows an OPEN statement coded for unformatted
VAXD numeric data (read from unit 15), and an OPEN statement coded for unformatted native little endian format (written to unit 20). The absence of the
CONVERT specifier (in the second OPEN statement) or environment variable
FORT_CONVERT20 indicates native little endian data for unit 20:
.
.
OPEN (CONVERT=’VAXD’, FILE=’graph3.dat’, FORM=’UNFORMATTED’, UNIT=15)
.
OPEN (FILE=’graph3_ieee.dat’, FORM=’UNFORMATTED’, UNIT=20)
A hard-coded OPEN statement CONVERT specifier keyword value cannot be changed after compile time. However, to allow selection of a particular format at run time, you can equate the CONVERT specifier to a variable and provide the user with a menu that allows selection of the appropriate format (menu choice sets the variable) before the OPEN occurs.
Converting Unformatted Numeric Data 10–11
You can also select a particular format for a unit number at run time by using the environment variable method (see Section 10.5.1), which takes precedence over the OPEN statement CONVERT specifier method.
You can issue an INQUIRE statement (by unit number) to an opened file to obtain the current CONVERT option in use.
10.5.4 OPTIONS Statement /CONVERT=keyword Method
You can only specify one numeric file format for all unit numbers using this method, unless you also use one of the FORT_CONVERT environment variable methods or the OPEN statement CONVERT specifier method.
You specify the numeric format at compile time and must compile all routines under the same OPTIONS statement CONVERT=keyword qualifier. You can use one source program and compile it using different f90 commands to create multiple executable programs that each read a certain format.
The environment variables and OPEN CONVERT specifier methods take precedence over this method. For instance, you might use the environment variables or OPEN CONVERT specifier method to specify each unit number that will use a format other than that specified using the f90 command-line option method. This method takes precedence over the keyword option method.
f90 command -convert
You can use OPTIONS statements to specify the appropriate floatingpoint formats (in memory and in unformatted files) instead of using the corresponding f90 command-line options. For example, to use VAX G_float
(along with VAX F_float and VAX H_float) as the unformatted file format, specify the following OPTIONS statement:
OPTIONS /CONVERT=VAXG
Because this method affects all unit numbers, you cannot read data in one format and write it in another format using the OPTIONS statement method, unless you use it in combination with one of the environment variable methods or the OPEN statement CONVERT keyword method to specify a different format for a particular unit number.
For More Information:
• On the OPTIONS statement, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
10–12 Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
10.5.5 Command-Line -convert keyword Option Method
You can specify only one numeric format for all unit numbers by using the command-line option method, unless you also use the environment variable method or CONVERT specifier method.
You specify the numeric format at compile time and must compile all routines under the same -convert keyword option. You can use one source program and compile it using different f90 commands to create multiple executable programs that each read a certain format.
The other methods take precedence over this method. For instance, you might use the environment variables or OPEN CONVERT specifier method to specify each unit number that will use a format other than that specified using the f90 command-line option method.
For example, the following shell commands compile program file.f90
to use VAX D_float and F_float data. Data is converted between the file format and the little endian memory format (little endian integers and S_float, T_ float, and X_float little endian IEEE floating-point format). The created file, vaxd_convert.out
, is then run:
% f90 -convert vaxd -o vaxd_convert.out file.f90
% vaxd_convert.out
Because this method affects all unit numbers, you cannot read or write data in different formats if you only use the f90 -convert keyword method. To specify a different format for a particular unit number, use the f90 -convert keyword method in combination with an environment variable method or the OPEN statement CONVERT specifier method.
10.6 Additional Information on Nonnative Data
The following information applies to porting nonnative data:
• When porting source code along with the unformatted data, vendors might use different units for specifying the record length (RECL specifier, see
Section 7.4.4) of unformatted files. While formatted files are specified in units of characters (bytes), unformatted files are specified in longword units for Compaq Fortran and some other vendors. The Fortran 90 standard, in Section 9.3.4.5, states: ‘‘If the file is being connected for unformatted input/output, the length is measured in processor-dependent units.’’
1
1
American National Standard Fortran 90, ANSI X3.198-1991, and International
Standards Organization standard ISO/IEC 1539:1991
Converting Unformatted Numeric Data 10–13
• Certain vendors apply different OPEN statement defaults to determine the record type. The default record type (RECORDTYPE) with Compaq
Fortran depends on the values for the ACCESS and FORM specifiers for the OPEN statement, as described in the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• Certain vendors use a different identifier for the logical data types, such as hex FF instead of 01 to denote true .
• Source code being ported might be coded specifically for big endian use.
For More Information:
• On OPEN statement specifiers, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• On Compaq Fortran file characteristics, see Section 7.4, Types of Files and
File Characteristics.
• On Compaq Fortran record types, see Section 7.4.3, Record Types, Record
Overhead, and Maximum Record Length and Section 7.10, Format of
Compaq Fortran Record Types.
10–14 Converting Unformatted Numeric Data
11
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed
Language Programming
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 11.1, Compaq Fortran Procedures and Argument Passing
• Section 11.2, Using the cDEC$ ALIAS and cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES Directives
• Section 11.3, Calling Between Compaq Fortran and C
Note
For information about calling between Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq
Fortran, see Section A.5.
11.1 Compaq Fortran Procedures and Argument Passing
The bounds of the main program are usually defined by using PROGRAM and END or END PROGRAM statements. Within the main program, you can define entities related to calling a function or subroutine, including modules and interface blocks.
A function or subroutine is considered a subprogram. A subprogram can accept one or more data values passed from the calling routine; the values are called arguments.
There are two types of arguments:
• Actual arguments are specified in the subprogram call.
• Dummy arguments are variables within the function or subroutine that receive the values (from the actual arguments).
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–1
The following methods define the interface between procedures:
• Declare and name a function with a FUNCTION statement and terminate the function definition with an END FUNCTION statement. Set the value of the data to be returned to the calling routine by using the function name as a variable in an assignment statement (or by specifying RESULT in a
FUNCTION statement).
Reference a function by using its name in an expression.
• Declare and name a subroutine with a SUBROUTINE statement and terminate the subroutine definition with an END SUBROUTINE statement. No value is returned by a subroutine.
Reference a subroutine by using its name in a CALL statement (or use a defined assignment statement).
• For an external subprogram, depending on the type of arguments or function return values, you may need to declare an explicit interface to the arguments and function return value by using an interface block.
Declare and name an interface block with an INTERFACE statement and terminate the interface block definition with an END INTERFACE statement. The interface body that appears between these two statements consists of function or subroutine specification statements.
• You can make data, specifications, definitions, procedure interfaces, or procedures globally available to the appropriate parts of your program by using a module (use association).
Declare a module with a MODULE statement and terminate the module definition with an END MODULE statement. Include the definitions and other information contained within the module in appropriate parts of your program with a USE statement. A module can contain interface blocks, function and subroutine declarations, data declarations, and other information.
For More Information:
• On the Compaq Fortran language, including statement functions and defined assignment statements not described in this manual, see the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
11–2 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
11.1.1 Explicit and Implicit Interfaces
An explicit interface occurs when the properties of the subprogram interface are known within the scope of the function or subroutine reference. For example, the function reference or CALL statement occurs at a point where the function or subroutine definition is known through host or use association.
Intrinsic procedures also have an explicit interface.
An implicit interface occurs when the properties of the subprogram interface are not known within the scope of the function or subroutine reference. In this case, the procedure data interface is unknown to the compiler. For example, external routines (EXTERNAL statement) that have not been defined in an interface block have an implicit interface.
In most cases, you can use a procedure interface block to make an implicit interface an explicit one. An explicit interface provides the following advantages over an implicit interface:
• It provides better compile-time argument checking and fewer run-time errors.
• In some cases, it provides faster run-time performance.
• It provides ease of locating problems in source files since the features help to make the interface self-documenting.
• It allows use of some language features that require an explicit interface, such as array function return values.
• When passing certain types of arguments between Compaq Fortran and non-Fortran languages, an explicit interface may be needed. For example, detailed information about an assumed-shape array argument can be obtained from a Compaq Fortran array descriptor. An array descriptor is generated when an appropriate explicit interface is used for certain types of array arguments.
For More Information:
• See Section 11.1.7, Compaq Fortran Array Descriptor Format.
11.1.2 Types of Compaq Fortran Subprograms
There are three major types of subprograms:
• A subprogram might be local to a single program unit (known only within its host). Since the subprogram definition and all its references are contained within the same program unit, it is called an internal
subprogram.
An internal subprogram has an explicit interface.
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–3
• A subprogram needed in multiple program units should be placed within a module. To create a module subprogram within a module, add a CONTAINS statement followed by the subprogram code. A module subprogram can also contain internal subprograms.
A module subprogram has an explicit interface in those program units that reference the module with a USE statement (unless it is declared
PRIVATE).
• External subprograms are needed in multiple program units but cannot be placed in a module. This makes their procedure interface unknown in the program unit in which the reference occurs. Examples of external subprograms include general-purpose library routines in standard libraries and subprograms written in other languages, like C or Ada.
Unless an external subprogram has an associated interface block, it has an implicit interface. To provide an explicit interface for an external subprogram, create a procedure interface block (see Section 11.1.3).
For subprograms with no explicit interface, declare the subprogram name as external. You can do this by using the EXTERNAL statement within the program unit where the external subprogram reference occurs. This allows the linker to resolve the reference.
An external subprogram must not contain PUBLIC or PRIVATE statements.
11.1.3 Using Procedure Interface Blocks
Procedure interface blocks allow you to specify an explicit interface for a subprogram as well as define generic procedure names. This section limits discussion to those interface blocks used to provide an explicit subprogram interface. For complete information on interface blocks, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
The components of a procedure interface block follow:
• Begin a procedure interface block with an INTERFACE statement. Unless you are defining a generic procedure name, user-defined operator, or user-defined assignment, only the word INTERFACE is needed.
• To provide the interface body, copy the procedure specification statements from the actual subprogram, including:
The FUNCTION or SUBROUTINE statements.
11–4 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
The interface body. For a procedure interface block, this includes specification (declaration) statements for the dummy arguments and a function return value (omit data assignment, FORMAT, ENTRY, DATA, and related statements).
The interface body can include USE statements to obtain definitions.
In parallel HPF programs
(TU*X only)
, any DISTRIBUTE, ALIGN, and
INHERIT (!HPF) directives for the dummy arguments must also be included.
The END FUNCTION or END SUBROUTINE statements.
• Terminate the interface block with an END INTERFACE statement.
• To make the procedure interface block available to multiple program units, you can do one of the following:
Place the procedure interface block in a module. Reference the module with a USE statement in each program unit that references the subprogram (use association).
Place the procedure interface block in each program unit that references the subprogram.
For an example of a module that contains a procedure interface block, see
Section 1.3.
11.1.4 Passing Arguments and Function Return Values
Compaq Fortran on Tru64 UNIX and Linux systems uses the same argumentpassing conventions as Compaq Fortran 77 on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems for non-pointer scalar variables and explicit-shape and assumed-size arrays.
When calling Compaq Fortran subprograms, be aware that Compaq Fortran expects to receive arguments the same way it passes them.
The main points about argument passing and function return values are as follows:
• Arguments are generally passed by reference: the address of the argument is passed.
Unless explicitly specified otherwise (such as with the cDEC$
ATTRIBUTES directive or the %VAL built-in function), an argument contains the address of the data being passed, not the data itself.
Assumed-shape arrays and deferred-shape arrays are passed by array descriptor.
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–5
Arguments omitted by adding an extra comma ( , ) are passed as a zero by immediate value. OPTIONAL arguments that are not passed are also handled this way.
• Function return data is usually passed by immediate value (function return contains a value). Certain types of data (such as array-valued functions) are passed by other means.
The value being returned from a function call usually contains the actual data, not the address of the data.
• Character variables, explicit-shape character arrays, and assumed-size character arrays are passed as arguments by reference along with an extra argument, called a ‘‘hidden length’’ argument, that gets passed by value after all actual arguments.
The hidden length is an integer value. If two character scalar variables are passed, the argument list contains two extra hidden length arguments that respectively contain the length of the passed character arguments. Dummy arguments for character data can use an assumed length. You can use the
-mixed_str_len_arg option to place the hidden length directly after its corresponding character argument instead of sequentially at the end of the argument list. See Section 3.62.
When passing character arguments to a C routine as strings, the character argument is not automatically null-terminated by the compiler. To nullterminate a string from Compaq Fortran, use the CHAR intrinsic function or the null character escape sequence (described in the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual).
• External names have a trailing underscore ( _ ) appended to their name and are in lowercase. On Linux systems, if an external name has an underscore in it, then two underscores are appended. For example, becomes EXTERNAL foo_bar_ _ .
EXTERNAL foo_bar
The Compaq Fortran compiler appends the underscore to any reference to an external procedure name, as well as Compaq Fortran procedure declarations in the object file. This is mostly a concern when the program uses routines in Compaq Fortran and C, as described in Section 11.3.2.
The arguments passed from a calling routine must match the dummy arguments declared in the called function or subroutine (or other procedure), as follows:
• Arguments are kept in the same position as they are specified by the user.
The exception to same position placement is the use of argument keywords to associate dummy and actual arguments.
11–6 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
• Each corresponding argument or function return value must at least match in data type, kind, and rank, as follows:
The primary Compaq Fortran intrinsic data types are character, integer, logical, real, and complex.
To convert data from one data type to another, use the appropriate intrinsic procedures described in the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
Also, certain attributes of a data item may have to match. For example, if a dummy argument has the POINTER attribute, its corresponding actual argument must also have the POINTER attribute
Section 11.1.6).
You can use the kind parameter to specify the length of each numeric intrinsic type, such as INTEGER (KIND=8). For character lengths, use the LEN specifier, perhaps with an assumed length for dummy character arguments (LEN=*).
The rank (as number of dimensions) of the actual argument is usually the same (or less than) the rank of the dummy argument, unless an assumed-size dummy array is used.
When using an explicit interface, the rank of the actual argument must be the same as the rank of the dummy argument.
For example, when passing a scalar actual argument to a scalar dummy argument (no more than one array element or a nonarray variable), the rank of both is 0.
You can pass an actual array to a dummy array of the same rank or you can pass an array section. If you use an assumed-shape array, the extents of the dummy array argument are taken from the actual array argument.
Other rules which apply to passing arrays and pointers are described in Section 11.1.5, Section 11.1.6, and the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• The means by which the argument is passed and received (passing mechanism) must match.
By default, Compaq Fortran arguments are passed by reference. (See
Table 11–3 for information about passing arguments with the C property.)
When calling functions or other routines that are intended to be called from another language (such as C), be aware that these languages may require data to be passed by other means, such as by value.
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–7
Most Compaq Fortran function return values are passed by value. Certain types of data (such as array-valued functions) are passed by other means.
In most cases, you can change the passing mechanism of actual arguments by using the following Compaq extensions: cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES directive (see Section 11.2.2)
Built-in functions (see Section 11.1.8)
• To explicitly specify the procedure (argument or function return) interface, provide an explicit interface.
You can use interface blocks and modules to specify INTENT and other attributes of arguments.
For More Information:
• On passing arguments, function return values, and the contents of registers on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Calling
Standard for Alpha Systems.
• On intrinsic data types, see Chapter 9 and the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• On intrinsic procedures and attributes available for array use, see the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On explicit interfaces and when they are required, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
• On a Compaq Fortran example program that uses an external subprogram and a module that contains a procedure interface block, see Example 1–3.
11.1.5 Passing Arrays as Arguments
Certain arguments or function return values require the use of an explicit interface, including assumed-shape dummy arguments, pointer dummy arguments, and function return values that are arrays. This is discussed in the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
When passing arrays as arguments, the rank and the extents (number of elements in a dimension) should agree, so the arrays have the same shape and are conformable. If you use an assumed-shape array, the rank is specified and extents of the dummy array argument are taken from the actual array argument.
11–8 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
If the rank and extent (shape) do not agree, the arrays are not conformable.
The assignment of elements from the actual array to the noncomformable
(assumed-size or explicit-shape) dummy array is done by using array element sequence association. Using array element sequence associations is discussed in the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
Certain combinations of actual and dummy array arguments are disallowed.
For More Information:
• On the types of arrays and passing array arguments, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
• On explicit interfaces and when they are required, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
• On array descriptors, see Section 11.1.7.
11.1.6 Passing Pointers as Arguments
Previous sections have discussed the case where the actual and dummy arguments have neither the POINTER attribute nor the TARGET attribute.
The argument passing rules of like type, kind, and rank (for conformable arrays) or array element sequence association (for noncomformable arrays) apply when:
• Both actual and dummy arguments have the POINTER attribute.
• Dummy arguments have the TARGET attribute.
• Both actual and dummy arguments have neither attribute.
You can specify an actual argument of type POINTER and a dummy argument of type POINTER. You must use an explicit interface that defines the dummy argument with the POINTER attribute in the code containing the actual argument. This ensures that the pointer is passed, rather than the array data itself.
However, if you specify an actual argument of type POINTER and do not specify an appropriate explicit interface (such as an interface block), it is passed as actual (target) data.
For More Information:
• On using pointers and pointer arguments, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–9
11.1.7 Compaq Fortran Array Descriptor Format
When using an explicit interface (by association or procedure interface block),
Compaq Fortran will generate a descriptor for the following types of dummy argument data structures:
• Pointers to arrays (array pointers)
• Allocatable arrays
• Assumed-shape arrays
To allow calling between Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran, certain data structure arguments also supported by Compaq Fortran 77 do not use a descriptor, even when an appropriate explicit interface is provided. For example, since explicit-shape and assumed-size arrays are supported by both
Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran, a descriptor is not used.
However, for cases where the called routine needs the information in the
Compaq Fortran descriptor, declare the routine with an assumed-shape or pointer argument and an explicit interface.
The byte components of the Compaq Fortran descriptor follow:
• Byte 0 contains a count of the number of dimensions (rank).
• Byte 1 should always contain a 1.
• Byte 2 contains the data type of the result, as follows:
1 for INTEGER (KIND=1)
2 for INTEGER (KIND=2)
3 for INTEGER (KIND=4)
4 for INTEGER (KIND=8)
5 for LOGICAL (KIND=1)
6 for LOGICAL (KIND=2)
7 for LOGICAL (KIND=4)
8 for LOGICAL (KIND=8)
9 for REAL (KIND=4)
10 for REAL (KIND=8)
11 for REAL (KIND=16)
12 for COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8
11–10 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
13 for COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16
14 for CHARACTER
15 for RECORD
17 for COMPLEX (KIND=16) or COMPLEX*32
• Bytes 3 to 7 (inclusive) are reserved.
• Bytes 8 to 15 contain the element length for character data, in bytes.
• Bytes 16 to 23 contain the address of the first element of an array.
• Bytes 24 to 39 are reserved.
• The remaining bytes (40 to 207) contain information about each array dimension, as follows:
Bytes 40 to 63 contain dimension information for rank 1
Bytes 64 to 87 contain dimension information for rank 2
Bytes 88 to 111 contain dimension information for rank 3
Bytes 112 to 135 contain dimension information for rank 4
Bytes 136 to 159 contain dimension information for rank 5
Bytes 160 to 183 contain dimension information for rank 6
Bytes 184 to 207 contain dimension information for rank 7
Within the dimension information (24 bytes) for each rank:
• Bytes 0 to 7 contain the number of bytes between two successive elements in this dimension.
• Bytes 8 to 15 contain the upper bound.
• Bytes 16 to 23 contain the lower bound.
For example, consider the following declaration:
.
.
.
integer,target :: a(10,10) integer,pointer :: p(:,:) p => a(9:1:-2,1:9:3) call f(p)
The descriptor for actual argument p would contain the following values:
• Byte 0 contains 2 (number of dimensions).
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–11
• Byte 1 contains 1 (always).
• Byte 2 contains 3 (data type of the result is the default INTEGER size, usually INTEGER (KIND=4)).
• Bytes 3 to 15 are reserved.
• Bytes 16 to 23 contain the address of the first element.
• Bytes 24 to 39 are reserved.
• Bytes 40 to 63 contain dimension information for rank 1, as follows:
Bytes 40 to 47 contain –8 (distance between elements)
Bytes 48 to 55 contain 5 (upper bound)
Bytes 56 to 63 contain 1 (lower bound)
• Bytes 64 to 87 contain dimension information for rank 2, as follows:
Bytes 64 to 71 contain 120 (distance between elements)
Bytes 72 to 80 contain 3 (upper bound)
Bytes 81 to 87 contain 1 (lower bound)
• Byte 87 is the last byte.
11.1.8 Argument-Passing Mechanisms and Built-In Functions
When a Compaq Fortran program needs to call a routine written in a different language (or in some cases a Fortran subprogram), there may be a need to use a form other the Compaq Fortran default passing mechanisms. For example, numeric arguments may need to be passed by immediate value instead of by reference.
To change the Compaq Fortran default mechanisms with the Compaq Fortran built-in functions, use the following functions:
• To change how an argument is passed (default passing mechanism), use the %VAL or %REF built-in functions for specific arguments.
• To compute the address of a storage element as an integer value, use the
%LOC built-in function in any arithmetic expression.
The %VAL or %REF functions can only be used as unparenthesized arguments in actual argument lists.
Instead of the Compaq Fortran built-in functions, you can use the cDEC$
ATTRIBUTES directive to change the Compaq Fortran default passing mechanisms for either an entire call or for individual arguments. (See
Section 11.2.2).
11–12 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
11.1.8.1 Passing Addresses — %LOC Function
The %LOC built-in function computes the address of a storage element as an
INTEGER*8 (Alpha UNIX systems) value. You can then use this value in an arithmetic expression. It has the following form:
%LOC(arg)
The %LOC function is particularly useful for non-Fortran procedures that may require argument data structures containing the addresses of storage elements.
In such cases, the data structures should be declared volatile to protect them from possible optimizations.
For More Information:
• On optimization and declaring volatile data, see Section 5.8.3.
• On the VOLATILE attribute, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
11.1.8.2 Passing Arguments by Immediate Value — %VAL Function
The %VAL function passes the argument list entry as a 64-bit immediate value on Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux systems. It has the following form:
%VAL(arg)
The argument-list entry generated by the compiler is the value of the argument
(arg). Because argument-list entries are eight bytes long, the argument value must be an INTEGER (including INTEGER*8), LOGICAL (including
LOGICAL*8), or REAL (REAL*4 and REAL*8) constant, variable, array element, or expression.
If a COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX (KIND=8) argument is passed by value, two REAL arguments (one contains the real part; the other the imaginary part) are passed by immediate value. If a COMPLEX parameter to a routine is specified as received by value (or given the C attribute), two REAL parameters are received and stored in the real and imaginary parts of the
COMPLEX parameter specified. COMPLEX*32 arguments cannot be passed by value.
If the value is a byte, word, or longword, it is sign-extended to eight bytes.
To produce a zero-extended value rather than a sign-extended value, use the
ZEXT intrinsic function (see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual).
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–13
11.1.8.3 Passing Arguments by Reference — %REF Function
The %REF function passes the argument by reference. It has the following form:
%REF(arg)
The argument-list entry the compiler generates will contain the address of the argument, (arg). The argument value can be a record name, a procedure name, or a numeric or character expression, array, character array section, or array element. In Compaq Fortran, passing by reference is the default mechanism for numeric values, so the %REF call is usually not needed. Passing character arrays with %REF caused the hidden length to be omitted.
11.1.8.4 Examples of Argument Passing Built-in Functions
The following examples show the use of the argument list built-in functions:
• The first constant is passed by reference. The second constant is passed by immediate value:
CALL SUB(2,%VAL(2))
• The first character variable is passed by address and hidden length. The second character variable is passed by reference (no hidden length):
CHARACTER(LEN=10) A,B
CALL SUB(A,%REF(B))
• Both arrays are passed by reference:
INTEGER IARY(20), JARY(20)
CALL SUB(IARY,JARY)
For an example of passing integer data by value (using %VAL) and by reference
(default) to a C function, see Section 11.3.7.
11.2 Using the cDEC$ ALIAS and cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES
Directives
This section provides reference information about the following directives:
• The cDEC$ ALIAS (or !DEC$ ALIAS or *DEC$ ALIAS) directive lets you specify a name for an external subprogram that differs from the name used by the calling subprogram.
• The cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES (or !DEC$ ATTRIBUTES or *DEC$
ATTRIBUTES) directive lets you specify the properties for external data objects and procedures. This includes using C language rules, specifying how an argument is passed (passing mechanism), and specifying an alias for an external routine.
11–14 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
11.2.1 cDEC$ ALIAS directive
Use the cDEC$ ALIAS directive to specify that the external name of an external subprogram is different from the name by which the calling procedure references it.
The syntax is: cDEC$ ALIAS internal-name, external-name
The internal-name program unit.
is the name of the subprogram as used in the current
The external-name is either a quoted character constant (delimited by single quotation marks) or a symbolic name.
If external-name is a quoted character constant, the value of that constant is used as the external name for the specified internal name. The character constant is used as it appears, with no modifications for case or addition or removal of punctuation characters. The default for the Compaq Fortran compiler is to force the name into lowercase and append an underscore unless directed otherwise.
If external-name is a symbolic name, the symbolic name (in lowercase) is used as the external name for the specified internal name and an underscore is appended. Any other declaration of the specified symbolic name is ignored for the purposes of the ALIAS directive.
The Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux linker may have restrictions on what appears in an external name and whether external names are case-sensitive.
For example, assume the following program (free source form):
PROGRAM ALIAS_EXAMPLE
!DEC$ ALIAS ROUT1, ’ROUT1A’
!DEC$ ALIAS ROUT2, ’routine2_’
!DEC$ ALIAS ROUT3, rout3A
CALL ROUT1
CALL ROUT2
CALL ROUT3
END PROGRAM ALIAS_EXAMPLE
The three calls are to external routines named ROUT1A, routine2_, and rout3A. Because rout3A is not in quotation marks (character constant), a trailing underscore is added (Compaq Fortran adds a trailing underscore to external names on UNIX systems unless directed otherwise) and the letter
A becomes a lowercase a . For details about adding underscores on Linux systems, see Section 11.3.2.
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–15
This feature can be useful when porting code in which different routine naming conventions are in use. By adding or removing the cDEC$ ALIAS directive, you can specify an alternate routine name without recoding the application.
You can also use the DECORATE option with the ALIAS option so the external name specified in ALIAS has prefix and postfix decorations performed on it that are associated with the calling mechanism that is in effect.
The cDEC$ ALIAS and cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES ALIAS directives are synonymous.
11.2.2 cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES Directive
Use the cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES directive to specify properties for data objects and procedures. These properties let you specify how data is passed and the rules for invoking procedures. The cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES directive is intended to simplify mixed-language calls with Compaq Fortran routines written in C or Assembler. The STDCALL keyword is synonymous with the C keyword on
Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux systems.
The cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES directive takes the following form: cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES att [,att]... :: object [,object]...
In this form: c
Is the letter or character (c, C, *, !) that introduces the directive (see the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual).
att
Is one of the keywords listed in the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual. For example, C, ALIAS, REFERENCE, or VALUE.
object
Is the name of a data object used as an argument or procedure. Only one object is allowed when using the C, STDCALL, or ALIAS properties.
The Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual shows valid combinations of properties with the various types of objects.
The ATTRIBUTES options C, STDCALL, REFERENCE, VALUE, and
VARYING all affect the calling convention of routines.
By default, Fortran passes all data by reference (except the hidden length argument of strings, which is a special case). If the C or STDCALL option is used, the default changes to passing almost all data by value except arrays.
11–16 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
In addition to the calling-convention options C and STDCALL, you can also specify argument options, VALUE and REFERENCE, to pass arguments by value or by reference, regardless of the calling convention option. Arrays can only be passed by reference.
Table 11–1 summarizes the effect of the most common Fortran callingconvention directives.
Table 11–1 Calling Conventions for ATTRIBUTES Options
Arguments
Scalar
Scalar [value]
Scalar [reference]
String
String [value]
String [reference]
Array
Array [value]
Array [reference]
Derived type
Default
Reference
Value
Reference
Reference, Len:
End
Error
Reference, No Len
Reference
Error
Reference
Reference
Derived type
[value]
Value, size dependent
Reference Derived type
[reference]
F90 Pointer Descriptor
F90 Pointer [value] Error
F90 Pointer
[reference]
Descriptor
C or STDCALL
Value
Value
Reference
String (1:1)
String(1:1)
Reference: No Len
Reference
Error
Reference
Value, size dependent
Value, size dependent
Reference
Descriptor
Error
Descriptor
C or STDCALL with
REFERENCE
Reference
Value
Reference
Reference, Len:
End
String(1:1)
Reference: No Len
Reference
Error
Reference
Reference
Value, size dependent
Reference
Descriptor
Error
Descriptor
The terms used in Table 11–1 mean the following:
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–17
Term
[value]
[reference]
Value
Reference
Len: End
No Len
String(1:1)
Error
Descriptor
Size dependent
Description
Assigned to the VALUE property
Assigned to the REFERENCE property
The argument value is pushed on the stack. All values are padded to the next 8-byte boundary.
The 8-byte argument address is pushed on the stack.
The length of the string is pushed (by value) on the stack after all of the other arguments.
The length of the string is not available to the called procedure.
For string arguments, the first character is converted to
INTEGER(KIND=8) as in ICHAR(string(1:1)) and pushed onto the stack by value.
Produces a compiler error.
8-byte address of the array descriptor.
Derived-type arguments specified by value are passed as follows:
• Arguments of 1 to 4 bytes are passed by value
• Arguments of 5 to 8 bytes are passed by value in two registers
• Arguments of more than 8 bytes provide value semantics by passing a temporary storage address by reference.
The properties are described in the following sections.
11.2.2.1 C Property
The C property provides a convenient way for code written in Compaq Fortran to interact with routines written in C.
When applied to a subprogram, the C property defines the subprogram as having a specific set of calling conventions.
Table 11–2 summarizes the differences between the calling conventions:
11–18 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
Table 11–2 C Property and External Names
Item Fortran Default
Trailing underscore added to procedure names
Case of external subprogram names
Yes
Lowercase, unless the ALIAS property is specified
Argument passing See Table 11–3
C Property Specified
No
Lowercase, unless the
ALIAS property is specified
See Table 11–3
In addition to the case of external names and the trailing underscore, the C property affects how arguments are passed, as described in Table 11–3.
Table 11–3 C Property and Argument Passing
Argument Variable Type
Scalar (includes derived types)
Scalar, with VALUE specified
Scalar, with REFERENCE specified
String
String, with VALUE specified
String, with REFERENCE specified
Arrays, including pointers to arrays
Fortran Default
Passed by reference
Passed by value
Passed by reference
C Property Specified for Routine
Passed by value
Passed by value
Passed by reference
Passed by reference with hidden length
Error
Passed by reference with
no hidden length
Always passed by reference or descriptor
String (1:1) padded to integer length
String (1:1) padded to integer length
Passed by reference with no hidden length
Always passed by reference or descriptor
If C is specified for a subprogram, arguments (except for arrays and characters) are passed by value. Subprograms using standard Fortran 95/90 conventions pass arguments by reference.
Character arguments are passed as follows:
• By Fortran default, hidden lengths are put at the end of the argument list.
• If C is specified without REFERENCE for the arguments, the first character of the string is passed by value (padded with zeros out to
INTEGER*8 length).
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–19
• If C is specified with REFERENCE for the argument (or if only
REFERENCE is specified), the string is passed with no length.
When the C property is specified, the case of the external name (EXTERNAL statement) is forced to lowercase, even if -names as_is or -names uppercase was specified during compilation. To allow a mixed case or uppercase name when the C property is specified, specify the ALIAS property for the same subprogram or external name.
Example 11–1 shows the Compaq Fortran code that calls the C function pnst
(no underscore) by using the cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES C directive and C language passing conventions.
Example 11–1 Calling C Functions and Passing Integer Arguments
! Using !DEC$ ATTRIBUTES to pass argument to C. File: pass_int_cdec.f90
interface subroutine pnst(i)
!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES C :: pnst integer i end subroutine end interface integer :: i i = 99 call pnst(i) print *,"99==",i end
! pass by value
Example 11–2 shows the C function called pnst (no underscore) that is called by the example program shown in Example 11–1.
Example 11–2 Calling C Functions and Passing Integer Arguments
/* get integer by value from Fortran. File: pass_int_cdec_c.c */ void pnst(int i) { printf("99==%d\n",i); i = 100;
}
The files (shown in Example 11–1 and Example 11–2) might be compiled, linked, and run as follows:
11–20 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
% cc -c pass_int_cdec_c.c
% f90 -o pass_cdec pass_int_cdec.f90 pass_int_cdec_c.o
% pass_cdec
99==99
99== 99
11.2.2.2 ALIAS Property
You can specify the ALIAS property as cDEC$ ALIAS or as cDEC$
ATTRIBUTES ALIAS; they are equivalent. The ALIAS property allows you to specify that the external name of an external subprogram is different from the name by which the calling procedure references it (see Section 11.2.1).
When both ALIAS and C properties are used for a subprogram or external
(EXTERNAL statement) name, the ALIAS property takes precedence over the
C property. This allows you to specify case-sensitive names (the C attribute sets them to lowercase).
11.2.2.3 REFERENCE and VALUE Properties
The following cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES properties specify how a dummy argument is to be passed:
• REFERENCE specifies a dummy argument’s memory location is to be passed, not the argument’s value.
• VALUE specifies a dummy argument’s value is to be passed, not the argument’s memory location.
When a complex (KIND=4 or KIND=8) argument is passed by value, two floating-point arguments (one containing the real part, the other containing the imaginary part) are passed by immediate value. Conversely, if a COMPLEX parameter to a routine is specified as received by value (or given the C attribute), two REAL parameters are received and stored in the real and imaginary parts of the COMPLEX parameter specified.
Character values, substrings, assumed-size arrays, and adjustable arrays cannot be passed by value; neither can REAL*16 and COMPLEX*32 data.
When REFERENCE is specified for a character argument, the string is passed with no length.
VALUE is the default if the C property is specified in the subprogram definition.
Consider the following free-form example, which passes an integer by value:
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–21
interface subroutine foo (a)
!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES C :: foo integer a end subroutine foo end interface
This subroutine can be invoked from Compaq Fortran using the name foo (no underscore): integer i i = 1 call foo(i) end program
This is the actual subroutine code: subroutine foo (i)
!DEC$ ATTRIBUTES C :: foo integer i i = i + 1
.
.
end subroutine foo
For More Information:
• On Compaq Fortran intrinsic data types, see Chapter 9.
• On the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• On the C language, see your operating system documentation.
• On passing arguments, function return values, and the contents of registers on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Calling
Standard for Alpha Systems.
11.2.2.4 EXTERN and VARYING Properties
The EXTERN property specifies that a variable is allocated in another source file. EXTERN can be used in global variable declarations, but it must not be applied to dummy arguments.
You must use EXTERN when accessing variables declared in other languages.
The VARYING directive allows a variable number of calling arguments. If
VARYING is specified, the C property must also be specified.
11–22 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
When using the VARYING directive, either the first argument must be a number indicating how many arguments to process, or the last argument must be a special marker (such as 01 ) indicating it is the final argument. The sequence of the arguments, and types and kinds, must be compatible with the called procedure.
For More Information:
• See the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual.
11.3 Calling Between Compaq Fortran and C
Before creating a mixed-language program that contains procedures written in
Compaq Fortran and C, you need to know how to:
• Compile and link the program
• Use the platform-specific conventions for procedure names on Compaq
Tru64 UNIX systems
• Use equivalent data arguments passed between the two languages
On Linux Alpha systems, this section assumes the usage of the Compaq C compiler ( ccc command).
11.3.1 Compiling and Linking Files
Use the f90 or fort command (and not the cc or ccc command) to:
• Compile and link Compaq Fortran source files
• Link Compaq Fortran object files
• Link C object files with Compaq Fortran source or object files
The f90 and fort commands pass the appropriate libraries to
Compaq Fortran libraries and libc .
ld , including the
You can use the cc files into object files.
and ccc commands with the -c option to compile C source
For example, the following f90
Fortran calling main program command compiles and links the Compaq ex1.f90
and the called C function uopen_.c
:
% f90 ex1.f90 uopen_.c
You can use the cc or, on Linux systems, the ccc command to compile the C program into an object file before the f90 command:
% cc -c uopen_.c
% f90 ex1.f90 uopen_.o
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–23
The cc ( ccc ) and f90 ( fort ) commands:
1.
Apply cpp to the uopen_.c
file (done by cc and ccc )
2.
Compile uopen_.c
into the object file uopen_.o
(done by cc and ccc )
3.
Compile ex1.f90
into an object file (done by f90 and fort )
4.
Link both resulting object files to create the file a.out
file (done by ld )
When a C program calls a Compaq Fortran subprogram, specify the nofor_main option on the f90 command line:
-
% cc -c cmain.c
% f90 -nofor_main cmain.o fsub.f90
To view the preprocessor and compilers used and the libraries passed to the f90 command -v option.
ld , use
For More Information:
• On the interaction of the options passed to cc f90 command with other components, including
, see Section 2.2.
• On the commands used to compile a Compaq Fortran and C example program, see Section 11.3.8.
11.3.2 Procedures and External Names
When designing a program that will use Compaq Fortran and C, be aware of the following general rules and available Compaq Fortran capabilities:
• The ld linker only allows one main program. Declare either the Compaq
Fortran or the C program, but not both, as the main program. When the
C program is the main program, use the command line (see Section 11.3.1).
-nofor_main option on the f90
In Compaq Fortran, you can declare a main program:
With the PROGRAM and END PROGRAM statements
With an END statement
To create a Compaq Fortran subprogram, declare the subprogram with such statements as FUNCTION and END FUNCTION or SUBROUTINE and END SUBROUTINE.
In C, you need to use a main( ) declaration for a main program. To create a C function (subprogram), declare the appropriate function name and omit the main( ) declaration.
• When declaring external names in C that will be called by Compaq Fortran, use lowercase.
11–24 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
Compaq Fortran makes external names lowercase by default, so you need to make the C function name definition and declarations with lowercase letters. Although Compaq Fortran is case-insensitive, the C compiler and ld linker both treat external names as case-sensitive.
• In Compaq Fortran, external names and corresponding declarations have a trailing underscore ( _ ) appended to their name.
Due to differences in the argument-passing mechanisms and the data types between C and Compaq Fortran, convention requires that a trailing underscore be appended to external names (including function declarations) in the C program. This avoids accidental calls across the two languages.
The Compaq Fortran compiler, by default, appends the underscore to references to external procedure names as well as Compaq Fortran procedure declarations. Any problems with the naming convention are reported by the linker when it searches for external names in an object file.
For a C program to call a Compaq Fortran subprogram, the calling C program routine must append an underscore ( _ ) to the name of the
Compaq Fortran function (or subroutine) (if using the Compaq Fortran defaults). For example, if a C program wants to call a Compaq Fortran function named exponent , the C source code must refer to it as exponent_ .
Similarly, for a Compaq Fortran program to call a C function, the C function must use lowercase letters and have a trailing underscore. By default, the Compaq Fortran compiler converts external names to lowercase and appends a trailing underscore character when calling C language routines from Compaq Fortran. For example, if a Compaq Fortran program calls a C function using the name function needs to be declared as conarray in the function reference, the C conarray_ .
• You can consider using some of the Compaq Fortran facilities provided to simplify the Compaq Fortran and C language interface:
You can use the cDEC$ ALIAS and cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES directives to specify alternative names for routines and change default passing mechanisms (see Section 11.2).
You can consider using the f90 option -assume nounderscore to prevent
Compaq Fortran from appending an underscore to most external names
(see Section 3.15).
Instead of directly calling Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux system and library routines, consider using the language interface ‘‘jacket’’ routines provided by Compaq Fortran (see Chapter 12).
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–25
To perform I/O not supported by the Compaq Fortran run-time system, you can open a file with a C function and then use Compaq Fortran I/O statements to perform I/O (see Section 7.9). Indicate the name of the C function with the OPEN statement USEROPEN specifier, which causes the OPEN statement to call the C function to open the file.
A C main program can obtain more control by calling the Compaq
Fortran run-time initialization routine for_rtl_init_ and related
Compaq Fortran library routines. (See Section 12.2, 3f Routines.)
11.3.3 Invoking a C Function from Compaq Fortran
You can use a function reference or a CALL statement to invoke a C function from a Compaq Fortran main or subprogram.
If a value will be returned, use a function reference:
C Function Declaration
data-type calc_(argument-list)
{
...
} ;
Compaq Fortran Function Invocation
EXTERNAL CALC
data-type :: CALC, variable-name
...
variable-name=CALC(argument-list)
...
If no value is returned, use a void return value and a CALL statement:
C Function Declaration void calc_(argument-list)
{
...
} ;
Compaq Fortran Subroutine Invocation
EXTERNAL CALC
...
CALL CALC(argument-list)
11.3.4 Invoking a Compaq Fortran Function or Subroutine from C
A C main program or function can invoke a Compaq Fortran function or subroutine by using a function prototype declaration and invocation.
If a value is returned, use a FUNCTION declaration:
Compaq Fortran Declaration
FUNCTION CALC(argument-list)
data-type :: CALC
...
END FUNCTION CALC
C Invocation extern data-type calc_(argument-list)
data-type variable-name;
variable-name=calc_(argument-list);
...
11–26 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
If no value is returned, use a SUBROUTINE declaration and a value: void return
Compaq Fortran Declaration
SUBROUTINE CALC(argument-list)
...
END SUBROUTINE CALC
C Invocation extern void calc_(argument-list) calc_(argument-list);
...
11.3.5 Equivalent Data Types for Function Return Values
Both C and Compaq Fortran pass most function return data by value, but equivalent data types must be used. Table 11–4 lists equivalent function declarations in Compaq Fortran and C. See Table 11–5 for a complete list of data declarations.
Table 11–4 Equivalent Function Declarations in C and Compaq Fortran
C Function Declaration Compaq Fortran Function Declaration float rfort_( ) double dfort_( ) int ifort_( ) function rfort( ) real (kind=4) :: rfort function dfort( ) real (kind=8) :: dfort function ifort( ) integer (kind=4) :: ifort
Because there are no corresponding data types in C, you should avoid calling Compaq Fortran functions of type REAL (KIND=16), COMPLEX, and DOUBLE COMPLEX, unless for complex data you pass a struct of two float (or double ) C values (see Section 11.3.10).
The Compaq Fortran LOGICAL data types contain a zero if the value is false and a –1 if the value is true, which works with C conditional and if statements.
A character-valued Compaq Fortran function is equivalent to a C language routine with two extra initial arguments added by the Compaq Fortran compiler:
• Address of the result
• Length of the result
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–27
For More Information:
• On the language interface ‘‘jacket’’ routines provided by Compaq Fortran, see Chapter 12.
• On opening a file using a C USEROPEN function, see Section 7.9.
• On passing character arguments, see Section 11.3.8.
• On Compaq Fortran intrinsic data types, see Chapter 9.
• On the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
11.3.6 Argument Association and Equivalent Data Types
Compaq Fortran follows the argument-passing rules described in
Section 11.1.4. These rules include:
• Passing arguments by reference (address).
• Receiving arguments by reference (address).
• Compaq Tru64 UNIX convention of appending a trailing underscore to external names and passing character data by using an extra argument for the character length.
• Compaq Linux convention of appending two trailing underscores to external names.
11.3.6.1 Compaq Fortran Intrinsic Data Types
Compaq Fortran lets you specify the lengths of its intrinsic numeric data types with the following:
• The kind parameter, such as REAL (KIND=4). Intrinsic integer and logical kinds are 1, 2, 4, and 8. Intrinsic real and complex kinds are 4
(single-precision), 8 (double-precision), and 16.
• A default-length name without a kind parameter, such as REAL or
INTEGER. Certain f90 command options can change the default kind, as described in Section 3.53 (for INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations),
Section 3.78 (for REAL and COMPLEX declarations), and Section 3.34 (for
DOUBLE PRECISION declarations).
• The Compaq Fortran extension of appending a *n size specifier to the default-length name, such as INTEGER*8.
• For double-precision real or complex data, the word DOUBLE followed by the default-length name without a kind parameter (specifically DOUBLE
PRECISION and DOUBLE COMPLEX).
11–28 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
The following declarations of the integer An are equivalent (unless you specified the appropriate f90 command option to override the default integer size):
INTEGER (KIND=4) :: A1
INTEGER (4) :: A2
INTEGER
INTEGER*4
:: A3
:: A4
Character data in Compaq Fortran is passed and received by address, using an extra hidden-length argument to contain the string length. Dummy character arguments can use assumed-length syntax for accepting character data of varying length.
Consider the following Compaq Fortran subroutine declaration:
SUBROUTINE H (C)
CHARACTER(LEN=*) C
The equivalent C function declaration is: void h_(char *c, int len);
The Fortran subroutine can be called from C as follows:
.
.
.
char *chars[15]; h_(chars, 15);
For More Information:
• On Compaq Fortran intrinsic data types, see Chapter 9.
• On passing character data (example program), see Section 11.3.8.
11.3.6.2 Equivalent Compaq Fortran and C Data Types
The calling routine must pass the same number of arguments expected by the called routine. For each argument passed, the manner (mechanism) of passing the argument and the expected data type must match what is expected by the called routine. For instance, C usually passes data by value and Compaq
Fortran typically passes argument data by reference (address and, when appropriate, length).
You must determine the appropriate data types in each language that are compatible. When you call a C routine from a Compaq Fortran main program, certain built-in functions may be useful to change the default passing mechanism, as discussed in Section 11.1.8.
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–29
If the calling routine cannot pass an argument to the called routine because of a language difference, you may need to rewrite the called routine. Another option is to create an interface jacket routine that handles the passing differences.
When a C program calls a Compaq Fortran subprogram, all arguments must be passed by reference because this is what the Compaq Fortran routine expects.
To pass arguments by reference, the arguments must specify addresses rather than values. To pass constants or expressions, their contents must first be placed in variables; then the addresses of the variables are passed.
When you pass the address of the variable, the data types must correspond as shown in Table 11–5 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems.
Table 11–5 Compaq Fortran and C Data Types
Compaq Fortran Data
Declaration C Data Declaration integer (kind=2) x integer (kind=4) x integer (kind=8) x logical x real x double precision x real (kind=16) x complex (kind=4) x complex (kind=8) x complex (kind=16) x character (len=5) x short int x; int x; long int x; _ _int64 x; unsigned x; float x; double x;
None
1 struct { float real; float imag } x; struct { double dreal; double dimag } x; struct { long double dreal; long double dimag } x;
1 char x[5]
1
The equivalent C declaration is long double (may not support X_floating).
Be aware of the various sizes supported by Compaq Fortran for integer, logical, and real variables (see Chapter 9), and use the size consistent with that used in the C routine.
Compaq Fortran LOGICAL data types contain a zero if the value is false and a –1 if the value is true, which works with C language conditional and if statements.
11–30 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
When one of the arguments is character data, the Compaq Fortran compiler passes the address of the character data as an argument and adds the length of the character string to the end of the argument list (see Section 11.1.4).
When a C program calls a Compaq Fortran subprogram, the C program must explicitly specify these items in an argument list in the following order:
1.
For a character function, the address of the character function result and the length of the character function result
2.
For normal arguments, the addresses of arguments or functions
3.
The lengths of any character string arguments, specified as integer variables (passed in the same order as the arguments)
For example, consider the following Compaq Fortran function declaration that returns character data: character(len=8) function ch() ch = ’ABCDEFG’ //CHAR(0) return end
The following C code invokes the Compaq Fortran function as ch_, explicitly passing the address and length of the character data arguments, as follows: char s[8] ch_(&s[0],8);
Any character string passed by Compaq Fortran is not automatically nullterminated. To null-terminate a string from Compaq Fortran, use the CHAR intrinsic function (as shown in the previous example and described in the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual).
11.3.7 Example of Passing Integer Data to C Functions
Example 11–3 shows C code that declares the two functions hln_ and mgn_
These functions display the arguments received. The C language function
.
hln_ expects the argument by value, whereas mgn_ expects the argument by reference (address).
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–31
Example 11–3 C Functions Called by a Compaq Fortran Program
/* get integer by value from Fortran. File: pass_int_to_c.c */ void hln_(int i) { printf("99==%d\n",i); i = 100;
}
/* get integer by reference from Fortran */ void mgn_(int *i) { printf("99==%d\n",*i);
*i = 101;
}
Example 11–4 shows the Compaq Fortran (main program) code that calls the two C functions mgn_ and hln_ .
Example 11–4 Calling C Functions and Passing Integer Arguments
! Using %REF and %VAL to pass argument to C. File: pass_int_to_cfuncs.f90
integer :: i i = 99 call hln(%VAL(i)) print *,"99==",i
! pass by value
! pass by reference - %REF is optional in this case call mgn(%REF(i)) print *,"101==",i i = 99 call mgn(i) print *,"101==",i
! pass by reference
The files (shown in Example 11–3 and Example 11–4) might be compiled, linked, and run as follows:
% cc -c pass_int_to_c.c
% f90 -o pass_int_to_c pass_int_to_cfuncs.f90 pass_int_to_c.o
% pass_int_to_c
99==99
99==
99==99
101==
99==99
101==
99
101
101
11–32 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
11.3.8 Example of Passing Character Data Between Compaq Fortran and C
The following examples show a Compaq Fortran program that calls a C function that serves as an interface (jacket) routine to the setenv library routine (described in setenv (3)).
The Compaq Fortran program is named test_setenv.f
.
The C program that contains the fort_setenv.c
.
setenv_ interface function is named
The Compaq Fortran program performs the following tasks:
1.
Calls the getenv function (a Section 3f library routine) and displays the current value of the environment variable PRINTER (described in getenv (3f))
2.
Calls the setenv_ interface function to set the new value for the environment variable PRINTER
3.
Calls the getenv function again and displays the new value of the environment variable PRINTER
Example 11–5 shows the Compaq Fortran program test_setenv.f
.
!
!
!
!
Example 11–5 Compaq Fortran Program Calling a C Function
!
!
!
test_setenv.f
character(len=50) :: ename, evalue integer :: overwrite, setenv, ret
Use 3f routine getenv to return PRINTER environment variable value call getenv(’PRINTER’,evalue)
Now look at current value write(6,*) ’Previous env. variable value of PRINTER is: ’, evalue
Use setenv C function. Overwrite flag = non-zero means overwrite any existing environment variable.
Returns -1 if there was an error in setting the environment variable ename = ’PRINTER’ evalue = ’lps40’ overwrite = 1 ret = setenv(ename,evalue,overwrite)
(continued on next page)
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–33
Example 11–5 (Cont.) Compaq Fortran Program Calling a C Function
!
if (ret < 0) write (6,*) ’Error setting env. variable’
Now look at current value evalue = ’ ’ call getenv(’PRINTER’,evalue) write(6,*) ’New env. variable value of PRINTER is: ’, evalue end
Example 11–6 shows the C program fort_setenv.c
.
Example 11–6 C Interface Function Called by Compaq Fortran
/* fort_setenv.c */
#include <stdlib.h> int setenv_(char *ename,char *evalue,int *overwrite,int ilen1,int ilen2)
{ int setenv(), lnblnk_(), i1, i2, ow, rc; char *p1, *p2;
/* Get string length of each input parameter */ i1 = lnblnk_(ename,ilen1); i2 = lnblnk_(evalue,ilen2);
/* Allocate temporary storage */ p1 = malloc((unsigned) i1+1); if( p1 == NULL ) return(-1); p2 = malloc((unsigned) i2+1); if( p2 == NULL ) { free(p1); return(-1);
}
/* Copy strings, and NUL terminate */ strncpy(p1,ename,i1); p1[i1] = ’\0’; strncpy(p2,evalue,i2); p2[i2] = ’\0’; ow = *overwrite;
/* Call the setenv library routine to set the environment variable */
(continued on next page)
11–34 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
Example 11–6 (Cont.) C Interface Function Called by Compaq Fortran rc = setenv(p1, p2, ow); free(p1); free(p2); return(rc);
}
The setenv_ function (shown in Example 11–6) sets the environment variable
PRINTER to the value lps40 (passed as arguments from the Compaq Fortran calling program) by calling the set to 1.
setenv library routine with the overwrite flag
The C function (shown in Example 11–6) uses the passed length to find the last nonblank character and uses the string up to that character. The C variables ilen1 and ilen2 receive the hidden length of the character strings ename and evalue respectively. The C function allocates storage, including an extra byte for the null-terminator to each string. The extra byte is used as part of an argument when calling the setenv library routine.
The following Compaq Fortran code in Example 11–5 calls the function: setenv_ C ret=setenv(ename,evalue,overwrite)
This function invocation passes the following arguments to the C function setenv_ :
Compaq
Fortran
Variable ename evalue overwrite not declared not declared
Purpose
Environment variable name
Environment variable string
Overwrite flag for setenv
Hidden length of ename
Hidden length of evalue
Data Type character character integer integer integer
How Passed by reference, not null-terminated by reference, not null-terminated by reference by value by value
Data passed from Compaq Fortran to C is passed by reference. When passing character data from Compaq Fortran to C, the following rules apply:
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–35
• The Compaq Fortran character argument is not automatically terminated by a null string. To null-terminate a string, use the CHAR intrinsic function (described in the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual).
• An additional (hidden) argument that contains the string length is passed by value.
The C function (in Example 11–6) is declared as setenv_ and accepts the
Compaq Fortran arguments with the following function declaration: int setenv_(ename,evalue,overwrite,ilen1,ilen2) char *ename, *evalue; int *overwrite; int ilen1, ilen2;
The status returned from the C function to the calling Compaq Fortran program is an integer passed by value. (The C function obtains this value from setenv library routine.)
To create the executable program, the files might be compiled with the following commands:
% cc -c fort_setenv.c
% f90 test_setenv.f fort_setenv.o
When executed, a.out
displays:
% a.out
Previous env. variable value of PRINTER is: lpr
New env. variable value of PRINTER is: lps40
11.3.9 Example of Passing Complex Data to C Functions
Example 11–7 shows Compaq Fortran code that passes a COMPLEX (KIND=4) value (1.0,0.0) by immediate value to subroutine foo . To pass COMPLEX arguments by value, the compiler passes the real and imaginary parts of the argument as two REAL arguments by immediate value.
11–36 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
Example 11–7 Calling C Functions and Passing Complex Arguments
! Using !DEC$ATTRIBUTES to pass COMPLEX argument by value to F90 or C.
! File: cv_main.f90
interface subroutine foo(cplx)
!DEC$ATTRIBUTES C :: foo complex cplx end subroutine end interface complex(kind=4) c c = (1.0,0.0) call foo(c) end
! pass by value
If subroutine foo were written in Compaq Fortran, it might look similar to the following example. In this version of subroutine foo , the COMPLEX parameter is received by immediate value. To accomplish this, the compiler accepts two
REAL parameters by immediate value and stores them into the real and imaginary parts, respectively, of the COMPLEX parameter cplx.
! File: cv_sub.f90
subroutine foo(cplx)
!DEC$ATTRIBUTES C :: foo complex cplx print *, ’The value of the complex number is ’, cplx end subroutine
If subroutine foo were written in C, it might look similar to the following example in which the complex number is explicitly specified as two arguments of type float:
/* File: cv_sub.c */
#include <stdio.h> typedef struct {float c1; float c2;} complex; void foo(complex c)
{ printf("The value of the complex number is (%f,%f)\n", c.c1, c.c2);
}
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–37
The main routine (shown in Example 11–7) might be compiled and linked to the object file created by the compilation of the Compaq Fortran subroutine and then run as follows:
% f90 -o cv cv_main.f90, cv_sub.f90
% cv
The value of the complex number is (1.000000,0.0000000E+00)
The main routine might also be compiled and linked to the object file created by the compilation of the C subroutine and then run as follows:
% cc -c cv_sub.c
% f90 -o cv2 cv_main.f90 cv_sub.f90
% cv2
The value of the complex number is (1.000000,0.000000)
11.3.10 Handling User-Defined Structures
User-defined derived types in Compaq Fortran and user-defined C structures can be passed as arguments if the following conditions are met:
• The elements of the structures use the same alignment conventions (same amount of padding bytes, if any). The default alignment for C structure members is natural alignment. You can use the option or pragma to alter that alignment.
cc -member_alignment
Derived-type data in Compaq Fortran is naturally aligned (the compiler adds needed padding bytes) unless you specify the -align norecords option
(see Section 3.3).
• All elements of the structures are in the same order.
Compaq Fortran orders elements of derived types sequentially. However, those writing standard-conforming programs should not rely on this sequential order because the standard allows elements to be in any order unless the SEQUENCE statement is specified.
• The respective elements of the structures have the same data type and length (kind), as described in Section 11.3.6.
• The structure must be passed by reference (address).
11–38 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
11.3.11 Handling Scalar Pointer Data
When Compaq Fortran passes scalar numeric data with the pointer attribute, how the scalar numeric data gets passed depends on whether or not an interface block is provided:
• If you do not provide an interface block to pass the actual pointer, Compaq
Fortran dereferences the Compaq Fortran pointer and passes the actual data (the target of the pointer) by reference.
• If you do provide an interface block to pass the actual pointer, Compaq
Fortran passes the Compaq Fortran pointer by reference.
When passing scalar numeric data without the pointer attribute, Compaq
Fortran passes the actual data by reference. If the called C function declares the dummy argument for the passed data to be passed by a pointer, it accepts the actual data passed by reference (address) and handles it correctly.
Similarly, when passing scalar data from a C program to a Compaq Fortran subprogram, the C program can use pointers to pass numeric data by reference.
Example 11–8 shows a Compaq Fortran program that passes a scalar
(nonarray) pointer to a C function. Variable x is a pointer to variable y.
The function call to function call to ifunc1_ ifunc2_ uses a procedure interface block, whereas the does not. Because ifunc1_ uses a procedure interface block (explicit interface) and the argument is given the pointer attribute, the pointer is passed. Without an explicit interface (ifunc2_) , the target data is passed.
Example 11–8 Calling C Functions and Passing Pointer Arguments
! Pass scalar pointer argument to C. File: scalar_pointer.f90
interface function ifunc1(a) integer, pointer :: a integer ifunc1 end function end interface integer, pointer :: x integer, target :: y
(continued on next page)
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–39
Example 11–8 (Cont.) Calling C Functions and Passing Pointer Arguments y = 88 x => y print *,ifunc1(x) print *,ifunc2(x) print *,y end
! interface block visible, so pass
! pointer by reference. C expects "int **"
! no interface block visible, so pass
! value of "x" by reference. C expects "int *"
Example 11–9 shows the C function declarations that receive the Compaq
Fortran pointer or target arguments from the example in Example 11–8.
Example 11–9 C Functions Receiving Pointer Arguments
/* C functions Fortran pointers. File: scalar_pointer.c
*/ int ifunc1_(int **a) { printf("a=%d\n",**a);
**a = 99; return 100;
} int ifunc2_(int *a) { printf("a=%d\n",*a);
*a = 77; return 101;
}
The files (shown in Example 11–8 and Example 11–9) might be compiled, linked, and run as follows:
% cc -c scalar_pointer.c
% f90 -o scalar_pointer scalar_pointer.f90 scalar_pointer.o
% scalar_pointer a=88
100 a=99
101
77
11–40 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
11.3.12 Handling Arrays
There are two major differences between the way the C and Compaq Fortran languages handle arrays:
• Compaq Fortran stores arrays with the leftmost subscript varying the fastest (column-major order). With C, the rightmost subscript varies the fastest (row-major order).
• Although the default for the lower bound of an array in Compaq Fortran is 1, you can specify an explicit lower bound of 0 (zero) or another value.
With C the lower bound is 0.
Because of these two factors:
• When a C routine uses an array passed by a Compaq Fortran subprogram, the dimensions of the array and the subscripts must be interchanged and also adjusted for the lower bound of 0 instead of 1 (or a different value).
• When a Compaq Fortran program uses an array passed by a C routine, the dimensions of the array and the subscripts must be interchanged. You also need to adjust for the lower bound being 0 instead of 1, by specifying the lower bound for the Compaq Fortran array as 0.
Compaq Fortran orders arrays in column-major order. The following Compaq
Fortran array declaration for a 2 by 3 array creates elements ordered as y(1,1), y(2,1), y(1,2), y(2,2), y(1,3), y(2,3): integer y(2,3)
The Compaq Fortran declaration for a 2 by 3 array can be modified as follows to have the lowest bound 0 and not 1, resulting in elements ordered as y(0,0), y(1,0), y(0,1), y(1,1), y(0,2), y(1,2): integer y(0:1,0:2)
The following C array declaration for a 3 by 2 array has elements in row-major order as z[0,0], z[0,1], z[1,0], z[1,1], z[2,0], z[2,1]: int z[3][2]
To use C and Compaq Fortran array data:
• Consider using a 0 (zero) as the lower bounds in the Compaq Fortran array declaration.
You may need to have the Compaq Fortran declaration with a lower bound 0 (not 1) for maintenance with C arrays or because of algorithm requirements.
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–41
• Reverse the dimensions in one of the array declaration statements. For example, declare a Compaq Fortran array as 2 by 3 and the C array as 3 by 2. Similarly, when passing array row and column locations between C and Compaq Fortran reverse the dimension numbers (interchange the row and column numbers in a two-dimensional array).
When passing certain array arguments, if you use an explicit interface that specifies the dummy argument as an array with the POINTER attribute or an assumed-shape array, the argument is passed by array descriptor (see
Section 11.1.7).
For information about performance when using multidimensional arrays, see
Section 5.5.
Example 11–10 shows a C function declaration for function prints the passed explicit-shape array.
expshape_ , which
Example 11–10 C Function That Receives an Explicit-Shape Array
/* Get explicit-shape arrays from Fortran */ void expshape_(int x[3][2]) { int i,j; for (i=0;i<3;i++) for (j=0;j<2;j++) printf("x[%d][%d]=%d\n",i,j,x[i][j]);
}
Example 11–11 shows a Compaq Fortran program that calls the C function expshape_ (shown in Example 11–10).
Example 11–11 Compaq Fortran Program That Passes an Explicit-Shape
Array
! Pass an explicit-shape array from Fortran to C.
integer :: x(2,3) x = reshape( (/(i,i=1,6)/), (/2,3/) ) call expshape(x) end
The files (shown in Example 11–10 and Example 11–11) might be compiled, linked, and run as follows:
11–42 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
% cc -c exparray.c
% f90 -o exparray exparray.f90 exparray.o
% exparray x[0][0]=1 x[0][1]=2 x[1][0]=3 x[1][1]=4 x[2][0]=5 x[2][1]=6
For information on the use of array arguments with Compaq Fortran, see
Section 11.1.5.
11.3.13 Handling Common Blocks of Data
The following notes apply to handling common blocks of data between Compaq
Fortran and C:
• In Compaq Fortran, you declare each common block with the COMMON statement. In C, you can use any global variable defined as a struct, but that global variable (an external name) must end with an underscore.
• Data types must match unless you desire implicit equivalencing. If so, you must adhere to the alignment restrictions for Compaq Fortran data types.
• If there are multiple routines that declare data with multiple COMMON statements and the common blocks are of unequal length, the largest of the sizes is used to allocate space.
• A blank common block has a name of _BLNK_ _ .
• You should specify the same alignment characteristics in C and Compaq
Fortran. The default alignment for C structure members is natural alignment. You can use the alter that alignment.
cc -member_alignment option or pragma to
To specify the alignment of common block data items, specify the
-align dcommons or -align commons option when compiling Compaq
Fortran procedures using the f90 command or specify data declarations carefully (see Section 5.4).
The following examples show how C and Compaq Fortran code can access common blocks of data. The C code declares a global structure, calls the f_calc_ Compaq Fortran function to set the values, and prints the values: struct S {int j; float k;}r_; main() { f_calc_(); printf("%d %f\n", r_.j, r_.k);
}
Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming 11–43
The Compaq Fortran function then sets the data values: subroutine f_calc() common /r/j,k real k integer j j = 356 k = 5.9
return end
The C program then prints the structure member values 356 and 5.9 set by the
Compaq Fortran function.
The previous example applies to Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems. On Compaq
Linux systems, the external names with one underscore would have two trailing underscores.
11.4 Calling Between Parallel HPF and Non-Parallel HPF
Code
When calling between parallel HPF and non-parallel HPF code
(TU*X only)
, the
-hpf and -nohpf_main compile-time options are required in certain cases and prohibited in other cases.
11–44 Procedure Data Interfaces and Mixed Language Programming
12
Compaq Fortran Library Routines
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 12.1, Overview of Compaq Fortran Library Routines
• Section 12.2, 3f Routines
• Section 12.3, 3hpf Routines
• Section 12.4, Reference Pages for the 3f and 3hpf Routines
• Section 12.5, EXTERNAL or INTRINSIC Declarations
• Section 12.6, Example Using the 3f Library Routine shcom_connect
• Section 12.7, Example of the 3f Library Routines irand and qsort
12.1 Overview of Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Compaq Fortran library routines consist of two groups of routines, commonly referred to by their Tru64 UNIX or Linux reference page section:
• 3f routines (see Section 12.2, 3f Routines)
• 3hpf routines (see Section 12.3, 3hpf Routines)
12.2 3f Routines
The 3f routines consist of two groups:
• Routines that serve as an interface or ‘‘jacket’’ to Tru64 UNIX or Linux operating system calls and library routines
System calls (section 2 in reference pages) and library routines (section 3 in reference pages) provided with the operating system are typically written for use by the C language. The language interface 3f routines handle the various argument passing and function invocation differences between
Compaq Fortran and C. This simplifies the programming effort needed to call a system call or C language library routine directly.
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–1
• Routines that perform special functions related to the Compaq Fortran run-time library (RTL) or calling between Compaq Fortran and C
Table 12–1 lists the groups of language interface (‘‘jacket’’) 3f library routines.
Table 12–1 Summary of Language Interface (‘‘Jacket’’) 3f Library Routines
Category Routine Names
Standard-Conforming
Alternatives
Bessel mathematical operations
Bit manipulation
Directories and files besj0 , besj1 , besjn , bessel , besy0 , besy1 , besyn , dbesj0 , dbesj1 , dbesjn , dbesy0 , dbesy1 , dbesyn and , bit , lshift , not , or , rshift , xor
None.
Consider using the Compaq
Fortran intrinsics with the same name instead.
None.
Error handling access , chdir , chmod , fstat , flush , fsync , isatty , link , lstat , rename , stat , symlnk , ttynam , umask , unlink gerror , ierrno , perror
I/O
Miscellaneous
Random numbers fgetc getc , index qsort
,
,
, putc drandm random
,
, fputc len , short
, lnblnk
, irand srand
, fseek
,
, system ftell loc irandm ,
,
, long rand ,
,
Use error-handling specifiers to handle Compaq Fortran errors, such as ERR and IOSTAT. Use these routines to handle Tru64
UNIX and Linux errors.
Consider using Compaq Fortran nonadvancing I/O instead of fgetc , fputc , getc , putc .
Instead of index and len , use the Compaq Fortran intrinsic functions INDEX and LEN.
Consider using the Compaq
Fortran intrinsic subroutines
RANDOM_NUMBER and
RANDOM_SEED.
(continued on next page)
12–2 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Table 12–1 (Cont.) Summary of Language Interface (‘‘Jacket’’) 3f Library Routines
Category Routine Names
Standard-Conforming
Alternatives
Return date and time
Return error function
Return process, system, or command-line information
Signals and processes
Virtual memory allocation ctime , dtime , etime , fdate , gmtime , idate , itime , ltime , time erf , derf , erfc , derfc getarg , getcwd , getenv , getgid , getlog , getpid , getuid , iargc abort , alarm , fork , kill , signal , sleep , wait falloc , free , malloc
Consider using the Compaq
Fortran intrinsic subroutine
DATE_AND_TIME or, if you need a subset of the information returned by DATE_AND_
TIME, the intrinsic subroutines
(Compaq extensions) DATE,
IDATE, and TIME.
None.
None.
Instead of abort , consider using the STOP statement.
For arrays and pointers, consider using the standard
Fortran 95/90 ALLOCATABLE attribute or the ALLOCATE and
DEALLOCATE statements.
Table 12–2 describes the 3f routines that provide special functions allowing
Compaq Fortran and C language programs to work together.
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–3
Table 12–2 Summary of 3f Library Routines Providing Special Functions
Routine Name Function and Comments for_rtl_init_ for_rtl_finish_
Allows a C main language program to use the Compaq Fortran run-time library (RTL) environment by initializing the environment, including associated signal handlers; see for_rtl_init_ in Table 12–3.
Allows a C main language program to terminate use of the Compaq
Fortran run-time library (RTL) environment; see for_rtl_finish_ in
Table 12–3.
for_get_fpe for_set_fpe Sets the floating-point exception handling established for the current program unit; see for_set_fpe in Table 12–3.
for_set_reentrancy Sets reentrancy protection for the Fortran RTL.
getfd Returns the file descriptor associated with a unit number, after the
Compaq Fortran run-time library (RTL) environment has opened the file; see getfd in Table 12–3.
omp_*
(TU*X only)
Returns information on the floating-point exception handling established for the current program unit; see for_get_fpe in
Table 12–3.
Various OpenMP Fortran API run-time routines related to parallel processing. See omp_* in Table 12–3 and Section D.1, OpenMP Fortran
API Run-Time Library Routines.
ots*
(TU*X only) shcom_connect
(TU*X only)
Various Compaq Fortran run-time routines related to parallel processing. See ots* in Table 12–3 and Section D.2, Other Parallel
Threads Routines.
Allows multiple processes to access common block data in a shared library (uses memory mapping). See Section 12.6, Example Using the
3f Library Routine shcom_connect.
Table 12–3 describes each Compaq Fortran 3f library routine and lists the appropriate reference page.
For those 3f library routines that serve as interface routines to a system call or a different library routine, the required related routine is listed. Most routines are invoked as functions, with the exception of those noted in the table as subroutines.
12–4 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
besj1 besjn bessel besy0 besy1 besyn bit chdir chmod ctime dbesj0
Table 12–3 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page abort abort (3f) access alarm and besj0 access alarm bit
(3f)
(3f)
(3f) bessel (3f) bessel (3f) bessel (3f) bessel (3f) bessel (3f) bessel (3f) bessel (3f) bit (3f) chdir (3f) chmod (3f) time (3f) bessel (3f)
Description
Terminates the program abnormally and may cause a core dump. Use as a subroutine.
Determines the accessibility of a file.
Executes a subroutine after a specified time.
Returns the bitwise AND of two operands. Use as an intrinsic function.
Returns single-precision (REAL*4) bessel function value (first kind, zero order).
Returns single-precision (REAL*4) bessel function value (first kind, first order).
Returns single-precision (REAL*4) bessel function value (first kind, nth order).
Returns bessel functions.
Returns single-precision (REAL*4) bessel function value (second kind, zero order).
Returns single-precision (REAL*4) bessel function value (second kind, first order).
Returns single-precision (REAL*4) bessel function value (second kind, nth order).
Returns bitwise functions.
Changes the default directory.
Changes the mode of a file.
Returns the system time as a 24character ASCII string.
Returns a double-precision (REAL*8) bessel function value (first kind, zero order).
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–5
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description dbesj1 bessel (3f) dbesjn dbesy0 dbesy1 dbesyn derf derfc dffrac dflmax dflmin dlgamma drand drandm dtime bessel bessel bessel bessel erf erf
(3f)
(3f) flmin flmin flmin lgamma rand
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f) random etime
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
Returns a double-precision (REAL*8) bessel function value (first kind, first order).
Returns a double-precision (REAL*8) bessel function value (first kind, nth order).
Returns a double-precision (REAL*8) bessel function value (second kind, zero order).
Returns a double-precision (REAL*8) bessel function value (second kind, first order).
Returns a double-precision (REAL*8) bessel function value (second kind, nth order).
Returns a double-precision error function.
Returns a double-precision error function (complementary form).
Returns the fractional accuracy of a double-precision floating-point
(REAL*8) number.
Returns maximum positive doubleprecision floating-point (REAL*8) value.
Returns minimum positive doubleprecision floating-point (REAL*8) value.
Returns the REAL*8 log of the gamma function.
Generates a random number. Use drandm instead.
Generates a double-precision (REAL*8) random number.
Returns the elapsed (delta) execution time.
(continued on next page)
12–6 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description erf erf (3f) erfc etime falloc fdate ffrac fgetc flmax flmin flush erf (3f) etime (3f) malloc fdate flmin fgetc flmin flmin flush
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
Returns a single-precision error function.
Returns a single-precision error function (complementary form).
Returns the actual execution time of a process.
Allocates space for an array in virtual memory. Use with malloc and free .
Consider using the ALLOCATABLE attribute or the ALLOCATE and
DEALLOCATE statements.
Returns the date and time in ASCII string. Use as a subroutine.
Returns the fractional accuracy of single-precision floating-point
(REAL*4) numbers.
Returns a character from a specified logical unit.
Returns the maximum positive singleprecision floating-point (REAL*4) value.
Returns the minimum positive singleprecision floating-point (REAL*4) value.
Writes (flushes) the output in a user buffer to system buffer. Discards read-ahead data in user buffer.
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–7
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description for_get_fpe for_get_fpe (3f) for_rtl_init_ for_rtl_finish_ for_rtl_init_ for_rtl_init_
(3f)
(3f)
Returns the status of the floating-point exception (fpe) handling currently set for the program. Usually used with for_set_fpe . To use for_get_fpe from a C program, you must first call for_rtl_init_ , described in this table.
For more information, see Section 3.44,
-fpen — Control Arithmetic Exception
Handling and Reporting and
Chapter 14.
Initializes the Compaq Fortran runtime library (RTL) environment for a
C program. Use this subroutine from a main program written in C that calls
Compaq Fortran subprograms.
Calling this subroutine from the main
C program initializes Compaq Fortran
RTL data. It also establishes Compaq
Fortran RTL signal handlers and floating-point exception handling so that the Compaq Fortran subprograms behave as if they were the main program. The trailing underscore
( _ ) is required, and this routine must be called from a C program.
Cleans up the Compaq Fortran runtime library (RTL) environment for a C main program that previously called for_rtl_init_ . A status value is returned by this function. The trailing underscore ( _ ) is required, and this routine must be called from a C program. Also see for_rtl_init_ .
(continued on next page)
12–8 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description for_set_fpe for_set_reentrancy fork fortran fputc free fseek fstat fsync ftell gerror getarg getc getcwd for_get_fpe intro (3f) putc (3f)
(3f) Changes the floating-point exception
(fpe) handling currently set for the program and also returns the status of the previous floating-point exception (fpe) handling setting. Can be used with for_get_fpe . To use for_set_fpe from a C program, you must first call for_rtl_init_ described in this table. For more
, information, see Section 3.44 and
Chapter 14.
for_set_reentrancy (3f) Sets reentrancy protection for the
Fortran RTL.
fork (3f) Creates a copy of the calling process.
Lists Fortran library routines.
Writes a character to a specified logical unit.
malloc (3f) Frees the memory allocated by falloc or malloc . Consider using the ALLOCATABLE attribute or the ALLOCATE and DEALLOCATE statements.
fseek (3f) stat (3f) fsync (3f)
Repositions a file on a logical unit.
Returns information about file status.
The file is specified as a Fortran 95/90 logical unit number.
Writes the output in buffer to permanent storage.
fseek (3f) perror (3f) getarg (3f) getc (3f) getcwd (3f)
Repositions a file on a logical unit.
Writes system error messages.
Returns the command line arguments.
Returns a character from a logical unit.
Returns the directory path of the current directory.
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–9
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description getenv getenv (3f) getfd getgid getlog getpid getuid gmtime iargc idate ierrno index inmax irand irandm getfd (3f) getuid getlog getuid getuid time
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f) getarg idate
(3f)
(3f) perror index flmin rand
(3f)
(3f)
(3f) random
(3f)
(3f)
Returns the value of environment variables.
For a file already opened by the
Compaq Fortran run-time library
(RTL), returns the file descriptor associated with a particular unit number.
Returns the group’s id of the caller.
Returns the user’s login name.
Returns the process id.
Returns the user’s or group’s id of the caller.
Returns the system time in month, day, and so forth in G.M.T. (Greenwich
Mean Time).
Returns the command-line arguments.
Returns the date or time in numeric form. Also available as an intrinsic subroutine (Compaq extension) described in the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
Returns a system error message number.
Returns the index of a substring within the string. Consider using INDEX intrinsic function described in the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
Returns the maximum positive integer value.
Generates random values. For an example program that uses irand , see
Section 12.7.
Generates a positive integer random number.
(continued on next page)
12–10 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description isatty ttynam (3f) itime kill len lgamma link lnblnk loc long idate kill
(3f)
(3f) index (3f) lgamma link
(3f)
(3f) index loc
(3f)
(3f) long (3f)
Returns whether the specified unit is a terminal port. Use as a subroutine.
Returns the date or time in numeric form.
Sends a signal to a process.
Returns the length of a string. Use the
LEN intrinsic function described in the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
Returns the REAL*4 log of the gamma function.
Makes a directory link to an existing file.
Returns the index of the last nonblank character in a string.
Returns the address of an object.
Similar to the %LOC built-in function described in the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
Converts INTEGER*2 to INTEGER*4.
lshift bit (3f) lstat ltime malloc not stat time
(3f)
(3f) malloc bit (3f)
(3f)
Shifts a word left by n bits. Use as an intrinsic function.
Returns information about a file or a symbolic link.
Returns the system time in month, day, hour, minute, and seconds for the time zone.
Returns the address of a block of virtual memory. See also free .
Consider using the ALLOCATABLE attribute or the ALLOCATE and
DEALLOCATE statements.
Returns the bitwise NOT (complement) of the operand. Use as an intrinsic function.
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–11
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description omp_destroy_lock omp_get_dynamic omp_get_max_threads omp_get_nested omp_get_num_procs omp_get_num_threads omp_get_thread_num omp_in_parallel omp_init_lock omp_destroy_lock omp_get_dynamic
(3f)
(3f)
(TU*X only) Disassociates a lock variable from any locks. See Section D.1.2.1, omp_destroy_lock.
(TU*X only) Informs if dynamic thread adjustment is enabled. See
Section D.1.1.1, omp_get_dynamic.
omp_get_max_threads (3f) (TU*X only) Gets the maximum value that can be returned by calls to the omp_get_num_threads( ) function. See
Section D.1.1.2, omp_get_max_threads.
omp_get_nested (3f) (TU*X only) Informs if nested parallelism is enabled. See Section D.1.1.3, omp_ get_nested.
omp_get_num_procs (3f) (TU*X only) Gets the number of processors that are available to the program. See Section D.1.1.4, omp_ get_num_procs.
omp_get_num_threads (3f)
(TU*X only)
Gets the number of threads currently in the team executing the parallel region from which the routine is called. See Section D.1.1.5, omp_ get_num_threads.
omp_get_thread_num (3f) (TU*X only) Gets the thread number, within the team, in the range from zero to omp_get_num_threads( ) minus 1.
See Section D.1.1.6, omp_get_thread_ num.
omp_in_parallel (3f) omp_init_lock (3f)
(TU*X only) Informs whether or not a region is executing in parallel. See
Section D.1.1.7, omp_in_parallel.
(TU*X only) Initializes a lock to be used in subsequent calls. See
Section D.1.2.2, omp_init_lock.
(continued on next page)
12–12 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description omp_set_dynamic omp_set_lock omp_set_nested or omp_set_dynamic omp_set_lock bit (3f)
(3f) omp_set_nested
(3f)
(3f)
(TU*X only) Enables or disables dynamic adjustment of the number of threads available for execution of parallel regions. See Section D.1.1.8, omp_set_ dynamic.
(TU*X only) Makes the executing thread wait until the specified lock is available. See Section D.1.2.3, omp_ set_lock.
(TU*X only)
Enables or disables nested parallelism. See Section D.1.1.9, omp_ set_nested.
omp_set_num_threads omp_set_num_threads (3f) (TU*X only) Sets the number of threads to use for the next parallel region.
See Section D.1.1.10, omp_set_num_ threads.
omp_test_lock omp_test_lock (3f) omp_unset_lock omp_unset_lock (3f)
(TU*X only) Try to set the lock associated with a lock variable. See
Section D.1.2.4, omp_test_lock.
(TU*X only) Releases the executing thread from ownership of the lock. See
Section D.1.2.5, omp_unset_lock.
Returns the bitwise OR of two operands. Use as an intrinsic function.
_OtsGetMaxThreads otsgetmaxthreads (3f)
_OtsGetNumThreads otsgetnumthreads (3f)
(TU*X only) Returns the number of threads that are normally used for parallel processing in the current environment. See Section D.2.1,
_OtsGetMaxThreads or mpc_ maxnumthreads.
(TU*X only) Returns the number of threads being used or the number of created threads. See Section D.2.2,
_OtsGetNumThreads or mpc_ numthreads.
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–13
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description
_OtsGetThreadNum otsgetthreadnum (3f)
_OtsInitParallel
_OtsInParallel
_OtsSetNumThreads
_OtsStopWorkers perror putc qsort rand random rename rshift shcom_connect short signal otsinitparallel otsinparallel perror putc rand
(3f)
(3f) random rename bit (3f) long
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f) signal (3f)
(3f) otssetnumthreads otsstopworkers qsort (3f) shcom_connect
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(TU*X only) Returns a number that identifies the current thread. See
Section D.2.3, _OtsGetThreadNum or mpc_my_threadnum.
(TU*X only) Starts slave threads for parallel processing. See Section D.2.4,
_OtsInitParallel.
(TU*X only)
Informs whether you are currently within a parallel region. See
Section D.2.5, _OtsInParallel or mpc_ in_parallel_region.
(TU*X only) Sets the number of threads to use for the next parallel region. See
Section D.2.6, _OtsSetNumThreads .
(TU*X only) Stops any slave threads created by parallel library support.
See Section D.2.7, _OtsStopWorkers or mpc_destroy.
Writes system error messages.
Writes a character to a Fortran 95/90 logical unit.
Performs a quick sort of array elements. For an example program that uses qsort , see Section 12.7.
Generates random values.
Generates a single-precision (REAL) random number.
Renames a file.
Shifts a word right by n bits. Use as an intrinsic function.
(TU*X only) Allows multiple processes to access common block data in a shared library (uses memory mapping).
Converts INTEGER*4 to INTEGER*2.
Changes the action of a signal.
(continued on next page)
12–14 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Table 12–3 (Cont.) 3f Functions and Subroutines
Name Reference Page Description sleep srand stat symlnk system time ttynam umask unlink wait xor sleep (3f) rand (3f) stat link system time wait bit
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f)
(3f) ttynam umask (3f) unlink
(3f)
(3f)
Suspends execution for an interval.
Initializes the seed for subsequent use of rand and irand .
Returns information about the status of specified file.
Makes a symbolic directory link to an existing file.
Executes a shell command.
Returns the system time in number of seconds from 00:00:00 G.M.T.
January 1, 1970. Also available as an intrinsic subroutine (Compaq extension) described in the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.
Returns the name of a terminal port or returns blanks if specified unit is not a terminal port.
Sets the file mode creation mask
(protection).
Removes a directory entry. See also link .
Waits for the process to terminate.
Returns the bitwise exclusive OR of two operands. Use as an intrinsic function.
For More Information:
• On an example program that uses the
Section 12.7.
qsort and irand routines, see
12.3 3hpf Routines
The 3hpf routines
(TU*X only) provide functions for using High Performance
Fortran (HPF) constructs to control parallel execution characteristics.
Although usually used in programs that will execute in parallel, you can also use these routines for nonparallel programs.
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–15
The 3hpf routines are contained in the HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY library
(described in this chapter) and in the HPF_LIBRARY library (described in the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual).
HPF programs execute with the support of Compaq MPI (Message Passing
Interface).
For more information about Compaq MPI, see: http://www.compaq.com/hpc/software/dmpi.html
Table 12–4 describes each of the Compaq Fortran 3hpf routines contained in the HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY library.
Table 12–4 Compaq Fortran 3hpf HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY Library Routines
Name Reference Page Description abstract_to_physical abstract_to_physical (3hpf) Returns processor identification for the physical processor associated with a specified abstract processor relative to a global actual argument array.
get_hpf_my_node get_hpf_my_node (3hpf) get_hpf_numnodes get_hpf_numnodes (3hpf)
Returns an integer value in the range 0 to number of processors
- 1. This is the unique process number on which an instance of an extrinsic(hpf_local) is executing; on a scalar computer system the value is the constant
0.
Returns the number of peers on which the program is executing.
global_alignment global_alignment (3hpf) Returns information about the global HPF array actual argument associated with an array local dummy argument; has the same behavior and interface as the subroutine
HPF_ALIGNMENT.
global_bounds global_bounds (3hpf) Returns the upper and lower bounds of the actual argument associated with an assumed shape local dummy array.
(continued on next page)
12–16 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Table 12–4 (Cont.) Compaq Fortran 3hpf HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY Library Routines
Name Reference Page global_distribution global_distribution (3hpf) global_template global_to_local global_to_physical hpf_synch local_to_global global_template global_to_local global_to_physical hpf_synch (3hpf) local_to_global
(3hpf)
(3hpf)
(3hpf)
(3hpf)
Description
Returns information about the global HPF array actual argument associated with an array local dummy argument; has the same behavior and interface as the subroutine
HPF_DISTRIBUTION.
Returns information about the global HPF array actual argument associated with an array local dummy argument; has the same behavior and interface as the subroutine
HPF_TEMPLATE.
Converts a set of global coordinates within a global
HPF actual argument array to an equivalent set of local coordinates within the associated local dummy array.
Converts a global reference to an array element in the
HPF global actual array argument. The argument must be associated with an assumedshape local dummy array into the number of the process to which the element is mapped and the subscripts to access that element using the associated assumed shape array dummy argument on that process.
Synchronizes execution of all peers.
Converts a set of local coordinates within a local dummy array to an equivalent set of global coordinates within the associated global HPF actual argument array.
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–17
Table 12–4 (Cont.) Compaq Fortran 3hpf HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY Library Routines
Name Reference Page Description physical_to_abstract physical_to_abstract (3hpf) Returns coordinates for an abstract processor, relative to a global actual argument array, corresponding to a specified physical processor.
For More Information:
• On the 3hpf routines in the HPF_LIBRARY library, see the Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual and intro (3hpf).
12.4 Reference Pages for the 3f and 3hpf Routines
The reference page intro (3f) describes the 3f routines. Individual 3f functions also have their own reference pages, as shown in Table 12–3.
The reference page intro (3hpf) describes the 3hpf routines. Individual 3hpf functions also have their own reference pages, as shown in Table 12–4. And each routine is summarized in the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
You can use the following ways: man command to view online reference page information in the
• When the topic exists for multiple section numbers, specify the desired section number before the topic to view a specific reference page. For example, the following command returns the reference page for the 3f access routine, not its section 2 (system call) counterpart:
% man 3f access
The following man command returns the 3hpf intro reference page on Tru64
UNIX systems:
% man 3hpf intro
• Use the -f option to view a one-line summary of the specified topic. This is useful to determine whether the same topic is associated with multiple section numbers, such as most 3f routines. The following lists all occurrences of the access topic: man command
% man -f access
12–18 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
12.5 EXTERNAL or INTRINSIC Declarations
Certain Compaq Fortran library routines have the same names as intrinsic functions or subroutines (subprograms). You need to make sure that the correct routine or intrinsic subprogram is used, as follows:
• To use an intrinsic subprogram rather than a 3f library routine, you should
not declare the function or subroutine as external in an EXTERNAL statement.
• To use a 3f library routine rather than an intrinsic subprogram, you should specify the subprogram as external in an EXTERNAL statement.
The following 3f routines have names that match similar intrinsic subprograms: and idate index len lshift not or rshift time xor
For portability reasons, you should consider using the intrinsic routines instead of the equivalent 3f external routine.
For More Information:
• On the EXTERNAL and INTRINSIC statements, see Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
12.6 Example Using the 3f Library Routine shcom_connect
Example 12–1 shows the use of the 3f routine shcom_connect
(UN*X only)
).
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–19
Example 12–1 Using the 3f Routine shcom_connect
C
C
C
FILE: shared_data.f - Example of initialized common data.
BLOCK DATA shared_block_data
INTEGER*8 init_data
REAL operand, result
COMMON /shared_data/ init_data, operand, result
DATA init_data/42/, operand/0.0/, result/0.0/
END
C
C
C
FILE: compute_agent.f - Example Fortran program
PROGRAM compute_agent
INCLUDE ’../include/shcom.f’
INTEGER*8 init_data
REAL operand, result
COMMON /shared_data/ init_data, operand, result
INTEGER shcom_connenct, stat
EXTERNAL shcom_connenct stat = shcom_connect(init_data, ’/tmp/shcom_demo’)
IF (stat .EQ. SHCOM_SUCCESS) THEN result = SQRT(operand)
ELSE
TYPE *, ’shcom_connect() failed, error = ’, stat
ENDIF
/*
* FILE ui_agent.c - Example of initialized common data written in C.
*/
STOP
END
#include "shcom.h" typedef struct { long init_data; float operand; float result;
} demo_t; extern demo_t shared_data_; main() { int stat;
(continued on next page)
12–20 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Example 12–1 (Cont.) Using the 3f Routine shcom_connect printf("shared_data_.init_data = %d\n", shared_data_.init_data); stat = shcom_connect(&shared_data_, "/tmp/shcom_demo"); if (stat == SHCOM_SUCCESS) { shared_data_.operand = 2.0; shared_data_.result = 0.0; system("compute_agent"); printf("shared_data_.result = %f\n", shared_data_.result);
} else { printf("shcom_connect() failed, error = %d\n", stat);
}
}
#
#
#
FC = f90
FILE: Makefile - Builds shared common example.
CFLAGS = -g -I../include
FFLAGS = -g
LDFLAGS = -g
LIBS = ../lib/libshcom.a
all: ui_agent compute_agent ui_agent: ui_agent.o shared_data.so
cc ${CFLAGS} -o ui_agent ui_agent.o shared_data.so ${LIBS} compute_agent: compute_agent.o shared_data.so
f90 ${FFLAGS} -o compute_agent compute_agent.o shared_data.so
${LIBS} shared_data.so: shared_data.o
ld ${LDFLAGS} -shared -o shared_data.so shared_data.o -lc test: shared_data.so ui_agent compute_agent
LD_LIBRARY_PATH=.; export LD_LIBRARY_PATH; ui_agent clean:
-rm -f ui_agent compute_agent
-rm -f *.o shared_data.so
-rm -f /tmp/shcom_demo so_locations
To compile and link this program, enter:
% make all
To run this program, enter:
% make test
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–21
The output from the program is as follows: shared_data_.init_data = 42 shared_data_.result = 1.414214
12.7 Example of the 3f Library Routines irand and qsort
Example 12–2 shows the use of the 3f routines irand and qsort .
Example 12–2 Using the 3f Routines irand and qsort
PROGRAM EXAMPLE
!
!
!
This is an example of calling the IRAND(3F) and QSORT(3F) entries.
EXTERNAL IRAND, QSORT, SUBSORT
INTEGER (KIND=4) :: IRAND, SUBSORT
INTEGER (KIND=4) :: IARRAY(10), I
WRITE(6,100)
!
!
!
Initialize the array using the IRAND(3F) routine.
DO I=1,10
IARRAY(I) = IRAND(0)
END DO
WRITE(6,120) ’IRAND(3F)’, IARRAY
!
!
!
Now to sort the array using QSORT(3F)
CALL QSORT( IARRAY, 10, 4, SUBSORT)
WRITE(6,120) ’QSORT(3F)’, IARRAY
!
!
!
100
120
Define FORMAT statements
FORMAT (’0Start of EXAMPLE’//)
FORMAT (’0Array contents after ’,A,’ call:’/, 10(/T20,I) //)
STOP
END PROGRAM EXAMPLE
!
!
Subroutine called by QSORT(3F)
!
INTEGER (KIND=4) FUNCTION SUBSORT (A,B)
INTEGER (KIND=4) :: A,B
SUBSORT = 1
IF ( A == B ) SUBSORT = 0
IF ( A < B ) SUBSORT = -1
RETURN
(continued on next page)
12–22 Compaq Fortran Library Routines
Example 12–2 (Cont.) Using the 3f Routines irand and qsort
END FUNCTION SUBSORT
To compile and link this program (named example ), enter:
% f90 -o example example.for
To run this program and redirect its output from stdout to example.out
, enter:
% example > example.out
The output from the program and after sorting, as follows: example contains the contents of the array before
0Start of EXAMPLE
0Array contents after IRAND(3F) call:
16838
5758
10113
17515
31051
5627
23010
7419
16212
4086
0Array contents after QSORT(3F) call:
4086
5627
5758
7419
10113
16212
16838
17515
23010
31051
Compaq Fortran Library Routines 12–23
13
Using the Compaq Extended Math Library
(CXML)
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 13.1, What Is CXML?
• Section 13.2, CXML Routine Groups
• Section 13.3, Using CXML from Fortran
• Section 13.4, CXML Program Example
• Section 13.5, CXML Documentation
13.1 What Is CXML?
The Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML) provides a comprehensive set of mathematical library routines callable from Fortran and other languages. CXML contains a set of over 1500 high-performance mathematical subprograms designed for use in many different types of scientific and engineering applications.
CXML is included with Compaq Fortran for Tru64 UNIX Systems and can be installed using the instructions in the Compaq Fortran Installation Guide for
Tru64 UNIX Systems.
CXML kits for Tru64 UNIX are also available from the Compaq Math Libraries
Web site, which always has the latest version: http://www.compaq.com/math
Since CXML might have been updated since the Compaq Fortran kit was released, you should check the Web site to make sure you have the latest version.
CXML is available as a separate download item for Linux Alpha systems. For more information, see the Compaq Math Libraries Web site.
Using the Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML) 13–1
CXML documentation is also available at the Web site. See Section 13.5,
CXML Documentation.
13.2 CXML Routine Groups
CXML routines include those for basic linear algebra (BLAS), signal processing, sparse linear system solution, linear algebra (LAPACK), and utilities related to random numbers, vector math, and sorting. The routines are described in
Table 13–1.
Table 13–1 CXML Routine Groups
Name Description
Basic Linear Algebra
Signal Processing
Sparse Linear System
LAPACK
Utility subprograms
The Basic Linear Algebra Subprograms (BLAS) library includes the industry-standard Basic Linear Algebra
Subprograms for Level 1 (vector-vector, BLAS1), Level
2 (matrix-vector, BLAS2), and Level 3 (matrix-matrix,
BLAS3). Also included are subprograms for BLAS Level 1
Extensions, and Sparse BLAS Level 1.
The Signal Processing library provides a basic set of signal processing functions. Included are one-, two-, and three-dimensional Fast Fourier Transforms (FFT), group
FFTs, Cosine/Sine Transforms (FCT/FST), Convolution,
Correlation, and Digital Filters.
The Sparse Linear System library provides both direct and iterative sparse linear system solvers. The direct solver package supports both symmetric and nonsymmetric sparse matrices stored using the skyline storage scheme. The iterative solver package contains a basic set of storage schemes, preconditioners, and iterative solvers.
LAPACK is an industry-standard subprogram package offering an extensive set of linear system and eigenproblem solvers. LAPACK uses blocked algorithms that are better suited to most modern architectures, particularly ones with memory hierarchies.
Utility subprograms include random number generation, vector math functions, and sorting subprograms.
Where appropriate, each subprogram has a version to support each combination of real or complex and single or double precision arithmetic.
In addition, selected key CXML routines are available in parallel form as well as serial form on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems.
13–2 Using the Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML)
13.3 Using CXML from Fortran
To use CXML, you need to make the CXML routines and their interfaces available to your program and specify the appropriate libraries when linking.
To specify the CXML routines library when linking, use the -lcxml option. To compile and link a Fortran program that contains calls to CXML routines on
Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha systems, use one of the following commands:
Operating System
Tru64 UNIX
Linux
Command f90 my_prog.f90 -lcxml fort my_prog.f -lcxml
For example, to link a Fortran 90 program with the serial CXML library on a
Tru64 UNIX system, you would give this command:
% f90 my_prog.f90 -lcxml
On Tru64 UNIX systems, selected key CXML routines have been parallelized using OpenMP. To link with the parallel version of the CXML library, use
-lcxmlp instead of -lcxml .
13.4 CXML Program Example
Example 13–1, Fortran Example Program Using CXML invokes the function
SAXPY from the BLAS portion of the CXML Libraries. The SAXPY function computes a*x+y .
13.5 CXML Documentation
For more information, see the following CXML documentation, available at the
Math Libraries Web site described in Section 13.1, What Is CXML?:
• README file and Release Notes
• Reference Manual in HTML, PDF, and PS format
When CXML is installed on Tru64 UNIX systems, subsets containing reference pages in both traditional (‘‘man page’’) and HTML format can be installed.
When CXML is installed on Linux systems, the reference pages are available in HTML format and are placed in a /usr/doc subdirectory.
Using the Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML) 13–3
Example 13–1 Fortran Example Program Using CXML
PROGRAM example
!
!
This free-form example demonstrates how to call
!
CXML routines from Fortran.
!
REAL(KIND=4) :: a(10)
REAL(KIND=4) :: x(10)
REAL(KIND=4) :: alpha
INTEGER(KIND=4) :: n
INTEGER(KIND=4) :: incx
INTEGER(KIND=4) :: incy n = 5 ; incx = 1 ; incy = 1 ; alpha = 3.0
DO i = 1,n a(i) = FLOAT(i) x(i) = FLOAT(2*i)
ENDDO
PRINT 98, (a(i),i=1,n)
PRINT 98, (x(i),i=1,n)
98 FORMAT(’ Input = ’,10F7.3)
CALL saxpy( n, alpha, a, incx, x, incy )
PRINT 99, (x(i),I=1,n)
99 FORMAT(/,’ Result = ’,10F7.3)
STOP
END PROGRAM example
13–4 Using the Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML)
14
Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
Note
This chapter applies only to Compaq Fortran Tru64 UNIX systems.
This chapter contains the following topics:
• Section 14.1, Overview of Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
• Section 14.2, Using the for_fpe_flags.f File
• Section 14.3, Calling the for_get_fpe and for_set_fpe Functions
• Section 14.4, File fordef.f and Its Usage
14.1 Overview of Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
This chapter contains information about controlling exceptions that can occur during the run-time processing of floating-point numbers. These exceptions are
underflow, division by zero, overflow, and invalid operation (such as the square root of a negative number).
See Section 9.4, Native IEEE Floating-Point Representations and Exceptional
Values for information about the internal representation of floating-point numbers including exceptional values (such as plus infinity).
You can use these command-line options to direct the processing of Compaq
Fortran floating-point numbers at run time:
• -fpen option to control exception handling and reporting (see Section 3.44)
• -check underflow option to control checking for floating-point underflow at run time (see Section 3.29)
• -synchronous_exceptions option to control reporting of exceptions at run time (see Section 3.86)
Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions 14–1
• -fprm keyword option to control rounding of floating-point operations (see
Section 3.46)
14.2 Using the for_fpe_flags.f File
The -fpen option, as explained in Section 3.44, lets you control floating-point exceptions according to the value of n . Table 3–3 contains the values of n and the corresponding results at run time when floating-point exceptions occur. These exceptions are underflow, division by zero, overflow, and invalid operation (such as the square root of a negative number).
Normally the -fpen option, along with the -check underflow and
-synchronous_exceptions options, gives you adequate control over floatingpoint exception handling and reporting.
However, if any combination of these three options does not give you adequate control, then you can use the following:
• File /usr/include/for_fpe_flags.f
, which contains definitions of the bits in an INTEGER*4 variable. (See Section 14.2.1, Bit Definitions in File for_fpe_flags.f.) This file is a file of Fortran statements with flags that relate to floating-point exceptions.
• Functions for_get_fpe and for_set_fpe . (See Section 14.3, Calling the for_get_fpe and for_set_fpe Functions.)
• Option -fpe3 .
For example, suppose you want to read a denormalized number from an unformatted file and perform calculations on it without generating an exception about an invalid operation. Suppose you also want to have divideby-zero exceptions trapped and reported. While the -fpe3 option meets the first requirement, it also results in no trapping and reporting of divide-by-zero exceptions.
The general steps of the solution to this example are:
1.
Include, in your source program, file /usr/include/for_fpe_flags.f
.
2.
Include statements that select, from the included file, bits corresponding to the phrases ‘‘trap divide-by-zero exceptions’’ and ‘‘report divide-by-zero exceptions.’’ Include them in the INTEGER*4 argument to function for_set_fpe .
14–2 Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
3.
Compile the program with the function for_set_fpe
-fpe3 option. As long as the reference to occurs at the beginning of the program, division-byzero exceptions will be trapped and reported. (When function executes, it overrides the initial effect of the -fpe3 for_set_fpe option: to disable trapping and reporting of divide-by-zero exceptions.)
This example reappears later, in program fpe_div0_msg.f90
in Section 14.3.2.
Note
Normally the -fpen , -check underflow , -synchronous_exceptions , and
-fprm keyword options give you sufficient control over the processing of floating-point exceptions. Using file and function
/usr/include/for_fpe_flags.f
for_set_fpe can yield unanticipated results.
14.2.1 Bit Definitions in File for_fpe_flags.f
Table 14–1 explains the bit definitions in file /usr/include/for_fpe_flags.f
The compiler automatically generates a call to for_set_fpe( ) , which is
.
expected when the program begins execution. The argument to has the appropriate bits set (as defined in for_fpe_flags.f
for_set_fpe( )
) to achieve the documented behavior for the -fpen option specified at compile time. You have the option of changing this bit setting according to the individual bit definitions and their corresponding effects in Table 14–1. The function with the bit definitions to make the change.
for_set_fpe works
Note
For the default to
-fpe0 option, the compiler does not generate the call for_set_fpe( ) . The run-time library automatically initializes floating-point exception behavior in this case at run-time initialization.
Table 14–1 Bit Definitions in File for_fpe_flags.f
Bit Name Effect When Set
FPE_M_TRAP_UND
FPE_M_TRAP_OVF
Requests delivery of underflow traps to the current signal handler.
Requests delivery of overflow traps to the current signal handler.
(continued on next page)
Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions 14–3
Table 14–1 (Cont.) Bit Definitions in File for_fpe_flags.f
Bit Name Effect When Set
FPE_M_TRAP_DIV0
FPE_M_TRAP_INV
FPE_M_MSG_UND
FPE_M_MSG_OVF
FPE_M_MSG_DIV0
Requests delivery of division-by-zero traps to the current signal handler.
Requests delivery of invalid operation traps to the current signal handler.
If the current signal handler is the default handler provided with the Fortran run-time library and bit FPE_M_TRAP_UND is also set, then the default handler sends a message to stderr for each of the first two occurrences of underflow traps. The default handler also sends a total count of underflow traps to stderr when the program terminates. If the current signal handler is not the default handler, then bit FPE_M_MSG_UND has no effect.
If the current signal handler is the default handler provided with the
Fortran run-time library and bit FPE_M_TRAP_OVF is also set, then the default handler sends a message to stderr for each of the first two occurrences of overflow traps. The default handler also sends a total count of overflow traps to stderr when the program terminates.
If the current signal handler is not the default handler, then bit
FPE_M_MSG_OVF has no effect.
If the current signal handler is the default handler provided with the Fortran run-time library and bit FPE_M_TRAP_DIV0 is also set, then the default handler sends a message to stderr for each of the first two occurrences of divide-by-zero traps. The default handler also sends a total count of divide-by-zero traps to stderr when the program terminates. If the current signal handler is not the default handler, then bit FPE_M_MSG_DIV0 has no effect.
FPE_M_MSG_INV If the current signal handler is the default handler provided with the
Fortran run-time library and bit FPE_M_TRAP_INV is also set, then the default handler sends a message to stderr for each of the first two occurrences of invalid operation traps. The default handler also sends a total count of invalid operation traps to stderr when the program terminates. If the current signal handler is not the default handler, then bit FPE_M_MSG_INV has no effect.
FPE_M_ABRUPT_UND Replaces denormalized numbers obtained as results of calculations with zeroes.
FPE_M_ABRUPT_OVF Reserved.
FPE_M_ABRUPT_DIV0 Reserved.
FPE_M_ABRUPT_INV Reserved.
(continued on next page)
14–4 Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
Table 14–1 (Cont.) Bit Definitions in File for_fpe_flags.f
Bit Name Effect When Set
FPE_M_ABRUPT_DMZ Replaces denormalized numbers used as input operands to floatingpoint instructions with zeroes. This does not have anything to do with reading data from unformatted files.
14.3 Calling the for_get_fpe and for_set_fpe Functions
Table 14–1 contains a list of bit definitions (in an INTEGER*4 variable) and their run-time effects when floating-point exceptions occur. Functions for_get_fpe and for_set_fpe read and set the bits, respectively, after a program begins execution. (The -fpen option also sets these bits when a program begins execution.)
14.3.1 Calling for_get_fpe
Function for_get_fpe has no argument. It returns an INTEGER*4 variable whose bits specify how the run-time library currently handles floating-point exceptions. The bits of the variable are defined in Table 14–1.
must be declared INTEGER(4).
for_get_fpe
For example, consider the following program. When compiled with the default
-fpe0 option, this program displays the default settings of the bits in the
INTEGER*4 variable:
PROGRAM TESTFGPE_FPE0
!
!
!
!
This program returns floating-point exception flags using function for_get_fpe().
integer*4 fpe_flags integer*4 for_get_fpe external for_get_fpe
!
PRINT *, ’’
PRINT *, ’Start of program’ fpe_flags = for_get_fpe()
PRINT *, ’’
PRINT *, ’for_get_fpe() has returned, with option fpe0:’
WRITE (*, 200) fpe_flags
200 FORMAT (’ ’, ’In B32 format: ’, B32)
PRINT *, ’’
PRINT *, ’End of program’
END PROGRAM TESTFGPE_FPE0
Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions 14–5
The compilation and execution commands are:
% f90 -fpe0 testfgpe_fpe0.f90
% a.out
The output from this program, with spaces added to the 32-character representation of variable fpe_flags, is:
Start of program for_get_fpe() has returned, with option fpe0:
In B32 format: 1 0000 0000 0000 1110
End of program
Compiling this program with a different value of the different output. For example, if you compile with
-fpen option gives
-fpe3 , variable fpe_flags contains zero.
For More Information:
• On the for_get_fpe function, see for_set_fpe (3f).
14.3.2 Calling for_set_fpe
Function for_set_fpe has a single argument: a floating-point exception behavior mask. This is an INTEGER*4 variable whose bits specify how the run-time library will handle floating-point exceptions. Function for_set_fpe must be declared INTEGER(4).
The bits of the mask variable are defined in Table 14–1. When the function executes, it both returns the previous value of the mask and changes the mask to the value of the argument. Recall that the -fpen option determines the value of the mask when the program begins to execute. Function for_set_fpe allows you to change the mask, and the handling of floating-point exceptions, after the program begins to execute.
Recall in Section 14.2 the example where the requirements are to read a denormalized number from an unformatted file and perform calculations on it without generating an invalid operation exception. Also, divide-by-zero exceptions must be trapped and reported. The -fpe3 option meets the first requirement. File /usr/include/for_fpe_flags.f
work together to meet the second requirement.
and function for_set_fpe
Consider program fpe_div0_msg.f90
:
14–6 Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
!
!
!
!
!
!
program fpe_div0_msg
Trap when division by zero occurs and display a message.
Compile with the command f90 -fpe3 fpe_div0_msg.f90
external for_set_fpe ! External function integer*4 for_set_fpe
Include the file with the definitions of the floating-point exceptions.
include ’/usr/include/for_fpe_flags.f’ real*4 a,b,c integer*4 old_fpe_flags, new_fpe_flags
Set the bits, of the argument to for_set_fpe(), to trap when division by zero occurs and to display a message.
new_fpe_flags = FPE_M_TRAP_DIV0 + FPE_M_MSG_DIV0 old_fpe_flags = for_set_fpe(new_fpe_flags) a = 5.0
print *, ’’ print *, ’Give me 0.0’ read *, b print *, ’Division by zero is next’ c = a / b print *, ’The result of division by zero is’, c print *, ’’ end
In this program, at run time, division by zero occurs. This floating-point exception results in:
1.
A trap and its delivery to the current signal handler
2.
Reporting by the default signal handler provided with the Compaq Fortran run-time library
3.
Continuation of the program
The compilation and execution commands are:
% f90 -fpe3 fpe_div0_msg.f90
% a.out
The output from this program and user input (0.0) are:
Give me 0.0
0.0
Division by zero is next forrtl: error (73): floating divide by zero
The result of division by zero is Infinity forrtl: info (299): 1 floating divide-by-zero traps
Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions 14–7
Setting bit FPE_M_TRAP_DIV0 causes a trap when division by zero occurs and delivery of a signal to the current signal handler. Setting bit FPE_M_MSG_DIV0 causes the Compaq Fortran run-time routines (the current and default signal handler) to display a message about the trapped division-by-zero floating-point exception. Because of compilation with zero to variable old_fpe_flags.
-fpe3 , function for_set_fpe returns
For More Information:
• On the for_set_fpe function, see for_set_fpe (3f).
14.4 File fordef.f and Its Usage
The parameter file /usr/include/fordef.f
contains symbols and INTEGER*4 values corresponding to the classes of floating-point representations. Some of these classes are exceptional ones such as bit patterns that represent positive denormalized numbers. See Section 9.4.8, Exceptional Floating-Point
Representations.
With this file of symbols and with the FP_CLASS intrinsic function, you have the flexibility of identifying exceptional numbers so that, for example, you can replace positive and negative denormalized numbers with true zero.
The following is a simple example of identifying floating-point bit representations: include ’/usr/include/fordef.f’ real*4 a integer*4 class_of_bits a = 57.0
! Bit pattern is an Alpha finite number class_of_bits = fp_class(a) if ( class_of_bits .eq. for_k_fp_pos_norm .or.
& class_of_bits .eq. for_k_fp_neg_norm ) then print *, a, ’ is a non-zero and non-exceptional value’ else print *, a, ’ is zero or an exceptional value’ end if end
In this example, the symbol for_k_fp_pos_norm in file /usr/include/fordef.f
plus the REAL*4 value 57.0 to the FP_CLASS intrinsic function results in the execution of the first print statement.
Table 14–2 explains the symbols in file /usr/include/fordef.f
and their corresponding floating-point representations. Section 9.4.8, Exceptional
Floating-Point Representations explains each representation.
14–8 Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
Table 14–2 Symbols in File fordef.f
Symbol Name Class of Floating-Point Bit Representation
FOR_K_FP_SNAN
FOR_K_FP_QNAN
FOR_K_FP_POS_INF
FOR_K_FP_NEG_INF
FOR_K_FP_POS_NORM
FOR_K_FP_NEG_NORM
FOR_K_FP_POS_DENORM
FOR_K_FP_NEG_DENORM
FOR_K_FP_POS_ZERO
FOR_K_FP_NEG_ZERO
Signaling NaN
Quiet NaN
Positive infinity
Negative infinity
Positive normalized finite number
Negative normalized finite number
Positive denormalized number
Negative denormalized number
Positive zero
Negative zero
Another example of using file fordef.f
and intrinsic function FP_CLASS follows. The goals of this program are to quickly read any 32-bit pattern into a
REAL*4 number from an unformatted file with no exception reporting and to replace denormalized numbers with true zero:
!
!
include ’/usr/include/fordef.f’ real*4 a(100) integer*4 class_of_bits open an unformatted file as unit 1
...
read (1) a do i = 1, 100 class_of_bits = fp_class(a(i)) if ( class_of_bits .eq. for_k_fp_pos_denorm .or.
& class_of_bits .eq. for_k_fp_neg_denorm a(i) = 0.0
) then end if end do close (1) end
You can compile this program with any value of -fpen . Intrinsic function FP_
CLASS helps to find and replace denormalized numbers with zeroes before the program can attempt to perform calculations on the denormalized numbers.
On the other hand, if this program did not replace denormalized numbers read from unit 1 with zeroes and the program was compiled with -fpe0 , then the first attempted calculation on a denormalized number would result in a floating-point exception.
Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions 14–9
File fordef.f
and intrinsic function FP_CLASS can work together to identify
NaNs. A variation of the previous example would contain the symbols for_k_fp_snan and for_k_fp_qnan in the IF statement. A faster way to do this is based on the intrinsic ISNAN function. One modification of the previous example, using ISNAN, follows:
!
!
!
The ISNAN function does not need file /usr/include/fordef.f
real*4 a(100) open an unformatted file as unit 1
...
read (1) a do i = 1, 100 if ( isnan (a(i)) ) then print *, ’Element ’, i, ’ contains a NaN’ end if end do close (1) end
You can compile this program with any value of -fpen .
14–10 Controlling Floating-Point Exceptions
A
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and
Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
This appendix provides compatibility information for those porting Compaq
Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran applications from other Compaq systems and for those designing applications for portability to multiple platforms.
This appendix contains the following topics:
• Section A.1, Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 Compatibility on
Various Platforms
• Section A.2, Compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64
UNIX Systems
• Section A.3, Language Compatibility with Compaq Visual Fortran
• Section A.4, Compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran for OpenVMS Systems
• Section A.5, Calling Between Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran
A.1 Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 Compatibility on Various Platforms
Table A–1 summarizes the compatibility of Compaq Fortran for Compaq Tru64
UNIX and Linux Alpha systems with Compaq Fortran on OpenVMS Alpha
Systems, Compaq Fortran 77 on other platforms (architecture/operating system pairs), and Compaq Visual Fortran for Windows systems.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–1
Table A–1 Summary of Language Compatibility
Compaq Fortran 77 (CF77) or Compaq
Fortran (CF95) for . . . Systems
CF95
UNIX
Alpha
CF95
Linux
Alpha
CF77
UNIX
Alpha
CF95
Windows
CF95
OpenVMS
Alpha
CF77
OpenVMS
Alpha
CF77
OpenVMS
VAX
X X X X X X X
Language Feature
Linking against static and shared libraries
Create code for shared libraries
Recursive code support
AUTOMATIC and STATIC statements
STRUCTURE and RECORD declarations
INTEGER*1, *2, *4
LOGICAL*1, *2, *4
INTEGER*8 and LOGICAL*8
REAL*4, *8
REAL*16
2
COMPLEX*8, *16
COMPLEX*32
3
POINTER (CRAY-style)
INCLUDE statements
IMPLICIT NONE statements
Data initialization in type declarations
Automatic arrays
VOLATILE statements
NAMELIST-directed I/O
31-character names including $ and _
Source listing with machine code
Debug statements in source
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
Alpha systems only.
2
For REAL*16 data, OpenVMS VAX systems use H_float format, and Alpha systems use IEEE style X_float format.
3
For COMPLEX*32 data, Alpha systems use IEEE style X_float format for both REAL*16 parts.
(continued on next page)
A–2 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
Table A–1 (Cont.) Summary of Language Compatibility
Compaq Fortran 77 (CF77) or Compaq
Fortran (CF95) for . . . Systems
Language Feature
Bit constants to initialize data and use in arithmetic
DO WHILE and END DO statements X
Built-in functions %LOC, %REF, %VAL X
SELECT CASE construct X
EXIT and CYCLE statements
Variable FORMAT expressions (VFEs)
X
X
X
X
CF95
UNIX
Alpha
X
! marks end-of-line comment
Optional run-time bounds checking for arrays and substrings
Binary (unformatted) I/O in IEEE big endian, IEEE little endian, VAX, IBM, and CRAY floating-point formats
Fortran 95/90 standards checking
X
X
FORTRAN-77 standards checking
IEEE exception handling
VAX floating data type in memory
IEEE floating data type in memory
CDD/Repository DICTIONARY support
KEYED access and INDEXED files
Parallel decomposition
OpenMP parallel directives
Conditional compilation using IF . . .
DEF constructs
Vector code support
X
X
X
X
X
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CF95
Linux
Alpha
X
CF77
UNIX
Alpha
X
X
X
X
X
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CF95
Windows
X
CF95
OpenVMS
Alpha
CF77
OpenVMS
Alpha
CF77
OpenVMS
VAX
X X X
X
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
5
For parallel processing, you can also use the optional KAP performance preprocessor for a shared memory multiprocessor system.
(continued on next page)
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–3
Table A–1 (Cont.) Summary of Language Compatibility
Compaq Fortran 77 (CF77) or Compaq
Fortran (CF95) for . . . Systems
Language Feature
Direct inlining of Basic Linear Algebra
Subroutines (BLAS)
DATE_AND_TIME returns 4-digit year X
FORALL statement and construct X
Automatic deallocation of ALLOCATABLE arrays
X
X Dim argument to MAXLOC and
MINLOC
PURE user-defined subprograms X
CF95
UNIX
Alpha
6
ELEMENTAL user-defined subprograms
X
Pointer initialization (initial value) X
The NULL intrinsic to nullify a pointer X
Derived-type structure initialization X
X
X
CPU_TIME intrinsic subroutine
Kind argument to CEILING and
FLOOR intrinsics
Nested WHERE constructs, masked
ELSEWHERE statement, and named
WHERE constructs
Comments allowed in namelist input
X
X
X Generic identifier in END INTERFACE statements
Minimal FORMAT edit descriptor field width
Detection of Obsolescent and/or Deleted features
7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CF95
Linux
Alpha
6
CF77
UNIX
Alpha
6
X X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
CF95
Windows
6
CF95
OpenVMS
Alpha
CF77
OpenVMS
Alpha
CF77
OpenVMS
VAX
6 6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
6
BLAS and other routines are available with the Compaq Extended Mathematical Library (CXML) product on
Alpha systems.
7
Compaq Fortran flags these deleted and obsolescent features, but fully supports them.
A–4 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
A.2 Compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64
UNIX Systems
This section provides compatibility information for those porting Compaq
Fortran 77 applications from Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems. It discusses the following topics:
• Major language features for compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for
Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems (Section A.2.1)
• Language differences between Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77, including Compaq Fortran 77 extensions on Compaq Tru64 UNIX Systems that are not supported by this version of Compaq Fortran on Compaq
Tru64 UNIX Systems (Section A.2.2)
• Language features detected during compilation differently by Compaq
Fortran than Compaq Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX Systems
(Section A.2.3)
A.2.1 Major Language Features for Compatibility with Compaq Fortran
77 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX Systems
To simplify porting applications from Compaq Fortran 77 to Compaq Fortran on Tru64 UNIX systems, Compaq Fortran supports the following Compaq
Fortran 77 extensions that are not part of the Fortran 95/90 standards:
• Record structures (STRUCTURE and RECORD statements)
• I/O statements, including PRINT, ACCEPT, TYPE, DELETE, and
UNLOCK
• I/O statement specifiers, such as the INQUIRE statement specifiers
CARRIAGECONTROL, CONVERT, ORGANIZATION, and RECORDTYPE
• Certain data types, including 8-byte INTEGER and LOGICAL variables and 16-byte REAL variables (available on Alpha systems)
• Size specifiers for data declaration statements, such as INTEGER*4, in addition to the KIND type parameter
• IEEE floating-point data type in memory
• The POINTER statement and its associated data type (CRAY pointers).
• The typeless PARAMETER statement
• The VOLATILE statement
• The AUTOMATIC and STATIC statements
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–5
• Built-in functions used in argument lists, such as %VAL and %LOC
• Hollerith constants
• Variable-format expressions (VFEs)
• Certain intrinsic functions
• The tab source form (resembles fixed-source form)
• I/O formatting descriptors
• USEROPEN routines for user-defined open routines
• Additional language features, including the DEFINE FILE, ENCODE,
DECODE, and VIRTUAL statements
In addition to language extensions, Compaq Fortran also supports the following
Compaq Fortran 77 features:
• Compaq Fortran 77 compilation control statements and directives (see the
Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual), including:
INCLUDE statement forms using /LIST and /NOLIST (requires compiling with -vms )
OPTIONS statement to override or set compiler command-line options
General cDEC$ directives, including: cDEC$ ALIAS cDEC$ IDENT cDEC$ OPTIONS cDEC$ PSECT cDEC$ TITLE cDEC$ SUBTITLE
• A nearly identical set of command-line options and their associated features
(see Section A.2.4).
• The ability to call between Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran routines and a common run-time environment. For example, a Compaq
Fortran 77 procedure and a Compaq Fortran procedure can perform I/O to the same unit number (see Section A.5).
• foriosdef.for
symbolic parameter definitions for use with run-time
(IOSTAT) error handling (see Chapter 8).
For More Information:
On the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
A–6 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
A.2.2 Language Features Provided Only by Compaq Fortran 77 for
Compaq Tru64 UNIX Systems
Compaq Fortran conforms to the Fortran 95/90 standard, which is a superset of the FORTRAN-77 standard. Compaq Fortran provides many but not all of the FORTRAN-77 extensions provided by Compaq Fortran 77.
The following list shows FORTRAN-77 extensions provided by Compaq Fortran
77 on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems are not provided by Compaq Fortran.
Where appropriate, this list indicates equivalent Compaq Fortran language features:
• Octal notation for integer constants is not part of the Compaq Fortran
Language. Compaq Fortran 77 ( f77 command) only supports this feature when the -vms option is specified. For example:
I = "0014 ! Assigns 12 to I, not supported by Compaq Fortran
• The Compaq Fortran compiler discards leading zeros for
STOP statement. For example:
"disp" in the
STOP 001 ! Prints 1 instead of 001
• When a single-precision constant is assigned to a double-precision variable,
Compaq Fortran 77 evaluates the constant in double precision. The
Fortran 95/90 standards require that the constant be evaluated in single precision.
When a single-precision constant is assigned to a double-precision variable with Compaq Fortran, it is evaluated in single precision. You can, however, specify the f90 -fpconstant option to request that a single-precision constant assigned to a double-precision variable be evaluated in double precision.
In the example below, Compaq Fortran 77 assigns identical values to D1 and D2, whereas Compaq Fortran obeys the standard and assigns a less precise value to D1.
For example:
REAL*8 D1,D2
DATA D1 /2.71828182846182/ ! Incorrect - only REAL*4 value
DATA D2 /2.71828182846182D0/ ! Correct - REAL*8 value
• The names of intrinsics introduced by Compaq Fortran may conflict with the names of existing external procedures if the procedures were not specified in an EXTERNAL declaration. For example:
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–7
EXTERNAL SUM
REAL A(10),B(10)
S = SUM(A) ! Correct - invokes external function
T = DOT_PRODUCT(A,B) ! Incorrect - invokes intrinsic function
• When writing namelist external records, Compaq Fortran uses the syntax for namelist external records specified by the Fortran 95/90 standards, rather than the Compaq Fortran 77 syntax (an extension to the FORTRAN-
77 and Fortran 95/90 standards).
Consider the following program:
% cat test.f
INTEGER I
NAMELIST /N/ I
I = 5
PRINT N
END
When this program is compiled by the output appears: f90 command and run, the following
% f90 test.f
% a.out
&N
I
/
= 5
When this program is compiled by the output appears: f77 command and run, the following
% f77 test.f
% a.out
$N
I
$END
= 5
Use the -f77rtl option to tell Compaq Fortran to generate NAMELIST output in Compaq Fortran 77 format.
Compaq Fortran accepts Fortran 95/90 namelist syntax and Compaq
Fortran 77 namelist syntax for reading records.
• The Compaq Fortran language does not include C-style escape sequences in standard char constants. For example:
CHARACTER NL
NL = ’\n’
NL = CHAR(10)
! Incorrect
! Correct
A–8 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
The Compaq Fortran extension C-string allows certain C-style escape sequences in char constants that end with a C. For example:
CHAR NL
NL = ’\n’C
• Compaq Fortran inserts a leading blank when doing list-directed I/O to an internal file. For example:
CHARACTER*10 C
WRITE(C,*) ’FOO’ ! C = ’ FOO’
• Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran produce different output a real value whose data magnitude is 0 with a G field descriptor. For example:
X = 0.0
WRITE(*,100) X
100 FORMAT(G12.4)
! Compaq Fortran 77 prints 0.0000E+00
! Compaq Fortran prints 0.000
• Compaq Fortran does not allow certain intrinsics (such as SQRT) in constant expressions for array bounds. For example:
REAL A(SQRT(31.5))
END
• Compaq Fortran 77 returns UNKNOWN while Compaq Fortran returns
UNDEFINED when the ACCESS, BLANK, and FORM characteristics can not be determined. For example:
INQUIRE(20,ACCESS=acc,BLANK=blk,FORM=form)
• Compaq Fortran does not allow an extraneous parenthesis in I/O lists. For example: write(*,*) ((i,i=1,1),(j,j=1,2))
• Compaq Fortran does not allow control characters within quoted strings.
For example, the assignment statement in the following program is incorrect because it contains the character Ctrl/C.
character*5 c c = ’ab^cef’ end
• Compaq Fortran does not recognize certain hexadecimal and octal constants in DATA statements, such as those used in the following program:
INTEGER I, J
DATA I/O20101/, J/Z20/
TYPE *, I, J
END
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–9
• Compaq Fortran, like Compaq Fortran 77, supports the use of character literal constants (such as ’ABC’ or "ABC") in numeric contexts, where they are treated as Hollerith constants.
Compaq Fortran 77 also allows character PARAMETER constants (typed and untyped) and character constant expressions (using the // operator) in numeric constants as an undocumented extension.
Compaq Fortran does allow character PARAMETER constants in numeric contexts, but does not allow character expressions. For example, the following is valid for Compaq Fortran 77, but will result in an error message from Compaq Fortran:
REAL*8 R
R = ’abc’ // ’def’
WRITE (5,*) R
END
Compaq Fortran does allow PARAMETER constants:
PARAMETER abcdef = ’abc’ // ’def’
REAL*8 R
R = abcdef
WRITE (5,*) R
END
• Compaq Fortran 77 namelist output formats character data delimited with apostrophes. For example, consider:
CHARACTER CHAR4*4
NAMELIST /CN100/ CHAR4
CHAR4 = ’ABCD’
WRITE(20,CN100)
CLOSE (20)
This produces the following output file:
$CN100
CHAR4 = ’ABCD’
$END
This file is read by:
READ (20, CN100)
In contrast, Compaq Fortran produces the following output file by default:
&CN100
CHAR4 = ABCD
/
A–10 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
When read, this generates a syntax error in NAMELIST input error.
To produce delimited strings from namelist output that can be read by namelist input, use
Fortran program.
DELIM="’" in the OPEN statement of a Compaq
For More Information:
• On argument passing between Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, see Section A.5.
• On compatibility between Compaq Fortran for Compaq Tru64 UNIX or
Linux Alpha systems and Compaq Fortran on OpenVMS systems, see
Section A.4.
• On the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
A.2.3 Improved Compaq Fortran Compiler Diagnostic Detection
The following language features are detected or interpreted differently by
Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77:
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that the ‘‘nlist’’ in an EQUIVALENCE statement must contain at least two variables. For example:
EQUIVALENCE (X) ! Incorrect
EQUIVALENCE (Y,Z) ! Correct
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that entry points in a SUBROUTINE must not be typed. For example:
SUBROUTINE ABCXYZ(I)
REAL ABC
I = I + 1
RETURN
! Incorrect ENTRY ABC
BAR = I + 1
RETURN
ENTRY XYZ ! Correct
I = I + 2
RETURN
END SUBROUTINE
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that a type must appear before each list in an IMPLICIT statement. For example:
IMPLICIT REAL (A-C), (D-H) ! Incorrect
IMPLICIT REAL (O-S), REAL (T-Z) ! Correct
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–11
• The Compaq Fortran language disallows passing mismatched actual arguments to intrinsics with corresponding integer formal arguments. For example:
R = REAL(.TRUE.) ! Incorrect
R = REAL(1) ! Correct
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that a simple list element in an I/O list must be a variable or an expression. For example:
READ (10,100) (I,J,K) ! Incorrect
READ (10,100) I,J,K ! Correct
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that if two operators are consecutive, the second operator must be a plus or a minus. For example:
I = J -.NOT.K
I = J - (.NOT.K)
! Incorrect
! Correct
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that character entities with a length greater than 1 cannot be initialized with a bit constant in a DATA statement. For example:
CHARACTER*1 C1
CHARACTER*4 C4
DATA C1/’FF’X/
DATA C4/’FFFFFFFF’X/
! Correct
! Incorrect
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the requirement that edit descriptors in the FORMAT statement must be followed by a comma or slash separator. For example:
1 FORMAT (SSF4.1)
2 FORMAT (SS,F4.1)
! Incorrect
! Correct
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that the number and types of actual and formal statement function arguments must match (such as incorrect number of arguments). For example:
CHARACTER*4 C,C4,FUNC
FUNC()=C4
C=FUNC(1)
C=FUNC()
! Incorrect
! Correct
• The Compaq Fortran compiler detects the use of a format of the form
Ew.dE0 at compile time. For example:
1 format(e16.8e0) ! Compaq Fortran detects error at compile time write(*,1) 5.0
! Compaq Fortran 77 compiles but an output
!
conversion error occurs at run time
A–12 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
• Compaq Fortran detects passing of a statement function to a routine. For example: foo(x) = x * 2 call bar(foo) end
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that a branch to a statement shared by more than one DO statements must occur from within the innermost loop. For example:
DO 10 I = 1,10
IF (L1) GO TO 10 ! Incorrect
DO 10 J = 1,10
IF (L2) GO TO 10 ! Correct
10 CONTINUE
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that a file must contain at least one program unit. For example, a source file containing only comment lines results in an error at the last line (end-of-file).
The Compaq Fortran 77 compiler compiles files containing less than one program unit.
• The Compaq Fortran compiler correctly detects misspellings of the
ASSOCIATEVARIABLE keyword to the OPEN statement. For example:
OPEN(1,ASSOCIATEVARIABLE = I) ! Correct
OPEN(2,ASSOCIATEDVARIABLE = J) ! Incorrect (extra D)
• The Compaq Fortran language enforces the constraint that the result of an operation is determined by the data types of its operands. For example:
INTEGER*8 I8
I8 = 2147483647 + 1 ! Incorrect. Produces less accurate
! INTEGER*4 result
I8 = 2147483647_8 + 1_8 ! Correct
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that an object can be typed only once. Compaq Fortran 77 issues a warning message and uses the first type. For example:
LOGICAL B,B ! Incorrect (B multiply declared)
• The Compaq Fortran compiler enforces the constraint that certain intrinsic procedures defined by the Fortran 95/90 standards cannot be passed as actual arguments. For example, Compaq Fortran 77 allows most intrinsic procedures to be passed as actual arguments, but the Compaq Fortran compiler only allows those defined by the Fortran 95/90 standards (issues an error message).
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–13
Consider the following program: program tstifx intrinsic ifix,int,sin call a(ifix) call a(int) call a(sin) stop end subroutine a(f) external f integer f print *, f(4.9) return end
The IFIX and INT intrinsic procedures cannot be passed as actual arguments (the compiler issues an error message). However, the SIN intrinsic is allowed to be passed as an actual argument by the Fortran
95/90 standards.
• Compaq Fortran reports character truncation with an error-level message, not as a warning.
The following program produces an error message during compilation with Compaq Fortran, whereas Compaq Fortran 77 produces a warning message:
INIT5 = ’ABCDE’
INIT4 = ’ABCD’
INITLONG = ’ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP’
PRINT 10, INIT5, INIT4, INITLONG
10 FORMAT (’ ALL 3 VALUES SHOULD BE THE SAME: ’ 3I)
END
• If your code invokes Compaq Fortran intrinsic procedures with the wrong number of arguments or an incorrect argument type, Compaq Fortran reports this with an error-level message, not with a warning. Possible causes include:
A Compaq Fortran intrinsic has been added with the same name as a user-defined subprogram and the user-defined subprogram needs to be declared as EXTERNAL.
An intrinsic that is an extension to an older Fortran standard is incompatible with a newer standard-conforming intrinsic (for example, the older RAN function that accepted two arguments).
A–14 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
The following program produces an error message during compilation with Compaq Fortran, whereas Compaq Fortran 77 produces a warning message:
INTEGER ANOTHERCOUNT
ICOUNT=0
100 write(6,105) (ANOTHERCOUNT(ICOUNT), INT1=1,10)
105 FORMAT(’ correct if print integer values 1 through 10’ /10I7)
Q = 1.
R = .23
S = SIN(Q,R)
WRITE (6,110) S
110 FORMAT(’ CORRECT = 1.23
RESULT = ’,f8.2)
END
!
INTEGER FUNCTION ANOTHERCOUNT(ICOUNT)
ICOUNT=ICOUNT+1
ANOTHERCOUNT=ICOUNT
RETURN
END
REAL FUNCTION SIN(FIRST, SECOND)
SIN = FIRST + SECOND
RETURN
END
• Compaq Fortran reports missing commas in FORMAT descriptors with an error-level message, not as a warning.
The following program produces an error message during compilation with Compaq Fortran, whereas Compaq Fortran 77 produces a warning message:
LOGICAL LOG/111/
TYPE 1,LOG
1 FORMAT(’ ’23X,’LOG=’O12)
END
In the preceding example, the correct coding (adding the missing comma) for the FORMAT statement is:
1 FORMAT(’ ’,23X,’LOG=’O12)
• Compaq Fortran generates an error when it encounters a 1-character source line containing a Ctrl/Z character, whereas Compaq Fortran 77 allows such a line (which is treated as a blank line).
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–15
• Compaq Fortran detects the use of a character variable within parentheses in an I/O statement. For example:
CHARACTER*10 CH/’(I5)’/
INTEGER I
READ CH,I ! Acceptable
READ (CH),I ! Generates error message, interpreted as an internal READ
END
• Compaq Fortran evaluates the exponentiation operator at compile time only if the exponent has an integer data type. Compaq Fortran 77 evaluates the exponentiation operator even when the exponent does not have an integer data type. For example:
PARAMETER ( X = 4.0 ** 1.1)
• Compaq Fortran detects an error when evaluating constants expressions that result in an NaN or Infinity exceptional value, while Compaq Fortran
77 allows such expressions. For example:
PARAMETER ( X = 4.0 / 0.0 )
• Compaq Fortran reports a warning error message when the same variable is initialized more than once. Compaq Fortran 77 allows multiple initializations of the same variable without a warning. For example: integer i data i /1/ data i /2/ write (*,*) i stop end
For More Information:
• On passing arguments and returning function values between Compaq
Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77, see Section A.5.
• On Compaq Fortran procedure calling and argument passing, see
Section 11.1.
• On compatibility between Compaq Fortran for Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems and Compaq Fortran 77 on OpenVMS systems, see Section A.4.
• On the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
A–16 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
A.2.4 Compiler Command-Line Differences
Compaq Fortran 77 ( f77 command) and Compaq Fortran ( f90 command) share most of the same command-line options. The following options are provided only by Compaq Fortran 77 (not by Compaq Fortran):
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
-assume backslash
-f77
-ident
-show xref (same as -cross_reference )
•
•
-stand keyword
-warn informational
• -warn nounreachable
The following options are provided only by Compaq Fortran (not by Compaq
Fortran 77):
-align recNbyte
-annotations
-assume buffered_io
-assume gfullpath
-assume minus0
-f77rtl
-fixed
-free
-fpconstant
-fuse_xref
(TU*X only)
-hpf (TU*X only) and associated HPF parallel options, including -assume bigarrays , -assume nozsize , -nearest_neighbor , -nohpf_main , -show hpf , and -warn hpf
-intconstant
-ladebug
-module
-mp
(TU*X only)
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–17
•
•
-omp
(TU*X only) and assorted OpenMP parallel options including -assume pthreads_lock and -check omp_bindings
-std (performs Fortran 95/90 standards checking, whereas the Compaq
Fortran 77 -stand keyword standards checking) performs FORTRAN 77 and NTT MIA
• -warn granularity
The f77 command by default executes the Compaq Fortran 90 compiler and uses the various DECF90_ environment variables. To execute the
Compaq Fortran 77 compiler, use the f77 command with the -old_f77 option.
This option must be the first text on the command line after f77 .
A.3 Language Compatibility with Compaq Visual Fortran
The following language features found in Compaq Visual Fortran (and
Microsoft Fortran Powerstation Version 4) are now supported by Compaq
Fortran:
• # Constants. Constants using a base other than 10.
• C Strings. NULL terminated strings contain C-style escape sequences.
• Conditional Compilation And Metacommand Expressions ($define,
$undefine, $if, $elseif, $else, $endif).
• $FREEFORM, $NOFREEFORM, $FIXEDFORM. Source file format.
• $INTEGER, $REAL. Selects size.
• $FIXEDFORMLINESIZE. Line length for fixed form source.
• $STRICT, $NOSTRICT. F90 conformance.
• $PACK. Structure packing.
• $ATTRIBUTES ALIAS. External name for a subprogram or common block.
• $ATTRIBUTES C, STDCALL. Calling and naming conventions.
• $ATTRIBUTES VALUE, REFERENCE. Calling conventions.
• \ Descriptor. Prevents writing an end-of-record mark.
• Ew.dDe and Gw.dDe Edit Descriptors. Similar to Ew.dEe and Gw.dEe.
• 7200 Character Statement Length.
• Free form infinite line length.
• $DECLARE and $NODECLARE = = IMPLICIT NONE.
A–18 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
• $ATTRIBUTES EXTERN. Variable allocated in another source file.
• $ATTRIBUTES VARYING. Variable number of arguments.
• $ATTRIBUTES ALLOCATABLE. Allocatable array.
• Mixing Subroutines/Functions in Generic Interfaces.
• $MESSAGE. Output message during compilation.
• $LINE = = C’s #line.
• INT1. Converts to one byte integer by truncating.
• INT2. Converts to two byte integer by truncating.
• INT4. Converts to four byte integer by truncating.
• COTAN. Returns cotangent.
• DCOTAN. Returns double precision cotangent.
• IMAG. Returns the imaginary part of complex number.
• IBCHNG. Reverses value of bit.
• ISHA. Shifts arithmetically left or right.
• ISHC. Performs a circular shift.
• ISHL. Shifts logically left or right.
A.4 Compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq
Fortran for OpenVMS Systems
This section provides compatibility information for those who:
• Port Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran applications from OpenVMS systems to Compaq Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha
Systems
• Design Compaq Fortran applications to run on multiple platforms, including OpenVMS and Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha systems
If your primary concern is the design and development of Compaq Fortran applications for only Compaq Tru64 UNIX (or other U*X) systems, consider skipping this section.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–19
This section discusses the following topics:
• Compaq Fortran 77 extensions for OpenVMS systems that are not supported by this version of Compaq Fortran 77 or Compaq Fortran on
Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha Systems (Section A.4.1)
• Porting Compaq Fortran data files from an OpenVMS system to a Compaq
Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha system (Section A.4.2)
• Nonnative VAX floating-point representations, provided for those converting unformatted OpenVMS floating-point data (Section A.4.3)
A.4.1 Language Features Specific to Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq
Fortran for OpenVMS Systems
Some extensions to the FORTRAN-77 standard provided by Compaq Fortran
77 and Compaq Fortran for OpenVMS Systems are specific to the OpenVMS operating system, VAX architecture, or certain products on OpenVMS systems.
Such extensions are not included in Compaq Fortran 77 or Compaq Fortran on
Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha Systems.
For information on language compatibility between Compaq Fortran and
Compaq Fortran 77 without regard to operating system or architecture differences, see Section A.2.
Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran products for OpenVMS systems include:
• Compaq Fortran Version 7.4 for OpenVMS Alpha Systems
• Compaq Fortran 77 Version 7.4 for OpenVMS Alpha Systems
• Compaq Fortran 77 Version 6.6 for OpenVMS VAX Systems (previously called VAX FORTRAN)
Unless otherwise noted, the following list describes the Compaq Fortran
77 extensions in Compaq Fortran 77 and/or Compaq Fortran for OpenVMS systems that are not supported by Compaq Fortran for Compaq Tru64 UNIX
Systems:
• DICTIONARY statement
The DICTIONARY and related support for the CDD/Repository (common data dictionary) product are not provided by Compaq Fortran or Compaq
Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX Systems.
• Support for indexed sequential files
A–20 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
I/O statement specifiers for indexed file (keyed access) record I/O using
OpenVMS OPEN and INQUIRE statement specifiers are not provided by
Compaq Fortran or Compaq Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux
Systems, as follows:
ACCESS= ’ KEYED ’
INITIALSIZE
NOSPANBLOCKS
SHARED
EXTENDSIZE
KEY
ORGANIZATION= ’ INDEXED ’
• FORSYSDEF symbol definitions for OpenVMS systems
The parameter definitions of run-time messages found in FORSYSDEF.TLB
library module FORIOSDEF on OpenVMS systems are provided in the file
/usr/include/foriosdef.f
(see Section 8.2.2) on Compaq Tru64 UNIX
Systems. On Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux Alpha systems, Compaq
Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 provides jacket routines to simplify calling system calls and library routines (see Chapter 12).
• The INCLUDE statement option of including text from text libraries.
On Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux Alpha systems, OpenVMS text libraries are not supported.
• The %DESCR built-in function (for OpenVMS character descriptors).
On Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux Alpha systems, character data is passed by address and hidden length. For information about calling or being called by procedures written in other languages, see Chapter 11.
• Run-time default I/O units spelled as FOR0nn.dat, SYS$INPUT, and so on
In Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 on Compaq Tru64 UNIX and
Linux Alpha systems, these are environment variables FORTn, stdin , stdout , and so forth (see Section 7.5).
• VAX floating-point formats and related selection of the floating-point format in memory
Only IEEE floating-point formats are supported in memory on Compaq
Tru64 UNIX Alpha systems. (Compaq proprietary VAX floating-point formats are not supported in memory.) You can request conversion of unformatted files containing VAX floating-point formats into the appropriate IEEE memory format during record I/O (see Chapter 10).
On OpenVMS VAX systems, you specify the floating-point format to be used in memory with either the option [NO]G_FLOATING in the OPTIONS statement or the qualifier /[NO]G_FLOATING on the FORTRAN command line.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–21
On OpenVMS Alpha systems, you specify the floating-point format to be used in memory using the /FLOAT qualifier on the FORTRAN command line.
• Stream record format differences
With Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran for OpenVMS systems, the
Stream record type is delimited by CR-LF character sequence (carriage control and line feed characters). In Compaq Fortran for Compaq Tru64
UNIX systems, the Stream record type uses no delimiters.
For more information on compatible record types, see Section A.4.2.
• Other differences related to the OpenVMS operating system and the
Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux operating systems
When parsing file specifications for the OPEN, INQUIRE, and INCLUDE statements, keep in mind that file names are case-sensitive on Compaq
Tru64 UNIX and Linux systems and that OpenVMS file specification syntax differs from pathname syntax.
For the INCLUDE statement, the network node names (terminated by
‘‘::’’), logical names (usually terminated by ‘‘:’’), and other OpenVMS file specification components are not recognized. Instead, the INCLUDE statement should specify a pathname, possibly with an absolute directory path.
• The OpenVMS operating system provides various system services (SYS$ prefix) and run-time library routines (LIB$, SMG$, and other prefixes) that are not supported on Compaq Tru64 UNIX and Linux systems. Compaq
Tru64 UNIX systems support system calls and library routines with similar functions (but different names).
To make programs more portable to other operating systems, wherever possible you should use standard-conforming Compaq Fortran intrinsic routines in place of routines specific to a particular operating system.
For more information on specifying files, see Section 7.5.3.
The following language and VAX architecture features are associated only with Compaq Fortran 77 on OpenVMS VAX Systems (previously called VAX
FORTRAN) and are not supported by Compaq Fortran for Compaq Tru64
UNIX and Compaq Fortran for Linux Alpha systems:
• Directed decomposition features and CPAR$ directives for parallel processing
CPAR$ directives are treated as comments (ignored). Parallel processing capabilities (appropriate f90 options, OpenMP, Compaq Fortran parallel, and HPF data mapping directives) are provided by Compaq Fortran.
A–22 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
• OPTIONS statement options /BLAS, /NOBLAS, /CHECK=ALIGNMENT,
/CHECK=NOALIGNMENT, /CHECK=ASSERTION,
/CHECK=NOASSERTION, /G_FLOAT, and /NOG_FLOAT
You can specify some of these options by using the corresponding f90 command-line options. The OPTIONS statement is treated as a comment
(ignored).
• CDEC$ performance directives ASSERT and NOVECTOR are treated as comments (ignored).
• The REAL*16 floating-point data type
On VAX systems, REAL*16 data is in H_float format. On Alpha systems,
REAL*16 data is in the native IEEE style X_float; so are both halves (real and imaginary) of COMPLEX*32 data.
• The following subroutines for PDP-11 compatibility:
ASSIGN
CLOSE
ERRSET
ERRTST
FDBSET
IRAD50
• Radix-50 constants and character set
RAD50
R50ASC
USEREX
• The BLAS routines
Similar basic linear algebra routines are provided in the Compaq Extended
Mathematical Library (CXML) product (see Section 5.1.1).
The following language and VAX architecture features are interpretation differences between Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 on Alpha systems and Compaq Fortran 77 on OpenVMS VAX Systems (previously called
VAX FORTRAN):
• Random number generator (RAN)
The RAN function (one argument) generates a different pattern of numbers in Compaq Fortran than in Compaq Fortran 77 on OpenVMS VAX Systems for the same random seed. Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 use the same random seed. (The RAN and RANDU functions are provided for
Compaq Fortran 77 on OpenVMS VAX Systems compatibility. See Compaq
Fortran Language Reference Manual.)
• Hollerith constants in formatted I/O statements
Compaq Fortran 77 on OpenVMS VAX Systems and Compaq Fortran behave differently if either of the following occurs:
Two different I/O statements refer to the same CHARACTER
PARAMETER constant as their format specifier. For example:
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–23
CHARACTER*(*) FMT2
PARAMETER (FMT2=’(10Habcdefghij)’)
READ (5, FMT2)
WRITE (6, FMT2)
Two different I/O statements use the identical character constant as their format specifier. For example:
READ (5, ’(10Habcdefghij)’)
WRITE (6, ’(10Habcdefghij)’)
In Compaq Fortran 77 for OpenVMS VAX Systems, the parameter value obtained by the READ statement is modified. The parameter value modified by the READ statement is used as the output of the WRITE statement (FMT2 is ignored). However, in Compaq Fortran, the parameter value is not modified (the parameter value read by the READ statement has no effect on the parameter value written by the WRITE statement.)
For More Information:
• On language compatibility information about Compaq Fortran for Compaq
Tru64 UNIX systems and Compaq Fortran 77, see Section A.2.2.
• On language interpretation differences between Compaq Fortran for
Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems and Compaq Fortran 77, see Section A.2.3.
• About the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
A.4.2 OpenVMS Data Porting Considerations
When porting data between systems running the Compaq Tru64 UNIX and
Linux Alpha operating systems and systems running the OpenVMS operating system, the file formats and the floating-point representations may differ.
The file and record formats of Compaq Fortran 77 on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems are compatible with Compaq Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX and
Linux Alpha systems; they share the same language run-time I/O environment
(see Chapter 7).
OpenVMS Fortran
1 files containing only character, integer, or logical data do not need field-by-field conversion, but the record types must match. The segmented record type is the same on OpenVMS Fortran systems and Compaq
Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha systems. Certain other record types, such as variable-length records, differ between OpenVMS systems and
Compaq Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha systems.
1
OpenVMS Fortran refers collectively to VAX FORTRAN, Compaq Fortran 77 for
OpenVMS Alpha Systems, and Compaq Fortran 77 for OpenVMS VAX Systems
A–24 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
Table A–2 summarizes the OpenVMS Fortran record types and their equivalent record types in Compaq Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha systems.
Table A–2 Equivalent Record Types for OpenVMS Fortran and Compaq
Fortran on Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha Systems
OpenVMS Fortran
Record Type
Compaq Tru64
UNIX Fortran
Record Type Comments
Fixed-length None
Variable-length
Segmented
Stream
Stream_CR
Stream_LF
None
Segmented
None
Stream_CR
Stream_LF
Equivalent (must be copied correctly) if you use sequential access and you specify the
-vms option when compiling the Compaq
Fortran file. Otherwise, convert the file to a different record type.
Not equivalent. Convert the file to a different record type.
Equivalent (must be copied correctly).
Segmented data files can contain formatted or unformatted data.
Not equivalent. Convert the file to a different record type.
Equivalent (must be copied correctly).
Equivalent (must be copied correctly).
A.4.2.1 Matching Record Types
To match record types, there are several options:
• For the Segmented, Stream_CR, and Stream_LF record types, you do not need to convert the files.
• For fixed-length records where you will only use sequential access, use the
-vms option when compiling the Compaq Fortran program that will access the OpenVMS Fortran files. For fixed-length records where you will use direct access, convert the files to a different record format.
• For incompatible record types, convert the files by writing a OpenVMS
Fortran or C conversion program or by using the ANALYZE/RMS/FDL and
CONVERT/FDL (or EXCHANGE/FDL) commands for an appropriate file.
For instance, convert the OpenVMS Fortran file to the segmented record type.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–25
A.4.2.2 Copying Files
Equivalent record types must be copied carefully to preserve control information and record characteristics. For example:
• Do not use the ASCII transfer mode for binary files.
• Segmented files must be copied in a manner that preserves record length information.
To transfer (copy) the files, choose one of the following methods:
• From an NFS mounted disk, use the cp command (see cp (1)).
• Perform a DECnet copy from a Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha system running the appropriate optional network software using dcp (see dcp (8)). Use the dcp -i option when you want to preserve record format information.
• Perform a copy from a Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha system with rcp , possibly by using an intermediate node running the appropriate optional network software when using a version of the OpenVMS operating system that does not support a compatible network protocol (optional product).
• Use ftp from a Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha system to copy a file between a Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha system and an OpenVMS system. Use the binary or ascii command to set the mode before you copy (get or put) the file. For example, use the ftp binary command before copying an unformatted file (such as the segmented record type).
• Perform a DECnet copy from an OpenVMS system with the EXCHANGE command with the /NETWORK and /TRANSFER=BLOCK qualifiers with a Compaq Tru64 UNIX system. To convert the file to Stream_LF format during the copy operation, use /TRANSFER=(BLOCK,RECORD_
SEPARATOR=LF) instead of /TRANSFER=BLOCK, or specify the /FDL qualifier to the EXCHANGE command to specify the record type.
In addition to using the correct record type and carefully transferring the files, the data inside unformatted records may need to be converted. OpenVMS
Fortran data files that contain VAX binary floating-point data must be converted before they can be accessed by a Compaq Fortran program. There are several methods:
• On an OpenVMS system, a Fortran program can convert files containing unformatted data to files containing formatted data. Once the files contain formatted data, they can be read by the appropriate Compaq Fortran programs. However, converting unformatted data to formatted data may result in a loss of accuracy for unformatted floating-point data.
A–26 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
• On an OpenVMS VAX system, a Compaq Fortran 77 program can read and write files containing unformatted data by using the Compaq Fortran conversion capabilities described in DEC Fortran User Manual for
OpenVMS VAX Systems.
• On an OpenVMS Alpha system, a Fortran program can read and write files containing unformatted data by using the Compaq Fortran conversion capabilities described in the Compaq Fortran User Manual for OpenVMS
Alpha Systems.
A Compaq Fortran 77 for OpenVMS Alpha Systems program can also use the CVT$CONVERT_FLOAT routine to convert individual floating-point fields.
• On a Compaq Tru64 UNIX or Linux Alpha system, a Compaq Fortran program can read and write files containing unformatted data using the
Compaq Fortran conversion capabilities described in Section 10.3. A program using the Compaq Fortran conversion capabilities can also convert such data to other formats.
If you need to convert unformatted floating-point data, keep in mind that
Compaq Fortran 77 for OpenVMS VAX programs (VAX hardware) store the following:
• REAL*4 or COMPLEX*8 data in VAX F_float format
• REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16 data in either VAX D_float or G_float format
• REAL*16 data in VAX H_float format
In contrast, Compaq Fortran programs running on the Compaq Tru64 UNIX or
Linux Alpha operating system on Alpha hardware store the following:
• REAL*4 or COMPLEX*8 data in IEEE S_float format
• REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16 data in IEEE T_float format
• REAL*16 data or COMPLEX*32 data in native (IEEE style) X_float format
Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran for OpenVMS Alpha programs store floating-point data in the format specified by the /FLOAT qualifier:
• REAL*4 or COMPLEX*8 data in VAX F_float or IEEE S_float format
• REAL*8 or COMPLEX*16 data in VAX D_float, VAX G_float, or IEEE
T_float format
• REAL*16 data or COMPLEX*32 data in native (IEEE style) X_float format
For information on Compaq Fortran data types, see Chapter 9.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–27
For More Information:
• On Compaq Fortran I/O, see Chapter 7.
• About the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
A.4.3 Nonnative VAX Floating-Point Representations
This section provides information about VAX floating-point data formats. You can convert unformatted files from OpenVMS systems by using the methods described in Chapter 10.
On OpenVMS VAX systems, single-precision data (such as REAL*4) is stored in VAX F_float format and double-precision data (such as REAL*8) data can be stored in either VAX D_float or VAX G_float formats, depending on whether the /G_FLOATING qualifier was specified on the FORTRAN command line (see the DEC Fortran User Manual for OpenVMS VAX Systems).
On OpenVMS Alpha systems, you can specify the floating-point format in memory by using the /FLOAT qualifier (see the DEC Fortran User Manual for
OpenVMS AXP Systems). Single-precision data on OpenVMS Alpha systems is stored in either VAX F_float or IEEE S_float formats; double-precision data can be stored in VAX D_float, VAX G_float, or IEEE T_float formats.
REAL*16 (extended precision) data is always stored in IEEE style X_float format on Alpha systems.
With VAX floating-point data types, the binary radix point is to the left of the most-significant bit.
A.4.3.1 VAX F_float REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4
Intrinsic REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 F_float data occupies four contiguous bytes. Bits are labeled from the right, 0 through 31, as shown in Figure A–1.
Figure A–1 VAX F_float REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 Representation
31
FRACTION
15 14
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
6
FRACTION
0
:A
ZK−5301A−GE
The form of REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 F_float data is sign magnitude, where:
• Bit 15 is the sign bit (0 for positive numbers, 1 for negative numbers).
A–28 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
• Bits 14:7 are a binary exponent in excess 128 notation (binary exponents from –127 to 127 are represented by binary 1 to 255).
• Bits 6:0 and 31:16 are a normalized 24-bit fraction with the redundant most significant fraction bit not represented.
When converting unformatted F_float data from an OpenVMS system, the approximate range is 0.293873588E–38 to 1.7014117E38. The precision is approximately one part in 2**23, typically seven decimal digits.
A.4.3.2 VAX G_float REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8
Intrinsic REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 (same as DOUBLE PRECISION) G_float data occupies eight contiguous bytes. The bits are labeled from the right, 0 through 63, as shown in Figure A–2.
Figure A–2 VAX G_float REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 Representation
63
FRACTION
15
S
I
G
N
14
EXPONENT
3
FRAC−
TION
0
:A
ZK−5302A−GE
The form of REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 G_float data is sign magnitude, where:
• Bit 15 is the sign bit (0 for positive numbers, 1 for negative numbers).
• Bits 14:4 are a binary exponent in excess 1024 notation (binary exponents from –1023 to 1023 are represented by the binary 1 to 2047).
• Bits 3:0 and 63:16 are a normalized 53-bit fraction with the redundant most significant fraction bit not represented.
When converting unformatted G_float data from an OpenVMS system, the approximate range is 0.5562684646268004D–308 to
0.89884656743115785407D308. The precision of G_float data is approximately one part in 2**52, typically 15 decimal digits.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–29
A.4.3.3 VAX D_float REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8
Intrinsic REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 (same as DOUBLE PRECISION) D_float data occupies eight contiguous bytes. Bits are labeled from the right, 0 through
63, as shown in Figure A–3.
Figure A–3 VAX D_float REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 Representation
63
FRACTION
15 14
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
6
FRACTION
0
:A
ZK−5303A−GE
The form of REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 D_float data is identical to an F_float real number, except for an additional 32 low-significance fraction bits. The exponent conventions and approximate range of values are the similar to those for F_float.
When converting unformatted D_float data from an OpenVMS system, the approximate range is 0.2938735877055719D–38 to 1.70141183460469229D38.
The precision is approximately one part in 2**55, typically 16 decimal digits.
A.4.3.4 VAX F_float COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8
Intrinsic COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 (single-precision COMPLEX) data in VAX F_float format occupies eight contiguous bytes containing a pair of
REAL*4 values. The low-order four bytes contain REAL*4 data that represents the real part of the complex number. The high-order four bytes contain REAL
(KIND=4) or REAL*4 data that represents the imaginary part of the complex number. Figure A–4 shows a COMPLEX*8 number in F_float format.
Figure A–4 VAX F_float COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 Representation
REAL
PART
IMAGINARY
PART
31
FRACTION
FRACTION
15 14
S
I
G
N
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
EXPONENT
6
FRACTION
0
:A
FRACTION :A+4
ZK−5304A−GE
A–30 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
The limits for REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 apply to the two separate real and imaginary parts of a COMPLEX (KIND=4) or COMPLEX*8 number. Like
REAL (KIND=4) or REAL*4 numbers, the sign bit representation is 0 (zero) for positive numbers and 1 for negative numbers.
A.4.3.5 VAX G_float and D_float COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16
Intrinsic COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 (same as DOUBLE
COMPLEX) data occupies 16 contiguous bytes containing a pair of REAL*8 or REAL (KIND=8) values. COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 data from an OpenVMS system is in one of the following REAL*8 or REAL (KIND=8) formats:
• VAX G_float format
• VAX D_float format
The low-order eight bytes contain REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 data that represents the real part of the complex data. The high-order eight bytes contain REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 data that represents the imaginary part of the complex data, as shown in Figure A–5 (for G_float) and Figure A–6 (for
D_float).
Figure A–5 VAX G_float COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 Representation
REAL
PART
IMAGINARY
PART
63
FRACTION
FRACTION
15 14
S
I
G
N
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
EXPONENT
3
FRAC−
TION
0
:A
FRAC−
TION
:A+8
ZK−5305A−GE
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–31
Figure A–6 VAX D_float COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 Representation
REAL
PART
IMAGINARY
PART
63
FRACTION
FRACTION
15 14
S
I
G
N
S
I
G
N
EXPONENT
EXPONENT
6
FRACTION
FRACTION
0
:A
:A+8
ZK−5306A−GE
The limits for REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 apply to the two separate real and imaginary parts of a COMPLEX (KIND=8) or COMPLEX*16 number. Like
REAL (KIND=8) or REAL*8 numbers, the sign bit representation is 0 (zero) for positive numbers and 1 for negative numbers.
A.4.3.6 VAX H_float Representation
The REAL (KIND=16) or REAL*16 VAX H_float data format is used only on OpenVMS VAX systems. On Alpha systems, REAL (KIND=16) extended precision data is always stored in Alpha X_float format.
With VAX floating-point data types, the binary radix point is to the left of the most-significant bit.
As shown in Figure A–7, REAL*16 H_float data is 16 contiguous bytes starting on an arbitrary byte boundary. The bits are labeled from the right, 0 through
127.
The form of an H_float REAL*16 data is sign magnitude with bit 15 the sign bit, bits 14:0 an excess 16384 binary exponent, and bits 127:16 a normalized 113-bit fraction with the redundant most significant fraction bit not represented.
The value of H_float data is in the approximate range 0.84*10**–4932 through
0.59*10**4932. The precision of H_float data is approximately one part in
2**112 or typically 33 decimal digits.
For More Information:
• On converting unformatted data files, see Chapter 10.
• On native floating-point ranges, see Table 9–1.
A–32 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
Figure A–7 VAX H_float REAL*16 Representation (VAX Systems)
0 15
S
I
G
N
14
EXPONENT :A
FRACTION :A+2
FRACTION
FRACTION
:A+4
:A+6
FRACTION
FRACTION
FRACTION
:A+8
:A+10
:A+12
FRACTION :A+14
127 112
ZK−0805−GE
A.5 Calling Between Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq
Fortran
On Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, you can call a Compaq Fortran 77 subprogram from Compaq Fortran or call a Compaq Fortran subprogram from Compaq Fortran 77 (with a few exceptions). A Compaq Fortran 77 procedure and a Compaq Fortran procedure can also perform I/O to the same unit number.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–33
A.5.1 Argument Passing and Function Return Values
The recommended rules for passing arguments and function return values between Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran procedures are as follows:
• If possible, express the following Compaq Fortran features with the
Compaq Fortran 77 language:
Function references
CALL statements
Function definitions
Subroutine definitions
Avoid using Compaq Fortran language features not available in Compaq
Fortran 77. Since Compaq Fortran is a superset of Compaq Fortran 77, specifying the procedure interface using the Compaq Fortran 77 language helps ensure that calls between the two languages will succeed.
• Not all data types in Compaq Fortran have equivalent Compaq Fortran
77 data types. The following Compaq Fortran features should not be used between Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 procedures, because they are not supported by Compaq Fortran 77:
COMPLEX*32 data
Derived-type (user-defined) data, which has no equivalent in Compaq
Fortran 77.
Compaq Fortran data with the POINTER attribute, which has no equivalent in Compaq Fortran 77. The pointer data type supported by
Compaq Fortran 77 is not equivalent to Compaq Fortran pointer data.
Because Compaq Fortran supports the pointer data type supported by Compaq Fortran 77, you can use Compaq Fortran 77 pointer data types in both Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77. (In some cases, you can create Compaq Fortran 77 pointer data in a Compaq Fortran procedure using the %LOC function.)
Compaq Fortran arrays with the POINTER attribute are passed by array descriptor. A program written in Compaq Fortran 77 needs to interpret the array descriptor format generated by a Compaq Fortran
90 array with the POINTER attribute (see Section 11.1.7).
Compaq Fortran assumed-shape arrays.
A–34 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
Compaq Fortran assumed-shape arrays are passed by array descriptor.
A program written in Compaq Fortran 77 needs to interpret the array descriptor format generated by a Compaq Fortran assumed-shape array
(see Section 11.1.7).
You can use Compaq Fortran record structures, which are supported by
Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran as an extension to the Fortran
95/90 standards.
For more information on how Compaq Fortran handles arguments and function return values, see Section 11.1.4.
• Make sure the sizes of INTEGER, LOGICAL, REAL, and COMPLEX declarations match.
For example, Compaq Fortran declarations of REAL (KIND=4) and
INTEGER (KIND=4) match Compaq Fortran 77 declarations of REAL*4 and INTEGER*4. For COMPLEX values, a Compaq Fortran declaration of COMPLEX (KIND=4) matches a Compaq Fortran 77 declaration of
COMPLEX*8; COMPLEX (KIND=8) matches COMPLEX*16. Compaq
Fortran 77 does not have COMPLEX*32 declarations.
Your source programs may contain INTEGER, LOGICAL, REAL, or
COMPLEX declarations without a kind parameter (or size specifier). In this case, when compiling the Compaq Fortran procedures ( f90 command) and Compaq Fortran 77 procedures ( f77 command), either omit the options or specify the equivalent options for controlling the sizes of these declarations.
For more information on these options (the same for f90 and f77 ), see
Section 3.53 for INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations, Section 3.78
for REAL and COMPLEX declarations, and Section 3.34 for DOUBLE
PRECISION declarations.
• Compaq Fortran uses the same argument-passing conventions as Compaq
Fortran 77 on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems (see Section 11.1.4).
• You can return nearly all function return values from a Compaq Fortran function to a calling Compaq Fortran 77 routine, with the following exceptions:
You cannot return Compaq Fortran pointer data from Compaq Fortran to a Compaq Fortran 77 calling routine.
You cannot return Compaq Fortran user-defined data types from a
Compaq Fortran function to a Compaq Fortran 77 calling routine.
Example A–1 and Example A–2 show passing an array from a Compaq Fortran program to a Compaq Fortran 77 subroutine that prints its value.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–35
Example A–1 shows the Compaq Fortran program (file array_to_f77.f90
It passes the same argument as a target and a pointer. In both cases, it
).
is received by reference by the Compaq Fortran 77 subroutine as a target
(regular) argument. The interface block in Example A–1 is not needed, but does allow data type checking.
Example A–1 Compaq Fortran Program Calling a Compaq Fortran 77
Subroutine
! Pass arrays to f77 routine. File: array_to_f77.f90
! this interface block is not required, but must agree
! with actual procedure. It can be used for type checking.
! Procedure interface block interface subroutine meg(a) integer :: a(3) end subroutine end interface integer, target :: x(3) integer, pointer :: xp(:) x = (/ 1,2,3 /) xp => x call meg(x) call meg(xp) end
! Call f77 subroutine twice.
Example A–2 shows the Compaq Fortran 77 subprogram called by the Compaq
Fortran program (file array_f77.f
).
Example A–2 Compaq Fortran 77 Subroutine Called by a Compaq Fortran
Program
! Get array argument from F90. File: array_f77.f
subroutine meg(a) integer a(3) print *,a end
These files (shown in Example A–1 and Example A–2) might be compiled, linked, and run as follows:
A–36 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
% f77 -c array_f77.f
% f90 -o array_to_f77 array_to_f77.f90 array_f77.o
% array_to_f77
1
1
2
2
3
3
In Example A–1, because array a is not defined as a pointer in the interface block, the Compaq Fortran pointer variable xp is passed as target data by reference (address of the target data).
However, if the interface to the dummy argument had the POINTER attribute, the variable xp would be passed by descriptor. This descriptor would not work with the Compaq Fortran 77 program shown in Example A–2.
For More Information:
• On how Compaq Fortran handles arguments and function return values, see Section 11.1.4.
• On explicit interfaces, see the Compaq Fortran Language Reference
Manual.
• On compatibility between the Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 languages, see Appendix A.
• On other aspects of the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran
Language Reference Manual.
A.5.2 Using Data Items in Common Blocks
To make global data available across Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 procedures, use common blocks.
Common blocks are supported by both Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq
Fortran, but modules are not supported by Compaq Fortran 77. Some suggestions about using common blocks follow:
• Use the same COMMON statement to ensure that the data items match in order, type, and size.
If multiple Compaq Fortran procedures will use the same common block, declare the data in a module and reference that module with a USE statement where needed.
If Compaq Fortran 77 procedures use the same common block as the
Compaq Fortran procedures and the common block is declared in a module, consider modifying the Compaq Fortran 77 source code as follows:
Replace the common block declaration with the appropriate USE statement.
Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms A–37
Recompile the Compaq Fortran 77 source code with the f90 command.
• Specify the same alignment characteristics with the -align option when compiling both Compaq Fortran procedures ( f90 command) and Compaq
Fortran 77 procedures ( f77 command).
When compiling the source files with more than one consistently use the -align dcommons or f90
-align commons or f77 command, option. This naturally aligns data items in a common block and ensures consistent format of the common block.
• Make sure the sizes of INTEGER, LOGICAL, REAL, and COMPLEX declarations match.
For example, Compaq Fortran declarations of REAL (KIND=4) and
INTEGER (KIND=4) match Compaq Fortran 77 declarations of REAL*4 and INTEGER*4. For COMPLEX values, a Compaq Fortran declaration of COMPLEX (KIND=4) matches a Compaq Fortran 77 declaration of
COMPLEX*8; COMPLEX (KIND=8) matches COMPLEX*16. Fortran 77 does not have COMPLEX*32 data.
Your source programs may contain INTEGER, LOGICAL, REAL, or
COMPLEX declarations without a kind parameter or size specifier. In this case, either omit or specify the same options that control the sizes of these declarations when compiling the procedures with multiple commands
(same rules as Section A.5.1).
A.5.3 I/O to the Same Unit Number
Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran 77 share the same run-time system, so you can perform I/O to the same unit number with Compaq Fortran and
Compaq Fortran 77 procedures. For instance, a Compaq Fortran main program can open the file, a Compaq Fortran 77 function can issue READ or WRITE statements to the same unit, and the Compaq Fortran main program can close the file.
For More Information:
• On the Compaq Fortran language, see the Compaq Fortran Language
Reference Manual.
• On passing arguments, function return values, and the contents of registers on Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, see the Compaq Tru64 UNIX Calling
Standard for Alpha Systems.
• On Compaq Fortran intrinsic data types, see Chapter 9.
• On Compaq Fortran I/O, see Chapter 7.
A–38 Compatibility: Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran on Multiple Platforms
B
Compaq Fortran Environment Variables
This appendix contains the following topics:
• Section B.1, Commands for Setting and Unsetting Environment Variables
• Section B.2, Compile-Time Environment Variables
• Section B.3, Run-Time Environment Variables
In addition to the environment variables recognized by Compaq Fortran, the
Compaq Tru64 UNIX operating system recognizes other environment variables.
For example, you can use the PROFDIR profile data file name different from environment variable to request a mon.out
during pixie command execution on a Compaq Tru64 UNIX system and you can set the environment variable to install a private shared library.
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
B.1 Commands for Setting and Unsetting Environment
Variables
The commands used to set and unset environment variables vary with the shell in use.
To view the previously set environment variables, use the
(See printenv (1).) printenv command.
B.1.1 Bourne Shell (sh) and Bourne Again Shell (bash) and Korn Shell
(ksh) Commands
With the Bourne shell ( sh ), Bourne Again Shell ( bash )
(L*X only)
, and Korn shell
( ksh ), use an export and an assignment statement to set an environment variable:
$ export environment-variable-name
$ environment-variable-name=value
Compaq Fortran Environment Variables B–1
For example, to associate the environment variable
/usr/users/smith/ , enter:
TMPDIR with the directory
$ export TMPDIR
$ TMPDIR=/usr/users/smith/
To remove the association of an environment variable and its value with the
Bourne or Korn shell or bash shell
(L*X only)
, use the unset command:
$ unset environment-variable-name
B.1.2 C Shell (csh) Commands
With the C shell (csh), use the value: setenv command to set an environment variable
% setenv environment-variable-name value
For example, to associate the environment variable at /usr/users/smith/test.dat
, enter:
FORT8 with the file located
% setenv FORT8 /usr/users/smith/test.dat
To remove the association of an environment variable and its value with the C shell, use the unsetenv command:
% unsetenv environment-variable-name
B.2 Compile-Time Environment Variables
Table B–1 describes environment variables that Compaq Fortran recognizes at compile time.
For more information, see Section 7.5.7, Using Environment Variables.
Table B–1 Compile-Time Environment Variables
Environment Variable Description
DECF90
DECF90_CC
DECF90_DIR
Location of the f90 compiler to invoke.
Location of the cc command.
Path for the and f90 command to use to find the f90 compiler for_main.o
file.
DECF90_DIR supersedes DECF90 and is superseded by DECF90_LIB_DIR .
(continued on next page)
B–2 Compaq Fortran Environment Variables
Table B–1 (Cont.) Compile-Time Environment Variables
Environment Variable Description
DECF90_FPP
DECF90_GMPILIB
(TU*X only)
DECF90_HPF_TARGET
(TU*X only)
DECF90_INIT
Contains the full file name of the preprocessor to be run.
If -cpp is specified on the command line, this preprocessor is run instead of cpp . See Section 3.31.
If -fpp is specified on the command line, this preprocessor is run instead of fpp . See Section 3.45.
Variable for the f90 (or f95 ) command. When the
-hpf_target gmpi option is specified, this variable is used to specify a path to the desired generic Message Passing
Interface (MPI) library to link with. If this variable is not used, then you must specify the desired MPI library to link against on the command line. See Section 3.50, -hpf, -hpf num, and Related Options — Compile HPF Programs for
Parallel Execution.
Variable for the f90 (or f95 ) command. If this variable is set, it must have one of the values of the -hpf_target option.
See Section 3.50, -hpf, -hpf num, and Related Options —
Compile HPF Programs for Parallel Execution.
DECF90_WSF_TARGET is a nonpreferred synonym for
DECF90_HPF_TARGET .
Initial options for the f90 (or f95 ) command. If this variable is defined, its value must have the form:
[[pre] [:: [post]]
The items enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) are optional and can be empty. The pre and post variables are strings to be added to the command line:
•
• pre is added to the front of the command line, before any characters the user enters.
post is added to the end of the command line.
DECF90_LIB_DIR Path for the libraries.
f90 compiler to use to find the Fortran run-time
DECFORT
(TU*X only)
Location of the Fortran 77 compiler to invoke.
DECFORT_CC
(TU*X only) Location of the cc command for the Fortran 77 compiler.
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Environment Variables B–3
Table B–1 (Cont.) Compile-Time Environment Variables
Environment Variable Description
DECFORT_DIR
(TU*X only)
DECFORT_FPP
(TU*X only)
DECFORT_INIT
(TU*X only)
Path for the and f77 command to use to find the f77 compiler for_main.o
file.
DECFORT_DIR supersedes DECFORT and is superseded by DECFORT_LIB_DIR .
Requests that the Fortran preprocessor fpp be run before compiling Fortran 77 source files when -cpp has been specified. For more information about the Fortran preprocessor and the related -fpp and -nofpp options, see
Section 3.45.
Initial options for the f77 command. If this variable is defined, its value must have the form:
[[pre] [:: [post]]
The items enclosed in square brackets ([ ]) are optional and can be empty. The pre and post variables are strings to be added to the command line:
•
• pre is added to the front of the command line, before any characters the user enters.
post is added to the end of the command line.
DECFORT_LIB_DIR
(TU*X only)
LD_LIBRARY_PATH
(TU*X only)
TMPDIR
Path for the libraries.
f77 compiler to use to find the Fortran run-time
Path on which to find shared libraries for an executable program.
Specifies an alternate working directory where temporary files are created during preprocessing or compilation.
To specify an alternate working directory for temporary files, set the TMPDIR environment variable to the desired directory name. If TMPDIR is not set, temporary files created during preprocessing or compilation reside in the /tmp directory.
For large applications, you might set this variable to balance disk I/O during compilation. For performance reasons, use a local disk (rather than using an NFS-mounted disk) to contain the temporary files.
B–4 Compaq Fortran Environment Variables
B.3 Run-Time Environment Variables
Table B–2 describes the environment variables Compaq Fortran recognizes at run time.
Environment variables used with OpenMP Fortran API (multithreaded parallel processing) are described in Section 6.4, Environment Variables for Adjusting the Run-Time Environment.)
For more information, see Section 7.5.7, Using Environment Variables.
Table B–2 Run-Time Environment Variables
Environment Variable Description decfort_dump_flag
FOR_ACCEPT
FOR_DISABLE_STACK_TRACE
(TU*X only)
Requests that a core dump ( core file) be created when any severe Compaq Fortran run-time error occurs. Most severe Compaq Fortran run-time errors do not result in a core dump, unless accompanied by certain operating system messages.
To request that a core file be created for all severe
Compaq Fortran run-time errors, set the environment variable decfort_dump_flag to the character Y or y and then run the erroneous program for which you need a core file created. For more information, see
Section 8.1.4.
For programs compiled with the f90 command -vms option, specifies the name of a file to receive input from an ACCEPT statement instead of stdin .
Disables outputting of stack trace information as part of the run-time error message for a severe error. The normal run-time error message is produced instead. See
Section 8.1.1, Run-Time Message Format.
FOR_PRINT
FOR_READ
FOR_TYPE
For programs compiled with the f90 command -vms option, specifies the name of a file to receive output from a PRINT statement instead of stdout .
For programs compiled with the f90 command -vms option, specifies the name of a file to receive input from a READ statement instead of stdin .
For programs compiled with the f90 command -vms option, specifies the name of a file to receive output from a TYPE statement instead of stdout .
(continued on next page)
Compaq Fortran Environment Variables B–5
Table B–2 (Cont.) Run-Time Environment Variables
Environment Variable Description
FORTn
FORT_BUFFERED
FORT_CONVERTn
FORT_CONVERT.ext
MP_*
NLSPATH
OMP_*
(TU*X only)
(TU*X only)
Allows the user to specify the directory and file name at run time for a logical unit (n) for which the
OPEN statement does not specify a file name. If the appropriate environment variable is not set and the
OPEN statement does not specify a file name for that logical unit, a default file name of fort.n is used.
Specifies that buffered I/O will be used for sequential output to all I/O units, except those whose output is to the terminal. This provides a run-time mechanism to support the behavior enabled by the -assume buffered_io option. For more information, see
Section 3.6 and Section 5.6.7, Efficient Use of Record
Buffers and Disk I/O.
For an unformatted file, specifies the nonnative numeric format of the data at run time for a logical unit (n).
Otherwise, the nonnative numeric format of the unformatted data must be specified at compile-time by using the f90 command -convert type option. For more information, see Section 10.5.1.
For an unformatted file, specifies the nonnative numeric format of the data at run time for a file whose suffix is ext. Otherwise, the nonnative numeric format of the unformatted data must be specified at compile-time by using the f90 command -convert type option. For more information, see Section 10.5.2.
Compaq Fortran parallel compiler environment variables, used with directed parallel processing.
For more information, see Section 6.4, Environment
Variables for Adjusting the Run-Time Environment.
If the run-time message catalog file cannot be located, the Compaq Fortran run-time system attempts to open the message catalog file at the location indicated by the
NLSPATH environment variable. For more information, see Section 8.1.2.
OpenMP Fortran API environment variables, used with directed parallel processing. For more information, see
Section 6.4, Environment Variables for Adjusting the
Run-Time Environment.
(continued on next page)
B–6 Compaq Fortran Environment Variables
Table B–2 (Cont.) Run-Time Environment Variables
Environment Variable Description
TMPDIR Specifies an alternate working directory where scratch files are created. To specify an alternate working directory for scratch files, set the TMPDIR environment variable to the desired directory name. For performance reasons, use a local disk (rather than an NFS-mounted disk) to contain the scratch files.
If TMPDIR is not set, scratch files are created in the directory specified in the OPEN statement
DEFAULTFILE (if specified).
Compaq Fortran Environment Variables B–7
C
Compiler Output Listings
This appendix describes the three sections of an output listing produced by the
Compaq Fortran compiler:
• Section C.1, Source-Code Section of the Output Listing
• Section C.2, Machine-Code Section of the Output Listing
• Section C.3, Compilation Summary of the Output Listing
To request a listing file, use the -V option. For example:
% f90 -V peak.f90
C.1 Source-Code Section of the Output Listing
The source-code section of a compiler output listing displays the source program as it appears in the input file, with the addition of sequential line numbers generated by the compiler. Example C–1 shows a sample of a source-code section of a compiler output listing.
Compiler Output Listings C–1
Example C–1 Sample Source Code Listing
RELAX2 Source Listing 14-Nov-2001 09:59:31 Compaq Fortran V5.5-1843
13-Feb-1998 11:00:18 listing.f90
1
2
3
4
5
6 1
7
8
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
SUBROUTINE RELAX2(EPS)
INTEGER, PARAMETER :: M=40
INTEGER, PARAMETER :: N=60
COMMON X (M,N)
LOGICAL DONE
DONE = .TRUE.
DO J=1,N-1
DO I=1,M-1
XNEW = (X(I-1,J)+X(I+1,J)+X(I,J-1)+X(I,J+1))/4
IF (ABS(XNEW-X(I,J)) > EPS) DONE = .FALSE.
X(I,J) = XNEW
END DO
END DO
IF (.NOT. DONE) GO TO 1
RETURN
END SUBROUTINE
The first heading line contains ‘‘Source Listing,’’ the date and time the listing file was created, and the version of Compaq Fortran.
The second line contains the creation date of the source file and its file name.
Compiler-generated line numbers appear in the left margin.
Compile-time error messages that contain line numbers refer to these compiler-generated line numbers. See Section 2.3, Compiler Limits, Diagnostic
Messages, and Error Conditions.
C.2 Machine-Code Section of the Output Listing
The machine-code section of a compiler output listing provides a symbolic representation of the compiler-generated object code. The representation of the generated code and data is similar to that of assembler language.
The machine-code section is optional. To create a listing file with a machinecode section, specify both the -V and -show code options. For example:
% f90 -c -V -show code peak.f90
Example C–2 shows a sample of a machine-code section of a compiler output listing for an Alpha system.
Note
The machine code listing is for reference purposes only. Such code is not intended to be assembled and run.
C–2 Compiler Output Listings
Example C–2 Sample Machine-Code Listing
RELAX2 Machine Code Listing 14-Nov-2001 09:59:31 Compaq Fortran V5.5-1843
13-Feb-1998 11:00:18 listing.f90
27BB0001
2FFE0000
23BD8420
2FFE0000
0000
0000
0004
0008
.text
.globl
relax2_
.ent
relax2_ relax2_:
.eflag 16 gp, relax2_ ldah unop lda gp, relax2_ unop
L$1:
23DEFFD0
88100000
B75E0000
A79D8010
A47D8018
9C5E0008
9C7E0010
9C9E0018
20630000
9CBE0020
9CDE0028
883C0000
209FFFFF
47E77405
47F41406
2FFE0000
40660407
47E4F408
20E7FF5C
2FFE0000
000C
0010
0010
0014
0018
001C
0020
0024
0028
002C
0030
0034
0038
003C
0040
0040
0044
0048
004C
0050
0050
0054
0058
005C
89470008
8987FF64
47FF041B
89670000
0060
0060
0064
0068
006C
.
.
.
Routine Size: 1012 bytes, lda lds stq ldq ldq stt stt stt lda sp, -48(sp) f0, (r16) r26, (sp) r28, (gp) r3, var$0004 f2, 8(sp) f3, 16(sp) f4, 24(sp) r3, var$0004
.1: mov mov mov unop lab$0004: addq mov stt stt f5, 32(sp) f6, 40(sp)
.mask 0x04000000,-48
.fmask 0x0000007C,-40
.frame
$sp, 48, $26
.prologue 1 lds f1, (r28)
-1, DONE
59, var$0002
160, r6 r3, r6, r7
39, var$0003 r7, -164(r7) lda unop lab$0008: lds lds clr lds f10, 8(r7) f12, -156(r7) r27 f11, (r7)
Routine Base: $CODE$ + 0000
# gp, (r27)
# gp, (gp)
# r3, 8(gp)
# r3, (r3)
# -1, r4
# 59, r5
# 39, r8
# 000010
# 000009
# 000001
# 000009
# 000001
# 000009
# 000006
# 000007
# 000011
# 000007
# 000009
# 000008
# 000009
# 000008
# 000009
# 000010
# 000009
(continued on next page)
Compiler Output Listings C–3
Example C–2 (Cont.) Sample Machine-Code Listing
00000000
00000000
3E800000
0000
0008
0000
0000
0000
$$1:
$$2:
$$3:
$$4:
.rdata
.quad
.literal
.quad
_BLNK__
.rconst
.long 0x3E800000 # .float 0.2500000
.data
; Procedure descriptor for relax2_
; flags :short
; rsa_offset
; imask
: 0
: 0x00
; fmask
; frame_size
; sp_set
; entry_length
.data
: 0x1F
: 6
: 4
: 15
; Code range descriptor for relax2_ beginaddress rpd_offset :
: 0000
0000 flags
.comm
_BLNK__ 9600
: Standard
C.2.1 How Generated Code and Data are Represented in Machine-Code
Listings
Like a source listing, the first heading line contains the name of the program, subroutine, or function; the date and time the listing file was created; and the version of Compaq Fortran.
The second heading line contains ‘‘Machine Code Listing,’’ the creation date of the source file, and the name of the source file.
The third heading line contains a .section
assembler directive, indicating the attributes of the machine-code program unit. The $CODE$ shown in
Example C–2 indicates a code section.
The lines following each data program section provide information such as the contents of storage initialized for FORMAT statements, DATA statements, constants, and subprogram argument call lists.
The lines following $CODE$ show the machine instructions represented in the form of Alpha assembler mnemonics and syntax. Each line contains compilergenerated object code starting at the left margin, followed by the hexadecimal byte offset (four hexadecimal digits), followed by the actual assembler code.
C–4 Compiler Output Listings
C.2.2 Assembler Code Represented in Machine-Code Listings
General registers (0 through 31) are represented by r0 through r31 and floating-point registers are similarly represented by fn .
Variables and arrays defined in the source program are shown as they were defined in the program. Offsets from variables and arrays are shown in decimal. Optimization frequently places variables in registers, so variable names may be missing.
Fortran source labels referenced in the source program are shown with a period ( . ) prefix. For example, if the source program refers to label 300, the label appears in the machine-code listing as .300. Labels that appear in the source program, but are not referenced or are deleted during compiler optimization, are ignored. They do not appear in the machine-code listing unless you specified -O0 .
The compiler may generate labels for its own use. These labels appear as or
L$n lab$000n , where the value of n is unique for each such label in a program unit.
Integer constants are shown as signed integer values.
Addresses are represented by the program section name plus the hexadecimal offset within that program section. Changes from one program section to another are indicated by lines.
C.3 Compilation Summary of the Output Listing
The final entries on the compiler listing are the compiler options and compiler statistics.
The options shown include the ones specified on the command line, both and fort , and the ones in effect as defaults during the compilation. The f90 compiler statistics are the machine resources used by the compiler.
Example C–3 shows how compiler options and f90 (on Tru64 UNIX systems) command-line options and compilation statistics appear on the listing.
A summary of compilation statistics appears at the end of the listing file.
Example C–3 Sample Compilation Summary on Tru64 UNIX Systems
(continued on next page)
Compiler Output Listings C–5
Example C–3 (Cont.) Sample Compilation Summary on Tru64 UNIX Systems
COMPILER OPTIONS BEING USED no -align commons
-align records no -align rec1byte no -align rec4byte
-altparam no -annotations detail no -annotations inlining no -annotations loop_unrolling no -annotations shrinkwrapping no -annotations tail_calls
-arch generic no -assume bigarrays no -assume byterecl no -assume dummy_aliases no -assume minus0 no -assume pthreads_lock
-assume underscore
-assume zsize no -bintext
-ccdefault default no -check bounds no -check omp_bindings no -check overflow no -check underflow no -D no -d_lines no -extend_source no -f77rtl no -fpscomp filesfromcmd no -fpscomp ioformat no -fpscomp logicals
-fpe0
-free
-granularity quadword no -hpf_matmul
-iface
-integer_size 32
-machine_code no -mixed_str_len_arg
-names lowercase no -nohpf_main no -noinclude no -numa
-numa_tpm 0
-inline speed
-pipeline
-tune generic no -pad_source
-real_size 32
-reentrancy none no -align dcommons no -align sequence no -align rec2byte no -align rec8byte no -annotations code no -annotations feedback no -annotations loop_transforms no -annotations prefetching no -annotations software_pipelining no -annotations tail_recursion
-assume accuracy_sensitive no -assume buffered_io no -assume cc_omp no -assume gfullpath
-assume protect_constants
-assume source_include no -assume 2underscores no -automatic
-call_shared no -check arg_temp_created no -check format no -check output_conversion
-check power
-convert native
-double_size 64
-error_limit 30 no -f66 no -fast no -fpscomp general no -fpscomp ldio_spacing no -fpconstant
-fprm nearest
-g1
-Gt0 no -hpf no -intconstant no -ladebug
-math_library accurate no -module
-nearest_neighbor no -non_shared
-numnodes 0
-numa_memories 0
-O4 no -transform_loops
-speculate none
-unroll 0 no -pg no -recursive
-shadow_width 0
(continued on next page)
C–6 Compiler Output Listings
Example C–3 (Cont.) Sample Compilation Summary on Tru64 UNIX Systems no -shared no -show hpf_comm no -show hpf_dev no -show hpf_nearest no -show hpf_temps
-show map no -std no -syntax_only
-warn alignments no -warn declarations
-warn granularity no -warn ignore_loc
-warn uncalled no -warn unused
-warning_severity warning no -show hpf_all no -show hpf_default no -show hpf_indep no -show hpf_punt no -show include no -show wsfinfo no -synchronous_exceptions no -vms no -warn argument_checking
-warn general no -warn hpf no -warn truncated_source
-warn uninitialized
-warn usage no -fuse_xref
-I
-V
-o path : /usr/lib/cmplrs/hpfrtl/,/usr/include/ filename : listing.l
filename : listing.o
COMPILER: Compaq Fortran V5.5-1843-48BB1
Example C–4 shows how compiler options and fort (on Linux systems) command-line options and compilation statistics appear on the listing.
A summary of compilation statistics appears at the end of the listing file. Note that some options that are available on Tru64 UNIX systems are not available on Linux Alpha systems.
Compiler Output Listings C–7
Example C–4 Sample Compilation Summary on Linux Systems
COMPILER OPTIONS BEING USED no -align commons
-align records no -align rec1byte no -align rec4byte
-altparam no -annotations detail no -annotations inlining no -annotations loop_unrolling no -annotations shrinkwrapping no -annotations tail_calls
-arch generic no -assume bigarrays no -assume byterecl no -assume dummy_aliases no -assume minus0 no -assume pthreads_lock
-assume underscore
-assume zsize no -bintext
-ccdefault default no -check bounds no -check omp_bindings no -check overflow no -check underflow no -D no -d_lines no -extend_source no -f77rtl no -fpscomp filesfromcmd no -fpscomp ioformat no -fpscomp logicals no -fpconstant
-fprm nearest
-granularity quadword no -hpf_matmul
-iface
-integer_size 32 no -machine_code no -mixed_str_len_arg
-names lowercase no -nohpf_main no -noinclude no -numa
-numa_tpm 0
-inline speed
-pipeline
-tune generic no -pad_source
-real_size 32
-reentrancy none no -align dcommons no -align sequence no -align rec2byte no -align rec8byte no -annotations code no -annotations feedback no -annotations loop_transforms no -annotations prefetching no -annotations software_pipelining no -annotations tail_recursion
-assume accuracy_sensitive no -assume buffered_io no -assume cc_omp no -assume gfullpath
-assume protect_constants
-assume source_include
-assume 2underscores no -automatic
-call_shared no -check arg_temp_created no -check format no -check output_conversion
-check power
-convert native
-double_size 64
-error_limit 30 no -f66 no -fast no -fpscomp general no -fpscomp ldio_spacing
-fixed
-fpe0
-g1
-Gt0 no -hpf no -intconstant no -ladebug
-math_library accurate no -module
-nearest_neighbor no -non_shared
-numnodes 0
-numa_memories 0
-O4 no -transform_loops
-speculate none
-unroll 0 no -pg no -recursive
-shadow_width 0
(continued on next page)
C–8 Compiler Output Listings
Example C–4 (Cont.) Sample Compilation Summary on Linux Systems no -shared no -show hpf_comm no -show hpf_dev no -show hpf_nearest no -show hpf_temps
-show map no -std no -syntax_only
-warn alignments no -warn declarations
-warn granularity no -warn ignore_loc
-warn uncalled no -warn unused
-warning_severity warning no -show hpf_all no -show hpf_default no -show hpf_indep no -show hpf_punt no -show include no -show wsfinfo no -synchronous_exceptions no -vms no -warn argument_checking
-warn general no -warn hpf no -warn truncated_source
-warn uninitialized
-warn usage no -fuse_xref
-I
-V
-o path : /usr/include/ filename : end.l
filename : /tmp/forlYrc7r.o
COMPILER: Compaq Fortran V1.2.0-1843-48BB1
Compiler Output Listings C–9
D
Parallel Library Routines
Note
This appendix applies only to Compaq Fortran on Tru64 UNIX systems.
This appendix contains the following sections:
• Section D.1, OpenMP Fortran API Run-Time Library Routines
• Section D.2, Other Parallel Threads Routines
This appendix summarizes the library routines available for use with directed parallel decomposition requested by the -mp and -omp compiler options.
Where applicable, new applications should call run-time parallel library routines using the OpenMP Fortran API format. (See Section D.1, OpenMP
Fortran API Run-Time Library Routines.) For compatibility with existing programs, the Compaq Fortran compiler recognizes equivalent routines of the formats described in Section D.2. Thus, for example, if your program calls
_OtsGetNumThreads , the Compaq Fortran compiler interprets that as a call to omp_get_num_threads .
D.1 OpenMP Fortran API Run-Time Library Routines
This section describes:
• Library routines that control and query the parallel execution environment
• General-purpose lock routines supported by Compaq Fortran.
Table D–1 lists the supported OpenMP Fortran API run-time library routines.
These routines are all external procedures.
Parallel Library Routines D–1
Table D–1 OpenMP Fortran API Run-Time Library Routines
Routine Name Usage
Library Routines That Control and Query the Parallel Execution Environment omp_get_dynamic Inform if dynamic thread adjustment is enabled. See
Section D.1.1.1, omp_get_dynamic.
omp_get_max_threads Get the maximum value that can be returned by calls to the omp_get_num_threads( ) function. See Section D.1.1.2, omp_get_max_threads.
omp_get_nested Inform if nested parallelism is enabled. See Section D.1.1.3, omp_get_nested.
omp_get_num_procs Get the number of processors that are available to the program. See Section D.1.1.4, omp_get_num_procs.
omp_get_num_threads Get the number of threads currently in the team executing the parallel region from which the routine is called. See
Section D.1.1.5, omp_get_num_threads.
omp_get_thread_num Get the thread number, within the team, in the range from zero to omp_get_num_threads( ) –1. See Section D.1.1.6, omp_get_thread_num.
omp_in_parallel Inform whether or not a region is executing in parallel. See
Section D.1.1.7, omp_in_parallel.
omp_set_dynamic omp_set_nested
Enable or disable dynamic adjustment of the number of threads available for execution of parallel regions. See
Section D.1.1.8, omp_set_dynamic.
Enable or disable nested parallelism. See Section D.1.1.9, omp_set_nested.
omp_set_num_threads Set the number of threads to use for the next parallel region.
See Section D.1.1.10, omp_set_num_threads.
omp_destroy_lock omp_init_lock omp_set_lock omp_test_lock omp_unset_lock
General-Purpose Lock Routines
Disassociate a lock variable from any locks. See Section D.1.2.1.
Initialize a lock to be used in subsequent calls. See
Section D.1.2.2.
Make the executing thread wait until the specified lock is available. See Section D.1.2.3.
Try to set the lock associated with a lock variable. See
Section D.1.2.4.
Release the executing thread from ownership of a lock. See
Section D.1.2.5.
D–2 Parallel Library Routines
D.1.1 Library Routines That Control and Query the Parallel Execution
Environment
These routines are described in detail in the following sections.
D.1.1.1 omp_get_dynamic
Determines the status of dynamic thread adjustment.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
LOGICAL FUNCTION omp_get_dynamic ()
END FUNCTION omp_get_dynamic
END INTERFACE
LOGICAL result result = omp_get_dynamic ()
Return Values:
This function returns it returns
TRUE if dynamic thread adjustment is enabled; otherwise
FALSE . The function always returns FALSE if dynamic adjustment of the number of threads is not implemented.
See Also:
Section D.1.1.8, omp_set_dynamic
D.1.1.2 omp_get_max_threads
Returns the maximum value that can be returned by calls to the omp_get_num_threads( ) function.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION omp_get_max_threads ()
END FUNCTION omp_get_max_threads
END INTERFACE
INTEGER result result = omp_get_max_threads ()
Description:
If your program uses omp_set_num_threads( ) to change the number of threads, subsequent calls to omp_get_max_threads( ) will return the new value. When the omp_set_dynamic( ) routine is set to TRUE , you can use omp_get_max_threads( ) to allocate data structures that are maximally sized for each thread.
This function has global scope.
Parallel Library Routines D–3
Return Values:
This function returns the maximum value whether executing from a serial region or from a parallel region.
If your program used omp_set_num_threads to change the number of threads, subsequent calls to omp_get_max_threads will return the new value.
See Also:
Section D.1.1.10, omp_set_num_threads
Section D.1.1.8, omp_set_dynamic
D.1.1.3 omp_get_nested
Determines the status of nested parallelism.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
LOGICAL FUNCTION omp_get_nested ()
END FUNCTION omp_get_nested
END INTERFACE
LOGICAL result result = omp_get_nested ()
Description:
This function returns TRUE if nested parallelism is enabled. If nested parallelism is disabled it returns FALSE . The function always returns FALSE if nested parallelism is not implemented.
See Also:
Section D.1.1.9, omp_set_nested
D.1.1.4 omp_get_num_procs
Returns the number of processors that are available to the program.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION omp_get_num_procs ()
END FUNCTION omp_get_num_procs
END INTERFACE
INTEGER result result = omp_get_num_procs ()
Return Values:
This function returns an integer value indicating the number of processors your program has available.
D–4 Parallel Library Routines
D.1.1.5 omp_get_num_threads
Returns the number of threads currently in the team executing the parallel region from which it is called.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION omp_get_num_threads ()
END FUNCTION omp_get_num_threads
END INTERFACE
INTEGER result result = omp_get_num_threads ()
Description:
This function interacts with the omp_set_num_threads call and the
OMP_NUM_THREADS environment variable that control the number of threads in a team. If the number of threads has not been explicitly set by the user, the default is implementation dependent.
The omp_get_num_threads function binds to the closest enclosing PARALLEL directive (see Chapter 6, Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming
Environment). It returns 1 if the call is made from the serial portion of a program, or from a nested parallel region that is serialized.
See Also:
Section D.1.1.10, omp_set_num_threads
OMP_NUM_THREADS environment variable in Table 6–4, OpenMP Fortran API
Environment Variables
D.1.1.6 omp_get_thread_num
Returns the thread number, within the team.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION omp_get_thread_num ()
END FUNCTION omp_get_thread_num
END INTERFACE
INTEGER result result = omp_get_thread_num ()
Description:
This function binds to the closest enclosing PARALLEL directive (see
Chapter 6, Parallel Compiler Directives and Their Programming Environment).
The master thread of the team is thread zero.
Parallel Library Routines D–5
Return Values:
The value returned ranges from zero to omp_get_num_threads( ) - 1. The function returns zero when called from a serial region or from within a nested parallel region that is serialized.
See Also:
Section D.1.1.5, omp_get_num_threads
Section D.1.1.10, omp_set_num_threads
D.1.1.7 omp_in_parallel
Returns whether or not a region is executing in parallel.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
LOGICAL FUNCTION omp_in_parallel ()
END FUNCTION omp_in_parallel
END INTERFACE
LOGICAL result result = omp_in_parallel()
Description:
This function has global scope.
Return Values:
This function returns TRUE if it is called from the dynamic extent of a region executing in parallel, even if nested regions exist that may be serialized; otherwise it returns FALSE . A parallel region that is serialized is not considered to be a region executing in parallel.
D.1.1.8 omp_set_dynamic
Enables or disables dynamic adjustment of the number of threads available for execution in a parallel region.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE omp_set_dynamic (enable)
LOGICAL enable
END SUBROUTINE omp_set_dynamic
END INTERFACE
LOGICAL scalar_local_expression
CALL omp_set_dynamic (scalar_logical_expression)
D–6 Parallel Library Routines
Description:
To obtain the best use of system resources, certain run-time environments automatically adjust the number of threads that are used for executing subsequent parallel regions. This adjustment is enabled only if the value of the scalar logical expression to omp_set_dynamic is TRUE . Dynamic adjustment is disabled if the value of the scalar logical expression is FALSE .
When dynamic adjustment is enabled, the number of threads specified by the user becomes the maximum thread count. The number of threads remains fixed throughout each parallel region and is reported by the omp_get_num_threads( ) function.
A call to omp_set_dynamic overrides the OMP_DYNAMIC environment variable.
The default for dynamic thread adjustment is implementation dependent. A user code that depends on a specific number of threads for correct execution should explicitly disable dynamic threads. Implementations are not required to provide the ability to dynamically adjust the number of threads, but they are required to provide the interface in order to support portability across platforms.
See Also:
Section D.1.1.1, omp_get_dynamic
Section D.1.1.5, omp_get_num_threads
OMP_DYNAMIC environment variable in Table 6–4, OpenMP Fortran API
Environment Variables
D.1.1.9 omp_set_nested
Enables or disables nested parallelism.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE omp_set_nested (enable)
LOGICAL enable
END SUBROUTINE omp_set_nested
END INTERFACE
LOGICAL scalar_logical_expression
CALL omp_set_nested (scalar_logical_expression)
END INTERFACE
Parallel Library Routines D–7
Description:
If the value of the scalar logical expression is FALSE , nested parallelism is disabled, and nested parallel regions are serialized and executed by the current thread. This is the default. If the value of the scalar logical expression is set to TRUE , nested parallelism is enabled, and parallel regions that are nested can deploy additional threads to form the team.
A call to omp_set_nested overrides the OMP_NESTED environment variable.
When nested parallelism is enabled, the number of threads used to execute the nested parallel regions is implementation dependent. This allows implementations that comply with the OpenMP standard to serialize nested parallel regions, even when nested parallelism is enabled.
See Also:
Section D.1.1.3, omp_get_nested
OMP_NESTED environment variable in Table 6–4, OpenMP Fortran API
Environment Variables
D.1.1.10 omp_set_num_threads
Sets the number of threads to use for the next parallel region.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE omp_set_num_threads (number_of_threads)
INTEGER number_of_threads
END SUBROUTINE omp_set_num_threads
END INTERFACE
INTEGER scalar_integer_expression
CALL omp_set_num_threads (scalar_integer_expression)
Description:
The compiler evaluates the scalar integer expression and interprets its value as the number of threads to use. This function takes effect only when called from serial portions of the program. The behavior of the function is undefined if the function is called from a portion of the program where the omp_in_parallel function returns TRUE .
A call to omp_set_num_threads sets the maximum number of threads to use for the next parallel region when dynamic adjustment of the number of threads is enabled. A call to environment variable.
omp_set_num_threads overrides the OMP_NUM_THREADS
D–8 Parallel Library Routines
See Also:
Section D.1.1.5, omp_get_num_threads
Section D.1.1.7, omp_in_parallel
OMP_NUM_THREADS environment variable in Table 6–4, OpenMP Fortran API
Environment Variables
D.1.2 General-Purpose Lock Routines
The OpenMP run-time library includes a set of general-purpose locking routines. Your program must not attempt to access any lock variable, var, except through the routines described in this section. The var lock variable is an integer of a KIND large enough to hold an address. On Compaq Tru64
UNIX systems, var should be declared as INTEGER(KIND=8).
The lock control routines must be called in a specific sequence:
1.
The lock to be associated with the lock variable must first be initialized.
2.
The associated lock is made available to the executing thread.
3.
The executing thread is released from lock ownership.
4.
When finished, the lock must always be disassociated from the lock variable.
A simple SET_LOCK and UNSET_LOCK combination satisfies this requirement. If you want your program to do useful work while waiting for the lock to become available, you can use the combination of TRY_LOCK and UNSET_LOCK instead. For example:
PROGRAM LOCK_USAGE implicit none integer(kind=4) ID include ’forompdef’
INTEGER(KIND=8) LCK
CALL OMP_INIT_LOCK(LCK)
! It’s in /usr/include after installation
! This variable should be of size POINTER
!$OMP PARALLEL SHARED(LCK) PRIVATE(ID)
ID = OMP_GET_THREAD_NUM()
CALL OMP_SET_LOCK(LCK)
PRINT *, MY THREAD ID IS , ID
CALL OMP_UNSET_LOCK(LCK)
DO WHILE (.NOT. OMP_TEST_LOCK(LCK))
CALL SKIP(ID) ! Do not yet have lock, do something else
END DO
CALL WORK(ID) ! Have the lock, now do work
CALL OMP_UNSET_LOCK(LCK)
!$OMP END PARALLEL
CALL OMP_DESTROY_LOCK(LCK)
END
Parallel Library Routines D–9
The lock control routines are described in detail in the following sections.
D.1.2.1 omp_destroy_lock
Disassociates a given lock variable from any locks.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE omp_destroy_lock (var)
INTEGER(KIND=8) var
END SUBROUTINE omp_destroy_lock
END INTERFACE
INTEGER(KIND=8) v
CALL omp_destroy_lock (v)
Restriction:
Attempting to call this routine with a lock variable that has not been initialized is an invalid operation and will cause a run-time error.
D.1.2.2 omp_init_lock
Initializes a lock associated with a given lock variable for use in subsequent calls.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE omp_init_lock (var)
INTEGER(KIND=8) var
END SUBROUTINE omp_init_lock
END INTERFACE
INTEGER(KIND=8) v
CALL omp_init_lock (v)
Description:
The initial state of the lock variable v is unlocked.
Restriction:
Attempting to call this routine with a lock variable that is already associated with a lock is an invalid operation and will cause a run-time error.
D.1.2.3 omp_set_lock
Makes the executing thread wait until the specified lock is available.
D–10 Parallel Library Routines
Syntax:
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE omp_set_lock (var)
INTEGER(KIND=8) var
END SUBROUTINE omp_set_lock
END INTERFACE
INTEGER(KIND=8) v
CALL omp_set_lock (v)
Description:
When the lock becomes available, the thread is granted ownership.
Restriction:
Attempting to call this routine with a lock variable that has not been initialized is an invalid operation and will cause a run-time error.
D.1.2.4 omp_test_lock
Tries to set the lock associated with the lock variable var.
Syntax:
INTERFACE
LOGICAL FUNCTION omp_test_lock (var)
INTEGER(KIND=8) var
END SUBROUTINE omp_test_lock
END INTERFACE
INTEGER(KIND=8) v
LOGICAL result result = omp_test_lock (v)
Return Values:
If the attempt to set the lock specified by the variable succeeds, the function returns TRUE ; otherwise it returns FALSE . In either case, the routine does not wait for the lock to become available.
Restriction:
Attempting to call this routine with a lock variable that has not been initialized is an invalid operation and will cause a run-time error.
D.1.2.5 omp_unset_lock
Releases the executing thread from ownership of the lock.
Parallel Library Routines D–11
Syntax:
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE omp_unset_lock (var)
INTEGER(KIND=8) var
END SUBROUTINE omp_unset_lock
END INTERFACE
INTEGER(KIND=8) v
CALL omp_unset_lock (v)
Description:
If the thread does not own the lock specified by the variable, the behavior is undefined.
Restriction:
Attempting to call this routine with a lock variable that has not been initialized is an invalid operation and will cause a run-time error.
D.2 Other Parallel Threads Routines
Note
Compaq Fortran supports the set of parallel thread routines described in this section for existing programs. For creating new programs, use the set of routines described in Section D.1, OpenMP Fortran API
Run-Time Library Routines.
Table D–2, Other Parallel Threads Routines shows additional parallel threads routines. The _Otsxxx (Compaq spelling) and the mpc_xxx
(compatibility spelling) routine names are equivalent. For example, calling
_OtsGetNumThreads is the same as calling mpc_numthreads .
D–12 Parallel Library Routines
Table D–2 Other Parallel Threads Routines
Routine Name Description
_OtsGetMaxThreads mpc_maxnumthreads
_OtsGetNumThreads mpc_numthreads
_OtsGetThreadNum mpc_my_threadnum
_OtsInitParallel
Return the number of threads that would normally be used for parallel processing in the current environment. This is affected by the environment variable MP_THREAD_COUNT , by the number of processes in the current process’s processor set, and by any call to _OtsInitParallel . Invoke as an integer function. See
Section D.2.1.
Return the number of threads that are being used in the current parallel region (if running within one), or the number of threads that have been created so far (if not currently within a parallel region). Invoke as an integer function. See Section D.2.2.
Return a number that identifies the current thread. The main thread is 0, and slave threads are numbered densely from 1.
Invoke as an integer function. See Section D.2.3.
Start slave threads for parallel processing if they have not yet been started implicitly (normally, the threads have been started by default at the first parallel region). Call as a subroutine with two arguments (see Section D.2.4):
• The total number of threads desired (or specify zero to allow use of the environment variable MP_THREAD_COUNT or maximum number of processors).
• A pointer to a pthreads attribute block, which can be used to control the attributes of the slave threads.
_OtsInParallel mpc_in_parallel_region
_OtsSetNumThreads
_OtsStopWorkers mpc_destroy
Return 1 if you are currently within a parallel region, or 0 if not.
Invoke as an integer function. See Section D.2.5.
Sets the number of threads to use for the next parallel region.
Stop any slave threads created by parallel library support.
This routine cannot be called from within a parallel region.
After this call, new slave threads will be implicitly created the next time a parallel region is encountered, or can be created explicitly by calling
See Section D.2.7.
_OtsInitParallel . Call as a subroutine.
To call the _Otsxxx or mpc_xxx routines, use the cDEC$ ALIAS directive
(described in the Compaq Fortran Language Reference Manual) to handle the mixed-case naming convention and missing trailing underscore.
Parallel Library Routines D–13
For example, to call the _OtsGetThreadNum routine with an alias of
OtsGetThreadNum , use the following code:
!DEC$ integer a(10)
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION OtsGetThreadNum ()
ALIAS OtsGetThreadNum, ’_OtsGetThreadNum’
END FUNCTION OtsGetThreadNum
END INTERFACE
!$par parallel do do i = 1,10 print *, "i=",i, " thread=", OtsGetThreadNum () enddo end
Fortran INTERFACE blocks for all of the _Otsxxx routines are in a file named forompdef.f
in /usr/include . Add the following line to your program and you can use the Fortran name otsxxx to call any of the _Otsxxx routines:
USE ’forompdef.f’
Alternatively, to use the compatibility naming convention of mpc_my_threadnum :
!DEC$ integer a(10)
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION mpc_my_threadnum ()
ALIAS mpc_my_threadnum, ’mpc_my_threadnum’
END FUNCTION mpc_my_threadnum
END INTERFACE
!$par parallel do do i = 1,10 print *, "i=",i, " thread=", mpc_my_threadnum () enddo end
These parallel threads are described in detail in the following sections.
See Also:
Section 6.1.3, Parallel Processing Thread Model
D.2.1 _OtsGetMaxThreads or mpc_maxnumthreads
Returns the maximum number of threads for the current environment.
D–14 Parallel Library Routines
Syntax:
!DEC$
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION otsgetmaxthreads ()
ALIAS otsgetmaxthreads, ’_OtsGetMaxThreads’
END FUNCTION otsgetmaxthreads
END INTERFACE
INTEGER result result = otsgetmaxthreads ()
Description:
Returns the number of threads that would normally be used for parallel processing in the current environment. This is affected by the environment variable MP_THREAD_COUNT , by the number of processes in the current process’s processor set, and by any call to _OtsInitParallel .
D.2.2 _OtsGetNumThreads or mpc_numthreads
Returns the number of threads being used (in a parallel region) or created so far (if not in a parallel region).
Syntax:
!DEC$
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION otsgetnumthreads ()
ALIAS otsgetnumthreads, ’_OtsGetNumThreads’
END FUNCTION otsgetnumthreads
END INTERFACE
INTEGER result result = otsgetnumthreads ()
Description:
Returns the number of threads that are being used in the current parallel region (if running within one), or the number of threads that have been created so far (if not currently within a parallel region). You can use this call to decide how to partition a parallel loop. For example: nt = otsgetnumthreads () c$par parallel do do i = a,nt-1 work(i) = 0 k0 = 1+(i*n)/nt k1 = ((i+1)+n)/nt do j = 1,m do k = k0,k1
! use work(i) enddo enddo enddo
Parallel Library Routines D–15
D.2.3 _OtsGetThreadNum or mpc_my_threadnum
Returns the number of the current thread.
Syntax:
!DEC$
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION otsgetthreadnum ()
ALIAS otsgetthreadnum, ’_OtsGetThreadNum’
END FUNCTION otsgetthreadnum
END INTERFACE
INTEGER result result = otsgetthreadnum ()
Description:
Returns a number that identifies the current thread. The main thread is 0, and slave threads are numbered densely from 1.
D.2.4 _OtsInitParallel
Starts slave threads.
Syntax:
!DEC$
!DEC$
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE otsinitparallel (nthreads, attr)
ALIAS otsinitparallel, ’_OtsInitParallel’
INTEGER nthreads
INTEGER (KIND=8) attr
ATRRIBUTES, VALUE :: nthreads, attr
END SUBROUTINE otsinitparallel
END INTERFACE
Description:
Starts slave threads for parallel processing if they have not yet been started implicitly. Use this routine if you want to:
• Override number of threads
• Override the thread attributes
• Control when thread creation occurs (by default, at the first parallel region)
The arguments are:
• nthreads is the total number of threads desired, including the master. If
nthreads is zero, the number of threads is controlled by the environment variable MP_THREAD_COUNT , if it is defined as a nonzero number, or by the number of processors in the current process’s processor set. (See the processor_sets (3) reference page.)
D–16 Parallel Library Routines
• attr is a pointer to a pthreads attribute block, which can be used to control the attributes of the slave threads. If it is zero, all defaults are used except that the slaves’ stack size in bytes can be set by the environment variable
MP_STACK_SIZE .
D.2.5 _OtsInParallel or mpc_in_parallel_region
Returns the current status of processing activity in a parallel region.
Syntax:
!DEC$
INTERFACE
INTEGER FUNCTION otsinparallel ()
ALIAS otsinparallel, ’_OtsInParallel’
END FUNCTION OtsInParallel
END INTERFACE
INTEGER result result = otsinparallel ()
Description:
The routine returns 1 if the program is currently running within a parallel region; otherwise it returns 0.
D.2.6 _OtsSetNumThreads
Sets the number of threads to use for the next parallel region.
D.2.7 _OtsStopWorkers or mpc_destroy
Stops slave threads.
Syntax:
!DEC$
INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE otsstopworkers ()
ALIAS otsstopworkers, ’_OtsStopWorkers’
END SUBROUTINE otsstopworkers
END INTERFACE
CALL otsstopworkers ()
Description:
Stop any slave threads created by parallel library support. Use this routine if you need to perform some operation, such as a call to fork( ) , that cannot tolerate extra threads running in the process. This routine cannot be called from within a parallel region. After this call, new slave threads will be implicitly created the next time a parallel region is encountered, or can be created explicitly by calling _OtsInitParallel .
Parallel Library Routines D–17
Index
A
a.out
file, 1–12, 3–56 specifying different name for, 2–8 abort library routine, 12–5
Absolute pathname, 7–19 abstract_to_physical library routine,
12–16
ACCEPT statement, 7–3
See also Language Reference Manual access library routine, 12–5
Access mode, 7–30
Access modes direct, 7–30 limitations by file organization and record type, 7–31
OPEN statement specifiers, 7–30 requirement for direct access to sequential files, 7–42 sequential, 7–30
ACCESS specifier, 7–16, 7–30
See also Language Reference Manual
Accuracy and dummy aliases, 5–65 and numerical data I/O, 5–37
-assume noaccuracy_sensitive option, 3–14 floating-point constants, 3–32
-fpconstant option, 3–32
-fprm keyword options, 3–38
-fp_reorder option, 3–14 hoisting divide operations, 5–64
-intconstant option, 3–49 integer constants, 3–49
Accuracy (cont’d)
-math_library fast option, 3–52 rounding during calculations, 3–38 when converting OpenVMS Fortran unformatted data, A–26
ACTION specifier, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual
Actual arguments, 11–1
Adjusting the run-time parallel environment,
6–56
ADVANCE specifier, 7–11, 7–33
See also Language Reference Manual
Advancing I/O, 7–33
Affine subscripts, 5–55
AIMAG intrinsic function
See also Language Reference Manual options controlling size returned, 3–62 alarm library routine, 12–5
ALIAS directive
See cDEC$ ALIAS directive
-align all option, 3–7
-align commons option, 3–7, 5–29
-align dcommons option, 3–8, 5–29 effect of -fast option, 3–29
Alignment, 5–21 to 5–30 argument passing, 5–23
Compaq Fortran and C structures,
11–38 array elements, 5–23 cDEC$ directives and
2–20
-align options, checking for unaligned data, 3–77, 5–24 common block data, 5–25 derived-type data, 5–27
Index–1
Alignment (cont’d) effect of declaration statements, 5–21 to
5–29 effect of -vms option, 3–74 locating unaligned data (debugger), 4–26 loop, 6–48 of data types, 5–21 to 5–30 options controlling, 5–29 common block data, 3–7, 3–8, 5–29 derived-type data, 3–8, 5–30 record structures, 3–8, 5–30 warnings for unaligned data, 3–77 record structures, 5–29
SEQUENCE statement effect on derived-type data, 5–30 unaligned data, 5–21 causes, 5–21 checking for, 5–24 effect on performance, 3–6, 5–21 locating in debugger, 4–26 options, 3–6, 5–29 ordering data declarations, 5–25 warning messages for, 3–77, 5–24
-align nocommons option, 5–29
-align none option, 3–8
-align norecords option, 3–8, 5–29
-align recNbyte option, 3–8
-align records option, 5–29 effect of -vms option, 5–29
-align sequence option, 3–8, 5–29
Allocating and freeing virtual memory
(library routine), 12–7 to 12–11
Alpha processor generation specifying to compiler, 3–10, 3–70, 5–62
Alternate entry points, 4–28
-altparam option, 3–55 and function, 12–5
-annotations all option, 3–9
-annotations code option, 3–9
-annotations detail option, 3–9
-annotations feedback option, 3–9
-annotations inlining option, 3–10
-annotations keyword option, 3–9
-annotations loop_transforms option,
3–10
-annotations loop_unrolling option,
3–10
-annotations none option, 3–9
-annotations prefetching option, 3–10
-annotations shrinkwrapping option,
3–10
-annotations software_pipelining option, 3–10
-annotations tail_calls option, 3–10
-annotations tail_recursion option,
3–10
APPEND specifier, 7–30
See also Language Reference Manual
-arch host option effect of -fast option, 3–29
Archive library, 2–24 creating and maintaining, 1–14 linker searching options, 3–50 to 3–51 list searched by f90 command, 2–21 nonshared optimizations, 3–58 obtaining information about, 1–13 recognized file name suffix, 2–3 specifying with f90, 2–21 to 2–24
-arch option, 3–10, 5–62 ar command, 1–14
Argument passing alignment of data passed, 5–23
C and Compaq Fortran, 11–10 to 11–22,
11–23 to 11–44 alignment of structures, 11–38 arrays, 11–41 cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES C directive,
11–14 changing default mechanisms, 11–14,
11–16, 11–32 character data, 11–33 character data example, 11–33 character null terminator, 11–35 common block values, 11–43 complex data example, 11–36 data types, 11–27 to 11–31 examples, 11–32, 11–33, 11–39,
11–42
Index–2
Argument passing
C and Compaq Fortran (cont’d) integer data example, 11–31 passing arrays, 11–42 pointer data, 11–39 to 11–40 structures, 11–38 using C conventions, 11–20 checking for mismatches at compile-time,
3–77 checking for temporary arguments at run-time, 3–19
Compaq Fortran, 11–1 to 11–9 arrays, 11–8 array temporary creation, 5–35 by address (%LOC), 11–13 by reference (%REF), 11–14 by value (%VAL), 11–13 changing default mechanisms, 11–12,
11–14 characters, 11–6 default passing mechanism, 11–5 descriptor format, 11–10 explicit interface, 11–3 to 11–5 hidden length, 11–6, 11–31, 11–33,
11–35 implicit interface, 11–3 omitted arguments (extra comma),
11–6 pointers, 11–9 rules, 11–5, 11–6
Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran,
A–33 to A–38 alignment options, A–38 common block values, A–37 data type sizes, A–35 data types to avoid, A–34 differences, A–13 example, A–35 function values, A–34, A–35
I/O compatibility, A–38 mechanisms, A–35 passing target or pointer data, A–37 pointer data, A–34 similarities, 11–5 using Compaq Fortran 77 features,
A–34
Argument passing (cont’d) efficient array use, 5–31 from USEROPEN function and Compaq
Fortran RTL, 7–36 when temporary array copy is created,
5–31
Arguments, 11–1
See also Argument passing; Language
Reference Manual actual differences between Compaq Fortran
77 and Compaq Fortran, A–13 dummy aliasing and accuracy, 5–65 and implied-DO loop collapsing, 5–38 option for aliasing, 5–65 maximum allowed in CALL statement,
2–17 maximum allowed in function reference,
2–17
Arithmetic exception handling
See also Data types; Ranges controlling floating-point exceptions, 14–1 to 14–10 controlling reporting
-check nopower option, 3–20
-check underflow option, 3–22
-fpe options, 3–33
-speculate option, 3–65
-synchronous_exceptions option,
3–69 debugger handling, 4–25 defaults and applicable options, 3–33 to
3–37 effect of speculative execution optimization, 3–65 effect of using fast math library routines,
3–52 example program, 9–17 exceptional events, 14–1 exceptional values, 9–14 to 9–18 floating-point data, 12–8
-check nopower option, 3–20
-check underflow option, 3–22
-fpe options, 3–33
Index–3
Arithmetic exception handling floating-point data (cont’d)
-synchronous_exceptions option,
3–69 floating-point exceptional values, 3–33 floating-point exceptions, 14–1 to 14–10 floating-point underflow, 3–22, 3–33,
3–36, 9–15 forcing core dump at run time, 8–6
FP_CLASS intrinsic, 9–18, 14–8, 14–9
IEEE NaN values (quiet and signaling),
9–14 infinity values, 9–14 integer overflow, 3–21
ISNAN intrinsic, 9–17, 14–10 options for, 3–19 signals caught by Compaq Fortran RTL,
8–11 definition, 8–11 handling in debugger, 4–12, 4–13,
4–25
Arithmetic operators for efficient run-time performance, 5–44
Array dimension, 5–34
Arrays, 5–31 to 5–36
See also Argument passing; Language
Reference Manual alignment, 5–23 allocatable, 11–10 arguments, 11–7, 11–8, 11–10
See also Language Reference Manual
Compaq Fortran and Compaq Fortran
77 similarities, 11–5 example, 1–6, 11–42, A–36 array sections viewing in debugger, 4–21 assumed-shape, 11–10, A–35 assumed-size, 11–10 bounds checking, 3–19 character arguments passed with hidden length,
11–6 column-major order, 5–31 conformable, 11–8
Arrays (cont’d) declaring
See Language Reference Manual differences between Compaq Fortran and
C, 11–41 dimension limits, 2–17 efficient array syntax in I/O list, 5–31,
5–37 efficient combinations of input and output arguments, 5–31 element sequence association, 11–9 explicit-shape, 11–10 explicit-shape arguments example (C and Compaq Fortran),
11–42 example (Compaq Fortran 77 and
Compaq Fortran), A–35 expression syntax for debugger, 4–20
HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY routines, 12–16 natural storage order, 5–31 nesting limits, 2–17 optimizations, 5–48, 5–56 passed by descriptor, 11–10 passing as arguments example, 1–6 pointers to, 11–10 row-major order, 5–31 sorting library routines for, 12–14 syntax for run-time efficiency, 5–31 temporary creation of, 5–35 using efficiently, 5–31 when temporary copy is created for argument passing, 5–31, 5–35 writing for efficiency, 5–38 zero-sized, 3–44
Assembler file creating, 3–64 passed to cc or ccc , 2–3
ASSOCIATEVARIABLE specifier, 7–16,
A–13
See also Language Reference Manual
Association host, 11–3 procedure interface, 11–4
Index–4
Association (cont’d) use, 11–2 procedure interface block, 1–6 to 1–7,
11–4
-assume accuracy_sensitive option,
5–64
-assume bigarrays option, 3–43 effect of -fast option, 3–29
-assume buffered_io option, 3–12
-assume byterecl option, 3–12
-assume cc_omp option, 3–13
-assume dummy_aliases option, 3–13,
5–65 to 5–66
-assume gfullpath option, 3–14
-assume minus0 option, 3–14
-assume no2underscores option, 3–16
-assume noaccuracy_sensitive option,
3–14 effect of -fast option, 3–29
-assume nogfullpath option, 3–14
-assume nominus0 option, 3–14
-assume noprotect_constants option,
3–15
-assume nopthreads_lock option, 3–16
-assume nosource_include option, 3–15
-assume nounderscore option, 3–15
-assume nozsize option, 3–44 effect of -fast option, 3–29
-assume protect_constants option, 3–15
-assume pthreads_lock option, 3–16
-assume source_include option, 3–15
ATOMIC directive, 6–5, 6–23
Atom toolkit, 5–20
ATTRIBUTES directives
See cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES directives
Automatic inlining, 5–47
-automatic option, 3–17, 3–62 effect on -recursive , 3–62
B
BACKSPACE statement, 7–3, 7–32
Balancing the workload manual optimization, 6–55
SCHEDULE clause, 6–55
BARRIER directive, 6–5, 6–24, 6–31, 6–42 bash shell
FORTn environment variables, 7–23 process limits, 1–2 setting and unsetting environment variables, B–1
Basic block, 5–14
Basic block counting, 5–14
Basic linear algebra routines (Compaq
Extended Math Library), 13–2 besj0 function, 12–5 besj1 function, 12–5 besjn function, 12–5 bessel function, 12–5
Bessel functions, 12–5 to 12–6 library routines (3f), 12–2 besy0 function, 12–5 besy1 function, 12–5 besyn function, 12–5
Big endian storage, 10–1
Binding of parallel compiler directives rules checking, 3–20 bit function, 12–5
Bit manipulation procedures
See also Language Reference Manual intrinsic functions and 3f routines, 12–2
BLANK specifier, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual effect of -vms option, 3–75
BLAS routines (Compaq Extended Math
Library), 13–2
BLOCKED option for PDO directive, 6–42
Block IF statement nesting limit, 2–17
BLOCKSIZE specifier, 5–39, 7–17
See also Language Reference Manual
Bottleneck, 5–36 reduction of I/O, 5–36
Bourne Again shell
See bash shell
Bourne shell (sh) process limits, 1–2
Index–5
Bourne shell ( sh )
FORTn environment variables, 7–23 setting and unsetting environment variables, B–1
Breakpoint, 4–5
BUFFERCOUNT specifier, 5–39, 7–17
See also Language Reference Manual
Buffered output, 3–12
Buffers for record I/O, 5–39
Built-in functions (%LOC, %REF, %VAL),
11–13 to 11–14
See also Language Reference Manual; cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES
BWX extension, 3–10
Byte/Word manipulation instruction extension, 3–10
C
c$CHUNK directive, 6–30 c$COPYIN directive, 6–30 c$DOACROSS directive, 6–30 c$MPSCHEDULE directive, 6–30 c$ prefix, 6–30
Cache size, 5–34
Call graph, 5–14
Calling interface
See Argument passing; Language interface
Calling other language programs, 6–58
CALL statement, 11–2
See also Language Reference Manual maximum arguments allowed, 2–17
-call_shared option, 2–24, 3–17
Carriage control effect of -vms option, 3–74
CARRIAGECONTROL specifier, 3–18, 7–13,
7–16
See also Language Reference Manual effect of effect of
-ccdefault option, 3–18
-vms option, 3–76
Case sensitive external names in C, 11–25 controlling with cDEC$ directives,
11–15, 11–16
Case sensitive (cont’d) file name differences with OpenVMS
Fortran, A–22 file names (OPEN statement), 7–19 names in the debugger, 4–16 options controlling, 3–54
Case sensitivity, 3–54, 3–72 ccc command, 1–9 options available from
2–16 f90 command, using fort command with, 11–23 cc command, 1–9 options and files passed by options available from f90 , 2–15 f90 command,
2–16 using f90 command with, 11–23
-ccdefault option, 3–18
C compiler, 1–10 cDEC$ ALIAS directive, 11–14 cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES
ALIAS directive, 11–21
C directive, 11–18 example, 11–20
EXTERN directive, 11–22
REFERENCE directive, 11–21
STDCALL directive, 11–16
VALUE directive, 11–21
VARYING directive, 11–22 cDEC$ directives, 2–20, 11–14, 11–16
Cell in relative organization files, 7–7
CHARACTER data type representation, 9–18 declaration
See Language Reference Manual
Character arguments passing between Compaq Fortran and C,
11–27 to 11–36 example, 11–33 null terminator, 11–35 passing from USEROPEN function and
Compaq Fortran RTL, 7–36
Index–6
Character bounds checking, 3–19
Character data using whole character string operations for run-time efficiency, 5–37
Character I/O library routines, 12–7 to 12–14
Character set
See Language Reference Manual
CHAR intrinsic procedure using to null-terminate a C string, 11–6 chdir library routine, 12–5
-check arg_temp_created option, 3–19
-check bounds option, 3–19
-check noformat option, 3–19 effect of -vms option, 3–74
-check nooutput_conversion option,
3–21 effect of -vms option, 3–74
-check nopower option, 3–20
-check omp_bindings option, 3–20
-check overflow option, 3–21
-check underflow option, 3–22 chmod library routine, 12–5
Chunk, 6–27
CHUNK directive, 6–31, 6–43
CHUNK option for PDO directive, 6–42
Chunk size, 6–27 specifying a default, 6–43
CIX extension, 3–11
C language
See also cc command; cpp
Language interfaces preprocessor; appending underscore for external names,
11–25 calling between Compaq Fortran and C,
11–10 to 11–22, 11–23 to 11–44
C main program
-nofor_main option, 3–55 example function called by Compaq
Fortran, 11–31, 11–33 function to open file (USEROPEN), 7–36
CLOSE statement, 7–3, 7–27 to 7–28
See also Language Reference Manual
CMPLX intrinsic function
See also Language Reference Manual options controlling size returned, 3–62
Code hoisting, 5–53 in divide operations, 5–64 in optimization, 5–53
Code instruction generation, for specific
Alpha processors, 3–10
Code motion, 5–53
Code replication, 6–49
Coding restrictions, 6–53
-col72 option, 3–28
Column-major order, 5–32
Combined parallel/worksharing constructs
Compaq Fortran parallel, 6–40 to 6–41 defined, 6–10
OpenMP, 6–22 to 6–23
Command line arguments returning (library routine), 12–9, 12–10
Comment lines
See also Language Reference Manual
-d_lines option, 3–27
Common blocks
See also Language Reference Manual accessing variables in the debugger, 4–16 alignment of data in, 5–25 causes of unalignment, 5–21 named maximum allowed, 2–18 options controlling alignment, 3–7, 3–8,
5–29 order of data in, 5–25 sharing across processes, 12–14
COMMON statement
See also Language Reference Manual and data flow and split lifetime analysis,
5–54 causes of unalignment, 5–21 data alignment, 3–7, 5–29 options controlling alignment, 3–8
Common subexpression elimination, 5–49
Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML),
13–1 to 13–3 example program, 13–3 groups of routines, 13–2
Index–7
Compaq Extended Math Library (CXML)
(cont’d)
INCLUDE statement, 13–3 linking, 13–3 types of libraries provided, 13–3
Compaq Fortran array temporary creation, 5–35 for OpenVMS systems comparison of floating-point data types, A–27 compatibility, A–1, A–20 to A–28 data porting, A–24 equivalent record types, A–25 extensions not supported, A–1, A–20 to A–28 options for VAX compatibility (f90),
3–74 record type compatibility, A–22
VAX floating-point data types, A–28 online release notes contents of, xxvii displaying, xxvii other platforms language compatibility (summary),
A–1 record type portability, 7–11 version number displaying, 3–74 obtaining from listing, C–2 obtaining from object file, 1–13
Compaq Fortran 77 for Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems argument passing, A–34 calling between Compaq Fortran,
A–33 to A–38 compatibility, A–5 to A–16 compiler diagnostic detection differences, A–11
I/O to same unit number, A–38 language features not supported, A–7 mixed language example, A–35 passing aligned data, A–38 passing common block values, A–37 passing pointers, A–34 passing same size data, A–38
Compaq Fortran directives, 6–1
Compaq Fortran parallel directives, 6–29 to
6–44
See also OpenMP parallel directives
BARRIER, 6–31, 6–42
CHUNK, 6–31, 6–43
COPYIN, 6–31
CRITICAL SECTION, 6–31, 6–42
DOACROSS, 6–32, 6–41
END CRITICAL SECTION, 6–31, 6–42
END PARALLEL, 6–32
END PARALLEL DO, 6–41
END PARALLEL SECTIONS, 6–33, 6–41
END PDO, 6–33, 6–39
END PSECTIONS, 6–34, 6–40
END SINGLE PROCESS, 6–34, 6–40 format, 6–29
INSTANCE, 6–32
INSTANCE PARALLEL, 6–32, 6–35,
6–36
INSTANCE SINGLE, 6–32
MP_SCHEDTYPE, 6–32, 6–43
PARALLEL, 6–32
PARALLEL DO, 6–32, 6–41
PARALLEL SECTIONS, 6–33, 6–41
PDO, 6–33, 6–39
PDONE, 6–33, 6–44 prefixes, 6–30 fixed source form, 6–30 free source form, 6–30
PSECTIONS, 6–34, 6–40
SECTION, 6–34, 6–40
SINGLE PROCESS, 6–34, 6–40 summary descriptions, 6–31 to 6–34
TASKCOMMON, 6–34, 6–35, 6–36
Compaq FUSE
-fuse_xref option, 3–39
Compaq Math Libraries Web site, 13–1
Compaq MPI, 3–46, 12–16
Compaq Visual Fortran, language compatibility with, A–18
Compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for Compaq
Tru64 UNIX systems, A–5 to A–16 language features, A–5
Index–8
Compatibility (cont’d) with Compaq Fortran for OpenVMS systems, A–20 to A–28 converting data, 10–3, A–26 porting data, A–24 record types, 7–11 with Compaq Fortran on other platforms,
A–1 with Compaq Visual Fortran, A–18
Compilation control, 2–20
Compiler
See also f90 command and linker, 1–11 to 1–12, 2–2 coding restrictions summary of, 2–17 data format assumptions, 3–22 default file names, 7–20, 7–24 driver messages, 2–16 program, 1–10 driver program, 2–13 effect of optimization level on compilation time, 5–45 effect of optimizations on program size,
5–45 functions, 1–11 to 1–12 limits, 2–17 messages issued by general description, 2–18 output listing summary section, C–5 passes options for displaying, 3–74 process file descriptor limit, 1–2 process stack size, 1–2 request threaded run-time execution,
3–63, 3–70 specifying directory for temporary files,
2–9 using latest version for run-time efficiency, 5–2
Compiler directives
See also Language Reference Manual;
Directives; cDEC$ and OPTIONS statement, 10–12
Compiler options
See f90 command
Compile-time operations, 5–49, 5–50
Compiling, linking, and running parallelized programs, 6–59
Compiling C language programs, 11–23 examples, 2–11, 11–23 file name suffix, 2–3 use with use with f90 , 11–23 fort , 11–23
Complex data types, 9–8, 9–12 to 9–13
See also Language Reference Manual declarations and options, 3–61, 9–9 native IEEE representation, 9–12 to 9–13 ranges, 9–3
VAX representation, A–30 to A–32
COMPLEX declarations options to control size of, 3–62
Complex variables
Fortran, 4–21
Conditional compilation defining preprocessor symbols, 3–26
OpenMP, 6–4 undefining preprocessor symbols, 3–72
Conditional operators use in debugging, 4–23
Condition symbols, Fortran summary of, 8–13 to 8–32
Conformable array, 11–8
Connection to logical I/O units by system default,
7–24
Constant pooling, 5–47
Constants declaration
See Language Reference Manual floating-point double precision, 3–32 integer, 3–49 maximum size, 2–17 ranges, 9–2 to 9–4
Construct combined parallel/worksharing
Compaq Fortran parallel, 6–40 to
6–41
Index–9
Construct combined parallel/worksharing (cont’d) defined, 6–10
OpenMP, 6–22 to 6–23 synchronization
Compaq Fortran parallel, 6–41 to
6–42
OpenMP, 6–23 to 6–27 worksharing, 6–10
Compaq Fortran parallel, 6–38 to
6–40
OpenMP, 6–19 to 6–21
CONTAINS statement, 11–3
See also Language Reference Manual
Continuation lines column placement
See Language Reference Manual maximum allowed, 2–17
Controlling data scope attributes, 6–11,
6–36
Controlling the data environment, 6–10,
6–35
-convert big_endian option, 3–22, 10–4,
10–13
-convert cray option, 3–23, 10–4, 10–13
-convert fdx option, 3–23, 10–13
-convert fgx option, 3–23, 10–13
-convert ibm option, 3–23, 10–4, 10–13
-convert little_endian option, 3–23,
10–4, 10–13
-convert native option, 3–23, 10–4,
10–13
CONVERT specifier, 7–17, 10–3
See also Language Reference Manual
-convert vaxd option, 3–24, 10–4, 10–13
-convert vaxg option, 3–24, 10–4, 10–13
-c option, 2–9, 3–17 and creating shared libraries, 2–25 effect of -o option, 2–9 example, 2–10, 2–12
-C option, 3–19
COPYIN clause for PARALLEL directive, 6–11 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–11
COPYIN clause (cont’d) for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–11
COPYIN directive, 6–31
COPYIN option for PARALLEL directive, 6–36 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–36 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–36 cord related commands and f90 options, 5–19 related f90 options, 3–30
-cord option, 3–30, 5–19 with -feedback option, 3–30, 5–19
Core file for severe errors, 8–6, B–5 signals, 8–11
Counted loop, 5–60
Count extension, 3–11
-cpp option, 3–24 effect of -P option, 3–25 cpp preprocessor, 1–10 compilation process, 2–20 effects of
2–2
.F
and .F90
file name suffixes, f90 command, 2–21 macros defined, 3–24 options for, 3–24, 3–25, 3–47 retaining temporary files, 3–50 searching for include files, 3–47 undefining macros, 3–72 create system call using to open file, 7–37
CRITICAL directive, 6–5, 6–25, 6–47, 6–52 using for locks, 6–52
Critical section, 6–25
CRITICAL SECTION directive, 6–31, 6–42
Cross-reference file
Compaq FUSE, 3–39
C shell ( csh ) process limits, 1–2 setting and unsetting environment variables, B–2
Index–10
ctime library routine, 12–5
CXML
See Compaq Extended Math Library
D
D, in column 1 options for, 3–27
Data
See also Data types; Files; I/O alignment checking for unaligned data, 3–77,
5–24 definition, 5–21 effect of f90 command options, 5–29 effect of statements, 5–25 options controlling common block data, 3–7, 3–8 derived-type structures, 3–8 record structures, 3–8 placing declaration statements to avoid unaligned data, 5–25 unaligned arguments, 5–25 big endian definition, 10–1 unformatted file formats, 3–22, 10–3 comparison of formatted and unformatted,
7–5 converting unformatted files, 3–22, 10–1 to 10–13 declaring
See Language Reference Manual equivalent types for C and Compaq
Fortran, 11–29 formats for unformatted files, 3–22, 10–3 formatted, 7–5 granularity of shared access, 3–41 items in common blocks options controlling alignment, 3–7,
3–8 items in derived-type data controlling alignment, 5–25 options controlling alignment, 3–8 items in record structures options controlling alignment, 3–8
Data (cont’d) list-directed I/O statements, 7–5 little endian definition, 10–1 unformatted file formats, 10–3 namelist I/O statements, 7–5 nesting limit, 2–17 nonnative numeric formats, 10–3 porting OpenVMS Fortran data, A–24 shared memory access, 3–41 size and handling options for, 3–27, 3–47, 3–48, 3–62 storage (automatic or static), 3–17, 3–62 stored by Compaq Fortran, 9–1 to 9–19 translation of formatted, 7–5 unformatted, 7–5 unformatted I/O statements, 7–5
VAX floating-point formats, 10–3 zero-extended and sign-extended values,
11–13
Data environment controlling, 6–10, 6–35
Data environment directives, 6–10
Data file advancing and nonadvancing I/O, 7–33 big endian numeric formats, 10–3 to 10–6 porting notes, 10–13 characteristics, 7–7 to 7–13
CLOSE statement, 7–27 comparison of formatted and unformatted,
7–5 converting unformatted files, 3–22, 10–1 to 10–13 limitations, 10–7 effect of -vms option, 3–74 efficient run-time performance, 5–36 equivalent OpenVMS record types, A–25 handling I/O errors, 8–1 to 8–13
I/O unit, 7–2
INQUIRE statement, 7–25 internal, 7–8 opening with C language function, 7–36
OPEN statement, 7–13 to 7–25
OpenVMS floating-point formats, A–28
Index–11
Data file (cont’d) organization, 7–7 porting OpenVMS converting unformatted files, A–26 floating-point data, A–24 record formats, A–24
RECL units for unformatted files, 3–12 record I/O statements, 7–28 record position, 7–32 record transfer, 7–34 record types, 7–9 format, 7–42 to 7–48 portability considerations, 7–11 scratch, 7–8 using preconnected files, 7–13
VAX floating-point formats, 10–3 to 10–6
Data flow analysis, 5–53
Data scope attributes controlling, 6–11, 6–36
DATA statement
See also Language Reference Manual and value propagation, 5–50 to 5–51
Data types, 9–1 to 9–19
See also Floating-point data types;
Integer data type; Logical data type;
Language Reference Manual alignment of, 5–21 to 5–30 big endian definition, 10–1 unformatted file formats, 3–22, 10–3 to 10–6 character representation, 9–18 common block handling between Compaq
Fortran and C, 11–43 derived-type data alignment, 5–27 differences between Compaq Fortran and
C, 11–30
DOUBLE PRECISION declarations options controlling size, 3–27 equivalent in C and Compaq Fortran,
11–29 exceptional floating-point numbers, 9–15 floating-point type differences with
OpenVMS Fortran, A–27 for efficient run-time performance, 5–44
Data types (cont’d) formats for unformatted files, 3–22, 10–3 to 10–6
Hollerith representation, 9–19
IEEE style X_float representation
REAL*16, 9–11
IEEE S_float representation
COMPLEX*8, 9–12
REAL*4, 9–10
IEEE T_float representation
COMPLEX*16, 9–12
REAL*8, 9–10
IEEE X_float representation
COMPLEX*32, 9–13
INTEGER and LOGICAL declarations options controlling size, 3–47
INTEGER representation, 9–4 to 9–6 in the debugger, 4–22 little endian definition, 10–1 unformatted file formats, 3–22, 10–3 to 10–6
LOGICAL representation, 9–7 methods of using nonnative formats,
10–8 mixed operations and run-time performance, 5–43 native data representation, 9–1 to 9–19 native IEEE floating-point representation,
9–8 to 9–13 nonnative formats for unformatted file conversion, 10–3 to 10–6
VAX floating-point representation,
A–28 to A–32 obtaining unformatted numeric formats,
10–8 porting OpenVMS Fortran data, A–24 ranges denormalized native floating-point data, 9–3 native numeric types, 9–2 to 9–4
VAX floating-point types, A–28 to
A–30
REAL and COMPLEX declarations
Index–12
Data types
REAL and COMPLEX declarations
(cont’d) options controlling size, 3–61 sizes for efficient run-time performance,
5–43
VAX D_float representation
COMPLEX*16, A–31
REAL*8, A–30
VAX F_float representation
COMPLEX*8, A–30
REAL*4, A–28
VAX G_float representation
COMPLEX*16, A–31
REAL*8, A–29
VAX H_float representation
REAL*16, A–32
Date and time returning (library routine), 12–5, 12–7,
12–10, 12–11, 12–15 dbesj0 function, 12–5 dbesj1 function, 12–6 dbesjn function, 12–6 dbesy0 function, 12–6 dbesy1 function, 12–6 dbesyn function, 12–6 dbx
See Debugger dcp command use in porting OpenVMS Fortran data,
A–26
Dead code elimination, 5–47
Dead store elimination, 5–51
Debugger, 4–1 to 4–28 accessing variables, 4–16 array expression syntax, 4–20 common block, 4–16 derived type, 4–17 in modules, 4–16 pointers, 4–18 record structure, 4–18 breakpoints, 4–5 character-cell interface, 4–3 commands assign, 4–7
Debugger commands (cont’d) attach and detach, 4–15 catch, 4–25 cont, 4–4 delete, 4–4, 4–5 help, 4–5 history, 4–5 ignore, 4–25 listobj, 4–15 print, 4–7 quit, 4–4, 4–5 sh, 4–6 stop, 4–5, 4–7 stopi, 4–25 summary, 4–12 when, 4–7 where, 4–25 command summary, 4–12 data types, 4–22 dbx, 4–4 debugging optimized programs, 4–28 deleting a breakpoint, 4–4 displaying array sections, 4–20 array variables, 4–20 breakpoints, 4–14 common block variables, 4–16 derived-type variables, 4–17 module variables, 4–16 online help, 4–5 pointer variables, 4–18 previous debugger commands, 4–5 record structure variables, 4–18 registers, 4–13 values, 4–6, 4–16 exception handling, 4–25 executing program, 4–4 executing shell commands, 4–6 exiting, 4–4 f90 options controlling symbol table contents, 4–2 getting started, 4–1 handling signals, 4–12, 4–13 initial setup commands, 4–3
Index–13
Debugger (cont’d)
$lang environment variable, 4–16, 4–24 mixed-language programs, 4–24 obtaining subprogram name, 4–6 options for, 3–40 parallelized programs, 6–59 parallel regions, 6–60 resume execution, 4–5 running and exiting, 4–3 sample debugging session, 4–6 to 4–12 sample f90 command, 1–9 shared library use, 4–15 symbolic names, 4–16 tracepoint, 4–2 unaligned data (locating), 4–26 using conditional operators, 4–23 using logical operators, 4–23 using procedures, 4–23 using relational operators, 4–23 using shared variables, 6–63 watchpoint, 4–2 windowing interface, 4–3
DECF90 environment variable, B–2
DECF90_CC environment variable, B–2
DECF90_DIR environment variable, B–2
DECF90_FPP environment variable, B–3
DECF90_GMPILIB environment variable,
B–3
DECF90_HPF_TARGET environment variable,
B–3
DECF90_INIT environment variable, B–3
DECF90_LIB_DIR environment variable,
B–3
DECF90_WSF_TARGET environment variable,
B–3
DECFORT environment variable, B–3
DEC Fortran
See Compaq Fortran 77; Compaq Fortran
DEC Fortran 90
See Compaq Fortran
DECFORT_CC environment variable, B–3
DECFORT_DIR environment variable, B–4 decfort_dump_flag environment variable,
8–6, B–5
DECFORT_FPP environment variable, B–4
DECFORT_INIT environment variable, B–4
DECFORT_LIB_DIR environment variable,
B–4
DECladebug
See Debugger
Declarations
See also Language Reference Manual unalignment and COMMON,
STRUCTURE, TYPE statements,
5–21
DECnet copy use in porting OpenVMS Fortran data,
A–26
Decomposing loops, 6–45 to 6–58
Decomposition, 6–45 directed, 6–45 loop, 6–45
DECORATE option, 11–16
Default chunk size, 6–43 file names, 7–20, 7–24 logical I/O unit names, 7–24 schedule type, 6–43
DEFAULT clause for PARALLEL directive, 6–11, 6–12 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–11, 6–12 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–11, 6–12
DEFAULTFILE specifier, 7–16, 7–18, 7–19,
7–22
See also Language Reference Manual
DEFAULT option for PARALLEL directive, 6–37
DEFINE FILE statement, 7–4
See also Language Reference Manual
Deleted records in relative files effect of -vms option, 3–75, 7–7
DELETE statement, 7–4
See also Language Reference Manual effect of -vms option, 3–75
Index–14
DELIM specifier, 7–17
See also Language Reference Manual
Denormalized numbers (IEEE), 9–15
-check underflow option, 3–22 double-precision range, 9–3 exponent value of, 9–9
-fpen options, 3–33 single-precision range, 9–3
S_float range, 9–3
T_float range, 9–3
X_float range, 9–11
Dependences requiring locks, 6–52 derfc library routine, 12–6 derf library routine, 12–6
Derived-type data
See also Language Reference Manual accessing variables in Ladebug, 4–17 alignment of, 5–27 and data alignment, 5–29 causes of unaligned data, 5–21 controlling alignment of multiple data items, 5–25 options controlling alignment, 3–8, 5–22,
5–29 order of members, 5–22, 5–23, 5–27
SEQUENCE statement, 5–22, 11–38
Descriptor
Compaq Fortran format, 11–10
Device I/O library routines for, 12–9
Device information library routines for, 12–11 dffrac library routine, 12–6 dflmax library routine, 12–6 dflmin library routine, 12–6
Direct access file
RECL values, 5–41
Direct access mode, 7–30
See also Relative file requirements for, 7–30, 7–31
Directed decomposition, 6–45
See also Parallel execution
Directives
See also Language Reference Manual;
OPTIONS statement cDEC$ ALIAS, 11–14 cDEC$ ATTRIBUTES, 11–14, 11–16
ALIAS, 11–16
C, 11–16
REFERENCE, 11–16
STDCALL, 11–16
VALUE, 11–16
Compaq Fortran parallel, 6–29 to 6–44 c$MP_SCHEDTYPE, 6–43 c$PAR BARRIER, 6–31, 6–42 c$PAR CHUNK, 6–31, 6–43 c$PAR COPYIN, 6–31 c$PAR CRITICAL SECTION, 6–31,
6–42 c$PAR DOACROSS, 6–32, 6–41 c$PAR END CRITICAL SECTION,
6–31, 6–42 c$PAR END PARALLEL, 6–32 c$PAR END PARALLEL DO, 6–41 c$PAR END PARALLEL SECTIONS,
6–33, 6–41 c$PAR END PDO, 6–33, 6–39 c$PAR END PSECTIONS, 6–34,
6–40 c$PAR END SINGLE PROCESS,
6–34, 6–40 c$PAR INSTANCE, 6–32 c$PAR INSTANCE PARALLEL,
6–32, 6–35, 6–36 c$PAR INSTANCE SINGLE, 6–32 c$PAR MP_SCHEDTYPE, 6–32 c$PAR PARALLEL, 6–32 c$PAR PARALLEL DO, 6–32, 6–41 c$PAR PARALLEL SECTIONS,
6–33, 6–41 c$PAR PDO, 6–33, 6–39 c$PAR PDONE, 6–33, 6–44 c$PAR PSECTIONS, 6–34, 6–40 c$PAR SECTION, 6–34, 6–40 c$PAR SINGLE PROCESS, 6–34,
6–40
Index–15
Directives
Compaq Fortran parallel (cont’d) c$PAR TASKCOMMON, 6–34, 6–35,
6–36 cpp , 2–20 data environment, 6–10 general Compaq Fortran, 2–20
OpenMP parallel, 6–2 to 6–28 c$OMP ATOMIC, 6–5, 6–23 c$OMP BARRIER, 6–5, 6–24 c$OMP CRITICAL, 6–5, 6–25, 6–47,
6–52 c$OMP DO, 6–6, 6–19, 6–46 c$OMP END CRITICAL, 6–5, 6–25 c$OMP END DO, 6–6, 6–19 c$OMP END MASTER, 6–6, 6–26 c$OMP END ORDERED, 6–6, 6–27 c$OMP END PARALLEL, 6–7, 6–9,
6–17 c$OMP END PARALLEL DO, 6–7,
6–22 c$OMP END PARALLEL SECTIONS,
6–7, 6–22 c$OMP END SECTIONS, 6–8, 6–20 c$OMP END SINGLE, 6–8 c$OMP FLUSH, 6–6, 6–26 c$OMP MASTER, 6–6, 6–26 c$OMP ORDERED, 6–6, 6–27 c$OMP PARALLEL, 6–7, 6–9, 6–17,
6–46 c$OMP PARALLEL DO, 6–7, 6–22 c$OMP PARALLEL SECTIONS, 6–7,
6–22 c$OMP SECTION, 6–8, 6–20 c$OMP SECTIONS, 6–8, 6–20 c$OMP SINGLE, 6–8, 6–21 c$OMP THREADPRIVATE, 6–8,
6–10, 6–11, 6–12 orphaned, 6–9 summary descriptions, 6–31 to 6–34
Directory
See also Pathname application of defaults, 7–19 to 7–23 changing (library routine), 12–5 default for OPEN statement, 7–19
Directory (cont’d) effect of DEFAULTFILE specifier, 7–19 environment variable, 7–19 to 7–21
I/O statements default use, 7–14 to 7–24 in I/O statements, 7–18 to 7–23 link (library routine), 12–11, 12–15
OPEN statement specifiers, 7–15, 7–19 searched for module and include files,
2–6, 2–7 setting environment variables for, 7–23 symbolic link (library routine), 12–15 tilde character ( ~ ), 7–19
DISPOSE specifier, 7–16, 7–17
See also Language Reference Manual
Distribution loop, 6–50
Division by zero, 14–1 dlgamma library routine, 12–6
-Dname option, 3–26
DOACROSS directive, 6–32, 6–41
Documentation sending comments to Compaq, xxix
DO directive, 6–6, 6–19, 6–46
FIRSTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
LASTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
ORDERED clause, 6–27
PRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–12
REDUCTION clause, 6–11, 6–14 to 6–16
SCHEDULE clause, 6–27
DO loops
See also Language Reference Manual blocking optimization, 3–57, 3–70 distribution optimization, 3–57, 3–70 execution options affecting, 3–28 fusion optimization, 3–57, 3–70 interchange optimization, 3–57, 3–70 limiting loop unrolling, 3–72, 5–55 outer loop unrolling optimization, 3–57,
3–70 scalar replacement optimization, 3–57,
3–70 software pipelining optimization, 3–57,
3–60, 5–58
Index–16
DO loops (cont’d) transformation optimizations, 3–57, 3–70,
5–60
-unroll num option, 3–72 unroll optimization, 3–57 use for efficient run-time performance,
5–45
DO statement
See also Language Reference Manual nesting limit, 2–17
Dot product operation and -fp_reorder option, 5–64
DOUBLE PRECISION declarations options to control size of, 3–27
-double_size option, 3–27 drand library routine, 12–6 drandm library routine, 12–6
Driver program and ld , 2–22 definition of, 1–10 relationship to software components,
1–10 relationship with
2–16 cc and ld , 2–13 to dtime library routine, 12–6
Dummy aliases option for aliasing, 3–13
Dummy arguments, 11–1
See also Language Reference Manual and accuracy, 5–65 and implied-DO loop collapsing, 5–38 option for aliasing, 3–13, 5–65
DXML
See Compaq Extended Math Library
Dynamic extent, 6–9
DYNAMIC schedule type, 6–28, 6–43, 6–44
-d_lines option, 3–27
E
Edit descriptors
See Language Reference Manual
END CRITICAL directive, 6–5, 6–25
END CRITICAL SECTION directive, 6–31,
6–42
END DO directive, 6–6, 6–19
NOWAIT clause, 6–20
ENDFILE records effect of -vms option, 3–75
ENDFILE statement, 7–3, 7–32
See also Language Reference Manual
Endian big and little types, 10–1
END MASTER directive, 6–6, 6–26
END ORDERED directive, 6–6, 6–27
END PARALLEL directive, 6–7, 6–9, 6–17,
6–32
END PARALLEL DO directive, 6–7, 6–22,
6–41
END PARALLEL SECTIONS directive, 6–7,
6–22, 6–33, 6–41
END PDO directive, 6–33, 6–39
NOWAIT option, 6–39, 6–40
END PSECTIONS directive, 6–34, 6–40
END SECTIONS directive, 6–8, 6–20
NOWAIT clause, 6–20
END SINGLE directive, 6–8
NOWAIT clause, 6–21
END SINGLE PROCESS directive, 6–34,
6–40
END specifier, 7–29, 7–33, 8–7
See also Language Reference Manual
Entry point main, 2–19
ENTRY statement
See Language Reference Manual
Environment variables, B–1 to B–7 adjusting the run-time parallel environment, 6–56 associating with files, 7–23 effect of -vms option, 3–75, 7–24 commands for setting and unsetting ( sh , ksh , csh ), B–1 to B–2
Compaq Fortran parallel
MP_CHUNK_SIZE , 6–58
MP_SPIN_COUNT , 6–58
MP_STACK_SIZE , 6–58
MP_THREAD_COUNT , 6–58
Index–17
Environment variables
Compaq Fortran parallel (cont’d)
MP_YIELD_COUNT , 6–58 compiler specifying directory for temporary files, 2–9 converting nonnative numeric data, 10–9,
10–10 decfort_dump_flag , 8–6, B–5 displaying values of, B–1 forcing core dump at run time, 8–6
FORTn , 7–14, 7–23, B–6
FORT_BUFFERED , B–6
FORT_CONVERT.ext , 10–10, B–6
FORT_CONVERTn , 10–9, B–6
FOR_ACCEPT , 7–24, B–5
FOR_DISABLE_STACK_TRACE , 8–3, B–5
FOR_PRINT , 7–24, B–5
FOR_READ , 7–24, B–5
FOR_TYPE , 7–24, B–5 message catalog location, 8–5
NLSPATH, 8–5
NLSPATH , B–6
OpenMP parallel
OMP_DYNAMIC , 6–57
OMP_NESTED , 6–57
OMP_NUM_THREADS , 6–17, 6–57
OMP_SCHEDULE , 6–57
PROFDIR , 5–15 recognized at compile time, B–2 recognized at run time, B–5 setting in .login or shell files, 1–3
TMPDIR , 2–9, 3–50, B–4, B–7 used by OPEN statement, 7–20, 7–23
EOR specifier, 7–33, 8–7
See also Language Reference Manual
.EQ. operator
See Language Reference Manual
Equivalenced structures in data flow and split lifetime analysis,
5–55
Equivalence group, 5–55
EQUIVALENCE statement
See also Language Reference Manual and data alignment, 5–21, 5–29
EQUIVALENCE statement (cont’d) and implied-DO loop collapsing, 5–38 erfc library routine, 12–7 erf library routine, 12–7
Error function returning (library routines), 12–6, 12–7
Error handling
See also EOR, ERR, IOSTAT arithmetic exception handling, 3–20,
3–33 forcing core dump at run time, 8–6 library routines for, 8–10, 12–9, 12–10,
12–14 operating system, 8–10 overview, 8–1 processing performed by Compaq Fortran
RTL, 8–1 to 8–32 run-time errors summary, 8–13 to 8–32 signals, 8–11 system errors ( errno ), 8–10 user controls in I/O statements, 7–15,
7–29, 8–7, 8–9
See also Language Reference Manual
Errors
See also Error handling; Messages;
Signals and signals, 8–11 compiler effect on linker, 2–19
-error_limit nn option, 3–27 driver messages, 2–16 forcing core dump at run time, 8–6 linker messages, 2–19 operating system, 8–10 run-time errors summary, 8–13 to 8–32
Run-Time Library, 8–1 to 8–32 run-time messages list, numeric order, 8–13 to 8–32 transporting message file, 8–5
-error_limit nn option, 3–27
ERR specifier, 7–29, 8–7
See also Language Reference Manual example, 8–9
Index–18
etime library routine, 12–7
Exception (debugging)
-fpen option, 4–25, 4–26
-synchronous_exceptions option,
4–25, 4–26 using debugger to locate, 4–25
Exceptional IEEE floating-point values,
9–14
Exception handling
See Arithmetic exception handling
EXCHANGE Utility (VMS) use in porting OpenVMS Fortran data,
A–26
Executable programs
See also Program; Parallel execution;
Threaded program execution creating using f90 command, 1–5 effect of
3–17
-call_shared option on size, effect of optimization level on size, 5–45 installing using Compaq Tru64 UNIX tools, 1–13 naming, 2–8, 2–12 running, 1–5 specifying name, 2–8
Expansion inline, 5–58
Explicit interface, 11–3 calling non-Fortran subprograms, 11–3 effect on array argument passing, 11–10 passing pointers, 11–9 when calling C subprograms, 11–10 export command, 7–24, B–1
Expressions
See also Language Reference Manual parentheses in maximum allowed, 2–18
-extend_source option, 3–28
Extensions compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for
Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, A–7 compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for
OpenVMS systems, A–20
External file, 7–2
External names appending underscore, 3–15, 3–16, 11–6 case sensitivity, 3–54, 11–15 controlling with cDEC$ directives, 11–15,
11–16 passed between C and Compaq Fortran,
11–6, 11–15, 11–16, 11–24 specifying alias names, 11–15 use of library routines or intrinsics,
12–19
External procedures name passing rule, 11–6, 11–24 references and optimization, 5–54
EXTERNAL statement, 2–21, 11–4, 12–19
See also Language Reference Manual for C language functions, 11–26 use with 3f routines, 12–19 use with USEROPEN specifier, 7–36
External subprogram, 11–4
F
-f66 option, 3–28
-f77 option, 3–29
-f77rtl option, 3–29, A–8 f90 command alignment options, 3–6 to 3–8, 5–29 and cc , 2–13 and ld , 2–13, 2–22 and other software components, 1–9 to
1–10 arithmetic exceptions and reporting, 3–36
-check underflow option, 3–22
-fpe options, 3–33
-math_library fast option, 3–52
-speculate option, 3–65
-synchronous_exceptions option,
3–69
C language main program, 3–55 example, 11–24 command options for efficient run-time performance, 5–5 consistent use of options for multiple compilations, 3–2, 3–37
Index–19
f90 command (cont’d) creating module files, 2–5 creating shared libraries, 2–25 to 2–27 debugging options, 4–2 driver program, 1–10, 2–13 error messages, 2–16 examples, 2–10 to 2–12 application with modules, 1–7 compiling multiple files, 2–12 compiling multiple files for efficient run-time performance, 2–9, 5–4 cord , 5–19 debugging, 4–4 for debugging, 1–9 linking object file, 2–11 module subprogram, 1–7 multiple source files, 2–10 preserving object file, 2–11 profiling ( gprof ), 5–16 profiling ( prof ), 5–15 renaming output file, 2–11 requesting listing file, 2–12 requesting software pipelining, 2–12 separate and combined compilation,
1–7 single file, 1–5 specifying additional link libraries,
2–12 using .c
file, 2–11, 11–25 using different file name suffixes,
2–4 file name suffixes effect on cpp use, 2–2 effect on source form, 2–2 interaction with options, 2–2 files created by, 2–8 for efficient run-time performance, 5–4 format, 2–4 groups of options, 3–2 include file use, 2–6 linking, 2–2, 2–21 to 2–28 listing file with machine code, C–2 list of options, 3–1 to 3–80 messages, 2–18 module file use, 2–5 f90 command (cont’d) multiple source files, 2–9 name of compiler, 1–12 name on Tru64 UNIX systems, xxxi options, 3–1 to 3–80 effect on output files, 2–9 for HPF parallel processing, 3–42 listed in functional groups, 3–2 overriding, 2–20 passed to cc or ld , 2–15
OPTIONS statement, effect on options,
2–20 output files, 2–8 passing options to preprocessors, 3–26 processes used by, 1–10 recognized file name suffix characters,
2–2 return values, 2–15 source file directives, effect on options,
2–20 specifying additional directory for additional library for ld ld , 3–50
, 3–51 directory for module files, 2–5 directory for temporary files, 2–9 include files, 2–6 input files, 2–4 to 2–5, 2–9 listing of include file, 2–7 output file, 2–8 temporary files, 2–8 to 2–9 falloc library routine, 12–7
-fast option, 3–29, 5–61 fdate library routine, 12–7
Feedback files, 5–19 related f90 options, 3–30
Feedback on documentation sending comments to Compaq, xxix
-feedback option, 3–30, 5–19 ffrac library routine, 12–7 fgetc library routine, 12–7
Fields in common blocks causes of unaligned data, 5–21 options controlling alignment, 3–6,
5–21, 5–29
Index–20
Fields (cont’d) in derived-type data and record structures causes of unaligned data, 5–21 controlling alignment, 5–25 options controlling alignment, 3–6,
5–22, 5–29
File external, 7–2 file command, 1–13
File descriptor returning (library routine), 12–10
File descriptor limit increasing number per process, 1–2
File format
See also Record type; Formatted data;
Unformatted files
File name application of defaults, 7–19 to 7–21 compiler defaults, 7–20, 7–24 environment variable, 7–19 to 7–21
I/O statements default use, 7–14 to 7–24 in I/O statements, 7–18 to 7–23
OPEN statement specifiers, 7–15, 7–19 setting environment variables for, 7–23 suffix and source form, 1–3, 2–2 libraries, 2–3 modules, 2–3 object files, 2–3 preprocessor intermediate files, 2–3 source files, 2–2
File organization, 7–7
See also Sequential files; Relative files available storage media, 7–7 default for OPEN statement, 7–30
I/O statements for, 7–4 importance of specifying in OPEN statement, 7–30 overview (sequential, relative), 7–7 record types for, 7–31 relative, 7–7 sequential, 7–7
Files changing output file names ( f90 ), 2–8,
2–11, 3–56
Files (cont’d) combining at source compilation, 2–20 compiling multiple input files, 2–9, 2–10 created by f90 , 2–8 determining accessibility of (library routine), 12–5 effect of options on output files ( f90 ), 2–9 external, definition, 7–2 feedback related options, 3–30 file descriptor for USEROPEN function,
7–36 to 7–38
INCLUDE files, 2–20 input to f90 , 2–5, 2–9 internal, 7–8 module files, 2–20 object files created by f90 , 2–8 opening using USEROPEN function,
7–39 preconnected, 7–14 protection of created (library routine),
12–15 protection of existing (library routine),
12–5 relative organization, 7–7 renaming (library routine), 12–14 retaining object files (f90), 2–8, 3–17 scratch, 7–9 sequential organization, 7–7 specifying access using USEROPEN function, 7–39 specifying name and pathname, 7–18 example program, 8–9 status of (library routine), 12–9, 12–15 temporary ( f90 ), 2–9, 3–50
File sharing
OPEN statement, SHARED specifier,
7–31
File specifications differences with OpenVMS Fortran, A–22 use in OPEN statements, 7–15
FILE specifier, 7–16, 7–18, 7–19, 7–22
See also Language Reference Manual example, 8–9
Index–21
FIND statement, 7–4
See also Language Reference Manual
Finite number, 9–14
FIRSTPRIVATE clause for DO directive, 6–11, 6–13 for PARALLEL directive, 6–11, 6–13 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–11, 6–13 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–11, 6–13 for SECTIONS directive, 6–11, 6–13 for SINGLE directive, 6–11, 6–13
FIRSTPRIVATE option for PARALLEL directive, 6–37 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–37 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–37 for PDO directive, 6–37 for PSECTIONS directive, 6–37 for SINGLE PROCESS directive, 6–37
Fixed-length records, 7–10, 7–42 data transferred by I/O statements, 7–34 importance of specifying record length,
7–42
OpenVMS data compatibility, A–25 requirement for direct access, 7–30, 7–31 use for optimal performance, 5–41
-fixed option, 3–31
Fixed source form prefixes
Compaq Fortran parallel directives, 6–30
OpenMP conditional compilation, 6–4
OpenMP directives, 6–3
FIX extension, 3–11 flmax library routine, 12–7 flmin library routine, 12–7
Floating-point data types arithmetic exception handling, 3–20,
3–33 comparison of OpenVMS and native formats, A–27 constants request double precision, 3–32 conversion, 10–3 to 10–6 limitations, 10–7
CRAY big endian formats, 10–5 declarations and options, 3–61, 9–9
Floating-point data types (cont’d) declaring, 9–9
See also Language Reference Manual denormal values, 9–15 digits of precision, 9–10 to 9–11 endian (big and little), 10–1 endian order of native formats, 9–1 exceptional values, 3–33, 9–14 to 9–18 handling of single-precision constants,
3–32
IBM big endian formats, 10–5
IEEE big endian formats, 10–5
IEEE denormalized values, 9–15
IEEE style X_float, 9–8, 9–11
IEEE S_float, 9–8, 10–6
IEEE T_float, 9–8, 10–6 infinity, 9–14 methods of specifying nonnative formats,
10–8
NaN values, 9–14 nonnative formats, 10–3 to 10–6 normal and denormalized values of native formats, 9–3 obtaining unformatted numeric formats,
10–8 options controlling size of COMPLEX and
REAL declarations, 3–62 options controlling size of DOUBLE
PRECISION declarations, 3–27 options related to accuracy, 3–14, 3–52 options related to exceptions, 3–20 porting VAX formats, A–24 ranges, 9–3, 9–8 to 9–11 representation of native formats, 9–8 to
9–13 representation of VAX formats, A–28 to
A–32 representation of zero, 9–15 rounding modes, 3–38 routines for arithmetic exception handling,
12–8 values for constants, 9–3
VAX D_float format, 10–5, 10–6, A–28
VAX F_float format, 10–5, 10–6, A–28
VAX G_float format, 10–5, 10–6, A–28
Index–22
Floating-point data types (cont’d)
VAX H_float format, 10–6 zero values, 9–15
Floating-point exception handling
See Arithmetic exception handling
Floating-point numbers library routines for, 12–7
FLOAT intrinsic function
See also Language Reference Manual options controlling size returned, 3–62
FLUSH directive, 6–6, 6–26 flush library routine, 12–7, 12–9
FMT specifier, 7–29
See also Language Reference Manual
FOR$IOS prefix for condition symbols for run-time errors, 8–13 to 8–32
FORALL statement
See also Language Reference Manual array optimizations, 5–48 fordef.f
file floating-point class identifiers, 14–8 foriosdef.f
file condition symbol values, 8–12 fork library routine, 12–9
Format
Compaq Fortran parallel directives, 6–29
OpenMP directives, 6–2
Format descriptors
See also Language Reference Manual option controlling format mismatch handling, 3–19
Format groups nesting limits, 2–17
Format statement length limit, 2–17
FORMAT statement
See also Language Reference Manual and implied-DO loop collapsing, 5–38
Formatted data, 7–5 and DO loop collapsing, 5–48 and I/O statements, 7–6 and variable format expressions, 5–39 effect on run-time performance, 5–37
Formatted data (cont’d) with Fortran carriage control, command, 7–13
Formatted I/O statements, 7–5 fpr
See also Language Reference Manual option controlling format mismatch handling, 3–19 option controlling format truncation handling, 3–21
FORM specifier, 7–5 to 7–6, 7–13, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual fort command and other software components, 1–9 to
1–10 debugging options, 4–2 driver program, 1–10 examples, 2–10 to 2–12 multiple source files, 2–10 format, 2–4 groups of options, 3–2 list of options, 3–1 to 3–80 name on Linux systems, xxxi options, 3–1 to 3–80 listed in functional groups, 3–2
FORTn environment variable, 7–14, B–6
Fortran 90 reusing source file code, 1–4 sample main and subprogram, 1–5, 1–6 source file contents, 1–4 source form file name suffix, 1–3
Fortran 95 standard checking, 3–66
Fortran 95/90 logical unit numbers, 7–24 source form file name suffix, 2–2 standard and RECL units for unformatted files,
10–13
-assume dummy_aliases option,
3–13, 5–65 checking, 3–66 standards, 1–15
Index–23
Fortran carriage control fpr command, 7–13
Fortran compiler
See f90 command
FORTRAN IV options for compatibility, 3–28
Fortran preprocessors and cpp , 3–25 and fpp , 3–38 invoking cpp , 3–24 retaining temporary files, 3–50 fortran routine, 12–9
Fortran statements
See also Language Reference Manual; appropriate statement name coding restrictions and limits summary,
2–17 maximum line length, 3–28
FORT_BUFFERED environment variable, B–6
FORT_CONVERT.ext environment variable,
B–6 use with nonnative numeric data, 10–10
FORT_CONVERTn environment variable, B–6 use with nonnative numeric data, 10–9
FOR_ACCEPT environment variable, 7–24,
B–5
FOR_DISABLE_STACK_TRACE environment variable, 8–3, B–5 for_fpe_flags.f
file floating-point exception flags, 14–2, 14–3 for_get_fpe function, 14–2, 14–5 for_get_fpe library routine, 3–37, 12–8
FOR_PRINT environment variable, 7–24,
B–5
FOR_READ environment variable, 7–24, B–5 for_rtl_finish_ library routine (C), 12–8 for_rtl_init_ library routine (C), 12–8 for_set_fpe function, 14–2, 14–6 for_set_fpe library routine, 3–37, 12–8 for_set_reentrancy library routine, 12–9
FOR_TYPE environment variable, 7–24, B–5
-fpconstant option, 3–32
-fpe0 option, 3–34
-fpe1 option, 3–34
-fpe2 option, 3–34
-fpe3 option, 3–35
-fpe4 option, 3–35
-fpen option use when debugging, 4–25, 4–26
-fpe option, 3–34
-fpe options, 3–33
-fpp option, 3–38 fpp preprocessor, 1–10 options for, 3–47 searching for include files, 3–47 fpr command, 7–13
-fprm option, 3–38 fputc library routine, 12–9
FP_CLASS intrinsic, 9–18, 14–8, 14–9
-fp_reorder option, 3–14, 5–64 effect of -fast option, 3–29
Freeing and allocating virtual memory
(library routine), 12–7 free library routine, 12–9
-free option, 3–31
Free source form prefixes
Compaq Fortran parallel directives, 6–30
OpenMP conditional compilation, 6–5
OpenMP directives, 6–3
3f routine, 12–1 fseek library routine, 12–9 fsplit command, 1–14 fstat library routine, 12–9 ftell library routine, 12–9 ftp command use in porting OpenVMS Fortran data,
A–26
Function reference maximum arguments allowed, 2–17
Function return values changing default passing mechanisms,
11–12 default passing mechanism, 11–6 passing rules, 11–6 passing with Compaq Fortran, 11–6 setting, 11–2 with C, 11–27 with Compaq Fortran, 11–5
Index–24
Function return values (cont’d) with Compaq Fortran 77, A–35
Functions
See also Intrinsic procedures; Library routines alternate entry points, 4–28 bit, 12–5 to 12–15
C language invoking, 11–26 declaration statements, 11–2 example declaration, 1–7 example interface block in module, 1–6 example use
3f routines, 12–20, 12–22 with module, 1–6
%LOC, %VAL, %REF, 11–12
FUNCTION statement, 11–2
See also Language Reference Manual
-fuse_xref option, 3–39
G
-g0 option, 3–40, 4–2
-g1 option, 3–40, 4–2
-g2 or -g option, 3–40, 4–2
-g3 option, 3–41, 4–2
.GE. operator
See Language Reference Manual
-gen_feedback option, 3–31 gerror library routine, 8–10, 12–9 getarg library routine, 12–9 getc library routine, 12–9 getcwd library routine, 12–9 getenv library routine, 12–10 example, 11–33 getfd library routine, 12–10 getgid library routine, 12–10 getlog library routine, 12–10 getpid library routine, 12–10 getuid library routine, 12–10 get_hpf_my_node library routine, 12–16 get_hpf_numnodes library routine, 12–16 global_alignment library routine, 12–16 global_bounds library routine, 12–16 global_distribution library routine,
12–16 global_template library routine, 12–17 global_to_local library routine, 12–17 global_to_physical library routine,
12–17 gmtime library routine, 12–10
GOTO statement
See also Language Reference Manual computed or assigned maximum labels allowed, 2–18 gprof command for call graph information, 5–16 related use with f90 option, 3–61 f90 , 5–16 to 5–17
Granularity and unaligned data, 3–41 for threaded applications, 3–41 importance of VOLATILE declarations,
3–41 shared memory access, 3–41
-granularity options, 3–41
GSS schedule type, 6–44
.GT. operator
See Language Reference Manual
GUIDED schedule type, 6–28, 6–43, 6–44
H
Help (online)
See appropriate reference page
See Release notes
Hidden bit normalization, 9–9
High Performance Fortran options for parallel processing, 3–42
Hollerith constants
See also Language Reference Manual maximum size, 2–17 representation, 9–19
HPF global routines with nonparallel main program, 3–55
Index–25
HPF library, 2–22
-hpf or -hpf nn option and -std option, 3–68 profiling option, 3–60
-hpf or -hpf num option, 3–42 to 3–46
3hpf routine, 12–15
HPF_LIBRARY routines
See Language Reference Manual
HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY routines, 12–16 hpf_synch library routine, 12–17
-hpf_target cmpi option, 3–46
-hpf_target gmpi option, 3–46
-hpf_target option, 3–46
-hpf_target smpi option, 3–46
I
I/O, 7–1 to 7–48
See also Files; Record I/O; I/O statements advancing and nonadvancing, 7–33 choosing optimal record type, 5–41 closing files, 7–27
Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran compatibility, A–38 converting unformatted files, 10–1 to
10–13 data formats for unformatted files, 10–1 to 10–6 device and buffer use for efficient run-time performance, 5–39 disk, 5–39 to 5–41 eliminating bottlenecks, 5–36 files and file characteristics, 7–6 guidelines for efficient run-time performance, 5–36 to 5–42 limitations opening file with user-supplied function (USEROPEN), 7–36 logical unit, 7–2 obtaining file information, 7–25
OPEN statement opening file with user-supplied function, 7–36 performance, 5–38
I/O (cont’d) pipes, 7–18 preconnected files, 7–14 reading deleted records and ENDFILE records effect of record, 5–39
-vms option, 3–76 access, 7–30 for internal files, 7–8 general description, 7–34 operations, 7–28 record types, 7–9 comparison with Compaq Fortran 77,
7–11 comparison with OpenVMS systems,
A–22, A–24 to A–25 formats, 7–42 portability considerations, 7–11 sockets, 7–18 specifying files, 7–18 specifying record length for efficiency,
5–41 summary of statements, 7–3 using C language function to open a file
(USEROPEN), 7–36
I/O implied DO nesting limit, 2–17
I/O statements
See also Language Reference Manual advancing and nonadvancing I/O, 7–33 auxiliary, 7–4 available for sequential and direct access,
7–6
CLOSE statement, 7–27
Compaq Fortran extensions, 7–3 default devices, 7–24 default environment variables, 7–24
DELETE statement effect of -vms option, 3–75
ENDFILE records effect of -vms option, 3–75 file connection, 7–3 forms of, 7–4, 7–5 for relative files, 7–4 for sequential files, 7–4
Index–26
I/O statements (cont’d) implicit logical I/O unit, 7–14
INQUIRE statement, 7–25 list of, 7–3
OPEN statement, 7–22
See also OPEN statement
CONVERT specifier, 10–3 effect of -vms option, 3–75, 3–76 interdependencies of file and directory, 7–22 record access modes, 7–30 record input, 7–3 record operations, 7–28 record output, 7–3 record position, 7–3 record transfer, 7–34 types of access modes, 7–30 with formatted, unformatted, list-directed, and namelist records, 7–6
-i2 option, 3–47
-i4 option, 3–48
-i8 option, 3–48 iargc library routine, 12–10 idate library routine, 12–10
-Idir option, 2–5, 2–6, 2–7, 3–47
IEEE
See also Data types exceptional floating-point numbers, 9–15 exception handling, 3–33 floating-point data exceptional values, 9–14 to 9–18 native, 9–2, 9–8 to 9–13 nonnative big endian, 10–3, 10–5 representation of zero, 9–15 nonnative big endian data, 10–3, 10–5 rounding modes floating-point calculations, 3–38
S_float data, 9–9, 9–10 ranges, 9–3
T_float data, 9–9, 9–10 ranges, 9–3
X_float data, 9–11 ranges, 9–3 ierrno library routine, 8–10, 12–10
IF clause for PARALLEL directive, 6–18
IF statement
See Language Reference Manual
Implicit interface, 11–3 types of subprograms, 11–3
IMPLICIT NONE statement
See also Language Reference Manual and and
-u option, 3–78
-warn declarations option, 3–78
Implied-DO loop and I/O performance, 5–37 collapsing, 5–38, 5–48
Include files directory search order, 2–7 specifying directory, 2–7 using, 2–6 to 2–8
INCLUDE statement, 2–6 to 2–8, 2–20
See also Language Reference Manual and modules, 11–3 directory searched for filenames, 3–75 effect of -vms option, 3–75 file nesting limit, 2–18 forms for include files, 2–7 index function, 12–10
Infinity values representation in Alpha floating-point data, 9–14
Initialization values reduction operators and intrinsics, 6–15
Inline expansion, 5–58 of statement functions and intrinsics,
5–47 subprograms, 3–48, 5–45, 5–57, 5–62
-inline option, 3–48, 5–62
Inlining, 5–58 automatic, 5–47 inmax function, 12–10
Input file, standard reading from a redirected, 5–42
INQUIRE statement, 7–3, 7–25 to 7–27
See also Language Reference Manual by file name, 7–26 by output item list, 7–27
Index–27
INQUIRE statement (cont’d) by unit number, 7–25 default values returned, 7–25 obtaining unformatted numeric format,
10–8
OPENED specifier, 7–26 to an opened file, 10–12
INSTANCE directive, 6–32
INSTANCE PARALLEL directive, 6–32,
6–35, 6–36
INSTANCE SINGLE directive, 6–32
Instruction extensions, generated for specific
Alpha processors, 3–10
Instruction scheduling, 5–53
-intconstant option, 3–49
Integer conversion library routines (3f), 12–11, 12–14
Integer data type declarations and options, 3–47, 9–4 declaring, 9–4
See also Language Reference Manual endian order of native formats, 9–1 methods of specifying endian format,
10–8 nonnative formats, 10–1 to 10–6 options controlling size of INTEGER declarations, 3–47 ranges, 9–2, 9–5 to 9–6 representation, 9–5 to 9–6
Integers library routines for, 12–10
-integer_size 16 option, 3–47
-integer_size 32 option, 3–48
-integer_size 64 option, 3–48
Interchanging loops for manual optimization, 6–54
Interface block, 11–2
See also Language Reference Manual components of, 11–4 declaration statements, 11–2 example, 1–6 for explicit procedure interface, 11–4
Interface body, 11–2
INTERFACE statement, 1–6, 11–2, 11–4
See also Language Reference Manual
INTERLEAVED schedule type, 6–43, 6–44
Internal file
See also Language Reference Manual
I/O, 7–8
I/O forms and statements, 7–6
Internal subprogram, 11–3
Intrinsic COMPLEX kinds, 9–9
Intrinsic procedures
See also Language Reference Manual and 3f routine, 12–5 and equivalent 3f routines, 12–2 argument passing differences between Compaq Fortran
77 and Compaq Fortran, A–13 bit (3f routine), 12–13
CHAR to null-terminate a C string, 11–6 for timing program execution, 5–14
FP_CLASS, 9–18
3f routines and EXTERNAL statement,
12–19
3f routines with same name, 12–19 inline expansion of, 5–48
ISNAN, 9–17 lshift (3f routine), 12–11 not (3f routine), 12–11 options controlling DOUBLE PRECISION size returned, 3–27 options controlling REAL or COMPLEX size returned, 3–62 random numbers, 12–2 requesting faster, less accurate versions,
3–52
RESHAPE, 11–42 return date and time, 12–3 rshift (3f routine), 12–14
SUM, 1–7
UBOUND, 1–7 using array, 5–31 using existing Compaq Fortran, 5–33 using instead of 3f routines, 12–2 xor (3f routine), 12–15
ZEXT, 11–13
Index–28
Intrinsic REAL kinds, 9–9
INTRINSIC statement
See also Language Reference Manual
Invalid operation, 14–1
-I option, 3–47
IOSTAT specifier, 7–29, 8–7 to 8–10
See also Language Reference Manual example, 8–9 return values from run-time messages,
8–14 symbolic definitions in foriosdef.f
,
8–9 irand library routine, 12–10, 12–22 irandm library routine, 12–10 isatty library routine, 12–11
ISHFT intrinsic, 5–49
See also Language Reference Manual
ISNAN intrinsic, 9–17, 14–10
See also Language Reference Manual itime library routine, 12–11
J
Jacket routines, 12–2
K
KAP preprocessor, 1–11 improving run-time performance, 5–3 kill library routine, 12–11
Kind type parameter
See also Language Reference Manual
COMPLEX declarations, 9–9
INTEGER declarations, 9–4
LOGICAL declarations, 9–7
REAL declarations, 9–9
-K option (cpp), 3–50
Korn shell (ksh) process limits, 1–2
Korn shell ( ksh )
FORTn environment variables, 7–23 setting and unsetting environment variables, B–1
L
Labels
See also Language Reference Manual in computed or assigned GOTO list maximum allowed, 2–18
Ladebug
See Debugger
-ladebug option, 3–41, 4–2 for Ladebug, 4–2
Language compatibility
See Compatibility
Language dialects
Compaq Fortran compatibility information, A–1 to A–24 options for, 3–13, 3–28, 3–66
Language extensions
See also Language Reference Manual
Compaq Fortran on other platforms
(summary), A–1 compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for
Compaq Tru64 UNIX systems, A–7 compatibility with Compaq Fortran 77 for
OpenVMS systems, A–20 compatibility with Compaq Fortran on other platforms, A–1 compatibility with Compaq Visual
Fortran, A–18
Language interface
C and Compaq Fortran allowing C programs to use Compaq
Fortran RTL, 12–8 appending underscore for external names, 11–25 calling subroutines, 11–29 changing default argument passing mechanisms, 11–14, 11–32 changing default mechanisms, 11–16 character arguments, 11–33
C language main program, 3–55,
11–24 complex arguments, 11–36 handling arrays, 11–41 handling common blocks, 11–43
Index–29
Language interface
C and Compaq Fortran (cont’d) integer arguments, 11–31 invoking a C function from Compaq
Fortran, 11–26 invoking a Compaq Fortran subprogram from C, 11–26 library routines for, 12–1 null-terminating character arguments, 11–35 opening file with user-supplied function, 7–36 passing arguments between, 11–10 to
11–22, 11–23 to 11–44
USEROPEN function, 7–36 using
C conventions, 11–20 f90 command, 11–23 fort command, 11–23
Compaq Fortran argument passing rules, 11–5 changing default argument passing mechanisms, 11–12, 11–14 default argument passing mechanism,
11–5 descriptor format, 11–10 explicit interface, 11–3 passing arrays, 11–8 character arguments, 11–6 pointers, 11–9 passing arguments, 11–1 to 11–9
Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran alignment options, A–38 common block values, A–37 data types to avoid, A–34 example, A–35 function values, A–34
I/O compatibility, A–38 mechanisms, A–35 passing arguments, A–33 to A–38 target or pointer data, A–37 pointer data, A–34 similarities, 11–5 external names
Language interface external names (cont’d) controlling with cDEC$ directives,
11–15, 11–16
USEROPEN function, 7–36
LAPACK routines (Compaq Extended Math
Library), 13–2
LASTLOCAL option for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–37 for PDO directive, 6–37
LASTPRIVATE clause for DO directive, 6–11, 6–13 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–11, 6–13 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–11, 6–13 for SECTIONS directive, 6–11, 6–13
Latch variable, 6–25
-L dir option, 2–23, 3–50 ld linker creating shared object libraries, 2–25 to
2–28 effect of EXTERNAL statement, 2–21 f90 command-line options for, 3–50 functions performed, 1–12 libraries passed to by f90 command,
2–21 locating undefined symbols using nm command, 2–23 messages, 2–19 options and files passed by f90 , 2–15 options for, 3–51 option to prevent running relationship to ld , 3–17 f90 command, 1–12, 2–2,
2–13, 2–22 request threaded run-time library, 3–70 restrictions creating shared libraries,
2–27 routines with opposition settings, 5–66 sample use with f90 command, 1–5, 1–7,
2–11 specifying object libraries, 2–21 to 2–25 shared object libraries, 2–25
Index–30
LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable,
B–4
.LE. operator
See Language Reference Manual len , 12–11
Length
DOUBLE PRECISION declarations options controlling size, 3–27
INTEGER or LOGICAL declarations options controlling size, 3–47
REAL or COMPLEX declarations options controlling size, 3–61 source file line, 2–17
LEN specifier, 11–7
See also Language Reference Manual
Lexical tokens per statement maximum, 2–18 lgamma , 12–11
Library
See also Shared library; Archive library linker searching options, 3–50 to 3–51 list passed by f90 command to list searched automatically by ld f90
, 1–5 command, 2–21 obtaining information about, 1–13 recognized file name suffixes, 2–3 selecting archive or shared for linking (f90 options), 2–24, 3–17 specifying with
2–25 f90 command, 2–21 to types of, 2–24
Library routines, 12–1 to 12–23 accessing reference pages for, 12–18 bessel, 12–2, 12–5 to 12–6 bit manipulation, 12–2 directories and files, 12–2 equivalent intrinsic functions, 12–2 error handling, 12–2 example program, 12–20, 12–22
EXTERNAL statement, 12–19
3f, 12–1 to 12–15 for arithmetic exception handling, 12–4 for C main language program, 12–3 for timing program execution, 5–14
3hpf, 12–15 to 12–18
Library routines (cont’d)
HPF_LIBRARY
See Language Reference Manual
HPF_LOCAL_LIBRARY, 12–16
I/O, 12–2 jacket, 12–2 language interface, 12–1 parallel run-time, D–1 to D–17 random numbers, 12–2 returning date and time, 12–2 error function, 12–3 file descriptor, 12–4 process, system, or command-line information, 12–3 shared memory, 12–4 signals and processes, 12–3 summary, 12–4 thread locking, D–9 using intrinsic procedures instead of,
12–2 virtual memory allocation, 12–3
Limits compiler, 2–17
Line length fixed-format source extending, 3–28 free-format source
See Language Reference Manual source file, 2–17
Linker and library searching
See ld linker link library routine, 12–11
LINPACK benchmark, 5–66
List-directed I/O statements, 7–5
See also Language Reference Manual
Listing file
See Source code listing
Little endian storage, 10–1 lnblnk library routine, 12–11
LOCAL option for PARALLEL directive, 6–37 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–37
Index–31
LOCAL option (cont’d) for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–37 for PDO directive, 6–37 for PSECTIONS directive, 6–37 for SINGLE PROCESS directive, 6–37 local_to_global library routine, 12–17
Lock routines, D–9
Locks for dependences, 6–52 using CRITICAL directive, 6–52 loc library routine, 12–11
Logical data type converting nonnative data, 10–14 declarations and options, 3–47, 9–4 declaring, 9–7
See also Language Reference Manual differences with nonnative formats,
10–13 options controlling size of LOGICAL declarations, 3–47 ranges, 9–7 representation, 9–7
Logical I/O unit, 7–2
See also Language Reference Manual implicit system defaults, 7–24
INQUIRE statement, 7–25
OPEN statement options, 7–22 summary, 7–18 system unit numbers and names, 7–23
Logical operators use in debugging, 4–23
Logical record, 7–45
Logical unit, 7–2 long library routine, 12–11
Loop alignment, 6–48
Loop blocking, 5–60
Loop control variable and implied-DO loop collapsing, 5–38
Loop decomposition, 6–45
Loop distribution, 5–60, 6–50
Loop fusion, 5–61
Loop interchange, 5–61
Loops
See also DO loops; Optimization and register use, 5–52 blocking optimization, 3–57, 3–70 controlling number of times unrolled,
5–61 distribution optimization, 3–57, 3–70 efficient coding suggestions, 5–31, 5–37,
5–38, 5–45 fusion optimization, 3–57, 3–70 interchange optimization, 3–57, 3–70 limiting loop unrolling, 3–72, 5–55 optimizations for, 5–48, 5–53, 5–55 to
5–62 outer loop unrolling optimization, 3–57,
3–70 relationship to basic block size, 5–14 scalar replacement optimization, 3–57,
3–70 software pipelining optimization, 3–57,
3–60, 5–58 terminating execution early, 6–44 transformation optimizations, 3–57, 3–70,
5–47, 5–60 unroll optimization, 3–57
-L option, 2–24, 3–50
Lowercase names case sensitivity, 3–54 options controlling, 3–54 lshift function, 12–11 lstat library routine, 12–11
-lstring option, 2–23, 3–51 and creating shared libraries, 2–26
.LT. operator, 4–23
See also Language Reference Manual ltime library routine, 12–11
M
Machine-code output listing general description, C–2 to C–5
-machine_code option, 3–64
Main program
C language f90 option for, 3–55, 11–24
Index–32
Main program
C language (cont’d) fort option for, 11–24 statements for, 11–1 make, 1–13 options related to, 3–25 makefile, 1–13 example of using, 12–21 malloc library routine, 12–11 man command, xxx f90 (1), 1–1 fort (1), 1–2 viewing routine reference pages, 12–18
Manual optimization, 6–54 balancing the workload, 6–55 interchanging loops, 6–54
MASTER directive, 6–6, 6–26
Master thread, 6–9
Math Libraries Web site, 13–1
-math_library accurate option, 3–52
-math_library fast option, 3–52 effect of effect on
-fast option, 3–29
-fpen option, 3–37
MAX extension, 3–10
MAXREC specifier, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual
Memory allocating and freeing virtual (library routine), 12–7 for intermediate storage, 5–38
Message catalog file, 8–5 location of, 8–3 transporting, 8–3
Message Passing Interface (MPI), 3–42,
3–46
Messages
See also Warning messages driver-related errors, 2–16 issued by compiler general description, 2–18 limiting the number, 3–27 language dialects and standards checking,
3–66 linking, 2–19
Messages (cont’d) run-time format, 8–3 run-time messages list, numeric order, 8–13 to 8–32 transporting message file, 8–5 severity meaning to run-time system, 8–3
Mixed real/complex operation, 5–53
-mixed_str_len_arg option, 3–53, 11–6
Module file, 2–5
-module option, 3–53
Modules, 2–5 to 2–6, 11–2
See also Language Reference Manual compiler use of process descriptor limit,
1–2 declaration example, 1–6 example compilation, 1–7 file name suffix, 2–3 files created and used by compiler, 3–53
.mod file suffix, 2–5 subprogram, 11–3 to contained subprograms, 11–4 use association, 11–4
MODULE statement, 1–6, 2–5, 11–2
See also Language Reference Manual
Module variables accessing in Ladebug, 4–16
-M option (cpp), 3–25 mpc_destroy library routine, D–17 mpc_in_parallel_region library routine,
D–17 mpc_maxnumthreads library routine, D–14 mpc_my_threadnum library routine, D–16 mpc_numthreads library routine, D–15
MPI
See Message Passing Interface (MPI)
-mp option, 3–54, 6–29, 6–45
MP_CHUNK_SIZE environment variable,
6–58
MP_SCHEDTYPE directive, 6–32, 6–43
MP_SCHEDTYPE option for PDO directive, 6–43
Index–33
MP_SPIN_COUNT environment variable,
6–58
MP_STACK_SIZE environment variable,
6–58
MP_THREAD_COUNT environment variable,
6–58
MP_YIELD_COUNT environment variable,
6–58
Multimedia instructions extension, 3–10
Multiple thread locking routines, D–9
N
Named common blocks
Privatizing, 6–10, 6–35
Name length, symbolic maximum, 2–18
Namelist I/O statements, 3–29, 7–5
See also Language Reference Manual
-names keyword options, 3–54
NAME specifier, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual
NaN values (IEEE)
See also ISNAN intrinsic representation in Alpha floating-point data, 9–14
Natural alignment, 5–21
Natural ascending storage order, 5–32
Natural storage order, 5–38
.NE. operator
See Language Reference Manual
-nearest_neighbor option, 3–44
Nested parallel region, 6–19
Nesting limits source code, 2–17
NLSPATH environment variable use by RTL, 8–5
NLSPATH environment variable, B–6 nm command use in locating undefined symbols, 2–23
NML specifier, 7–29
See also Language Reference Manual
-noextend_source option, 3–28
-nof66 option, 3–29
-nof77 option, 3–28
-nofor_main option, 3–55, 11–24
-noi4 option, 3–47
-noinclude option, 2–6, 2–7, 3–47, 3–56
-noinline option, 3–48, 5–62
Nonadvancing I/O, 7–33
-non_shared option, 2–24, 3–18
-nopad_source option, 3–59
-norun option, 3–56
.NOT. operator
See Language Reference Manual not function, 12–11
NOWAIT clause for END DO directive, 6–20 for END SECTIONS, 6–20 for END SINGLE, 6–21
NOWAIT option for END PDO directive, 6–39, 6–40
-nowarn option, 3–79
-nowsf_main option , 3–55
-no_archive option (ld) and creating shared libraries, 2–26
-no_fp_reorder option, 5–64
Numerical data output of, 5–37
Numeric range
See Data type
O
-O0 option, 3–57
-O1 option, 3–57
-O2 option, 3–57
-O3 option, 3–57
-O4 or -O option, 3–57
-O5 option, 3–57
Object file and cDEC$ directives, 2–21 contents, 1–11, 4–2 directory used, 2–9 effect of effect of
-gn option on size, 3–40
-On options on size, 3–57
Index–34
Object file (cont’d) effect of optimization level on size, 5–45,
5–47, 5–62 linker order of loading, 2–22 linking, 2–2 multiple input files and options, 2–9 naming, 2–8, 2–11 nonshared optimizations, 3–58 obtaining information about, 1–13 options controlling size of, 4–2 passing directly to ld (example), 2–4 prevent creation of, 3–69 recognized file name suffix, 2–3 renaming, 2–8 retaining, 2–8, 2–11, 3–17 used to create a shared library, 2–26,
3–18
Object library
See Shared library; Archive library
.o file suffix, 2–8
-old_f77 option, A–18
-om option, 3–58, 5–8
-omp option, 3–59, 6–2, 6–45 omp_destroy_lock library routine, D–10
OMP_DYNAMIC environment variable, 6–57 omp_get_dynamic library routine, D–3 omp_get_max_threads library routine,
D–3 omp_get_nested library routine, D–4 omp_get_num_procs library routine, D–4 omp_get_num_threads library routine,
D–5 omp_get_thread_num library routine, D–5 omp_init_lock library routine, D–10 omp_in_parallel library routine, D–6
OMP_NESTED environment variable, 6–57
OMP_NUM_THREADS environment variable,
6–17, 6–57
OMP_SCHEDULE environment variable, 6–57 omp_set_dynamic library routine, D–6 omp_set_lock library routine, D–10 omp_set_nested library routine, D–7 omp_set_num_threads library routine,
D–8 omp_test_lock library routine, D–11 omp_unset_lock library routine, D–11
-O n (optimization) options, 3–56, 5–46 additional global, 5–55 automatic inlining, 5–57 effect of effect of
-gen_feedback option, 3–31
-g options, 4–2 global, 5–53 local, 5–48
-onetrip option, 3–28
-o option, 2–8, 2–9 and creating shared libraries, 2–25 effect of -c option, 2–9
-o output option, 3–56
OPENED specifier, 7–26
See also Language Reference Manual
OpenMP conditional compilation, 6–4 conditional compilation prefixes fixed source form, 6–4 free source form, 6–5 specification, xxviii
OpenMP directives, 6–1
OpenMP parallel directives, 6–2 to 6–28
ATOMIC, 6–5, 6–23
BARRIER, 6–5, 6–24
CRITICAL, 6–5, 6–25, 6–47, 6–52
DO, 6–6, 6–19, 6–46
END CRITICAL, 6–5, 6–25
END DO, 6–6, 6–19
END MASTER, 6–6, 6–26
END ORDERED, 6–6, 6–27
END PARALLEL, 6–7, 6–9, 6–17
END PARALLEL DO, 6–7, 6–22
END PARALLEL SECTIONS, 6–7, 6–22
END SECTIONS, 6–8, 6–20
END SINGLE, 6–8
FLUSH, 6–6, 6–26 format, 6–2
MASTER, 6–6, 6–26
ORDERED, 6–6, 6–27
PARALLEL, 6–7, 6–9, 6–17, 6–46
PARALLEL DO, 6–7, 6–22
Index–35
OpenMP parallel directives (cont’d)
PARALLEL SECTIONS, 6–7, 6–22 prefixes, 6–3 fixed source form, 6–3 free source form, 6–3
SECTION, 6–8, 6–20
SECTIONS, 6–8, 6–20
SINGLE, 6–8, 6–21 summary descriptions, 6–5 to 6–8
THREADPRIVATE, 6–8, 6–10, 6–11,
6–12
OpenMP run-time library routines, D–1 reference page listing, 12–13
OPEN statement, 7–3, 7–13 to 7–25
See also Language Reference Manual access mode, 7–30
ACCESS specifier, 7–16, 7–30
ACTION specifier, 7–16
APPEND specifier, 7–30 to 7–31
ASSOCIATEVARIABLE specifier, 7–16
BLANK specifier, 7–16 effect of -vms option, 3–75
BLOCKSIZE specifier, 5–39, 7–17
BUFFERCOUNT specifier, 5–39, 7–17
CARRIAGECONTROL specifier, 7–13,
7–16 effect of -vms option, 3–76
CONVERT specifier, 3–22, 3–24, 7–17,
10–3, 10–11
DEFAULTFILE specifier, 7–16, 7–18,
7–19, 7–22 defaults
See also Language Reference Manual converting nonnative data, 10–13 pathname used, 7–19, 7–20 units for preconnected files, 7–14
DELIM specifier, 7–17 directory and file name defaults, 7–19 to
7–23
DISPOSE specifier, 7–16, 7–17 effect of opening previously open file,
7–15 effect of -vms option, 3–76 environment variables effect of -vms option, 3–75
OPEN statement (cont’d)
ERR specifier, 7–17 example, 8–9 example, 8–9 file organization, 7–7 importance of specifying, 7–30
FILE specifier, 7–16, 7–18, 7–19, 7–22 example, 8–9 file status, 7–2
FORM specifier, 7–5 to 7–6, 7–16
I/O statement interdependencies, 7–19 implied and explicit file open, 7–2 importance of examining defaults, 7–15 importance of specifying record type,
7–30 interdependencies of file and directory,
7–22
IOSTAT specifier, 7–17 example, 8–9
MAXREC specifier, 7–16
NAME specifier, 7–16 obtaining file descriptor (library routine),
12–10 opening file with user-supplied function
(USEROPEN), 7–36
ORGANIZATION specifier, 7–7, 7–16
PAD specifier, 7–17 with fixed-length records, 7–10
POSITION specifier, 7–16, 7–32
READONLY specifier, 7–16
RECL specifier, 7–7, 7–16 excluding overhead bytes, 7–12 obtaining value for unformatted files,
7–27 option to specify units, 3–12 performance considerations, 5–41 specifying for fixed-length records,
7–10, 7–42 units, 7–13 units for unformatted files, 10–13 record length, 7–12, 7–42
RECORDSIZE specifier, 7–16
RECORDTYPE specifier, 7–11, 7–16
SHARED specifier, 7–16, 7–31 specifiers for efficient I/O, 5–39
Index–36
OPEN statement (cont’d) specifiers identifying error handling capabilities, 7–17 file access and position, 7–16 file and record characteristics, 7–16 file and unit, 7–16 file close action, 7–17 record transfer characteristics, 7–16
STATUS specifier, 7–2, 7–16
SCRATCH value, 7–9 summary of specifiers, 7–15
TYPE specifier, 7–16
UNIT specifier, 7–2, 7–16, 7–18, 7–22
USEROPEN specifier, 7–16, 7–36 using preconnected files, 7–14 open system call example USEROPEN function (C), 7–39 using to open file, 7–37
OpenVMS Fortran and Compaq Fortran record types, A–25 options for VAX compatibility (f90), 3–74 porting code, A–20 to A–24 porting data, A–24
Operations mixed real/complex, 5–53
Operators
See also Language Reference Manual arithmetic for efficient run-time performance,
5–44
Optimization, 5–45 to 5–66 additional global, 5–55 and performance measurement, 5–51 automatic inlining, 5–57 code hoisting, 5–53 code replication to eliminate branches,
5–56 common subexpression elimination, 5–49 compile-time operations, 5–49 constant pooling, 5–47 controlling procedure inlining, 5–62 data flow and split lifetime analysis, 5–53 dead code, 5–47 dead store elimination (unused variables),
5–51
Optimization (cont’d) effect on compilation time, 5–45 debugging, 4–28 floating-point calculations, 3–14 for parallel HPF programs, 3–44 for specific Alpha processor generation,
3–70, 5–62 global, 5–46, 5–53 implied DO loop collapsing, 5–38, 5–48 inline expansion, 5–47 inlining procedures, 3–48, 5–58 instruction scheduling, 5–55, 5–56, 5–57,
5–58 interprocedure analysis, 5–57 level summary of options for controlling,
3–56 to 3–58 limiting loop unrolling, 3–72, 5–61 linker, 3–58 local, 5–46, 5–48 loop blocking, 3–57, 3–70, 5–60 loop distribution, 3–57, 3–70, 5–60 loop fusion, 3–57, 3–70, 5–61 loop interchange, 3–57, 3–70, 5–61 loop outer loop unrolling, 3–57, 3–70 loops, 3–57, 3–60, 3–72 loop scalar replacement, 3–57, 3–70 loop transformation, 3–57, 3–70, 5–60 loop unrolling, 5–55 math library use, 3–52 mixed real/complex operations, 5–53 multiplication and division expansion,
5–49 of loops, 5–55 to 5–62 of multiple source files effect of -c option, 2–9 of statement functions and intrinsics,
5–47 options for summary, 5–5 outer loop unrolling, 5–61 overview of levels, 5–46 register use, 5–51 removal optimizations, 5–50
Index–37
Optimization (cont’d) reordering floating-point operations, 5–64 scalar replacement, 5–61 setting options with -fast , 3–29 software pipelining, 3–57, 3–60, 5–58 source code guidelines for (check list),
5–21 to 5–45 speculative execution, 3–65 summary of levels, 5–46 summary of -O options, 5–46 to reduce program size (space optimizations), 5–47
-tune option, 5–62, 5–63 using correct options with multiple input files, 2–9, 2–10 using dummy aliases, 5–65 value propagation, 5–50
-1 option, 3–28
-66 option, 3–28
OPTIONS statement, 2–20, 3–1
See also Language Reference Manual specifying unformatted file floating-point format, 10–12
ORDERED clause for DO directive, 6–27
ORDERED directive, 6–6, 6–27
ORDERED option for PDO directive, 6–39
Order of subscript progression in I/O, 5–38 or function, 12–13
ORGANIZATION specifier, 7–7, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual
Orphaned directives, 6–9
OtsGetMaxThreads library routine, D–14
_OtsGetMaxThreads library routine, D–14
OtsGetNumThreads library routine, D–15
_OtsGetNumThreads library routine, D–15
OtsGetThreadNum library routine, D–16
_OtsGetThreadNum library routine, D–16
OtsInitParallel library routine, D–16
_OtsInitParallel library routine, D–16
OtsInParallel library routine, D–17
_OtsInParallel library routine, D–17
_OtsSetNumThreads library routine, D–17
OtsStopWorkers library routine, D–17
_OtsStopWorkers library routine, D–17
Outer loop unrolling, 5–61
Output files changing output file names ( f90 ), 2–11 created by f90 , 2–8 naming ( f90 ), 2–8
Output listing, 2–18, C–1 to C–9 compilation-summary section, C–5 machine-code section, C–2 to C–5 options for, 3–45, 3–64, 3–73
Overflow, 14–1
Overhead record, 7–12
Overriding implicit synchronization, 6–40
P
-p0 option, 3–60
-p1 and -p option, 3–60
Padding source records, 3–59
PAD specifier, 7–17
See also Language Reference Manual
-pad_source option, 3–59
Page fault and temporary storage, 5–38
Parallel compiler directives
ATOMIC, 6–5, 6–23
BARRIER, 6–5, 6–24, 6–31, 6–42 binding rules checking, 3–20
CHUNK, 6–31, 6–43
COPYIN, 6–31
CRITICAL, 6–5, 6–25, 6–47, 6–52
CRITICAL SECTION, 6–31, 6–42
DO, 6–6, 6–19, 6–46
DOACROSS, 6–32, 6–41
END CRITICAL, 6–5, 6–25
END CRITICAL SECTION, 6–31, 6–42
END DO, 6–6, 6–19
END MASTER, 6–6, 6–26
END ORDERED, 6–6, 6–27
END PARALLEL, 6–7, 6–9, 6–17, 6–32
END PARALLEL DO, 6–7, 6–22, 6–41
Index–38
Parallel compiler directives (cont’d)
END PARALLEL SECTIONS, 6–7, 6–22,
6–33, 6–41
END PDO, 6–33, 6–39
END PSECTIONS, 6–34, 6–40
END SECTIONS, 6–8, 6–20
END SINGLE, 6–8
END SINGLE PROCESS, 6–34, 6–40
FLUSH, 6–6, 6–26
INSTANCE, 6–32
INSTANCE PARALLEL, 6–32, 6–35,
6–36
INSTANCE SINGLE, 6–32
MASTER, 6–6, 6–26
MP_SCHEDTYPE, 6–32, 6–43
ORDERED, 6–6, 6–27
PARALLEL, 6–7, 6–9, 6–17, 6–32, 6–46
PARALLEL DO, 6–7, 6–22, 6–32, 6–41
PARALLEL SECTIONS, 6–7, 6–22, 6–33,
6–41
PDO, 6–33, 6–39
PDONE, 6–33, 6–44
PSECTIONS, 6–34, 6–40
SECTION, 6–8, 6–20, 6–34, 6–40
SECTIONS, 6–8, 6–20
SINGLE, 6–8, 6–21
SINGLE PROCESS, 6–34, 6–40 summary descriptions, 6–5 to 6–8
TASKCOMMON, 6–34, 6–35, 6–36
THREADPRIVATE, 6–8, 6–10, 6–11,
6–12
Parallel construct, 6–9
PARALLEL directive, 6–7, 6–9, 6–17, 6–32,
6–46
COPYIN clause, 6–11
COPYIN option, 6–36
DEFAULT clause, 6–11, 6–12
DEFAULT option, 6–37
FIRSTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
FIRSTPRIVATE option, 6–37
IF clause, 6–18
LOCAL option, 6–37
PRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–12
PRIVATE option, 6–37
REDUCTION clause, 6–11, 6–14 to 6–16
PARALLEL directive (cont’d)
SHARED clause, 6–11, 6–16
SHARED option, 6–38
PARALLEL DO directive, 6–7, 6–22, 6–32,
6–41
COPYIN clause, 6–11
COPYIN option, 6–36
DEFAULT clause, 6–11, 6–12
FIRSTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
FIRSTPRIVATE option, 6–37
LASTLOCAL option, 6–37
LASTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
LOCAL option, 6–37
PRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–12
PRIVATE option, 6–37
REDUCTION clause, 6–11, 6–14 to 6–16
REDUCTION option, 6–37
SHARED clause, 6–11, 6–16
SHARED option, 6–38
Parallel execution directives, 3–54, 3–59, 6–1 to 6–70 for multiple compile units, 3–43
KAP for Compaq Fortran, 5–3 options for HPF programs, 3–42 to 3–46 requesting directed decomposition, 3–54,
3–59 thread model, 6–9, 6–34 using directed decomposition, 6–1 to 6–70
Parallel HPF and Non-Parallel HPF Code, calling between, 11–44
Parallel library routines, D–1 to D–17
OpenMP Fortran API run-time, D–1 reference page listing, 12–13
_Ots and mpc_ threads routines, D–12
Parallel processing thread model, 6–9
Parallel programming environment, 6–1 to
6–70
Parallel region, 6–10, 6–17, 6–38
Parallel regions debugging, 6–60
Parallel run-time library routines, D–1 to D–17
Index–39
PARALLEL SECTIONS directive, 6–7, 6–22,
6–33, 6–41
COPYIN clause, 6–11
COPYIN option, 6–36
DEFAULT clause, 6–11, 6–12
FIRSTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
FIRSTPRIVATE option, 6–37
LASTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
LOCAL option, 6–37
PRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–12
PRIVATE option, 6–37
REDUCTION clause, 6–11, 6–14 to 6–16
SHARED clause, 6–11, 6–16
Parallel threads routines, D–12
PARAMETER statements, alternative syntax for, 3–55
Parentheses in expressions maximum allowed, 2–18
Pathname absolute, 7–19 application of defaults, 7–19 to 7–23 directory, 7–19 effect of DEFAULTFILE specifier, 7–19
I/O statements default use, 7–14 to 7–24 in I/O statements, 7–18 to 7–23
OPEN statement specifiers, 7–15, 7–19 relative, 7–19 setting environment variables for, 7–23 tilde character ( ~ ), 7–19, 7–21
PDO directive, 6–33, 6–39
BLOCKED option, 6–42
CHUNK option, 6–42
FIRSTPRIVATE option, 6–37
LASTLOCAL option, 6–37
LOCAL option, 6–37
MP_SCHEDTYPE option, 6–43
ORDERED option, 6–39
PRIVATE option, 6–37
REDUCTION option, 6–37
PDONE directive, 6–33, 6–44
Performance, 5–1 to 5–66 arithmetic operators and run-time performance, 5–44 array use efficiency, 5–31, 5–37
-assume dummy_aliases option, 5–65
Performance (cont’d) checking for unaligned data, 5–24 process limits, 1–2, 5–11 choosing optimal record type, 5–41 compilation, 1–2, 5–11 compilation times and optimization levels,
5–45 controlling procedure inlining, 5–62 cord and feedback files, 5–19 data alignment efficiency, 5–21 to 5–29 data types and run-time performance,
5–43, 5–44
DO loop coding and run-time performance,
5–45 effect of formatted files on run-time performance, 5–37 equivalence and run-time performance,
5–45 feedback files, 5–19
-fp_reorder option, 5–64 internal subprograms and run-time performance, 5–45 limiting loop unrolling, 5–61 measuring optimized programs, 5–51 using shell commands, 5–12 mixed data type operations and run-time performance, 5–43 nonshared object optimizations, 3–58,
5–63
OPEN statement specifiers for efficient
I/O, 5–39 to 5–41 optimization for Alpha processor generation, 3–70, 5–62 optimization levels, 5–45 to 5–61 options controlling alignment, 3–6 dummy aliases, 3–13 floating-point calculations, 3–14 parallel execution, 3–42, 3–54,
3–59 for run-time efficiency, 5–5 nonshared object optimizations, 3–58 related to
Index–40
Performance options related to (cont’d) math library use, 3–52 profiling, 3–60 related to profiling, 3–60 that improve performance, 5–5 that slow performance, 5–9 profiling code, 5–14 to 5–20 basic block sampling, 5–17 call graph information, 5–16
PC sampling, 5–15 source line sampling, 5–18 realistic measurements, 5–51 record I/O buffers, 5–39 redirecting scrolled output and run-time performance, 5–12 reordering floating-point operations, 5–64 run-time, 5–1 to 5–66
I/O efficiency, 5–36 to 5–42 source code guidelines for run-time efficiency, 5–21 to 5–45 statement functions and run-time performance, 5–45 timing using routines, 5–14, 12–6, 12–7 using shell commands, 5–12 perror library routine, 8–10, 12–14
-pg option, 3–60
Physical record, 7–46 physical_to_abstract library routine,
12–17
-pipeline option, 3–60 pixie command, 1–13 for basic block sampling, 5–17 for source line sampling, 5–18 related use with f90 options, 3–60 f90 , 5–14 to 5–20 use with feedback files, 5–19
-pixie option with prof command, 5–18
Platform labels, xxviii
Pointers
See also Language Reference Manual
C language, 11–39
Pointers (cont’d) effect of explicit interface, 11–9 passed between Compaq Fortran and C,
11–39 passing as arguments, 11–9 passing between C and Compaq Fortran,
11–40 use with Compaq Fortran 77, A–34
-p option, 3–60
-P option (cpp), 3–25
POSITION specifier, 7–16, 7–32
See also Language Reference Manual
Preconnected files
OPEN statement, 7–14
Prefetch instructions, 5–55
Prefixes
Compaq Fortran parallel directives, 6–30
OpenMP conditional compilation fixed source form, 6–4 free source form, 6–5
OpenMP directives, 6–3
Preprocessor
See also cpp preprocessor
See also fpp preprocessor
See also KAP preprocessor improving run-time performance, 5–3
Preprocessor symbols defining, 3–26 undefining, 3–72 printenv command (shell) viewing environment variables, B–1
PRINT statement, 7–3
See also Language Reference Manual
PRIVATE clause for DO directive, 6–11, 6–12 for PARALLEL directive, 6–11, 6–12 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–11, 6–12 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–11, 6–12 for SECTIONS directive, 6–11, 6–12 for SINGLE directive, 6–11, 6–12 using to resolve dependences, 6–47
Index–41
PRIVATE option for PARALLEL directive, 6–37 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–37 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–37 for PDO directive, 6–37 for PSECTIONS directive, 6–37 for SINGLE PROCESS directive, 6–37
Privatizing named common blocks, 6–10,
6–35
Procedure types of subprograms, 11–3
Procedure interface
See also Language Reference Manual argument passing rules, 11–5 array arguments, 11–8 changing default passing mechanisms,
11–12, 11–14
C language main program
-nofor_main option, 3–55
Compaq Fortran 77 and Compaq Fortran passing arguments, A–33 to A–38
Compaq Fortran and C, 11–10 to 11–22,
11–23 to 11–44
Compaq Fortran descriptor format, 11–10
Compaq Fortran subprograms, 11–1 to
11–14 explicit, 11–3 implicit, 11–3 module, 11–2 modules, 11–4 pointer arguments, 11–9 procedure interface block, 11–2, 11–4 types of subprograms, 11–3
Procedures
See also Language Reference Manual analyzing performance, 5–14 inlining, 3–48, 5–45, 5–48, 5–57, 5–62 compiling multiple files, 5–5 use in debugging, 4–23
Process control library routines, 12–5 to 12–15
Process information returning (library routine), 12–10
Process limits checking, 5–11 increasing file descriptor limit, 1–2 increasing stack size, 1–2 prof command, 1–13 for basic block sampling, 5–17 for PC sampling, 5–15 for source line sampling, 5–18 options to limit report contents, 5–15 related use with f90 options, 3–60 f90 , 5–14 to 5–20 use with feedback files, 5–19
PROFDIR environment variable, 5–15
Profiling code basic block sampling, 5–17 call graph information, 5–16
Compaq Tru64 UNIX tools, 1–13 options related to, 3–60
PC sampling, 5–15 source line sampling, 5–18 timing program execution with using routines, 5–14, 12–7 using shell commands, 5–12 f90 , 5–14 to 5–20
Program
See also Executable programs compiling, 1–1, 1–5, 1–7, 2–1 parallel execution
KAP preprocessor, 5–3 running, 1–8 section, 5–55 size related HPF command-line options,
3–42 dividing large source programs
( fsplit ), 1–14 effect of -call_shared option ,
3–17 effect of optimization levels, 5–45 insufficient virtual memory run-time error, 8–20 limitations, 2–18 process stack size, 1–2 space optimizations, 5–47 terminating (library routine), 12–5
Index–42
Program (cont’d) threaded execution related command-line options, 3–63,
3–70 transportability
See Compatibility units creating modules for, 11–3
Program counter sampling, 5–14
PROGRAM statement, 1–5, 11–1
See also Language Reference Manual
Program transportability, A–1 to A–28
PSECTIONS directive, 6–34, 6–40
FIRSTPRIVATE option, 6–37
LOCAL option, 6–37
PRIVATE option, 6–37
-pthread option, 3–70 putc library routine, 12–14
Q
qsort library routine, 12–14, 12–22
Quotation mark character
See Language Reference Manual effect of -vms option, 3–75
R
-r16 option, 3–62
-r8 option, 3–62 rand library routine, 12–14 random library routine, 12–14
Random number generation (Compaq
Extended Math Library), 13–2
Random number generator library routines for, 12–10, 12–14
RAN function
See Language Reference Manual; Intrinsic
Ranges procedures for complex constants, 9–3 for integer constants, 9–2 for logical constants, 9–2 for real constants, 9–3
Rank, 11–7 ranlib command, 1–14 rcp command use in porting OpenVMS Fortran data,
A–26
Reading deleted records effect of -vms option, 3–76
READONLY specifier, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual
READ statement, 7–3
See also Language Reference Manual
ADVANCE specifier, 7–33 deleted records effect of -vms option, 3–76
Real data types, 9–8, 9–10 to 9–11
See also Language Reference Manual declarations and options, 3–61, 9–9 native IEEE representation, 9–9 to 9–11 ranges, 9–3, 9–10
VAX representation, A–28 to A–30
REAL declarations options to control size of, 3–62
REAL intrinsic function
See also Language Reference Manual options controlling size returned, 3–62
-real_size option, 3–61
RECL specifier, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual excluding overhead bytes, 7–12 option to specify units, 3–12 performance considerations, 5–41 specifying for fixed-length records, 7–10,
7–42 units for formatted files, 7–13 units for unformatted files, 7–13
Record logical, 7–45 physical, 7–46 record types, 7–9
Record access, 7–30
Record access mode direct, 7–30 limitations by file organization and record type, 7–31
Index–43
Record access mode (cont’d)
OPEN statement specifiers, 7–30 sequential, 7–30
Record I/O, 7–9 to 7–12
ADVANCE specifier, 7–33 advancing and nonadvancing, 7–33 amount of data transferred by I/O statements, 7–34 available I/O statements and forms, 7–6 buffers and disk I/O, 5–39 data transfer, 7–34
END specifier, 7–33
EOR specifier, 7–33 flush buffers (library routine), 12–7, 12–9 in internal files, 7–8 length effect on performance, 5–41 locking records, 7–31 maximum length, 7–12 overhead bytes, 7–12 performance, 5–39 position, 7–32 record types, 7–11 to 7–12 reposition file (library routine), 12–9
SIZE specifier, 7–33 statement specifiers, 7–29
Record length
INQUIRE statement, 7–25 maximum, 7–12
RECORD statement
See also Language Reference Manual and data alignment, 5–29 causes of unaligned data, 5–21
Record structures
See also Language Reference Manual accessing variables in the debugger, 4–18 alignment of, 5–29 memory diagrams of, 5–29 options controlling alignment, 3–8 order of data in, 5–28 storage of, 5–28
Record type available file organizations, 7–10 choosing for optimal run-time performance, 5–41
Record type (cont’d) converting nonnative data
See also Language Reference Manual
OPEN statement defaults, 10–13 declaring
See Language Reference Manual fixed-length, 7–10, 7–42 general description, 7–9 importance of specifying in OPEN statement, 7–30 limitations on access modes, 7–31 maximum record length, 7–12
OpenVMS Fortran portability considerations, A–25 overhead, 7–12 portability considerations, 7–10, 7–11 porting data with OpenVMS systems,
A–25 segmented, 7–10, 7–45 stream, 7–10, 7–47 differences with OpenVMS systems,
A–22 stream_CR, 7–10, 7–47 stream_LF, 7–10, 7–47 variable-length, 7–10, 7–43
VAX FORTRAN portability considerations,
A–25
RECORDTYPE specifier, 7–11, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual
REC specifier, 7–29
See also Language Reference Manual
Recursion
See also Language Reference Manual options related to, 3–62
-recursive option, 3–62
Redirection, 5–42
REDUCTION clause for DO directive, 6–11, 6–14 to 6–16 for PARALLEL directive, 6–11, 6–14 to
6–16 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–11, 6–14 to 6–16 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–11, 6–14 to 6–16
Index–44
REDUCTION clause (cont’d) for SECTIONS directive, 6–11, 6–14 to
6–16
Reduction operators and intrinsics initialization values, 6–15
REDUCTION option for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–37 for PDO directive, 6–37
-reentrancy keyword option, 3–63
Reentrant program threaded execution, 3–63, 3–70
Reference pages and man command, 12–18 for 3f and 3hpf library routines, 12–18
References
See also Language Reference Manual;
EXTERNAL statement; USE statement unresolved (linker), 2–19
Region nested parallel, 6–19 parallel, 6–10
Register usage and listing of assembler code, C–5 array index, 5–52 display by debugger, 4–13 effect of optimization, 5–51 effect of VOLATILE statement, 5–53 holding variables, 5–52 option to create assembler file, 3–64 option to create assembler listing, 3–64
Relational operators
See also Language Reference Manual use in debugging, 4–23
Relative file access modes, 7–30 general description, 7–7 record types for, 7–30 specifying
See OPEN statement; Language
Reference Manual importance of OPEN statement specifiers, 7–30 specifying RECL when creating, 7–7
Relative organization, 7–7
Relative pathname, 7–19
Release notes displaying, xxvii
Removal optimizations, 5–50 to 5–51 rename library routine, 12–14
Replication code, 6–49
RESHAPE intrinsic procedure, 11–42
Resolving dependences loop-carried, 6–48 manually, 6–47 using temporary variables, 6–47
Restructuring a loop, 6–51
Return values
See also Error handling; Function return from values f90 command to shell, 2–15 from Run-Time Library to shell, 8–6
REWIND statement, 7–3, 7–32
See also Language Reference Manual
REWRITE statement, 7–4
See also Language Reference Manual
Rounding modes floating-point calculations, 3–38
Row-major order, 5–32 rshift library routine, 12–14
Run-Time Library (RTL)
See also Library routines and implied-DO loop collapsing, 5–38,
5–48 error processing performed by, 8–1 to
8–32 message catalog location, 8–5 requesting threaded execution, 3–63,
3–70 transporting message file, 8–5 use from C programs (routines), 12–8 using latest version for run-time efficiency, 5–2 values returned to shell, 8–6
Run-time parallel environment adjusting, 6–56
Index–45
RUNTIME schedule type, 6–28, 6–44
S
Scalar replacement, 5–61
SCHEDULE clause balancing the workload, 6–55 for DO directive, 6–27
Schedule types, 6–27, 6–43
DYNAMIC, 6–28, 6–43, 6–44
GSS, 6–44
GUIDED, 6–28, 6–43, 6–44
INTERLEAVED, 6–43, 6–44
RUNTIME, 6–28, 6–44
SIMPLE, 6–43 specifying a default, 6–43
STATIC, 6–27, 6–43, 6–44
Scheduling instruction, 5–53
Scratch file, 7–9
See also Language Reference Manual
SCRATCH specifier
See Language Reference Manual
SCRATCH value for STATUS specifier, 7–9
Searching for include files, 3–47
SECTION directive, 6–8, 6–20, 6–34, 6–40
SECTIONS directive, 6–8, 6–20
FIRSTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
LASTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
PRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–12
REDUCTION clause, 6–11, 6–14 to 6–16
Segmented records, 7–10, 7–45 to 7–46
OpenVMS Fortran data compatibility,
A–25 portability considerations, 7–10, 7–11
SEQUENCE statement
See also Language Reference Manual derived-type data order, 5–22, 11–38
Sequential access mode, 7–30 optimal record types, 5–41
Sequential file access modes, 7–30 general description, 7–7 record types for, 7–30
Sequential file (cont’d) specifying
See also OPEN statement; Language
Reference Manual importance of OPEN statement specifiers, 7–30
Sequential organization, 7–7 setenv command, B–2 setenv command
See also Environment variables setenv library routine example, 11–33
SHARED clause for PARALLEL directive, 6–11, 6–16 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–11, 6–16 for PARALLEL SECTIONS directive,
6–11, 6–16
Shared library creating, 2–25 to 2–28 file name suffix, 2–25 required options, 2–25 restrictions, 2–27 using f90, 2–26 using using f90 f90
, 2–25 and installing, 2–28 ld , 2–25, 2–26 linker searching options, 3–17, 3–18,
3–50 to 3–51 list searched by f90 command, 2–21 obtaining information about, 1–13 options for creating, 2–25, 3–18 recognized file name suffix, 2–3 requirements for symbol reference, 2–25 restrictions creating, 2–27 sharing common blocks across processes,
12–14 specifying with f90, 2–21 to 2–25
Shared memory access
See also VOLATILE statement granularity, 3–41 library routines (3f), 12–4 requesting threaded program execution,
3–63, 3–70
Index–46
Shared object library, 2–24
-shared option, 2–24, 3–18 creating shared libraries, 2–25, 2–26
SHARED option for PARALLEL directive, 6–38 for PARALLEL DO directive, 6–38
SHARED specifier, 7–16, 7–31
See also Language Reference Manual
Shared variables debugging, 6–63
Sharing files
OPEN statement, 7–31 shcom_connect library routine, 12–14,
12–20
Shell return values at program termination,
8–6 return values from f90
Shell command execution command, 2–15 library routine for, 12–15 short library routine, 12–14
-show code option, 3–64
-show hpfinfo option, 3–45
-show hpf option, 3–45, 3–64
-show hpf_all option, 3–45
-show include option, 3–64
-show map option, 3–64
-show wsfinfo option
See -show hpfinfo option signal library routine, 8–11, 12–14
Signal processing routines (Compaq
Extended Math Library), 13–2
Signals and error handling, 8–11 arithmetic exception handling, 3–33 caught by Compaq Fortran RTL, 8–11 debugger ignore command, 4–25 definition of, 8–11 floating-point exception options and routines, 3–33 handling in debugger, 4–25, 4–26 library routines for, 12–11, 12–14
SIGFPE, 8–11
SIGILL, 8–11, 8–27
SIGINT, 8–11, 8–24
Signals (cont’d)
SIGIOT, 8–11
SIGQUIT, 8–11, 8–25
SIGSEGV, 8–11
SIGTERM, 8–11
SIGTRAP, 8–11, 8–26, 8–27 summary of floating-point underflow options, 3–22 summary of integer overflow options,
3–21 value returned to the shell at program stop, 8–6
SIMPLE schedule type, 6–43
SINGLE directive, 6–8, 6–21
FIRSTPRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–13
PRIVATE clause, 6–11, 6–12
SINGLE PROCESS directive, 6–34, 6–40
FIRSTPRIVATE option, 6–37
LOCAL option, 6–37
PRIVATE option, 6–37
SIZE specifier, 7–33
See also Language Reference Manual sleep library routine, 12–15
SNGL intrinsic function
See also Language Reference Manual options controlling size returned, 3–62
Software pipelining, 3–57, 5–47, 5–58, 5–61
-S option, 3–64
Sorting (Compaq Extended Math Library),
13–2
Source code case control options for, 3–54 coding restrictions, 2–17 columns
See Language Reference Manual include files, 2–6 limits, 2–17 listing, 2–18 directives to specify title and subtitle,
2–21 module files, 2–5 names case sensitivity, 3–54 recognized file name suffixes, 2–2
Index–47
Source code (cont’d) source form and file name suffix, 2–2
Source code listing, 2–12, C–1 to C–9 defaults and applicable options, 3–73 general description, C–1 to C–2 options for, 3–45, 3–64, 3–65, 3–73, C–1 output listing section, C–1 to C–2
Source comments options for, 3–27
Source files analyzing source code using Compaq
Tru64 UNIX tools, 1–13 building using Compaq Tru64 UNIX tools,
1–13 creating and revising, 1–5, 1–7 managing using Compaq Tru64 UNIX tools, 1–13
Source form
See also Language Reference Manual and file name suffix, 1–3 recognized file name suffixes, 2–2
Source format options for specifying, 3–31
Source line CPU cycle use, 5–15
Source lines coding restrictions, 2–17 form-feed effect on listing file, 3–73 option controlling maximum length (fixed form), 3–28
Source records option controlling padding, 3–59
-source_listing option, 3–65
Space optimization, 5–47
Sparse linear system routines (Compaq
Extended Math Library), 13–2
Specifier options (Fortran 90)
See I/O statements; Language Reference
Manual
Specifying chunk size, 6–27 to 6–28, 6–42 default chunk size, 6–43 default schedule type, 6–43 schedule type, 6–27 to 6–28, 6–43
-speculate option, 3–65, 5–63
Split lifetime analysis, 5–53
Square root and floating-point conversion extension, 3–11 srand library routine, 12–15
Stack increasing size per process, 1–2 space, 6–58
Stack trace disable output of, B–5 information, 8–3
Standard I/O file
I/O statements default use, 7–14
Standard input file reading from a redirected, 5–42
Standards
ANSI FORTRAN-77 and FORTRAN 66,
1–15
Fortran 90, 1–15
Fortran 95, 1–15
Fortran 95/90 checking, 3–66
High Performance Fortran language,
1–15
OpenMP, 1–15
Statement functions
See also Language Reference Manual in data flow analysis, 5–47 inline expansion of, 3–48, 5–47 use for efficient run-time performance,
5–45
Statement labels
See Language Reference Manual; Labels;
Source code
Static extent, 6–9
-static option, 3–17
STATIC schedule type, 6–27, 6–43, 6–44 stat library routine, 12–15
STATUS specifier, 7–2, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual
-std90 option, 3–68
-std95 option, 3–68
STDCALL keyword, 11–16
Index–48
stderr , 7–2, 7–14 stdin default logical unit number, 7–2, 7–14 default use with I/O statements, 7–24
-std option, 3–29, 3–66, 3–67 stdout default logical unit number, 7–2, 7–14 default use with I/O statements, 7–24
Storage order natural ascending, 5–32 unnatural, 5–38
Stream records, 7–10, 7–47 differences with OpenVMS Fortran, A–22
OpenVMS data compatibility, A–25
Stream_CR records, 7–10, 7–47 to 7–48
OpenVMS data compatibility, A–25 portability considerations, 7–11
Stream_LF records, 7–10, 7–47 to 7–48
OpenVMS data compatibility, A–25 portability considerations, 7–11 use for optimal performance, 5–41
Strength reduction, 5–53 strings command, 1–13 strip command, 1–14, 4–3
Structures
See also Language Reference Manual;
Record structures nesting limit, 2–18
STRUCTURE statement
See also Language Reference Manual causes of unaligned data, 5–21
Subprogram
See also Language Reference Manual;
Procedure interface arguments, 11–1, A–34
See also Language Reference Manual
C and Fortran, 11–16, 11–23 definition of, 11–1 external, 11–4 case-sensitive names, 3–54 inlining, 3–48, 5–45, 5–57, 5–62 compiling multiple files, 5–5 internal (host association), 11–3 module (use association), 11–3 references
Subprogram references (cont’d) case-sensitive names, 3–54 requiring a procedure interface block for explicit interface, 11–4
Subrecord, 7–44
Subroutine
See also Language Reference Manual alternate entry points, 4–28 declaration statements, 11–2
Subroutine calls
See also Library routines between Compaq Fortran and C, 11–29 in data flow and split lifetime analysis,
5–54
SUBROUTINE statement, 11–2
See also Language Reference Manual
Suffix file name, 2–2 to 2–3
SUM intrinsic, 1–7
Summary descriptions
Compaq Fortran parallel directives, 6–31 to 6–34 compiler options by function, 3–2 to 3–6
3f library routines, 12–2 to 12–15 language compatibility, A–1 to A–4
OpenMP directives, 6–5 to 6–8
Symbolic names
See also Language Reference Manual maximum length, 2–18
Symbol table created by compiler, 1–11, 3–40, 4–3 defaults and applicable options, 3–40 options for, 3–40, 4–2 symlnk library routine, 12–15
Synchronization defined, 6–10 overriding, 6–40
Synchronization constructs
Compaq Fortran parallel, 6–41 to 6–42 defined, 6–10
OpenMP, 6–23 to 6–27
Index–49
-synchronous_exceptions option, 3–69,
4–25, 4–26
-syntax_only option, 3–69
System error codes, 8–10 information library routines for, 12–9
System calls
Fortran jacket routine, 12–1
Fortran jacket routines, 12–4 using to open file, 7–36 system library routine, 12–15
System time returning (library routine), 12–5, 12–7,
12–10, 12–11
T
TASKCOMMON directive, 6–34, 6–35, 6–36
-taso option, 3–76
Team of threads, 6–9
Temporary files created by f90 , 2–9 directory used by retaining with f90 , 2–9 f90 , 3–50
TMPDIR environment variable used by f90 , 2–9
Temporary variables using PRIVATE clause, 6–47
Terminating loop execution early, 6–44
Threaded program execution alignment requirements, 3–41 parallel processing, 6–9, 6–34 related command-line options, 3–41, 3–63 requesting, 3–63, 3–70
VOLATILE statement, 3–41
Thread model parallel processing, 6–9
THREADPRIVATE directive, 6–8, 6–10,
6–11, 6–12
-threads option, 3–70
Tilde character ( ~ ) in pathname, 7–21
Time returning (library routine), 12–5, 12–6,
12–7, 12–10, 12–11, 12–15 time library routine, 12–15
Timing program execution using routines, 5–14, 12–6, 12–7 using shell commands, 5–12
TMPDIR environment variable, B–4, B–7 use during compilation, 2–9, 3–50 use with scratch files, 7–9
TotalView, 6–65
Traceback information, 8–3
Tracepoint, 4–2
-transform_loops option, 3–70
Transportability
See Compatibility; Data, converting unformatted files ttynam library routine, 12–15
-tune host option effect of -fast option, 3–29
-tune option, 3–70, 5–62
Type schedule, 6–27
TYPE specifier, 7–16
See also Language Reference Manual
TYPE statement, 7–4
See also Language Reference Manual
U
UBOUND intrinsic, 1–7 umask library routine, 12–15
Unaligned data, 5–21
See also Alignment causes, 5–21 to 5–23 checking for, 5–24 compiler, 5–24 error messages compiler, 3–77 run-time, 5–24 using debugger to locate, 4–26
-U name option, 3–26, 3–72
Index–50
-U name option (cpp), 3–72
Underflow, 14–1
Unformatted data, 7–5 and DO loop collapsing, 5–48 and I/O statements, 7–6 and nonnative numeric formats, 10–3 efficient run-time performance, 5–37
Unformatted files converting nonnative data record type, 10–13 methods of specifying endian format,
10–8 obtaining numeric specifying format,
10–8 specifying format, 10–3 to 10–6 using command-line option to specify format, 3–22 using command-line option to specify
RECL units, 3–12 using -convert option to specify format,
10–13 using environment variable method to specify format, 10–9, 10–10 using OPEN Statement
CONVERT=keyword method to specify format, 10–11 using OPTIONS statement /CONVERT to specify format, 10–12
Unformatted I/O statements, 7–5
See also Language Reference Manual
UNIT specifier, 7–2, 7–16, 7–18
See also Language Reference Manual unlink library routine, 12–15
UNLOCK statement, 7–4
See also Language Reference Manual
Unnatural storage order, 5–38
Unresolved references, 2–19
-unroll num option, 3–72, 5–61 unset command, 7–24, B–2 unsetenv command, B–2
-U option, 3–72
User-defined (derived) type data causes of unaligned data, 5–21 options controlling alignment, 5–22, 5–29
USEROPEN function, 7–36 to 7–38 argument passing, 7–36 example calling program (Fortran 95/90),
7–40 example program (C), 7–39 file descriptor requirements, 7–38 for sockets, 7–18 routines available to open the file, 7–37,
7–38
USEROPEN specifier, 7–16, 7–36
See also Language Reference Manual
USE statement, 1–6, 11–2
See also Language Reference Manual
Utility routines (Compaq Extended Math
Library), 13–2
V
Value propagation, 5–50 to 5–51
Variable latch, 6–25
Variable format expression, 5–39
Variable-length records, 7–10, 7–43
OpenVMS data compatibility, A–25 portability considerations, 7–10 use for optimal performance, 5–41
Variables
See also Language Reference Manual accessing in debugger, 4–16 alignment, 3–6, 5–21 to 5–30 assigned but never used, 5–51
Fortran complex, 4–21 treatment as automatic or static related options, 3–17, 3–62 used before value assigned option controlling warning message,
3–78
Variables declared in other languages, accessing, 11–22
VAX FORTRAN
See Compaq Fortran 77; VAX systems
VAX systems
Compaq Fortran 77 (OpenVMS) extensions not supported, A–20 to
A–28
Index–51
VAX systems
Compaq Fortran 77 (OpenVMS) (cont’d) floating-point data comparison, A–27 floating-point data conversion guidelines, A–26 floating-point data representation,
A–28 porting floating-point data, A–24 converting data to IEEE formats, 10–1,
10–3 floating-point data
COMPLEX, A–30
COMPLEX*16, A–31 converting, 10–1, 10–3
D_float, A–30
F_float, A–28
G_float, A–29
H_float, A–32 representation, A–28 to A–32 options for Fortran compatibility (f90),
3–74
Vector mathematics (Compaq Extended Math
Library), 13–2
-version option, 3–74
Virtual memory allocating and freeing (library routine),
12–7
-vms option, 3–19, 3–74 to 3–76 effect on -align records , 5–29 effect on other options, 3–74
VMS systems
See also VAX systems; OpenVMS Fortran
VOLATILE statement
See also Language Reference Manual and data flow and split lifetime analysis,
5–53 and granularity, 3–41 and implied-DO loop collapsing, 5–38 for threaded applications, 3–41 use with %LOC, 11–13 when to use, 5–53
-v option, 3–74
-V option, 3–73 example, 2–10, 2–12
-VS linker option, 3–76
W
wait library routine, 12–15
-warn argument_checking option, 3–77
-warn declarations option, 3–78
-warn hpf option, 3–78
-warn ignore_loc option, 3–78
Warning messages about a variable declared but never used,
3–79 about questionable programming practices, 3–79 about statement functions never called,
3–79 alignment (compile-time), 3–77 alignment (run-time), 5–24 argument checking (compile-time), 3–77 arithmetic exception handling (run-time),
3–20, 3–33 floating-point underflow (run-time), 3–22,
3–33 format mismatches (run-time), 3–19 format truncation (run-time), 3–21 integer overflow (run-time), 3–21 language dialects (compile-time), 3–66 limiting (compile-time), 3–27, 3–77 nonprinting ASCII characters
(compile-time), 3–73 parallel compiler directives, binding rules,
3–20 raising severity (compile-time), 3–79 requesting additional (compile-time),
3–66, 3–77 standards checking (compile-time), 3–66 suppressing all (compile-time), 3–79 suppressing NONGRNACC, 3–78 undeclared variable use (compile-time),
3–78 variables used before value assigned
(compile-time), 3–78
-warning_severity option, 3–79
Index–52
-warn noalignments option, 3–77
-warn nogranularity option, 3–78
-warn nouncalled option, 3–79
-warn nouninitialized option, 3–78
-warn nounused option, 3–79
-warn nousage option, 3–79
-warn truncated_source option, 3–78
-warn uncalled option, 3–79
-warn unused option, 3–79
-warn usage option, 3–79
Watchpoint, 4–2
-what option, 3–74
-Wl,-xxx option, 3–76
-w option, 3–79
Worksharing constructs, 6–10
Compaq Fortran parallel, 6–38 to 6–40
OpenMP, 6–19 to 6–21
-Wp,-xxx option, 3–26
Write-hint instructions, 5–55
WRITE statement, 7–3
See also Language Reference Manual
ADVANCE specifier, 7–33
-wsf option, 3–42
X
xor function, 12–15
Z
Zero representation in Alpha floating-point data, 9–15
Zero-sized arrays, 3–44
ZEXT function, 11–13
See also Language Reference Manual
Index–53
Descargar
Enlace público actualizado
Se ha actualizado el enlace público a tu chat. Puedes ver y gestionar tus enlaces de chat después del registro aquí.
Enlace público del documento
Anuncio
